GREEK
GRAMMAR
William W. Goodwin
This public domain grammar was brought to digital life
by:
Textkit — Greek and Latin Learning tools
Find more grammars at http://www.textkit.com
GREEK GRAMMAR
BY
WILLIAM W. GOODWIN, How. LL.D. anp D.C.L.
ELIOT PROFESSOR OF GREEK LITERATURE IN
HARVARD UNIVERSITY
REVISED AND ENLARGED
BOSTON
PUBLISHED BY GINN & COMPANY
1900
ΟΟΡΥΠΒΊΙΘΗΤ, 1892,
By WILLIAM W. GOODWIN.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
Trpocrapay sr J. 8. Cusuine & Co., Boston.
Pressworr RY Ginn & Co., Boston.
PREFACE.
TRE present work is a revised and enlarged edition of
the Greek Grammar published in 1879, which was itself
a revised and cularged edition of the Elementary Greek
Grammar of only 235 pages published in 1870. I trust
that no one will infer from this repeated increase in the
size of the book that I attribute ever increasing importance
to the study of formal grammar in schoo]. On the con-
trary, the growth of the book has come from amore decided
opinion that the amount of grammar which should be learned
by rote is execedingly small compared with that whieh
every real student of the Classics must learn in a very dif-
ferent way. When it was thought that a pupil must first
learn his Latin and Greek Grammars and then learn to
read Latin and Greek, it was essential to reduce a sehool
grammar to its least possible dimensions. Now when a
more sensible system leaves most of the details of grammar
to be learned by the study of special points which arise in
reading or writing, the case is entirely different; and few
good teachers or good students are any longer grateful for
a small grammar, which must soon be discarded as the
horizon widens and new questions press for an answer,
‘rhe forms of a language and the essential principles of
its construction must be learned in the old-fashioned way,
when the memory is vigorous and retentive; but, these
once mastered, the true time to teach each principle of
grammar is the moment when the pupi] meets with it in
his studies, and uo grammar which 1s not thus practically
illustrated ever becomes a living reality to the student.
But it is not enough for a learner merely to meet each con-
struetion or form in isolated instances; for he may do this
repeatedly, and yet know little of the general priuciple
which the single example partially illustrates. Men saw
apples fall and the moon and planets roll ages before the
principle of gravitation wus thought of. It is necessary,
iii
iv PREFACE.
therefore, not merely to bring the pupil face to face with
the facts of a language by means of examples carefully
selected to exhibit them, but also to refer him to a state-
ment of the general principles which show the full mean-
ing of the facts and their relation to other principles! In
other words, systematic practice in reading and writing
must be supplemented from the beginning by equally sys-
tematic reference to the grammar. Mechanics are not
learned by merely observing the working of levers and pul-
leys, nor is chemistry by watching experiments on gases;
although no one would undertake to teach either without
such practical illustrations. 1t must always be remem-
bered that grammatical study of this kind is an essential
part of classical study; and no one must be deluded by
the idea that if grammar is not learned by rote it is not
to be learned at all. It cannot be too strongly emphasized,
that there has been no change of opinion among classical
scholars about the importance of grammar as a basis of all
sound classical scholarship; the only change concerns the
time and manner of studying graminar and the inportance
to be given to different parts of the subject.
What has been said about teaching by reference and by
example applies especially to syntax, the chief principles
of which have always seemed to me more profitable for
a pupil in the earlier years of his classical studies than the
details of vowel-changes and exceptional forms which are
often thonght more seasonable. ‘The study of Greek syn-
tax, properly pursued, gives the pupil an insight into the
processes of thought and the manner of expression of a
highly cultivated people; and while it stimulatcs his own
powers of thought, it teaches him habits of more careful
expression by making him familiar with many forms of
statement more precise than those to which he is accus-
tomed in his own language. The Greek syntax, as it was
developed and refined by the Athenians, is a most impor-
tant chapter in the history of thought, and even those
whose classical studies are limited to the rudiments cannot
afford to neglect it entirely. Tor these reasons the chief
increase in the present work has been made in the depart-
ment of Syntax.
1 These objects seem to me to be admirably attained in the First
Lessons tn Greek, prepared by my colleague, Professor John W.
White, to be used in connection with this Grammar. <A new edition
of this work is now in press.
PREFACE. y
The additions made in Part J. are designed chiefly to
make the priuciples of inflection and formation in Parts
II. and III. intelligible. Beyond this it seems inexpedient
for a general grainmar to go. In Part II. the chief changes
are in the sections on the Verb, a great part of which have
been remodelled and rewritten. The paradigms and syn-
opses of the verb are given in a new form. The nine tense
systems are clearly distinguished in each synopsis, and also
in the paradigms so far as is consistent with a proper dis-
tinction of the three voices. The verbs in μὲ are now
inflected in close connection with those in w, and both con-
jugations are included in the subsequent treatment. The
now established Attic forms of the pluperfect active are
given in the paradigms. The old makeshift known as the
“connecting-vowel” has been discarded, and with no mis-
givings. Thirtecn years ago I wrote that I did not venture
“to make the first attempt at a popular statement of the
tense stems with the variable vowel attachment”; and I
was confirmed in this opinion by the appearance of the
Schulgrammatik of G. Curtius the year previous with the
“ Bindevocal” in its old position. Professor F. D. Allen
has since shown us that the forms of the verb can be
made perfectly intelligible without this time-honored fic-
tion. I have now adopted the familiar term “thematic
vowel,” in place of “variable vowel” which I used in 1879,
to designate the o or ε added to the verb stem to form the
present stem of verbs in w. I have attempted to make the
whole subject of tense stems and their inflection more clear
to beginners, and at the same time to lay the venerable
shade of the connecting-vowel, by the distinction of “sim-
ple and complex tense stems,” which correspond generally
to the two forms of inflection, the “simple” form (the pe
form) and the “common” form (that of verbs in w). See
557-565. I use the term “verb stem” for the stem from
whieh the chief tenses are formed, ze. the single stem in
the first class, the “strung” stem in the second class, and
the simple stem in the other classes (except the anomalous
eighth). Vart III. is little changed, except by additions.
In the Syntax I have attempted to introduce greater sim-
plicity with greater detail into the treatment of the Article,
the Adjectives, the Cases, and the Prepositions. In the
Syntax of the Verb, the changes made in my new edition
of the Greek Moods and Tenses have been adopted, 80 far
as is possible in a school-book. The independent uses of
vi PREFACE,
the moods are given before the dependent constructions,
except in the case of wishes, where the independent opta-
tive can hardly be treated apart from the other construc-
tions. The Potential Optative and Indicative are made
more prominent as original constructions, instead of being
treated merely as elliptical apodoses. The independent use
of μή in Homer to express fear with a desire to avert the
object feared is recognized, and also the independent use
of μή and μὴ οὐ in cautious assertions and negations with
both subjunctive and indicative, which is common in Plato.
The treatment of dere is entirely new; and the distinction
between the infinitive with ὥστε μή and the indicative with
gore οὐ is explained. ‘The use of πρίν with the infinitive
and the finite moods is imore accurately stated. The
distinction between the Infinitive with the Article and its
simple constructions without the Article is more clearly
drawn, and the whole treatinent of the Infinitive is im-
proved. In the chapter on the Participle, the three classes
are carefully marked, and the two uses of the Supplemen-
tary Participle in and out of oratio obligua are distinguished.
In Part V. the principal additions are the sections on dac-
tylo-epitritic rhythins, with greater detail about other lyric
verses, and the use of two complete strophes of Pindar
to illustrate that poet’s two most common metres. The
Catalogue of Verbs has been carefully revised, and some-
what enlarged, especially in the Homeric forms.
The quantity of long a, 1, and v is marked in Parts I,
11., and 111., and wherever it is important in Part V., but
not in the Syntax. The examples in the Syntax and in
Part V. have been referred to their sourees. One of the
most radical changes is the use of 1691 new sections in
place of the former 302. References can now be made to
most paragraphs by a single nuinber; and although special
divisions are sometimes introduced to make the connection
of paragraphs clearer, these will not interfere with refer-
ences to the simple sections. The evil of a want of dis-
tinction between the main paragraphs and notes has been
obviated by prefixing N. to sections which would ordinarily
be marked as notes. I feel that a most humble apology is
due to all teachers and students who have submitted to the
unpardonable confusion of paragraphs, with their divisions,
subdivisions, notes, and remarks, often with (a), (δ), ete,
in the old editiou. This arrangement was thoughtlessly
adopted to preserve the numbering of sections in the Syntax
PREFACE. vil
of the previous edition, to which many references had already
been made; but this object was gained at far too great a
cost. I regret that I can make no better amends than this
to those who have suffered such an infliction. A complete
table of Parallel References is given in pp. xxvi.-xxxv,,
to make references to the former edition available for the
new sections.
I have introduced into the text a section (28) on the
probable ancient pronunciation of Greek, While the sounds
of most of the letters are well established, on many impor-
tant points our knowledge is still very unsatisfactory. With
our doubts about the sounds of 6, ¢, x, and ζ, of the double
«and ov, not to speak of é and y, and with our helplessness
in expressing anything like the ancient force of the three
accents or the full distinction of quantity, it is safe to say
that no one could now pronounce a sentence of Greek so
that it would have been intelligible to Demosthenes or
Plato. I therefore Jook upon the question of Greek Pro-
nunciation chiety as it concerns the ineaus of cominunication
between modern scholars and between teachers and pupils.
I see no prospect of uniformity here, unless at some future
time scholars agree to unite on the modern Greek pronun-
ciation, with all its objectionable features. As Athens be-
comes more and inore a centre of civilization and art, her
claim to decide the question of the pronunciation of her
ancient language may sometiine be too strong to resist. In
the meantime, I see no reason for changing the system of
pronunciation! which 1 have followed and advocated more
than thirty years, which adopts what is tolerably certain
and practicable in the ancient pronunciation and leaves the
rest to modern usage or to individual judgment. This has
brought scholars in the United States nearer to wiformity
than any other system without external authority is likely
to bring them. In England the retention of the English
1 By this the consonants are sounded as in 28,3, except that ¢ has the
sound of z; ξ and y have the sounds of z (ks) and ps; 6, ¢, and x those
of th in thin, ph in Philip, and hard German ch in machen. The vowels
are sounded as in 28,1, v being pronounced like French u or German
ὡς ‘The diphthongs follow 28,2; but ov always has the sound of ow in
youth, and εἰ that of et in height. J hold to this sound of εἰ to avoid
another change from English, German, and American usage. If any
change is desired, I should much prefer to adopt the sound of % (our é
in machine), which εἰ has held more than 1900 years, rather than to
atteropt to catch any one of the sounds through which cither genuine
or spurious εἰ must have passed on its way w this (see 28, 2).
viii PREFACE.
pronunciation of Greek with Latin accents has at least the
advantage of local uniformity.
Since the last edition was published, Allen’s new edition
of Hadley’s Grammar has appeared and put all scholars
under new obligations to both author and editor. The new
edition of Monro’s Homeric Grammar is of the greatest
value to all students of Homer. Blass’s new edition of the
first quarter of Ktihner is really ἃ new work, abounding in
valuable suggestions. From the German graminars of Koch
and Kaegi I have gained many practical hints. I am also
greatly indebted to many letters from teachers containing
criticisms of the last edition and suggestions for making it
more useful in schools, too many indeed to be acknowledged
singly by name. Among them is one from which I have de-
rived special help in the revision, a careful criticism of many
parts of the book by Professor G. F. Nicolassen of Clarks-
ville, Tennessee. Another of great value came to me with-
out signature or address, so that I have been unable even to
acknowledge it by letter. JI must ask all who have thus
favored me to accept this general expression of my thanks.
Professor Herbert Weir Smyth of Bryn Mawr has done me
the great service of reading the proofs of Parts I. and II.
and aiding me by his valuable suggestions. His special
knowledge of Greek morphology has been of the greatest
use to me in a departinent in which without his aid 1 should
often have been sorely perplexed amid conflicting views.
All scholars are looking for the appearance of Professor
Smyth’s elaborate work on the Greek Dialects, now print
ing at the Clarendon Press, with great interest and hope.
WILLIAM W. GOODWIN.
HARVARD UNIVERSITY,
CAMBRIDGE, Mass., June 30, 1892.
CONTENTS.
Spe
INTRODUCTION. — Tue απ Lancuace anp Diarecrs,
LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS.
aECTIONS
106-115.
116,
117-120,
121-129,
130-135.
136-139.
140-146.
147-149.
150.
PART I.
The Alphabet.....
Vowels and Diphthongs εν νι νυν νειν κεν cece eee eens
Breathings .......
Consonants and their Divisions ..........-....00.
Consonants ending
Greek Words. ........-.. 00005
Jonic and Athenian Alphabets .............. 0465
Ancient Pronunciation ..........66- Sea besweweits
Changes of Vowels
Collision of Vowels. —~— Hiatus .............. ΥΩ ;
Contraction of VowelS......-...ce see ee cece eens
Crasis. oo cci ice
Synizesis ......
Elision...........
Aphaeresis .......
Movable Consonants 0.0... 0.00. e cece e eee ees
Metathesis and Syncope ....... εν εν e cee eee eee ee
Doubling of Consonants ......... 0 cee ee eee ee eee
Kkuphonie Changes of Consonants ...........0.055
Syllables and their
DIVISION, s:4 noid bese eee Soha eh ce
Quaiitity Οὐ SyMablesi ςιλουν bid cee altale aes ete els
Genera] Principles of Accent...... 00.0 cece eee eee
Anastrophe ......
Accent of Contracted Sylables and Elided Words. .
Accent of Nouns and Adjectives..............046.
Accent of Verbs ..
Proclitics ........
Enelities ον νιν νιον
Dialectic Changes in Letters .... 0.00... eee eee 4
Punctuation-Marks
PAGES
3-6
ΒΈΟΤΙΟΝΒ
151-154.
155-163,
164-166,
161.
168-170.
171-182.
183-187.
188.
189-191.
192-195.
196-200.
201-208,
204.
205-208,
209-213.
214-218.
219-223.
224.
225.
226-240.
241-248.
249-262.
268-272.
273-279.
280-285.
286.
287-291.
292-297,
CONTENTS.
PART IT,
INFLECTION.
PaGEB
Definitions. — Intlection, Root, Stem, etc. ......... 34
Numbers, Genders, Cases.........eeeeeeeeeeceeee 94-36
NOUNS.
Three Declensions of Nouns ..........0-eeeeeceee 36
Case-endings of Nouns ........... waakesetdanses 36
FIRST DECLENSION.
Stems and ‘Terminations of First Declension....... 37
Paradigms of First Declension ............-....-. 37-40
Contract Nouns of First Declension............... 40
Dialects of First Declension...............eeeeee% 40, 41
SECOND DECLENSION.
Stems and Terminations of Second Declension..... 41, 42
Paradigms of Sccond Declension ................. 42
Attic Second Declension............. 0. cee cee eee 42, 43
Contract Nouns of Second Declension............. 43, 44
Dialects of Second Declension......... etic es αδένς 44
THIRD DECLENSION.
Stems and Casc-endings of Third Declension ...... 44
FORMATION OF CASES,
Nominative Singular of Third Declension.......... 45, 46
Accusative Singular of Third Declension .......... 46
Vocative Singular of Third Declension ....... νιν ον 47
Dative Plural of Third Declension ............0066 47
PARADIGMS OF THIRD DECLENSION,
Nouns with Mute or Liquid Stems..............6. 47-50
Nouns with Stems in Σ (chiefly contract).......... 50-52
Stems in Dor ΟἹ ον ccc cece cee ee ee eee ee eeee 52, 53
StEMS ἢ, POF ον κ λέν ἐν seston ae ges aiaeae aes 53-65
Stems ending in a Diphthong ..............-..04. 55, δ
Syncopated Nouns of Third Declension ........... 57, 68
Gender of Third Declension ........... 0 cee eee aes 58, 59
Dialects of Third Declension ............... detcvetes 59
Irregular Nouns. ............c0eeeeeee φυτῷ φόνος, 59-62
Endings -θι, -θεν, «δε, -σε, -φι, τφιν, CI... cee eens 62
SECTIONS
298-309.
310, 311.
312-317.
318-333.
334939,
340-342,
343-345.
840-849,
350-356.
357~360.
361~364.
365-368.
369~371.
372-374,
375-385.
386-388.
389-400.
401-403.
404, 405.
406408.
409-414.
415-420.
421428.
429-440.
443-454.
455-461.
462, 463.
464-468.
CONTENTS. xi
ADJECTIVES.
PaGEs
Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions.... 638, 64
Contract Adjectives in -eos and -o0s.......+..-0005 65, 66
Adjectives of the Third Declension .............6. 66, 67
First and Third Declensions combined ............ 67-69
Participles in των, τους, τᾶς, εἰς, οὕς, -WS....-...- 008s 10-72
Contract Participles in -awy, -εων, -owv, -aws......-. 72,73
Adjectives with One Ending ...........:eese eens 73
Irregular Adjectives: μέγας, πολύς, πρᾷος, οἷο... «οὖν 78, 74
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
Comparison by -repos, -TATOS .... sc cee eee eee e eee 74,75
Comparison by -iwr, -ἰστοῦ voce cece eet eee e ees 75, 76
Irregular Comparison ......... ccc eee ce er eevee 76,77
ADVERBS AND THEIR COMPARISON.
Adverbs formed from Adjectives, etc.............. 71, 78
Comparison of Adverbs........... cece cece eee eee 78
NUMERALS.
Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, and Nuuneral
AVGIDS τς cia 3 aio dataiene ai es neve ule nee wees 78-80
THE ARTICLE.
Declension of 6, 9, τό ccs cece ccc e eee tee eeees 81, 82
PRONOUNS.
Persona) aud Intensive Pronouns .........e.ee eee 82, 83
Reflexive Pronouns 2.0.0.0... κεν cece eee ee eee eens 84
Reciprocal Pronoun ....... 0.0. cece cece eee eee 84, 85
Possessive Pronouns 20.0.6... eee eee eee ee eee eee 85
Demonstrative Pronouns ...0 2... eee eee κεν eee 85, 86
Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns ..........-. 86, 87
Relative Pronouns 22.0.6. e cece cee κεν εν νειν κεν σνον 87, 88
Pronominal Adjectives and Adverbs ............65 38-90
VERBS.
Voices, Moods, ‘Tenses, Numbers, and Persons .... 90-92
Tense Systems and ‘Tense Stems...........6.0.005 92, 93
Principal Parts of a Greek Verb...........-..0005 93, 94
Conjugation. —Two Forms: Verbs in ὦ and Verbs
ID Besa δον Shoe Tha shi OAM oad Dee WEL oes
xii CONTENTS.
Senn CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN 9. en
469-473, Description of following Synopses ............-. 94, 95
474,475. Synopsis of λύω.... «νον νων νννν κεν cee ee eee ewes 96, 97
476,477. Synopsis of λείπω ....Ὁν νον ccc eee eee cee ees 98
478,479. Synopsis of galvw...... sine Sarda δον τὸν kad weavings 99
480, Inflection οὗ λύω vc. ces ee ον νον ween etre cen ν νον 100-104
481. Inflection of 2 Aor., Perf., and Plupert. of λείπω. 105
482, Inflection of ¢alyw (Liquid Forms) ....+0-+004+2- 106,107
483-485. Remarks on Verbs inw..... .....05 Megidereee a : 108
486-491. Perfect and Pluperfect Middle and Passive of "
Verbs with Consonant Steins .......... aah ites 108-111
492,493. Contract Verbs in aw, ew, and ow........ eee eee 112-114
494. Synopsis of ripdw, φιλέω, Snddw, Onpdw oo... eee 115
495-499. Remarks on Contract Verbs ....... Nels: tieidee iscecdra.s 115, 116
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN μι.
500-503. General Character of Verbs in u:.—Two Classes, 116
604, 505. Synopsis of ἴστημι, τίθημι, δίδωμι, and δείκνῦμι in
Present and Second Aorist Systems .......... 116, 117
506, Inflection of peculiar ‘Tenses of these Verbs..... 117-122
607, 508. Second Perfect and Pluperfect of the w:-form .... 123
609. Full Synopsis of these Verbs in Indicative....... 128, 124
AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. τ
610-512, Syllabic and Temporal Angment defined ........ 124, 125
613-519. Augment of Imperfect and Aorist Indicative..... 125
520-528. Reduplication of Perf., Pluperf., and Fut. Perf. .. 126, 127
529-533. Attic Reduplication .......... 0. cee eee eee eee 127, 128
634-536. Reduplicated Aorists and Presents..........0... 128
637-539, Syllabie Augment prefixed to a Vowel .......... 128, 129
640-546. Augment and Reduplication of Compound Verbs, 129, 130
647-550. Omission of Augment and Reduplication ........ 130, 131
ENDINGS.
δῦ]. Personal Endings ............ bears ietattven eisai 131
652, Personal Endings of Indic. ΜΉΝ “and Opt. sates Biss 131
563. Personal Endings of Imperative παρα τις oeeiat Craig 131
654,555. Endings of Infinitive, ete... ἐν ee κν κνενννων 132
556. Remarks on the Endings...........0.. cece eee 182, 188
TENSE 8TEMS AND FORMS OF INFLECTION.
657-560. Siinple and Coinplex Tense Stems .............- 183, 134
01; “Tense Suffixes ocicct-siveiins occas sie oe Seisiea ον ίος 134
562. Optative Suffix... 2.2... ce eee eee eee Mattes 134
663. Two Forms of Inflection of Verbs ...........005 134
664. The Simple Form ..........c cece ees sie havsteieses eyes 135
665. The Common Form ...........eeceeeeeeees ων... 135, 188
CONTENTS. ΧΗΣ
FORMATION AND INFLECTION OF TENSE SYSTEMS.
SECTIONS PaGEs
6668, General Statement ...... ΠΡΟ, atduis ἀπο 186
667. Formation of the Present Stem from the Verb
SUCH νοις νους νου δὸς ἐπ ρων 8 δρρρυ die Mets 196
668-622. Light Classes of Verbs ......... cece ee eee νον 136-143
623-633. Inflection of Present and Imperfect Indicative ... 143, 144
634-659. Modification of the Stein in certain Tense Systems, 145-149
660-717. Formation of Tense Stems, and Inflection of Tense
Systems in Indicative ........ 0... ee eee ee eee 149-158
FORMATION OF DEPENDENT MOODS AND PARTICIPLE.
718-729. Subjunctive ... 0. cee cee eee eee ee eee 159, 160
730-745, Optative............. ἀπολο τ χὴν sce ges ary buss μδνν ορυῖνεςς 160-163
746-758, Tmperative ...... νον νον ν κεν ce cece eee e ees 163-165
769-769. Infinitive... cc. cee ce eee cere eer eeeeees 165, 166
770-775, Participles ............ agen eat a etales seeeese 166, 167
776, Verbals in -ros and -reos 20... cc cece eee eee 167
DIALECTS,
111-188. Dialectic and Poetic Forms of Verbs inw ....... 167-170
784-786. Special Dialectic Forms of Contract Verbs ...... 170-172
787-792, Dialectic and Poetic Forms of Verbs in w......- 172,178
ENUMERATION AND CLASSIFICATION OF MI-rokmMs.
793-797, Enumeration of Presents in μὲ. ον νν νον ee eee 178, 174
798-803. Second Aorists of the weform εν ν εν 0. cece eee eee 175, 176
804. Second Perfcets and Pluperfects of ΠΡ ΜΟΙ μι 176, 177
805. Irregular Verbs of the weforin.. sc... cece eee : 177
806-821. Infleetion of εἰμί, εἶμι, ἴημι, φημί, ἡμαι, κεῖμαι, and
OO Ord ΤΥ tetion hia tinal eas eee 177-183
PART III.
FORMATION OF WORDS.
822. Simple and Compound Words......ceceeeeeeee 184
SIMPLE WORDS.
823-825. Primitives and Denominatives............0000% . 184,185
826-881. Suffixes ....... cece cece cece eee eer νένν σον 185
FORMATION OF NOUNS.
882-840. Primitives 0.0.0... ccc ccc cee eee eee ee eteeees . 186, 187
841-848. Denominatives ........... Sis stlenw cleieabe φόνον. 187, 188
xiv
BEOTIONS
849-858,
850, 860.
861-868.
869, 870.
871-877.
878-882.
883-889,
890-893.
894.
890.
896-898.
890-906.
907-910.
911-917.
918-926.
927-931.
932-934.
935-940,
941-968,
959-980.
981-984,
985-992.
993-997.
CONTENTS.
PaGEs
Formation of Adjectives ........ igi ve ease 5, ob 189, 190
Formation of Adverbs ..........cccececeees sins 190
Denominative Verbs ...........0c.eccceeccoucs 190, 191
COMPOUND WORDS.
Division of the Subject .........cce eee eee cee ees 191
First Part of Compound Word ................: 192, 198
Last Part of Compound Word............see0e. 193, 194
Meaning of Compounds ............eeceeeeeees 194, 195
PART IV.
SYNTAX.
Subject, Predicate, Object.......... cece eee eee 196
SUBJECT AND PREDICATE.
Subject Nominative of Finite Verb.............. 197
1. Subject Accusative of Infinitive .............. 107
2, 3. Subject of Infinitive omitted .............. 197
Subject Nom. omitted, Impersonal Verbs, etc. ... 197, 198
Subject Nominative and Verb ..............006- 198, 109
Predicate in same Case as Subject ...........-.- 199
APPOSITION.
Various Forins of Apposition ............ee008% 200, 201
ADJECTIVES.
Adjectives agreeing with Nouns ................ 201, 202
Adjectives belonging to omitted Subject of Infinitive, 202-204
Adjectives used as Nouns....... τ τεῦς eaten a Oe 204
THE ARTICLE.
Homeric Use of the Article (as Pronoun)........ 204-206
Attic Use of the Article (as Definite Article) .... 200-208
Position of the Article. .... 0... ee eee eee eee 208-212
Pronominal Article in Attic (ὁ μέν... 6 δέ, etc.).. 212
PRONOUNS.
Personal and Intensive Pronouns...........+06 213, 214
Reflexive Pronouns «Ὁ «ον ον ον cee veer eect neces 214, 215
BEOTIONS
998-1003.
1004-1010,
1011-1014.
1015-1018.
1019-1025.
1026-1030.
1081-1038.
1039.
1040-1041.
1042.
1043.
1044.
1045.
1046.
1047-1050.
1051-1057.
1058, 1059,
1060, 106].
1062-1064.
1068.
1066-1068.
1069-1072.
1073-1075.
1076.
1077-1082.
1083,
1084.
1085-1087,
1088-1092,
1093-1096,
1087, 1098.
CONTENTS,
Possessive Pronouns ........ sess eeeee Fasauies
Demonstrative Pronouns. .......-..eeee cee κων
Interrogative Pronoun............eceeeee eee
Indefinite Pronoun .........-. cece ee eee νον
Relative Pronoun as related to its Antecedent..
Relative with omitted Antecedent ............
Assimilation and Attraction of Relatives......
Relative in Exclamations ............00.000- i
Relative Pronoun not repeated in a new Case.
THE CASES.
NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE.
General Remark on the Case8..,........-000
Nominative, as Subject or Predicate ..........
Vocative used in addressing ..........0+ee ee ee
Nominative used for Vocative............005.
ACCUSATIVE.
Various Functions of the Accusative..........
Accusative of Direct (External) Object.......
Cognate Accusative (of Internal Object).......
Accusative of Specification or Limitation......
Adverbial Accusative. .......... cece ec eee νων
Accusative of Extent of Time or Space........
Terminal Accusative (Poctic) .......... wowinee
Accusative after Νή and Md........... 22.0006
Two Accusatives with Verbs signifying
Tv ask, teach, remind, clothe, conceal, deprive,
DENA θυ ον b ois stance desharn 3 p.5ie Oe3 aceite
To do anything to or say anything ofa person
ORCI. τονε νος dese ce ass ete ovate els οἶα τας τὴς
Cognate and Object Accusative together.......
Predicate and Object Accusative together .....
GENITIVE.
Various Functions of the Genitive............
Genitive after Nouns (Attributive) ...... edges
Seven Classes of Attributive Genitive.,.......
Partitive Genitive (specially) .............6--
Genitive after Verbs: —
Predicate Genitive ......... cesses Saab syee
Genitive expressing Part.......2.cceeveeeceee
xv
PaGEs
215, 216
216, 217
222
222
222
223
223
223
223-225
225
226
226
226, 227
227
227
228
228
228, 229
229
229, 230
280
231, 232
232, 233
233
Xvi
SECTIONS
1099-1101.
1102-1108.
1109-1111,
1112-1116.
2117-1120.
1121-1125.
1126-1128.
1129.
1130.
1131,
1132.
1133-1135.
1180.
1187-1138.
1180-1142.
1143-1145.
1146.
1147-1161.
1152,
1153-1156.
1167,
3188.
1159-1163.
1164.
1165-1170.
1171.
1172.
1173.
1174,
1175-1178.
1179, 1180.
1181, 1182.
1183,
1184, 1185.
CONTENTS.
With verbs signifying
To take hold of, touch, aim at, claim, hit, miss,
DEGIN, CLC. cece cer cece cceccsereveccces
To taste, smell, hear, perceive, remember, for-
get, desire, spare, neglect, admire, despise. .
To rule, lead, or direct ........... sei yetie ees
Fulness or Want......ccccccc eee eneeneeees
Genitive of Separation and Comparison .......
Genitive with Verbs of Accusing, Convicting,
Acguitting, and Condemning (with Accus.) ..
Genitive of Cause... ... cc. cece cece eee eee ee
Causal Genitive in Exclamations .......... te
Genitive of Source ......... εν cece cece eens .
Genitive of Agent or Instrument (Poctic).....
Genitive after Compound Verbs ............4.
Genitive of Price or Value ....... 0. cee eee eee
Genitive of Time within which...............
Genitive of Place within which (chiefly Poetic)
Objective Genitive with Verbal Adjectives.....
‘Possessive Genitive with Adjectives denoting
Possession, Ct. ..cseceeeeeeeeecees decease
Genitive with certain Adject. of Place .......
Genitive with Adverbs ....... ΣΤ
Genitive Absolute (see also 1568).........+-5-
Genitive with Comparatives...... ical eiegevels φρο
DATIVE.
Various Functions of the Dative..............
Dative expressing to or sor -—
Dative of Indirect Object .......... εὐλλοὶ νος ον
Dative after certain Intransitive Verbs........
Dative with Verbs of Ruling, etc. ......-.....
Iative of Advantage or Disadvantage.........
Ethical Dative....... ccc ccce cece cece eee eeee
Dative of Possession (with εἰμί, etc.) .......--
Dative after Adjectives kindred to preceding
VOIDS fase katate Aas ve ee swe e's ese ἐφυλν νας
Dative of Resembiance, Union, and Approach
Dative after Compound Verbs .........-+.++5
Dative of Cause, Manner, Means, and Instru-
MEN 6 obs eae ἐν νων νύςόςς wae ὐ να ὠξς
Dative after χράομαι, 56... «ον νειν εν κεν ιν κεν εν
Dative of Degree of Difference (with Compara-
7198)... «6 cc cacesrsersecssceroeeeseteeeest
PAGES
233, 234
234, 235
236
236
281, 288
238, 239
243
243, 244
244
244, 246
245
249
249, 250
260, 251
261
251
251, 262
ΒΕΟΤΙΟΝΒ
1186, 1187,
1188,
1189-1191,
1192-1195,
1196,
1197,
1198,
1199.
1200,
120].
1202-1219.
1220.
1221-1226,
1227,
1228, 1229,
1230-1232,
1233,
1234-1237,
1238,
1239.
1240,
1241,
1242-1248,
1249.
1250-1266,
1267-1270,
CONTENTS.
Dative of Agent (with Perfect and Pluperfect
PASSIVE) iiss aeaisiige sc be weeds ca RTA EN ne owe
Native of Agent (with Verbal in -réos or -τέον)
Dative of Accompaniment (somctimes with
autés) ......-0eee Bia heed deetihe dye wade erties dubia
Dative of Time ........ cece cece ence cee
Dative of Place (Poctic)..... 1.0... eee eee
te ee Occasional Use in Prose (Names
of Attic DemeS) ...... cc. cee cece cece ees
Local Datives as Adverbs...... Shas ode ὙΠ
PREPOSITIONS.
Prepositions originally Adverbs ............- .
Improper Prepositions..................0000-
Prepositions with Genitive, Dative, and Accusa-
PVCS crass whiaaie aie Ae na cned Saride Be Seco es
Uses of the Prepositions... .............. 004.
Uses of the Improper Prepositions. ....... ον
Remark on the Prepositions . .....
Prepositions in Composivion taking: their « own
Casesie” dle tie νον ἐπ ον ἐλ ήοος ἜΤ meade δ:
ADVERBS.
Adverbs qualifying aks Adjectives, and Ad-
VOIDS: τς ας τυ dees eh κε νειν νον, τς τὰν ἧς
SYNTAX OF THE VERB.
VOICES.
ACLIVE ViOICO ie cia co 8.4 os a iinide ass oa a PSE μος
Passive: Voice: νιν ceva sees cece baie ὡς
Agent after Passive Verbs (ὑπό and Genitive)
Dative of Agent (see also 1186-1188) .........
Passive Construction when Active has ¢wo
CaSUS ii. ΣΎ ΤῊ
Cognate Accusative made Subject of Passive. .
Intrausitive Active forms used as Passives ....
Middle Voice (three uses)... ee κεν eee teen
TENSES.
Two relations denoted by the Tenses..........
I. TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.
Tenses of the Indicative (Time of each) ......
Primary and Secondary Tenses.......es..eeee
254
254-262
262
262, 268
264
264
264, 265
265
265
265
205, 268
266
266
267, 268
268
268-271
271, 272
xviii CONTENTS.
1. TENSES OF THE DEPENDENT MOODS.
SX¥CTIONS A. NOT IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. PaGEs
1271, Present and Aorist chiefly used.............4- 272
1272. Distinction between Present and Aorist here... 272
1273-1275. Perfect not in Indirect Discourse (seldom used) 272, 278
1276-1278. Future lufinitive not in Indirect Discourse (ex-
COPtional) sss scscen iis Vata vege c eee ea ees 273
B. IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
1279. Definition of Indirect Discourse ..... bias cates : 273
1280-1284. Optative and Infinitive in Indirect Discourse. .. 274
1285. resent Infin. and Optative include Imperfect. . 274
1286. Infinitive after Verbs of Hoping, Promising, etc.
(two Constructions allowed). ......e0..e00 276
1287. Future Optative used only in Indirect Discourse 275
111, TENSES OF THE PARTICIPLE.
1288. Ixpressing time relatively to leading Verb..... 276
1289. Present Participle as linperfect..............- 275, 276
1290. Aorist sometimes denoting same time as leading
VOED! coisa pews πε νυν οιςος δ κοι dene 276
IV. GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES.
1291. Gnomic Present, expressing Habit or General Truth 276
1292-1294. Gnomie Aorist “ te ς ἕξ te 278
1295. Gnomic Perfect ὧι st τς et 276
1296-1298. Iterative Imperfect and Aorist with ἄν ........ 276, 277
THE PARTICLE "Av.
1299-1801. Two Uses of ἄν .........0405 Saladt oiaveisie's nie och Sint 277
“Av with the Indicative : —
1302, = Never with Present or Perfect ...........+++ 277
1303. With Future (chiefly Nlomeric)............. 277, 278
1304. With Secondary Tenses......-.ceeeeeeeeeee 278
1305. “Av with the Subjunctive ............ ei asa sie 278
1306, 1307, “Av with the Optative (always Potential) ...... 278
1308, 1809, “Av with the Infinitive and Participle (Potential) 278, 279
1310, 1311. Position Of Gy... cc cee cece eee ee ee ene 279, 280
1312. “Ay repeated in long Apodosis .........6.000-5 280
1313~1316. Special Uses of &........ σέ" jes 280
THE MOODS.
GENERAL STATEMENT AND CLASSIFICATION.
1317-1319, Various Uses of Indicative ............... 0005 280, 281
1320, 1821. Various Uses of Subjunctive ....... cece eceee 281
CONTENTS. ΧῚΧ
SECTIONS PAOKS
1322, 13238. Various Uses of Optative ...........c ec ee eee 281, 282
1324. ‘The Imperative ..... ννννννν νειν eee eee eee 282
1325. The Infinitive, Participle, ete. 2.0.2... 0.06.00 283
1326. Classification of Constructions of the Moods... 283
I. POTENTIAL OPTATIVE AND INDICATIVE.
1827-1334. Potential Optative with ἄν oo... .. cece eee eee 283-285
1335-1341. Potential Indicative with ayo... ce. cee eee eee 285, 286
11. IMPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDEPENDENT SEN-
TENCES. — INDEPENDENT SENTENCES WITH μή OR ὅπως.
1342, 1343, Imperative in Commands, Exhortations, ete. .. 287
1344, 1345, First Person of Subjunctive in Exhortations... 287
1546, 1341, Present Imper. or Aorist Subj. in Prohibitions 287
1348, 1349, Independent Subjunctive in Homer with μή, ex-
pressing fear or anxiety 2... ...... cece eee 287, 288
1360, 1851. Subjunctive or Indicative with μή or μὴ οὐ in
cautious assertions or negations ........... 288
13852-1354. Future Indicative with ὅπως and ὅπως μή in
Commands and Prohibitions ............... 288
Il], HOMERIC SUBJUNCTIVE LIKE FUTURE INDICATIVE. —
INTERROGATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE,
1355-3357. Homeric Use of the Subjunctive as simple Future 288, 289
1858, 1899. Interrogative Subjunctive (Questions of Doubt) 289
IV, SUBJUNCTIVE ΑΝ FUTURE INDICATIVE WITH οὐ μή.
1860, 1361, As Emphatic Future and in Probibitious...... 289
V. FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES AFTER iva, ὡς, ὅπως, ὄφρα,
AND μή.
1862, 1368. Three Classes of these Clauses .........0000e. 290
1264. Negative Particle in these Clauses ............ 290
I, PURE FINAL CLAUSES (AFTER ALL THE FINAT. PARTICLES) :—
1366-1268. With Subjunctive and Optative............... 290, 201
1369, 1370. With Subjunctive after Secondary ‘Verses ..... 291
1371, With the Past Tenses of the Indicative........ 292
11. OBJECT CLAUSES WITH ὅπως AFTER VERBS OF Striving ETC. :—
1872, With Future Indicative or Optative........... 292
1373. Same construction with Verbs οἱ exhorting ete. 292
1374-1876, Present or Aorist Subjinctive or Optative here 292,293
1877, Homeric Subj. and Opt. with ὅπως or Ws .....0 293
xx
SECTIONS
CONTENTS.
111. CLAUSES WITH μή AFTER VERBB OF Fearing : —
1378,
1379.
1380,
1381.
1382,
1383.
1384,
1885-1389,
With Subjunctive and Optative........... pers
With Future Indicative (rare) ...........0005
With Present or Past Tenses of Indicative.....
VI. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
Nefinition of Protasts and Apodosis...........
Use of ἄν (Hom. κέ) in Protasis and Apodosis..
Negative Particles in Protasis and Apodosis....
Distinction of Particular and General Sup
POSILIONS 63. ss be te eee he ee eect ease
Classification of Conditional Seutences........
PAGES
293
298
204
204
294
294
294, 295
295, 296
I, PRESENT OR PAST CONDITIONS WITH NOTHING IMPLIED.
1390,
1391.
1393-1396.
1397,
1308,
1399.
1400-1402.
1408, 1404.
1400.
1406, 1407.
1408-1412,
1413.
1414-1417.
1418.
1419,
1420.
1421,
1422,
1428, 1424,
Simple Supposition (chiefly Particular) with
INd1Cative ois ον νον se bie eis οἰ ρνςυ ρος οι oes
Future Indicative denoting Present Intention ..
Present and Past General Suppositions........
298, 297
297
297, 208
PRESENT AND PAST CONDITIONS WITH SUPPO8ITIONS
CONTRARY TO FACT.
Past Tenses of Indicative (ἄν in Apodosis) ....
Present Optative used here in Homer in Present
CONAILIONS co. ἐς νόος Hielnldieiela( Ge. τῖς 6 ieee elds
Optative with κέ in Homer rarely Past in A podosis
"Ede, χρῆν, etc. with Infinitive in Apodosis
without dv. ρου eee eee ete laieh de aptasas 4 86 4%
Ill, FUTURE CONDITIONS, MORE VIVID FORM.
Subjunctive with ἐάν in Protasis..............
Future Indicative with εἰ in Protasis ..........
Subjunctive with simple εἰ (in Hoimer)........
IV, FUTURE CONDITIONS, LESS VIVID FORM,
Optative in both Protasis and Apodosis .......
PECULIAR FORMS OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
Protasis contained in Participle or other Word..
ENlipsis of Protasis or Apodosis ...... ἜΥῊΕ
Infinitive or Participle in Indirect. Discourse
forming Apodosis.......06 cece cece cee eee
Infinitive (not in Indirect Discourse) forming
APOdOSIS co... ccc ον σον σον cree ee tener εν σοι.
Apodosis implied in Context .....-..e cece eee
Protasis and Apodosis of different Classes.....
Aé introducing an Apodosis .......... σον ἐπε
Εἰ after Verbs of Wondering (θανμάζωλ) etc.....
298, 299
299
299
299, 300
301
301, 302
302
303
CONTENTS. xxi
SBOTIONS PAGES
VII. RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES,
1425. Relative including ‘'emporal Clauses.......... 306
1426. Definite and Indefinite Antecedent explained .. 305
1427, Relative with Definite Antecedent ............ 305
1428, Relative with Indefinite Antecedent. — Condi-
tional Relative 0.0... . cece cee eee cee eee 305, 306
1429, Four Forms of Conditional Relative Sentence
corresponding to those of ordinary Protasis
(138521880): 6c ee aw csink es. ew lesag Seb iene . 306
1430. I. (a) Simple Present or Past Conditions ...... 806
1431, 1432. (0) Present and Vast General Conditions.... 306, 307
1433, 11, Present and Past Unfulfilled Conditions ... 307
1434, 1435. HE. Future Conditions (more Vivid Form) .... 307
1486. 1V. Future Conditions (less Vivid Form) ..... 307
1437, 1488. Peculiar Forms in Conditional Relative Sentences 807, 308
1489-1441. Assimilation in Conditional Relative Sentenees 308, 309
1442-1444. Relative Clauses expressing Purpose .......... 309
1446-1448, Relative Clauses expressing Result ........... 309, 310
1449-1459, Consecutive Clauses with wore or os, with
Infinitive and Finite Moods..........-..... 310, 311
1460. *E@’ ¢ or ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε with Infin. or Fut, Ind....... 3 311
1461, 1462. Causa] Relative Sentences ............0 0000. Ὰ 312
TEMPORAL PARTICLES SIGNIFYING Until AND Before.
1463-1468.
1468-1473.
1474.
1476,
1476-1479.
1480.
1481-1486,
1487,
1488,
1489,
1490-1492,
1493,
1494.
Constructions after ἕως, ἔστε, ἄχρι, μέχρι, ὄφρα,
εν ΡΤ ofa sie areca 312, 313
Πρίν with the Infinitive and the Finite Moods.. 810, 314
Πρὶν 4, πρότερον ἥ, πρόσθεν #, etc. used like πρίν 314
VIII. INDIRECY DISCOURSE.
Direct and Indirect Quotations and Questions 314, 315
Indirect Quotations and Questions, how introduced 315
Meaning of Expression Indirect Discourse..... 316
Genera] Principles of Indirect Discourse, — Use
of &y.— Negative Particles......... ds Been es 315, 316
SIMPLE 8ENTENCES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE,
Indicative and Optative after ὅτε or ὡς, and iu
Indirect Questions....... .. 816, 317
Pres. Opt. occasionally represents ‘Imperfect .. 317
Pres, and Perf. changed to Impert. and Pluperf. 317
Subjunctive or Optative in Indirect Questions,
representing Interrogative Subjunctive... .. 817, 318
Indicative or Optative with ἄν “unchanged).... 318
Infinitive and Participle in Indirect Quotations $18, 319
ΧΧῚ
BECTIONS
1495,
1496,
1497,
1498,
1499,
1500, 1501,
1502, 1503.
1504,
1505,
1806.
1507-1519,
101].
1512-1515.
1516.
1526-1531.
1532, 1533.
1534, 1535.
1536-1540.
1541,
1642-1544,
1545.
1646,
CONTENTS.
When Infin. is said to be in Indirect Discourse
Negative of Infin., and Part. (sometimes μή) ...
INDIRECT QUOTATION OF COMPLEX SENTENCES.
Rule for Dependent Clauses in Indirect Quotation
One Verb changed to Optative, another un-
Παρ τον ἐν sates gantaavsewey eee 7
Dependent Aorist Indic. not changed to Oplative
Special Cases. sy.darscn vse mwas ce we ke wliws
Single Dependent Clauses in Indirect Discourse,
independently of the rest of the Sentence. —
Four Classes ........ 20. c cece ceeeees iby share
Οὐχ ὅτι, οὐχ ὅπως, μὴ ὅτι, μὴ ὅπως oe... 600 seen
IX. CAUSAL SENTENCES,
Causal Sentences with Indicative .........-.6
Optative sometimes used after Past Tenses ....
X. EXPRESSION OF A WISH.
Optative in Wishes (with or without εἴθε etc.)..
Indicative in Wishes (with εἴϑε etc.) ......... δ
ὭὨφελο» with Infinitive iu ὙΝΊΒΆΘΘ.. ον νν νιν νειν ἐν ον
THE INFINITIVE.
Infinitive as Verbal Noun (with and without
ATUOC) os ten kasd cease as ecdeaeee ese. ses
INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE.
Infinitive as Subject, Predicate, or Appositive. .
Infinitive as Object of a Verb: —
Not in Indirect Discourse (chiefly Present and
ΟΡ ον ον νον etic ep bavee eee bees
In Indirect Discourse (with Time of ‘Tenses
preserved) :.44 24.0 ci ecient s κως aa eis ee eee
Infinitive with Adjectives, Adverbs, and Nouns
Infinitive of Purpose (or Result, Hom.).......
Absolute Infinitive. —‘Exwy εἶναι et... 6.0.60,
Infinitive in Commands, Wishes, Laws, etc...
INFINITIVE WITIT THE ARTICLE.
Character of Articular Infinitive .......-. eens
Infinitive with τό as Subject or Object.....----
Infinitive with τό with Adjectives and Nouns...
Infinitive with rod, τῷ, or τό after Prepositions
PAGES
319
319
319, 320
320
320
820
821, 322
322
322, 323
828
323, 324
824
224, 825
325
825
826
326, 827
328
329
820
829, 380
890
830, 331
331
331
ΒΕΟΤΙΟΝΒ
1547, 1548.
1649-1553,
1654.
1655,
1557, 1558.
1559.
1560, 1561.
1562.
1583, 1-8
1584-1567,
1568.
1589, 1570
1571.
1872-1577,
1578, 1579,
1580, 1581.
1582, 1583,
1584,
1585,
1586,
1587.
1588,
1589,
1590,
1591, 1592.
1603.
CONTENTS. xxiii
PAaGEs
Infin. with τοῦ or τῷ in Various Constructions 331, 892
Infinitive with or without τοῦ or τοῦ μὴ, τό or τὸ
μή (or μὴ ob), after Verbs of Hindrance etc. 332, 888
Infinitive (generally with στό) in Exelamations 333
Infinitive with Adjuucts and 76, as Noun...... 333
THE PARTICIPLE.
Participle as Verbal Adjective.— Three Uses .. 334
ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLE,
Participle qualifying a Noun (as Adjective) .... 334
Participle with Article as Substantive......... 334, 335
Neuter Participle with Article as Abstract Noun 335
CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE.
Various Uses of this Participle ............... 335, 336
Peculiar Idioms. .... 0... cece ccc cece eee eee 836, 331
Genitive Absolute. ........... cc cece eee ee eee 337
Accusative Absolute. ........ 0. cece eee eee 337
Ὧν omitted (rarely)... 0. ccc ee eee cece eee ee eee 337, 338
Various Adverbs with Circumstantial Participle 33, 339
SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE.
Showing to what the action of the Verb relates 339
NOT IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
With Verbs signifying to begin, continue, cease,
TOPERE , CUCL ocean esas ae 08% ἐνῶ a lain we ears 339, 340
With Verbs signifying to perceive, find, or repre-
SEND ποτὰ nes Sed eines Lapses oe ooh a te 340
Βουλόμενος, ἡδόμενος, Ctc., agreeing with Dative 340
With περιοράω and égopdw, overlook, see, allovo 340
With λανθάνω, τνγχάνω, and φθάνω .......20.. 340, 341
With διατελέω, οἴχομαι, tC... ee cece eee ee tees 341
IN INDIRECT DISCOURBE.
Participle (like Infin.) with verbs signifying to
see, hear, learn, perceive, know, etc. ........ 841,342
Δῆλός or φανερός εἰμι with Participle........... 342
Σύνοιδα and συγγιγνώσκω with a Participle in
Nominative or Dative ........0.. ν εν ee wees 342
Verbs of 1588 with other Constriuctions....... 342
‘Qs with Participle of Indirect Discourse. ...... 342
ΧΧῚΥ
ΒΧΟΤΙΟΝΒ
1594.
1595, 1596.
1697-1590.
1600.
1601.
1602,
1603.
1604,
1605.
1606.
1607.
1608.
1609.
1610.
1611.
1612-1614.
1615.
1616, 1617.
1618, 1619.
1620, 1621.
1622-1624.
1625.
1626.
1627, 1628.
1629, 1630.
1631,
1632,
1633.
1684.
CONTENTS.
VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -tlos AND -τέον.
Two Constructions....... cc cece eee cee κεν
Personal Construction of Verbal in -réos.......
Impersonal Verbal in -τέον (or -réa) .......-4-
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
Direct and Indirect Interrogatives............+
Two or more Interrogatives with one Verb.....
Interrogative as Predicate ........... arb. τινος
Direct lnterrogatives, — apa, 3, οὐ, μή, μῶν, οὐ-
κουνενιπ θυ data Shiv ibid ς τ νος νου το TS
“Ao τι Hs OF ἄλλο Tj. eee εν ννεσν εν ννννον
Indirect Questions with εἰ (Homeric 4 or εἰ)...
Alternative Questions, —- Πότερον... ἢ, etc. ...
NEGATIVES.
Two negatives, οὐ and who... cc cece eee eee eee
Οὐ with independent Indicative and Optative ..
Εἰ οὐ or ef μή in Indirect Questions..........-.
My with Subjunctive and Imperative..........
Negative with Infinitive..............-.0-- 08.
Negative with Participles and Adjectives......
My with Infin. after Verhs with Negative Idea
Μὴ οὐ with Infinitive (after Negative Leading
Ver) 4 cris estareatsates fee ἐπ a Geleledseleua) areas
Two or more Negatives in one Clause........-
PART Y.
VERSIFICATION.
Foot. — Ictus. — Arsis and Thesis........... Ἢ
Rhythm and Metre......... cece eee eee ees
Ictus and Word-accent......... ccc cee κεν eens
Long and Short Syllables. — Times ..........-
Enumeration of Εδοὺ. ον ον ννννννν νειν cee eee
Place of the Ictus in ἃ ΕὈΟὺ......0ὐν νον τον κννον
Resolution and Contraction. ...............6.
SYNCOPE ee idece 2d sie dl bested c ssl la ceconaseleiies, πῶς
Irrational Time ...... 2.00... eee eee eee
Cyclic Dactyl and Anapaest............- beseiats
351
351, 352
352
362
362
SECTIONS
1635,
1636.
1637,
1638.
1639.
1640.
1641.
1642-1644,
1645.
1646,
1647,
1648.
1649.
1650-1656.
1657-1667.
1668-1674.
1675-1678.
1679-1683.
1684, 1085.
1686,
1687.
1688,
1689.
1690.
1691.
1692.
CONTENTS. χχν
PAGES
ANACTUSIG: ἐν. τ ρε scs'5-3:5 νον wiv gle, ezine Od Saree as 352
Syllaba AncepS .....scccccrceeecesceesescees 352
Rhythmical Series and Verse .............065 353
Close of Verse............ ecatdjsnekatemiarets δὸς δ τις 808
Catalexis iced eae g sists vos Senos vere ρος 353
PAUSES 823 isio.s. colons. Sis avis ad Sip acds oreo sisi Bal Midis ἐν 353
Brachycatalectic and Hypercatalectic Verses... 353
Caesura and Diaeresis ..... τ νν νιν εν eee ee ee eee 363, 354
Names of Verses........-. 2... εν eee ee ee eee 354
Monometers, Dimeters, etc......... ......005 354
Tripodies, Tetrapodies, ete. .............. 200s 355
Rising and Falling Rhythms ................. 355
Distichs, Systems, Strophes, etc. ......-...+6. 855
Trochaic Rhythms ...........ceecee cere ee νον 355-357
Tambic Rhythms......... 0c: cese eee e sete tees 357-360
Dactylic Rhythms......... 0... cee cece eee eee 360-362
Anapaestic Rhythms ........ 0... cece eee eens 362-364
Logaoedic Rhythms. ..........-... cere ee ees 864-366
Dactylo-Epitritic Rhythms. ..............006- 366, 367
Rhythms with Feet of Five or Six Times...... 367
Choriambie Rhythms....... Heard edna e'sih reed 867
Tonic Rhythms ............ce sce νυν ὃς 367
Cretic and Paeonic Rhythins............... 368
Bacchic Rhythms .......... 0. ccc cece ee eee 368
DOCH μα δδ,ς νιν ον ἐφ oretere Mee ealekers oars 368
APPENDIX.
CATALOGUE OF VERBS ........ 00. cece eens 369-406
PARALLEL REFERENCES
From Tue Epinion or 1879 Tro THe Present Epirioxn,
OLD NEW
1 1
Note 1 2
N.2 3
2 5
Note 6
3 7
Note 10
4,1 11
N.1 12
N.2 13
2 15
5,1 16
2 18
6 19
1 20
2° 21; 22
Note 23; 24
Ἷ 25
Note 26
8 34
9 35; 36
1, 37
2 38, 2
Note 39, 1
3 38, 1
Note 39,1 ἃ 2
4 38, 4
N.1 39, 3
N.2 39,4&5
δ 40,1
Remark 40, 2
10 47
11,1 42
(a) 43,1
() 43, 2
2 44
N.1 45
N. 2 46
N.3 47,2
2222
we 62 τὸ "ὦ
13,1
πᾷ
woe
123; 1%
130
182; 133, 1
wz
wom
PARALLEL REFERENCES. ΧΧΥῚΪ
NEW | OLD NEW | OLD NEW
134 | 40 189 | 83, 2, N. 2 319
131, 4; 41 190 3 263
133, 2 Note 191 N.1 265
131, 5; 42,1 192; 193 N.2 266
131, 2 Note 195 N.3 267
131, 1; 2 195; 197 N.4 264
133, 3 N.1 199 | 54 208
185 N.2 200 Note 269; 270
140 } 43 21 242; 245
141,1 Note 203 N.1 238-241; 243; 244
141, 2| 44 204 N.2 248
141, 3| 45, 1 205 Ν. 3 245; 247
141, 4 Note 206 | 56, 1 228
142; 143 2 201 3 ἃ Note 237, 1
144 Note 167 ; 208 | 87 213
145 46 209 1 274, 1
146 1 209, 4 N.1 214; 215
136; 137 2 209, 1 N. 2 276; 279
138 3 209, 2 2 217,1; 278
139 4 209, 3 3 277, 2; 278
147 N.1 212,1; 210,1&3 | 58 280
148 N.2 212,2 1-3 281-285
149 N.3 213] 59 286
150 | 47,1 214, 1; | 60, 1 287
151 214, 2 & 3; 216 288
182 N.1 217 3 289
153; 154 N.2 218 4 290
155 | 48, 1 219 5 291
150 2 220-222 | 61 292-294
157 3 223 N.1 295
158 | 49 204 N.2 296
159 | 50 225 N.3 207
160; 161/51, 1 226 | 62, 1, 2 298
162 2 208, 3 3 299-301
163 Note 88,1; 90,3 Note 302
164; 165 | 52, 1 227 | 63 804; 306
166 Note 85; 88, 1 Note 307
168 2 228 ; 234 | 64 805; 306
169 N.1 228; 230; 235 | 65 310
170 N.2 39, 2 | 66 312; 313
171; 179 Ν. 8 231 N.1 333
173-175 Ν. 4 252 Ν.2 344
182 | 53 249; 256 N.3 316
177 1 249; 250 N.4 343; 345
178 N.1 2541 67,1,2 318-320; 324;
183; 184 N.2 251 325; 328; 329
186 N.3 255 . N.1 322; 74
187 2 257 N.2 332
188 N.1 261 N.3 325-327
XXvili
OLD
68
Note
69
Note
το
1
71
2zzzz zz
Om & τὸ μα
a
fo
a
ee
πα ἢ, zz ze
moh
PARALLEL REFERENCES.
NEW
334; 335; 338
336; 337
340; 341
342
346
37
348
330
391;
OLD
19,1, Ν, ὅ
N.6 397
N.7 398
2 399; 989, 2
NEW
396
οι κα
ry
_
w
91 452;
92, 1,
3 460
Note
4 459
I-VII 455-457
δ 462
θ 408
OLD EW
93, 1 464
2(a)-(c) 465; 466
407
Note 468
| 4 456; 458; 561
1; 95,1 469; 470
I 474
II 470
ΠῚ 478
Note 472
2,1 474; 475
IL 477
Ill 479
Note 473
96, 1 480
II 481
HI 482
N.1 483
N.2 484
N. 3 485
Wi, 1&2 486, 1&2
3 487, 1
4 487, 2
N.1 488
N.2 489
Ν, ἃ 490
98 492
Rem, 493
N.1 495
Ν. 2 490
Ν, 8 497
Ν. 4 498
N.5 499
N.6 131
99, 1 510; 520
2 (a) 511, 1
(Ὁ) 511,2
{c) 521
Rem 512; 520
100, 1 513
2 515
N.1 516
N.2 517
N.3 534
N.4 535
N.5 514
101, 1 521
ote 522
2 523
PARALLEL REFERENCES. ΧΧΙΧ
ον NEW | OLD NEW | OLD NEW
401, 2, N.1 524/108, V, Ν.Ὶ (Ὁ) 611) 110, IV, (α) 698
N. 2 525 Ν. 2 612 (1)-(5) 698-
3 526 VI 613 702
4 527 N.1 615 (Ὁ) 682; 683
102 329-331 N.2 616 (1)-(5) 084
Ν.1 532 N.3 617 Note 686; 694
Ν. 2 533 Ν, 4 018 (6) 703
103 518 Vil 058; 634 N.1 704
Note 519 Note 656 N.2 105
104 537 Vuul 621 (ad) 687; 692
Ν,1 538 Note 622 N.1 690
N.2 539 Rem 634 N.2 See 693
105, 1 540} 109, 1 6353 636 N.3 691; 773
Ni 541 N.1 471; 638 N.4 174
N.2 543 N.2 639 ν 015
N.3 544 2 640; 641 N.1 676
2 545, 1 3 643; 644. N.2 677
Note 545, 2 N.1 693; 689 ' N.3 678
3 5AG N.2 See 692 VI 107; 710
106, 1 547; 548 4 645 N.1 708
Note 550 N.1 646 N.2,3 709
2 δ49 Ν. 2 711 Vu 115. 715
107 56T 5 672 N.1 716
108 368 6 047 N. 2 113
Ι 569 Note 648 N.3 114
Note 571 7 (a) 649 111 111
1,1 572 (b) 6501112, 1 551
2 574 (c) 651; 652 | 2 532
Note BT; 642 8 653; 657 | Note 556
Ill 516-578 (a) 658, 1° 3,4 537-561
Iv 579 (b) 658,21113,1 See 561, 1; 623
1 (a) 580 Note 659 2,N.1. 505, 65 624
Note 582; 583 Rem 061 N.2 625
(0) 585; 588 [110,1 660 N.3 556, 2
N.1 590 ll, 1 662 N.5 556, 3
N.2 591 2 663! 114 718
2 592 N. 1 (a) Οὐδ, 1 (end) 721
(c) 593 (b) 665, 2 N.1 723; 725
(d) 394; 596 (c) 665, 3 N.2 1921; 121
N.1 598 (d) 665, 4] 115 730
N.2 599 Ν. 2 G66 | 1 731
N.3 600 N. 3 667 2 740
3 (e) 601 N.4 668 3 139
Note G02 MW, 1 669 4 137
V,1 603 N.1 670 N.1 735
2 605 N.2 671 N.2 132
3 607 2 672 | 116, 1 553
4 608 N.1 673 2 146; 747
N.i(a@) 610 N.2 674 3 "51
xxx
OLD NEW
117, 1 854; 759; 765
1 (end) 766-169
2 7110; 772; 775
Note 337
3 116, 1
N.1 176, 2
N.2 716, 3
118, 1 721; 733
Note 134
2 120; 733
Note 151; 748
8 706
5 486, 2; 701
Note 701
6 1254
119, 1-9 777, 1-9
10 778
11 119
12 (a) 780, 1
(δ) 780, 2
(c) 780, 3
(ὦ) 180, 4
13 181
14 782
15 183
320, 1 (α) 184,1
(0) 784, 2
(c) 784.3
(a) 784, 4
(4) 184, 5
2 (a) 185,1
(0) 785, 2
(c) 185, 3
(a) 185, 4
3 (a) 736, 1
() 786, 2
Rem. before 121
468; 500; 501
121, 1 557; 358; 627
N.1 801; 02,1
N.2 629
2(α)-(7ὺ 564, 14
3 194, 2
122 502; 793
1 194
2 191
Ν.1 630; 741
N.2 729; 742
Ν. 8 632
PARALLEL REFERENCES.
OLD NEW | OLD NEW
122,2,N.4 724 | 120, 1 832
Ν. ὅ 128; 631 2 (α) + 838,1, 841
N.6 603, 1 Note 841
125,1 504; 505 (Ὁ) 833,1,2; 841
2 5 Note 833, 3
3 509 3 834
124,1 507; 508 N.1 835
2 804 N. 2 836
125, 1, 2 794, 1,2 4 837
N.1 795 Note 837 (end)
N.2 196 5 838
3 798; 799 Note 839
N.1 801 6 843
N.2 802; 803, 2 7 842 (837)
4 804 Note 842
5 197 8 844
120, 1-5 787, 1-5 Note 845
6 800, 2 9 846
1 (α) 188,1 (a)-(¢) 840,1-3
(Ὁ) 788, 2 Note 847
(c) 788, 3 10 848, 1
8 189 Note 848, 2
9 791 11 849, 1
10 192 12 850
127 805 13 851
I 806, 1 14 852
N.1,2 $06, 2,3; 807 Note 853
nN 808, 1 15 854
N.1-3 808, 2; 809 16 840, 4
Ww 810, 1 17 855
N.1,2 810,2; 811 18 859; 860
1V 812 | 130, 1-8 861, 1-8
N.1,2 813 N.1 868
ν 814-816 Ν, 2 866
Note 817 N.3 867
VI 818 | 131 869
Note 819 Rem $70
Vil 820 1 871
Note 821 Note 872
128,1 822 2 873
2 (a) 823 (a) 873.1
(Ὁ) 824 (Ὁ) 873,2
Note 825 3 874
3 826 4 (a)-(d) 875, 1-4
N.1 827 N.1 876
Ν. 2 $28 | N.2 877
N.3 829 5 878
Ν. 4 890 6 819; 881
Ν. ὅ 831 Note 880
PARALLEL REFERENCES.
141
N.1
N. 1 (a)-(e)
8°
136
137
moO
138
143, 1
Zz ἘΠῚ ΖΦ 214
959,1; 902
900
959, 2
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971; 972; 973
974
915
976
97,1
917, 2
978
979
980
981
982
983
OLD
143, 2
144, 1
147
148
149, 1
2
151
152
153
154
135
156
xxxi
NEW
984
985
Note 986
(a) 987
(Ὁ) - 988
989, 1
Note 990
989, 3
Note 992
993
N.1 994
N.2 995
N.3 996
998
N.1 999
N.2 1000
Ν. 8 1002
N.4 1003
1004
N.1 1005
N.2 1006
N.3 1007
N.4 1010
1011
~ 1012
(last part) 1018
Note 1014
1015
Note 1017
1019
N.1 1020
N. 2 (a) 1021, 0,0
(Ὁ) 1021, ¢
Ν. 8 1023
N.4 1024
1026; 1027
N.1 1028
N.2 1029
N.3 1030
1031
N.1 1032
N.2 1033
N. 3 1034
Ν, 4 1035
Ν. ὅ 1096
1037
Note 1038
1039
1040
PARALLEL REFERENCES,
Xxxii
OLD NEW
156, Note 1041
Rem. before 157 1042
157, 1 1043
2 1044
Note 1045
Rem. before 158 1046
158 1047
N.1 1048
N. 2 1049
.Ν,8 1050
159 1051
Rem 1052
N.1 1055
N.2 1034
N.3 1053
Ν. 4 1016
Ν.5 1051
160, 1 1058
Note 1059
2 1060
Note 106]
161 1062
Note 1063; 1064
162 1065
1.3. ᾿ 1006; 1067
N.1 1067
N.2 1068
164 1069
N.1 1070
N.2 1071
N.3 1072
165 1073
N.1 1074
N. 1 (last pt.) 1241
N.2 1075
166 1077
N.1 1078
N.2 1080
N.3 1081
Ν. 4 1078
Rem. before 167 1083
167 1084
1-5 1085, 1-5
6 1085, 7
Note 1086
168 1088
Ν.1 1090
N,3 1091
N.8 1092
OLD
169, 1
2
3
170, 1
2
171,1
Note
Note
NEW | OLD NEW
10%, 1 & 7 | 183 1152
1095 Rem. before 184 1157
1096 | 144, 1 1158
1094 2 1159; 1100
1097, 1 N. 1 (a) 1161
1097, 2 (δ) 1162
1098 N.2 1163
1099 3 1165
1100 N.1 1166
1102 N.2 1167
1103 N.3 1168; 1169
1105 N.4 1170
1106 N.5 1584
1107; 1108 N.6 1171
1109; 1110 4 1173
1164 5 1172
1112 | 185 1174
1143 | 186 1175
1114 N.1 1177
(a) 1115 N.2 1178
(Ὁ) 1116187 1179; 1180
1126 | 188, 1 1181
1127 N.1 1182
1128 N.2 1183
112) 2 1184; 1185
1123; 1124; 3 1186; 1187
1129 4 1188
1117: δ 1189; 1190
1153 Note 1191
1154 ; 189 1192
1156! N.1 1193
1120 N.2 1194
1130 | 190 1196
1131 N.1 1197
1132 Ν. 3 1198
1133 1191 1198; 1200;
1135 1220
1136 I-VI 1201-1219
1137 , (w. prepositions
1139 alphabetically)
1140 N.1 1221
1140] Ν. 2 1222, 1
1141 N.3 1222, 2
1142 N.4 1223
1143 N.5 1224
1146 N.6 1225
1147 | 193 1227
1148-1150 | 194 1228
1151 | 195 1230
PARALLEL REFERENCES. xxxiil
OLD NEW | OLD NEw | OLD NEW
195, N.1 1231 | 205, 2 1292 | 218, N.1 1379
Ν. 2 1232 Ν.1 1293 N. 2 1350
196 1233 N.2 1294 N.3 1380
197, 1 1234; 1236 3 1295 | 219, 1 1381
N.1 1237 | 206 1296 2 1382
N.2 1239 Rem. 1297 3 1383, 1
2 1238 Note 1298 Note 1383, 2
198 1240 | 207 1299 | 220 1384; 1385-1387
199, 1-3 1242, 1-3 1 129, 1 Rem. 1 1388
Rem. 1243 2 1299, 2; 1300 Rem. 2 1389
N.1 1244 Rem. 1301 | 221 1390
N.2 1245 | 208, 1 1302 Note 1391
N.3 1246; 1247 2 1303 | 222 1397
N.4 1248 3 1304 N.1 1402
200 1250; 1251 | 209, 1 1305, 1 N. 2 1400
N.1 1252 2 1305, 2 N.3 1398; 1399
N.2 1255 | 210 1306 | 223 1403
N.3 (a 1256 Note 1307 Rem 1404
(Ὁ) 1257 | 211 1308 NI 1405
Ν. 4 1258 Note 1309 N.2 1406; 1305, 2
N.5 (a) 1259, 1] 212, 1 1310 | 224 1408
(b) 1260 2 1312 N.1 1332; 1333
(6) 1259, 2 3 1313 N.2 1412
N.6 1263 4 1314 | 225 1393, 1, 2
N.7 1264 Note 1316 Rem. 1304
N.8 1265 1 213, 1 1317; 1318 N.1 1395
N.9 1266 fem. 1319 N.2 1396
201 1267 2 1320 | 226, 1 1413
Rem. 1908 Rem. 1321 2 (a) 1329; 1340
N.1 1269 3 1322 (0) 1921; 1328;
N.2 1270 Rem. 1323 13335; 1336
202 1271 4 1324 N.1 1330; 1328
1 1272 5 1325 N.2 1337
2 1273 | 214 1326 3 1418
N.1 1274 | 215 1362 4 1419
N.2 1275 Rem. 1363 N.1 1420
3 (a) 1276 Nl 1364 N.2 1416
(Ὁ) 1277 N.2 1302; 1368 | 227, 1 1421, 1
Note 1278 | 216, 1 1365 Note 1421, 2
4 1287 N.1 1366 2 1422
Rem. before 203 1279 Ν. 2 1367 | 228 1423
203 1280; 1281 2 1369; 1370 Note 1424
N.1 1285 3 1371 Rem. before 229 1425
N.2 1286 | 217 1372 | 229 1426
Ν. ὃ 1287 N.1 1814: 1375 230 1427
204 1288 N.2 1373 | 231 1428, 1
Ν.1 1289 N.3 1377 Note 1428, 2
N.2 1290 Ν, 4 1352-1354 | 232 1429
208, 1 1291 | 218 1378 1 1430
248
ER
1466 ;
1486;
PARALLEL REFERENCES.
NEW
1433
1434
1435,
1436
1431
1432
1438
1437
1439
1440
1441
1442
1443
1460
1444
1449)
1450
1445
1461
1464
1465
1473
1467
1469; 1471, 2
1470
1474
1475
1476
1477
1479
1430
1481
1482
1483
1484
1485
1496
1487
1488
1489
1490
1492
149)
1493
1494
1495
1497
1498
1499
OLD
241, Ν. 8
Ν. 4
248,1-4
Note
249,1
2
250
Note
251, 1
N.1
N.2
N.3
2
N.1
Ν. 9
252
Note
253
Note
254
Note
255
' Note
256
237
Note
258
259
Note
260
1
N.1
N.2
2
N.1
“ N.2
261, 1
N.1
N.2
Rem
Note
262, 1
2
263, 1
Note
2
Note
NEW
13500
1501
1502, 14
1503
1478, 1
1478, 2
1358 ;
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1342
3343
1344
1345
146
1341
1355
1350
1359
1360
1361
1516
1517
142
1518
1519
1520
; 1544
15U2
1523
1324
1526
; 1521
1545
1528
1520
3530
1546
1547
1549
1550
1551
1552
1555
OLD NEW
pass) 1532
Note 1533
266, 1 1449
2 1453
1 1456
2 1449
3 1455
4 (a) 1458
(δ) 1591
5 1457
201 1400
208 1594
209 1536
Note 1536; 1537
270 1337
Note 1538
271 1540
272 1554
273 1525
214 1470; 1471,1
Note 1474
275, 1557
210,1 1559
2 1500
217 1563
1563, 1
1363, 2 ἃ 8
1563, 4
1563, 5
1563, 6
1563, 7
Ν. 1 (a) 1572
(Ὁ) 1573
N. 2 (a) 1574
(ὃ) 1575
N.3 0 15763 1577
278, 1 ᾿ 1508
Note 1568
2 1569
Note 1570
279 1578
1 1580
N.1 1581
N.2 1262
2 1582
Note 1583
3 1585
4 1586
Note 1587
zzz
N
2
Oar WN
OLD
283
8
9
284,1
2
3
Note
Note
PARALLEL REFERENCES. XXXV
NEW
1588
1559
1500
1591; 1502
1593
1504
1595; 1596
1507-158}
1600
1603
1604
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1011
1019
1613
1615
JOG,
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
OLD
284, 3, Note
N.1
τὸ
ἃ
τε
x
si
τῶ νὰ δ τὸ CROOK =
NEW
1623-1625
16%
4627
1028
1099
1630
1635
1631
1626, 2; 1682
1633
1634
1056
16:7
1658
1639
130
10:2
1643
104
145
16465 1047
1048
1049
1650
1653, 3 & 4
1651
1653, 1
1657
OLD NEW
1670; 1671
Note 1672; 1673
296 1675
Note 1675
O07 1 1676, 1
2 1676, 2
3 1676, 3
4 1676, 4
298 1677
Note 1654; 1666
299, 1 1679
2 1680; 1681
300, 1-7 1682, 1-7
Note 1687, 2
1 1687
2 1688
3 1689
4 1690
302 1691
Catalogue of Verbs 1692
CITATIONS OF GREEK AUTHORS
In Parts IV. anv V.
Aeschines................Aesch. | Menander.........-..++++..Men.
Aeschylus. ............0. ιν
Agamemmon..............45 A
Chotphorl...... «6
Eumenides..... « Eu
Versiang.......... . Pe
Prometheus.... Pr.
Beptem..... Se.
Bupplices
Alcaeus....
ΟΣ
Απάοοίάθβ.. «ννν νιν νιν εν νεννν And,
Antiphon.................. Ant
‘Aristophanes .............68 AN
Acharnenscs ....... «Ach
AVGB........ eee Av
Ecclesiazuaue ..
Equites ......
Lysiatrata
Nubes..
Pax ....
Plutus....
Ravae
‘Thesmopborlazusae
Vespac
Demosthenes.............
Euripides
Alcestis
Andromache
Baechae..........
Cyclops .. vig
Electra...........
Rhesue.......0...
‘Troades
Hesiod.......
Theogonia
Herodotus.........
Herondas.......
Hipponax. .....ceeeeeeeeee
Homer :—
Iliad...
Odyssey ..
Isaeus.......
Isocrates..........6..
Lysias............
ΟΣ
.. Hd.
seeeeees Herond,
Hipp.
Monostichi .. .......-+-+++ Mon.
Pindar, .........eeeeee eo ee Pind.
Olympian Odes.. -- OL.
Pythian Odes.........-.-005. Py.
Plato ....... 6 wigs φρο τς
plete Be Hove χε Sige: date. At i
Apology....- νυν νυ AD
Charmaides. er
Crito ...« τος φνεσφος CFy
Cratylue......- smiles Crat.
Critiab......46
Euthydeimus..
Euthypbro ....
Gorgias
Hippias Major.
Lae
Leges
Lysis...
Phaedo
Phacdrus......
Philebus.......
Politicue.......
Protaguras.....
Republic
Sophist............
Symposium..
Theactetus...
Timaeus
Sappho....... :
Sophocles ..........-5.
Ajax
Antigone
Electra icc i cede νυν caer e
Oedipus at Colonus
Oedipus Tyranuua.........
Philoctetes
Trachiniad........ 6. ee eee eee
Stobaeus .....05 σεν εν νννον Sto.
Theocritus..... πο eee ee LhEOC.
Theognis. ..........+++. Theog,
‘Thucydides........eeeee.eeeee Te
Kenophon, ...cecesereeveeee Me
Agesilaus .... Δ
Anabusis.... i
Cyropaedia ..
De re Equestr
Nellevica...
Hipparchicua..
Memorabilia...
Oeconomicus
De Republica Athenienal. Rp. A.
Symposium. .... 0... .eeee eee Sy.
The dramatists are cited by Dindorf’s lines, except the tragic
fragments (frag.), which follow Nauck’s numbers.
The orators are
cited by the numbers of the orations and tie German scctions,
xxxvi
GREEK GRAMMAR.
INTRODUCTION.
THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND DIALECTS.
THE Greek language is the language spoken by the
Greek race. In the historic period, the people of this
race called themselves by the name Hellenes, and their
language Hellenic. We call them Greeks, from the Roman
naine Graeci. They were divided into Aeolians, Dorians,
and Ionians. ‘The Aeolians inhabited Aeolis (in Asia),
Lesbos, Boeotia, and Thessaly; the Dorians inhabited
Peloponnesus, Doris, Crete, some cities of Caria (in Asia),
with the neighboring islands, many settlements in Southern
Italy, which was known as Magna Graecia, and a large
part of the coast of Sicily; the Iouians inhabited Ionia
(in Asia), Attica, many islands in the Aegean Sea, a few
towus in Sicily, and some other places.
In the early times of which the Homeric poems are a
record (before 850 B.c.), there was no such division of the
whole Greek race into Aeolians, Dorians, and Jonians as
that which was recognized in historic times; nor was there
any common name of the whole race, like the later name
of Hellenes. The Homeric Hellenes were a small tribe in
South-eastern Thessaly, of which Achilles was king; and
the Greeks in general were called by Homer Achaeans,
Argives, or Danaans,
3
:
4 INTRODUCTION.
The dialects of the Aeolians and the Dorians are known
as the Aeolic and Dorie dialects. These two dialects are
much more closely allied to each other than either is to
the Ionic. In the language of the Ionians we must dis-
tinguish the Old Jonic, the New Ionic, and the Aétic dialects.
The Old Ionic or Epic is the language of the Homeric
poems, the oldest Greek literature. The New Ionic was
the language of Ionia in the fifth century B.c., as it appears
in Herodotus and Hippocrates. The Attic was the lan-
guage of Athens during her period of literary eminence
(from about 500 to 300 z.c.).! In it were written the trag-
edies of Aeschylus, Sophocles, and Euripides, the comedies
of Aristophanes, the histories of Thucydides and Xenophon,
the orations of Demosthenes and the other orators of Athens,
and the philosophical works of Plato.
The Attic dialect is the most cultivated and refined form
of the Greek language. It is therefore made the basis of
Greek Grammar, and the other dialects are usually treated,
for convenience, as if their forms were merely variations of
the Attic. This is a position, however, to which the Attic
has no claim on the ground of age or primitive forms, in
respect to which it holds a rank below the other dialects.
The literary and political importance of Athens caused
her dialect gradually to supplant the others wherever
Greek was spoken; but, in this very extension to regions
widely separated, the Attic dialect itself was not a little
modified by various local influences, and lost some of its
1 The name Jonic includes both the Old and the New Ionic, but not
the Attic. When the Old and the New Ionic are to be distinguished
in the present work, Ep. (for Epic) or Hom. (for Homeric) is used
for the former, and Hdt, or Hd. (Herodotus) for the latter.
INTRODUCTION. 5
early purity. The universal Greek language which thus
arose is called the Common Dialect. This begins with the
Alexandrian period, the time of the literary eminence of
Alexandria in Mgypt, which dates from the accession of
Ptolemy Il. in 285 uc. The Greek of the philosopher
Aristotle lies on the border line between this and the
purer Attic. The name Hellenistic is given to that form
of the Common Dialect which was used by the Jews of
Alexandria who inade the Septuagint version of the Old
Testament (283-133 5.0.) and by the writers of the New
Testament, all of whom were Hellenists (1.6. foreigners who
spoke Greek). Towards the end of the twelfth century
a.v., the popular Greek then spoken in the Byzantine
Roman Empire begau to appear in literature by the side
of the scholastic ancient Greek, which had ceased to be
intelligible to the common people. ‘his popular language,
the earliest form of Modern Greek, was called Romaic (‘Pw
paixy), as the people called themselves Ῥωμαῖοι. The name
Romaic is now little used; and the present language of
the Greeks is called siinply Ἑλληνική, while the kingdom
of Greece is ‘EAAds and the people are Ἕλληνες. ‘The lit-
erary Greek has been greatly purified during tbe last half-
century by the expulsion of foreign words and the restora-
tion of classic forms; and the same process has affected
the spoken language, especially that of cultivated society
in Athens, but to a far less extent. It is not too much to
say, that the Greek of most of the books and newspapers
now published in Athens could have been understood with-
out difficulty by Demosthenes or Plato. The Greek lan-
guage has thus an unbroken literary history, from Homer
to the present day, of at least twenty-seven centuries,
6 INTRODUCTION.
The Greck is descended from the same original language
with the Indian (i.e. Sanskrit), Persian, German, Slavonic,
Celtic, and Italian languages, which together form the
Indo-European (sometimes called the Aryan) family of
languages. Greek is most closely counected with the
Italian languages (ineluding Latin), to which it bears a
relation similar to the still closer relation between French
and Spanish or Jtalian. This relation accounts for the
striking analogies between Greek and Latin, which appear
in both roots and terminations; and also for the less ob-
‘vious analogies between Greek and the German element
in English, which are 566} in a few words like me, ts,
know, cte.
PART
----.-.--.---
I.
LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS.
THE ALPHABET.
1. The Greek alphabet has twenty-four letters : —
Name.
Form. Equivalent.
A a a ἄλφα
B β b βῆτα
Ty 8 γάμμα
Δ ὃ d δέλτα
E ε e (short) εἶ, ἐ widov
Z ¢ 2 ζῆτα
Η 4 e (long) ἧτα
© θὺ th θῆτα
Y 4 i ἰῶτα
K « k or hard c κάππα
A λ if λά(μ)βδα
Μμ n μῦ
Nv n vd
Ξ ξ Χ ξεῖ, ξῖ
O o ο (short) οὗ, ὃ μικρόν
Tl a p πεῖ, πὶ
Pp r ῥῶ
Σ ee 8 σίγμα
T τ t ταῦ
T ov (a) y v, ὑ ψιλὸν
> ¢ ph φεῖ, $i
xX x kh χεῖ, xe
Voy ps Yel, Yi
Q ω ο (long) @, ὦ μέγα
A Ipha
Beta
Gamma
Delta
Epsilon
Zeta
Eta
Theta
Lota
Kappa
Lambda
Mu
Nu
Xt
Omicron
Pi
Bho
Sigma
Tau
Upsilon
Phi
Chi
Psi
Oméga
2. N. At the end of a word the form ς is used, elsewhere the
form o; thus, σύστασις.
7.
8 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [3
3. N. Three letters belonging to the primitive Greek alphabet,
Vau or Digamma (F), equivalent to V or W, Auppa (0), equivalent to
Q, and Sampi (7), ἃ form of Sigma, are not in the ordinary written
alphabet. ‘They were used as numerals (884), Vauw here having the
form $, which is used 8150 as an abbreviation of στ. Vau had not
entirely disappeared in pronunciatiun when the Homeric poems were
composed, and the metre of many verses in these is explained only
by adinitting its presence. Many forms also which seem irregular are
explained only on the supposition that ¢ has been omitted (see 269).
4. N. The Athenians of the best period used the names εἴ for
epsilun, οὗ for omicrun, 6 for upsilun, and ὦ for umega; the present
nanies for these letters being late. Some Greek grammarians used
ὃ ψιλόν (plain ε) and ὗ ψιλόν (plain v) to distinguish ε and v from a
and a, which in their time had similar sounds.
VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS.
5. The vowels are a, ¢, ἢ, 4, 0, ὡς and υ. Of these,
e and o are always short; ἡ and ὦ are always long; a, ¢,
and v are long in some syllables and short in others,
whence they are called doubtful vowels.
6. N. Α, ε, ἡ, 0, and ὦ from their pronunciation are called open
vowels (a being the most open); «aud v are called close vowels.
7 The diphthongs (δύ φθογγοι, double-soundiny) are
At, av, εἰς EV, 01, OV, NY, UL, a, ἢν @- These (except uw)
are formed by the union of an open vowel with a close
one. The long vowels (a, 7, ὦ) with « form the (so
called) improper diphthongs a, 7, @ The Jonic dialect
has also au.
8. N. Besides the genuine εἰ (= ε Ὁ 1) and ov (=o 4 v) there are the
so-called spurious diphthongs εἰ and ov, which arise from contraction
(ec from ee, and ov from eo, o¢, or oo) or from compensative lengthening
(80) ; as in ἐποίει (for ἐποίεε), λέγειν (for Aeyeev, 565, 4), χρῦσοῦς (for
xpbceos), θείς (for θεντς, 79), τοῦ and τούς (190). In the fourth century
B.C. these caine to be written like genuine εἰ and ov; but in earlier
times they were written FE and 0, even in inscriptions which used H
and Q for é and 6. (See 27.)
9. N. The mark of diaeresis (διαίρεσις, separation), a double dot,
written over a vowel, shows that this does not form a diphthong with
the preceding vowel ; as in προϊέναι (προ-ιέναι), to go forward, 'Arpetdys,
son of Atreus (in Homer).
10. N. Ing, », », the « is now written and printed below the first
vowel, and is called gota subscript. But with capitals it is written in
the line; as in THI KQMQIAIAI, τῇ κωμῳδίᾳ, and in "Ὥιχετο, wxero.
This « was written as an ordinary letter as long as it was prunounced,
17) BREATUINGS. — CONSONANTS. 9
that is, until the first century B.C., after which it was sometimes
written (always in the line) and sometimes omitted. Our iota subd-
script is not older than the twelfth century A.D.
BREATHINGS.
11. Every vowel or diphthong at the beginning of
a word has either the rouyh breathing (‘) or the smooth
breathing (ἢ. The rough breathiug shows that the
vowel is aspirated, i.e. that it is preceded by the sound
h; the smooth breathing shows that the vowel is not
aspirated. Thus ὁρῶν, seeing, is pronounced hordn ;
but ὀρῶν, of mountains, is pronounced drén.
12. N. A diphthong takes the breathing, like the accent (109),
upon its second vowel. But a, ἢ, and w (10) have both breathing
and accent on the first vowel, even when the « is written in the
line. ‘Thus οἴχεται, εὐφραίνω, Αἵμων; but ῴχετο or "Ὥιχετο, ἄδω or
‘Ado, ἤδειν or Ἤιδειν. On the other hand, the writing of ἀΐδιος
CAiéios) shows that a διὰ do not form ἃ diphthong.
13. XN. The rough breathing was once denoted by H. When this
was taken to denote @ (which ouce was not distinguished from @),
half of it } was used for the rough breathing; and afterwards the
other half J was used for the smooth breathing. From these fragments
came the later signs ‘and ?.
14. N. In Attic words, initial v is always aspirated.
15. At the beginning of a word p is written 6; as in
ῥήτωρ (Latin rhetor), orator. In the middle of a word
pp is Sometimes written pp; as ἄῤῥητος, unspeakable ;
Πύῤῥος, Pyrrhus (pp = rrh).
CONSONANTS.
16. The simple consonants are divided into
labials, π, 8, $, μ,
palatals, x, y, x
linguals, 7, 6, 6, 0, d, ν, ρ.
17. Before κ, y, x, or ξ, gamma (y) had a nasal sound, like that
of n in anger or ink, and was represented by nin Latin; as ἄγγελος,
(Latin angelus), messenger; αγκῦρα, (ancora), anchor ; σφίγξ,
sphinz.
10 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [18
18, The double consonants are é, ψ, & Ἐ is composed of
κ ando; ψ, of ranudo. Z arises from a combination of ὃ
with a soft s sound; hence it has the effect of two con-
sonants in lengthening a preceding vowel (99).
19. By another classification, the consonants are divided
into semivowels and mutes.
20. ‘The semivowels are A, p, v, p, auld o, with nasal y (17).
OPEnese A, μη ν, and p are liquids,
p, v, and nasal y (17) are nasals,;
o is ἃ spirant (or sibilant)
F of the older alphabet (3) is also a spirant.
21. The mutes are of three orders : —
smooth mutes πὶ κ τ
middle mutes B y ὃ
rough mutes φ x 6
22. These mutes again correspond in the following
aa labial mutes (x-mutes) 7 B od
palatal mutes («-mutes) x y x
lingual mutes (r-mutes) τ ὃ 6
23, N. Mutes of the same order are called co-ordinate ; those of
the same class are called cognate.
24. N. The smooth and rough mutes, with o, & and y, are
called surd (hushed sounds); the other consonants aud the vowels
are called sonant (sounding).
25. The only consonants which can end a Greck word are
v,p, and s. If others are left at the end in forming words,
they are dropped.
26. N. The only exceptions are ἐκ and οὐκ (or οὐχ), which
have other forms, ἐξ and οὐ Final € and ψ (xo and mo) are no
exceptions.
27. The Greek alphabet above described is the Jonic, used by the
Asiatic lonians from a very early period, but first introduced officially
at Athens in 403 B.C. ‘The Athenians had previously used an alphabet
which had no separate signs for é@ 4, As, or ps. In this ὦ was used
for ὅ and é and also for the spurious εἰ (8); O for 6 and 6 and for spu-
rious ov (8); }1 was still an aspirate (4); XZ stood for =, and $2 for v.
Thus the Athenians of the tine of Pericles wrote EAOXZEN TEI
ΒΟΨΕῚ KAI TOI AEMOIL for ἔδοξεν τῇ βουλῇ καὶ τῷ δήμῳ, --- TO
@ZEPIZMA TO AEMO for τὸ ψήφισμα τοῦ S4#pov, —HEZ for Fs, —
98] PRONUNCIATION. 11
BEI for ἧ, --- ΠΕΜΠῈΝ for πέμπειν, --- ΧΡΥ͂ΣΟΣ for χρυσοῦς, --- ΤΟΥ͂ΤΟ
for both τοῦτο and τούτου, -- TOL NPYTANEZ for τοὺς πρυτάνεις, ---
ἌΡΧΟΣΙ for ἄρχουσι, --- ΔΕΌΣΟΝ for δεουσῶν, --- HONOZ for ὅπως, ---
YOLEN for ποιεῖν, -- ΤΡῈΣ for τρεῖς, τ ANG TO ΦΟΡΟ for ἀπὸ τοῦ
φόρου, —XEENOZ for ξένος or ξένους.
Ancient Pronunciation.}
28. 1. (Vowels.) The long vowels 4, ἡ, 7, and ὦ were pronounced
at the best periud much Jike @ in father, e in féte (French δ ar ὃ),
iin machine, and o in tone. Orizinally v had the sound of Latin ἃ
(our u in prune), but before the fourth century B.C. it had came to
that of French u or German ὦ. ‘The short vowels had the same sounds
as the long vowels, but shortened or less pralanged: this is hard te
express in English, as our short @, ¢, 7, and ὡς in pan, pen, pit, and poe,
pave sounds of a different nature from those of a, ὅ, ὃ. and 6, given
above. We have an approach to a, é, i, and ὁ in the second a in
rand father, French 6 in réa?, ὦ in verity, and ὁ in monastic, renvvate.
2. (Diphthongs.) We may assuine that the diplithongs originally
bad the sounds of their two vowcls, pronounced as one syllable. Our
ai in aisle, cw in feud, of in atl, wi in grit, will zive some idea of a,
ev, ot, And uw; and, ou in house of αν. Likewise the genuine εἰ must
have been pronounced originally as e+, somewhat like ed in rein (ef.
Hom. ᾿Ατρεΐδης, Attic "Arpeldys); and ov was a compound of o and wv.
But in the majority of cases εἰ and ov are written tor Simple sounds,
represented by the Athenians of the best period by E and Ὁ (see ὃ and
27). We do not know how these sounds were related to ordinary
ε and o on one side and to εἰ and ov on the other; but after the begin-
ving of the fourth century B.C. they appear to have agreed substantially
with εἰ and ov, since EI and OY are written for both alike. In εἰ the
sound of « appears to have prevailed more and more, 50 that by the
first century B.C. it had the sound of τ. On the other hand, ov became
(and still remains) a simple sound, like au in youth.
The diphthongs @, ἢν and w were probably always pronounced with the
chief force on the first vowel, so that the « gradually disappeared (see
10). The rare γι and wu probably had the sounds of ἡ and ὦ witb an
additional sonnd of v.
8. (Consonants.) Probably B, δι x. A, μὲ νη πὸ And p Were sounded
as ὃ, d, ἀν, 2, m,n, p, and r in English. Ordinary 7 was always hard,
like g in go; for nasal y, see 17, T was always like ¢ in tin or to;
o was generally (perhaps always) like 5 in so. Z is called a compound
of ὃ and «; but opinions differ whethec it was do or ¢6, but the ancient
testimony scems to point to od. In late Greek, {came to the sound of
English z, which it stil keeps. = represents xo, and y represents m0,
although the older Athenians felt an aspirate in both, as they wrote
xo for = and go fory. The rough consonants 6, x, and @ in the best
period were τὶ x, and πὶ followed by ἀν 60 that ἔνϑα was ἐν-τὰ, ἀφίημι
Was ἀ-πίημι, ἔχω Was ἐ-κὼ, etc. We cannot represent these rough
mutes in English; our nearest approach is in words Jike hothouse,
blockhead, and uphill, but here the kh is not in the same syllable with
the mute. In later Greek @ and ¢ came to the modern pronunciation
of th (in thin) and f, and x to that resembling German ch in machen.
1 For practical remarks on pronunciation, see the Preface.
12 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [29
CHANGES OF VOWELS.
29, (Lengthening.) Short vowels are often lengthened in
the formation and the inflection of words. Here the follow-
ing changes generally take place: —
& becomes y (ἃ after «, 4, or p)
€ “ ἢν i becomes ἴ,
ΕΞ Π ω, ὺ ἰὴ a
Thus ripdw (stem ripa-), fut. τίμήσω; éd-w, fut. ἐά-σω ; τέθημι
(stem 6e-); δέδωμε (stem 80-); ἱκετεύω, aor. ἱκέτευσα; πέφῦ-κα,
perf. of φύω, from root φῦ- (see φύσις).
80. (Compensative Lengthening.) 1. When one or more
consonants are dropped for euphony (especially before o),
a preceding short vowel is very often lengthened to make
up for the omission. Here
& becomes a, i becomes ἢ,
€ “ ει; v ss vw
ο ss ov,
Thus μέλᾶς for μελανς (78), tords for ἱσταντς (79), θείς for
θεντς (79), δούς for δοντς, λύουσι for λύοντσι, ἔκρινα for ἐκρινσα.
δεικνύς for δεικνυντς (79). Here εἰ and ov are the spurious diph-
thongs (8).
2. In the first aorist of liquid verbs (672), ἃ is lengthened to ἡ
(or ἃ) when a is dropped; as ἔφηνα for ἐφαν-σα, from φαίνω (gar),
ef, éoreA-ca, ἔστειλα, from στέλλω (στελ-).
81, (Strong and Weak Forms.) In some formations and
inflections there is au interchange in the root of e, οἱ, and 7,
—of εὖ, (sometimes ov,) and t,—and of y, (rarely w,) and 4.
The long vowels and diphthongs in such cases are called
strong forms, and the short vowels weak forms.
Thus λείπ-ω, λέλοιπ-α, ἔξλιπτον; Pevy-w, wedevy-a, Edvy-ov;
τήκ-ω, TETHK-O, ἐπτάκ-ην; ῥήγινῦμι, Ep-pwy-a, Ep-pdy-nv; ἐλεύσομαι
(74) ἐλ᾿ήλουθια, ἤλυθιον (see ἔρχομαι); so omevd-w, hasten, and
“arovd-y, haste; ἀρήγω, help, and ἀρωγός, helping. Compare English
Smile, smote, smi (smitien). (See 572.)
32, An interchange of the short vowels a, « and o takes
place in certain forms; as in the tenses of τρέπ-ω, τέτροφ-α,
ἐτράπ-ην, and in the noun τρόπτος, from stem τρεπ-. (See
643, 645, and 831.)
88] EUPHONY OF VOWELS. — CONTRACTION. 18
33. (Exchange of Quantity.) An exchange of quantity some-
times takes place between a long vowel and a succeeding short
one; as in epic νάός, temple, and Attic νεώς ; epic βασιλῆος, βασιλῆα,
king, Attic βασιλέως, Baorréa; epic μετήορος, in the air, Attic
μετέωρος; Μενέλαος, Attic Μενέλεως (200).
BUPHONY OF VOWELS.
Co.uision OF VoweE Ls. — Hiatus.
$4. A succession of two vowel sounds, not forming a
diphthong, was generally displeasing to the Athenians. In
the middle of a word this could be avoided by contraction
(85-41). Between two words, where it is called hiatus, it
eould be avoided by crasis (42-46), by elision (48-54) or
aphaeresis (55), or by adding a movable consonant (56-63)
to the former word.
Contraction OF VoWELs.
85. Two successive vowels, or a vowel and a diphthong,
may be united by contraction in a single long vowel or a
diphthong; φιλέω, Pra; φίλεε, φίλει; tiwac, τίμα. It seldom
takes place unless the former vowel is open (6).
86, The regular use of contraction is one of the charac-
teristics of the Attic dialect. It follows these general prin-
ciples : —
37. I. Two vowels which can form a diphthong (7)
simply unite in one syllable; as τείχεϊ, τείχει; yepai, yépac;
ῥάϊστος, ῥᾷστος.
38. II. When the two vowels cannot form ἃ diph-
thong, —
1. Two like vowels (i.e. two a-sounds, two e-sounds, or
two o-sounds, without regard to quantity) unite to form
the common long (ἃ, ἡ, orw). But ce gives εἰ (8), and oo
gives ov (8). Eg.
Μνάᾶ, μνὰ (184); φιλέητε, φιλῆτε; δηλόω, SAG; — but ἐφίλεε,
ἐφίλει; πλόος, πλοῦς.
14 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [39
2. When an o-sound precedes or follows an a- or an e-
sound, the two become w. But oc and eo give ov (8). Eg.
Δηλόητε, δηλῶτε; φιλέωσι, φιλῶσι; τίμάομεν, τἱμῶμεν; τἱμάωμεν
τιμῶμεν; -- but νόε, νοῦ; γένεος, γένους.
3. When an a-sound precedes or follows an e-sound, the
first (in order) prevails, and we have aor». Eg.
᾿τίμαε, ἐτίμα ; tipdyre, ripare; τείχεα, τείχη; Ἑρμέας, Ἑρμῆς.
4. A vowel disappears by absorption before a diphthong
beginning with the same vowel, and ¢ is always absorbed
before οἱ. In otlier cases, a simple vowel followed by a
diphthong is contracted with the first vowel of the diph-
thong; and a following τ remains as totu subscript, but a
following vu disappears. Eg.
Mvaat, μναῖ; μνάᾳ, μνᾷ; φιλέει, φιλεῖ; prey, Φιλῇ; δηλόοι,
δηλοῖ; νόῳ, νῷ; δηλόου, δηλοῦ; φιλέοι, φιλοῖ; χρύσεοι, χρῦσοϊ.
Tyne, τιμᾷ; τὶ μάῃ, τιμᾷ; Ζιμάοι, τιμῴ; τῖμάον, τιμῶ; φιλέου;
φιλοῦ; Aveat, Avy (39, 3); λύηαι, Ady; μεμνήοιο, μεμνῷο.
89. Exeeprions. 1. In contracts of the first and second de-
clensions, every short vowel before a, or before a long vowel or
a diphthong, is absorbed. But in the singudar of the first
declension εὰ is contracted regularly to 7 (after a vowel or p, to a).
(See 184.)
2. In the third declension ea becomes ἃ after εν) and ἃ or η after
torv. (See 229, 267, and 315.)
8. In the second person singular of the passive and middle, eat
(for egat) gives the conimou Attic form in εἰ as well as the regular
contract form in 4; as Aveat, Avy or Aver. (See 565, 6.)
4. In verbs in ow, oe gives ot, as δηλύεις, δηλοῖς; οἱ is found
also in the subjunctive for oy, as δηλόῃ, δηλοῖ.
5. ‘The spurious diphthong εἰ is contracted like simple ¢€; as
πλακύεις, πλακοῦς, cuke. Thus infinitives in aew and oev lose cin
the contracted forms; as rider, τιμᾶν; δηλόειν, δηλοῦν. (See
761.)
40. .1. The close vowel « is contracted with a following cin the
Tonic dative singular of nouns in es (see 255); and v is contracted
with ¢ or € in a few forms of nous in vs (see 257 and 258).
2. In some classes of nouns and adjectives of the third declension,
contraction is confined to certain cases; 560 226-263. Tor exceptions
in the contraction of verbs, see 406 and 497. Sce dialectic forms .of
verbs in aw, ew, and ow, in 784-786.
42] CONTRACTION. — CRASIS. 15
41. Table of Contractions.
ata=a yépaa, γέρα é+uo =o ὀστέῳ, ὀστῷ
atat=at μνάαι, proc nta=y ddnat, Ady
ata=o prada, μνᾷ Ξε = τὶμήεντι, τιμῆντι
ate =a ἐτίμαε, ἐτίμα [74 πὴ τὶμήεις, τιμῆς (39, 5)
Ξε Ξεᾳ τῖἴμάει, τιμᾷ; τιμάειν,! ἡ ἘἘῚ =n κλήτιθρον, κλῆθρον
οἱ ἃ τιἰμᾶν (39, 5) [η - οἱ τε ῳ μεμνηοίμην, μεμνῴ-
aty =a τίμαητε, Timare μὴν
atn =@ τίμαῃ, tine ἐπὶ τοῦ Χίος, Xtos
ae =a γέραϊ, γέραι ota =w αἰδόα, αἰδῶ; ἁπλόα,
a+. =a ypa-(dwy, γράδιον ora ἁπλᾶ (3%, 1)
ato =w τὶμάομεν, τιμῶμεν 10 - αἱ τε αἱ ἁπλύαι, ἁπλαῖ
ato Ξε ῳ τίἴμάοιμι, τἰμῴμι o+e =ovu νόε, νοῦ
atov=w τιμάην, τιμῶ | 9 - εἰ ξξ οἱ δηλόει. δηλοῖ (39, 4);
atw =w τίμάω, Tine οἵου δηλόειν, δηλοῦν (38),
eta =y γένεα, γένη; Ἑρμέας, 9)
ord Ἑρμῆς; ὀστέα, ὀστᾶ 19 +7 = δηλόητε, δηλῶτε
(39,1) io ty =w διδόῃς, διδῷς ; ἀπλόῃ,
etar=x Ateu, λύῃ; χρύσεαι, Οὐ ἢ ἁπλῇ (39,1)
OY ae χρυσαῖ (99,1 and 3) hd te τοι πειθόι, πειθοῖ
ete sa ἐφίλεε, ἐφίλει [9 Ἔ Ξξξου νόος, νοῦς
ε Ἔ εἰ τ εἰ. φιλέει, φιλεῖ [ὁ - οἱ Ξε οὐ δηλόοι, δηλοῖ
o+ou= ov δηλόου, δηλοῦ
εἜη =y φιλέητε, φιλῆτε ᾿ούν
ota =o δηλόω, δηλῶ
|
ety =n prey, φιλῇ |
ete =a recyel, τείχει [ο + τεῳ ἁπλύῳ, ἁπλῷ
εἜο =ov γένεος, γένους | Rarely the following : ~
Efoa=a φιλέοι, φιλοῖ ἴωτξα =w ἥρωα, ἥρω
€+ov= ou φιλέου, φιλοῦ Ἰώ -ἘπῚ τω ἧρωες, ἥρως
ef-uv =a ἔύ, εὖ eee =o ἥρωι, Ypw
eto =w φιλέω, φιλῶ lw +0 =w σῶος, σῶς
Crass.
42, A vowel or diphthong at the end of a word may be
contracted with one at the beginning of the following word.
This occurs especially in poetry, and is called crasis (κρᾶσις,
minature). The cordnis (?) is placed over the contracted
syllable. The first of the two words is generally an article, |
ἃ relative (6 or Δ), καί, mpd, or ὦ,
16 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [43
43. Crasis generally follows the laws of contraction, with
these modifications : —
1. A diphthong at the end of the first word drops its last
vowel before crasis takes place.
2. The article loses its final vowel or diphthong in crasis
before a; the particle τοί drops o before a; and καί drops
at before all vowels and diphthongs except « and a. But we
have κεὶ and κεὶς for καὶ εἰ and καὶ εἰς.
44. ‘The following are examples of crasis : —
To o ὄνομα, τοὔνομα; τὰ ἀγαθά, τἀγαθά; τὸ ἐναντίον, τοὐναντίον;
ὁ ἐκ, οὗκ; ὃ ἐπί οὑπί; τὸ ἱμάτιον, θοἰμάτιον (ih })} ἃ ἄν, Gv; καὶ ἄν,
κἄν; καὶ εἶτα, κἄτα; pe ὁ ἀνήρ, ἀνήρ; οἱ ἀδελφοί, ἀδελφοί; ; τῷ ἀνδρί,
τἀνδρί; ; τὸ αὐτό, ταὐτό; τοῦ αὐτοῦ, ταὐτοῦ: — τοι ἄν, τᾶν (μῶτοι & ἂν,
μεντἄν); i Τοι ἄρα, τἄρα; — καὶ αὐτύς, καὐτύς; καὶ αὕτη, χαύτη (93) ;
καὶ ἐστι, κᾶστι; καὶ εἰ, κεἰ; καὶ οὐ. κοὐ; καὶ οἱ, χοὶ; καὶ αὖ, xai. So
ἐγὼ οἶδα, ἐγῴδα; ὦ ἄνθρωπε, ὦνθρωπε; τῇ ἐπαρὴ, τἡπαρή. Likewise
we have προύργου, helpful, for πρὸ ἔργου, ahead in work ; cf. φροῦδος
for πρὸ ὁδοῦ (13).
45. N. If the first word is an article or relative with the rough
breathing, this breathiig is retained on the contracted syllable,
taking the place of the coronis; as in av, ἁνήρ.
46. N. In erasis, ἕτερος, other, takes the form depos, — whence
ἅτερος (for ὁ ἕτερος), θἀτέρου (for τοῦ ἑτέρου), θἀτέρῳ, ete. (43,2; 93).
Sypizesis,
47. 1. In poetry, two successive vowels, not forming a
diphthong, are sometimes united in pronunciation for the
sake of the metre, although no contraction appears in writ-
ing. ‘This is called synizésis (συνίζησις, settling together).
Thus, θεοί may make one syllable in poetry; στήθεα or
χρὕσέῳ may make two.
2. Synizesis may also take the place of crasis (42), when the
first word ends in a long vowel or a diphthong, especially with
ἐπεί, since, μή, nol, ἢ, or, ἦ (interrog.), and ἐγώ, J. Thus, ἐπεὶ οὐ
may make two syllables, μὴ εἰδέναι may make three; μὴ οὐ always
makes one syllable in poetry.
T/Lision.
48. A short final vowel may be dropped when the next
word begins with a vowel. ‘This is called elision. An apos-
trophe (?) marks the omission, E.g.
66] ELISION AND APHAERESIS. 17
Δι᾿ ἐμοῦ for διὰ ἐμοῦ; ἀντ᾽ ἐκείνης for ἀντὶ ἐκείνης ; λέγοιμ᾽ dv for
λέγοιμι ἂν; ἀλλ᾽ εὐθύς for ἀλλὰ εὐθύς , ἐπ᾿ ἀνθρώπῳ for ἐπὶ ἀνθρώπῳ.
So ἐφ᾽ ἑτέρῳ; νύχθ᾽ ὅλην for νύκτα ὅλην (92).
49. Elision is especially frequent in ordinary prepositions, con-
junctions, and adverbs; but it may also be used with short vowels
at the end of nouns, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs.
60. lision never occurs in
(a) the prepositions περί and mpd, except wepf lu Aeolic (rarely
before cin Attic),
(2) the conjunction ὅτι,
(c) monosyllables, except those ending in ¢,
(d) the dative siugular in ¢ of the third declension and the
dative plural in oz, except in epic poetry,
(e) words ending in v.
51. N. The epic and comic poets sometimes elide at in the verbal
endings at, σαι, rar, and σθαι (Gat). Soot in οἴμοι, and rarely in pot.
52. N. Elision is often neglected in prose, especially by certain
writer's (as Thucydides). Others (as Isocrates) are more strict in its use.
53. (Apocope.) The poets sometimes cut off a short vowel before
aconsonant. ‘Thus in Homer we tind ἄν, κάτ, and πάρ, for ἀνά, κατά,
and παρά. Both in composition and alone, κάτ assimilates its r to ἃ
following consonant and drops it before two consonants, and ν in ἄν
is subject to the changes of 78; as κάββαλε and κάκτανε, for κατέβαλε
and naréxrave, — but κατθανεῖν for καταθανεῖν (U8, 1), κἀκ κορυφήν, xay
γόνυ, Kam πεδίον; ἀμ-βάλλω, ἀλ-λέξαι, ἂμ πεδίον͵ ἂμ φόνον. So ὑβ-βάλλειν
(once) for ὑπο-βάλλειν.
64. A short final vowel is generally elided also when it
comes before a vowel in forming a compound word. Here
no apostrophe is used. Eg.
᾿Απ-αιτέω (ἀπό and αἰτέω). Sé€Badrov (διά aud ἔβαλον). So ἀφ-
apew (ἀπὸ and αἱρέω, 92); δεχ-ήμερος (δέκα and ἡμέρα).
APHAERESIS.
55. In poetry, a short vowel at the beginning of a word is
sometimes dropped after a long vowel or a diphthons, especially
after μή. not, and yar. This is called aphaeresis (ἀφαίρεσις, taking
off). Thus, μὴ yd for μὴ ἐγώ; ποῦ στιν for ποῦ ἐστιν; ἐγὼ ᾽φάνην
for ἐγὼ ἐφάνην; ἢ ᾽μοῦ for ἢ ἐμοῦ.
Μοναπι Consonants.
56. Most words ending in -σὶ (including -& and -ψι), and
all verbs of the third person ending in εν, generally add ν
18 LETS ERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [57
when the next word begins with a vowel. This is called
ν movable. Eg.
Πᾶσι δίδωσι ratra; but πᾶσιν ἔδωκεν ἐκεῖνα. So δίδωσί μοι; but
δίδωσιν ἐμοί.
57. WN. Ἐστί takes ν movable, like third persons in σι.
58. N. The third person singular of the pluperfect active in -« has
ν movable; as ἤ δει(ν), ke knew. But contracted imperfects in -e
(for -εε), as ἐφίλει, never take yin Attle.
59. N. The epic κέ (for dv) is generally κέν before a vowel, and
the poetic wy (enclitic) has an epic form νύ. Many adverbs in -θεν
(as πρόσθεν) have poetic forms in -θε.
60. N. N movable may be added at the end of a sentence or of
a line of poetry. It may be added even before a cousonant in
poetry, to make position (99).
61. N. Words which may have y movable are not elided in prose,
except ἐστί
62. Οὐ, nol, becomes οὐκ before a smooth vowel, and οὐχ
before a rough vowel; as οὐ θέλω, οὐκ αὐτός, οὐχ οὗτος. Μή
inserts κ in μηκ-έτι, 20 longer, by the analogy of οὐκ-έτι.
63. Οὕτως, thus, ἐξ (és), from, and some other words may
drop s before a consonant; as οὕτως ἔχει, οὕτω δοκεῖ, ἐξ ἄστεως,
ἐκ πύλεως.
METATHESIS AND SYNCOPE.
64, 1. Metathesis is the transposition of a short vowel
and a liquid in a word; as in κράτος and κάρτος, strength ;
θάρσος and θράσος, courage.
2. The vowel is often Jengthened; as in βέβλη κα (from stem
Bad-), τέτμη-κα (from stem rep-), θρώ-σκω (from stem Oep-). (See
619.)
65. Syncope is the dropping of a short vowel between
two consonants; as in πατέρος, πατρός (274); πτήσομαι for
πετήσομαι (650).
66. N. (a) When pu is brought before p or A by syncope or
metathesis, it is stren¥thened by inserting β; as peonpBpia, midday,
for pernu(e)p (μέσος and ἡμέρα); μέμβλωκα, epic perfect of
βλώσκω, go, from stem pod-, μλο-- μλω- (636), μειμλω-κα, μέμβλω.κα.
Thus the vulgar chanley (far chimney) generally becoines chimbley.
(δ) At the beginning of ἃ word such a p is dropped before Bi
12] CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 19
as in βροτός, mortal, from stem pop-, μρο- (ef. Lat. mortor, die),
μβροτος, βροτὸς (but the μι appears in coniposition, as in ἄμβροτος,
immortal). So βλίττω, take honey, from stem μελιτ- of μέλι, honey
(cf. Latin mel), by syncope pAtr-, Αβλιτ-, βλιτ-, BAcrrw (582).
67. N. So δ is inserted after y in the oblique cases of ἀνήρ,
man (277), when the ν is brought by syucope before p; as ἀνέρος
(dy-pos), ἀνδρός.
CHANGES OF CONSONANTS.
DouBiine or Consonants,
68. 1. A rough mute (21) is never doubled; but πφ, xx,
and 76 are always written for φφ, xx, and 66. Thus Zarda,
Βάκχος, κατθανεῖν, not Σαφφώ, Baxyos, καθθανεῖν (53). So in
Latin, Sappho, Bacchus.
2. A middle mute is never doubled in Attic Greek. In yy the
first y is always nasal (17).
3. The later Attie has rr for the earlier go in certain
forms; aS πρᾶττω for πράσσω, ἐλάττων for ἐλάσσων; θάλαττα
for θάλασσα. Also rr (not for co) and even 76 occur ina few
other words; as ᾿Αττικός, ᾿Ατθίς, Attic. See also 72.
69. Initial ρ is doubled when a vowel precedes it in form-
ing a compound word; as in ἀναρρίπτω (ἀνά and ῥίπτω). So
after the syllabic augment; as in éppirrov (imperfect of pirrw).
But after a diphthong it remains single; as in evpoos, εὔρους.
Eupnoxic Cancers OF Conxsonayrs.
70. ‘fhe following rules (71-95)apply chiefly to changes
made in the final consonant of a stem in adding the endings,
especially in forming and inflecting the tenses of verbs and
cases of nouns, and to those made in forming compounds : —
71. (Mutes before other Mutes.) Before a 7-mute (22), a
w-mute or a «mute is made codrdinate (23), and another
t-mute becomes σι E.q.
Τέτριπται (for rerpiB-rar), δέδεκται (for δεδεχ-ται), πλεχθῆναι
(for πλεκ-θηναι). ἐλείφθην (for ἐλειπ-θην), γράβδην (for γραφ-δην).
Πέπεισται (πεπειθ-ται), ἐπείσθην (ἐπειθ- θην), Fora (ηδ-ται), ἴστε
(ἰδ. τε), χαριέστερος (χαριετ-τερος).
72. Ν, Ἔκ, from. in composition retains x unchanged; as in
dk-Kpive, ex-Spouy, éx-Geors. For ττ and 76, see 68, 3.
20 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [13
78. N. No combinations of different mutes, except those in-
cluded in 683 and in TI (those in which the second is τ, 3, or 8),
are allowed in Greek. When any such arise, the first mute is
dropped ; as in πέπεικα (for πεπειθικα). When γ stands before x,
y or x, ἃ5 in guy-yéw (σύν and yéw), it is not a mute but a nasal (26).
74, (Mutes before 2.) No mute can stand before o except
mand «x. A wmute with o forms Ψ, a x-mute forms é and a
r-nute is dropped. Eg.
Τρίψω (for rpiB-cw), γράψω (for ypagd-cw), λέξω (for Acy-ow),
πείσω (for πειθσω), dow (for ἀδισω), σώμασι (for σωματ-σι), ἐλπίσι
(for ἐλπιδισι). So φλέψ (for φλεβ-ς), ἐλπίς (for ἐλπιδ-ς), νύξ
(for νυκτ-ς). So χαρίεσι (for χαριετ-σι, 331). See examples under
209, 1.
75. (Mutes before M.) Before p, ἃ 7-mute becomes p, and
a «mute becomes y. Εἰ.
Λέλεμμαι (for λελειπ-μαι), τέτρίμμαι (for τετρῖβ- μαι), γέγραμμαι
(lor yeypad-pat), πέπλεγμαι (for πεέπλεκ-μαι), τέτευγμαι (for re
TEvX-paL).
76. N. But xz can stand when they come together by metathesis
(84) ; as in κέικμη-κα (κάμ- vw). Both « and x may stand before μ in
the formation of nouns; 85 in ἀκμή, edge, ἀκμών, anvil, αἱχμή, spear-
point, δραχμή, drachma.
᾿Εκ here also remains unchanged, as in ἐκ- μανθάνω (cf. 72).
77, N. When yyu or μμμ would thus arise, they are shortened to
yu OY uy; as ἐλέγχω, ἐλήλεγ-μαι (for ἐληλεγχ-μαι, ἐληλεγγ-μαι); κάμπτω,
κέκαμμαι (for κέκαμπ-μαι, κεκαμμ- μαι); πέμπω, πέπεμμαι (fOr πεπέμπ-μαι,
πεέπεμμεμαι. (See 489, 3.)
78. (N before other Consonants.) 1. Before a -inute »
beeomes »; before a x-mute it becomes nusal y (17); before
a7-mute it is unchanged. Εἰ.
Ἐμπίπτω (for ἐν-πιπτω), συμβαίνω (for συν-βαινω), ἐμφανής (for
év-davys) ; συγχέω (for συνιχεω), συγγενής (for cur-yevys) ; ἐν-τρέπω.
2. Betove another liquid ν is changed to that liquid. Εἰ.
᾿᾽Ἐλλεύπω (ἴον év-Actra), ἐμμένω (for éy-pevw), συρρέω (for ovr pew),
σύλλογος (for συν-λογος).
3. N before σ is generally dropped and the preceding
vowel is lengtheneh (30), @ to a, ε to εἰ, ο to ov. Eg.
Μέλας (for μελαν-ς), εἷς (for év-3), λύουσι (for Ado-vat): see
210, 2; 556, 5. So λύουσα (for Avovr-ta, Avov-ca), λυθεῖσα (for
λυθεντ-ια, λυθεν-σα), πᾶσα (for ravT-a, mdv-ca): see 84, 2.
79. The combinations vr, vd, v@, when they occur before
84] EUPHONIC CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 21
σ in inflections, are always dropped, and the preceding vowel
is lengthened, as above (78, 3). Eg.
Πᾶσι (for παντ-σι), γίγᾶς (for yeyavrs), δεικνύς (for δεικνυντς),
λέουσι (for λεοντ-σι), τιθεῖσι (for τιθεντ-σι), τιθείς (for τιθεντ-ς),
δούς (for δοντ-ς), σπείσω (for σπενδ-σω), πείσομαι (for πενθ-σομαι).
For nominatives in wy (for ovr-), see 209, 8 (cf. 212, 1).
80. N. N standing alone before ot of the dative plural is dropped
without lengthening the vowel; as δαίμοσι (for δαιμον-σι).
81. N. The preposition ἐν is not changed before p or a; as
ἐνράπτω, ἔνσπονδος, ἐνστρέφω.
Συύν becomes συσ- before o and a vowel, but συ- before σ and ἃ
consonant or Lefore {; as σύσ-σιτος, σύστημα, σύζυγος.
82. N. Wav and πάλιν may retain y in composition before σ or
change it to 0; as πάν-σοφος OY πάσσοφος, παλίγισκιος, παλίσσυτος.
83. Most verbs in yo have σ fur v before μαι in the perfect
middle (648); as φαίνω, πέφασ-μαι (for mehav-put); and the y re-
appears before τ and 6, as in πέφαν-ται, πέφαν-θε. (Sve 489, 2; 700.)
84. (Changes before «.) The following changes occur when
t (representing au original j) follows the final consonant of
a stem.
1. Palatals (x, y, x) and sometimes τ and @ with such ane be
come oo (later Attic rr); as φυλάσστ-ω (stem φυλακ-) fur φυλακτω;
ἥσσων, worse, for ἡκ-ι ων (361, 2); τάσστ-ω (Tay-), for ray--w (550);
ταράσστ-ω (rapay-), for rapaxt-w; Kopico-w (xopv6-), for kopy6-t-w;
Κρῆσσα, for Kpyr-ta.
Thus is formed the feminine in ἐσσὰ of adjectives in εἰς, from a
stem in er-, er-ta becoming ἐσσα (331, 2).
2. Nr with this « becomes vo in the feminine of participles and
adjectives (331, 2; 337, 1), in which y is regularly dropped with
lengthening of the preceding vowel (78, 3); a8 παντ-, πανττία, πάνσα
(Thessalian and Cretan), πᾶσα; λῦοντ-, λύοντ-ια, λύον-σα, λύουσα.
3. A (sometimes y or yy) with ε forms ζ; as φράζ-ω (ppud-), for
$padt-w (585); xopil-w (κομιδ.), for κομιδω ; κράζω (xpay-), for
κραγιτω (559); μέζων (lon.) or μείζων (comp. of μέγας, great),
for pey-t-wv (361, 4).
4. A with ¢ forms AA; as oréAA-w (στελ-), for ored-t-w;
ἄλλο-μαι (aA-), leap, for ἀλικομαι (cl. Lat. salio); ἄλλος, other, for
ἁλιιος (cf. Lat. alius). (See 593.)
5. After ay or ap the ε is transposed, and is then contracted
with a to at; as φαίντ-ω (φαν-), for dari-w; yxuijrw (xap-), for
Xapi-w; μέλαιν-α (μελαν-), fem. of μέλας (826), for μελαν-α.
22 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [85
6. After ἐν, ep, ἐν, tp, vy, or up, the « disappears, and the preced-
ing «4 or uv is lengthened (ες to εἰ); as τείντω (rev-), for rev-tw;
χείρων (stem yep-), worse, for χέριτων ; κείρτω (κε: ), for Keprew;
κρίνω (κριν- ) ἴοι Kpty-t-w; οἰκτίρω (oixrip-), for οἰκτίρω; duivw
(dpuv-), for ἀμυν-ι-ω; σύρω, for cupew. So σώτειρα (fem. of σωτήρ,
saving, saviour, stem σωτερ-), for gurep-eu. (See 594 and 596.)
85. (Omission of Σ and fF.) Many forms ave explained by the
omission of an original spirant (s or ¢), which is seen sometimes
in earlier forms in Greek and sometimes in kindred languages.
86. (3.) At the beginning of a word, an original 8 sometimes
appears as the rough breathing. E.g.
“lornpt, place, for σιστημι, Jat. sisto; ἥμισυς, half, cf. Lat.
semi; ἔζομαι, sit (from root ἐδ- σεδ-), Lat. sed-co; ἑπτά, seven, Lat.
Septem.
87. N. In some words both σ᾽ and £ have disappeared ; as ὅς, his,
for σρος, suus; ἡδύς, sweet (from reot ae for σρὰδ:), Lat. suavis.
88. In some inflections, σ is dropped between two vowels.
1, Thus, in stems of nouns, eg- atid ag- drop o before a vowel
of the aoe as γένος, race (stem -yeveo-), gen. -yéve-os for γένεστος.
(See 226.)
3: The middle endings gat and go often drop o (565, 6); as
Ave-cat, Ateat, Ady or λύει (30,3); CATE. ἐλύεο, ἐλύου; but o is
retained in such μὲ- forms as ἵστατσαι and ἔστατσο. (See also 664.)
89. In the first aorist active and middle of liquid verbs, o is
generally dropped before a or αμην; as φαίνω (φαν-), aor. ἔφην a
for ἐφανσ-α, ἐφην-άμην for ἐφανσ-αμην. So ὀκέλλω (ὀκελ-), aur.
oxur-a for ὠκελσ-α; but poetic κέλλω has ἔκελστα. (See 672.)
90, ((4) Some of the cases in which the omission of vau (or
digamma) appears in inflections are these : —
1. In the augment of certain verbs; as 2 aor. εἶδον, saw, from
root td (Lat. vid-eo), for épidov, ἐτιδον, εἶδον : see also the exam
ples in 539.
2. In verbs in ew of the Second Class (574), where ev hecame
«¢ and finally εἰ as ῥέω, flow (stem ῥευ-, peg-), fut. ῥεύσομαι.
See also 601.
3. In certain nouns of the third declension, where final v of the
stem becomes ¢, which is dropped; as ναῦς (vav-), gen. va-ds for
vav-os, νᾶ ρ-ος (269); see βασιλεύς (205). See also 256.
91. The Aeolic and Dorie retained ¢ long after it disappeared
in Ionic and Attic. ‘The following are a few of the many words
in which its former presence is known: —
961 EUPHONIC CILANGES OF CONSONANTS. 23
Bots, ox (Lat. bov-is), ἔαρ, spring (Lat. ver), δῖος, divine (divus),
ἔργον, work (Germ. werk), ἐσθής, garment (lat. vestis), ἕσπερος,
evening (vesper), Is, strength (vis), κληΐς (Dor. κλάΐς), key (elavis),
ols, Sheep (ovis), οἶκος house (vicus), οἶνος, wine (vinum), σκαιός, left
(scaevus).
92. (Changes in Aspirates.) When a smooth inute (7, x, τ)
is brought before a rough vowel (either by elision or in
forming ἃ compound), it is itself made rough. Εἰ.
᾿Αφίημι (for ἀπ-ΐημι), καθαιρέω (for xar-aipew), ἀφ᾽ ὧν (for ἀπὸ
ὧν), νύχθ᾽ ὅλην (ἴον νύκτα ὅλην, 48; 71).
93. N. So in crasis (see examples in 44). Here the rough
breathing aay affect even a cousonant not iinmediately preced-
ing it; as in φροῦδος, gone, from πρὸ ὁδοῦ; φρουρύς, watchman
(προ δρος).
94. N. ‘The Tonic generally does not observe this principle in
writing, but has (for example) da’ οὗ, ἀπίημε (from ἀπό and ἴημι).
95. ‘The Greeks generally avoided two rough consonants
in successive syllables. ‘Lhus
1. In reduplicatious (521) an initial rough mute is always
made smooth. Εἰ.
Πέφῦκα (for φεφῦκα), perfect of diw; κέχηνα (for χεχηνα), perf.
of χάσκω; τέθηλα (for θεθηλα), perf. of θάλλω. So in τίθημι (for
θιεθημι), 794, 2.
2. The ending 6 of the first aorist imperative passive
becomes rafter θη- of the tense stem (757,1). Eg.
AvOnre (ἴον λυθη-θ.), φάνθητι (for pavOn-h) ; but 2 aor. φάνηθι
(757, 2).
3. In the aorist passive ἐτέθην from τίθημι (6e-), and in ἐτύθην
from θύω (θυ-) Be aud θυ become re and rv before θην.
4. A similar change oceurs in ἀμπ-έχω (for dug-exw) and ἀμπ-
ἔἴσχω (for ἀμφ:ισχω), clothe, and in éxeyeipia (ἔχω and χείρ), truce.
So an initial aspirate is lost in ἔχω (stem éx- for vex-, 589), but
reappears in fut. ἕξω.
5. There is a transfer of the aspirate in a few verbs which are
supposed to have had originally two rough consonants in the stem;
as τρέφω (stem τρεφ- for Oped-), nourish, fut. θρέψω (662); τρέχω
(τρεχ- for Opex-), run, fut. θρέξομαι ; ἐτάφην, from θάπτω (ταφ- for
Oad-), bury; see also θρύπτω, τύφω, and stem θαπ- in the Catalogue
of Verbs. So in θρίξ (224). hair, gen. τριχός (stem τριχ- for θριχ-);
and in ταχύς, swift, consparative θάσσων for θαχ-ιων (84, 1). Here
24 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [96
the first aspirate reappears whenever the second is lost by any
euphonic change.
In some forms of these verbs both rough consonants appear; as
€-Opep-Onv, θρεφ-θῆναι, τε-θράφ-θαι, τε-ϑάφ:θαι, ἐ θρύφ- θην. (See 709.)
SYLLABLES.
96. A Greek word has as many syllables as it has
separate vowels or diphthongs. The syllable next to
the last is called the penult (paen-ultima, almost last);
the one before the penult is called the antepenult.
97. The following rules, based on ancient tradition, are now
generally observed in dividing syllables at the end of a line: —
1. Single consonants, combinations of consonants which can begin
a word (which inay be seen from the Lexicon), aud mutes followed
ly μ or y, are placed at the beginning of a syllable. Other combina-
tions of consonants are divided. Thus, é-yw, ἐ-γώ, Gore pa, νέκταρ,
ἀκμή, Scopes, μι-κρόν, mpd-ypa-ros, πρᾶσ-σω, ἐλ-πίς, ἔν-δον, ἄρ-μα-τα.
2. Compound words are divided into their original parts; but
when the final vowel of a preposition has been elided in composi-
tion, the compound is sometimes divided like a simple word: thus
mpoo-d-yw (from πρὸς and ἄγω); Lut wa-pd-yw or παρ-άγω (from
παρά and ἄγω).
Qtuannty oF SYLLABLES.
98. A syllable is long by nature (φύσει) when it has
along vowel or a diphthong; as in τιμή, κτείνω.
99. 1. A syllable is long by position (θέσει) when its
vowel is followed by two consonants or a double con-
sonant; asin ἵσταντες, τράπεξα, ὄρτυξ.
2. The length of the vowel itself is not affected by position.
Thus a was sounded as long in πράσσω, mpaypa, and πρᾶξις, but
as short in τάσσω, τάγμα, and τάξις.
3. One or both of the consonants which make position may he
in the next word; thus the second syHable in οὗτός φησιν and in
κατὰ στόμα is long by position.
100. When a vowel short by nature is followed by a
mute and a liquid, the syllable is common (i.e. it may be
either long or short); as in τέκνον, ὕπνος, ὕβρις. But
in Attic poetry such a syllable is generally short; in
other poetry it is generally long.
106] QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. — ACCENT. 25
101. N. A middle mute (8, y, 5) before p or ν, and generally
before A, lengthens a preceding vowel; as in dyvas, βιβλών, δόγμα.
102. N. To allow a preceding vowel to be short, the mute and
the liquid must be in the same word, or in the same part of a
compound. ‘Thus ¢ in ἐκ is long when a liquid follows, either in
composition or iu the next word ; as ἐκλέγω, ἐκ νεῶν (both _ u _).
103. ‘The quantity of most syllables can be seen at once.
Thus 7 and ὦ and all diphthongs are long by nature; «and ὁ
are short by nature. (See 5.)
104. When a,:,and v are not long by position, their quan-
tity must generally be learned by observing the usage of
poets or from the Lexicon. But it is to be remembered that
1. Every vowel arising from contraction or crasis 15 long;
asa in γέρᾶ (for γέμαα), ἄκων (for géexwv), and κἄν (for καὶ dv).
2. The endings as and us are long when ν or vr has been
dropped before o (79).
3. The accent often shows the quantity of its own vowel,
or of vowels in following syllables.
Thus the cirewuflex on xvioa, sanor, shows that ε 15 long and a
is short; the acute on χώρα, dad, shows that a is long; on rivess
who? that iis short; the acute on βασιλείᾳ, kingdom, shows that
the finalais long, on βασέλεια, queen, that final a is short. (See
106, 3; ΕΠ’ 112.)
105. ‘The quantity of the terminations of nouns and verbs will
be stated below in the proper places.
ACCENT.
GexeitaL Paixcirure
106. 1. There are three accents,
the acute (7), as λόγος, αὐτός,
the grave (Ὁ). as αὐτὸς ἔφη (115, 1),
the circumflex (7 or 7), as τοῦτο, τιμῶν.
2. The acute can stand only on one of the last three
syllables of a word, the circumflex only on one of the
last two, and the grave only on the last.
8. The circumflex can stand only on a syllable Jong
by nature.
26 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. {107
107. 1. The Greek accent was not simply a stress accent (like ours),
but it raised the musical pitch or tone (τόνος) of the syllable on which
it fell. This appears in the terms τόνος and προσῳδία, which designated
the accent, and also in ὀξύς, sharp, and βαρύς, grave, flat, which described
it, (See 110,1 and 3.) As the language declined, the musical accent
gradually changed to a stress aceent, which is now its only represen:
tative in Greek as in other luiguages.
2. The marks of accent were invented by Aristophanes of Byzan-
tium, an Alexandrian scholar, about 200 B.C., in order to teach for-
eigners the correct accent in pronouncing Greek. By the ancient theary
every syllable not having either the acute or the circuinflex was said to
have the grave accent; and the circumflex, originally formed thus 7 >,
was said to result from the union of an acute and a following grave,
108. N. The grave accent is written only in place of the acute
in the case mentioned in 115, 1, and occasionally on the indefinite
pronoun tis, τὲ (418).
109, N. The accent (like the breathing) stands on the second
vowel of a diphthong (12); as in αἴρω, μοῦσα, τοὺς αὐτούς. But in
the improper diphthongs (a, y, w) it stands on the first vowel even
when the eis written in the line; as in τιμῇ, ἁπλῷ, Ὧι (a), Ὦιξα
(ᾧξα).
110. 1. A word is called ozytone (ὀξύ-τονος, sharp-toned)
when it has the acute on the last syllable, as βασιλεύς ;
paroxytone, when it has the acute on the penult, as βασιλέως ;
proparoxytone, when it has the acute on the antepenult, as
βασιλεύοντος.
2. A word is called perispomenon (περισπώμενον) when it
has the circumfex on the last syllable, as ἐλθεῖν; properis-
pomenon, when it has the circumflex on the penult, as μοῦσα.
3. A word is called barytone (Bupv-rovos, yrave or slat
toned) when its last syllable has no accent (107, 2). Of
course, all paroxytones, proparoxytones, and properispo-
mena are at the same time barytones.
4. When a word throws its aecent as far back as possible
(111), it is said to have recessive accent. ‘his is especially
the case with verbs (130). (See 122.).
111, The antepenult, if accented, takes the acute.
But it can have no accent if the last syllable is long by
nature or ends in ξ ory; as πέλεκυς, ἄνθρωπος, προφύλαξ.
112. An accented penult is circumflexed when it is
long by nature while the last syllable is short by nature;
117] PRINCIPLES OF ACCENT, 27
as μῆλον, νῆσος, ἡλιξ. Otherwise it takes the acute;
as λόγος, τούτων.
113. Ν. Final αὐ and οἱ are counted as short in determining the
accel; 85 ἄνθρωποι, νῆσοι: except in the optative, and in οἴκοι, αἱ
home; a8 τιμήσαι, ποιήσοι (NOt τίμησαι OY ποίησοι).
114 Ν. Genitives in ews and ἐὼν from nouns in ἐς and us of the
third declension (251), all cases of nouns and adjectives in ws and wy
of the Attic second declension (198), and the Ionic genitive in ew of the
first (188, 3), allow the acute ou the antepenult; as εὔγεως, πόλεως,
Τήρεω (THons). So some compound adjectives in ws; aS ὑψίέςκερως,
high-horned. For the acute of ὥσπερ, οἵδε, etc., 566 146.
115. 1. An oxytone changes its acute to the grave
before other words in the same sentence; aS τοὺς trovn-
povs ἀνθρώπους (for τούς πονηρούς ἀνθρώπους).
2, This change is not made before enclitics (143) nor before an
elided syllable (18), nor in the interrogative ris, τί (418). It is not
made before a colon: before a comma modern usage differs, and
the tradition is uncertain.
116. (Anastrophe.) Dissyllabic prepositions (regularly
oxytone) throw the accent back ou the penult in two cases.
This is called anastrophe (ἀναστροφή, turning back). It occurs
1. When such a preposition follows its case; as in τούτων πέρι
(for περὶ τούτων), about these.
This ocenrs in prose only with περί, but in the poets with all the
dissyllabic prepositions except ἀνά, διά, ἀμφί, and ἀντί In Homer
it occurs also when a preposition follows a verb from which it 15
separated by tests; as ὀλέσας dao, having destroyed.
2. When a preposition stands for itself compounded with ἐστίν;
as πάρα for πάρεστιν, ἔνι for ἔνεστιν (ἐνί being poetic for ἐν). Here
the poets have ἄνα (for ἀνά-στηθι), up !
Accenr or Conrractep SyLtiaBLes axp ΕΠ. Worps,
117. A contracted syllable is accented if either of the
original syllables had an accent. A contracted penult or
antepenult is accented regularly (111; 112). A contracted
final syllable is cireumflexed; but if the original word was
oxytone, the acute is retained. E.g.
Tipwpevos from τὶ μαύμενος, φιλεῖτε from φιλέετε, φιλοῖμεν from
φιλέοιμεν, φιλούντων from φιλεόντων, τιμῶ from ripdw; but βεβώς
from βεβαώς.
28 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [118
This proceeds from the ancient principle that the circumflex
comes from ’+* (107, 2), never froin ‘+’; so that τιμάὼ gives τιμῶ,
but BeBaus gives βεβώς.
118. N. If neither of the original syllables had an accent, the
contracted form is accented without regard to the contraction; as
τίμα for τίμαε, ebvor for edvoor.
Some exceptions to the rule of 117 will be noticed under the
declensions. (See 203; 311.)
119. In crasis, the accent of the first word is lost and that
of the second remains; as τἀγαθά for τὰ ἀγαθά, ἐγᾧδα for ἐγὼ
οἶδα, κἄτα for καὶ εἶτα; τἄλλα for τὰ ἄλλα; Tapa for τοι dpa.
120. In elision, oxytone prepositions and conjunctions
lose their accent with the elided vowel; other oxytones
throw the accent back to the penult, but without changing
the acute to the grave (115,1). Eg.
‘En’ αὐτῷ for ἐπὶ αὐτῷ, ἀλλ᾽ εἶπεν for ἀλλὰ εἶπεν, φήμ᾽ ἐγώ for
φημὶ ἐγώ, κάκ᾽ ἔπη ἴον κακὰ ἔπη.
ACCENT OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES.
121, 1. The place of the accent in the nominative singu-
lar of a noun (and the nominative singular masculine of
δὰ adjective) must generally be learned by observation.
The other forms accent the same syllable as this nominative,
if the last syllable permits (111); otherwise the following
syllable. E.g.
Θάλασσα, θαλάσσης, θάλασσαν, θάλασσαι, θαλάσσαις ; κόραξ,
κόρακος, κόρακες, κοράκων; πρᾶγμα, πράγματος, πρᾶγμάτων; ὀδούς,
ὀδόντος, ὀδοῦσιν. So χαρίεις, χαρίεσσα, χαρίεν, gen. χαρίεντος, etc.;
ἄξιος, ἀξία, ἄξιον, ἄξιοι, ἄξιαι, ἄξια.
2. The kind of accent is determined as usual (111; 112); as
νῆσος, νήσου, νῆσον, νῆσοι, νήσοις. (See also 123; 124.)
122. N. The following nouns and adjectives have recessive accent
(110, 4): —
(a) Contracted compound adjectives in oos (203, 2):
(δ) The neuter singular and vocative singular of adjectives In wy»,
ον (except those in φρων, compounds of φρήν), and the neuter of com-
paratives in wr; as εὐδαίμων, εὔδαιμον (313) ; βελτίων, βέλτιον (358);
but δαΐῴρων, δαΐφρον :
(0) Many barytone compounds in »s in all forms; as αὐτάρκης,
αὔταρκες, gen. pl. αὐτάρκων ; φιλαλήθης, φιλάληθες (but ἀληθής, ἀληθές);
this includes vocatives like Σώκρατες, Δημόσθενες (228) ; 80 some Other
adjectives of the third declension (see 314):
1811 ACCENT OF NOUNS, ADJECTIVES, AND VERBS. 29
(d) The vocative of syncopated nouns in yp (273), of compound
proper naines in wy, as ᾿Αγάμεμνον, Αὐτόμεδον (except Λακεδαῖμον»), and
οἱ ᾿Απόλλων, Ποσειδῶν (Hom. 1]οσειδάων), σωτήρ, saviour, and (Hom.)
δαήρ, brother-in-law, — voc. “Amohdov, Πόσειδον (Hom. Ἰ]οσείδαον),
σῶτερ, δᾶερ (see 221, 2).
123, ‘The last syllable of the genitive and dative of oxy-
tones of the first and second declensions is circumflexed. Eg.
Tins, τιμῇ, τιμαῖν, τιμῶν, τιμαῖς ; θεοῦ, θεῷ, θεῶν, θεοῖς.
124. In the first declension, ὧν of the genitive plural (for
ἐὼν) is circumflexed (170). But the feminine of adjectives
and participles in os is spelt and accented like the masculine
and neuter. Fg.
Δικῶν, δοξῶν (from δίκη, δόξα), πολιτῶν (from πολίτης); but
ἀξίων, λεγομένων (fem. gen. plur. of ἄξιος, λεγόμενος, 302). For
the genitive plural of other adjectives aud participles, see 318.
125. N. The genitive and dative of the Attic second declension
(198) are exceptions; as νεώς, gen. vew, dat. ved.
126. N. Three nouns of the first declension are paroxytone in
the genitive plural: ἀφύη, anchovy, ἀφύων; χρήστης, usurer, χρή-
στων! ἐτησίαι, Etesian winds, ἐτησίων.
127. Most monosyllables of the third declension accent
the last syllable in the genitive and dative of all numbers:
here wy and ow are circumflexed. Εἰ.
Θής, servant, θητός, Onri, θητοῖν, θητῶν, θησί.
128. Ν. Ads, torch, δμώς, slave, οὖς, ear, παῖς, child, Τρώς, Traian,
φῶς, light, and a few others, violate the last rule in the genitive
dual and plural; so πᾶς, ad, in both genitive and dative plural: as
mais, παιδός, παιδί, παισί, but παίδων; πᾶς, παντός, παντί, πάντων,
πᾶσι.
129. Ν. The interrogative τίς, τίνος, τίνι, εἴα.) always accents the
first syllabte. So do all monosyllabic participles; as ὧν, ὄντος, ὄντι,
ὄντων, οὖσι; βάς, βάντος.
ACCENT OF VERBS.
130. Verbs generally have recessive accent (110, 4);
a8 βουλεύω, βουλεύομεν, βουλεύουσιν ; παρέχω, πάρεχε; ἀποδίδωμι,
ἀπόδοτε; βουλεύονται, βουλεύσαι (aor. opt. act.), but Bovrcvoat
(aor. imper. mid.). See 113.
181. The chief exceptions to this principle are these : ~
80 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCEN'S. [182
1. The second aorist active infinitive in εἰν and the second
aorist middle imperative in ov are perispomena: as λαβεῖν, ἐλθεῖν,
λιπεῖν, λιτοῦ, λαβοῦ. For compounds like xatd-Bov, see 133, 3.
2. These second aorist imperatives active are oxytone: εἰπέ,
ἐλθέ, εὑρέ, λαβέ. So ἰδέ in the sense dehold! But their compounds
are regular; as ἄπ-ειπε.
8. Many contracted optatives of the pinflection regularly cir
cumflex the penult; as ioratro, διδοῖσθε (740).
4. The following forms accent the penult ; the first aorist active
infinitive, the second aorist middle infinitive (except πρώσθαι
and ὄνασθαι, 798), the perfect middle and passive infinitive and
participle, and all infinitives in vas or μὲν (except those in μεναι).
Thus, βουλεῦσαι, γενέσθαι, λελύσθαι, λελυμένος, ἱστάναι, διδόναι,
λελυκέναι, δόμεν and δόμεναι (both epic for δοῦναι).
5. The following participles are oxytone: the second aorist
active; and all of the third declension in -s, except the first aorist
active. Thus, λιπών, λυθείς, διδούς, δεικνύς, λελυκώς, ἱστάς (pres.) ;
but λύσας and στήσας (aor).
So ἰών, present participle of εἶμι, go.
132. Compound verbs have recessive accent like simple verbs;
as σύνειμι (from σύν and epi), σύνοιδα (σύν and οἶδα), ἔξειμι (ἐξ
and εἶμι), mdp-eore.
133. But there are these exceptions to 182:—
1. The accent cannot go further back than the augment or
reduplication ; as παρ-εἶχον (not πάρειχον), | provided, παρ-ἣν (not
πάρην), he was present, ad-ixrat (ἰού ἄφικται), Ae has arrived.
So vhen the augment falls on a long vowel or a diphthong
which is not changed by it; as ὑπ-εῖκε (imperfect), he was yielding ;
but ὕπ-εικε (imperative), yield!
2. Compounds of δός, ἔς, θές, and oxés are paroxytone; as
ἀπόδος, παράσχες (not ἄποδος, ete.).
3. Monosyllabic second aorist middle imperatives in -ov have
recessive accent when compounded with a dissyllabie preposition ;
as κατά-θου, put down, dird-dov, sell: otherwise they circumflex the
ov (131, 1); as ἐν-θοῦ, put in.
184, N. Participles in their infection are accented as adjectives
(121), not as verbs. ‘Thus, βουλεύων has in the nenter βουλεῦον
(not Bovrevov); φιλέων, φιλῶν, has φιλέον (not φίλεον), φιλοῦν.
(See 335.)
135. For the accent of optatives in ac and οἱ, see 113. Some
other exceptions to 130 occur, especially in poctie forins.
441] PROCLITICS AND ENCLITICS. 31
PROCLITICS.
136. Some monosyllables have no accent and are closely
attached to the following word. ‘These are called proclitics
(from προκλένω, Wan forward).
137. ‘Lhe proclitics are the articles ὃ, 4, of, af; the prepo-
sitions εἰς (és), ἐξ (ἐκ), ἐν; the conjunctious εἰ and ὡς (80 ὡς
used as a preposition); and the negative οὐ (οὐκ, οὐχ).
138. Exceptions. 1. Οὐ takes the acute at the end of a sen-
tence; a5 πῶς yap ov; fur why not? So when it stands alone as
Od, No.
2. ‘Qs and sometimes ἐξ and εἰς take the acute when (in poetry)
they follow their noun; as κακῶν ἔξ, from evils; θεὸς ws, as a God.
3. ‘Os is accented also when it means thus; as ws εἶπεν, thus
he spoke. This use of ds is chiefly poetic; but καὶ ὥς, even thus,
and οὐδ᾽ ὥς or μηδ᾽ ws, not even thus, sometimes occur in Attic prose.
For a proclitic before an enclitic, see 143, 4.
139. N. When 6 is used for the relative ὅς, it is accented (as
in Od. 2, 262); and many editors accent all articles when they are
demoustrative, as 7,1, 9,6 yap βασιλῆι χολωθείς, and write ὃ μὲν
ἐὸν ὃ δέ, and οἱ piv... ot δέ, even in Attic Greek.
ENCLITICS.
140, Au enclitic (éyxAtvw, lean upon) is a word which
lases its own accent, and is pronounced as if it were part of
the preceding word; as ἀνθρωποίτε (like hdminésque in Latin).
141, The enclitics are: —
1. Lhe personal pronouns pod, μοί, μέ; σοῦ, col, σέ; οὗ, of,
é and (in poetry) σφίσι.
To these are added the dialectic and poetic fons, ped, σέο, σεῦ,
Toi, τύ (accus. for σέ), ἕο, εὖ, er, piv, vir, ogi, shiv, σφέ, σφωέ,
oduiv, σφέων, σφέας, σφάς, σφέα.
2. The indefinite pronoun τὶς, rt, in all its forms (except
ἄττα) ; also the indefinite adverbs πού, ro6d, my, mol, ποθέν,
ποτέ, πώ, πώς. These must be distinguished from the inter-
Togatives ris, ποῦ, πόθι, πῇ, ποῖ, πόθεν, πύτε, πῶ, πῶς.
3. The present, indicative οὗ etué, be, and of φημί, say,
except the forms εἶ and φής. But epic ἐσσί and Tonic εὖς
are enclitic.
32 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [142
4. The particles γέ, τέ, τοί, πέρ: the inseparable -8e in ὅδε,
τούσδε, etc. (not δέ, but); and -θε and -y: in «He and ναίχι
(146). So also the poetic νύν (not viv), and the epic κέ
(x&v), θήν, and ῥά.
142. The enclitic always loses its accent, except a dis-
syllabic enclitic after a paroxytone (143, 2). See examples
in 143.
143. The word before the enclitic always retains its own
accent, and it never changes a final acnte to the grave (115, 2).
1. If this word is proparoxytone or properispomenon, it
receives from the enclitic an acute on the last syllable as a
second accent. Thus ἄνθρωπός τις, ἄνθρωποί τινες, δεῖξόν por,
παῖδές τινες, οὗτός ἐστιν.
2. If it is paroxytone, it receives no additional accent
(to avoid two acutes on successive syllables). Here a dis-
syllabic enclitic keeps its accent (to avoid three successive
unaccented syllables). Thus, λόγος res (not λόγός τις), λόγοι
τινές (NOt λόγοι τινες), λόγων τινῶν, οὕτω φησίν (but οὗτός φησιν
by 1).
3. If its last syllable is accented, it remains unchanged ;
as rival re (115, 2), τἱμῶν ye, σοφός ris, σοφοί τινες, σοφῶν
τινες,
4. A proclitic before an enclitic receives an acute; as εἴ
τις, εἴ φησιν οὗτος.
144. Enclitics retain their accent whenever special emphasis
falls upon them: this occurs
1. When they begin a sentence or clause; or when prolouns
express antitl esis, as ob rdpa Τρωσὶν ἀλλὰ σοὶ μαχούμεθα, we shall
Sight then nat wii Trojans but with you, ὃ. Ph. 1253.
2. When the preceding syllable is elided; as in πόλλ᾽ ἐστίν
(120) for πολλά ε “τιν.
8, The persona: pronouns generally retain their accent after an
accented preposition: here ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, aud ἐμέ are used (except in
πρός pe).
4. The personal protiouns of the third person are not enclitic
when they are direct reflexives (988); σφίσι never in Attic prose.
5. Ἔστί at the beginning of a sentence, and when it signifies
existence or possibility, becomes ἔστι; so after οὐκ, μή» εἰ, the adverb
ὡς, καί, ἀλλ᾽ or ἀλλά, and τοῦτ᾽ or τοῦτο.
160} DIALECTIC CHANGES, — PUNCTUATION. 33
145. When several enclitics occur in succession, each takes an
acute from the following, the last remaining without accent; as
εἴ τίς τί σοί φησιν, if any one ts saying anything to you.
146. When an enclitic forms the last part of a compound word,
the compound is accented as if the enclitic were a separate word.
Thus, οὔτινος, ᾧτινι, ὦντινων, ὥσπερ, ὥστε, οἷδε, τούσδε, εἴτε, οὔτε,
μήτε, are only apparent exceptions to 106; 111; 112.
DIALECTIC CHANGES.
147, The Ionic dialect is marked by the use of ἡ where
the Attic has a; and the Doric and Aeolic by the use of ἃ
where the Attic has y.
Thus, Ionic γενε for γενεά, ἰήσομαι for ἰάσομαι (from ἰάομαι,
635); Doric τιμάσῶ for τιμήσω (from tysdw): Aeolic and Doric
λάθα for λήθη. But au Attic a caused by contraction (as in ripa
from ripae), or an Attic » lengthened from ¢ (88 in φιλήσω from
φιλέω, 635), is never thus changed.
148. The Tonic often has εἰ, ov, for Attic ¢ 0; and i for
Attic « in nouns and adjectives in eos, cov; as ξεῖνος for
tévos, μοῦνος for μόνος ; βασιλήϊος for βασίλειος.
149. The Tonic does not avoid successive vowels to the
saine extent as the Attic; and it therefore very often omits
contraction (36). It contracts eo and cov into ev (especially
in Herodotus); as ποιεῦμεν, ποιεῦσι (from ποιέομεν, ποιέουσι),
for Attic ποιοῦμεν, ποιοῦσι. Herodotus does not use ν movr-
able (56). See also 94 and 785, i
PUNCTUATION MARKS.
150. 1. The Greek uses the comma (,) and the period (.)
like the English. Τὸ has also a colon, a point above the
line (+), which is ἐπι θοῦ to the English colon and semi-
colon; as οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ ὅ γ᾽ εἶπον - ob γὰρ ὧδ᾽ ἄφρων ἔφῦν, it is not
* what I said; for Iam not so foolish.
2. The mark of interrogation (;) is the same as the
English semicolon; as πότε ἦλθεν; when did he come?
PART II.
INFLECTION.
151. INFLECTION is a change in the form of a word,
made to express its relation to other words. It includes
the declension of nouns, adjectives, and pronouns, and
the conjugation of verbs.
152. Every inflected word has a fundamental part,
which is called the stem. To this are appended various
letters or syllables, to form cases, tenses, persons, num-
bers, etc.
153. Most words contain a still more primitive element than
the stem, which is called the root. Thus, the stem of the verb
τι μάω, honor, is ripa-, and that of the noun τιμή, is tiwa-, that of
τίσις, payment, is τισι-, that of ripeos, held in honor, is tito, that
of τἔμημα (timyparos), valuation, is timnpat-; but all these stenis
are developed from one root, re, which is seen pure in the verb
ti-w, honor. In rw, therefore, the verb stem and the root are the
same.
154. The stem itself may be modified and assume various
forms in different parts of a noun or verb. ‘Thus the same verb
stem may in different tense stems appear as Aur-, Aeur-, aud Aour-
(see 459). So the same noun stem may appear as ripa-, τιμᾶ-, and
τίμη- (168).
155. There are three numbers; the singular, the dual,-
and the plural. The singular denotes one object, the
plural more than one. The dual is sometimes used to
denote two objects, but even here the plural is more
common.
84
102] GENDERS, NUMBERS, AND CASES. 35
156. There are three genders; the masculine, the
feminine, and the neuter.
157. N. The grammatical gender in Greek is very often differ-
ent from the natural gender. specially many names of things
are masculine or feminine. A Greek noun is called masculine,
feminine, or neuter, when it requires an adjective or article to take
the form adapted to either of these genders, and the adjective or
article is then said to have the gender of the corresponding noun;
thns ὁ εὐρὺς ποταμός, the broad river (masc.), ἡ καλὴ οἰκία, the beau
tiful house (fem.), τοῦτο TO πρᾶγμα, this thing (neut.). ;
‘The gender of a noun is often indicated by prefixing the article
(386); as (ὁ) ἀνήρ, man; (ἢ) γυνή, woman; (τὸ) πρᾶγμα, thing.
158. Nouns which may be either masculine or feminine are
said to be of the common gender: as (6, 4) θεός, God or Goddess.
Names of animals which include both sexes, but have only one
grammatical gender, are called epicene (ἐπίκοινος); as ὁ ἀετός, the
eagle ; ἡ ἀλώπηξ, the fox; both including males and females.
159. The gender must often be learned by observation. But
(1) Names of males are generally inasculine, and names of
females femiuine.
(2) Most names of rivers, winds, and months are inasculine; and
most names of countries, towns, trees, and islands are feminine.
(3) Most nouns denoting qualities or conditions are feminine;
as ἀρετή, virtue, ἐλπίς, hope.
(4) Diminutive nouns are neuter; as παιδίον, child ; γύναιον, old
woman (literally, lite woman).
Other rules are given under the declensions (sce 168; 189;
281-284).
160. There are five cases; the nominative, genitive,
dative, accusative, and vocative.
161. 1, The nominative and vocative plural are always
alike.
2. In nenters, the nominative, accusative, and vocative
are alike in all numbers; in the plural these end in ἃ.
3. The nominative, accusative, and vocative dual are
always alike ; and the genitive and dative dual are always
alike.
162. ‘The cases of nouns have in general the same meaning as
the corresponding cases in Latin; as Nom. @ man (as subject),
36 INFLECTION. [163
Gen. of a man, Dat. to or for a man, Accus. a man (as object),
Voc. O man. The chief functions of the Latin ablative are
divided between the Greek genitive and dative. (See 1042.)
163. All the cases except the nominativetand vocative are
called oblique cases.
NOUNS.
164. There are three declensions of nouns, in which
also all adjectives and participles are included.
165. These correspond in general to the first three declensions
in Latin. The first is sometimes called the A declension (with
stems in a), and the second the O declension (with stems in ὁ).
These two together are sometiines called the Vowel declension, as
opposed to the third or Consonant declension (206).
The principles which are commou to adjectives, participles, and
substantives are given under the three declensions of nouns.
166, N. The naine noun (ὄνομα), according to ancient usage, in-
cludes both substantives and adjectives, But by modern custom noun
is generally used in grainmatical language as synonymous with δεὺ-
stantive, and it is so used in the present work.
167. CASE-ENDINGS OF NOUNS.
ον" ΕἸ, Drc.ension. Consonant JECLENSION,
sinc. |Masc. and Fem. Neuter.| Mase. and Fen. Neuter.
Nom. $ Or none v ς or none none
Gen. $ OF co 0s
Dat. ι ‘
Acc. v ν οὐ ἅ none
Voc. none v none or like Nom. none
DUAL.
NLA. none €
G.D. ιν οιν
PLUR.
ΝΟΥ. ‘ a ες a
Gen. ων ων
Dat. ισι (45) σι, σσι, ἐσσι
Acc. vs (as) & vs, ἂς &
The relations of some of these endings to the terminatious actually
in use will be explained under the different declensions. The agree-
ment of the two classes in many points is striking.
7] FIRST DECLENSION. 37
FIRST DECLENSION.
168. Stems of the first declension end originally in a.
This is often modified into 7 in the singular, and it
becomes @ in the plural. The nominative singular of
feminines ends in a or 7; that of masculines ends in
as or.ns. There are no neuters.
169. The following table shows how the final a or » of the
stem unites with the case endings (167), when any are added, to
form the actual terminations : —
SINGULAR, PLURAL,
Feminine. Masculine. Mase. and Fem.
Nom.| ἃ Οὐ ἅ n a-s 1s a-t
Gen. | a-s or 9-5 ns a-.o (Hom. a-o) ὧν (for ἐ-ων)
Dat. [ἅ-ἰ or ητἰ -b 1 ἄπ ητι ατἰσὶ OF ατἰς
Acc. | a-v or ἅ-ν nv [ἂν την ἃς (for a-vs)
Voc. | aord ἢ a &ory at
Dua..
Masc. and Fe
NAV. a ,
G. Ὁ. atv
170. N. In the genitive singular of masculines Homeric go comes
from a-io (169); but Attic ov probably follows the analogy of ov for oo
in the second declension (191). Circumficxed ὧν in the genitive plural
is contracted from lonic éwy (188, 5). The stem in ἃ (or ἃ) may
thus be seen in all cases of ofkta and χώρα, and (with the change of ἃ
to » in the singular) also in the other paradigms (except in ov of the
genitive). The forms ending in a and » have no case-endings.
FEMININES.
171. The nouns (ἡ) χώρᾶ, land, (ἡ) τιμή, honor,
(ἡ) οἰκία, house, (ἡ) Μοῦσα, Muse, are thus declined : —
Stem. (xwpd-) (ripa-) (οἰκιᾶ-) (uoved-)
SINGULAR.
Nom. yépa a land τιμή οἰκίᾳ Μοῦσα
Gen. χώρας ofa land τὶμῆς olxlas Μούσης
Dat. χώρᾳ to aland Tien οἰκίᾳ Μούσῃ
Acc. χώρᾶν a land τιμήν οἰκίαν Μοῦσαν
Voc. χώρᾷ Ο land τιμή οἰκίᾳ Μοῦσα
38 INFLECTION. [172
DUAL.
N.A.V. χώρα two lands τιμᾶ οἰκία Motca
G.D. χώραιν of or to two lands ripaiv οἰκίαιν Motcaty
PLURAL,
Nom. χῶραι lands τῖμαί οἰκίαι Μοῦσαι
Gen. χωρῶν of lands τὶμῶν οἰκιῶν Μουσῶν
Dat. χώραις to lands ripats οἰκίαις Μούσαις
Ace. χώρας lands τὶμᾶς οἰκίας Μούσᾶς
Voc. χῶραι O lands τιμαί οἰκίαι Μοῦσαι
172. The following show varieties of quantity and accent: —
θάλασσα, sea, θαλάσσης, θαλάσσῃ, θάλασσαν; VI. θάλασσαι,
θαλασσῶν, θαλάσσαις, θαλάσσὰάς.
γέφῦρα, bridge, yepipas, γεφύρᾳ, γέφῦραν; 1]. γέφῦραι, οἷς,
σκιά, shadow, σκιᾶς, σκιῶ, σκιάν; }}}. σκιαί, σκιῶν, σκιαῖς, Cte.
γνώμη, opinion, γνώμης, γνώμῃ, γνώμην ; Vl. γνῶμαι, γνωμῶν, etc.
πεῖρα, allempl, πείρᾶς, πείρᾳ, πεῖραν; VI. πεῖραι, πειρῶν, οὖς.
178. The stem generally retains ἃ through the singular
after εν, or p, but changes ἃ to y after other letters. See
οἰκία, χώρα, and τιμή in 171.
174, But nouns having a, AA, or a double consonant (18)
before final a of the stem, and some others, have ἃ in the
nominative, accusative, and vocative singular, and ἡ in the
genitive and dative, like Μοῦσα.
Thus ἅμαξα, wagon; δίψα, thirst; pila, root; ἅμιλλα, contest ;
θάλασσα (with later Attic θάλατταν, sea. So μέριμνα, care ; δέσποινα,
mistress ; λέαινα, lioness; τρίαινα, trident; also τόλμα, daring; δίαιτα,
living; ἄκανθα, thorn; εὔθῦνα, scrutiny.
175. The following have ἅ in the noininative, accusative, and
vocative, and ἃ in the genitive and dative, singular (afler «, 4
or p):—
(a) Most ending in pa preecded by a diphthong or by 5; as
μοῖρα, γέφῦρα.
(δ) Most abstract nouns formed from adjectives in ἧς or oos ;
as ἀλήθεια, truth (ἀληθής, (ruc), εὔνοια, kindness (edvoos, kind). (But
the Attic pocts sometimes have dAneia, εὐνοίὰα, etc.)
(c) Nouns in ea and tpw designating females; as βασίλεια,
queen, ψάλτρια, female harper (but βασιλεία, kingdom). So μυῖα,
Jly, Ben. μυίᾶς.
For feminine adjectives in a, see 318.
151] FIRST DECLENSION, 89
176. (Exceptions.) Aépy, neck, and κόρη, girl (originally δέρρη,
κόρρη)» have ἡ after p (173). “Epon, dew, and κόρση (new Attic
κόρρη)», temple, have after o (174). Some proper uames have ἃ
inregularly ; as Anda, Leda, gen. Adds. Both oa and oy are
allowed; as βοή, ery, στόζ, porch.
177. N. It will be seen that a of the nominative singular is
always short when the genitive has ys, and generally Jong when
the genitive has ds.
178. N. Av of the accusative singular and a of the vocative
singular agree ia quantity with ἃ of the nominative. The quan-
tity of all other vowels of the terminations may be seen from the
table in 164.
Most nouns in ἃ have recessive aceent (110, 4).
MASCULINES,
179. ‘The nouns (6) rapids, steward, (Ὁ) πολίτης, cite
zen, and (0) κριτής, Judye, ave (hus declined : —
Stem. , (ταμιᾶ-) (πολιτᾷ-) wer)
SINGULAR.
Nom. Topias πολίτης κριτής
Gen. ταμίου πολίτου κριτοῦ
Dat. ταμίᾳ πολίτῃ κριτῇ
Ace. ταμίαν πολίτην κριτήν
Voe. ταμίᾳ πολῖτα κριτά
DUAL.
N.A.Y. Tapia πολίτα κριτᾶ.
G.D. ταμίαιν πολίταιν Kpcraty
PLURAL.
Non, ταμίαι πολῖται κριταί
Gen. ταμιῶν πολιτῶν κριτῶν
Dat. ταμίαις πολίταις κριταῖς
Ace, ταμίας πολίτας κριτάς
Voc. ταμίαι πολῖται κριταί
180. Thus may Le dechned γεᾶνίας, youl, στρατιώτης, soliier,
ποιητής, poet.
181. The ἃ of the stem is here retained in the singular
after ¢, « orp; otherwise it is changed to 4: see the para-
digms. For irregular ov in the genitive singular, see 170.
40 INFLECTION. [182
182, ‘The following nouns in ys have ἅ in the vocative singular
(like πολίτης) : those in rys; national names, like Πέρσης, Persian,
voc, Πέρσῶ; and compounds in ys, like yew-pérpys, geometer, voc.
γεωμέτρᾶ. Δεσπότης, master, has voc. 8orora. Other nouns in
ns of this declension have the vocative in 9; as Κρονίδης. son of
Cronos, Κρονίδη.
CONTRACTS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION.
183, Most nouns in ad, ed, and eds are contracted (35) in
all their cases.
184. Μνάὰ, μνᾷ, mina, cixéa, συκῇ, fig-tree, and ‘Eppéas,
Ἑρμῆς, Hermes, are thus declined :—
Stem. (μνᾷ- for μναᾶ-) (σῦκᾶ- for cuxed-) (‘Epua- for 'Ἑρμεᾶ-)
SINGULAR,
Nom. (μνάᾷ) μνᾶ (συκέὰ) συκῆ CEpudas) Ἑρμῆς
Gen. = (uvdds) μνᾶς (oixéis) συκῆς (Ἑρμέου) Ἑρμοῦ
Dat. (μνάᾳ) pve (ctxég) cing (Ἑρμέᾳ) Ἑρμῇ
Acc. (μνάάν) μνᾶν (cixdaiv) συκῆν CEppéav) Ἑρμῆν
Voe. (μνάὰ) μνᾶ (συκέὰ) σὺκῆ (Ἑρμέὰ) ‘Eppa
DUAL.
NLA.V. (μνάᾶα) μνᾶ (συκέα) σῦκᾶ CEpuda) = “Eppa
6.15. (ωνάαιν) μναῖν (cixéaiv) σὺκαῖν (Ἑρμέαιν) ‘Eppaty
PLURAL,
ΝΙΝ. (μνάαι) μναῖ (συκέαι) ovnat (Ἑρμέα) Ἑρμαῖ
Gen. (μναῶν) μνῶν (συκεῶν) σύκῶν (Ἑρμεῶν) Ἑρμῶν
Dat. (μνάαι:) μναῖς (συκέαι:) σνυκαῖς CEppéas) Ἑρμαῖς
Acc. (urdas) μνᾶς (cixéds) σὺκᾶς (Epudas) Ἑρμᾶς
185. So γῇ, earth (from an uncontracted form -ye-d or ya-d), in
the singular: γῇ, γῆς, γῆν, γῆν, γῆ (Doric ya, yas, etc.).
186. N. Bopéas, North wind, which appears uncontracted in
Attic, has also a contracted form Boppas (with irregular pp), gen.
Βορρᾶ (of Doric form), dat. Βορρᾷ, acc. Boppav, voc. Βορρᾶ.
187, N. For ca contracted to ἃ in the dual and the accusative
plural, see 39, 1. For contract adjectives (feminines) of this class,
see 310.
DIALECTS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION.
188. 1. The Ionic has ἡ for ἃ throughout the singular, even
after ¢, ., or ρ; 88 yeven, χώρη, ταμίς. But Homer has θεώ, God-
1017 SECOND DECLENSION. 41
dess. The Doric and Aeolic have a unchanged in the singular.
The Ionic generally uses uncontracted forms of contract nouns
and adjectives.
2. Nom. Sing. Hom. sometimes ἃ for ἧς; as ἱππότα for ἱππότης,
horseman, sometimes with recessive accent, as μητίετα, counsellor.
(Compare Latin poeta = ποιητής.)
8. Gen. Sing. For ov Homer has the origina) form do, as
*Arpetddo; sometimes w (for co) after vowels, as Bopéw (from
Βορέας). Hom. and Hat. have lonic ew (always one syllable in
Hom.), as ᾿Ατρείδεω (114), Τήρεω (gen. of Τήρης) ; and ew occurs in
proper names in older Attic. The Doric has ἃ for do, as ᾿Ατρείδα.
4. Acc. Sing. Hat. sometiines forms an ace. in ea (for qv) from
nouns in τῆς, as in the third declension, as δεσπότεα (for δεσπότην)
from δεσπότης, master (179): so Ἐέρξης, acc. Ξέρξεα or Ξέρξην.
5. Gen. Pl. Hom. ἄων, the original form, as κλισιάων. of tents ;
sometimes ὧν (170). Hom. and Hdt. have lonic ἔων (one QPable
in Hom.), as πυλέων, of gates. Doric ἂν for ἄων, also in dratigtic
chorus. ;
6. Dat. Pl. Poetic aia (also Aeolic and old Attic form); Tonic
yot (Βοιη., Fdt., even oldest Attic), Horn. also ys (rarely ats).
7. Ace. Pl. Lesbian Aeolic as for ἂς.
SECOND DECLENSION.
189. Stems of the second declension end in 0, which
is sometimes modified to ὦ. The nominative singular
regularly ends in os or ov (gen. ov). Nouns in og are
masculine, rarely feminine ; those in ov are neuter.
190. The following table shows how the termiuations of nouns
in os and oy are formed by the final o of the stem (with its modifi-
cations) and the case-endings : —
SINGULAR, DUAL. PLURAL,
Masc.& Fem. Neuter.| Masc., Fem., ὦ Neuter.; Masc.& Fem. Neuter.
N. os o-v Ν. οι ἅ
G ov (for o-o) N.A.V. w(foro) (6. wy
Ὁ. @ (for ο-ι) G.). οἷν D. οτσιοόγοις
A. o-v A. ous (foro-vs) &
Vv ε o-v ; V. οιἱ a
191. N. In the genitive singular the Homeric o-:o becomes o-o and
then ov, In the dative singular and the nominative ete. dual, o becomes
w. E takes the place of o in the vocative singular of nouns in os, and
ἃ takes the place of o in the nominative etc. of neuters. There being
42 INFLECTION. [192
no genitive plural in ow», w» is not accented as a contracted syllable
(λόγων, not λογῶν).
192. The nouns (6) λόγος, word, (ἡ) νῆσος, tsland,
(6, ἡ) ἄνθρωπος, man or human being, (ἡ) ὁδός, road,
(τὸ) δῶρον, gift, are thus declined: —
Stem. (λογο-) (νησο-) (ἀνθρωπο-) (ὁδο-) (dwpo-)
SINGULAR.
Nom. λόγος a word νῆσος ἄνθρωπος ὁδός δώρον
Gen. λόγου of a word νήσον ἀνθρώπου ὁδοῦ δώρου
Dat. λόγῳ to a word νήσῳ ἀνθρώπῳ ὁδῴῷ δώρῳ
Ace. λόγον ἃ word νῆσον ἄνθρωπον ὁδόν δῶρον
γος. λόγε Ο word νῆσε ἄνθρωπε ὁδέ δῶρον
DUAL.
N.A.V λόγω two words viow avOpera 686 δώρω
G.D. — Adyouw vfor to two words νήσοιν ἀνθρώποιν ὁδοῖν δώροιν
PLURAL.
Nom. δλόγοι words νῆσοι ἄνθρωποι ὁδοί Supa
Gen. λόγων Of words νήσων ἀνθρώπων ὁδῶν δώρων
Ταῦ. λόγοις to words νήσοις ἀνθρώποις ὁδοῖς δώροις
Ace, λόγους words νήσους ἀνθρώπους ὁδούς Supa
Voc. λόγοι O words νῆσοι ἄνθρωποι ὁδοί δῶρα
193. Thus may be declined vO pos, law, xivdives, danger, mora-
μός, river, Bios, life, θάνατος, death, ταῦρος, bull, σῦκον, fig, yutrrov,
outer garment,
194. ‘Che chief feminine nouns of the second declension are
the following :—
1. βάσανος, touch-sone, βίβλος, book, γέρανος, crane, γνάθος, jaw,
δοκός, beam, δρόσος, dew, κάμϊνος, oven, κάρδοπος, kneading-trough,
κιβωτύς, chest, νόσος, disease, πλίνθος, brick, ῥάβδος, rod, copes, coffin,
σποδός, ashes, τάφρος, ditch, ψάμμος, seu, ψῆφος, pebble; with ὁδός
and κέλευθος, way, ἁμαξιτός, carriage-road, ἀτραπός, path.
2. Naties of countries, tvwus, wees, and islands, which are regu-
larly femisine (159, 2): so ἥπειρος, mainland, and νῆσος, island.
195. ‘The nominative in os is sometimes used for the vocative
in εἰ as ὦ φίλος. Θεός, God, has always θεός as vocative.
ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION.
196. A few masculine and feminine nouns of this declen-
sion have steins in ὦ, which appears in all the cases. This
201) SECOND DECLENSION. 43
jg called the Aétic declension, though it is not confined to
Attic Greek. The noun (δ) νεώς, demple, is thus declined: —
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL,
Nom. νεώς Nom. vew
Gen. νεώ N.A.V. νεώ Gen. νεών
Dat. vew G. D. vewy ar, vews
Acc., γεών Acc. γεώς
γος. νεώς Voe. νεῷ
197. N. There are no neuter nouns of the Attic declension in
ood use. But the corresponding adjectives, as ἔλεως, propitious,
εὔγεως, fertile, have neuters in wr, as ἔλεων, εὔγεων. (See 305.)
198. N. The accent of these nouns is irregular, and that of the
genitive and dative is doubtful. (See 114; 125.)
199. N. Some nouns of this class may have w in the accusative
singular; as λαγώς, accus. λαγών or Aayw. So” Ads, τὸν ΓΑ θων or
"Adu; Kas, τὴν Κῶν or Κῶ; and Keéws, Τέως, Μίνως. "Ews, dawn,
has regularly τὴν “Ew.
200. N. Most mouns of the Attic declension have older forms
in dos or yos, from which they are probably derived Ly exchange
of quantity (33); as Hom. Adds, people, Att. λεώς; Dor. ναός,
Ton. νηός, Att. νεώς ; Hom. Μενέλαος, Att. Μενέλεως. But some
come by contraction; as λαγώς, hare, from λαγωός. In words like
Μενέλεως, the original accent. is retained (114).
CONTRACT NOUNS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION.
201, 1. From stems in oo and eo are formed contract
nouns in oos anct.eor.
For coutract adjectives in εος, ed, cov, ad οος, 04, οον, sec 310.
2. Noos, νοῦς, mind, and ὀστέον, ὀστοῦν, Lone, are thus de-
clined : —
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
Nom. (νόος) νοῦς Nom. (νόοι) vot
Gen. (νόου) νοῦ | N.ALV. (vbw) νώ | Gen, (νόων) νῶν
Dat. (νόφ) νῷ 6. Ὁ. (νόοιν) νοῖν | Dat. (»δοιΣ) νοῖς
Acc (νόον) νοῦν Acc. (νόου:) νοῦς
Voc. (vbe) νοῦ Voc. (vb) νοῖ
N.A.V. (ὀστέον) ὀστοῦν; N.A.V,(doréw) ὀστώ |N.A.V.(Soréa) ὀστᾶ
Gen. (ὀστέου) ὀστοῦ |G. Ὁ. (ὀστέοιν) ὁστοῖν 66η. ζ(όστέων») ὀστῶν
Dat. (ὀστέῳ) ὀστῷ Dat. (ὀστέοις) ὀστοῖς
44 INFLECTION, [202
202. So may be declined (πλόος) πλοῦς, voyage, (dos) pods,
stream, (κάνεον) κανοῦν, basket (accented like adjectives in eos, 311),
203. The accent of some of these forms is irregular: —
1. The dual contracts ἕω and dw into ὦ (not ὦ).
2. Compounds in οος accent all forms like the contracted nomi-
native singular; as περίπλοος, περίπλους, sailing round, gen. περι-
πλόου, περίπλου, etc.
3. For ea coutracted to a in the plural, see 39, 1.
DIALECTS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION.
204. 1. Gen. Sing. Hom. oto and ov, Aeolic and Doric w (for
00); as θεοῖο, μεγάλω.
2. Gen. and Dat. Dual. Hom. ouv for ow; as ἵπποιιν.
3. Dat. Plur. Tonic and poetic aot; as ἵπποισι; also Aeolic and
old Attic, found occasionally even in prose.
4. Acc. Plur. Doric ws or os for ovs; a8 vopws, Tws λύκος ; Les-
bian Aeolic ots.
5. The Ionic generally omits contraction.
THIRD DECLENSION.
205. This declension includes all nouns not belonging
to either the first or the second. Its genitive singular
ends in os (sometimes ws).
206. N. This is often called the Consonant Declension (165), be-
cause the stem here generally ends in a consonant. Some stems,
however, end in a close vowel (« or v), some in a diphthong, and a few
ino or w.
207. The stem of a uoun of the third declension cannot
always be determined by the nominative singular; but it is
generally found by dropping os of the genitive. The cases
are formed by adding the case-endings (167) to the stem.
208. 1. For final ws fo the genitive singular of nouns in 4, vs, v,
evs, and of ναῦς, ship, sce 249; 265; 269.
2. For ἃ and as in the accusative singular and plural of nouns in
evs, see 205,
3. ‘The contracted accusative plural generally has es for eds {rregu-
larly, to conform to the contracted nominative in es for ees. (See 313.)
So ovs in the aceusative plural of comparatives in των (358).
4. The original »s of the accusative plural is seen in ἰχθῦς (for
rye from ἐχθύς (259), and the Ionic πολῖς (for rodi-vs) from πόλις
210} THIRD DECLENSION. 45
FORMATION OF CASES.
Nominative SINGULAR.
208. The numerous forms of the nominative singular of
this declension must be Jearned partly by practice. The
following are the general principles on which the nominative
is formed from the stem.
1. Masculine and feminine stems, except those in y, p, a,
and ovr (2and 8), add ς, and make the needful euphonie
changes. E.g.
Φύλαξ, guard, φύλακ-ος ; yoy, vulture, yor-ds § 3 φλέψ, vein, φλεβ-ό ὃς
(14); ἐλπίς (for ἐλπιδς), Rope, ἐλπίδος; χάρις, grace, χάριτ- os; ὄρνϊς,
bird, ὄρνίθεος 3 γύξ, night, γυκτεύς) μάστιξ, scourge, paoriy-os ; σάλ-
πιγξ, trumpet, σάλπιγγτος. So Αἴας, Ajax, Alavr-os (79); λύσῶς,
λύσαντ-ος ; πᾶς, παντ-ός; τιθείς, τιθέντ-ος ; χαρίεις, xaptevr-os; δεικνύς,
δεικνύνττος. (The reuters of the last five words, λῦσαν, πᾶν, τιθίν,
χαρίεν, and δεικνύν, are given under 4, below.)
2. Masculine and feminine stems in v, p, and o merely
lengthen the last vowel, if itis short. Ey.
Αἰών, aye, alav-os; δαίμων, divinity, δαίμον-ος ; λιμήν, harbor,
λιμέν-ος ; θήρ, Least, θηρ-ός ; ἀήρ, air, ἀέρ-ος ; Σξωκράτης (Zwxparca-),
Socrates.
3, Masculine stems in ovr drop τ, and lengthen otow. E.g.
ἢ Λέων, lion, λέοντ-ος ; λέγων, speaking, A€yovr-os; ὧν, being,
OvT-oS.
4, In neuters, the nominative singular is generally the
same as the stem, Final τ of the stem is dropped (25). Εἰ.
Σῶμα, body, σώματ-ος; μέλᾶν (neuter of pédds), black, BEAGY-O5 3
λῦσαν (neuter of λύσας), having loosed, λύσαντοος; πᾶν, all, mavr-ds3
τιθέν, placing, τιθέντ-ος ; χαρίεν, graceful, χαρίεντ-ος ; διδόν, giving,
διδύντος ; λέγον, saying, λέγοντιος ; δεικνύν, showing, δεικνύνττος.
(For the masculine nominatives of these adjectives and participles,
see 1, above.)
210. (Exceptions to 209, 1-3.) 1. In πούς, foot, πτοδ- ὅς, οὃς be-
comes ovs. Δάμαρ, wife, δάμαρτ-ος, does not add 5. Change in
quantity occurs in ἀλώπηξ, fox, ἀλώπεκοος, κῆρυξ, herald, xypuK-os,
and Φοίνιξ, Poivix-os.
2. Stems in iv- add ¢ and have is (78, 3) in the nominative; as
pls, nase, piv-ds. These also add s: Kreis, comb, κτεν-ός (78, 3); εἷς»
one, év-os; and the adjectives μέλῶς, black, μέλαν-ος, and τάλάς,
wretched, τάλανεοος.
46 INFLECTION. (211
8, "Odors (Ionic ὁδών), tooth, gen. dSdvr-os, forms its nominative
like participles in ous: for these see 212, 1.
211. (Exceptions to 209, 4.) Some neuter stems in ar- have ap
in the nominative; as ἧπαρ, liver, gen. ἥπατ-ος (225), as if from a
stem in apt-- For nouns in as with double stems in ατ- (or at-)
aud ao-, as κρέας, πέρας (225), and τέρας, see 237. Φῶς (for φάος),
light, has gen. φωτός; but Homer has φάος (stem gueo-). For
πῦρ, fire, Zen. mip-ds, see 291.
212. (Participles.) 1. Masculine participles from verbs in wc
add s to ovr-and have nominatives in ous (79); 85 διδούς, giving,
&8evt-os. Neuters in ovr- are regular (209, 4).
Other participles from stems in ovr- have nominatives in ων,
like nouns (209, 3).
2. The perfect active participle, with stem in o7-, forms its
nominative in ws (masc.) and ος (neut.); as λελυκώς, having
loosed, neut. λελυκός, Ben. AeAvKOr-os. (See 335.)
213. XN. For nominatives in ys and os, gen. eos, from stems in
eq-, see 227. For peculiar formations from stems in o (1.0m. ὦ),
see 242.
ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR.
214, 1. Most imasculines and feminines with consonant
stems add a to the stem in the accusative singular; as
φύλαξ (φυλακ-), φύλακα; λέων (Acovr-), lion, λέοντα.
2. ‘Those with vowel stems add v; as πόλις, state, πόλιν;
ἰχθύς, fish, iyOiv; vats, ship, ναῦν; βοῦς, ox, βοῦν.
3. Barytones in τς and vs with lingual (τ, δ, 6) stems
generally drop the lingual and add ν; as ἔρις (ép:8-), strife,
ἔριν; χάρις (χαριτ-), grace, χάριν; ὄρνις (dpvid-), bird, ὄρνιν ;
εὔελπις (eveAmd-), hopeful, εὔελπιν (but the oxytone ἐλπίς,
hope, has ἐλπίδα.
215. N. κλείς (xAad-), key, has κλεῖν (rarely κλεῖδα).
216. N. Homer, Herodotus, and the Attic poets make accusa-
tives in a of the nouns of 214, 3; as ἔριδα (Hom.) χάριτα (Hat),
ὄρνιθα (Aristoph.).
217. N. ᾿Απόλλων and Ποσειδῶν (Ποσειδάων) have accusatives
᾿Απόλλω and Ποσειδῶ, besides the forns in wra.
For ὦ in the accusative of comparatives in ἴων, see 359.
218, N. For accusatives in ea from nominatives in ys, in ea from
those in evs, and in ὦ (for wa or σα) from those in ws or w, sec 228;
265 ; 243.
226] NOUNS WITH MUTE OR LIQUID STEMS. 47
Vocative SINGULAR.
219. The vocative singular of masculines and feminines
is sometimes the same as the nominative, and sometimes the
game as the stein.
220. It is the same as the nominative
1. In nouns with mute stems; as nom. and voc. φυλαξ
(φυλακ-), watchman. (See the paradigms in 225.)
2. In oxytones with liquid stems; as nom. aud voc. ποιμήν
(ποιμεν-), shepherd, λιμήν (λιμεν-), harbor.
But barytones have the vocative like the stem; as δαίμων
(δαιμον-), voc. δαῖμον. (See the paradigms in 225.)
221. ( Exceptions.) 1. Those with stems in &, and barytones
with stems in yr- (except participles), have the vocative like the
stem; as ἐλπίς (éAmd-), hope, vor. ἐλπί (6f.25): seu λέων and γίγᾶς,
declined in 225. So Αἴάς (Αἰαντ-), Ajaz, voc. Alay (Hoin.), but
Aids in Attic.
2. Σωτὴρ (σωτηρ-), preserver, ᾿Λπόλλων (᾿Α πολλων-), and Ποσει-
δῶν (Ποσειδων- for Ποσειδῆον-) shorten » and w in the vocative.
Thus voc. σῶτερ, Ἄπολλον, Πόσειδον (Hom. Ποσείδιον). For the
recessive accent here and iu similar forms, see 122 (d).
222. All others have the vocative the same as the stem.
See the paradigms.
223. There are a few vocatives in οἵ from nouns in ὦ and ὧν,
gen. ous: see 245; 248.
For the vocative of syncopated nouns, sec 273.
Dative Piura.
224, The dative plural is formed by adding o to the
stem, with the needful euphonic changes. Eg.
Φύλαξ (pvrax-), φύλαξι ; ῥήτωρ (ῥητορ-), ῥήτορσι; ἐλπίς (€Amd-),
ἐλπίσι (74); ποῦς {(ποδ-), ποσί; λέων (λεοντ-), λέουσι (79); δαίμων
(δαιμον-), δαίμοσι (80); τιθείς (riBevt-), τιθεῖσι; χαρίεις (χαριεντ-),
χαρίεσι (74); ἱστάς (ίσταντ-), ἱστᾶσι; δεικνύς (δεικνυντ-), δεικνῦσιε; βασι:
λεύς (βασιλευ-), βασιλεῦσε; βοῦς (Bov-), βουσί; γραῦς (ypav-), γραυσί.
For ἃ change in syncopated nouns, see 978,
NOUNS WITH MUTE OR LIQUID STEMS.
225, The following are examples of the most com-
mon forms of nouns of the third declension with mute
or liquid stems.
48 INFLECTION. [225
For the formation of the cases, see 209-224. For euphonic
changes in nearly all, see 74 and 79. For special changes in θρίξ,
see 95, 5.
Mute Stems.
I, Masculines and Feminines.
(8) φύλαξ (ἡ) φλίψ (ὁ) σάλπιγξ (ἡ) θρίξ (ὁ) λέων
watchman vein trumpet hair lion
Stem. (φυλακ) (φλεβ) (σαλπιγγ.})} (τριχ) (λέοντι)
SINGULAR.
Nom. φύλαξ φλέψ σάλπιγξ θρίξ λέων
Gen. ᾧφύλακος φλεβός σάλπιγγος τριχός λέοντος
Dat. φύλακι φλεβί σάλπιγγι τριχί λέοντι
Acc. φύλακα φλέβα σάλπιγγα τρίχα λέοντα
Voc. φύλαξ φλέψ σάλπιγξ θρίξ λέον
DUAL.
N.A.V. φύλακε φλέβε σάλπιγγε τρίχε λέοντε
G. Ὁ. φυλάκοιν φλιβοῖν. σαλπίγγοιν τριχοῖν λεόντοιν
PLURAL,
Νιν. φύλακες φλέβες σαλπιγγες τρίχες λέοντες
Gen. φυλάκων φλεβών σαλπίγγων τριχῶν λεόντων
Dat. φύλαξι φλεψί σάλπιγξι θριξί λέουσι
Acc. φύλακας φλέβας σάλπιγγας τρίχας λέοντας
(6) γίγαἈ (ὁ) θής (ἷ) λαμπάς (ὁ ἡ) ὄρνις (ἡ) ἐλπίς
giant hired man torch bird hope
Stem. (γιγαντ-) (ϑητ-) (λαμπαδ-) (6pvi8-) (ἐλπιδ.)
SINGULAR.
Nom, γίγας Ors λαμπάς ὀρνῖς ἐλπίς
Gen. γίγαντος θητός λαμπάδος ὀρνῖθος ἐλπίδος
θαι. γίγαντι θητί λαμπάδι ὄρνῖθι ἐλπίδι
Acc. γίγαντα θῆτα λαμπάδα Opviv ἐλπίδα
Voc. γίγαν θής λαμπάς Spvis Ant
DUAL.
N. A.V. ylyavre θῆτε λαμπάδε ὄρνῖϊθε ἐλπίδε
G.D. γιγάντοινν θητοῖν λαμπάδοιν ὀρνίθοιν ἐλπίδοιν
PLURAL.
ΝΙΝ. γίγαντες θῆτες λαμπάδες ὀρνῖθες ἐλπίδες
Gen. γιγάντων θητών λαμπάδων ὀρνίθων ἐλπίδων
Dat. γίγασι θησί λαμπάσι ὄρνῖσι ἐλπίσι
Acc. γίγαντας θῆτας λαμπάδας ὄρνιθας - ἐλπίδας
2.5] NOUNS WITH MUTE OR LIQUID STEMS. 49
Il. Neuters.
(τὸ) σώμα (τὸ) πέρας (τὸ) ἧπαρ
body end liver
Stem. (cwpat-) (repat-) (ἡπατ-)
SINGULAR.
N.A.Y. σῶμα πέρας (237) ἧπαρ
Gen. σώματος πέρατος ἥπατος
Dat. σώματι πέρατι ἥπατι
DUAL.
N. A.V. σώματε πέρατε ἥπατε
α. "Ὁ. σωμᾶτοιν περάτοιν ἡπάτοιν
PLURAL.
N. A.V. σώματα πέρατα ἥπατα
Gen. σωμάτων περάτων ἡπάτων
Dat. σώμασι πέρασι ἥπασι
Liguip STEMS.
(6) ποιμήν (ὁ) αἰών (ὁ) ἡγεμών (6) δαίμων (6) σωτήρ
shepherd age leader divinity — preserver
Stem. (ποιμεν-) (alwy-) (ἥγεμον-) (δαιμον-) (σωτερ-)
SINGULAR,
Nom. ποιμήν αἰὼν ἡγεμών δαίμων σωτήρ
Gen. ποιμένος αἰῶνος ἡγέμόνος δαίμονος σωτῆρος
Dat. ποιμένι αἰῶνι ἡγιμόνι δαίμονι σωτῆρι
Acc. ποιμένα αἰώνα ἡγεμόνα δαίμονα σωτήρα
Voc. ποιμήν αἰών ἡγεμών δαῖμον σώτερ (122)
DUAL.
N. A.V. ποιμένε αἰῶνε ἡγεμόνε δαίμονε σωτήρε
G.D. ποιμένοιν αἰώνοιν ἡγεμόνον δαιμόνοιν σωτήροιν
PLURAL.
N.V. ποιμένες αἰῶνες ἡγεμόνες δαίμονες σωτῆρες
Gen. ποιμένων αἰώνων ἡγεμόνων δαιμόνων σωτήρων
Dat. ποψέσι αἰώσι ἡγιμόσι δαίμοσι σωτήρσι
Ace. ποιμένας αἰῶνας ἡγεμόνας δαίμονας σωτῆρας
δ0 INFLECTION. {226
(δ) ῥήτωρ (ὁ) ads (6) θήρ (ἡ) pts (4) φρήν
orator salt beast nose mind
Stem. (ῥητορ-) (aA-) (8np-) (piv-) (φρεν-)
SINGULAR.
Nom. ῥήτωρ GAS θήρ ῥίς φρήν
Gen. ῥήτορος ἁλός θηρός ῥῖνος φρενός
Dat. ῥήτορι ddi θηρί ῥῖνί φρενί
Ace, ῥήτορα ἅλα θήρα ῥῖνα φρίνα
Voe. ῥῆτορ ἅλς θήρ ῥίς φρήν
DUAL.
N. A.V. ῥήτορε ἅλε θήρε ῥῖνε φρένε
G. ). ῥητόροιν ἁλοῖν θηροῖν ῥινοῖν φρενοῖν
PLURAL.
ΝΙΝ. ῥήτορες ἅλες θῆρες ῥῖνες Φρένες
Gen. ῥητάρων dav θηρών pivav φρενῶν
Dat. ῥήτορσι ἀλσί θηρσί pict φρεσί
Ace. ῥήτορας ἅλας 2 θῆρας ῥῖνας φρένας
STEMS ENDING IN Σ.
226, The final o of the stem appears only where there
15. No Case-ending, as in the uominative singular, being else-
where dropped. (See 88,1.) ‘wo vowels brought together
by this omission of σ are generally contracted.
227. The proper substantive stems in eo- are chiefly
neuters, which change ἐστ to os in the nominative singular.
Some masculine proper names change ἐσ- regularly to ys (209,
2). Stems in ao- form nominatives in as, all neuters (228).
228. Σωκράτης (lwxpatec-), Socrates, (τὸ) γένος
(yever-), race, and (τὸ) γέρας (yepac-), prize, are
thus declined :—
SINGULAR.
Nom. Σωκράτης N.A.V. γένος γέρας
Gen, (Σωκράτεος) Σωκράτους Gen. (γένεο:) γένους (γέραος) γέρως
Dat. (Σωκράτει) Σωκράτει | Dat. (γένεϊ) γένει (γέραϊ) γέραι
Acc. (Zwxpdrea) Σωκράτη DUAL.
γος. Σώκρατες N.A.V. (γένεε) γένει (γέραε) γέρα
6. 1). (γενέοιν) γενοῖν (γεράοιν) γερῴν
PLURAL,
N.A.V. (γένεα) γένη (yépaa) yépa
Gen. γενέων γενῶν (γεράων) γερῶν
Dat. γένεσι γέρασι
2517] STEMS ENDING IN Σ. 51
229. Jn the genitive plural ewy is sometimes uncontracted, even
in prose; as τειχέων from τεῖχος. For cea contracted 4, see 38, 2,
230. Proper names in ἧς, gen. eos, besides the accusative in ἢ,
have a furm in ἣν of the first declension; as Σωκράτην, Δημοσθένην,
Πολυνείκην.
For the recessive accent in the vocative of these nouns, see 122.
231. Proper names in «dens, compounds of κλέος, glory, are
doubly contracted in the dative, sometimes in the accusative.
Περικλέης, Περικλῆς, Pericles, is thus declined : —
Nom. (Περικλέης) Περικλῆς
Gen, (Περικλέεος) Περικλέους
Dat. (Περικλέε) (Περικλέει) Περικλεῖ
Acc. (Περικλέεα) Περικλέά (poet. Περικλῆ)
Voe. (ΠερίκλεεΣ) Περίκλεις
232. N. In proper names in κλεῆς, Homer has jos, hy Fa,
Heradatus ἐος (for éeos), i, ἐα. ἴῃ adjectives in eys Homer some-
times contracts e€ to εἰ : as, εὐκλέης, acc. plur. evxAcias for εὐκλέεας.
233. Adjective stems in ἐσ- change eo- to ys in the masculine
and feminine of the nominative singular, but leave ἐς in the
neuter. For the declension of these, see 312.
234. The adjective τριήρης, triply fitted, is used as a
feminine noun, (9) τριήρης (50. vats), Qrireme, and is thus
declined : —
DUAL. ἰ PLURAL.
Nom. τριήρης N. A.V. (τριήρει) I ev. (rpihpees) τριήρεις
Gen. (rpitpeos) τριήρους τριήρει | Gen. (τριηρέων) τριήρων
Dat. (τριήρεϊ) τριήρει [6. ἢ. (τριηρέοιν) | Dat. τριήρεσι
Acc. (τριήρεα) τριήρη τριήροιν [ Acc. τριήρεις
νος. τριῆρες
SINGULAR.
235. N. Ὑριήρης has recessive accent in the genitive dual and
plural: for this in other adjectives in ys, see 122,
Foy the accusative plural in es, see 208, 3.
236. N. Some poetic nominatives in as have ¢ for α in the
other cases; as οὖδας, ground, gen. οὔδεος, dat. οὔδεϊ, οὔδει (Homer).
So βρέτας, image, gen. Bpéreos, plur. Bpern, βρετέων, in Attic
poetry.
237. 1. Some nouns in as have two stems, — one in at- or ar-
with gen. atos (like πέρας, 225), and another in ac with gen.
52 INFLECTION. [238
α(σ-)ος, aos, contracted ws (like γέρας, 228). Thus κέρας (xepar-,
κερασ-), horn, is doubly declined.
SINGULAR. DUAL,
NAY. κέρας N.A.V.xépare, (κεραε) κέρᾶ
Gen. κέρατος, (xepaos) κέρως 6. Ὁ. κερᾶτοιν, (κεραοιν) κερῷν
Dat. κέρατι, — (xepai’) κέραι
PLURAL.
NLA.V. κέρατα, (κεραα) κέρᾶ
Gen. κεράτων, (Kepawy) κερῶν
Dat. κέρασι
2. So τέρας, prodigy, τέρατ-ος, which has also Homeric forms
from the stem in ao-, as τέραα, τεράων, τεράεσσι. Πέρας, end (225),
has only πέρατ-ος, ete.
238. There is one Attic noun stem in οσ-, αἰδοσ-, with nomina-
tive (ἢ) αἰδώς, shume, which is thue declined : —
SINGULAR.
Nom. αἰδώς DUAL AND PLURAL
Gen. —(aldo0s) αἰδοῦς
Dat. (αἰδοῖ) αἰδοῖ
Acc. (αἰδοα) αἰδῶ
Voe. αἰδώς
wanting.
239. Αἰδώς has the declension of nouns in ὦ (242), but the
accusative in ὦ has the regular accent. (See also 359.)
240. The Ionic (4) ἠώς, dawn, has stem qoo-, and is declined
like αἰδώς : — gen. ἠοῦς, dat. ἠοῖ, ace. ἠῶ. The Attic ἕως is declined
like νεώς (196): but see 199.
STEMS IN 2 Ok O.
241. A few stems in w form masculine nouns in ὡς, gen. w-os,
which are often contracted in the dative and accusative singular
and in the nominative and accusative plural.
242. A few in o- form feminines in ὦ, gen. οὖς (ior os),
which are always contracted in the genitive, dative, and accusa-
tive singular. The original form of the stems of these nouns is
uncertain. (See 239.)
243, The nouns (6) ὕρως, hero, and (ἡ) πειθώ, persuasion,
are thus declined : —
260] STEMS IN 2 OR 0; 1 AND Υ. 53
SINGULAR. Nom. ἥρως πειθώ
Gen, ἥρωος (weBoos) πειθοῦς
Dat. ἥρωι or ἥρῳ (πειθοῖ) πειθοῖ
Acc. ἥρωα Or ἥρω (τειθοα) πειθώ
Voc. ἥρως πειθοῖ
DUAL, N.A.V. ἥρωε
G.D. — hpdow
PLURAL. N.V. ἥρωες or ἥρως
Gen. ἡρώων
Dat. ἥρωσι
Ace. ἥρωας ΟΥ ἥρως
244, These nouns in ws sometimes have forms of the Attic
second declension; as gen. ἥρω (like ve), accus. ypwy. Like ἥρως
are declined Τρώς, Trojan (128), and μήτρως, mother's brother.
245. N. The feminines in ὦ are chiefly proper names. Like
πειθώ may be declined Serpe (Aeolic Vardw), Sappho, gen. Σαπ-
pots, dat. Σαπφοῖ, acc. Σαπφώ, voc. Zargoi. So Δητώ, Καλυψώ,
and ἠχώ, echo. No dual or plural forms of these nouns are found
jn the third declension; but a few occur of the second, as acc. plur.
yopyous from γοργώ, Gorgon. No uncontracted forms of nouns in
ὦ occur.
246. N. The vocative in οὗ seems to belong to a form of the
stem in ot-; and there was a nominative form in ῳ, as Ayrd, Zan dul.
247, N. Herodotus has an accusative singular in οὖν ; as “Joby
(for ᾿1ώ) from “Id, Jo, gen. ᾿Ἰοῦς.
248. A few feminines in wy (with regular stems in ov-) have
occasional forms like those of nouns in ὦ; as ἀηδών, nightingale,
gen. ἀηδοῦς, voc. ἀηδοῖ; εἰκών, image, gen. εἰκοῦς, acc. εἰκώ ; χελιδών,
swallow, voc. χελῖδοῖ,
STEMS IN I AND Y.
249, Most stems inc (with nominatives in is) and a few
in v (with nominatives in vs and v) have ¢ in place of their
final ὁ or v in all cases except the nominative, accusative,
and vocative singnlar, and have ws for os in the genitive
singular. The dative singular and the nominative plural
are contracted.
250. The nouns (ἡ) πόλις (πολι-), state, (ὁ) πῆχυς
(anxu-), cubit, and (τὸ) ἄστυ (aorv-), city, are thus
declined : —
δά INFLECTION. [26]
SINGULAR.
Nom. πόλις πῆχυς ἄστυ
Gen. πόλεωφ “πήχεως ἄστεως
Dat. (πόλει) πόλει (πήχει) πήχει (ἄστει!) ἄστει
Acc. πόλιν πῆχυν ἄστυ
Voe. πόλι πῆχυν ἄστν
DUAL.
ΝΟ ALY. (πόλεε) πόλει (πήχεε) πήχει (ἄστεε) ἄστει
αν. πολέοιν πηχέοιν ἀστέοιν
PLURAL,
N,V. (πόλεες) πόλεις (τήχεες) πήχεις (ἄστεα) ἄστη
Gen. πόλεων πήχεων ἄστεων
Dat. πόλεσι πήχεσι ἄστεσι
Acc. πόλεις πήχεις (ἄστεα) ἄστη
251. For the accent of genitives in ews and ewv, ee 114. For
accusatives like πόλεις and χήχεις, see 208, ὃ,
252. N. ‘The dual in ee is rarely Jeft uncontracted.
253. N.“Aorv is the principal noun in v, gen. ews. Its gent-
tive plural is found only in the poetie furm ἀστέων, but analogy
leads to Attic dorewy.
254, No nouus in ἐ, gen. ews, were in comnion Attic use. See
κόμμι and πέπερε in the Lexicon.
255. N. The original « of the stem of nouns in ts (Attic gen. ews) is
retained in Jonic. ‘Thus, πόλις, πόλιος, (πόλει) πόλϊ, πόλιν; Plur. πόλιες,
πολίων ; Hom. πολίεσσι (Hat. πόλισι), πόλιας (Hat, also rods for πολίιςνς,
see 208,'4). Homer has also πόλει (with wrdde’) and πόλεσι in the
dative. ‘There are also epic forms πόληος, πόληϊ, πόληες, weANas. The
Attic poets have a genitive in eos.
The lonic has a genitive in eos in nouns in vs of this class.
256, N. Stems in v with gen. ews have also forms in ev, in
which εὖ becomes e¢, and drops ¢, leaving εἰ thus πηχυ- anxev-
πήχερ- πήχε. (See 90, 3.)
257. Most nouns in us retain v3 as (6) ἐχθές (cy6u-),
Jish, which is thus declined : —
SINGULAR. DUAL, PLURAL,
Nom. ἰχθύς Nom. ἰχθύες
Gen. ἐχϑύος N.A.V. ἰχθύε Gen. ἰχϑύων
Dat. ἰχθύϊ (Hom. ἰχϑυῖ}} 6. ἢ). ἰχϑύοιν Dat. ἰχϑύσι
Acc, ἰχϑόν Acc. ἰχθὺς
Voc, ἰχθύ
266] STEMS ENDING IN A DIPHTHONG. 55.
258. N. The nominative plural and dual rarely have us and ὃ;
as ἰχθῦς (like accus.) and tyGi (for ἰχθύε) in comedy.
259. N. Homer and Herodotus have both ἰχθύας and ἰχθῦς in
the accusative plural. “Iy@ts here is for iyOu-vs (208, 4).
260. Oxytones and monosyllables have & in the nominative,
accusative, and vocative singular: see ἰχθύς. Monosyllables are
circuinflexed in these cases; as μῦς (pv-), mouse, puds, pre, μῦν,
pd; plur. μύες, μνῶν, μυσί, μύας.
261. Ν. ἜἜγχελυς, eel, is declined like ἰχθύς in the singular,
and like πῆχυς in the plural, with gen. sing. éyyéAu-os aud nom.
plur. ἐγχέλεις.
262. N. For adjectives in us, eta, v, see 319.
STEMS ENDING IN A DIPHTHONG.
263. 1. In nouns in evs, ev of the stem is retained in the
nominative and vocative singular and dative plural, but
loses v before a vowel; as (ὁ) βασιλεύς (βασιλεν.), hing,
which is thus declined : —
SINGULAR, DUAL. PLURAL,
Nom. βασιλεύς N.V. (βασιλέες) βασιλεῖς
Gen. βασιλέως |N.A.V. βασιλέε | Gen. βασιλέων
A.
Dat. (βασιλέϊ) βασιλεῖ] G.D. βασιλέοιν | Dat. βασιλεῦσι
Acc. βασιλέα Acc. βασιλέᾶς
Voc. βασιλεῦ
2. So yovevs (yovev-), parent, ἱερεύς (lepev-), priest, ᾿Αχιλλεύς
(᾿Αχιλλευ-), Achilles, ᾿Οδυσσεύς (Ὄδυσσευ-), Ulysses.
264, Homer has ev in three cases, βασιλεύς, βασιλεῦ, aud βασι-
Aevar; but in the other cases βασιλῆος, βασιλῆι. βασιλῆα, βασιλῆες,
βασιλῆας, also dat. plur. ἀριστή-εσσι (from dpioreds) 5; in proper
names he has εος, εἴ, etc., as Πηλέος, Πηλέϊ (rarely contracted, as
᾿Αχιλλεῖ). Herodotus has gen. eos.
265, Nouns in evs originally had stems in yu, before vowels ne.
From forms in yeos, neu nga, etc., came the Homeric nos, a, 4a,
etc. The Attic ews, ea, eas came, by exchange of quantity (33),
from nos, na, nas.
266. The older Attic writers (as Thucydides) with Plato have
ἧς (contracted from jes) in the nominative plural; as ἱππῆς,
βασιλῆς, for later ἱππεῖς, βασιλεῖς. In the accusative plural, eas
usually remains unchanged, but there is a late furm in ets.
δ6 INFLECTION. [267
267, When a vowel precedes, ἕως of the genitive singular inay
be contracted into ὥς, and é& of the accusative singular into ἃ;
rarely ἐᾶς of the accusative plural into Gs, and ἔων of the genitive
plural into ὧν. Thus, Πειραιεύς, Petraeus, has gen. Ἠειραιέως,
Πειραιῶς, dat. Πειραιέϊ, Πειραιεῖ, acc. Πειραιέᾶ, Πειραιᾷ ; Awprevs,
Dorian, has gen. plur. Δωριέων, Δωριῶν, acc. Δωριέας, Δωριᾶς.
268. The nouns (δ, ἡ) βοῦς (Bov-), ox or cow, (ἡ) γραῦς
{ypav-), old woman, (ἡ) vais (vav-), ship, and ols (oi-), sheep,
are thus declined : —
SINGULAR.
Nom. βοῦς γραῦς ναῦς οἷς
Gen. Boos γρᾶόσς νεώς olds
Dat, Bot ypat γηί olf
Ace. βοῦν γραῦν ναῦν οἷν
Voc. Bow γραῦ γαῦ οἵ
DUAL. +
N. A.V. Boe γράε vie ote
6. Ὁ. βοοῖν γρᾶοῖν veoty oloiv
PLURAL.
N.V. βόες γρᾶες vies oles
Gen. Body γρᾶών νεών οἰῶν
Dat. βουσί γραυσί ναυσί οἰσί
Ace. βοὺς γραῦς ναὺς οἷς
269, Ν. The stems of βοῦς, γραῦς, and ναῦς became βορ-, γρᾶρ-ν and
vap- before a vowel of the ending (compare Latin bév-is and ndv-is).
The stem of ols, the only stein in o:-, was ὀξι- (compare Latin dvis).
Afterwards ¢ was dropped (90, 3), leaving βο-, ypa-, va-, and ol-, Attic
vews iS for νηός (33).
270. In Doric and Ionic ναῦς is much more regular than in Attic:—
SINGULAR, PLURAL,
Doric. Homer. Herod. | Doric. Homer, Herod.
Nom. ναῦς νηῦς νηῦς νᾶες νῆες, νέες νέες
Gen. νᾶός νηός, νεός νεός vay νηῶν, νεῶν νεῶν
Dat. vat νηί νηί ναυσί, νηνσί, νηυσί
‘
νάεσσι νήεσσι, νέεσσι
Acc. ναῦν νῆα, νέα véa vas νῆας, νέας γέας
271. omer has γρηῦς (ypnv-) and γρηὺς (γρηῦ-) for γραῦς. He has
βόας and βοῦς in the accusative plural of βοῦς.
272, Χοῦς, three-quart measure, is declined like βοῦς, except in the
accusatives xoa and xdas. (See χοῦς in 291.)
277) SYNCOPATED NOUNS. 57
SYNCOPATED NOUNS.
973, Four nouns in yp (with stems in ep-) are synco-
pated (65) in the genitive and dative singular by dropping
« The syncopated genitive and dative are oxytone; and
the vocative singular has recessive accent (122), and ends
in ep as a barytone (220, 2). In the other cases ε is re-
tained and is always accented. But in the dative plural ep-
is changed to pa-.
274. These are (ὁ) πατήρ (πατερ-), father, (ἡ) μήτηρ
(μητερ-), mother, (ἡ) θυγάτηρ (θυγατερ-), daughier, and (ἡ)
γαστήρ (γαστερ-) belly.
1. The first three are thus declined : —
SINGULAR.
Nom. πατήρ μήτηρ θυγάτηρ
Gen. (πατέρος) πατρός (μητέρος) μητρός (θυγατέροτ) θυγατρὸς
Dat. (πατέρ) πατρί (μητέρι) μητρί (θυγατέρι) θυγατρί
Ace. πατέρα μητέρα θυγατέρα
γος. πάτερ μῆτερ θύγατερ
DDAL.
NLA. V. πατέρε μητέρε ϑυγατέρε
6, Ὁ. πατέροιν μητέρυιν θυγατέροιν
PLURAL.
N. V. πατέρες μητέρες θυγατέρες
Gen. πατέρων μητέρων θυγατέρων
Dat. πατράσι μητρασι θυγατράσι
Ace. πατέρας μητέρας θυγατέρας
2. Taornp is declined and accented like πατήρ.
275. ᾿Αστήρ (4), star, has ἀστράσι, like a syncopated noun, in
the dative plural, but is otherwise regular (without syncope).
276. N. The unsyncopated farms of all these nouns are often used
by the poets, who also syncopate other cases of θυγάτηρ; as θύγατρα,
θύγατρες, θυγατρῶν. Homer has dat. plur. θυγατέρεσσι, and πατρῶν
for πατέρων.
277. 1. ᾿Ανήρ (6), man, drops ε whenever a vowel fol-
lows ¢p, and inserts 8 in its place (67). It las ἀνδροῖν and
ἀνδρῶν. In other respects it follows the declension of πατήρ.
2. Δημήτηρ, Demeter (Ceres), syncopates all the oblique:
cases, and then accents them on the firs syllable.
δ8 INFLECTION. [278
278, ᾿Ανήρ and Δημήτηρ are thus declined : —
SINGULAR. Nom. ἀνήρ Δημήτηρ
Gen. (ἀνέρος) ἀνδρός (Δημήτερος) Δῆμητρος
Dat. (ἀνέρι) ἀνδρί (Δημήτερι) Δήμητρι
Acc. (ἀνέρα) ἄνδρα (Δημήτερα) Δήμητρα
Voe. ἄνερ Δήμητερ
DUAL. N.A.V. (dvdpe) ἄνδρε
G. D. (ἀνέροιν) ἀνδροῖν
PLURAL. ΝΙΝ, (ἀνέρες) ἄνδρες
Gen, (ἀνέρων) ἀνδρῶν
Dat. ἀνδράσι
Acc. (ἀνέρας) ἄνδρας
279. The poets often use the unsyncopated forms. Homer has
ἄνδρεσσι as well as ἀνδράσι in the dative plural.
GENDER OF THE TiHirD DEGLENSION.
280. The gender in this declension must often be learned
by observation. But some general rules may be given.
281. 1. Mascurine are stems in
€v-; as βασιλεύς (βασιλευ-), king.
p- (except those in ap-); as xparyp (xparyp-), mizing-bowl, ψάρ
(Yitp-), starting.
v- (except those in ty-, γον-, Sov-) ; as κανών (xavor-), rule.
vt-; as ddovs (ὀδοντ-), tooth.
yr- (except those in ryr-); as λέβης (AcByr-), kettle.
wr-; aS ἔρως (épwr-), love.
2. Exceptions. Feminine are γαστήρ, belly, κήρ, fate, χείρ, hand,
φρήν, mind, ἀλκύων, halcyon, εἰκών, image, ἠιών, shore, χθών, earth,
χιών, Snow, μήκων, poppy, ἐσθής (ἐσθητ-), dress.
Neuter are πῦρ, fire, φῶς (φωτ-), light.
282. 1. Feminine are stems in
« and υ-, with nomin. in ἐς and us; 88 πόλις (πολι-), city, ἰσχύς
(ioxv-), strength.
av-; aS ναῦς (vav-).
6, 6-, tyr-; as ἐρίς (€pid.), strife, ταχυτής (TaxuTyT-), speed.
tv, you, δον-; as ἀκτίς (ἀκτῖν-), ray, σταγών (oTayov-), drop,
χελιδών (χελῖδον-), swallow.
2. Exceptions. Masculine are ἔχις, viper, ὄφι-ς, serpent, βότρυ-ς,
cluster of grapes, θρῆνυ-ς, footstoal, ἰχθύ-ς, fish, μῦς, mouse, vexvs,
489] IRREGULAR NOUNS. 59
corpse, ordyu-s, ear of grain, wéAexus, are, mxv-s, cubil, πούς
(nod-), foot, deAgis (δελφίν-), dolphin.
283. Neuter are stems in
eand v with nomin. in cand ν; as πέπερι, pepper, ἄστυ, city.
as-} aS γέρας, prize (see 227).
es-, With nonin. in os; as γένος (γενεσ-), race (see 227).
ap-; 88 νέκταρ, nectur.
at-; aS σῶμα (σωματ-), body.
284, Labial and palatal stems are always either masculine or
feminine. (See 225.)
285. Variations in gender sometimes occur in poetry: see, for
exaniple, αἰθήρ, sky, and Gis, heap, in the Lexicon. See also 288.
Dia cects.
286. 1. Gen. and Dat. Dual. Homeric ouy for ow.
2. Dat. Plur. Homeric ἐσσι, rarely eos, and σσὲ (alter vowels) ;
also ot.
3. Most of the uncontracted forms enclosed in ( ) in the para-
digms, which are not used in Attic prose, are found in Homer or
Herodotus; and some of them occur in the Attic poets.
4, For special dialectic forms of some nouns of the third declen-
sion, see 232, 236, 237, 240, 247, 255, 259, 264, 270, 271, 276, 279.
IRREGULAR NOUNS.
287. 1. Some nouns belong to more than one declension.
Thus σκύτος, darkness, is usually declined like λόγος (192),
but sometimes like γένος (228). So Οἰδίπους, Oedipus, has
genitive Οἰδίποδος or Οἰδίπου, dative Οἰδίποδι, accusative Olid
ποδα οὐ Οἰδίπουν.
See also γέλως, ἔρως, ἱδρώς, and others, in 291.
2. For the double accusatives in ἢ and ἣν of Σωκράτης, Δημο-
σθένης, etc., see 230.
288, Nouns which are of different genders in different
numbers are called heterogeneous ; as (6) σῖτος, corn, plur.
(τὰ) σῖτα, (6) δεσμός, chain, (ot) δεσμοί and (τὰ) δεσμά.
289. Defective nouns have only certain cases; as ὄναρ,
dream, ὄφελος, use (only nom. and accus.) ; (τὴν) vida, snow
(only accus.). Some, generally from their meaning, have
only one number; a8 πειθώ, persuasion, τὰ Ὀλύμπια, the Olym-
pic games, ;
60 INFLECTION. [290
290. Jndeclinable nouns have one form for all cases.
These are chiefly foreign words, as “Addy, Ἰσραήλ; and
names of letters, λλφω, Bara, ete.
291. The following are the most important irregular
nouns :—
1. "Aidys, Hades, gen. ov, ete., regular. Hom. ᾿Αΐδης, gen. ao or
ew, dat. ἢ, ace. ἣν; also “Aidos, “Ac& (from stem "Ad ).
2. ἄναξ (4), king, ἄνακτος, ete., voc. ἄναξ (poet. ἄνα, in addressing
Gods).
3. "Apys, Ares, "Apews (poet. ”Apeos), (“Apei) “Ape, (Ἄρεα) “Apn
or “Apyy, “Apes (Hoi. also’Apes). Hoi. also “Apyos, “Apyt, “Apna.
4. Stem (dpy-), gen. (τοῦ or τῆς) ἀρνός, lamb, ἀρνί, dpva; pl. ἄρνες,
ἀρνῶν, ἀρνάσι, ἄρνας. In the nom. sing. ἀμνός (2d deel.) is used.
5. γάλα (τό), milk, γάλακτος, γάλακτι, etc.
0. γέλως (ὁ), laughter, γέλωτος, etc., regular: in Attic poets ace.
γέλωτα or γέλων. In Hom. generally of second declension, dat.
γέλῳ, acc. γέλω. γέλων (yeAov?). (See 287, 1.) «
7. γόνυ (τό), knee, γόνατος, γόνατι, etc. (from stem yovar-); Ion.
and poet. γούνατος, γούνατι, etc.; Hom. also gen. yourds, dat. your,
pl. γοῦνα, γούνων, γούνεσσι.
8. γυνή (ἦ) wife, γυναικός, γυναικί, γυναῖκα, γύναι; dual γυναῖκε,
γυναικοῖν ; pl. γυναῖκες, γυναικῶν, γυναιξί, γυναῖκας.
9. δένδρον (τό), tree, δένδρου, regular (Ion. δένδρεον); dat. sing.
δένδρει; dat. pl. δένδρεσι.
10. δέος (τό), fear, δέους, δέει, ete. Hom. gen. decous.
11, δόρυ (τό), spear (ef. γόνυ) ; (from stem δορατ-) δόρατος,
δόρατι γ0)]. δόρατα, ete. Jon. and poet. δούρατος, ete.; Epic alse
gen. δουμός, dat. δουρί; dual δοῦρε; pl. δοῦρα, Sovpwr, δούρεσσι.
Poetic gen. dopds, dat. δορί and δόρει.
12. ἔρως (ὁ), love, ἔρωτος, etc. In poetry also ἔρος, ἔρῳ, ἔρον.
13. Ζεύς (Aeol. Acts), Zeus, Atos, Au, Ata, Zed. Jon. and poet.
Ζηνός, Zyvi, Ζῆνα. Pindar has Δέ for Διί.
14. Θέμις (ἡ), justice (also as proper name, Themis), gen. Θέμιδος,
etc., reg. like ἔρις. Hom. θέμιστος, ctc. Pind. θέμιτος, ete. Hat.
gen. θέμιος. In Attic prose, indeclinable in θέμις ἐστί, fas est; as
θέμις εἶναι.
15. ἱδρώς (δ), sweat, ἱδρῶτος, etc. Hom. has dat. ἱδρῷ, ace. ἱδρῶ
(243).
16. κάρα (τό), head, poetic; in Attic only nom., accus., and voc.
sing., with dat. κάρᾳ (tragic). Hom. κάρη, gen. κάρητος, καρήατος,
κράἄατος, κρᾶτός ; dat. κάρητι, καρήατι, κρἄατι, xpari; ace. (τὸν)
κρᾶτα, (τὸ) κάρη or κάρ; plur. ποιῃ. κάρα, καρήατα, κράατα; gen.
291] IRREGULAR NOUNS. 61
xpatwv; dat. κρασί; acc. xdpd with (robs) κρᾶτας ; nom. and ace.
pl. also κάρηνα, pen. καρήνων. Soph. (rd) κρᾶτα.
17. κρίνον (τό), lily, κρίνου, ete. In plural also xpivea (Hadt.)
and κρίνεσι (poetic). (See 287, 1.)
18. κύων (ὁ, ἡ), dog, νος. κύον : the rest from stem κυν-, κυνός.
κυνί, κύνα ; pl. κύνες, κυνῶν, κυσί, κύνας.
19, λᾶς (4), stone, Hom. λᾶας, portic; gen. λᾶος (or Adov), dat.
Aai, acc. λᾶαν, Aav; dual Ase; plur. Addr, λάεσσι, oY λάεσι.
20. λίπα (Hom. Aim’, generally with ἐλαίῳ, vil), fat, oil: proba-
bly λέπα is neut. accus., and λέπ᾽ is dat. for λιπί. See Lexicon.
21. μάρτυς (ὃ, 9), witness, gen. μάρτυρος, etc., dat. pl. μάρτυσι.
Hom. now. μάρτυρος (2d dec).).
22. μάστιξ (ἡ), whip, gen. padottyos, etc. Hom. dat. μάστι, ace.
μάστιν.
28. οἷς (4), sheep, for Attic declension see 268. Hom. ὀές, dios,
ὄϊν, dies, ὀΐων, ὀΐεσσι (οἴεσι, ὄεσσι), Gis. Aristoph. has dat. dt
24. ὄνειρος (5), ὄνειρον (τό), dreum, gen. ov; also ὄναρ (τό), gen.
ὀνείρατος, dat. dvetparc; plur. ὀνείρατα, ὀνειράτων, ὀνείρασι.
25. ὄσσε (τώ), dual, eyes, poetic; plur. gen. ὄσσων, dat. ὄσσοις
or ὄσσοισι.
26. ὄρνις (ὁ, 9), bird, see 225. Also poetic forms from stem
ὀρνῖ-, nom. and ace. sing. dpris, dpviv; pl. ὄρνεις, ὄρνεων, acc. ὄρνεις
or dpvis. Hat. ace. ὄρνιθα. Dorie gen. dpvixos, etc.
27. ots (τό), ear, wrds, wri; pl. dra, Grav (128), ὠσί Hom.
gen. οὔατος ; pl. οὔατα, οὔασι, and ὠσί Doric ds.
28. Tyvé (7), Pryx, Πυκνός, Πυκνί, Wixva (also Πνυκ-ός, etc.).
29. πρέσβυς (6), old man, elder (properly adj.), poetic, ace. πρέ-
aBuv (as adj.), voc. πρέσβυ; pl. πρέσβεις (Ep. πρέσβηες), chiefs,
elders: the common word in this sense is πρεσβύτης, distinct from
πρεσβευτής. Πρέσβυς = ambassador, w. gen. πρέσβεως, is rave and
poetic in sing.; but common in prose in plur., πρέσβεις, πρέσβεων,
πρέσβεσι, πρέσβεις (like πῆχυς). Πρεσβευτής, ambassador, is com-
mon in sing., but rare in plural.
30. πῦρ (τόν), fire (stem πῦρ-), πυρός, πυρί; pl. (τὰ) πυρά, watch-
Jires, dat. πυροῖς.
31. σπέος or σπεῖος (τό), cave, Epic; σπείους, omy, σπείων,
σπήεσσι OF σπέσσι.
32. ταώς or rads, Attic τας (6), peacock, like νεώς (196): also
dat. raw, radar, chiefly poetic.
33. τυφῶς (6), whirlwind ; declined like νεώς (196). Also proper
name Τυφῶς, in poetry generally Τυφῶνος, Τυφῶνι, Τυφῶνα. (See
287, 1.)
84. ὕδωρ (τό), water, ὕδατος, ὕδατι, etc.; dat. plur. ὕδασι.
62 INFLECTION. [292
35. υἱός (6), son, υἱοῦ, ete. reg.; also (from stem viu-) υἱέος,
(viet) υἱεῖ, (viéa), υἱέε, υἱέοιν ; (vides) υἱεῖς, υἱέων, υἱέσι, (υἱέας) υἱεῖς :
also with v for vi; as ὑός, ὑοῦ, ὑέος, ete. Hom, also (from stem vi-)
gen. υἷος, dat. υἷι, ace. via; dual vie; pl. vies, vias, also dat. υἱάσι.
36. χείρ (9), hand, χειρός, χειρί, etc.; but χεροῖν (poet. χειροῖν)
and χερσί (poet. χείρεσσι or χείρεσι) : poet. also χερός, χερί, ete.
37. (χόος) χοῦς (6), mound, χοός, χοί, χοῦν (like Bots, 268).
38. χοῦς (ὁ), three-quart meusure: see 272. Tonic and late
nom. χοεύς, with gen. χοέως, yous, etc, regularly like Πειραιεύς
and Δωριεύς (267).
39. χρώς (δ), skin, χρωτός, χρωτέ, χρῶτα; poet. also χροός, χροΐ,
χρόα; dat. χρῷ (only in ἐν χρῷ, near).
Locan Expinas.
292. The endings -6 and -fev may be added to the stem
of a noun or pronoun to denote place : —
1. -θι, denoting where; as ἄλλοθι, elsewhere ; otpavo-ht, in
heaven.
2. -Gev denoting whence; as otxo-bev, from home; αὐτό-θεν,
from the very spot.
293. The euclitic «δὲ (141, 4) added to the accusative denotes
whither; as Μέγαράδε, to Megara, ᾿Ελευσῖνάδε, to Eleusis. After
a, -be becomes Le (see 18; 28, 3); as ᾿Αθήναζε (for ᾿Αθηνᾶς-δε), to
Athens, OnBale (for OnBas-8e), to Thebes, θύραζε, out uf doors.
294. ‘She ending -ae is sometimes added to the stem, denoting
whither $ as ἄλλοσε, in another direction, πάντοσε, in every direction.
295. N. In Momer, the forms in τθὲ and «θεν may he governed
by a preposition as genitives; as Ἰλιόθι πρό, before ium; ἐξ ἀλόθεν,
from the sea.
296. N. Somietimes a relic of an original locative case is found
with the ending cin the singular and σὲ in the plural; as Ἰσθμοῖ,
at the Isthmus; οἴκοι (oixo-t), at home; Πυθοῖ, at Pytho; ᾿Αθήνησι,
αἱ Athens; Πλαταιᾶσι, at Plutaea ; ᾿Ολυμπίᾶσι, at Olympia: θύρασι,
αἱ the gates. These forms (and also those of 292) are often classed
among adverbs; but inscriptions show that forms in aa and in
noe were both used as datives in the early Attic.
297. N. The Epie ending ge or dw forms a genitive or dative
in both singular and plural. It is sometimes locative, as κλισίηφι,
im the tent; and soinctimes it has other meanings of the genitive or
dative, as βίηφι, with violence. These forms may follow preposi-
tions; as mapa ναῦφι, by the ships.
8011 ADJECTIVES—FIRST AND- SECOND DECLENSIONS. 63
ADJECTIVES.
FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS (VoweL
DECLENSION).
298. 1. Most adjectives in os have three endings, os,
m, ον. ‘The masculine and neuter are of the second
declension, and the feminine is of the first; as cops,
σοφή. σοφόν, wese.
2. 11 a vowel or p precedes os, the feminine ends in
G; as ἄξιος, aka, ἄξιον, worthy. But adjectives in oos
have on in the feminine, except those in poos; as ἁπλόος,
ἁπλόη, ἁπλόον, simple ; ἀθρόος, ἀθρόᾶ, ἀθρόον, crowded.
299. Σοφύς, wise, and ἄξιος, worthy, are thus de-
clined : —
SINGULAR.
Nom. σοφὸς σοφή σοφόν ἄξιος ἀξία, ἄξιον
Gen. σοφοῦ σοφῆς σοφοῦ ἀξίου ἀξίας ἀξίου
Dat. σοφῷ copy σοφῷ ἀξίῳ ἀξίᾳ ἀξίῳ
Acc. σοφόν σοφήν σοφὸν ἄξιον ἀξίαν ἄξιον
γος, σοφέ σοφή σοφὸν ἄξιε ἀξία ἄξιον
DUAL
N.A.V. copa σοφὰ σοφώ ἀξίω ἀξία ἀξίω
G.D. σοφοῖν σοφαῖν σοφοῖν ἀξίοιν ἀξίαιν ἀξίοιν
PLURAL.
ΝΙΝ. σοφοί σοφαί σοφά ἄξιοι ἄξιαι ἄξια
Gen. σοφῶν σοφῶν σοφῶν ἀξίων ἀξίων ἀξίων
Dat. σοφοῖς σοφαῖς σοφοῖς ἀξίοις ἀξίαις ἀξίοις
Acc, σοφούς σοφάς σοφά ἀξίους ἀξίας ἄξια
300. So μακρός, μακρά, μακρόν, long; gen. μακροῦ, μακρᾶς,
μακροῦ; dat. μακρῷ, μακρί, μακρῷ; ace. μακρόν, μακρᾶν, μακρόν,
ete., tiie ἄξιος (except in accent).
801, This is hy far the largest elass of adjectives. ΑἸ parti-
ciples iu os and all superlatives (350) are declined like σοφός, and
all compuratives in repos (350) are declined like μακρός (except
in accent).
64 INFLECTION. (302
302. The nominative and genitive plural of adjectives in os
accent the feminine like the masculine: thus ἄξιος has ἄξιαι, ἀξίων
(not ἀξίαι, ἀξιῶν, as if from ἀξία; see 124).
For feminines in ἃ of the third and first declensions combined,
see 316.
303, ‘The masculine dual forms in w and ow in all adjectives
and participles may be used for the feminine forms in ἃ and aw.
804, Some adjectives in os, chiefly compounds, have only
two endings, os aud ov, the feminine being the same as the
masculine. hey are declined like σοφός, omitting the
feminine.
305. There are a few adjectives of the Attic second
decleusion ending in ws and wr.
806. “Aroyos, irrational (304), and ἵλεως, gracious (305),
are thus declined :—
SINGULAR,
Nom. ἄλογος ἄλογον ἵλεως ἵλεων
Gen, ἀλόγον ἵλεω
Dat. ἀλόγῳ ἵλεῳ
Ace, ἄλογον ἵλεων
Voc. ἄλογε ἄλογον ἵλεως ἵλεων
DUAL,
N.A.Y. ddd yw frew
G. 1) ἀλόγοιν ἕλεῳν
PLURAL.
N.V, ἄλογοι ἄλογα ἵλεῳ trea
Gen. ἀλόγων ἵλεων
Dat. ἀλόγοις ἕλεῳς
Acc. ἀλόγους ἄλογα ἵλεως trea
307. Some adjectives in os may be declined with either two or
three endings, especially in poetry.
808. Adjectives in ws, ὧν, commonly have a in the neuter plural.
But ἔκπλεω from ἔκπλεως occurs.
809, λέως, full, has a feminine in a: πλέως, πλέᾷ, πλέων.
The defective σῶς (from ga-os), safe, has nom. σῶς, δῶν (also fem.
oa), ate. σῶν, ueut. pl. σᾶ, ace. pl. σῶς.
σῶα in nom. pl. Homer has σόος.
The Attic has σῶοι, σῶαι,
$10] ADJECTIVES—FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 65
310. Many adjectives in eos and oos are contracted. Χρύ-
eos, golden, ἀργύρεος, of silver, and ἁπλόος, simple, are thus
declined : —
Nom.
Gen.
(χρύσεον) yx picors
(χρυσέου) χρυσοῦ
(χρυσέῳ) χρῦσῴ
(χρύσεον) χρυσοῦν
- (χρύσέω) χρῦσώ
. (xpiodov) χρύσοῖν
. (χρύσεοι) χρῦσοϊ
. (χρυσέων) χρυσῶν
(xpucdos) χρυσοῖς
(χρυσέους) χρσοῦς
. (apytpeos) ἀργυροῦς
(ἀργυρέου) ἀργυροῦ
(ἀργυρέῳ) ἀργυρῷ
(ἀργύρεον) ἀργυροῦν
. (ἀργυρέω) ἀργυρώ
, (ἀργυρέοιν) ἀργυροῖν
. (ἀργύρεοι) ἀργυροῖ
(ἀργυρέων) ἀργυρῶν
(ἀργυρέοις) ἀργυροῖς
(ἀργυρέους) ἀργυροῦς
SINGULAR.
(xpuséa) χρυσῆ
(xpicéas) χρυσῆς
(χρῦσέᾳ) χρυσῇ
(χρύσέαν) χρυσῆν
DUAL.
(xpucéa)
(χρυσέαιν)
PLURAL.
(χρύσεα!) χρῦσαϊ
(χρυσέων) χρυσῶν
(xpucéas) xpucais
(xpuoéas) χρυσᾶς
χρῦσα
χρῦσαῖν
SINGULAR.
(ἀργυρέα) ἀργυρᾶ
(ἀργυρέα:) ἀργυρᾶς
(ἀργυρέᾳ) ἀργυρᾷ
(ἁργυρέαν) ἀργυρᾶν
DUAL.
(apyupéa) ἀργνρᾶ
(ἀργυρέαιν) &pyupaiv
PLURAL,
(ἀργύρεαι) ἀργυραῖ
(ἀργυρέων) ἀργυρῶν
(ἀργυρέαις) ἀργυραῖς
(ἀργυρέας) ἀργυρᾶς
. (Ὡπλόο)ὺ ἁπλοῦς
(ἀπλόου) ἁπλοῦ
(amy) ἁπλῷ
(ἀπλόο») ἁπλοῦν
. (ἀπλόω) ἁπλώ
. (ἀπλόοιν) ἁπλοῖν
SINGULAR,
(ἀπλόη) ἁπλῆ
(ἀπλόης) ἁπλῆς
(ἀπλόῃ) ἁπλῇ
(ἀπλόην) ἁπλῆν
DUAL.
(ἀπλόα) ἁπλᾶ
(ἀπλόαιν) ἁπλαῖν
(χρύσεον)
(χρυσέου)
(χρυσέῳ)
(χρύσεον)
(xpuc éw)
(χρυσέοιν)
(χρύσεα)
(χρυσέων)
(χρῦσέοι:)
(χρύσεα)
(ἀργύρεον) '
(ἀργυρέου)
(ἀργυρέῳ)
(ἀργύρεον)
(ἀργυρέω)
(ἀργυρέοι»)
(ἀργύρεα)
(ἀργυρέων)
(ἀργυρέοις)
(ἀργύρεα)
(ἁπλόον)
(ἀπλόου)
(dt dw)
(ardor)
(ἁπλόω)
(ἀἁπλόοιν)
χρυσοῦν
χρυσοῦ
χρυσῷ
χρυσοῦν
χρῦσώ
χρυσοῖν
χρυσὰ
χρυσῶν
χρὺσοῖς
χρυσὰ
ἀργυροῦν
ἀργυροῦ
ἀργνυρῷ
ἀργυροῦν
ἀργυρώ
ἀργυροῖν
apyupa
ἀργυρῶν
ἀργυροῖς
ἀργυρᾷ
ἁπλοῦν
ἁπλοῦ
ἁπλῷ
δος τς
ἁπλοῦν
ἁπλώ
ἁπλοῖν
66 INFLECTION. [311
PLURAL.
Nom. (ἀπλόο) ἁπλοῖ (ἀπλόαι) ἁπλαῖ (ἀἁπλόα) ἁπλᾶ
Gen, (ἀπλόων) ἁπλῶν (ἀπλόων) ἁπλῶν (ἀπλόων) ἁπλῶν
Dat. (ἀπλόοι:) ἁπλοῖς (ardoas) ἁπλαῖς (ἀπλόοις) ἁπλοῖς
Acc. (ἀπλόου:) ἁπλοῦς (ἀπλόα:) ἁπλᾶς (amdoa) ἁπλᾶ
311. All contract forms of these adjectives ave perispomena ;
except ὦ for éw and ow in the dual (see 203, 1). See also 203, 2
and 39,1, Compounds in οὺς leave oa in the neuter plural uncon-
tracted. No distinct vocative forms occur.
THIRD (or Consonant) DECLENSION.
312. Adjectives belonging only to the third declen-
sion have two endings, the feminine being the same as
the masculine. Most of these end in ys and es (stems
in eo-), or in wy and ον (stems in ov-). See 238.
313. ᾿Αληθής, true, and εὐδαίμων, happy, are thus
declined : ---
M. F. N, M. FF. Ν.
SINGULAR.
Nom. ἀληθής ἀληθές εὐδαίμων εὔδαιμον
Gen, (ἀληθέος) ἀληθοῦς εὐδαίμονος
Dat. (ἀληθέι) ἀληθεῖ εὐδαίμονι
Acc. (ἀληθέα) ἀληθῆ ἀληθές εὐδαίμονα εὕδαιμον
νος. ἀληθές εὔδαιμον
DUAL.
N. ALY, (ἀληϑέε) ἀληθεῖ εὐδαίμονε
ον. Ὁ (ἀληθέοιν) ἀληθοῖν εὐδαιμόνοιν
PLURAL.
N,V. (dAnddes) ἀληθεῖς (ἀληθέα) ἀληθῆ εὐδαίμονες εὐδαίμονα
Gen, (ἀληϑέων) ἀληθών εὐδαιμόνων
Dat. ἀληθέσι εὐδαίμοσι
Acc, ἀληθεῖς (ἀληθέα) ἀληθῆ εὐδαίμονας εὐδαίμονα
314. For the recessive accent of neuters like εὔδαιμον and of
many barytone compounds in ἧς (as αὐτάρκης, αὐταρκες), see 122.
ἴλληθες, indeed ! is proparoxytone.
315. mn adjectives in ns, ca js contracted to ὦ after «and to ἃ
or ἢ after sor v; as εὐκλεής, glorivus, acc. (εὐκλεέξα) ebxd€a : ὑγιής,
920) ADJECTIVES—FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. 67
healthy, (ὑγιέα) ὑγιᾶ aud ὑγιῆ; εὐφυής, comely, (εὐφυέα) εὐφυᾷ and
εὐφυῆ. (See 34, 9.
For εἰς iu the accusative plural, see 208, 3.
816. N. Adjectives compounded of nouns and a prefix are
generally declined like those nouns; as εὔελπις, εὔελπι, hopeful,
gen. εὐέλπιδος, ace. εὔελπιν (214, 3), eveAmes εὔχαρις, εὔχαρι, grace-
Sul, gen. εὐχάριτος, acc. εὔχαριν, εὔχαρι. But compounds of πατήρ
and μήτηρ end in wp (gen. opos), and those of πόλις in es (gen.
Sos); ax ἀπάτωρ, ἄπατορ, gen. ἀπάτορος, fatherless ; ἄπολις, ἄπολι,
withoul a country, pen. ἀπόλιδος.
317. sor the peculiar declension of comparatives in wy (stem in ον),
see 358.
FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS COMBINED.
318. Adjectives of this class have the masculine and
neuter of the third declension and the feminine of the
first. The feminine always has @ in the nominative
and accusative singular (175); iu the genitive and
dative singular it has @ after a vowel or diphthong,
otherwise 7.
Ὧν of the feminine genitive plural is circuinfiexed regularly
(124). Compare 302.
For feminine dual forms, see 303.
319. (Stems ta v.) Stems in v form adjectives in
us, eta, uv. “Vhe masculine and neuter are declined like
πῆχυς and ἄστυ (250), except that the genitive sin-
gular ends in os (not ws) and the neuter plural in ea
is not contracted.
320, Γλυκύς, sweet, is thus declined: —
SINGULAR,
Nom. γλνκύς γλυκεῖα γλυκύ
Gen. γλνκέος γλυκείας γλνκέος
Dat. (γλυκέι) γλυκεῖ γλυκείᾳ (υλυκέ!} γλυκεῖ
Acc. γλυκύν γλυκεῖαν γλυκύ
Voe. γλυκύ γλυκεῖα γλυκύ
DUAL.
N.A.V. (γλυκέε) γλνκεῖ γλυκείὰ (γλυκέε) γλυκιὰ
G.D. γλνκέοιν γλυκείαιν γλυκέοιν
68 INFLECTION. [32]
PLURAL.
N.V. (yAuxées) γλυκεῖς γλνκεῖαι γλυκέα
Gen. γλυκέων γλυκειῶν γλυκέων
Dat. γλυκέσι γλυκείαις γλυκέσι
Acc. γλνκεῖς γλυκείας γλνκέα
821. The feminine stem in ea- comes from the stem in ev- (ef-)
by adding w: thus γλυκεὺυ-, γλυκε- (256), yAuxe-ta, γλυκεῖα, (See
90, 3.)
822. N. The Tonic feminine of adjectives in vs has ea. Homer
has εὐρέα (for εὐρύν) as accusative of εὐρύς, wide.
823. N. Adjectives in us are oxytone, except θῆλυς, female,
Jresh, and ἥμισυς, half. Θῆλυς sometimes has only two termina
tions in poetry.
824. 1. (Stems in av and ev.) Two adjectives have
stems in av, μέλᾶς (μελαν-), μέλαινα, μέλαν, black, and τάλας
(ταλαν-}, τάλαινα, τάλαν, wretched.
2. One has a stem in ev, τέρην (repev-), τέρεινα, τέρεν, tender
(Latin tener).
825. Μέλας and τέρην are thus declined : —
SINGULAR.
Nom. μέλας μέλαινα μέλαν τέρην τέρεινα τέρεν
Gen, μέλανος μελαίνης μέλανος τέρενος τερείνης τέρενος
Dat. μέλανι μελαίνῃ μέλανι τέρενι τερείνῃ τέρενι
Acc. μέλανα μέλαιναν μέλαν τέρενα τέρειναν τέρεν
Voc. μέλαν μέλαινα μέλαν τέρεν τέρεινα τέρεν
DUAL,
N.A.V. p&ave . pedalva μέλανε τέρενε tepelva τέρενε
6. 1). μελάνοιν μελαίναιν μελάνοιν τερένοιν τερείναιν τἐρένοιν
PLURAL.
NV. μέλανες μέλαιναι μέλανα τέρενες τέρειναι τέρενα
Gen, μελάνων μελαινῶν μελάνων τερένων Tepetvav τερένων
Dat. μέλασι μελαίναις μέλασι τέρεσι τερείναις τέρεσι
Acc. μέλανας μελαίνας μέλανα τέρενας τερείνᾶς τέρενα
826. ‘The feminine stems pedoiva- and τέρεινα- come from
μελαντια- and repev-a- (δ4, 5).
327, Like the masculine and neuter of τέρην is declined ἄρρην;
ἄρρεν (older ἄρσην, ἄρσεν), male.
933] ADJECTIVES—FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. 69
328. (Stems in vr.) Adjectives from stems in evr
end in es, ἐσσα, ev. From a stem in avr comes mas,
πᾶσα, πᾶν, all,
329. χαρίεις, graceful, and πᾶς are thus declined : —
SINGULAR,
Nom. yxaples χαρίεσσα χαρίεν πᾶς πᾶσα πᾶν
Gen. χαρίεντος χαριέσσης χαρίεντος παντός πάσης παντός
Dat. χαρίεντι χαριέσσῃ χαρίεντι παντί. πάσῃ παντί
Acc. χαρίεντα χαρίεσσαν χαρίεν πάντα πᾶσαν πᾶν
Voc. χαρίεν χαρέσσα χαρίεν
DUAL,
N.A.V. xaplevre χαριέσσᾷ χαρίεντε
6. Ὁ. χαριέντοιν χαριέσσαιν χαριέντοιν
PLURAL.
ΝΙΝ. χαρίεντες χαρίεσσαι χαρίεντα πάντες πᾶσαι πάντα
Gen. χαριέντων χαριισσῶν χαριίντων πάντων πᾶσῶν πάντων
Dat. χαρίεσι χαριέσσαις χαρίεσι πᾶσι πάσαις πάσι
Acc. χαρίεντας χαριέσσᾶς χαρίεντα πάντας πάσᾶς πάντα
880. Most adjective stems in evr, all in avr except avr (πᾶς),
and all in ovr except éxovr- and ἄκοντ- (ἑκών and ἄκων, 333), belong
to participles. (See 334.)
831. 1. The nominatives χαρίεις aud χαρίεν are for χαριεντ-ς
and yaptevr-, aud πᾶς and πᾶν for wavr-s and παντ- (79). Thea
in πᾶν is irregular; but Homer has dav and πρόπᾶν. For the
accent of πάντων and πᾶσι, see 128. Tlaowy is revular (318).
2. For the feminine χαρίεσσα (for yupter-va from a stem in er-),
sce 84,1; and for das. plur. χαρίεσι (for χαριετ-σι), see 74. [Πᾶσα
is for mayt-ta (84, 2).
332. Homer occasionally contracts adjectives in ses, as τιμῆς
(for τιμήεις), τιμῆντα (for τιμήεντα), valuable. The Attic poets
suinetimnes contract those in oes; 1s πλακοῦς, πλακοῦντος (for πλα-
κόεις, πλακόεντος), flat (cake), πτεροῦντα (for πτερόεντα), winged,
αἰθαλοῦσσα (for αἰθαλόεσσα), flaming, πτεροῦσσα (for πτερόεσσαλ),
μελιτοῦττα (for μελιτόεσσα, 6S, 3), hanied (cake). So naines of
places (properly adjectives); as Ἐλαιοῦς, “EAawtyros, Elacus,
᾿Ἐλαιοῦσσα (an island), from forms in -oes. τοέσσα. So ‘Pupvois,
Ῥαμνοῦντος, Rkamnus (from -das). (See 39, 5.)
333. One adjective in wy, ἑκών, ἑκοῦσα, ἑκόν, willing, gen. ἑκόντος,
etc., has three endings, aud is declined like participles i In wy (8: 50).
So its compound, ἄκων (ἀέκων), unwilling, ἄκουσα, ἧκον, feu. ἄκοντος.
70 INFLECTION. [384
PARTICIPLES IN wy, ous, as, εἰς, ts, AND ws.
334. All participles, except those in os, belong to the
first and third declensions combined.
335. Λύων (Avovr-), loosing, διδούς (&Sovr-), giving, τιθείς
(rievr-), placing, δεικνύς (δεικνυντ-), showing, toras (iotavr-),
erecting, ὧν (dvr-), being, (present active participles of Atw,
δίδωμι, τίθημι, δείκνῦμι, ἵστημι, and εἰμῶῦ, λίσας (λῦσαντ-), hav-
ing loosed, aud λελυκώς (λελυκοτ-), having loosed (first aorist
and perfect participles of λύων), are thus declined: —
SINGULAR,
Nom. λύων λύονσα Atov διδούς διδοῦσα διδόν
Gen. λύοντος λύούσης λύοντος διδόντος διδούσης διδόντος
Dat. λύοντι λυούσῃ λύοντι διδόντι διδούσῃ διδόντι
Acc, λύοντα λύονσαν λῦον διδόντα διδοῦσαν διδόν
Voc. λύων λύονσα λῦον διδούς διδοῦσα διδόν
DUAL.
N.A.V.Avovte Avotca λύοντε διδόντε διδούσᾷᾶ διδόντε
(.1). λνόντοιν λυούσαιν λυόντοιν διδόντοιν διδούσαιν διδόντοιν
PLUILAL.
ΝΙΝ, λύοντες λύονσαι λύοντα διδόντες διδοῦσαι διδόντα
Gen, λύόντων λυουσών λυόντων διδόντων διδουσῶν διδόντων
Dat. λύουσι λῦούσαις λύουσι διδοῦσι διδούσαις διδοῦσι
Acc. Avovras λυούσᾶς λύοντα διδόντας διδούσᾶς διδόντα
SINGULAR,
Nom. τιθείς τιθεῖσα τιθέν δεικνύς δεικνῦσα δεικνύν
Gen. τιθέντος τιθείσης τιθέντος δεικνύντος δεικνύσης δεικνύντος
Dat. τιθέντι τιθείσῃ τιθέντι δεικνύντι δεικνύσῃ δεικνύντι
Acc. τιθέντα τιθεῖσαν τιθέν δεικνύντα δεικνῦσαν δεικνύν
Voc. τιθείς τιθεῖσα τιθέν δεικνύς δεικνῦσα δεικνύν
DUAL.
N.A.Virbévre τιθείσα τιθέντε δεικνύντε δεικνύσαᾶ δεικνύντε
6.1). τιθέντοιν τιθείσαιν τιθέντοιν δεικνύντοιν δεικνύσαιν δεικνύντοιν
PLURAL,
ΝΙΝ. τιθέντες τιθεῖσαι τιθέντα δεικνύντες δεικνῦσαι δεικνύντα
Gen. τιθέντων τιθεισών τιθέντων δεικνύντων δεικνυσῶν δεικνύντων
Dat. τιθεῖσι τιθείσαις τιθεῖσι δεικνῦσι δεικνυσαις δεικνῦσι
Acc. τιθέντας τιθείσᾶς τιθέντα δεικνύντας Sexvioas δεικνύντα
337] PARTICIPLES.
SINGULAR.
Nom. ἱστάς ἱστᾶσα ἱστάν λύσᾶς
Gen. ἱστάντος ἱστάσης ἱστάντος λύσαντος
Dat. ἱστάντι ἱστάσῃ ἱστάντι λύσαντι
Ace. ἱστάντα ἱστᾶσαν ἱστάν λύσαντα
Voc ἱστάς ἱστᾶάσα ἱστάν λύσας
DUAL.
N.A.V.lordvre ἱστάσα ἱστάντε λύσαντε
α. ἢ. ἱστάντοιν ἱστάσαιν ἱστάντοιν λῦύσάντοιν
PLURAL.
ΝΙΝ. ἱστάντες ἱστᾶσαι ἱστάντα λύσαντες
Gen. ἱστάντων ἱστάσών ἱστάντων λύσάντων
Dat. ἱστᾶσι ἱστάσαις ἱστᾶσι λύσασι
Acc. ἱστάντας ἱστάσᾶς ἱστάντα λύσαντας
SINGULAN,
Nom. ὧν οὖσα bv λελυκώς
Gen. ὄντος οὔσης ὄντος λελυκότος
Dat. ὄντι οὔσῃ ὄντι λελυκότι
Ace. ὄντα οὖσαν ὃν λελυκότα
Voc. ὦν οὖσα ὃν λελυκώς
DUAL.
N.A.V. ὄντε otra ὄντε λελυκότε
G.D. ὄντοιν οὔσαιν ὄντοιν
PLURAL.
N.V. ὄντες οὖσαι ὄντα λελυκότες
Gen. ὄντων οὐσῶν ὄντων
Dat. οὖσι οὔσαις οὖσι λελνυκόσι
Acc ὄντας οὔσᾶς ὄντα
336. All participles
λύσᾶσα
λύσασης
λυσάσῃ
λυσασαν
λύσασα
λυσάσα
λυσάσαιν
λύσαᾶσαι
λυσὰασῶν
λῦσάσαις
λυσᾶσᾶς
λελυκνῖα
λελυκνίας
λελυκνίᾳ
λελυκνῖαν
λελνκνῖα
λελυκυίᾶ
λελυκνῖαι
71
λῦσαν
λύσαντος
λύσαντι
λῦσαν
λῦσαν
λύσαντε
λυσάντοιν
λύσαντα
λυσάντων
λύσασι
λύσαντα
λελυκός
λελυκότος
λελυκότι
λελνκός
λελνκός
λελνκότε
λελυκότοιν λελνυκυίαιν λελυκότοιν
λελυκότα
λελυκότων λελυκνιῶν λελυκότων
λελυκνίαις λελυκόσι
λελυκότας λελυκνίας λελυκότα
in wy are declined like λύων (those in ὧν
being accented like giv); all in ous, vs, and ὡς are declined like
διδούς, δεικνός, and λελυκώς : all in εἰς (aorist passive as well as
active) are declined like riBeés; present and second aorist active
participles in ds (from verbs in pu) are declined like iords, and
first aorists in ds like λύσάς.
337. 1. For feminines in ovea, aaa, toa, and doa (for ovt-ta,
evt-ta, υντ-ία, avt-ta), formed by adding ca to the stem, see $4, 2.
2. Perfeets in ws (with stems in or-) have an irregular femi-
nine in wa.
73 INFLECTION. [338
838, The full accent of polysyllabic barytone participles ap.
pears in βουλεύων, βουλεύουσα, βουλεῦον, and βουλεύσᾶς, βουλεύ.
σάσα, βουλεῦσαν. (See 1941.)
999. For the accent of the genitive and dative of monosyllabic
participles, see 129 and the inflection of ὧν above. Thus θείς has
gen. θέντος, θέντων, ete.
340, Varticiples in dwr, ἔων, and dey are contracted,
Τιμάων, τιμῶν, honoring, and φιλέων, φιλῶν, loving, are de-
clined as follows: —
SINGULAR.
N, (σϊμάων) ripe (σϊμάουσα) tipdca (Tindov) πτὶμῶν
G. (τἱμάοντος) ripavros (τιμαούση:) Tipwons (Tindovros) Tipdvros
D. (riudovt:) τιμῶντι (τιμαούσῃ) τμώσῃ (τῖμάοντι) Tipayre
A.(rindorvta) tipevra (τιμάουσαν) τἱμῶσαν (τὶμάον) τιμῶν
V.(rindwy) τὶμῶν (τἱμάουσα) τἰμῶσα (τὶμάον) τὶμῶν
DUAL.
N.(ripdovre) tipavre (rinaotcd) τὶμώσα (τὶμάοντε) τὶμῶντε
G. (σμαόντοιν) τἱμώντοιν {τ μαούσαιν) tipwraw (τιμαόντοιν) τἱμώντοιν
PLURAL.
. (τίμάοντε:) Tipavres (Tindovoar) τἱμῶσαι (Tindovra) tipevra
«(σϊμαόντων) τἱμώντων (Tinaovedy) τἱμωσῶν (Tiuadyrwy) rTipevrev
1). (τιμάουσι) τὶμῶσι (τἱμαούσαι:) τἰμώσαις (τίμάουσι) Tipact
Oe
A. (rindovras) tipavras (Tinaotoas) Tipuras (Tiudovra) ripavra
V.(tipdovres) tipavres (τίμάουσαι) τἱμῶσαι (Tindovra) tipdvra
. SINGULAR.
Ν, (φιλέων) φιλῶν (φιλέουσα) φιλοῦσα (φιλέον) φιλοῦν
α. (φιλέοντοτ) φιλοῦντος (φιλεούσητ) φιλούσης (φιλέοντο:) φιλοῦντος
1). (φιλέοντι) φιλοῦντι (φιλεούσῃ) φιλούσῃ (φιλέοντι) φιλοῦντι
ΔΛ. (φιλέοντα) φιλοῦντα (φιλέουσαν) φιλοῦσαν (φιλέον) φιλοῦν
ν, (φιλέων) φιλῶν (φιλέουσα) φιλοῦσα (φιλέον) φιλοῦν
DUAL.
N. (φιλέοντε) φιλοῦντε (φιλεούσα) φιλούσαᾶ (φιλέοντε) φιλοῦντε
G. (φιλεόντοιν) φιλούντοιν (φιλεούσαιν) φιλούσαιν (φιλεόντοιν) φιλούντοιν
PLURAL.
N. (girdovres) φιλοῦντες (φιλέουσαι) φιλοῦσαι (φιλέοντα) φιλοῦντα
G. (φιλεόντων) φιλούντων (φιλεουσῶν) φιλουσῶν (φιλεόντων) φιλούντων
Ὦ, (φιλέουσι) φιλοῦσι (φιλεούσαις) φιλούσαις (φιλέουσι) φιλοῦσι
Α΄ (φΦιλέοντα:) φιλοῦντας (φιλεούσα:) φιλούσας (φιλέοντα) φιλοῦντα
V.(girdovres) φιλοῦντες (φιλέουσαι) φιλοῦσαι (φιλέοντα) φιλοῦντα
340] IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 73
341. Present participles of verbs in dw (contracted ὦ) are de-
clined like φιλῶν. Thus δηλῶν, δηλοῦσα, δηλοῦν, manifesting ; gen.
δηλοῦντος, δηλούσης dat. δηλοῦντι, δηλούση, etc. No uncontracted
forms of verbs in dw are used (493).
342. A few second perfect participles in aws of the μὲ form
have ὥσα in the feminine, and retain ὦ iu the oblique cases. They
ave contracted in Attic; as Hom. ἑσταώς, ἑσταῶσα, ἑσταός, Attic
ἑστώς, ἑστῶσα, dards or ἑστώς, Standing, gen. ἑστῶτος, ἑστώσης,
ἑστῶτος, ete.; pl. ἑστῶτες, ἑστῶσαι, ἑστῶτα, gen. ἑστώτων, ἑστωσῶν,
ἑστώτων, etc. (See 508.)
ADJECTIVES WITH ONE ENDING.
343. Some adjectives of the third declension have only one
ending, which is both masculine and feminine; as φυγάς, φυγάδος,
fugitive; ἄπαις, ἄπαιδος, childless; dyvas, ἀγνῶτος, unknown; ἄναλκις,
ἀνάλκιδος, weak, The oblique cases occasionally occur as neuter.
344. The poetic ἴδρις, knowing, has acc. (Spry, voc. (Spt, nom.
pl. ἴδριες.
345. A very few adjectives of one termination are of the first
declension, ending in as or ns; aS γεννάδας, noble, gen. γεννάδου.
IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES.
346. The irregular adjectives, μέγας (meya-, peyado-), great,
πολύς (πολυ-, πολλο-), much, and πρᾷος (πρᾳο-, mpav-), or
πρᾶος, mild, are thus declined : —
; SINGULAR.
Nom. μέγας μεγάλη μέγα πολύς πολλή πολύ
Gen. μεγάλον μεγάλης μεγάλου πολλοῦ πολλῆς πολλοῦ
αν. μεγάλῳ μεγάλῃ μεγάλῳ πολλῷ πολλῇ πολλῴ
Acc. μέγαν μεγάλην μέγα πολύν πολλήν πολύ
Voc. μεγάλε μεγάλη μέγα
DUAL.
N.A.V. peydAw = peydha μεγάλω
α. Ὁ. peyddow μεγάλαιν μεγάλοιν
PLURAL,
N,V. μεγάλοι μεγάλαι μεγάλα πολλοί πολλαί πολλά
Gen, μεγάλων μεγάλων μεγάλων πολλῶν πολλῶν πολλῶν
Dat. μεγάλοις μεγάλαις μεγάλοις πολλοῖς πολλαῖς πολλοῖς
Acc. μεγάλους peydAds μεγάλα πολλοὺς πολλᾶς πολλά
74 INFLECTION, [84]
SINGULAR.
Nom. πρᾷος πραεῖα πρᾷον
yen. πρᾷου arpaclas πρᾷου
Dat. πρᾷῳ πρᾶείᾳ πρᾷῳ
Acc, πρῴον πράεῖαν πρᾷον
DUAL.
N.Y. πρᾷῴω πρϑεία Tpgw
GD. πρῴοιν πραείαιν πρῴοιν
PLURAL,
N. A. πρᾷοι OF πρᾶεῖς πράεῖαι πρᾷα OF πρᾶέξα
Gen, πράξων πρᾶειών ᾿ πράξων
Dat. πρᾷοις ur πρᾶέσι πρδείαις πρᾷοις ΟΥ̓ πραέσι
Ace. πρᾷους mpacias πρᾷα OF πρᾶξα
347, Ν. Πολλός, ἡ, ὄν, is found in Homer and Herodotus, declined
regularly throughout. Homer has forms πολέος, πολέες, πολέων, πολέσι, ete,
not. to be confounded with epic forms of πόλις (255): also πουλύς, πουλύ.
348. N. Mpgos has two stums, one mpgo-, from which the masculine
and neuter are generally formed ; and one mpai-, from which the femi-
nine and some other forms come. There is an epic form πρηὺς (lyric
mpaus) coming from the latter stem. The forms belonging to the two
stems dilfer in accent.
349. N. Some compounds of πούς (2r08-), Foot, have ovr in the nomi-
native neuter and the accusative masculine; as τρίπους, τρίπουν, three-
footed.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
‘ l. Comparison By τ-τέρος, -τατος.
350. Most adjectives add repos (stem repo-) to the
stem to form the comparative, and τατος (stem tato-)
to form the superlative. Stems in o with a short penult
lengthen 0 to ὦ before repos and τατος. For the declen-
sion, sce 801. δ.
Κοῦφος (κουφυ-), liyht, xoupdrepos (-a, -ov), lighter, κουφότατος
(τη, -ov), lightest.
Σοφύς (vodo-), wise, σοφώτερος, wiser, σοφώτατος, wisest.
“Aéws (ἀξιο-), worthy, ἀξιώτερος, ἀξιώτατος.
Σεμνός (σεμνο-), GugUst, σεμνότερος, σεμνύτατος.
Πικρός {πικρο-), bitter, πικρύτερος, πικρότατος.
᾿Οξύς (ὀξυ-), sharp, ὀξύτερος, ὀξύτατος.
Μέλας (μέελαν-), black, μελάντερος, μελάντατος.
᾿Αληθής (ἀληθεσ-), true, ἀληθέστερυς, ἀληθέστατος (812).
869] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES, 75
351. Stems ‘in ο do not lengthen o to w if the penultimate
vowel is followed by a mute and a liquid (100). See πικρός above.
852. Μέσος, middle, and a few others, drop o of the stem and
add airepos and αίτατος ; a8 μέσος (μεσο:), μεσαίτερος, μεσαίτατος.
353. Adjectives in οος drop final o of the stem and add ἔστερος
and €oraros, which are contracted with o to overepos aud overaros ;
as (evvoos) εὔνους (εὐνοο-), well-disposed, εὐνούστερος, εὐνούστατος.
354, Adjectives in wy add έστερος and ἔστατος to the stem; as
σώφρων (Gudpor-), prudent, σωφρονέστερος, σωφρονέστατος.
355. Adjectives in εἰς add repos and τατὸς tu the stem in er
(331, 2); as χαρίεις, graceful, fem. χαρίεσσα (χαριετ-), χαριέστερος,
χαριέστατος for χαριετ-τερος, xapter-ratos (71).
356. Adjectives may be compared by prefixing μᾶλλον, more,
and μάλιστα, must; as μᾶλλον σοφός, more wise, μάλιστα κακός, Must
bad.
1. Comparison py -twy, εἰστος.
357. 1. Some adjectives, chiefly in us and pos, are com-
pared by changing these endings to ἴων and ἰστος. Lg.
᾿Ηδύς, sweet, ἡδίων, ἥδιστος.
Ταχύς, swift, ταχέων (rare), commonly θάσσων (95, 5), τάχιστος.
Αἰσχρός, base, αἰσχίων, αἴσχιστος.
Ἐχθρός, hostile, ἐχθίων, ἔχθιστος.
Κυδρός (poet.), glorious, κυδίων κύδιστος.
2. The terminations ἴων and eres are thus added to the roof
of the word (153), not to the adjective stem.
358. Comparatives in iwy, neuter ἴον, are thus de-
clined: —
SINGULAR, PLURAL,
Nom. ἡδίων ἡδῖον N. V. Stoves ἡδίους ἡδίονα ἡδίω
Gen. ἡδίονος Gen. ἡδιόνων
Nat. ἡδίονι Dat. ἡδίοσι
Acc, ἡδίονα ἡδίω ἥδιον Acc. ἡδίονας ἡδίους Stove ἡδίω
DLAL.
N. A.V. ἡδίονε
G.). nbiovorw
359, N. (a) The shortened forms come from a stem in oo- (ef.
238), ὦ and ovs Leing contracted from oa and wes. ‘The accusa-
tive plural in evs follows the form of the nominative (208, 3).
(Ὁ) Homer sometimes has comparatives in ἴων.
76
INFLECTION.
[360
(c) The vocative singular of these comparatives seems not to
occur.
(4) For the recessive accent in the neuter singular, see 122.
360. ‘The irregular comparatives in wy (361) are declined like
ἡδίων.
ΠῚ. Irrecurar Comparison.
irregular comparison : —
1.
em Oo
a
>
. κακός, Lad,
. καλός, Leuutiful,
. μέγας, great,
: μίκρός, small,
. ὀλίγος, Little,
. φίλος, Zear,
ἀμείνων,
(ἀρείων),
βελτίων,
(βέλτερον),
ἀγαθός, good,
861. The following are the most important cases of
ἄριστος,
βέλτιστος,
(βέλτατοΞ),
κρείσσων or κρείττων (κρέσσων), κράτιστος,
(φέρτερον),
(xdpriotos),
(pépraros, φέριστος),
λῳῴων (Awlwy, AwWlrEpos),
κακίων (Kaxwrepos),
χείρων (xepelwr),
(χειρότερος, xepecdrepos),
ἥσσων (for ἡκ--ων, 84,1) or
ἥττων (ἔσσων),
καλλίων,
μικρότερος,
(Hom. ἐλάχεια,
fem. of ἐλαχύς), ἐλάσσων or ἐλάττων (84, 1),
μείων
(ὑπ-ολέζων, rather less),
. πένης (πενητ-), DOO, πενέστερος,
| πολὺς, much, πλείων Or πλέων (neut. Some-
times πλεῖν),
. ῥᾷδιος, Casy, ῥᾷων,
(lon. ῥηίδιος), (pnlrepos),
φίλτερος (poetic),
φιλαίτερος (rare),
(φιλίων, twice in Hom.)
Tonic or poetic forms are in (. ).
λῴῷστος.
κάκιστος;
χείριστος,
(ὄκιστος, rare);
adv. ἥκιστα,
least.
κάλλιστος.
μείζων (μέζων for pey-t-wy, 84,3), μέγιστος.
μικρότατος,
ἐλάχιστος,
(petoros, rare).
ὀλίγιστος.
πενέστατος.
πλεῖστος.
ῥᾷστος,
(ῥηίτατος,
Atoros).
φίλτατος,
φιλαίτατος
(rare).
867] ADVERBS AND THEIR COMPARISON. 17
362. Irregularities in the comparison of the following words
will be found in the Lexicon : —
αἰσχρός, ἀλγεινός, ἅρπαξ, ἄφθονος, ἄχαρις, βαθύς, βλάξ, βραδύς,
γεραιός, γλυκύς, ἐπιλήσμων, ἐπίχαρις, ἥσυχος, ἴδιος, ἴσος, λάλος,
μάκαρ, μακρός, νέος, παλαιός, παχύς, πέπων, πίων, πλησίος, πρέσβυς,
προὔργου, πρώιος, σπουδαῖος, σχολαῖος, ψευδής, ὠκύς.
368, Some comparatives and superlatives have vo posi-
tive, but their stem generally appears in an adverb or
preposition. Eg.
"Avwrepos, upper, ἀνώτατος, uppermost, from ἄνω, up; πρότερος,
former, πρῶτος or πρώτιστος, first, from πρό, before; κατώτερος,
lower, xarwraros, luwest, from κάτω, downward.
See in the Lexicon dyxdrepos, ἀφάρτερος, Kepdiwv, ὁπλότερος,
προσώτερος, ῥίγιον (neuter), ὑπέρτερος, ὕστερος, ὑψίων, padvrepos,
with their regular superlatives; also ἔσχατος, ὕπατος, and κήδιστος.
364. Comparatives and superlatives may be formed from
nouns, and even from pronouns. Εἰ.
Βασιλεύς, king, βασιλεύτερος, a greater king, βασιλεύτατος, the
greatest king; κλέπτης, thief, κλεπτίστερος, κλεπτίστατος ; κύων, dug,
κύντερος, more impudent, κύντατος, most impudent. So αὐτός, self,
αὐτότατος, his very self, ipsissimus.
ADVERBS AND THEIR COMPARISON.
365. Adverbs are regularly formed from adjectives.
Their form (including the accent) may be found by
changing ν of the genitive plural masculine tos. Zig.
Pirws, dearly, from φίλος; δικαίως, justly (δίκαιος); σοφῶς,
wisely (σοφός); ἡδέως, sweetly (ἡδύς, gen. plur. ἡδέων), ἀληθῶς,
truly (ἀληθής, gen. plur. ἀληθέων, ἀληθῶν) ; σαφῶς (Ionic σαφέως),
plainly (σαφής, gen. plur. σαφέων, σαφῶν); πάντως, wholly (πᾶς,
gen. plur. πάντων).
366. Adverbs are occasionally formed in the same way from
participles; as διαφερόντως, differently, from διαφέρων (διαφερόν-
Twv); τεταγμένως, regularly, from τεταγμένος (τάσσω, order).
367. The neuter accusative of an adjective (either
singular or plural) may be used as an adverb. Eg.
" Πολύ and πολλά, much (πολύς) ; μέγα or μεγάλα, greatly (μέγας);
also μεγάλως (365), μόνον, only (μόνος, alone).
78 INFLECTION, [388
368. Other forms of adverbs occur with various terminations;
as μάλα, very, τάχα, quickly, ἄνω, above, ἐγγύς, near.
369. The neuter accusative sinyular of the coinpara-
tive of an adjective forms the comparative of the corre.
sponding adverb, and the neuter accusative plural of the
superlative forms the superlative of the adverb. Evy.
Σοφῶς (σοφός), wisely ; σοφώτερον, more wisely ; σοφώτατα, most
wisely. ᾿Αληθῶς (ἀληθής). ruly; ἀληθέστερον, ἀληθέστατα. ᾿Ηδέως
(ἡδύς), sweetly, ἥδιον, ἥδιστα. Χαριέντως (χαρίεις), gracefully ; χαριέ.
στερον, χαριέστατα. Σωφρόνως (σώφρων), prudently; σωφρονέοτε:
ρον, σωφρονέστατα.
910. 1. Adverbs in w generally form a comparative in τέρω,
and a superlative in τάτω; as ἄνω, above, ἀνυτέρω, ἀνωτάτω.
2. A few comparatives derived from adjectives end in réws;
as βεβαιοτέρως, more firmly, for βεβωότερον, from βεβαίως.
871. N. Mada, much, very, has comparative μᾶλλον (for μαλ-εον,
84, 4), more, rather ; superlative μάλιστα, most, especially.
NUMERALS.
372. The cardinal and ordinal numeral adjectives, and
the numeral adverbs which occur, are as follows: —
Sign. Cardinal. Ordinal. Adverb.
] a’: els, μία, ἕν, one πρώτος, first ἅπαξ. once
2 BP’ ὅδύο, two δεύτερος, second δίς, twice
8. γί τρεῖς, τρία τρίτος τρίς
4 δ΄ τέσσαρες, τίσσαρα τέταρτος τετράκις
(τέτταρες, τέτταρα) ,
5 « πέντε πέμπτος πεντάκις
6 ς’ ἐξ ἕκτος ἑξάκις
7 OY ἑπτά ἕβδομος ἑπτάκις
8. η΄ ὀκτώ ὄγδοος ὀκτάκις
9 θ΄ ἐννέα ἔνατος ἐνάκις
10 ι δέκα δέκατος δεκάκις
11 ια΄ ἕνδεκα ἑνδέκατος ἐνδεκάκις
12. ιβ΄ δώδεκα δωδέκατος δωδεκάκις
15. ιγ΄ τρεῖς καὶ δέκα (or τρίτος καὶ δέκατος
τρεισκαίδεκα)
814] NUMERALS. 79
Sign. Cardinal. Ordinal. Adverb.
14 ιδ΄ τέοσαρες καὶ δίκα τέταρτος Kal δέκατος
(οὐ τεσσαρεσκαίδεκα)
15 ιε΄ πεντεκαίδεκα πέμπτος καὶ δέκατος
10 ις΄ ἑκκαίδεκα ἕκτος καὶ δέκατος
17 ot! ἑπτακαίδεκα ἕβδομος καὶ δέκατος
18 «η΄ ὀκτωκαίδεκα ὄγδοος καὶ δέκατος
19 ιθ΄ ἐννεακαίδεκα ἔνατος καὶ δέκατος
20. κ΄ εἴκοσι(ν) εἰκοστός εἰκοσάκις
21 κα΄’ εἷς καὶ εἴκοσι(ν) Or πρῶτος καὶ εἰκοστός
εἴκοσι (καὶ) εἷς
80 λ΄ τριάκοντα τριάκοστος τριᾶκοντάκις
40 μ’ τεσσαράκοντα τεσσαρακοστος τεσσαρακοντάκις
δ0 ν΄ πεντήκοντα πεντηκοστός πεντηκοντάκις
GO ξ΄ ἐξύκοντα ἑξηκοστος ἑξηκοντάκις
70 ο΄ ἑβδομήκοντα ἐβδομηκοστός ἑβδομηκοντάκις
80 π΄ ὀγδοήκοντα ὀγδοηκοστος ὀγδοηκοντάκις
90 φ’ ἐνενήκοντα ἐνενηκοστός ἐνενηκοντάκις
100 ρ΄ ἑκατόν ἑκατοστός ἑκατοντάκις
200 σ΄ διάκσσιοι, αι, a διάκοσιοστος διάκοσιάκις
900 τ΄ τριάκοσιοι, αι, α τριάκοσιοστός
400 υ΄ τετράκοσιοι, at, a TETPAKOTLOTTOS
δ00ὺ φ'΄ πεντακόσιοι, at, a πεντακοσίιοστος
600 x’ ἑξακόσιοι, αι, a ἑξακοσιοστοός
100 ψ΄ ἑπτακόσιοι, αι, α ἑπτακοσιοστός
800 ww’ ὀκτακόσιοι, αι, a ὀκτακοσιοστός
90 7 ἐνακόσιοι, αι, α ἐνακοσιοστός
1000 ja χίλιοι, αι, a Xivocros χίλιάκις
2000 β δισχίλιοι, αι, α δισχίλιοστος
8000 Ὑ τρισχίλιοι, at, α τρισχϊλιοστος
10000 κ΄ μύριοι, αι, α μῦριοστος μῦριάκις
20000 x δισμύριοι
100000 op δεκακισμύριοι
373. Above 10,000, δύο μύριάδες, 20,000, τρεῖς μῦριάδες, 30,000,
etc., may be used,
374, The dialects have the following peculiar forms : —
1—4. See 377.
δ. Aeolie πέμπε for πέντε.
9,
12.
Herod. εἴνατος for ἔνατος ; also εἰνάκις, etc.
Doric and Tonie δυώδεκα ; Poetic δυοκαίδεκα.
950. Epic ἐείκοσι; Dorie εἴκατι.
80 INFLECTION. [376
30, 80, 90, 200, 800. Tonic τριήκοντα, ὀγδώκοντα, ἐννήκοντα (Hom.),
διηκόσωοι, τριηκόσιοι.
40. Herod. τεσσεράκοντα.
Homer has τρίτατος, τέτρατος, ἑβδύματος, ὀγδόατος, εἴνατος, δυω.
δέκατος, ἐεικοστός, and also the Attic form of each.
375. The cardinal numbers εἷς, one, δύο, two, τρεῖς,
three, and τέσσαρες (or τέτταρες), four, are thus de-
clined : —
Nom. εἷς μία iv
Gen. ἑνός μιάς ἑνός N. A. δύο
Dat. {ἑνί μιᾷ ἑνί G.D. δνοῖν
Acc. ἕνα μίαν ἕν
Nom. τρεῖς τρία ; τέσσαρες τέσσαρα
Gen. τριῶν τεσσάρων
Dat. τρισί τέσσαρσι
Ace. τρεῖς τρία τέσσαρας τέσσαρα
376. N. Avo, two, with a plural noun, is sometimes indeclinable,
377. N. Homer has fem. ἴα, ifs, if, ἴαν, for pla; and ig for ἑνί,
Homer has δύο and δύω, both indeclinable; and doa and δοιοί,
declined regularly. Herodotus has δυῶν, δυοῖσι, and other forms:
see the Lexicon. Homer sometimes has πίσυρες for τέσσαρες.
Hérodotus has τέσσερες, and the poets have τέτρασι.
378. The compounds οὐδείς and μηδείς, no one, none, ave de-
clined like εἷς. Thus, οὐδείς, οὐδεμία, οὐδέν; gen. οὐδενός, οὐδεμιᾶς ;
dat. obdevi, οὐδεμιᾷ ; acc. οὐδένα, οὐδεμίαν, οὐδέν, etc. Plural forms
sometimes occur; as οὐδένες, οὐδένων, οὐδέσι, οὐδένας, μηδένες, etc.
When οὐδέ or μηδέ is written separately or is separated from εἷς
(as by preposition or by ἄν), the negative is more emphatic; as
ἐξ οὐδενός, from no one; οὐδ᾽ ἐξ évds, from nol even one; οὐδὲ εἷς, not
α man.
379. Roth is expressed by ἄμφω, ambo, ἀμφοῖν; and by ἀμφό
repos, generally plural, ἀμφότεροι, at, a.
880. The cardinal numbers from 5 to 100 are indeclin-
able. The higher numbers in c: and all the ordinals are
declined regularly, like other adjectives in os.
381. In τρεῖς (τρία) καὶ δέκα and τέσσαρες (τέσσαρα) καὶ δέκα
for 13 and 14, the first part is declined. In ordinals (13th to 19th)
the forms τρεισκαιδέκατος etc. are Jonic, and are rarely found in
the best Attic.
388] NUMERALS.~THE ARTICLE, 81
$82. 1. In compound expressions like 21, 22, etc., 31, 32, ete,
the numbers can be connected by καί in either order; but if καί is
omitted, the larger precedes. Thus, εἷς καὶ εἴκοσι, one and twenty,
or εἴκοσι καὶ εἷς, twenty and one; but (without καί} only εἴκοσιν εἷς,
twenty-one.
2. In ordinals we have πρῶτος καὶ eixoords, twenty-first, and also
εἰκοστὸς Kai πρῶτος, etc.; and for 21 εἷς καὶ εἰκοστός.
3. The numbers 18 and 19, 28 and 29, 38 and 39, etc., are often
expressed by ἑνὸς (or δυοῖν) δέοντες εἴκοσι (rpidxovra, τεσσαράκοντα,
etc.); as ἔτη ἑνὸς δέοντα τριάκοντα, 29 years.
8388. 1. With collective nouns in the singular, especially ἡ
ἵππος, cavalry, the numerals in eo. sometimes appear in the sin-
gular; as τὴν διάκοσίαν ἵππον, the (troop 47) 200 cavalry (200
horse); ἀσπὶς μυρία καὶ τετρακοσία (X. An. i, 710), 10,400 shields
(i.e. men with shields).
2. Μύριοι means ten thousand; μὺρίοι, innumerable. Mipios
sometimes has the latter sense; as pupiog χρόνος, countless time ;
pupia πενία, incalculable poverty. E
384. N. The Greeks often expressed numbers by letters; the two
obsolete letters Vau (in the form ¢) aud Koppa, and the character San,
denoting 6, 90, and 900. (See 3.) ‘The last letter in a numerical ex-
pression has an accent above. Thousands begin anew with a, with a
stroke below. Thus, αωξη΄, 1868; βχκεῖ, 2025; xe, 4025 ; BY: 2008 ;
gn’, 540; ρδ΄, 104. (See 372.)
385. N. The letters of the ordinary Greek alphabet are often used
to number the books of the Niad and Odyssey, each poem having
tweuty-four books. A, Β, Γ,, etc. are generally used for the Iliad, and
a, B, Ὑ, ete, for the Odyssey.
THE ARTICLE.
386. The definite article ὁ (stem τος), the, is thus
declined : —
SINGULAR, DUAL. PLURAL,
Nom, ὁ ἣ τὸ Nom. of αἱ τά
Gen. τοῦ τῆς τοῦ | NLA. τώ τώ τώ Gen. τῶν
Dat. τῷ τῇ τῷ | G.D. τοῖν τοῖν τοῖν] Dat. τοῖς ταῖς τοῖς
Acc. τόν τήν τό Ace, τούς τάς τά
387, N. The Greek has no indefinite article; but often the
indefinite ris (415, 2) may be translated by a or un; as ἄνθρωπός
τις, @ Certain man, often simply @ man.
888. N. The regular feminine dual forms τά and ταῖν (espe-
82 INFLECTION. [389
cially τά) ave very rare, and τώ and “οἷν are generally used for all
genders (303). The regular plural nominatives τοί and ταί are
epic and Doric; and the article hag the usual dialectic forms of
the first and second declensions, as τοῖο, τοῖιν, τάων, τοῖσι, THO,
τῆς. Hower has rarely τοΐσδεσσι or τοίσδεσι int the dative plura).
PRONOUNS.
PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS,
389. The personal pronouns are ἐγώ, J, σύ, thou, and
οὗ (genitive), of him, of her, of tt. Αὐτός, himself, is
used as ἃ personal pronoun for him, her, tt, ete. in the
oblique cases, but never in the nominative.
They are thus declined : —
SINGULAR.
Nom. ἐγώ, I ov, thou — αὐτός αὐτῇὶ αὐτό
Gen. ἐμοῦ, μοῦ σοῦ οὗ αὐτοῦ αὐτῆς αὐτοῦ
Dat. ἐμοί, pol σοί οἵ αὐτῷ αὐτῇ αὐτῷ
Ace. ἐμέ, μέ σέ ἕ αὐτὸν αὐτήν αὐτό
Ni Δ. νώ σφώ BUAKS αὐτώ αὐτά αὐτώ
G.D. νῷν σφῴν αὐτοῖν αὐταῖν αὐτοῖν
PLURAL.
Nom. ἡμεῖς, we ὑμεῖς, you σφεῖς, they αὐτοί αὐταί αὐτά
ὅδ. ἡμῶν ὑμῶν σφών αὐτῶν αὐτῶν αὐτῶν
Dat. ἡμῖν ὑμῖν σφίσι αὐτοῖς αὐταῖς αὐτοῖς
Ace. ἡμᾶς ὑμᾶς σφός αὐτούς avTas αὐτά
990. N. The stems of the personal pronouns in the first person are
ἐμε- (οἵ, Latin me), νω- (ct. nos), and ἣμε-, ἐγώ being of distinct forina-
tion; in the second person, σε- (cf. te), σφω-, bue-, With σύ distinct ; in
the third person, ἐ- (cf. 56) and σφε-.
391. Αὐτός in all cases inay be an intensive adjective
pronoun, like tse, self (989, 1).
392. For the uses of οὗ, of, ete. see 957; 988. In Attic prose,
ot, σφεῖς, σφῶν, σφίσι. σφᾶς. ure the only common forms; οὗ and €
never occur in ordinary language. The orators seldom use ‘this
pronoun at all. The tragedians use chiefly odiv (not σφώ) and
ade (394).
393. 1. The following is the Homeric declension of ἐγώ, σύ, and
ob. The forms not in () are used also by Herodotus. ‘Those with
app- aud upp- are Aeolic.
4001 PRONOUNS. 83
SINGULAR.
Now. ἐγώ (ἐγών) σύ (τύνη)
Gen. ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μεῦ σέυ, σεῦ (9) εὖ
(ἐμεῖο, ἐμέθεν) (σεῖο, σέθεν) elo (θεν)
Dat. ἐμοί, pol σοί, rol (reiv) of (€or)
Acc. ἐμέ, μέ σέ (ξ) (ἐέ) al
DEAL. :
NLA. (νῶϊ, vo) (σφῶι, σφώ) (σφωξ)
G.). (vaiv) (σφῶϊν, σφῶν) (σφωΐν)
PLURAT.
Non. ἡμεῖς (Eppes) ὑμεῖς (Types) σφεῖς (not in Hom.)
Gen. ἡμέων (ἡμείων) ὑμέων (ὑμείων) σφέων (σφείων)
Dat. ἡμῖν (ἄμμι) ὑμῖν (opps) σφίσι, σφί(»)
Acc. ἡμέας (ἄμμε) ὑμέας (ὕμμε) σφέας, σφέ
2. Herodotus has also σφέα in the neuter plural of the third
person, which is not found in Homer.
394. The tragedians use σφέ and ogi as personal pronouns,
both masculine and feminine. Shey sometimes use σφέ and rarely
σφίν as singulay.
895. 1. The tragedians use the Doric accusative viv as a per-
sonal pronoun in all genders, and in both singular and plural.
2. The Tonic piv is used in all genders, but only in the singular
396. N. The penult of ἡμῶν, ἡμῖν, ἡμᾶς, ὑμῶν, ὑμῖν, and ὑμᾶς
is sometimes accented in poetry, when they are nol. emphatic, and
iv aud ds are shortened. ‘Thus ἡμων, ἥμιν, yeas, ὅμων, ὕμιν, ὕμας.
if mney. are emphatic, they are sometimes written ἡμίν, ἡμάς, ὑμών,
buds. So odds is written for σφᾶς.
997. N. Merodotus has αὐτέων in the feminine for αὐτῶν (188,
5). The louie contracts ὃ αὐτός into ωὐτός or wirds, and τὸ αὐτό
into τωὐτό (7).
398. N. The Doric has ἐγών; ἑμέος, ἐμοῦς, ἐμεῦς (for ἐμοῦ); ἐμὶν ΤΟΥ
ἐμοί ; duds, dudwr, dulr, ἀμέ (lor ἡμεῖς, ἡμῶν͵ ἡμῖν, ἡμᾶς); τὸ for σύ; τεῦ
(for “réo), τέος, τεοῦ, τεοῦς, τεῦς (for_ cov); rol, τίν (for σοί); τέ, τύ (en-
clitic) for σέ; ὑμές and bud (for ὑμεῖς aud ὑμᾶς); ἵν for of; ψέ for σφέ,
Pindar has only ἐγών, rv, τοί, τίν.
399. Αὐτός preceded hy the article means the same
(idem) 3 as ὁ αὐτὸς ἀνήρ, the same man. (See 989, 2.)
400. Αὐτός is often united by crasis (44) with the article; as
ταὐτοῦ fur τοῦ αὐτοῦ; ταὐτῷ for τῷ αὐτῷ: ταὐτῇ for τῇ αὐτῇ (not
to be confounded with ταύτῃ from οὗτο"). fu the contracted form
the neuter singular has ταὐτό or ταὐτόν.
84 INFLECTION. [401
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
401. The reflexive pronouns are ἐμαυτοῦ, ἐμαυτῆς, of
myself ; σεαυτοῦ, σεαυτῆς, of thyself; and ἑαυτοῦ, ἑαυτῆς,
of himself, herself, itself. They are thus declined : ~
SINGULAR.
Afasc. Fem. AMfase. Fem. Masc. Fem.
Gen. ἐμαυτοῦ ἐμαυτῆς σεαυτοῦ σεαυτῆς σαντοῦ σαυτής
Dat. ἐμαυτῷ ἐμαντῇ σεαυτῷ σεαυτῇ OF σαντῴ σαντῇ
Acc. ἐμαντὸν ἐμαντήν σεαντόν σεαντήν σαυτόν σαυτήν
PLURAL.
Mase. Fen. Mase. Fem.
Gen. ἡμῶν αὐτῶν ὑμῶν αὐτῶν
Dat. ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς ἡμῖν αὐταῖς ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς ὑμῖν αὐταῖς
Acc. ἡμῶς αὐτούς ἡμᾶς αὐτάς ὑμᾶς αὐτούς ὑμᾶς αὐτάς
SINGULAR.
Mase. Fem. Neut. Mase. Fem. Neut.
Gen. ἑαυτοῦ ἑαντῆς ἑαντοῦ αὐτοῦ αὐτῆς αὐτοῦ
Dat. ἑαυτῷ ἑαντῇ ἑαυτῷ οἱ αὐτῷ αὐτῇ αὐτῷ
Acc, ἕαντὸν ἐαντήν ἑαυτό αὐτόν αὐτήν αὐτὸ
PLURAL.
Gen. ἑαντῶν ἑαυτῶν ἑαυτῶν αὐτῶν αὐτῶν αὐτῶν
Tat. ἑαντοῖς ἑαυταῖς ἑαντοῖς or αὐτοῖς αὐταῖς αὐτοῖς
Acc. davrovs davras ἑαυτά αὐτούς αὐτάς αὐτά
8150
Gea. σφῶν αὐτῶν
Dat, σφίσιν αὐτοῖς σφίσιν αὐταῖς
Acc. odds αὐτούς σφᾶς αὐτάς
402. The reflexives are compounded of the stems of the per-
sonal pronouns (390) and αὐτός. But in the plural the two
pronouns are declined separately in the first and second persons,
and often in the third.
403. N. In Homer the two pronouns are always separated in
all persons and numbers; as σοὶ αὐτῷ, of αὐτῷ, ὃ αὐτήν. Herodotus
has ἐμεωυτοῦ, σεωυτοῦ, ἑωυτοῦ.
RECIPROCAL PRONOUN.
404. The reciprocal pronoun is ἀλλήλων, of one an-
other, used only in the oblique cases of the dual and
plural. Itis thus declined : —
409] PRONOUNS. 85
DUAS.. PLURAL«
Gen. ἀλλήλοιν ἀλλήλαιν ἀλλήλοιν ἀλλήλων ἀλλήλων ἀλλήλων
Dat. ἀλλήλοιν ἀλλήλαιν ἀλλήλοιν ἀλλήλοις ἀλλήλαις ἀλλήλοις
Acc. ἀλλήλω ἀλλήλὰ ἀλλήλω ἀλλήλους ἀλλήλᾶς ἄλληλα
405. The stem is ἀλληλο- (for ἀλλ-αλλο-).
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
406. The possessive pronouns ἐμός, my, σός, thy, ἡμέ.
TEPOS, OUT, ὑμέτερος, your, σφέτερος, their, and the poetic
és, Ais, are declined like adjectives in os (298).
407. Homer has dual possessives vwtrepos, of us two, σφωΐτερος,
of you two; also reds (Doric and Aeolic, = tuus) for σός, éds for és,
ἁμός for ἡμέτερος, ὑμός for ὑμέτερος, σφός for σφέτερος. ‘The Attic
poets sometimes have dds or duds for ἐμός (often as our for my).
408. “Os not being used in Attic prose, his is there expressed
by the genitive of αὐτός, as ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ, his father.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
409. The demonstrative pronouns are οὗτος and ὅδε,
this, and ἐκεῖνος, that. They are thus declined: —
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Nom. οὗτος αὕτη τοῦτο οὗτοι αὗται ταῦτα
Gen. τούτου ταύτης τούτον τούτων τούτων τούτων
Dat. τούτῳ ταύτῃ τούτῳ τούτοις ταύταις τούτοις
Acc, τοῦτον ταύτην τοῦτο τούτους TavTas ταῦτα
DUAL.
N. A. τούτω τούτω τούτω
α. Ὁ. τούτον τστούτοιν τούτοιν
SINGULAR.
Nom. ὅδε ἥδε τόδε ἐκεῖνος ἐκείνη ἐκεῖνο
Gen. τοῦδε τῆσδε τοῦδε ἐκείνου ἐκείνης ἐκείνου
Dat. robe τῇδε τῷδε ἐκείνῳ ἐκείνῃ ἐκείνῳ
Acc. τόνδε τήνδε τόδε ἐκεένον ἐκείνην ἐκεῖνο
DUAL.
N. A. τώδε τώδε τώδε ἐκείνω ἐκείνω ἐκείνω
G. D. τοῖνδε τοῖνδε τοῖνδε ἐκείνοιν ἐκείνοιν ἐκείνοιν
PLURAL. :
Nom. οἵδε αἵδε τάδε ἐκεῖνοι ἐκεῖναι ἐκεῖνα
Gen. τῶνδε τῶνδε τῶνδε ἐκείνων ἐκείνων ἐκείνων
Dat. τοῖσδε. ταῖσδε τοῖσδε ἐκείνοις ἐκείναις ἐκείνοις
Acc. τούσδε τάσδε τάδε ἐκείνους ἐκείνᾶς ἐκεῖνα
86 INFLECTION. [410
410, Feminine dua} forms in ἃ and aw are very rare (303).
411. ᾿Εκεῖνος is regular except in the neuter ἐκεῖνο. Κεῖνος ig
Tonic and poetic. "Ode is formed of the article ὁ and -δεὲ (141, 4),
For its accent, see 146.
412. N. The demonstratives, including some adverbs (436),
may be emphasized by adding t, before which a short vowel is
dropped. ‘Thus οὑτοσέ, αὑτηΐ, τουτί; 68!, ἡδί, τοδί; τουτουΐ, ταυτί,
routwri. So τοσουτοσΐ (429), ὡδί, οὑτωσί, In comedy γέ (rarely
δέ) may precede this é, making γέ or 8; as rovroyi, τουτοδέ,
418, N. Herodotus has τουτέων in the feminine for τούτων (cf.
397). Homer has τοΐσδεσσι or τοίσδεσι for τοῖσδε.
414. N. Other demonstratives will be found among the pro-
nominal adjectives (429).
INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
415. 1. The interrogative pronoun tis, τί, who? which?
what? always takes the acute on the first syllable.
2. The indefinite pronoun tis, Ti, any one, some one,
is enclitic, and its proper accent belongs on the last
syllable.
416. 1. These pronouns are thus declined : —
Interrogative. Indefinite.
SINGULAR.
Nom, ; τίς τί τὶς τὶ
Gen. τίνος, τοῦ τινός, τον
Dat. τίνι, τῷ τινί, τῷ
Acc τίνα τί τινά τὶ
DUAL.
NLA, τίνε τινέ
G.D. τίνοιν τινοῖν
PLURAL.
Nom. τίνες τίνα τινές τινά
Gen. τίνων τινῶν
Dat. τίσι τισί
Acc τίνας τίνα τινάς τινά
2. For the indefinite plural τινά there is a form ἅττα (Ionic
44] PRONOUNS. 87
417. Ours and μήτις, poetic for οὐδείς and μηδείς, no one, are
declined like tis. ᾿
418. 1. The acute accent of τίς is never changed to the grave
(115, 2). ‘The forms ris and ri of the indefinite pronoun very
yarely occur with the grave accent, as they are enclitic (141, 2).
2. ‘The Tonic has τέο and red for τοῦ, τέῳ for τῴ, τέων for τίνων,
and τέοισι for τίσι; also these same forms as euclitics, for τοῦ»
Tw, etc.
419. “Adds. other, is declined like αὐτός (389), having
ἄλλο in the neuter singular.
420, 1. The indefinite δεῖνα, such a one, is sometimes
indeclivable, and is sometimes declined as follows : —
SINGULAR, PLURAL.
(All Genders). (Masculine).
Nom. δεῖνα δεῖνες
Gen. δεῖνος δείνων
Dat. δεῖνι
Ace. δεῖνα δεῖνας
2. Δεῖνα in all its forms always has the article.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
421. The relative pronoun 6s, 7, 6, who, is thus de-
clined : —
SINGULAR, | DUAL. PLURAL.
Nom. ὅς ἥ ὅ j Nom. οἵ ot &
Gen. οὐ ἧς οὐ, NAL ὦ ὦ ὦ Gen. ὧν ὧν ὧν
Dat. ᾧ ἡ © ,ς G.D. οἷν οἷν οἷν | Dat. οἷς αἷς οἷς
Acc. ὅν ἥν ὅ | Act. ots as &
422, Feminine dual forms ἃ and aly are very rare and doubtful
(303).
423, N. For ὅς used asx a demonstrative, especially in Homer,
see 1023. For the article (7- forms) as a relative in Homer and
Herodotus, see 935 and 939.
424. N. Homer has dou (40) and éys for οὗ and ἧς.
88 INFLECTION. (425
425. The indefinite relative doris, ἥτις, ὅ τι, Whoever,
whatever, is thus declined :—
SINGULAR.
Nom. ὅστις ἥτις ὅ τι
Gen. οὗτινος, ὅτου ἥστινος οὔτινος, ὅτου
Dat. atin, ὅτῳ yr Sri, ὅτῳ
Acc. ὁντινα ἥντινα ὅ τι
DUAL.
N.A ὦτινε ὦτινε ὦτινε
6. Ὁ. οἷντινοιν οἶντινοιν olyrivoww
PLURAL,
Nom. οἵτινες αἵτινες ἅτινα, ἅττα
Gen. ὧντινων, ὅτων ὧντινων ὧντινων, ὅτων
Dat. οἶστισι, ὅτοις aleriot οἴστισι, dros
Acc. οὕστινας ἄστινας ἅτινα, ἅττα
426. Ν. Ὅστις is compounded of the relative ὅς and the indefi-
nite ris, each part being declined separately. For the accent, see
146. The plural ἅττα (Ionic dooa) for ἅτινα must not be con-
founded with ἅττα (410,2). “O τι is thus written (sometimes 6, τι)
to distinguish it from ὅτι, ‘hat.
427. N. The shorter forms ὅτου, ὅτῳ, drwy, and gras, ahich
are geuuine old Attic forms, are used by the tragediaus to the
exclusion of οὗτινος, ete.
428.1. The following are the peculiar Homeric forms of
ὅστις : —
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Nom. ὅτις ὅ rts ὅσσα
Gen, ὅτευ, ὅττεο, ὅττεν ὅτεων
Dat. brew ὁτέοισι
Acc. ὅτινα ὅ ττι ὅτινας ἅσσα
2. Herodotus has ὄτευ, ὅτεῳ, ὅτεων, ὁτέοισι, and ἅσσα (420).
PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS.
429, There are many pronominal adjectives which corre-
spond to each other in form and meaning. The following
are the must important: —
436) PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 89
INTERROGATIVE. INDEFINITE. DEMONSTRATIVE. RELATIVE.
πόσος; hownuch? ποσός, of some (réc0s), τοσόσδε, ὅσος, ὁπόσος, (as
how many? quantity. τοσοῦτος, 80 much, as many)
quantus ? much, tantus, as, quantus.
so many.
ποῖος; of what ποιός, of some (Toios), τοιόσδε, οἷος, ὁποῖος, of
kind? qualis? kind. τοιοῦτος, such, which kind,
talis. (such) as, qualis.
πηλίκος; how old? (τηλίκος), τηλι- ἡλίκος, ὁπηλίκος,
how large? κόσδε, τηλικοῦ. ΟΥ̓ which age or
τος, sooldorso size, (as old) as,
large. (as large) as.
πότερος; which of πότερος (or more- ἕτερος, the oneor ὁπότερος, which-
the two? pbs), one oflwo the other (of ever of the tro.
(rare). two).
480. The pronouns τίς, τὶς, etc. form a corresponding
series : —
ris; who? τὶς, any one. ὅδε, οὗτος, this, ὅς, ὅστις, who,
this one. which.
431. Tis may be added to οἷος, ὅσος, ὁπόσος, ὁποῖος, and ὁπότερος,
to make them more indefinite; as ὁποῖός τις, of what kind soever.
432. 1. Oly added to indefinite relatives gives them a purely
indefinite force; as ὁστισοῦν, ὁτιοῦν, any one, anything, svever, with
no relative character. So sometimes δή; as ὅτου 51.
2. N. Rarely ὁπότερος (without οὖν) has the same meaning,
either of the two.
433. N. Homer doubles πὶ in many of these relative words; as
ὁππότερος, ormoios. 80 in ὅππως, ὁππότε, etc. (436). Herodotus has
dxd repos, dxdaos, ὅκου, ὁκόθεν, ὁκότε. e.C., for ὁπότερος, etc.
434. N. Τόσος and τοῖος seldom o--cur in Attic prose, τηλίκος never.
Toodade, τοιόσδε, and τηλικόσδε ure declined like τόσος and τοῖος ;
as τοσόσδε, τοσήδε, τοσόνδε, οἷο., --- τοιόσδε, τοιάδε. τοιόνδε. Τοσοῦτος.
τοιοῦτος, aNd τηλικοῦτος are declined like οὗτος (omitting the first τ in
τούτου, τοῦτο, etc.), except that the neuter singular has ὁ or ov; as
τοιοῦτος, τοιαύτη, τοιοῦτο OF τοιοῦτον ; BEN. τοιούτου, τοιαύτης, etc.
435. There are also negative pronominal adjectives; as οὔτις,
pyres (poetic for οὐδείς, μηδείς), οὐδέτερος, μηδέτερος, neither of two.
(For adverbs, see 440.)
436. Certain pronominal adverbs correspond to each other,
like the adjectives given above. Such are the follewing. —
90 INFLECTION. [437
INTERROGATIVE, INDEFINITE. DEMONGTRATIVE. RELATIVE.
ποῦ; where? πού, somewhere. (ἔνθα), ἐνθάδε, οὗ, ὅπου, where.
ἐνταῦθα, ἐκεῖ,
there.
πῇ; which way? πῇ, some way, (τῇ), τῇδε, ταύτῃ, ἧ, ὅπη, which way,
how? somehow. this way, thus. — as.
ποῖ; whither? rol, to some ἐκεῖσε, thither. ol, ὅποι, whither.
place.
πόθεν; whence? ποθέν, from (ἔνθεν), ἐνθένδε, ὅθεν, ὁπόθεν,
some place. ἐντεῦθεν, ἐκεῖθεν, whence.
thence.
πῶς; how? πώς, ἴῃ some way, (rus), (Os), ὧδε, ὡς, ὅπως, in which
somehow. οὕτως, thus. way, us.
πότε; when? ποτέ, αἱ some τότε, then. ὅτε, ὁπότε, when,
time.
πηνίκα; at what (τηνίκα), τηνικά- ἡνίκα, ὁπηνίκα, αἱ
time? de, τηνικαῦτα, which time,
at thut time. when.
437. The indefinite adverbs are all enclitic (141, 2).
438, Forms which seldom or never occur in Attic prose are
in (). Ἔνθα and ἔνθεν are relatives in prose, where, whence; as
demoustratives they appear chiefly in a few expressions like ἔνθα
καὶ ἔνθα, here and there, ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν, on both sides. For ds, thus,
in Attic prose, see 138, 3. Tus (froin re-), like οὕτως (from οὗτος),
thus, is poetic.
439. 1. The poets have κεῖθι, κεῖθεν, κεῖσε for ἐκεῖ, ἐκεῖθεν, aud
ἐκεῖσε, like κεῖνος for ἐκεῖνος (111).
2. Herodotus has ἐνθαῦτα, ἐνθεῦτεν for ἐνταῦθα, ἐντεῦθεν.
8, There are various poetic adverbs; as πόθι, ποθί, ὅθι (for ποῦ,
πού, οὗ), τόθι, there, τόθεν, thence.
440. There are negative adverbs of pluce, manner, οἷοι; as
οὐδαμοῦ, μηδαμοῦ, nowhere, οὐδὰν ἡ. undopy, in no way, οὐδαμῶς,
μηδαμῶς, ἐπι πὸ manner. (See 435.)
VERBS.
441, The Greek verb has three voices, the active,
middle, and passive.
442, 1. The middle voice generally signifies that the subject
performs an action upon himself ov for his own benefit (1242), but
sometimes it is not distinguished {rom the active voice in meaning.
450] VERBS. 91
2. The passive differs: from the middle in form in only two
tenses, the tuture and the aorist.
443, Deponent verbs are those which have no active
voice, but are used in the middle (or the middle and
passive) forms with an active sense.
444, N. Deponents generally have the aorist and future of the
middle form. A few, which have an aorist (sometimes a future)
of the passive form, are called passive deponents; while the others
are called middle deponents.
445. There are four moods (properly so called), the
indicative, subjunctive, optative, and imperative. To
these are added, in the conjugation of the verb, the
infinitive, and participles of the chief tenses. ‘The
verbal adjectives igs ros aud reos have many points of
likeness to varticifies (see 776).
446. The four proper moods, as opposed to the infinitive, are
called finite moods. The subjunctive, optative, imperative, and
infinitive, as opposed to the tdicative, are called dependent moods.
447. ‘There are seven tenses, the present, imperfect,
future, aorist, perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect.
The imperfect and pluperfect are found only in the
indicative. The future and future perfect are wanting
in the subjunctive and imperative. The future perfect
belongs regularly to the passive voice, but sometimes
has the meaning of the active or middle.
448. The present, perfect, future, and future perfect
indicative are called primary (or principal) tenses ; the
imperfect, pluperfect, and aorist indicative are called
secondary (or historical) tenses.
449. Many verbs have tenses known as the second aorist (in
all voices), the second perfect and pluperfect (active), and the
second future (passive). These tenses are generally of more
simple formation than the first (or ordinary) aorist, perfect, ete.
Few verhs have both forms in any tense; when this occurs, the
two forms generally differ in meaning (for example, by the first
being transitive, the seeond intransitive), but not always.
450. The aorist corresponds generally to the indefinite or his-
92 INFLECTION. (451
2
torical perfect in Latin, and the perfect to the English perfect or
the definite perfect in Latin.
451. N. No Greek verb is in use in all these tenses, and the full
paradigm of the regular verb must include parts of three different
verbs, See 470.
452. There are three numbers, as in nouns, the singu-
lar, dual, and plural.
453. In each tense of the indicative, subjunctive, and
optative, there are three persons in each number, the
first, second, and third; in each tense of the imperative
there are two, the second and third.
454. N. The first person dual is the same as the first person
plural, except in a very few poetic forms (666, 2). This person ig
therefore omitted in the paradigms.
TENSE SYSTEMS AND TENSE STEMS.
455. The tenses are divided into nine classes or tense
systems, each with its own tense stem.
456. The tense systems are the following: —
SYSTEMS, TENSES.
1, Present, including present and imperfect.
11. Future, « future active and middle.
11. First-aorist, “first aorist active and middle.
1v. Second-aorist, “5 second aorist active and middle.
v. First-per fect, “first perfect and pluperfect active.
vi. Second-perfect, “ second perfect and pluperfect active.
vit. Perfect-middle, “ perfect and pluperfect middle and
Suture perfect.
vill. First-passive, “first aorist and future passive.
rx. Second-passive, “ second aorist and future passive.
457. 1. The Jast five tense stems are further modified to form
“pecial stems for the two pluperfects, the future perfect, and the
two passive futures.
2. As few verbs have both the first and the second forms of any
tense (449), inost verbs have only six tense stetns, and many have
even less.
458. The various tense stems are almost always formed
from one fundamental stem, called the verb stem. These
formations will be explained in 568-622,
463) TENSE SYSTEMS AND TENSE STEMS. 93
459. Before learning the paradigms, it is important to
distinguish between verbs in which the verb stem appears
without change in all the tense systems, and those in which
it is modified more or less in different systems (154).
Thus in λέγω, speak, the verb stem dAey- is found in λέξω
(eyo), ἔλεξα, λέλεγιμαι, ἐλέχιθην (71), and all other forms,
But in φαίνω, show, the verb stem φαν- is seen pure in the second
aorist ἐφάνην and kindred tenses, and in the futures φανῶ and
φανοῦμαι; while elsewhere it appears modified, as in present φαΐν-ω,
first aorist ἔφηνα, second perfect πέφηνα. In λείπτω the stem
λειπ- appears in all forms except in the second-aorist system
(€Aur-ov, ἐλιπ-όμην) and the second-perfect system (λέλοιπ-α).
460. Verb stems are MMed vowel stems or consonant
stems, and the latter are called mute stems (including labial,
palatal, and lingual stems) or UWgquid stems, according to
their final letter. Thus we may name the stems of φιλέω
(φιλε-), λεώτω (λειπ-, Aur-), τρέβω (rptB-), γράφω (γραφ-),
πλέκω (πλεκ-), φεύγω (hevy-, φυγ-), πείθω {πειθ', πιθ-), φαίνω
(φαν-), στέλλω (στελ-).
461. A verb which has a vowel verb stem is called a pure verb;
and one which has a mute stem or a liquid stem is called a mute or
a liguid verb.
462. 1. The principal parts of a Greek verb are the first
person singular of the present, future, first aorist, and (first
or second) perfect, indicative active; the perfect middle,
and the (first or second) aorist passive; with the second
aorist (active or middle) when it occurs. These generally
represent all the tense systems which the verb uses. E-g.
Adu, λύσω, ἔλῦσα, λέλυκα, λέλυμαι, ἐλύθην (471).
Λείπω (λειπ-, Aur-), λείψω, λέλοιπα, λέλειμμαι, ἐλείφθην, ἔλιπον.
Φαίνω (φαν-), φανῶ, ἔφηνα, πέφαγκα (2 pl. πέφηνα), πέφασμαι,
ἐφάνθην (and ἐφάνην).
Πράσσω (πρᾶγ:), do, πράξω, ἔπραξα, 2 perf. πέπρᾶχα and πέπρᾶγα,
πέπρδᾶγμαι, ἐπράχθην.
Στέλλω (ored-), send, στελῶ, ἔστειλα, ἔσταλκα, ἔσταλμαι, ἐστάλην.
2, If a verb has no future active, the future middle may be given
among the principal parts; as σκώπτω, jeer, σκώψομαι, ἔσκωψα,
ἐσκώφθην.
468, In deponent verbs the principal parts are the pres-
ent, future, perfect, and aorist (or aorists) indicative. Eg.
94 INFLECTION. [464
(Πγέομαι) ἡγοῦμαι, lead, ἡγήσομαι, ἡγησάμην, ἥγημαι, ἡγήθην
(in compos.).
Βούλομαι, wish, βουλήσομαι, βεβούλημαι, ἐβουλήθην.
Γίγνομαι (yer), become, γενήσομαι, γεγένημαι, ἐγενόμην.
(Αἰδέομαι) αἰδοῦμαι, respect, αἰδέσομαι, ἤδεσμαι, »δέσθην.
Ἔργάζομαι, work, ἐργάσομαι, εἰργασάμην, εἴργασμαι, εἰργασθην.
CONJUGATION.
464. To conjugate a verb is to give all its voives, moods,
tenses, numbers, and persons in their proper order.
465. These parts of the verb are furmed as follows ; ~
1. By modifying the verb stem itself to form the differ.
ent tense stems. (Sve 668-622; 660-717.)
2. By athxiug certain syllables called endings to the
tense stein; as in λέγοιμεν, Adye-re, λέγεται, λεγόμεθα, Adyo-
vrat, λέξεται, Adfe-obe, (See 551-554.)
3. In the secondary tenses of the indicative, hy also pro-
fixing « to the tense stem (if this begins with a consonant),
or lengthening its initial vowel (if it begins with a short
vowel); as in ἔτλεγοιν, ἔτλεξε, ἐ-φήνα-το; and in ἤκουον and
ἥκουσα, Imperfect and aorist of ἀκούω, hear. This prefix or
lengthening is confined to the indicative.
4, A prefix, seen in Ae of λέλυκα and λέλειμμαι, in πε- of
πέφασμαι, and ε of ἔσταλμαι (487, 1), for which a lengthening
of the initial vowel is found in ἤλλαγμαι (dAAay-) from
ἀλλάσσω (457, 2), helongs to the perfect tense stem, and
remains in all the moods and in the participle.
466. These prefixes and lengthenings, called augment (3) and
reduplication (4), are explained in 510-550.
467, There are two principal forms of conjugation of
Greek verbs, that of verbs in ὦ and that of verbs in pe.
468. Verbs in μὲ forina small class, compared with those in ὦ, aud
are distinguished in their inflection almost exclusively in the present
and second-aorist systems, generally agreeing with verbs in w in the
other systems.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN 2.
469, The following synopses (474-478) include —
J. All the tenses of λύω (Ai-), loose, representing tense
systems I, J1., 111. V., VIT., VILL
463] TENSE SYSTEMS AND TENSE STEMS. 93
459. Before learning the paradigms, it is important to
distinguish between verbs in which the verb stem appears
without change in all the tense systems, and those in which
it is modified more or less in different systems (154).
Thus in λέγω, speak, the verb stem Aey- is found in λέξω
(Acy-cw), ἔλεξα, λέλεγιμαι, ἐλέχιθην (71), and all other forms.
But in φαίνω, show, the verb stem φαν- is seen pure in the second
aorist ἐ-φάν-ην and kindred tenses, and in the futures φανῶ and
φανοῦμαι; while elsewhere it appears modified, as in present φαΐν-ω,
first aorist épyv-a, second perfect πέφηνα. In λείπτω the stem
λειπ- appears in all forms except in the second-aorist system
(ἔλιπ-ον, ἐλιπ-όμην) and the second-perfect system (λέλοιπ-α).
460. Verb stems are M@Med vowel stems or consonant
stems, and the latter are called mute stems (including labial,
palatal, and lingual stems) or liquid stems, according to
their final letter. Thus we may name the stems of φιλέω
(φιλε-), λείπω (λειπ-, λιπ-), τρίβω (τριβ-), γράφω (ypa¢g-),
πλέκω (πλεκ-), φεύγω (φευγ-, φυγ-), πείθω (wad, πιθ-), φαίνω
(φαν-), στέλλω (στελ-).
461. A verb which has a vowel verb stem is called a pure verb;
and one which has a mute stem or a liquid stem is called a mule or
a liquid verb.
462. 1. The principal parts of a Greek verb are the first
person singular of the present, future, first aorist, and (first
or second) perfect, indicative active; the perfect middle,
and the (first or second) aorist passive; with the second
aorist (active or middle) when it occurs. These generally
represent all the tense systems which the verb uses. £.g.
Λύω, λύσω, ἔλῦσα, AAvKa, AAvpat, ἐλύθην (471).
Λείπω (λειπ-, λιπ-), λείψω, λέλοιπα, λέλειμμαι, ἐλείφθην, ἔλιπον.
Φαίνω (φαν-), φανῶ, ἔφηνα, πέφαγκα (2 pf. πέφηνα), πέφασμαι,
ἐφάνθην (and ἐφάνην).
Πράσσω (πρᾶγ)), do, πρἄξω, ἔπρᾶξα, 2 perf. πέπραχα and πέπρᾶγα,
πέπραγμαι, ἐπρᾶχθην.
Στέλλω (ored-), send, στελῶ, ἔστειλα, ἔσταλκα, ἔσταλμαι, ἐστάλην.
2. If a verb has no future active, the future middle may be given
among the principal parts; as σκώπτω, jeer, σκώψομαι, ἔσκωψα,
ἐσκώφθην.
463, In deponent verbs the principal parts are the pres-
ent, future, perfect, and aorist (or aorists) indicative. Εἰ σ.
94 INFLECTION, [464
CHytopar) ἡγοῦμαι, lead, ἡγήσομαι, ἡγησάμην, ἥγημαι, ἡγήθην
(in compos.).
Βούλομαι, wish, βουλήσομαι, βεβούλημαι, ἐβουλήθην.
Γίγνομαι (γεν-), become, γενήσομαι, γεγένημαι, ἐγενόμην.
(Αἰδέομαι) αἰδοῦμαι, respect, αἰδέσομαι, ἥδεσμαι, ἡ δέσθην.
ἜἘργάζομαι, work, ἐργάσομαι, εἰργασάμην, εἴργασμαι, εἰργάσθην.
CONJUGATION.
464. To conjugate a verb is to give all its voices, moods,
tenses, numbers, and persons in their proper order.
465. These parts of the verb are formed as follows : —
1. By modifying the verb stem itself to form the differ.
ent tense stems. (See 568-622; 660-717.)
2. By affixing certain syllables called endings to the
tense stem; as in λέγο-μεν, Adye-re, A€ye-rut, λεγό-μεθα, A€yo-
vrat, λέξε-ται, λέξεισθε. (See 551-554.)
3. In the secondary tenses of the indicative, by also pre-
fixing ¢ to the tense stein (if this begins with a consonant),
or lengthening its initial vowel (if it begins with a short
vowel); as in ἔλεγον, ἔλεξε, ἐ-φήνα-το; and in yxovoy and
ἥκουσα, imperfect and aorist of ἀκούω, hear. ‘This prefix or
lengthening is confined to the indicative.
4. A prefix, seen in Ae of λέλυκα and λέλειμμαι, 1") πε- OF
πέφασμαι, and ε of ἔσταλμαι (487, 1), for which a lengthening
of the initial vowel is found in ἤλλαγμαι (ἀλλαγ-) from
ἀλλάσσω (487, 2), belongs to the perfect tense stem, and
reinains in all the moods and in the participle.
466. These prefixes and lengthenings, called augment (3) and
reduplication (4), are explained in 510-550.
467. There are two principal forms of conjugation of
Greek verbs, that of verbs in ὦ and that of verbs in pe.
468. Verbs in μὲ forma small class, compared with those in ὦ, and
are distinguished in their inflection almost exclusively in the present
and second-aorist systems, generally agreeing with verbs in w in the
other systems.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN 2.
469, The following synopses (474-478) include —
T. All the tenses of λύω (λῦ-), loose, representing tense
systeins I., IT., ΠῚ, V., VIJ., VIII.
415] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN ἢ. 95
IJ. All the tenses of λείπω (λοισ-» λιπ-), leave; the second
perfect and pluperfect active and the second aorist active
and middle, representing tense systems 1V. and VL, being
in heavy-faced type.
Il]. All the tenses of φαίνω (φαν-), show; the future and
aorist active and middle (liquid form) and the second
aorist and second future passive, representing tense systems
IJ., {ΠΠ., and TX., being in heavy-taced type.
470. The full synopsis of Avw, with the forms in heavier type
in the synopses of λεύτω and φαίνω, will thus show the full conju-
gation of the verb in ὦ, with the nine tense systenis; and all these
forms are inflected in 480-482. For the peculiar inflection of the
perfect and pluperfect middle and passive of verbs with consonant
stems, see 485 and 487,"
471. N. Avw in the present and imperfect generally has wv in
Attic poetry and ὕ in Homer; in other tenses, it has v in the
fature and aorist active and middle and the future perfect, else-
where v.
472, ‘Vhe paradigms include the perfect iniperative active, although
it is hardly possible that this tense can actually have been formed in
any of these verbs. As it occurs, however, in a few verbs (748), it is
given here to complete the illustration of the forms. For the rare
perfect subjunctive and optative active, see 720 and 73).
473. Each tense of λύω is translated in the synopsis of 474,
except rare untranslatable forms like the future perfect infinitive
and participle, and the tenses of the subjunctive and optative.
The meaning af these last cannot be fully understood until the
constructions are explained in the Syntax. But the following
examples will make them clearer than any possible translation of
the forms, some of which (e.g. the future optative) cannot be used
in independent sentences.
Λύωμεν (or λύσωμεν) αὐτόν, let us loose him; μὴ λύσῃς αὐτόν, do
not loose him. ᾿Βὰν λύω (or λύσων αὐτὸν, χαιρήσει, if 1 (shall) loose
hin, he will rejoice. "Epyopat, ἵνα αὐτὸν λύω (or λύσω), J am coming
that 1 may loose him. EiOe λύοιμι (or λύσαιμι) αὐτόν, O that I may
loose him. Et λύοιμι (or λύσαιμι) αὐτὸν, χαίροι ἄν, if 1 should loose
him, he would rejoice. Ἦλθον ἵνα αὐτὸν λύοιμι (or λύσαιμι), 1 came
that 1 might loose him. Εἶπον ὅτι αὐτὸν λύοιμι, 1 said that I was
loosing him; εἶπον ὅτι αὐτὸν λύσαιμι, I said that I had loosed him;
εἶπον ὅτι αὐτὸν λύσοιμι, | said that 1 would loose him. For the
difference between the preceit and aorist in these moods, see 1272,
1; for the perfect, see 1273.
414,
INFLECTION.
[4g
Synopsis op
ΞΞ-ΞΞΞ-------Ξ3-----------Ξ--------.-------------.Ξ------Ξ------:----Ξ--------Ξ τς
I. PRESENT SYSTEM.
IL, FUTURE SYSTEM,
-----
111. FIRST-AORIST SYSTEM
———.
ACTIVE
Vo10Ez.
Present & Innperfect
Active.
Indic.
Subj.
Opt.
Imper.
Infin.
λύω
λύοιμι
Ave loose
λύειν to loose
Part. | λύων loosing
MIDDLE
Present & Imperfect
Voice.
Middle.
adie, |! ee
Subj.
Opt.
Imper.
Tnfin.
λύωμαι
λνοίμην
λύεσθαι to loose (for
one’s 8617)
Part. λνόμενος loosing ( for
one’s self)
PASSIVE
Voice. | Pres. & Imperf. Passive.
λύομαι Tam
Indic. ἐλυόμην I ban loosed
Subj.
Opt.
Imper. with same
Tnfin.
forms as the
Middle
Part.
ἐλυόμην J was loos-
tng (for myself)
λύου loose (for thyself)
Future
Active.
λόω J loose oram loosing| λύσω 1 shall loose
Qvov I was loosing
λύσοιμι
λύσειν to be about to
luose
λύσων about to loose
1 Aorist
Active.
ἔλῦσα 1 loosed
λύσω
λύσαιμι
λῦσον loose
λῦσαι {0 loose ΟΥ̓ to have
loosed.
λύσας having luosed
" Future
Middle.
λύομαι J loose (for my- sho ay 1 shall loose
(for myself )
λυσοίμην
λύσεσθαι to be about to
loose (for one’s self)
λυσόμενος about to loose
(for one’s self)
Vill.
1 Aorist
Middle.
ἐλυσάμην J loosed (for
myself).
λύσωμαι
λυσαίμην
λῦσαι loose ( for thyself)
λύσασθαι to lvose or to
have loosed (for one's
self)
λυσάμενος having loosed
(for one’s self)
FIRST-PASSIVE SYSTEM.
----- -. - --- -----....-- τ------------------
1 Future Passive.
ae λνθήσομαι J shall be
loosed
λνυθησοίμην
λνθήσεσθαι to be about
to be loosed
λνθησόμενος about fo be
a Oa ae
1 Aorist Passive.
᾿ ἐλύθην J was loosed
Av0d (for λυθέω)
λυθείην
λύθητι ὃς loosed
λυθῆναι fo be lvosed οἵ
tu have been loused
λυθείς having beer
loosed
VEKBAL ADJECTIVES: {
λυτὸς that may be =Se> 45 aoe το
λντέος that must be loosed
475)
λύω (rE-)s loose.
SYNOPSIS OF Atv. 97
y. FIRST-PERFECT SYSTEM.
1 Perfect & Pluperfect
Active.
wvea I have loosed
ἐλελύκη Thad loosed
λλύκω OF λελυκὼς ὦ
λειλύκοιμι OF λελνκὼς εἴην
{rdvu«e] (472)
λελυκέναι 0 have loosed
λελυκώς having loosed
VIN. PERFECT-MIDDLE SYSTEM,
Perfect & Pluperfect
Middle.
λέλυμαι 7 have loosed (for myself)
ἐλελύμην 1 had loosed (for myself)
λελυμένος ὦ
λελυμένος εἴην
λέλυσο (750)
λελύσθαι to have loosed (for one's self)
λελυμένος Raving loosed (for one’s self)
Future Perfect Passive.
λελύσομαι I shall have
been loosed
Perf. & Pluperf. Passive.
AAvpar Ihave f been
ἐλελύμην Thad | loosed
es: λελυσοίμην
ὙΠ ἐᾶι λελύσεσθαι (1283)
forms as the
Middle
λελυσόμενος (1284)
—————— - - - -Ὸ- -ς-.---.------᾽ἡ----------- -ς------ΞὉ -α---ς-ς--ς-ΠςἙΞ.-.--ς--.--᾽ -ς-.--..--Ἠ- -ἠ » ςςἘςςςςς.-
475. The middle of λύω commonly means to release for one’s
self, or to release sume one belonging to one’s self, hence to ransom
(a captive) or to deliver (one’s friends from danger). See 1242, 8,
98 INFLECTION. [476
476. SYNOPSIS OF λείπω (λειπ-, ALT-), leave.
rr
TENSE SYSTEM; 1. 11. iv. VI.
Active | Pres. & Impf. Future 2 Aorist 2 Perf. & Plup.
Voice. Active. Active. Active. Active.
-, | λείπω λείψω λέλοιπα
Indie. ἔλειπον ε ἔλιπον ἐλελοίπη
Subi. | λείπω λίπω λελοίπω ΟΥ̓
: λελοιπὼς ὦ
Opt. | λείποιμι λείψοιμι λίποιμι λελοίποιμι oF
λελοιπὼς εἴην
Imper.| λεῖπε λίπε [λέλοιπε])
Infin. λείπειν λείψειν λιπεῖν λελοιπέναι
Part. | λείπων λείψων λιπών λελοιπώς
ΜΊΡΡΙΕ | Pres. & Impf. Future Papert .. ὋΠΡ
Voice. Middle. Middle. Middle. |Perf.& Plup. Mid.
Indie λείπομαι λείψομαι λέλειμμαι
᾿ ἐλειπόμην ἐλιπόμην ἐλελείμμην͵
Subj. | λείπωμαι λίπωμαι λελειμμένος ὦ
Opt. | λειποίμην λειψοίμην λιποίμην λελειμμένος εἴην
Imper.| λείπου λιποῦ λέλειψο
Infin, | λείπεσθαι λείψεσθαι λιπέσθαι λελεῖφθαι
Part. | λειπόμενος λειψόμενος λιπόμενος λελειμμένος
Passive | Pres. & Impf. vor TB 2 Future
Voice. Passive. | 1 Fut. Pass. [1 Avr. Pass.| 23 _ Perfect.
Indic. λειφθήσομαι aS λελείψομαι
ἐλείφθην 3.2
Subj. | 54me forms λειφθῶ (for | FB
ΗΝ λειφθέω) [Ka
Opt. |, λειφθησοίμην | λειφθείην «ὦ ᾧ λελειψοίμην
Imper. Middle λείφθητι “8
Infin. λειφθήσεσθαι | λειφθῆναι 2 S λελείψεσθαι
Part. λειφθησόμενος | λειφθείς λελειψόμενος
VERBAL ADJECTIVES: λειπτός, λειπτέος
477. 1. The active of λείπω in the various tenses means J leave (or
am leaving), I left (or was leaving), 1] shall leave, ete. ‘The second perfect
means J have left, or ] have failed or am wanting. The first aorist ἔλειψα
is not in good use.
_2. The middle of λεύτω means properly to remain (leave one’s self), in
which sense it differs little (or not at all) from the passive. But the second
aorist ἐλιπόμην often means J left for myself (e.g. meniorial or monument):
so the present and future middle in composition. ᾿Ἐλιπόμην in Tomer
sometimes means 7 was left behind or was inferior, like the passive.
3. The passive of λείπω is used in all tenses, with the meanings J am
left, I was left, 1 have been left, 1 had been left, 1 shall have been left, 1 was
left, I shall be left. It also means 7 am inferior (left behind).
99
SYNOPSIS OF φαίνω.
419]
478.
SYNOPSIS OF φαίνω (dav-), show.
TENSE-SYSTEM: 1. 11. dT. Vv. Vi.
Pres. & Impf. Future 1 Aurist 1 Perf. & Plup.|2 Perf. & Plup.
Active. Acttve. Active. Active. Active.
Indi palyw (pavéw) φανῶ wépayxa πέφηνα
Ic. 7 ” + : .
ἔφαινον ἔφηνα ἐπεφάγκη ἐπεφήνη
Subj. [φαένῳ φήνω πεφάγκω OF | πεφήνω Or_
πεφαγκὼς ὦ πεφηνὼς ὦ
Opt. [φαένοιμι (φανέοιμι) havoipe or [φήναιμι πεφάγκοιμι OL | πεφήνοιμι Or
(Φανεοίην) φανοίην πεφαγκὼς εἴην͵] πεφηνὼς εἴην
Iinper.| φαῖνε φῆνον [πέφαγκε) [πέφηνε]
Infin. | φαίνειν (φανέειν) haveiv φῆναι πεφαγκέναι πεφηνέναι
Part, | φαίνων (φανέων) φανῶν φήνας πεφαγκώς πεφηνώς
Minvre { Pres. & Impf. Future 1 Aorist we Vil.
Voice. MWiddte. Middle. Middle. Perf. & Plup. Middle.
Indic, | φαίνομαι (φανέομαι) φανοῦμαι πέφασμαι
ndic. ᾿ . ;
ἐφαινόμην ἐφηνάμην ἐπεφάσμην
Subj. | φαίνωμαι φήνωμαι πεφασμένυς ὦ
Opt. φαινοίμην (φανεοίμην) φανοίμην | φηναίμην πεφασμένος εἴην
Iniper.| φαίνου φῆναι {répavov]
Infin. | φαίνεσθαι (φανέεσθαι) φανεῖσθαι | φήνασϑαι πεφάνθαι
Part “ῬῬαινόμενος (Paveduevos) havotpevos| φηνάμενος πεφασμένος
Passive | Pres. & Impf. |. ; its ΕΝ a ὍΣ ΕΤΕ: ΨΕ
Voice. Pussive. 2 Future Pusstve. ρον δι Passive. | 1 Aorist Passive. =
Indic. φανήσομαι ἐφάνην ἐφάνθην Bs
Subj. | same forms φανῶ (for φανέω)} φανθῶ (for partdw) © Ξ᾽
Opt. τὰ tho Φανησοίμην ; φανείην φανθείην Ξ
Imper. ἘΞ } φάνηθι φάνθητι =e
Infin. Middle | φανήσεσθαι | φανῆναι φανθῆναι ae
Part. Φανησόμενος | φανείς φανθείς ἵν
I
1
J
VERBAL ADJECTIVE: φαντός (&-pavros)
the second
» The first perfect πέφαγκα means 7 have shown
ῴφηνα means J have appeared.
Che passive of pa
the middle, fo appeur (show one’s self).
479. 1
,
perfect πέ
?
vom
re passive
Γ'
9
eans properly fo be shown or made evident
The second fatur i
φανήσομαι, } shall appear or be shown, does not differ in sense from
the simple
, is common.
,
Theaorist middle ἐφηνάμην means 1 showed
e
φανοῦμαι; but ἐφάνθην is generally passive, 7 was shown, while ἐφάνην
is 1 appeared.
ἅμην, I declared
but ἀπ-εφηνι
’
for is rare and poetic
100 INFLECTION. [480
480. 1, Active ΨΌΙΟΣ or Ade.
Present. Imperfect. Future.
INDICATIVE, 1. Ade ἔλνον λύσω
8. 2. Adas Arve λύσεις
8. λύει ἔλϑε λύσει
D {2 λύετον ἐλύετον λύσετον
"U3. λύετον ἐλυέτην λύσετον
1, λύομεν ἐλύομεν λύσομεν
Ῥ. 2. λύετε ἐλύετε λύσετε
8, λύουσι ἕλνον λύσουσι
Sussoncrive. 1. Ado
8. { 2. λύῃς
3. λύῃ
D. ‘si λύητον
8. λύητον
1. λύωμεν
P. { 2. λύητε
ὃ. λύωσι
ΟΡΤΑΥΨΕ. 1, λύοιμι λύσοιμι
5. | 2. Ado λύσοις
3. λύοι λύσοι
D {: λύοιτον λύσοιτον
18, Avotrny λυσοίτην
1. λύοιμεν λύσοιμεν
Ῥ, | 2. Adoure λύσοιτε
3, λύοιεν λύσοιεν
IMPERATIVE. s. {? Ave
8. λυέτω
Ὁ. { 2. λύετον
8, λνέτων
2. λύετε
Ῥ. | 8. Adovrey or-
λυέτωσαν
ΙΝΕΙΝΙΤΙΡῈ. λύειν λύσειν
PARTICIPLE. λύων, λύουσα, λύσων, λύσονσα
λῦον (336) λῦσον (886)
480]
2.
8.
αν:
1.
Pfs
3.
SuBJUNCTIVE. 1.
s|
Dow icarive, 1.
s.|
2.
3
2.
D.
τ
1.
P. | 2.
3.
OpTaTIVE. 1.
sf
ἹΜΡΕΆΛΤΙΝΕ. 51:
D. { .
2,
pfs
Lhermitive.
PaRtictr.e.
ACTIVE VOICE OF λύω,
1 Aorist.
ἔλῦσα
ἔλῦσας
thrice
ἐλύσατον
ἐλυσάτην
ἐλύσαμεν
ἐλύσατε
ἔλῦσαν
λύσω
λύσῃς
λύσῃ
λύσητον
λύσητον
λύσωμεν
λύσητε
λύσωσι
λύσαιμι
λύσαις, λύσειας
λύσαι, λύσειε
λύσαιτον
λυσαίτην
λύσαιμεν
λύσαιτε
1 Perfect. 1
λέᾶλνκα
λέλνκας
λέλνκε
λελύκατον
λελύκατον
λελύκαμεν
λελνκατε
λελύκᾶσι
λελύκω (720)
λελύκῃς
λελύκῃ 7
λελνκητον
λελύκητον
λελύκωμεν
λελύκητε
λελύκωσι
λελύκοιμι (788)
λελύκοις
λελύκοι
λελύκοιτον
λελνκοίτην
λελύκοιμεν
λελύκοιτε
λύσαιεν, λύσειαν λελύκοιεν
λῦσον
λυσάτω
λύσατον
λυσάτων
λύσατε
Avodyrev or
λύσάτωσαν
λῦσαι
λύσας, λύσασα,
λῦσαν (335)
[λᾶλνκε (472)
λελνυκέτω
λελύκετον
λελυκέτων
λελύκετε
λελνκέτωσαν]
λελυκέναι
λελνκώς, λελνκνῖα,
λελυκός (335)
101
Pluperfect.
ἐλελύκη
Dasens
Davina
ἐλελύκετον
ἐλελυκέτην
ἐλελύκεμεν
ἐλελύκετε
ἐλελύκεσαν
(See 683, 2)
102
INDICATIVE.
Supsuncrivy.
OrraTive.
IMPERATIVE.
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLE.
υ
“_—
n
een,
=
eM rm wR ὡς τῷ τὰ
τ
~ Ὁ Ὁ).
n
Ὁ
“αν. OS ΄--.-ς-ς εαὐ-- ,.»---ὄ-ὄὌἐ oe
τ
πὰ στα
py wr
INFLECTION.
2. Mippixr Voice oF Ato.
Present. Imperfect.
ἐλνόμην
ἐλύου
vero
ἐλύεσθον
ἐλυέσθην
ἐλνόμεθα
ἐλύεσθε
ἐλύοντο
λύομαι
λύει, λύῃ
λύεται
λύεσθον
λύεσθον
λύσμεθα
λύεσθε
λύονται
λύηται
λύησθον
λύησθον
λνυώμεθα
λύησϑε
λύωνται
λυοίμην
λύοιο
λύοιτο
λύοισϑον
λυοίσϑην
λυοίμεθα
λύοισθε
λύοιντο
λύου
λνέσθω
λύεσθον
λνυέσϑων
λύεσϑε
λυέσθων or
λνυέσθωσαν
λύεσθαι
λύσμενος, λυομένη,
λυόμενον (301)
[480
Future.
λύσομαι
λύσει, λύσῃ
λύσεται
λύσεσθον
λύσεσθϑον
λυσόμεθα
λύσεσθε
λύσονται
λυσοίμην
λύσοιο
λύσοιτο
λύσοισϑον
Avooicbyy
λυσοίμεθα
λύσοισθε
λύσοιντο
λύσεσθαι
λυσόμενος, -η,
τὸν (301)
480]
InDIcaTivE. 1.
57 2
3.
"(δ
lL.
7:
3.
SuBsUNCTIVE. tT,
5. {2
3.
οἱ
1.
rf 2
3.
OpTATIVE. 1.
8.4 9.
3.
[ 2:
t
bd. | 3
| 1.
p.s 2.
Ξ
IMPERATIVE. S, {:
2.
ΔΕ
2
rfa
INFINITIVE.
Pa RTICIPLE,
MIDDLE VOICE OF Atw.
1 Aorist.
ἐλυσάμην
ἐλύσω
ἐλύσατο
ἐλύσασθον
ἐλυσάσθην
ἐλυσάμεθα
ἐλύσασθε
ἐλύσαντο
λύσωμαι
λύσῃ
λύσηται
λύσησθον
λύσησθον
λυσώμεθα
λύσησθε
λύσωνται
λυσαίμην
λύσαιο
λύσαιτο
λύσαισθον
λυσαίσϑην
λυσαίμεθα
λύσαισθε
λύσαιντο
λῦσαι
λυσάσθω
λύσασθον
λυσάσθων
λύσασθε
λυσάσθων or
λυσάσθωσαν
λύσασθαι
Avodpevos, -ἡ,
-ov (801)
Perfect.
AAvpar
λέλνσαι
λέλνται
λέλυσθον
λέλυσθον
λελύμεθα
λέλυσθε
λέλυνται
λελυμένος ὦ
λελυμένος ἧς
λελυμένος ἡ
λελνμένω ἦτον
λελυμένω ἦτον
λελυμένοι ὦμεν
λελυμένοι Fre
λελυμένοι ὦσι
λελυμένος εἴην
λελνμένος εἴης
λελυμένος εἴη
λελνμένω εἶτον
or εἴητον
λελυμένω εἵτην
or εἰήτην
λελνμένοι εἶμεν
or. εἴημεν
λελυμένοι εἶτε
ΟΥ̓ εἴητε
λελνυμένοι εἶεν
or εἴησαν
λέλνσο (750)
λελύσθϑω (749)
λέλυσθον
λελύσθϑων
λέλυσθε
λελύσθων ΟΥ
λελύσθωσαν
λελύσϑαι
λελυμένος, -ἡ,
τον (301)
103
Pluperfect.
ἐλελύμην
ἐλέλυσο
Avro
ἐλέλνσθον
ἐλελύσθην
ἐλελύμεθα
ἐλέλνσθε
ἐλέλυντο
104
InvicaTIvE, 1.
5. 29,
3.
2.
Ὁ.
13
1.
P| 2
3.
ϑυβύῦνοτινε. 1.
57.
3.
2.
ὉΠ
1,
Pf
8.
OpraTive. 1.
5] 2
3.
2.
D. 3.
1.
p.{?
3.
Lapgrative. 2.
ΧΗ
2.
DLs
2.
pf
> Invinitive,
PaRTICIPLE,
INFLECTION.
8. Passive Voice or Ade.
Future Perfect.
λελύσομαι
λελύσει, λελύσῃ
λελύσεται
λελύσεσθον
λελύσεσθον
λελύσόμεθα
λελύσεσθϑε
λελύσονται
λελυσοίμην
λελύσοιο
λελύσοιτο
λελύσοισθον
λελυσοίσϑην
λειλυσοίμεθα
λελύσοισϑε
λελύσοιντο
λελύσεσθαι
λελυσόμενος,
τῇ, τον (301)
1 Aorist.
ἐλύθην
Avoys
ἐλύθη
ἐλύθητον
ἐλυθήτην
ἐλύθημεν
ἔλύθητε
ἐλύθησαν
Aveo
Avdys
λυθῇ
λνθῆτον
λυϑῆτον
λυθώμεν
Avoyre
λυθώσι
λνϑείην
λυθείης
λνθϑείη
λνθεῖτον or
λνθείητον
λυθείτην or
λνθειήτην
λυθεῖμεν ΟΥ
λυθείημεν
λυθείτε OF
λνυϑείητε
λυθεῖεν or
λυθείησαν
λύθητι
λυθήτω
λύθητον
λυθήτων
λύθητε
λυθέντων ΟΥ̓
λνθήτωσαν
λνϑῆναι
[480
1 Future.
λνθήσομαι
λυθήσει, λυθήσῃ
λυθήσεται
λυϑήσεσθον
λυθήσεσθϑον
λνθησόμεθα
λνθήσεσθε
λυθήσονται
λνυϑησοίμην
λυθήσοιο
λυθήσοιτο
λυθήσοισθον
λνθησοίσθην
λνθησοίμεθα
λυθήσοισϑο
λνθήσοιντο
λυϑήσεσθαι
λυθείς, λυθεῖσα, λνθησόμενος,
λυθέν (335)
τῇ, -ov (301)
481] SECOND AORIST, PERFECT, ETC. OF λείπω. 105
481. Szcowp Aorist (Active ΑΝῸ ΜΙΡΌΜΕ) AND Secon ΡΕΆΡΕΟΤ
AND PLUPERFECT OF λείπω.
INDICATIVE. 1,
5, '
SUBJUNCTIVE. 1,
575
3.
2:
ἧς
1.
Pf.
3.
OrraTIVE. 1.
s {2
8
2:
dfs
1.
Pfs
8.
ἹΜΡΕΆΑΤΙΝΕ. Ss {2
“U3.
2
D.<
3
2.
Pp. δ:
INFINITIVE,
PARTICLPLE.
2.
3.
2 Aorist
Active.
ἔλιπον
ἔλιπες
ἔλιπε
ἐλίπετον
ἐλιπέτην
ἐλίπομεν
ἐλίπετε
ἔλιπον
λίπω
λίπῃς
λίπῃ
λίπητον
λίπητον
λίπωμεν
λίπητε
λίπωσι
λίποιμι
λίποις
«+ λύτοι
λίποιτον
λιποίτην
λίποιμεν
λίποιτε
λίποιεν
λίπε
λιπέτω
λίπετον
λιπέτων
λίπετε
λιπόντων
or λιπέ-
τωσαν
λιπεῖν
λιπών,
λιποῦσα,
λιπόν
(335)
2 Aorist
Middle.
ἐλιπόμην
ἐλίπου
ἐλίπετο
ἐλίπεσθον
ἐλιπέσϑην
ἐλιπόμεθα
ἐλίπεσθε
ἐλίποντο
λίπωμαι
λίπῃ
λίπηται
λίπησθον
λίπησθον
λιπώμεθα
λίπησθε
λίπωνται
λιποίμην
λίποιο
λίποιτο
λίποισϑον
λιποίσϑην
λιποίμεθα
λίποισθε
λίποιντο
λιποῦ
λιπέσϑω
λίπεσθον
λιπέσθων
λίπεσϑε
λιπέσθων or
λιπέσϑωσαν
λιπέσθαι
λιπόμενος,
τῇ, τὸν
(801)
2 Perfect. 2 Pluperfect.
λέλοιπα
AAouras
λέλοιπε
λελοίπατον
λελοίπατον
λελοίπαμεν
λελοίπατε
λελοίπασι
λελοίπω
λελοίπῃς
λελοίπῃ
λελοίπητον
λελοίπητον
λελοίπωμεν
λελοίπητε
λελοίπωσι
λελοίποιμι
λελοίποις
λελοίποι
λελοίποιτον
λελοιποίτην
λελοίποιμεν
λελοίποιτε
λελοίποιεν
λέλοιπε
λελοιπέτω
λελοίπετον
λελοιπέτων
λελοίπετε
λελοιπέτων
λελοιπέναι
λελοιπώς,
λελοιπυῖα,
λελοιπός
(385)
ἐλελοίπη
ἐλελοίπης
ἐλελοίπει
ἐλελοίπετον
ἐλελοιπέτην
ἐλελοίπεμεν
ἐλελοίπετε
ἐλελοίπεσαν
(See 683, 2)
106 INFLECTION. [482
482, Futurr axp Finsr Aowst Active axp MIvpLe (Liquip
Forms) axv Seconn Aorist anv Seconp Furtre Passive oF Φαίνω,
Future Active.’ Future Middle.' 1 Aorist Active,
INDICATIVE, 1, dave φανοῦμαι ἔφηνα
5 {> φανεῖς φανεῖ, φανῇ ἔφηνας
8. φανεῖ φανεῖται ἔφηνε
D. {: φανεῖτον φανεῖσθον ἐφήνατον
3. φανεῖτον φανεῖσθον ἐφηνάτην
1. φανοῦμεν φανούμεθα ἐφήναμεν
Pp. 2, φανεῖτε φανεῖσθε ἐφήνατε
3. φανοῦσι φανοῦνται ἔφηναν
Βυπσυκοτινε. (1. φήνω
2 2. φήνῃς
3. φήνῃ
D. { 2. φήνητον
3. φήνητον
1 φήνωμεν
P. {2 φήνητε
3. φήνωσι
OrraTiyy, 1. Φφανοίην or φανοῖμι φανοίμην φήναιμι
5. {2 davoins or davois φανοῖο φήναις or φήνειας
3. davoin or φανοῖ φανοῖτο φήναι or φήνειε
D. { ὡς φανοῖτον φανοῖσθον Φφήναιτον
3 φανοίτην φανοίσϑην φηναίτην
; 1. φανοῖμεν φανοίμεθα φήναιμεν
YP. | 2. φανοῖτε φανοῖσθϑε φήναιτε
3. φανοῖεν φανοῖντο φήναιεν or φήνειαν
IMPERATIVE. ¢ {* φῆνον
£8) φηνέτω
D. { 2. φήνατον
3. φηνάτων
2. φήνατε
Ρ. {8 φηνάντων or
φηνάτωσαν
INFINITIVE. φανεῖν φανεῖσθαι φῆναι
PAaRTICcirLe. φανῶν, φανοῦσα, davotpevos, φήνᾶς, φήνασα,
φανοῦν (310) τῇ, τον (301) φῆναν (335)
1The uncontracted futures, φανέω and φανέομαι (478; 483), are
inflected like φιλέω and φιλέομαι (492),
482]
ἸΝΡΙΘΑΤΙΝΕ,
ΘΟΌΒΦΌΝΟΤΙΝΕ,
OPTATIVE.
-
IMPERATIVE,
INFINITIVE,
ParricirLe.
FUTURES AND AORISTS OF φαίνω,
1 Aor. Mid.
ἐφηνάμην
ἐφήνω
ἐφένατο
ἐφηνασθον
ἐφηνάσθην
ἐφηνάμεθα
ἐφήνασθε
ἐφήναντο
φήνωμαι
φήνῃ
φήνηται
φήνησθον
φήνησθον
φηνώμεβα
φήνησθε
φήνωνται
φηναίμην
φήναιο
φήναιτο
φήναισθον
φηναίσθην
φηναίμεθα
φήναισθϑε
φήναιντο
φήναι
φηνάσθω
φήνασθον
φηνάσθων
φήνασθϑε
φηνάσθων or
φηνάσθωσαν
φήνασϑαι
φηνάμενος, τῇ»
-ov (301)
2 Aor. Pass.
ἐφάνην
ἐφάνης
ἐφάνη
ἐφάνητον
ἐφανήτην
ἐφάνημεν
ἐφάνητε
ἐφάνησαν
φανὼ
φανῇς
φανῇ
φανήτον
φανήτον
φανώμεν
φανῆτε
φανώσι
φανείην
φανείης
φανείη
φανεῖτον or
φανείητον
φανείτην or
φανειήτην
φανεῖμεν or
φανείημεν
φανεῖτε oF
φανείητε
φανεῖεν or
φανείησαν
φάνηθι
φανήτω
φάνητον
Φφανήτων
φάνητε
φανέντων or
φανήτωσαν
φανήναι
φανείς,
φανεῖσα,
107
2 Fut. Pass.
φανήσομαι
φανήσει, φανήσῃ
φανήσεται
φανήσεσθον
φανήσεσθον
φανησόμεθα
φανήσεσθε
φανήσονται
φανησοίμην
φανήσοιο
φανήσοιτο
φανήσοισθϑον
φανησοίσθην
φανησοίμεθα
. φανήσοισθε
φανήσοιντο
φανήσεσθαι
φανησόμενος,
τῇ, τὸν (301)
φανέν (335)
108 INFLECTION. [483
483. The uneontracted forms of the future active and widdle
of φαίνω (478) and of other liguid futures are not Attic, but are
found in Homer and Herodotus. So with some of the uncon.
tracted forms of the aorist subjunctive passive in ew (474).
484. The tenses of λείπω and φαίνω which are not inflected
above follow the corresponding tenses of λύω; except the perfect
and pluperfect middle, for which see 486. Λέλειμ-μαι is inflected
like rérpip-pat (487, 1), and πέφασ-μαι is inflected in 487, 2.
485. Sotne of the dissyllabic forms of λύω do not show the
accent so well as polysyllabic forms, e.g. these of κωλύω, hinder: —
Pres. Imper. Act. κώλυε, κωλνέτω, κωλύετε. Aor. Opt. Act.
κωλύσαιμι, κωλύσειας (or κωλύσαις), κωλύσειε (or κωλύσαι). Aor.
Imper. Act. κώλυσον, κωλύσάτω. Aor. Inf. Act. κωλῦσαι. Aor,
Imper. Mid. κώλύσαι, κωλύσάσθω.
The three forms κωλύσαι, κωλῦσαι, κώλῦσαι (cf. Abcat, λῦσαι,
Avoat) are distinguished only by accent. See 180; 113; 131, 4.
PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE AND PASSIVE OF
VERBS WITH CONSONANT STEMS.
486. 1. In the perfect. and pluperfect middle, many
euphonic changes (489) occur when a consonant of the
tense-stem comes before μ, 7, σ᾽ or 6 of the ending.
2. When the stem ends in ἃ cousonant, the third person
plural of these tenses is formed by the perfect middle par-
ticiple with εἰσί, are, and ἦσαν, were (806).
487. 1. These tenses of τρίβω, rub, πλέκω, weave, πείθω
persuade, and στέλλω (σταλ-), send, are thus inflected: —
Perfect Indicative.
1. rérpippar πέπλεγμαι πέπεισμαι ἔσταλμαι
5 { 2. τέτρῖψαι πέπλεξαι πέπεισαι ἔσταλσαι
8. τέτριπται πέπλεκται πέπεισται ἔσταλται
Ῥ. { 2. τέτριφθον πέπλεχϑον πέπεισθϑον ἔσταλθον
8, τέτρῖφθον πέπλεχθον πέπεισθον ἔσταλθον
1, τετρίμμεθα πεπλέγμεθα πεπείσμεθα ἐστάλμεθα
P [: τέτριφθε πέπλεχθε πέπεισθε ἔσταλθε
3. τετρῖμμένοι πεπλεγμένοι πεπεισμένοι ἐσταλμένοι
εἰσί εἰσί . εἰσί εἰσί
Perfect Subjunctive and Optative.
Suns. rerptpplvos ὦ πεπλεγμένος ὦ πεπεισμένος ὦ loradplvos ὦ
Orr. τ εἴην “ εἴην τς εἴην “ «εἴην
481]
τέτρῖψο
τετρίφθω
τέτρῖφθον
τετρίφθων
τέτριφθε
5. {ξ
1. { αἱ
ry
Perfect Infinitive and Participle.
InF. τετρῖφθαι
Parr. τετρϊμμένος
1. ἐτετρέμμην
S. {2 ἐτέτρῖψο
3. ἐτέτρῖπτο
Ὁ. { 2. ἐτέτριφθον
3. ἐτετρέφθην
1. ἐτετρέμμεθα
P. β ἐτέτριφθε
8. τετριμμένοι
ἦσαν
VERBS WITH CONSONANT STEMS.
Perfect Imperative.
πέπλεξο
πεπλέχθω
πέπλεχθον
πεπλέχθων
πέπλεχθε
τετρίφθων or πεπλέχθων or
τετρίφθωσαν πεπλέχθωσαν πεπείσθωσαν
πεπλέχθαι
πεπλεγμένος
πέπεισο
πεπείσθω
πέπεισθον
πεπείσθων
πέπεισθε
πεπείσϑων Or
πεπεῖσθαι
πεπεισμένος
Pluperfect Indicative.
ἐπεπλέγμην
ἐπέπλεξο
ἐπέπλεκτο
ἐπέπλεχθον
ἐπεπλέχθην
ἐπεπλέγμεθα
ἐπέπλεχθε
πεπλεγμένοι
ἦσαν
ἐπεπείσμην
ἐπέπεισο
ἐπέπειστο
ἐπέπεισθον
ἐπεπείσθην
ἐπεπείσμεθα
ἐπέπεισθε
πεπεισμένοι
ἧσαν
109
ἔσταλσο
ἐστάλθω
ἔσταλθον
ἐστάλθων
ἔσταλθε
ἐστάλθων or
ἐστάλθωσαν
ἐστάλθαι
ἐσταλμένος
ἐστάλμην
ἴσταλσο
ἴσταλτο
ἔσταλθον
ἐστάλθην
ἐστάλμεθα
ἔσταλθε
ἐσταλμένοι
ἦσαν
2. The same tenses of (τελέω) τελῶ (stem Tedre-), finish,
φαίνω (pav-), show, ἀλλάσσω (ἀλλαγ-), exchange, and ἐλέγχω
(édeyx-), convict, are thus inflected : —
. τετίλεσμαι
. τετέλεσαι
3. τετέλεσται
2. τετέλεσθον
ae { 3.
τετέλεσθον
Ι.
ἘΠῚ
3.
Surg.
Opr. "
τετελέσμεθα
τετέλεσϑε
τετελεσμένοι
εἰσί
Perfect Subjunctive and Optative.
τετελεσμένος ὦ πεφασμένος ὦ ἠλλαγμένος ὦ ἐληλεγμένος ὦ
εἴην “
Perfect Indicative.
πέφασμαι
[πέφανσαι,700]
πέφανται
πέφανθον
πέφανθον
πεφάσμεθα
πέφανθε
πεφασμένοι
εἰσί
εἴην “
εἴην Ἐ
ἤλλαγμαι
ἤλλαξαι
ἤλλακται
ἤλλαχθον
ἤλλαχθον
ἠλλάγμεθα
ἤλλαχθε
ἠλλαγμένοι
εἰσί
ἐλήλεγμαι
ἐλήλεγξαι
ἐλήλεγκται
ἐλήλεγχϑον
ἐλήλεγχθον
ἐληλέγμεθα
ἐλήλεγχθε
ἐληλεγμένοι
εἰσί
εἴην
110 INFLECTION. [488
Perfect Imperative.
5, {: τετέλεσο [πέφανσο]Ἱ ἤλλαξο ἐλήλεγξο
8. τετελέσθω πεφάνθω ἠλλάχθω ἐληλέγχθω
Ὁ. 2: τετέλεσθον πέφανθον ἤλλαχθον ἐλήλεγχθον
3. τετελέσθων πεφάνθων ἠλλάχθων ἐληλέγχθων
P. {: τετέλεσθε πέφανθε ἥλλαχθε ἐλήλεγχθε
8. τετελέσθων or πεφάνθων or ἡλλάχθων or ἐληλέγχθων or
τετελέσθωσαν πεφάνθωσαν ἡἠλλάχθωσαν ἐληλέγχθωσαν
Perfect Infinitive and Participle.
Ine, τετελέσθαι πεφάνθαι ἠλλάχθαι ἐληλέγχθαι
Part. τετελεσμένος πεφασμένος ἠλλαγμένος ἐληλεγμένος
Pluperfect Indicative.
1. ἐτετελέσμην ἐπεφάσμην ἠλλάγμην ἐληλέγμην
5 {2 ἐτετέλεσο [érépaveo] ἤλλαξο ἐλήλεγξο
8. ἐτετέλεστο ἐπέφαντο ἤλλακτο ἐλήλεγκτο
D. { 2. ἐτετέλεσθον ἐπέφανθον ἤλλαχθον ἐλήλεγχθον
3. ἐτετελέσθην ἐπεφάνθην ἠλλάχθην ἐληλέγχθην
1. ἐτετελέσμεθα ἐπεφάσμεθα ἡλλάγμεθα ἐληλέγμεθα
P | 2. ἐτετέλεσθε ἐπέφανθε ἤλλαχθε ἐλήλεγχθε
3. τετελεσμένος πεφασμένοι ἡἠλλαγμένοι ἐληλεγμένοι
ἦσαν ἦσαν ἦσαν ἦσαν
488. N. The regular third person plural here {τετριβινται,
ἐπεέπλεκιντο, etc., formed like λέλνινται, ἐλέλυτντο) could not be
pronounced. The pceriphrastie form is necessary also when o is
added to a vowel stem (640), as in τετέλεσ-μαι. But when final
ν of a stem is dropped (647), the regular forms in vras and vro are
used; as κλένω, κέκλι-μαι, κέκλινται (ut κεκλιμένοι εἰσί).
489. For the euphonic changes here, see 71-77 and 83.
1, Thus τέτριμεμαι is for τετριβιμαι (75); τέτριψαι for τετριβ-
σαι (74); τέτριπ-ται for rerpiB-rat, τέτριφ-θον for τετριβ-θον (71).
So πέπλεγιμαι is for πέπλεκ-μαι (75); πέπλεχ-θον tor πεπλεκιθον
(71). Πέπεισ-ται is for werret6-rat, and πέπεισ-θον is for πεπειθ.
Gov (71); and πέπεισμαι (for πεέπειθιμαι} probably follows their
analogy ; πέπει-σαι is for πεπειθ-σαι (74).
2. In reréde-o-pat, σ is added to the stem before μὶ and τ (640),
the stem remaining pure before o. Τετέλεσμαι and πέπεισμαι,
therefore, inflect these tenses alike, though on different principles.
Ou the other hand, the o before μ in πέφασμαι (487, 2) is a sub-
491) VERBS WITH CONSONANT STEMS. 111
stitute for ν of the stem (83), which ν reappears before other
letters (700). In the following comparison the distinction is
shown by the hyphens :—
τετέλε-σ-μαι πέπεισ-μαι πέφασ-μαι
τετέλε-σαι πέπει-σαι [πέφαν-σαι]
τετέλε-σ-ται πέπεισ-ται πέφαν-ται
τετέλε-σθε πέπεισ-θε πέφαν.θε
8. Under ἤλλαγιμαι, ἤλλαξαι is for ἠλλαγισαι, ἤλλακ-ται for
ἤλλαγ-ται, ἤλλαχιθον for ἠλλαγιθον (74; 71). Under ἐλήλεγιμαι,
γγμ (ἴοι yx) drops one γ (77); ἐλήλεγξαι and ἐλήλεγκ-τωι are for
ἐληλεέγχ-σαι and ἐληλεγχ-ται (74; 71). See also 529.
490. 1. All perfect-middle stems ending in a labial inflect these
tenses like rérpip-pat; 85 λείπω, λέλειμ-μαι ; γράφω (ypad-), write,
γέγραμ-μαι (75); ῥίπτω (pid-, pid-), throw, ἔρριμ-μαι. But when
final μπ of the stem loses w before » (77), the m recurs before
other consonants; as κάμπτω (καμπ-), bend, κέκαμ- μαι, κέκαμψαι,
κέκαμπ- ται, κέκαμφ-θε; πέμπω (meer ), send, πέπεμ -μαι, πέπεμψαι,
πέπεμπ-ται, πέπεμφ'θε: coinpare mérep-pat from πέσσω {πεπ-), couk,
inflected πέπεψαι. πέπεπ-ται, πέπεφ-θε, etc.
2. All ending in a palatal inflect these tenses like πέπλεγιμαι and
ἤλλαγιμαι; as πράσσω (mpay-), do, werpay-pat; ταράσσω (Tapay-),
confuse, Terdpay-par; φυλάσσω (φυλακ-), πεφύλαγ-μαι. But when
y before w represents yy, as in ἐλήλεγιμαι from éAdyy-w (489, 3),
the second palatal] of the stem recurs before other consonants (see
487, 2).
3. Allending in a lingual mute inflect these tenses like πέπεισ-
μαι, etc.; as φράζω (ppad-), tell, πέφρασ-μαι, πέφρα-σαι, πέφρασ-ται;
ἐθίζω (€08-), accustom, εἴθισ-μαι, εἴθι-σαι, εἴθισ-ται, εἴθισ-θε; pluf,
εἰθίσ-μην, εἴθι-σο, εἴθισ-το; σπένδω (σπενδ-), pour, ἔσπεισιμαι (lke
πέπεισ:μαι, 488, 1) for ἐσπενδεμαι, ἔσπει-σαι, ἔσπεισ-ται, ἔσπεισ-θε.
4. Most ending in ν (those in ἂν- and υν- of verbs in atv or
ὕνω) are inflected like πέφασ-μαι (see 489, 2).
Ὁ. When final ν of a stem is dropped (647), as in κλένω,
bend, κέκλιμαι, the tense is inflected like λέλνιμαι (with a vowel
stem).
6. Those ending in A or p are inflected like foroA-pat; as
ayyOAw (dyyeA-), Gunyunce, HyyeA-pat; αἴρω (dp-), raise, p-par;
ἐγείρω (eyep-), rouse, ἐγήγερ-μαι; πείρω (περ-), plerce, πέπαρ-μαι
(045).
491. For the full forms of these verbs, see the Catalogue. For
φαίνω, see also 478.
112
INFLECTION,
CONTRACT VERBS.
492, Verbs in aw, ew, and ow are contracted in the present
and imperfect. These tenses of rivdw (ripa-), honor, φιλέω
(φιλε-), love, and δηλόω (SyAo-), manifest, are thus inflected : —
1. (τἱμάω) τιμῶ
{a (ripdes) τιμᾷς
8. (tinder) Tipe
D. { (Tinderov) τὶμᾶτον
8. (rinderov) ripdrov
1. (ripdopev) ‘ripapev
P. {2 (tinder) τῖμᾶτε
8. (rindover) τὶμῶσι
1. (τῖμάω) Tipe
8. {2 (tindys) τιμᾷς
3. (rindy) Tipe
Ὁ. {* (τι μάητον) τἱμᾶτον
3. (τίμάητον) τὶμᾶτον
1. (τίμάωμεν) τὶμῶμεν
P. {2 (τίμάητε) τῖἰμᾶτε
8, (τίμάωσι) τῖὶμῶσι
I. (τύμάοιμι) [τἰμῴμι
8. {2 (Tindos) — Tipws
3. (τἱμάοι) Tipe]
D. ᾿Ξ (Tindoirov) τὶμῷῴτον
3. (τἱμαοίτην) τιμῴτην
1. (τίμάοιμεν) τμῴμεν
ΕΣ (τίμάοιτε) τὶμῷτε
3. Sire τὶμῴεν
or
1. Ἔν" Tipe
S. {2 (Tinaolns) -ripens
3. (τἰμαοίη) τιμῴη
D. {2 (ττμαοίητον) [τἱμῳητον
8. (τ᾿ μαοιήτην) τμῳήτην
1, (τἱμαοίημεν) [τἱμῴημεν
Ρ. {2 (τὶ μαοίητε) τῖμῳῴητε
8.(τἱμαοίησαν) τ᾽μῴησαν
ACTIVE,
Present Indicative.
(φιλέω) φιλῶ
(φιλέει) φιλεῖς
(φιλέει) φιλεῖ
(φιλέετον) φιλεῖτον
(φιλέετον) φιλεῖτον
(φιλέομεν) φιλοῦμεν
(φιλέετε) φιλεῖτε
(φιλέουσι) φιλοῦσι
Present Subjunctive.
(φιλέω) φιλῶ
(φιλέῃε) φιλῇς
- (φιλέῃ) φιλῇ
(φιλέητον) φιλῆτον
(φιλέητον) Φφιλῆτον
(φιλέωμεν) φιλῶμεν
(φιλέητε) φιλῆτε
(φιλέωσι) φιλῶσι
Present Optative (see 737).
(φιλέοιμι) [φιλοῖμι
(φιλέοι) φιλοῖς
(φιλέοι) φιλοῖ)
(φιλέοιτον) φιλοῖτον
(φιλεοίτην) φιλοίτην
(φιλέοιμεν) φιλοῖμεν
(φιλέοιτε) Φιλοῖτε
(φιλέοιεν) φιλοῖεν
ΟΥ̓ or
(φιλεοίην) φιλοίην
(φιλεοίη:) φιλοίης
(φιλεοίη) φιλοίη
(φιλεοίητον) [φιλοίητον
(φιλεοιήτην) φιλοιήτην͵
(φιλεοίημεν) φιλοίημεν
(φιλεοίητε) φιλοίητε
(φιλεοίησαν)φιλοίησαν)
[492
(δηλόω) δηλῶ
(δηλόει:) δηλοῖς
(δηλόει) δηλοῖ
(δηλόετον) δηλοῦτον
(δηλόετον) δηλοῦτον
(δηλόομεν) δηλοῦμεν
(δηλόετε) δηλοῦτε
(δηλόουσι) δηλοῦσι
(δηλόω) ϑηλῶ
(δηλόῃ:) δηλοῖς
(δηλόῃ) δηλοῖ
(δηλόητον) δηλῶ ον
(δηλόητον) δηλύτον
(δηλέωμεν) SyAC pev
(δηλόητε) δηλῶτε
(δηλόωσι) δηλῶσι
(δηλόοιμι) [δηλοῖμι
(δηλόοι:) δηλοῖς
(δηλόοι) δηλοῖ]
(δηλόοιτον) δηλοῖτον
(δηλοοίτην) δηλοίτην
(δηλόοιμεν) δηλοῖμεν
(δηλόοιτε) δηλοῖτε
(δηλόοιεν) δηλοῖεν
or or
(δηλοοίην) SyAolny
(3ndoolys) δηλοίης
(δηλοοίη) δηλοίη
(δηλοοίητον) [δηλοίητον
(δηλοοιἠτην) δηλοιήτην |
(δηλοοίημεν) [δηλοΐίημεν
(δηλοοίητε) δηλοίητε
(δηλοοίησαν) δηλοίησαν
492]
S. es (τίμαε) τίμα
8. (τἱμαέτω) τὶμᾶτω
Ρ. 2. (τϊμάετον) τὶμᾶτον
8, (τιμαέτω») τὶμάτων
τιμᾶτε
8, Saal τἱμώντων
oF
}
i
-P . (Tindere)
Baca Tipdtucav (φιλεέτωσαν) φιλείτωσαν
Present Participle (see 840).
(rindev) τὶμᾶν
(τἱμάων) τιμῶν
1. (ἐτέμαον) ἐτίμων
2. (értuaes) ἐτίμας
3. (ἐτέμαε) ἐτίμα
D. ᾿Ξ (ἐτίμάετον) ἐτιμᾶτον
3. (ἐτμαέτην) ériparny
1. (érindoper) iripapev
P {2 (éripdere) ἐτῖμᾶτε
8, (ἐτίμαον) ἐτέμων
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE,
1. (rip “opar) τἰμῶμαι
2. (τἵμάει, Tinan) τιμᾷ
3. (τίμάεται) τὶμᾶται
2, (τϊμάεσθον) τμᾶσθον
3. (τῖμάεσθον) τὶμᾶσϑον
[ 1, (ripadueba) τὶμώμεθα
{
5.
Ὁ
P.4 2. (ripdeode) τιμᾶσθε
3. (ripdorra:) ripdvrar
1. (τιμάωμαι) tipdpar
5.1.2. (rindn) τιμᾷ
8, (τμάηται) τῖμᾶται
D. 2. (τἱμάησθον) ripaca boy
3. (τἱμάησϑον) τμᾶσθον
1, (τιμαώμεθα) τιμώμεθα
P< 2, (τἱμάησθε) τιμᾶσθε
3.
(τιμάωνται) tipdvrar
CONTRACT VERBS.
Present Imperative.
pire) φίλει
(φιλεέτω) φιλείτω
(φιλέετον) φιλεῖτον
(φιλεέτων) φιλείτων
(φιλέετε) φιλεῖτε
(φιλεόντων) φιλούντων
or or
Present Infinitive.
(φιλέειν) ᾧφιλεῖν
(φιλέων) ᾧφιλῶν
Imperfect.
(ἐφίλεον) ἐφίλουν
(épirees) ἐφίλεις
(ἐφίλεε) ἐφίλει
(ἐφιλέετον) ἐφιλεῖτον
(ἐφιλεέτηνῚ ἐφιλείτην
(ἐφιλέομεν) ἐφιλοῦμεν
(ἐφιλέετε) ἐφιλεῖτε
(ἐφίλεον) ἐφίλουν
Present Indicative.
(φιλέομαι) φιλοῦμαι
(φιλέει, φιλέῃ) φιλεῖ, φιλῇ
(φιλέεται) φιλεῖται
(φιλέεσθον) φιλεῖσϑον
(φιλέεσθον») φιλεῖσθον
(φιλεόμεθα) φιλούμεθα
(φιλέεσθε) φιλεῖσθε
(φιλέονται) Φιλοῦνται
Present Subjunctive.
(φιλέωμαι) φιλῶμαι
(φιλέῃ) φιλῇ
(φιλέηται) φιλῆται
(φιλέησθον) φιλῆσϑον
(φιλέησϑον) φιλῆσϑον
(φιλεώμεθα) φιλώμεθα
(φιλέησθε) Φιλῆσθε
(φιλέωνται) φιλῶνται
118
(δήλοεν) δήλον
(δηλοέτω) δηλούτω
(δηλόετον) δηλοῦτον
(δηλοέτων) δηλούτων
(δηλόετε) δηλοῦτε
(δηλοόντων) δηλούντων
or or
(δηλοέτωσαν) δηλούτωσαν
(δηλόειν) δηλοῦν
(δηλόων) δηλῶν
(ἐδήλοον) ἐδήλουν
(ἐδήλοε:) ἐδήλους
(ἐδήλοε) ἐδήλον
(ἐδηλόετον) ἐδηλοῦτον
(ἐδηλοέτην) ἐδηλούτην
(ἐδηλόομεν) ἐδηλοῦμεν
(ἐδηλόετε) ἐδηλοῦτε
(ἐδήλοον) ἐδήλουν
(δηλόομαι) δηλοῦμαι
(δηλόει, δηλόῃ) δηλοῖ
(δηλόεται) δηλοῦται
(δηλόεσϑον) δηλοῦσϑον
(δηλόεσθον) δηλοῦσϑον
(δηλοόμεϑα) δηλούμεθα
(δηλόεσθε) δηλοῦσθε
(δηλόονται) δηλοῦνται
(δηλόωμαι) δηλῶμαι
(δηλόῃ) δηλοῖ
(δηλόηται) δηλῶται
(δηλόησθον) δηλῶσθον
(δηλόησθον) δηλῶσθον
(δηλοώμεθα) δηλώμεθα
(δηλόησθε) δηλῶσθϑε
(δηλόωνται) δηλῶνται
‘
D.{
P,
5. {
D.{
P.
s.{
p.{
Ρ. |
114
1. (τἱμαοίμην) τἰμῴμην
2. (Tindow) τῖμῴο
8. (τἱμάοιτο) τιμῷτο
2. (τἱμάοισθον) τιμῷσθον
3. (σἱμαοίσθην) τ᾽μῳσθην
1. (τἱμαοίμεθα) τἱμώμεθα
2. (τἱμάοισϑε) τιἰμῴσθε
8. (τϊμάοιντο) τἰμῴντο
2. (τἱμάου)
8. (τιμαέσθωὴ
2. (τιμάεσθον)
8. (τιμαέσθων)
2. (TinderGe) τῖμᾶσθε
8. (τἰμαέσθων) τιμάσθων
or or
Tipe
τἰμάσθω
tipag ov
Tipdcbwy
(τἰμαἐσθωσαν)τιμᾶσθωσαν (φιλεέσθωσαν) φιλείσθωσαν
(τἱμάεσθαι) τῖἴμᾶσθαι
(τιμαόμενο:) τἱμώμενος
1. (ἐτιμαόμην) ἐτιμώμην
2. (éripdou)
3. (éripdero)
2. (ἐτϊμάεσθον) ἐτιμᾶσθον
9. (ἐτϊμαἐσθην)ἐτὶμάσθην
1. (ἐτ:μαόμεθα) ἑτϊμώμεθα
2. (ἐτὶμάεσθε) lripdabe
3. (ἐγϊμάονγο) ἐτὶμῶντο
ἐτὶμῶ
triparo
INFLECTION,
Present Optative.
(φιλεοίμην) φιλρίμην
(φιλέοιο) ὀφιλοῖο
(φιλέοιτο) φιλοῖτο
(φιλέοισθον) φιλοῖσθον
(φιλεοίσθην) φιλοίσθην
(φιλεοίμεθα) φιλοίμεθα
(φιλέοισθε) φιλοῖσθε
(φιλέοιντο) φιλοῖντο
Present Imperative.
(φιλέου) φιλοῦ
(φιλεέσθω) φιλείσθω
(φιλέεσθον) φιλεῖσθον
(φιλεέσθων) φιλείσθων
(φιλέεσθε) φιλεῖσθε
(φιλεέσθων) φιλείσθων
or or
Present Infinitive.
(φιλέεσθαι) φιλεῖσθαι
Present Participle.
(φιλεόμενος) φιλούμενος
Imperfect.
(ἐφιλεόμην) ἐφιλούμην
(ἐφιλέου) ἐφιλοῦ
ζέἐφιλέετο) ἐφιλεῖτο
(ἐφιλέεσθον) ἐφιλεῖσθον
(ἐφιλεἐσθην) ἐφιλείσθην
(ἐφιλεόμεθα) ἐφιλοόμεθα
(ἐφιλέεσθε) ἰφιλεῖσθε
(ἐφιλέοντο) ἐφιλοῦντο
[498
(δηλοοίμην) δηλοίμην
(δηλόοιο) δηλοῖο
(δηλόοιτο) δηλοῖτο
(δηλόοισθον) δηλοῖσθον
(δηλοοίσϑην) δηλοίσθην
(δηλοοίμεθα) δηλοίμεθα
(δηλόοισθε) δηλοῖσθε
(δηλόοιντο) δηλοῖντο
(δηλόου) δηλοῦ
(δηλοέσθω) δηλούσθω
(δηλόεσθον) δηλοῦσθον
(δηλοέσθων) ϑηλούσθων
(δηλόεσθε) δηλοῦσθε
(δηλοέσθων) δηλούσθων
ΟΥ̓ ΟΥ̓
δηλοέσθωσαν) δηλούσθωσαν
(δηλόεσθαι) δηλοῦσϑαι
(δηλοόμενος) δηλούμενος
(ἐδηλοόμην) ἐδηλούμην
(ἐδηλύου) ἐδηλοῦ
(ἐδηλόετο) ἐδηλοῦτο
(ἐδηλόεσθον)ὴ ἐδηλοῦσθον
(ἐδηλοέσθην) ἐδηλούσθην
(ἐδηλοόμεϑα) ἐδηλούμεθα
(ἐδηλόεσθε) ἐδηλοῦσθε
(ἐδηλόοντο) ἐδηλοῦντο
493, N. The uncontracted forms of these tenses are not Attic (but
see 495, 1).
Those of verbs in aw sometimes occur in Homer; those
of verbs in ew are common in Ifomer and Herodotus; but those of
verbs in ow are never used.
184-786,
For dialectic forms of these verbs, see
498] CONTRACT VERBS. 115
494, Synopsis of ripdw, φιλέω, δηλόω, and θηράω, Aunt,
in the Indicative of all voices.
Active.
Pres. τιμῶ φιλῶ δηλῶ θηρῶ
Impf. ἐτίμων ἐφίλουν ἐδήλουν ἐθήρων
Fut. τιμήσω φιλήσω δηλώσω θηράσω
Aor. ἐτίμησα ἐφίλησα ἐδήλωσα ἐθήρασα
Perf. τετίμηκα πεφίληκα δεδήλωκα τεθήραᾶκα
Phup. ἐτετϊμήκη ἐπεφιλήκη ἐδεδηλώκη ἐτεθηράκη
Μιρυμε.
Pres. τιμῶμαι φιλοῦμαι δηλοῦμαι θηρῶμαι
Impf. ἐτιμώμην ἐφιλούμην ἐδηλούμην ἐθηρώμην
Fut. Tipnropar φιλήσομαι δηλώσομαι θηράσομαι
Aor. ἐτὶμησάμην ἐφιλησάμην ἐδηλωσάμην ἐθηρᾶάσάμην
Perf. τετίμημαι πεφίλημαι δεδήλωμαι τεθήρᾶμαι
Plup. ἐτετιμήμην ἐπεφιλήμην ἐδεδηλώμην ἐτεθηράμην
Passive.
Pres, and Imp.: same as Middle.
Fut. τιἰρηθήσομαι φιληθήσομαι δηλωθήσομαι (θηρᾶθήσομαι)
Aor. ἐτιμήθην ἐφιλήθην ἐδηλώθην ἐθηράθην
Perf. and Plup.: same as Middle.
Fut. Perf. reripqoropa, πεφιλήσομαι δεδηλώσομαι (τεθηράσομαι)
495. 1. Dissyllabic verbs in ew contract only e¢ and eet. ‘Thus
πλέω, sail, has pres. πλέω, πλεῖς, πλεῖ, πλεῖτον, πλέομεν, πλεῖτε,
πλέουσι; imperf. ἔπλεον, ἔπλεις, ἔπλει, etc.; infin. πλεῖν; partic.
πλέων.
2. Δέω, bind, is the only exception, and is contracted in most
forins; as δοῦσι, δοῦμαι, δοῦνται, ἔδουν, partic. δῶν, δοῦν. Adw, want,
is contracted like πλέω.
496. N. A few verbs in aw have ἢ for ἃ in the contracted forms;
as διψάω, διψῶ, thirst, διψῆς, διψῇ, διψῆτε; imperf. ἐδίψων, ἐδίψης,
ἐδίψη ; infin. διψῆν. So ζάω, live, κνάω, scrape, πεινάω, hunger, σμάω,
smear, χράω, give oracles, with χράομαι, use, and ψάω, rub.
497. N. Ῥιγόω, shiver, has infinitive ῥιγῶν (with ῥιγοῦν), and
optative ῥιγῴην. “[pdu, sweat, has ἱδρῶσι, ἱδρῴη, ἱδρῶντι, εἰς.
Λούω, wash, sometimes drops v, and Adw is then inflected like
δηλόω; as ἔλου for ἔλους, λοῦμαι for λούομαι.
498. N. ‘Tbe third person singular of the inperfect active does
116 INFLECTION. [499
not take » movable in the contracted form; thus ἐφίλεε or ἐφίλεεν
gives ἐφίλει (never ἐφίλειν). See 58.
499. For (dew) ἂν and (dev) οὖν in the infinitive, see 39, 5.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI.
500. The pecnliar inflection of verbs in μὲ affects only the
present and second aorist systems, and in a few verbs the second
perfect system. Most second aorists and perfects here included do
not belong to presents in ju, but are irregular forms of verbs in w;
as ἔβην (second aorist of Baivw), ἔγνων (γιγνώσκω), ἐπτάμην (πέτο-
μαι), and τέθναμεν, τεθναίην, τεθνάναι (second perfect of θνησκω).
(See 798, 799, 803.)
501. Tenses thus inflected are called wt-forms. In other tenses
verbs in μὲ are inflected like verbs in w (see the synopses, 509).
No single verb exhibits all the possible pe-forms, and two of the
paradigms, τίθημι and δίδωμι, ave irregular and defective in the
second aorist active (see 802).
502. There are two classes of verbs in pe: —
(1) Those in mpc (from stems in a or ε) and wpe (from
Stems in 0), aS Forype (στα-), set, ri-Oy-ps (θε-), place, δίδω-μι
(80-), give.
(2) Those in νῦμι, which have the pe-form only in the
present and imperfect; these add νυ (after a vowel wv) to
the verb stem in these tenses, as Secx-vi-pe (Sex-), show,
ῥώ-ννδ-μι (pw-), strengthen. For poetic verbs in νήμὲ (with va
added to the stem), see 609 and 797, 2.
503. For a full enumeration of the p-forms, see 793-804.
504. Synopsis of ἵστημι, τίθημι, δίδωμι, and δείκνῦμι in the
Present and Second Aorist Systems.
ACTIVE.
Indic. Subj. Opt. Imper. Infin. Part.
ἵἴστημι ἱστῶ ἱσταίγν tory ἱστάναι = lors
“| torny
ἘΠ τίθημι τιθῶ τιθείην τίθει τιθέναι τιθείς
- ἐτίθην
& | δίδωμι διδῶ διδοίγν δίδουν διδόναι διδούς
ῷ ἐδίδουν
ἣν δείκνυμι δεικνύω δεικνύοιμι δείκν᾽ δεικνύναι δεικνύς
ἐδείκνυν
606] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI. 117
Indic. Subj. Opt. Imper. Inyin. Part.
ἔστην στῶ σταίην στῆθι στῆναι στὰς
. 1 ἔθετον θῶ θείην θές θεῖναι θείς
5 | dual (506)
= ®orov δῶ δοίην δός δοῦναι δούς
dual (506)
ἔδυν (505) δύω δῦθι δῦναι δύς
Passive axD ΜΙΡΡῚΕ,
ἵσταμαι ἱστῶμαι ἱσταίμην ἵστασο ἵστασθαι ἱστάμενος
| ἴστάμην
§ | τίθεμαι τιθῶμαι τιθείμην τίθεσο τίθεσθαι τιθέμενος
a} ἐτιθέμην
& | δίδομαι διδῶμαι διδοίμην δίδοσο δίδοσθαι διδόμενος
ᾧ 1 ἐδιδόμην
E | δείκνυμαι δεικνύωμαι δεικννοίμην δείκνυσο δείκνυσθαι δεικνύμενος
ἐδεικνύμην
S [ἐπριάμην πρίωμαι πριαίμην πρίω πρίασθαι πριάμενος
= | ϑέμην θῶμαι θείμην θοῦ θέσθαι θέμενος
ὃ ἐδόμην δῶμαι δοίμην Sod δόσϑαι δόμενος
οι
505. As ἴστημι wants the second aorist middle, ἐπριάμην, 1
bought (from a stem πρια- with no present), is added here and in
the iuflection. As δεώκνῦμε wants the second aorist (502, 2), ἔδῦν,
1 entered (froin δύω, formed as if from δῦ-μι), is added. No second
aorist middle in vsnyv occurs, except in scattered poetic forms (see
λύω, πνέω, σεύω, and xéw, in the Catalogue).
506. Inriection of torn, τίθημι, δίδωμι, and δείκνυμι in
the Present and Second Aorist Systems; with ἔδυν and
ἐπριάμην (505).
ACTIVE,
Present Indicative.
Ι. ἵστημι τίθημι δίδωμι δείκνῦμι
Sing. {2 ἵστης τίθης δίδως δείκνυς
8. ἵστησι τίθησι δίδωσι δείκνυσι
Dual { 2. ἵἴστατον τίθετον δίδοτον δείκνυτον
8, ἵστατον τίθετον δίδοτον δείκνντον
1, trrapey τίθεμεν δίδομεν δείκνυμεν
Plur. Ϊ 2. ἵστατε τίθετε δίδοτε δείκνντε
8. ἱστάσι τιθέασι διδόᾶσι δεικνύασι
118
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
Dual
Plur,
Sing.
Dual
re_
Ro St Aen es
oc“
_
oo we
ἵστην
ἵστης
ἵστη
ἵστατον
ἱστάτην
ἵσταμεν
ἵστατε
ἵστασαν
ἱστώ
ἱστής
ἱστῇ
ἱστῆτον
ἱστήῆτον
ἱστῶμεν
ἱστῆτε
ἱστῶσι
ἱσταίην
ἱσταίης
ἱσταίη
ἱσταίητον
ἱσταιήτην
ι
ἱσταίημεν
ἱσταίητε
ἱσταίησαν
INFLECTION,
Imperfect.
ἐτίθην ἐδίδουν
ἐτίθεις ἐδίδους
ἐτίθει ἐδίδον
ἐτίθετον ἐδίδοτον
ἐτιθέτην ἐδιδότην
ἐτίθεμεν ἐδίδομεν
ἐτίθετε ἐδίδοτε
ἐτίϑεσαν ἐδίδοσαν
Present Subjunctive.
τιθώ διδῶ
τιθῇς διδῴς
τιθῇ διδῷ
τιθῆτον διδῶτον
τιθῆτον διδώτον
τιθῶμεν διδώμεν
τιθῆτε διδῶτε
τιθώσι διδώσι
Present Optative.
τιθείην
τιθείης
τιθείη
τιθείητον
τιθειήτην
τιθείημεν
τιθείητε
τιθείησαν
διδοίην
διδο ίης
διδοίη
διδοίητον
διδοιήτην
διδοίημεν
διδοίητε
διδοίησαν
Commonly thus contracted : —
ἱσταῖτον
ἱσταίτην
ἱσταῖμεν
ἱσταῖτε
ἱσταῖεν
ἵστη
ἱστάτω
ἵστατον
ἱστάτων
τιθεῖτον
τιθείτην
τιθεῖμεν
τιθεῖτε
τιθεῖεν
διδοῖτον
διδοίτην
διδοῖμεν
διδοῖτε
διδοῖεν
Present Imperative.
τίθει
τιθέτω
τίθετον
τιθέτων
δίδου
διδότω
δίδοτον
διδότων
[506
ἐδείκνῦν
ἐδείκνυς
ἐδείκνυ
ἐδείκνυτον
ἐδεικνύτην
ἐδείκνυμεν
ἐδείκνντε
ἐδείκνυσαν
δεικνύω
δεικνύῃς
δεικνύῃ
δεικνύητον
δεικνύητον
δεικνύωμεν
δεικνύητε
δεικνύωσὶι
δεικνύοιμι
δεικνύοις
δεικνύοι
δεικνύοιτον
δεικννοίτην
δεικνύοιμεν
δεικνύοιτε
δεικνύοιεν
δείκνυ
δεικνύτω
δείκνυτον
δεικνύτων
Sing. |
Dual {
Plur. Ϊ :
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI.
{orare τίθετε δίδοτε
ἱστάντων or τιθέντων or διδόντων or
ἱστάτωσαν τιθέτωσαν διδότωσαν
Present Injinitive.
ἱστάναι τιθέναι διδόναι
Present Participle (385).
ἱστᾶς τιθείς διδούς
Second Aorist Indicative (802).
ἔστην —
rf στῆς ------- --------
ἴστη
ἔστητον ἔθετον ἔδοτον
ἐστήτην ἐθέτην ἐδότην
ἔστημεν ἔϑεμεν ἔδομεν
ἴστητε Bere ἔδοτε
ἔστησαν ἔθεσαν ἔδοσαν
Second Aorist Subjunctive.
ore 65 δώ
στῆς θῇς δῷς
στῇ θῇ δῷ
στήῆτον Onrov δῶτον
στῆτον θῆτον δώτον
στώμεν θῶμεν δώμεν
στῆτε Oxre Sure
στῶσι θῶσι δώσι
Second Aortst Optative.
σταίην θείην δοίην
σταίης ϑείης δοίης
σταίη θείη δοίη
σταίητον ϑείητον δοίητον
σταιήτην θειήτην δοιήτην
σταίημεν θείημεν δοίημεν
σταίητε θείητε δοίητε
σταίησαν θείησαν δοίησαν
119
δείκνυτε
δεικνύντων ΟΥ
ϑδεικνύτωσαν
δεικνύναι
δεικνύς
ἔδυν
ἔδυς
ἔδυ
ἔδυτον
ἐδύτην
ἔδυμεν
ἔδυτε
ἔδυσαν
δύω
Suys
δύῃ
δύητον
δύητον
δύωμεν
Sunre
δύωσι
(See 744)
1
Sing. [:
3.
2.
Dual τ
1
Plur. {2
8.
Ὶ-
Sing. [χ
(3
2
Dual 2
1.
Plur, {2
3.
INFLECTION.
Commonly thus contracted : —
σταῖτον θεῖτον δοῖτον
σταίτην θείτην δοίτην
σταῖμεν θεῖμεν δοῖμεν
σταῖτε θεῖτε δοῖτε
σταῖεν θεῖεν δοῖεν
Second Aorist Inperative.
στῆθι θές. δός
στήτω θέτω δότω
στῆτον θέτον δότον
στήτων θέτων δότων
στῆτε θέτε δότε
στάντων or θέντων or δόντων or
στήτωσαν θέτωσαν δότωσαν
Second Aorist Infinitive.
στῆναι ϑεῖναι δοῦναν
Second Aorist Participle (335).
ords θείς Sous
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE.
Present Indicative.
ἵσταμαι τίθεμαι δίδομαι
ἵστασαι τίθεσαι δίδοσαι
ἵσταται τίθεται δίδοται
ἵστασϑον τίθεσθον δίδοσθον
ἴστασϑον τίθεσθον δίδοσϑον
ἱστάμεθα τιθέμεθα διδόμεθα
ἴστασϑε τίθεσθε δίδοσθε
ἵστανται τίϑενται δίδονται
Imperfect.
ἱστάμην ἐτιθέμην ἐδιδόμην
ἵστασο ἐτίθεσ ο ἐδίδοσο
ἵστατο ἐτίθετο ἐδίδοτο
ἵστασθον ἐτίθεσθον ἐδίδοσϑον
ἱστάσθην ἐτιθέσθην ἐδιδόσϑην
ἰστάμεϑα ἐτιθέμεθα ἐδιδόμεθα
ἵστασϑε ἐτίθεσϑε ἐδίδοσθε
ἵσταντο ἐτίθεντο ἐδίδοντο
[506
δῦθι
δύτω
δύτον
δύτων
Sure
δύντων or
δύτωσαν
δύναι
δύς
δείκνυμαι
δείκνυσαι
δείκνυται
δείκνυσϑον
δείκννσϑον
δεικνύμεθα
δείκννυσθε
δείκνυνται
ἑδεικνύμην
ἐδείκνυσο
ἐδείκνυτο
ἐδείκνυσθον
ἐδεικνύσϑην
ἐδεικνύμεθα
ἐδείκνυσϑε
ἐδείκνυντο
606) CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI. 121
Present Subjunctive.
1. ἱστώμαι τιθώμαι διδῶμαν δεικνύωμαι
Sing. [: ἱστῇ τιθῇ διδῷ δεικνύῃ
3. ἴστηται τιθῆται διδῶται δεικνύηται
Dual {2 ἱστῆσθον τιθῆσθον. διδῶσθον δεικνύησϑον
8. ἰστῆσϑον τιθήσθον διδῶσθον δεικνύησθον
1. ἱστώμεϑα τιθώμεθα διδώμεϑα δεικνυώμεθα
Plur, Ϊ 2. ἱστῆσθε τιθῆσθε διδώσθε δεικνύησθε
8. ἱστώνται τιθῶνται διδώνται δεικνύωνται
Present Optative.
1. ἱσταίμην τιθείμην διδοίμην δεικννοίμην
Sing 2, ἱσταῖο τιθεῖο διδοῖο δεικνύοιο
8, ἱσταῖτο τιθεῖτο διδοῖτο δεικνύοιτο
Dual { 2. ἱσταῖσθον τιθεῖσθον διδοῖσθον δεικνύοισθον
8, ἱσταίσθην τιθείσϑην διδοίσϑην δεικννοίσθην
1. ἱσταίμεθα τιθείμεθα διδοίμεθα δεικννοίμεθα
Plur. { 2, ἱσταῖσθε τιθεῖσϑε διδοῖσθε δεικνύοισθε
8. ἱσταῖντο τιθεῖντο διδοῖντο δεικνύοιντο
Present Imperative.
Sing. 2. terrace τίθεσο δίδοσο δείκνυσο
ἱστάσθω τιθέσθω διδόσθω δεικνύσθω
Dual { 2. ἴστασθον τίθεσϑον δίδοσθον δείκνυσϑον
3. ἰστάσθων τιθέσθων διδόσθων δεικνύσθων
2. ἵἴστασθε τίθεσϑε δίδοσϑε δείκνυσθε
Plur [5 ἱστάσθων or τιθέσθων or διδόσθων Or δεικνύσθων or
ἱστάσθωσαν τιθέσθωσαν διδόσθωσαν δεικνύσθωσαν
Present Infinitive.
ἵστασθαι τίθεσθαι δίδοσθαι δείκνυσϑαι
Present Participle (301).
ἱστάμενος τιθέμενος διδόμενος δεικνύμενος
Second Aorist Middle Indicative (505),
1, ἐπριάμην ἐθέμην ἐδόμην
Sing. { 2. ἐπρίω ἔθον ἔδου
8. ἐπρίατο ἔϑετο ἔδοτο
Dual { ἐπρίασϑον ἔθεσθον ἵἴ ϑόσθον
8, ἐπριάσθην ἐθέσϑην ἐδόσθην
Sing. {
Dual {
Plur. Ϊ
Sing. {
Dual {
INFLECTION.
ἐπριάμεθα ἐθέμεθα ἐδόμεϑα
ἐπρίασθε ἔθεσθε ἔδοσθε
ἐπρίαντο ἔθεντο ἔδοντο
Second Aorist Middle Subjunctive.
πρίωμαι θώμαι δώμαι
πρίῃ θῇ δῷ
πρίηται θῆται δῶται
πρίησθον θῆσθον δῶσθον
πρίησθον θῆσθον δῶσθον
πριώμεθα θώμεθα δώμεθα
πρίησθϑε θῆσθε δῶσθε
πρίωνται θώνται δῶνται
Second Aorist Middle Optative.
πριαίμην θείμην δοίμην
πρίαιο θεῖο δοῖο
πρίαιτο θεῖτο δοῖτο
πρίαισϑον ϑεῖσϑον δοῖσθον
πριαίσθην θείσθην δοίσθην
πριαίμεθα θείμεθα δοίμεθα
πρίαισθε θεῖσθε δοῖσθε
πρίαιντο θεῖντο δοῖντο
Second Aorist Middle Imperative.
πρίω Gov S00
πριάσθω θέσθω δόσθω
πρίασθον θέσθον δόσθον
πριάσθων θέσθων δόσθων
πρίασθε θέσθε δοόσθε
πριάσθων or θέσθων or δόσθων οΥ
πριάσθωσαν θέσθωσαν δόσθωσαν
Second Aorist Afiddle Infinitive.
πρίασθαι θέσθαι δόσθαι
Second Aorist Middle Participle (301).
πριάμενος θέμενος ϑόμενος
[506
609)
CONJUGATION OF VERBS LN ΜΙ.
123
507. Ἴστημι and a few other verbs have a second perfect
and pluperfect of the μονα.
These are never used in the
singular of the indieative, where the first perfect and plu
perfect are the regular forms.
508, These tenses of form are thus inflected :—
Sxconvp PERFECT.
1 ——~ ἑστώ ἑσταίην
Sing. 2 ——~ ἑστῆς ἑσταίης ἔσταθι
3. ἑστῇ ἑσταίη ἑστάτω
(2. ἕστατον ἑστῆτον ἑσταίητον ἔστατον
Dual or -atrov
i = ν᾽ "
3. ἔστατον ἑστῆτον ἐἑσταιήτην ἑστάτων
or -αἰτὴν
fl. ἕσταμεν ἑστῶμεν ἑσταίημεν
Or -atpev
Plur 2. ἔστατε ἑστὴτε ἑσταίητε ἔστατε
4 ΟΥ -aire
8. ἑστᾶσι ἑστῶσι ἑσταίησαν ἑστάντων ΟΥ̓
or -atev ἑστάτωσαν
Infinitive. ἑστάναι Participle. ἑστώς (942)
Seconn PLupERFECT.
Dual. ferarov, ἑστάτην
Plur. ἕσταμεν, orate, ἔστασαν
For an enumeration of these forms, see 804.
509. Fut Synorsis of the Indicative of ἵστημι, τίθημι,
δίδωμι, and δείκνῦμι, in al] the voices.
Pres.
Iinperf.
Fut.
1 Aor.
2 Aor.
ἴστημι,
set
ἴστην
στήσω
ἔστησα, set
ἔστην, stvod
ACTIVE.
τίθημι,
place
ἐτίθην
θήσω
ἔθηκα
ἔθετον etc.
in dual and plur.
δίδωμι,
give
ἐδίδουν
δώσω
ἔδωκα
ἔδοτον etc.
in dual and plur.
δείκνυμι,
show
ἐδείκνῦν
δείξω
ἔδειξα
124 INFLECTION. [510
1Perf. ἕστηκα τέθηκα δέδωκα
2Perf. ἕστατον ete. δέδειχα
in dual and plur.,
stand (508)
1Plupf. εἱστήκη ἐτεθήκη ἐδεδώκη
or ἑστήκη
2Plupf. ἕστατον etc. , ἐδεδείχη
in dual Δα plur.,
stood (508)
Fut. Perf. ἑστήξω, shall
stand (705)
MivpLe.
Pres. ἵσταμαι, stand τίϑεμαι δίδομαι (simple δείκνυμαι
(trans.) only in pass.) (trans.)
Impf. ἱστάμην ἐτιθέμην ἐδιδόμην ἐδεικνύμην
Fut. στήσομαι θήσομαι -δώσομαι -δείξομαι
lAor, ἐστησάμην ἐθηκάμην (not ἐδειξάμην
(trans.) Attic)
2 Aor. ἐθέμην -ἐδόμην
Perf. ἕσταμαι (pass.) τέθειμαι δέδομαι δέδειγμαι
Plupf. Q) (?) ἐδεδόμην ἐδεδείγμην
Passive.
Present, Imperfect, Perfect, Pluperfect: as in Middle.
Aor. ἐστάθην ἐτέθην ἐδόθην ἐδείχθην
Fut. σταθήσομαι τεθήσομαι δοθήσομαι δειχϑήσομαι
Fut. Perf. ἑστήξομαι, (δεδείξομαι,
shall stand late)
AUGMENT.
510. In the secondary tenses of the indicative, the
verb receives an augment (i.e. increase) at the begin-
ning, which marks these as past tenses.
511. Augment 15 of two kinds: —
1. Syllabie augment, which prefixes e to verbs be-
ginning with a consonant; as Ad, imperfect éAvoy;
λείπω, second aorist ἔ-λιπον.
2. Temporal augment, which lengthens the first syl-
lable of verbs beginning with a vowel or diphthongs; as
ἄγω, lead, imperf. ἦγον ; οἰκέω, οἰκῶ, dwell, aor. ᾧκησα.
519) AUGMENT. 125
512. The augment is confined strictly to the indicative,
never appearing in the other moods or the purticiple, even
when any of these denote past time.
Imperrect axp Aorist INDICATIVE,
513. The imperfect and aorist indicative of verbs
beginning with a consonant have the syllabic augment
e Lg.
Avw, ἔλνον, ἔλῦσα, eXvopyy, ἐλυσάμην, ἐλύθην; γράφω, write,
ἔγραφον, ἔγραψα, ἐγράφην;; ῥΐπτω, throw, ἔρρίπτον, ἐρρίφην.
For p doubled after the syllabic augment, see 69.
514. In Homer any liquid (especially A) may be doubled after
the augment ε; as ἔλλαχον for ἔλαχον, ἔμμαθε for ἔμαθε. So some
times o; as ἐσσείοντο from σείω.
515. The imperfect and aorist indicative of verbs be-
ginning with a short vowel have the temporal augment,
which lengthens the initial vowel; ἅ and e becoming ἢ»
and % o, 3 becoming ὦ ipw,v. Lg.
"Ayu, lead, ἦγον, ἤχθην; ἐλαύνω, drive, ἤλαυνον; ἱκετεύω, implore,
ἱκέτευον, ἱκέτευσα ; ὀνειδίζω, reproach, ὠνείδιζον; tBpilw, insult, βρέ:
σθην; ἀκολουθέω, accompany, ἠκολούθησα; ὀρθόω, erect, ὠρθωσα.
516. A long initial vowel is not changed, except that ἃ gener-
ally becomes y; as ἀθλέω, struggle, 7OAnoa. But both ἃ and ἡ are
found in ἀνάλίσκω and ἀνάλόω, and diw (poetic), hear, has diov.
517. Βούλομαι, wish, δύναμαι, be able, and μέλλω, intend, often
have ἡ for ε in the augment, especially in later Attic; as ἐβουλόμην
or ἠβουλόμην, ἐβουλήθην or ἠβουλήθην; ἐδυνάμην or ἠδυνάμην,
ἐδυνήθην or ἠδυνήθην ; ἔμελλον or ἤμελλον.
518. A diphthong takes the temporal augment on its
first vowel, az or a becoming p. Fg:
Airéw, ask, ἥτησα; εἰκάζω, guess, ἤκασα; οἰκέω, dwell, ᾧκησα;
αὐξάνω, increase, ηὔξησα, ηὐξήθην ; ἄδω, sing, δον.
519. Ov is never augmented. Ez and εὖ are often without
augment, especially in later Attic; but mss. and editors differ in
regard to many forms, as εἴκασα or ἤκασα (from εἰκάζω, liken),
εὗδον or ηὗδον (from εὔδω, sleep), εὑρέθην or ηὑρέθην (from εὑρίσκω,
Jind), εὐξάμην or ηὐξάμην (from εὔχομαι, pray). Editions vary also
in the augment of αὐαίνω, dry, and of some verbs begiuning with
οι, a8 οἰἀὰκοστροφέω, Steer.
126 INFLECTION. (520
REDUPLICATION.
520. The perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect, in
all the moods aud in the participle, have a reduplica-
tion, which is the mark of completed action.
Pervecr axp Futurs Perrecr,
521. Verbs beginning with a single consonant (ex-
cept p) are reduplivated in the perfect and future per-
fect by pretixing that consonant followed by e fy.
Adu, λέλυκα, λέλυμαι, λειλυκέναι, λειλυκώς, λελυμένος, AC ATCO
μαι; λεύτω, λέλοιπα, λέλειμμαι, λελείψομαι. So θύω, sacrifice, τέθυκα;
duivw (fav), show, πέφασμαι, πε-φάνθαι; yaivw, gape, κέχηνα.
For the pluperfect, see 527.
522, N. (a) Five verbs have εἰ in the perfect instead of the
reduplication : —
λαγχάνω (Aax~), obtain by lot, εἴληχα, εἴληγμαι;
λαμβάνω (Aaf-), take, εἴληφα, εἴλημμαι (poet. A€Anppat) ;
λέγω, collect, in composition, ~e/Avya, -εἰλεγμαι with -λέλεγμαι;
διαλέγομαι, discuss, has δοείλεγμαι;
μείρομαι (μερ-), obtain part, εἵμαρται, it is fated ;
from stem (fe-) εἴρηκα, have said, εἴρημαι, fut. pf. εἰρήσομαι
(see εἶπον).
(b) Au irregular reduplication appears in Womeric δείδοικα and
δείδια, from δείδω, fear, aud δείδεγμαι (for δέδεγμαι), greet, from
a stem dex- (sve δείκνῦμι).
523. In verbs beginning with tee consonants (except
a mute and a liquid), with a double consonant (ζ, & +),
or with p, the reduplication is represented by a simple
e, having the same form as the syllabic augment. Ly.
Στέλλω, send, ἔσταλκα; ζητέω, seek, ἐζήτηκα ; ψεύδω, cheat, ἔψευ-
σμαι, ἐψευσμένος ; ῥίπτω. throw, ἔρριμμαι, ἐρρίφθαι (69).
δ24. 1. Most verbs beginning with a mute and a liguid have
the full reduplication ; as γράφω, write, γέγραφα, γέγραμμαι, γεγρά-
ῴθαι, γεγραμμένος.
2. But those beginning with yy, and occasionally ἃ few in BA
or yA, have εἰ a8 γυωρίζω, recagnize, perf. ἐγνώρικο, ; γιγνώσκω
(yvo-), know, ἔγνωκα. See βλαστάνω aud γλύφω.
525. N. Μιμνήσκω (pva-), remind, las μέμνημαι (memini),
remember, and κτάομαι, acquire, has both κέκτημαι and ἔκτημαι,
possess. See also Homeric perfect passive of ῥίπτω and ῥυπόω.
651] ATTIC REDUPLICATION. 127
526, Verbs beginning with a short vowel lengthen
the vowel, and those beginning with a diphthong
lengthen its first vowel, in all forms of the perfect and
future perfect, the reduplication thus having the form
of the temporal augment. dy.
"Ayu, lead, Aya, ἦγμαι, ἠγμένος ; ἀκολουθέω, Sollow, ἠκολούθηκα,
ἠκολουθηκέγαι; ; ὀρθόω, erect, ὥρθωμαι; ὁρίζω, hound, ὥρικα, ὡρισμαι;
ἀτϊμόω, dishonar, ἠτίμωκα, ἠτίμωμαι, Lut. pl. ἡτιμώσομαι. Αἱρέω,
take, ἢ Ὥρηκα, ρημαι, ἢρήσομαι; εἰκάζω, liken, ἤκασμαι; εὑρίσκω, fini,
ηὕρηκα, ηὔρημαι (OY εὕρηκα, εὕρημαι, 519).
Long a may become ἡ (see 010); as in ἀναλίσκω, pf. ἀνήλωκα
or ἀνάλωκα.
PLUPERFECT.
527. When the reduplicated perfect begins with a
consonant, the pluperfect prefixes the syllabic augment ε
to the reduplication. In other cases the pluperfect keeps
the reduplication of the perfect without change. Eg.
Adu, λέλυκα, ἐλελύκη, λέλυμαι, ἐλελύμην; στέλλω, ἔσταλκα,
ἐστάλκη, ἔσταλμαι, ἐστάλμην; λαμβάνω, εἴληφα, εἰλήφη; ἀγγέλλω,
ἤγγελκα, ἠγγέλκη, ἤγγελμαι, ἠγγέλμην; αἱρέω, ἥρηκα, ἠρήκη; εὑρέ:
σκω, ηὕρηκα, ηὑρήκη. ηὑρήμην, (or ebp-).
528, N. Fram ἴστημι (στα-), set, we lave both εἱστήκη (older
form) and éoryxy (through perf. ¢oryxa); and from pert. ἔοικα,
resemble, ἐῴκη.
ATTIC REDUPLICATION,.
529. Some verbs beginning with a, ες or 0, followed
by a single consonant, reduplicate the perfect and phi-
perfect by prefixing their first two letters, and length-
ening the following vowel as in the temporal augment.
This is called Attic reduplication. 1.0.
"Apow, plough, ἀρ-ήρομαι; ἐμέω, vomit, ἐμήμεκα; ἐλέγχω, prove,
eAyAcypat; ἐλαύνω (ἐλα-). drive, ἐλήλακα, ἐλήλαμαι; ἀκούω, hear,
ἀκήκοα. For the pluperfect, see 533.
530. N. ‘The Auic reduplication (so called by the Greek gram-
marians) is not peculiarly Attic, aud is found in Homer.
531. N. Other verbs which have the Attic reduplication are
ἀγείρω, ἀλείφω, ἀλέω, ἐγείρω. ἐρείδω, ἔρχομαι, ἐσθίω, SAAT UL, ὄμνυμι,
ὀρύσσω, φέρω. See also, for onic or portic forms, αἱρέω, ἀλάομαι,
ἀλυκτέω, ἀραρίσκω, ἐρείπω, ἔχω, ἡμύω, (ddv-) ὀδώδυσμαι, fw, ὁράω
(6rwra), ὀρίγω, ὄρνῖ με (ὁρ:).-
128 INFLECTION. [532
532. N. ᾿Εγείρω (éyep-), rouse, has 2 perf. ἐγρ-ἤγορα (for éy-ryop-a,
643), but perf. mid. ἐγ-ήγερμαι.
533. By strict Attic usage, the pluperfect takes a temporal
Buginent in addition to the Attic reduplication. Thus, ἀκούω,
hear, ἀκήκοα, plup. ἠκηκόη: 80 ἀπ-ωλώλει (Of ἀπ-όλλῦμι, ἀπ-όλωλα),
ὠμωμόκει (οὗ ὄμνῦμι, ὀμώμοκα), and δι-ωρώρυκτο (of διορύσσω,
δι-ορώρυγμαι) occur in Attic prose. See also Homeric pluperfects
of ἐλαύνω and ἐρείδω.
But the mss. and the editions of Attic authors often omit the
additional augment, as in ἐλ-ηλέγμην (487, 2).
REDPUPLICATED AORISTS.
534. N. The second aorist active and middle in all the moods
and the participle sometimes has a reduplication in Homer; as
πέφραδον from φράζω, tell; πέπιθον froin πείθω {πιθ.), persuade ;
τεταρπόμην (646) from τέρπω, delight; κεκλόμην aud κεκλόμενος
(650) from κέλομαι, command; ἥραρον from dpapioxw (dp-), join
(531); ὥρορον from ὄρνῦμι (ép-), rouse; πεπαλών (partic.) from
πάλλω (rar-), shake; κεκάμω (subj.) from κάμνω (καμ-), 80 λελάχω
from λαγχάνω ; πεφιδέσθαι, inf. from φείδομαι (φιδ.), spare, so
λελαθέσθαι, λελαβέσθαι. In the indicative a syllabic augment
may be vrefixed to the reduplicaiion; as éxexAduyy, ἔπεφνον (from
φεν-), ἐπέφραδον.
535. N. The second aorist οἵ ἄγω, lead, has a kind of Attic
reduplication (529), which adds the temporal augment in the
indicative. Thus ἤγαγον (dy-ay-), subj. ἀγάγω, opt. ἀγάγοιμι,
inf. ἀγαγεῖν, part. ἀγαγών; mid. ἠγαγόμην, ἀγάγωμαι, etc., —all in
Attic prose. See also the aorists ἤνεγκα and yveyxoy (from stem
€vex-, ἐν-ενεκ-, ἐνεγκ-) of φέρω, the Homeric ἄλαλκον (for ἀλ-αλεκ-ον)
of ἀλέξω, ward aff, and ἐνένϊῖπον or ἠνέπ-αποον of ἐνύττω (ἐνιπ-), chide.
See also ἐρύκω, ἡρύκ-ακ-ον.
REDUPLICATED PRESENTS.
536. A few verbs reduplicate the present by prefixing the
initial consonant with ¢; as γιγνώσκω (yvo-), know, τίθημι (Oe),
put, yiryvopat (for ye-yev-ouar), become.
For these see 651 and 632, with 794, 2.
E aS AUGMENT OR REDUPLICATION BEFORE A VOWEL,
537. 1. Some verbs beginning with a vowel take the
syllabic augment, as if they began with a consonant. These
verbs also have a simple ε for the reduplication. When
another ¢ follows, ce is contracted into «. Εἰ.
543] AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION, 129
Ὠθέω (86-), push, € ἔωσα, ἔωσμαι, ἐώσθην; ἁλίσκομαι, be captured,
ἑάλωκα, 2 aor. éddwy (or ἥλων); ἄγνυμι (dy-), break, ἔαξα, 2 pf.
éaya; épdw, do, Tonic, 2 pf. dopya; ὠνέομαι, buy, ἐωνούμην, ete. ;
ἐθίζω, accustom, εἴθισα, εἴθικα (from €€6-) ; daw, permit, dca, aKa;
ἔχω, have, εἶχον (from ἐξέχον).
2. These verbs sare, further, ἐλίσσω, ἕλκω, Era, ἐργάζομαι, & ἕρπω
or ἑρπύζω, ἑστιάω, ἴημι (δ), with the aorists εἶδον and εἷλον (aipéw) ;
the perfects εἴωθα (with irregular a), Ionic ἔωθα (46-), and ἔοικα
(ix-, etx-), and plpf. εἰστήκη (for ἐ-έστ-) of ἴστημι. See also Tonic
and poetic forms under dvddvw, ἅπτω, εἴδομαι, εἴλω, εἶπον, εἴρω,
ἔλπω, ἐννῦμι, Zw, and ἔζομαι.
538. N. ‘Opdw, see, aud ἀν-οἴγω, open, generally take the tem-
poral augment after εἰ as ἑώρων, ἑώρᾶκα (or ἑόρᾶκα), ἑώρᾶμαι
(with the aspirate retained); dv-€wyov, ἀν-έῳξα (rarely ἤνοιγον,
ἤνοιξα, 544). Homer has ἑήνδανον from ἀνδάνω, please; ἐῳνοχόει
imp. of οἰνοχοέω, pour wine; and 2 plpf. ἐώλπει and éwpye from
ἔλπω and ἔρδω. ‘Eopralw, keep holiday (Hat. dpraf{w), has Attic
imp. ἑώρταζον.
8390. N. ‘This form is explained on the supposition that these verbs
originally began with the consonant ¢ or ¢, which was afterwards
dropped. Thus εἶδον, saw, is for ἐριδον (ef. Latin vid-i); ἔοργα is for
Fefopya, from stem fepy-, cf. Eng. work (German Werk). So ἕρπω,
creep, is for o-eprw (cf. Latin serpo), with imperf. é-ceproy, ἐ-ἑρπον,
sania (see 86); and ἔχω, have, is for cexw, whence imp. é-cexov, é-€xor,
εἶχον.
AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION OF COMPOUND VERBS.
540. In compound verbs (882, 1) the augment or re-
duplication follows the preposition. Prepositions (except
περί and πρό) here drop a final vowel before ε. Eg.
Προσ-γράφω, προσ-ἔγραφον, προσ-γέγραφα ; εἰσ-άγω, εἰσ-ῆγον
(188, 1); ἐκ- βάλλω, ἐξ-έβαλλον (63); συλ-λέγω, συν-έλεγον; συμ-
πλέκω, συν-έπλεκον (78, 1); συγ-χέω, συν-έχεον, συγ-κέχυκα: συ-
σκενάζω, συν-εσκεύαζον (81); ἀπο-βάλλω, ἀπ-έβαλλον; ἀνα-βαίνω,
ἀν-ἐβη;--- δι περι-έβαλλον aud προ-έλεγον.
541. Ν. Πρό may be contracted with the augment; as προῦ-
Aeyov and προῦ βαϊνὸν, for προέλεγον and προέβαινον.
δ42. N. Ἔκ in composition becomes ἐξ before ¢; and ἐν and
σύν resume their proper forms if they have been changed. See
exainples in 540.
543, N. Some denominative verbs (861), derived from nouns
or adjectives compounded with prepositions, are augmented or
130 ἹΚΕΙΟΤΙΟΝ, (644
reduplicated after the preposition, like compound verbs; as tro
πτεύω (from ὕποπτος), suspect, ὑπώπτευον, as if the verb were from
ὑπό and ὀπτεύω; ἀπολογέομαι, defend one’s self, ἀπ- “ἐλογησάμην:; see
also ἐκκλησιάζω. Παρανομέω, transyress law, παρηνόμουν, etc., is
very irregular. Κατηγορέω (from κατήγορος), accuse, has κατηγό-
povy (not éxarnydpouv). See διαιτάω aud διάκονέω in the Catalogue
of Verbs.
Such verbs are called indirect compounds (882, 2
544, N. A few verbs take the augment before the preposition,
and others have both augments; as καθέζομαι, sit, ἐκαθέζετο; καθίζω,
ἐκάθιζον ; καθεύδω, sleep, ἐκάθευδον and καθηῦδον (epic καθεῦδον) ;
ἀνέχω, ἠνειχόμην, ἠνεσχόμην (or ἠνσχόμην); ἀφίημι, ἀφίην or ἠφΐην.
See also ἀμφιέννῦμι, ἀμφιγνοίω, ἀμπίσχομαι, ἐνοχλέω, anil ἀμφισ-
βητέω, dispute, imps. ἠμφισβήτουν and ἠμφεσβήτουν (as if the
last part were -oByrew).
545. 1. Indirect compounds of δυσ-, ill, and occasionally
those of εὖ, well, are augmented or reduplicated after the ad-
verb, if the following part begins with a short vowel. Evy.
Δυσαρεστέω, be displeased, δυσηρέστουν ; εὐεργετέω, do good,
εὐηργέτουν or εὐεργέτουν.
2. In other cases, compounds of δυσ- have the augment or
reduplication at the beginning, as δυστυχέω (from δυστυχής,
unfortunate), ἐδυστύχουν, δεδυστύχηκα;; and those of εὖ generally
omit the augment. ;
546. Other indirect. compounds are augimented or redu-
plicated at the beginning; as οἰκοδομέω, build (frum οἰκο-
δόμος, house-builder), ὠκοδόμουν, wxoddunoa, wxoddpyta. See,
however, ὁδοποιέω.
OMISSION OF AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION.
547. Homer and the lyric poets often omit both the syllabic
and the temporal augment; as ὁμίλεον, ἔχον, δῶκε (for ὡμίλουν,
εἶχον, ἔδωκε).
ὅ48. Herodotus often omits the temporal augment of the
imperfect and aorist, and the syllabic augment of the pluperfect.
He never adds the temporal augment to the Attic reduplication
in the pluperfect (533). He always omits the augment in the
iterative forins in σκὸν and σκομην; as λάβεσκον, ἔχεσκον (778).
549. The Attic tragedians sometimes ont the augment in
(στὶς) choral passages, seldom in the dialogue.
668] ENDINGS. 131
550. The reduplication is very rarely omitted. But Homer has
δέχαται, from δέχομαι, for δεδέχαται, receive, and a few other cases.
Herodotus occasionally fails to lengthen the initial vowel in the per-
fect; as in καταρρώδηκας (for κατ-ηρρ-).
ENDINGS.
501. The verb is inflected by adding certain endings to
the different tense stems. hose which mark the persons
in the finite muods are called persoual endings. There is
one class of endings for the active voice, and another for
the middle and passive; but the passive aorists have the
active endings.
There is also one set of endings in each class for primary
tenses, and one for secondary tenses.
552. Lhe personal endings of the indicative, subjunctive,
and optative, which are most distinctly preserved in verbs
in μὲ and other primitive forms, are as follows: —
ACTIVE, | Mippis ΝΡ Passive.
Primar: 5 dar Primar. Secondary
Tne tema ρος Tenses.
Sing. 1. μι ν I μαι μην
2. ς (σι), (θα) ς σαι σο
9, σι (τι) -- ται το
Yuat 2. τον τον { σθον (Bov) σθον (Cov)
3. τον τὴν | σθον (Gov) σθην (θην)
Plur. 1. μεν (pes) μὲν (pes) | μεθα μεθα
2. τε τε σθε (θε) σθε (Be)
3. vot (ντι), aoe v, σαν vrat ντο
558. Lhe personal endings of the imperative are as fol
lows :—
ACTIVE. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE.
Sing. Dual. Plur. Sing. Dual. Plur.
2. & τον τε σο σθον (θον) σθε(θε) -
8. τὼ τῶν ντῶν or rwcav | σθω(θω) σθὼν (θων) σθὼν (θων)
or
σθωσαν (θωσαν)
132 INFLECTION. [554
554, The endings of the infinitive are as follows : —
ACTIVE: ἐν (contracted with preceding ¢ to ev),
vat, sometimes evar (probably for Fevas).
MIDDLE AND Passive: σθαι (primitive θαι).
555. For the formation of the participles and the verbals in
tos and reos, see 770-776.
REMARKS ON THE ENDINGS.
556. 1. Only verbs in μὲ have the primary endings μὲ and σι
in the indicative active. For μὲ in the optative, see 781. The
original σι of the second person singular is found only in the epic
ἐσ-σί, thou art (807, 1). @a (originally perfect ending) appears in
οἶσθα (for ota) from ofS (820) and in ἦσ-θα from εἰμί (806);
whence (σ)θα in many Homeric forms (780, 4; 787, 4), and rarely
in Attic (as ἔφη-σθα). In the third person singular tz is Doric,
as in τίθηττι for τίθη-σε: and it is preserved in Attic in ἐσ-τί, is.
2. A first person dual in μεθον is found three times in poetry:
περιδώμεθον, subj. of περιδίδωμι, 11. 23, 485; λελείμμεθον, from
λεύτω, 5. El. 950; δὁρμώμεθον, from ὁρμάω, S. Ph. 1079. Generally
the first person plural is used also for the dual.
3. In Homer τὸν and oGov are sometimes used for τὴν and σθὴν
in the third person dual of past tenses. This occurs rarely in the
Attic poets, who sometimes have τὴν for τὸν in the second person.
The latter is found occasionally even in prose.
4. In the first person plural pes is Doric. The poets often have
μέσθα for μεθα (777, 1).
5. In the third person plural vot always drops v (78,3) and the
preceding vowel is lengthened; as in λύουσε for λῦονσι. The more
primitive ντι is Doric; as φέροντι (Jatin ferunt) for pépovar.}
1 A comparison of the various forms of the present indicative of the
primitive verb be (whose original stem is as-, in Greek and Latin es-),
as it appears in Sanskrit, the older Greek, Latin, Old Slavic, and
Lithuanian (the most primitive modern language, still spoken on the
Baltic), will illustrate the Greek verbal endings.
SINGULAR.
Sanskrit. Older Greek. Latin. Old Slavic, Lithuanian.
1. as-ini ἐμ-μί (for ἐσ-μι) [e]s-um yes-m’ es-ni
asi ἐσ-σί es yesi esi
3. as-ti ἐσ-τί es-t yes-t’ es-ti
PLURAL.
1. 5-mas ἐσ-μέν (Dor. εἰμές) = [C]s-u-mus yes-mi es-me
2. s-tha ἐσ-τέ es-tis yes-te es-te
8. s-a-nti ἐ-ντί (Doric) [e]s-u-nt sult’ es-ti
659) TENSE STEMS AND FORMS OF INFLECTION. 133
6. @ seldom appears in the imperative, except in the second
aorist active of pi-forms (755), and in the aorist passive, which
has the active forms (551).
In the third person plural of the imperative the endings ντων
and oOwy (θων) are used in the older and better Attic.
7. The primitive middle forms Oov, θην, Oe, θαι, etc. appear in
the perfect and pluperfect after consonants; as rérpid-Oe (tpfB-w).
See 489.
TENSE STEMS AND FORMS OF INFLECTION.
SIMPLE AND COMPLEX TENSE STEMS.
557. Tense stems are of two classes, simple and complex.
A simple tense stem is the verb stem (often in a modified
forin), to which the endings are applied directly. A com-
plex tense stem is composed of the verb stem (with its
modifications) prolonged by a tense suffix (561, 5), to which
the eudings are applied. See 488.
558. (Simple Tense Stems.) Simple tense stems are
found
(a) in the present and imperfect, the second aorist ac-
tive and middle, and the second perfect and pluperfect, of
the conjugation in μὲ (500), except in the subjunctive ;
(δ) in the perfect and pluperfect middle of all verbs.
Ἐκ.
(a) From φημί (stem φα-), say, come φα-μέν, φα-τέ, φάναι,
ἔφατε, etc. From τίθημι (stem θε-), put, come 2 aor. ἔθετε,
ἔθετο, θέσθω, θέσθαι, θέμενος, ete.; and from the reduplicated
τιθε- (536) come τίθε-μεν, τίθε-τε, τίθεισαι, τίθε-ται, ἐ-τίθειντο, ἐ-τίθε-
σθε, τίθε-σο, τίθε-σθαι, etc.
(δ) From λειλυ- (reduplicated stem of λύ-ω) with the middle
endings (552) come λέλυμαι, λέλν-σαι, λέλν-σθε, λελύσθαι, AcAv-
μένος: ἐλελύμην, ἐλέλνσο, ἐλέλυ-σθε, ἐλέλυντο.
559. (Complex Tense Stems.) Complex tense stems are
found in all other forms of the verb. Εἰ.
Λύω (stem λῦ-), has (pres.) Avopev, λύετε, Adopeba, λύεσθε,
λύονται, ete.; (fut.) λύσομεν, λύσετε, λύσεισθαι, etc.; (aor.)
ἐλύσα-μεν, ἐλύσα-τε, ἐλύσα-σθε, λύσα-σθαι, etc.; (1 aor. pass.)
ἐλύθην, €-AVOypev, CATE, ete.
184 INFLECTION. [560
560. This distinction will be seen by a comparison of the
present indicative middle of τίθημι {(τιθε-) with that of φιλέω
(φιλε-} in its uncoutracted (Homeric) form: —
τίθεμαι φιλέ-ο-μαι τιθέμεθα φιλε-ὁ-μεϑα
τίθε-σαι φιλέ-ε-(σ)αι τίθεσθε φιλέε-σϑε
τίθεται φιλέ-ε-ται τίθενται didd-o-vrar
561. (Tense Suffixes.) 1. In the present, imperfect, and
second aorist active aud middle of the conjugation in ὦ, in
all futures, and in the future perfect, the tense stem ends
in w variable vowel, called the thematic vowel, which is o
before w and ν and in the optative, and is elsewhere «
This is written %-; as Avgy., present stem of At-w; Aw%-,
second aorist stem of λείττω. In the futures and the fture
perfect. the thematic vowel is preceded by o. ‘lu these
prolonged tense stems the endings are added. ΑΕ.
Aiopev, Ave-re, λύουσι for λῦονσι (78, 3); ἔλιποιν, ATES,
ἐλίπομεν, ἐλίπετε; ἐλίπεσθε, ἐλίποντο; Abgo-pev, λύσε-τε, Aico
νται. For the terminations ὦ, ets, εἰ in the singular, see 628.
2. The subjunctive has a long thematic vowel */,-, which appears
in both conjugations; as λέγωμεν, λέγγτε, A€yw-oe for λεγωνσι
(75, 3); θῶμεν for Gé-w-pev, θῆτε for θέη: τε.
3. The first aorist stem has a suffix oa-, the first perfect xa-, and
the second perfect a-.
4, The first aorist passive has a suffix 6e- (or 6y-), and the
second aorist passive ἐ- (or a); as λείπτω, ἐλείφ-θη-ν, λειφ-θῆτναι,
(λειφ'θέω) λειφθῶ; φαίνω (φαν-), épav-n-v, φαν-ἥτναι, φαν-έντος ;
€AV-On-v, ἐλύθη:ς, ἐλύ-θη-μεν, λν-θένντων, λυ-θέντες.
The first. and second passive futures have θησϑέ- and no%-; as
λειφ-θήσο-μαι, Av-Oynce-obe, φαν-ἡσο-μαι, φαν-ήσε-ται.
5. The theniatic vowels, and %-, σα-, κα- (a-), θε- (Oy-) or ε- (γ:),
Ona %- or no%-, (1-4), are called tense suffixes.
562, (Optative Suffix.) The optative inserts a mood suffix & or
up (ve-) Letween Loth the simple and the complex tense stem and
the personal endings. (See 730.)
For the subjunctive, see 718; 561, 2.
TWO FORMS OF INFLECTION.
563. To the two classes of tense stems correspond gener-
ally two forins of inflection, —~the simple form and the
common form.
000] TWO FORMS OF INFLECTION. 135
1. Tau Simeee Form or Ine ecrion.
564. To this form (sometimes called the μεῖον} belong
all tenses which have simple tense stems (553) and also
both passive aorists, —ulways excepting the subjunctives
(561, 2.). It has these peculiarities of inflection : —
1. The first and third persons singular of the present indicative
active have the endings μὲ and σι (552); as φημί, φη-σί; τίθημι,
τίθη-σι.
2. The second aorist imperative active generally retains the
ending & (553); as 87-0, go. So rarely the present; as dah,
say. (See 752; 755.)
3. ‘The third person plural has the active endings aotand σὰν (592).
4. The infinitive active has the ending ναὶ or evae (554); as
τιϑέναι, ἱέναι (ἴημι), teva (εἶμι)
5. Participles with stems in ovr have nominatives in ous; as
διδούς, 8:56-v7-05 (see 563, 5).
G. In all forms of this class exeept the second aorist and the
optative, the middle endings oat and go regularly retain a; as
τίθε-σαι, ἐ-τίθβε-σο; AéAv-cat, ἐ-λέλυ-σο. But 2 aorist ἔθου (for
ἐθε-σο); optative ἱσταῖο (for iara-t-co).
7. The passive aorists, which belong here although they do not
have simple stems (558), have the inflection of the second aarist
active of the p-forin; λύω, €Av-On-v; φαίνω (φαν-), ἐφάν-η-ν, φανῶ,
φανείην, φάνη-θι, φανῆ-ναι, φανείς (for day-e-vts), inflected like
ἔστην, στῶ, θείην, στῆ-θι, στῆ-ναι, θείς (500).
I]. Tne Common Form or ἸΝΈΝΟΤΙΟΝ.
565. ‘lo this form belong all parts of the verb in ὦ, ex-
cept the perfect and pluperfect middle and the passive
aorists, and also all subjunctives. It has the following
peculiarities of infleetion.
1. Tt has the thematie vowel and the other tense suffixes men-
tioned in 561, 1-3. For the inflection of the present aud imperfect
indicative, seu 623 and G24.
2. The imperfect and second aorist have the ending vy in the
third person plural; the pluperfect has σαν.
3. The imperative active has no ending in the second person
singular. For ον in the first aorist, see 717.
4. The infinitive active lias ev (for eer) in the present, future,
and second aorist 3 é-vae in the perfect; and στὰς (or at) in the
first aorist. See 759-764.
5. Participles witl stems in ovr have nominatives in wy (564, 5).
136 INFLECTION. [566
6. The middle endings σαι and oo in the second person singular
drop o and are contracted with the thematic vowel; as λῦεσαι,
λύεαι, Ady or λύει; ἐλῦεσο, ἐλύεο, ἐλύον ($8, 2). For Ionic uncon-
tracted forms, see 777, 2; 785, 2.
FORMATION AND INFLECTION OF TENSE SYSTEMS.
566. To understand the inflection of the verb, we must
know the relation of each tense stem to the verb stem, and
also certain internal modifications which the verb stem
undergoes in some of the tense systems.
FORMATION OF THE PRESENT STEM FROM THE VERB
STEM. — EIGHT CLASSES OF VERBS.
567. When the verb stem does not appear unchanged in the
present stem, as it does in λύτω and λέγω (459), it generally
appears in a strengthened form; as in xémr-w (xor-), cut,
μανθάν-ω (μαθ-), learn, épéox-w (dpe-), please. In a few very
irregular verbs no connection is to be seen between the
present stem and the stem or stems of other tenses; as in
φέρω (dep-), bear, fut. οἴσω, aor. ἤνεγκα.
568. Verbs are divided into eight classes with reference
to the relation of the present stem to the verb stem.
569. First Crass. (Verb Stem unchunged in Present.)
Here the present stem is formed by adding the thematic
vowel %- (565, 1) to the verb stem. Eg.
Λέγω (Aey-), say, present stem Acy%-, giving Adyo-pev, A€ye-re,
Adyo-pat, A€ye-rat, A€yo-vrat, E-Acyo-v, E-Aeye-s, ἐελέγε-τε, ἐελέγε-σθε,
é-Aéyo-vro, etc. in the present and imperfect. For ὦ, εἰς, εἰ in the
present active, see 623.
570. N. Some verbs of this class have the stem variable in
quantity in different tenses; as δύω, φύω, θλίβω, πνίγω, τρίβω,
Tidw, ψύχω. See these in the Catalogue of Verbs. For λύω, see 471.
571. N. The pure verbs of the first class which irregularly retain a
short vowel in certain tenses are given in 639; those which insert ¢ in
certain tenses, in 640. ‘Ihe verbs (of all classes) which add ¢ to the
stem in some or all tenses not of the present system (85 βούλομαι) are
given in 657 and 658. Reduplicated presents of all classes are given in
651 and 652. These and others which are peculiar in their inflection
are found in the Catalogue of Verbs. For special peculiarities, see
γίγνομαι, ἔθω, tw, ἔχω, πέπτω, τίκτω. ᾿
578] EIGHT CLASSES OF VERBS. 137
572, Seconp Crass. (Stems with Strong Forms.) This
class includes verbs with mute stems which have strong
forms with « (oc), ev, or 7 (31) in all tenses except in the
second aorist and second passive systems, in which they have
the weak forms in ὦν, and 4. The present stem adds %-
to the strong form of the stem. Eg.
Acim-w, leave, 2 aor. €-Aut-ov, 2 perf. λέλοιπ-α; φεύγ-ω, flee, 2 aor.
ἔφυγοον; THK-w, melt, 2 aor. pass. é-Tax-yv; with present stems Aanr%-,
pevy%-, τηκϑέ-.
573. To this class belong ἀλείφ-ω, ἐρείπτω, λείπ-ω, πείθ-ω, στείβ:ω,
στείχ- ω, pd: "Ὅμαι; κεύθ-ω, πεύθ- ropa, τεύχ- ω, pevy- ω; κήδ.- -w, λήθ-ω,
σήπ-ω, τήκ-ω; With Ionic or poetic épeck-w, ἐρεύγ-ομαι, THAY-w; —all
with weak stems in. v, ora. See also θαπ- or ταφ-, stem of τέθηπα
and ἔταφον, and εἴκω (ἔοικα). Tpwy-w, gnaw, 2 aor. é-rpay-ov, irregu-
larly has ὦ in the present. Fot ῥήγινῦμι and εἴωθα (96-), see 689.
For exceptions in a few of these verbs, see 642, 2. See 01].
574, Six verbs in ew with weak stems in v belong by
formation to this class. These originally had the strong
forin in εὖ, which became ἐς (90, 2) before a vowel, and
finally dropped ¢, leaving ε; as πλέω, sail (weak stem Av),
strong stem wAcu, mAeg-, wAe, present stem mAc%-
These verbs are θέτω (weak stem 6u-), run, vé-w (vu-), Swim, πλέω
(πλυ-), sail, πνέω (ave), breathe, ῥέξω (pr-), flow, χέω (xv-), pour.
The poetic σεύω (ov), urge, has this formation, with ev retained.
(See 601.)
575. As verbs of the second class have the strong stem in
almost all forms, this stem is here called the verb stem.
576, Tunkp Crass. (Verbs in πτω, or T Class.) Some
labial (7; B,) verb stems add τος, and thus form the
present in πτω; as xémr-w (κοπ-), cut (present stem xorr%-),
βλάπτ-ω (BrAaB-), hurt, ῥίπττω (pid-, pid-), throw (71).
577. N. Here the exact form of the verb stem cannot be deter-
mined from the present. Thus, in the examples above given, the
stem is to be found in the second aorists ἐκόπην, ἐβλάβην, and
ἐρρίφην ; and in καλύπτω (Kadvf-), cover, it is seen in καλύβ-η, hut.
578. The verbs of this class are drr-w (a¢-), Birr-w (βαφ-),
βλάπτ-ω (βλαβ. -), θάπττω (ταφ:), θρύπττω (tpvd-), καλύπττω
(καλυβ.), κάμπτ-ω (καμπ- -), κλέπτ-ω (κλεπ:), κόπτ-ω (κοπ- -), κρύπτ-ω
(κρυβ- or κρυφ-), κύπτιω (κῦφ.), ῥάπττω (fag-), ῥίπττω (pid-,
ῥΐφ-.), σκάπτιω (oxad-), σκέπτομαι (σκεπ-), σκήπτω (σκηπ-),
198 INFLECTION. {879
σκώπτω (σκωπ-), τύπτω (τυπ-). With Homeric and poetic γνάμπτω
(γναμπ-), ἐνίπτω (ἐνιπ-), and μάρπτω (μαρπ-).
579, Founri Crass. (Jota Class.) In this class the
present stem is formed by adding c%- to the verb stem and
making the euphonie changes which this occasions. (See
84.) here are four divisions.
580. J. (Verbs in cow or tro.) Most presents in gow
(rrw) come from palatal stems, « or x and generally y with
ebecoming oa (rr). These have futures in é; aS πράσσω
(mpay-), do, present stem πρᾶσσϑέ- (for mpayr%-), fut. πράξω,
μαλάσσω (pudax-, Seen in podraxds), soften, fut. μαλάξω;
ταράσσω (ταραχ-, seen in ταραχή), confuse, fut. ταράξω;
κηρύσσω (κηρῦκ-), proclaim, fut. κηρύξω. (See δά, 1.)
581. 80. also ἀΐσσω (dix-), ἀλλάσσω (ἀλλαγ-), ἀράσσω (dpay-),
βήσσω (βηχ-), δράσσω (δραγ-), ἑλίσσω (éAtk-), θράσσω (θραχ- 3),
μάσσω (μαγ.), μύσσω (μυκ:), ὀρύσσω (ὀρυχ:), πλήσσω (πληγ',
πλαγ-), πτήσσω {(πτηκ-), πτύσσω (πτυγ-), σάττω (σαγ-), τάσσω
(ταγ-), φράσσω (φραγ-), φρίσσω (φρῖκ-), φυλάσσω (φυλακ-). Sve
also epic δειδίσσομαι, fouic and poetic ἀμύσσω and προίσσομαι, aiid
poetic ἀφύσσω and vicow.
§82. Sone presents in cow (rw) ave formed from lingual
stems, which have futures in ow or aorists in va; as ἐρέσσω,
row (from stem éper-, seen in ἐρέτης, Tower), aor. ἤρεσα. So
also épporrw (fut. ἁρμόσω), βλίττω (μελιτ-, 06), λίσσομαι (λιτ-),
πάσσω, πλάσσω, πτίσσω, With ἀφάσσω (Hdt.), and poetic
ἱμάσσω, κορύσσω (κορυθ:-).
Many presents of this kind are formed on the analogy of verbs
with real lingual stems (see 587).
583, Ν. Πέσσω, covk, cones from an old stem arex-3 while the
tenses πέψω, ἔπεψα, etc. belong to the stem mem-, seen in later
πέπτω and Jonie πέπτομαι of Class THT.
684. 17. (Verbs in tw.) Presents in fw may be formed
in two ways :—
585. (1) From stems in δ, with futures in ow; as κομίζω
(xopsd-, seen in xopid-7), carry, fut. κομίσω; φράζω (ppad-),
say, fut. φράσω. (See $4, 3.)
1 The lists of verbs of the fourth class are not complete, while those
of the other classes which are given contain all the verbs in common use.
695} EIGHT CLASSES OF VERBS. 139
586. So ἁρμόζω (ὡρμοδ-), ἁὡρπάζω, ἐλπίζω (ἐλπιδ-), ἐρίζω (ἐριδ.),
θαυμάζω, ἴζω (i8-) with ἔζομαι (ἐδ-), κτίζω, νομίζω, ὄζω (όδ-), πελάζω,
σχάζω, σχίζω (σχιδ-), σῴξζω.
587. N. Many verbs in ζω, especially most in αζω, with futures
in ow, were formed on the analouy of those with actual stems in ὃ.
(See Meyer, Gr. Gram. §§ 521, 522.
588. (2) From stems in y (or yy), with futures in gw;
as σφάζω (σφαγ-), slay (σφάττω in prose), fut. σφάξω ; ῥέζω
(Jey-), do (poetic and Ionic), fut. ῥέξω; κλάζω (κλαγγο),
scream (cf. clango), fut. κλάγξω. (See 84, 3.)
589. So κράξω (kpay-), σαλπίζω (carmeyy-), στίζω (orty-); with
poetic ἀλαλάζω, βάζω, βρίζω, γρύζω, ἐλελίζω, κρίζω, μύζω, grumble,
στάζω.
590. N. Some verbs in ζω have stems both in ὃ and y; as
παίζω (rab, maty-), play, fut. παιξοῦμαι (866), aor. ἔπαισα. See
also pocUc forms of apmalw and νάσσω. (See 587.)
591. N. Νίζω, wash, fut. vigw, forms its tenses from a stem
wB-. seen in Homeric νύττομαι and later νύττω.
592. 111. (HLnlarged Liquid Stems in Present.) Of these
there are three divisions: —
593. (1) Preseits in AAw are formed from verb stems in A
with «%- added, Ac becoming AA; as στέλλω, send, for στελ- ὦ;
ἀγγέλλω, announce, for dyyeA-cw; σφάλλω, trip up, for opad-t-w;
present stems oreAA%-, etc. (See 84, 4.)
See ἄλλομαι (ἀλ-), βάλλω (βαλ-), θάλλω (θαλ-), ὀκέλλω (dxed-),
πάλλω (παλ-), τέλλω (TEA-), With poetic δαιδάλλω, ἰάλλω, σκέλλω,
τίλλω.
594. (2) Presents in aww and apw are formed from verb
stems in ἄν- and ἄρ- with «%- added.
Here the ¢ is transposed and then contracted with a fo at; as
φαίνω (pav-), show, for dav-t-w (present stem pav%-), future φανῶ ;
χαίρω (xap-), rejoice, for xap-t-w. (See 84, 5.)
595. So εὐφραίνω (εὐφραν-). κερδαίνω (xepdav-), μαίνομαι (μαν-),
μιαίνω (μιαν-), ξαίνω (fav-), ξηραίνω (ξηραν-), ποιμαίνω (ποιμαν-),
ῥαίνω (pav-), σαίνω (σαν-), σημαίνω (σημαν-), τετραίνω {τετραν-),
ὑφαίνω (ὗφαν-), χραίνω (xpav-); with poetic κραίνω (xpav-), παπταίνω
(παπταν-), πιαίνω (πιαν-). Αἴρω (ἀρ-), καθαίρω (καθαρ-), τεκμαίρο-
μαι (rexpup-), with poetic ἐναίρω (ἐναρ-), ἐχθαίρω (ἐχθαρ-), σαίρω
(cap-).
140 INFLECTION. [596
596. (3) Presents in eva, pw, ivw, ipw, ὕνω, and ὕρω come
from stems in ev, €p, ἵν, ip, vy, and vp, with .%- added.
Here the added ¢ disappears and the preceding ε, 4, or v is
lengthened to εἰ, % or ὃ; as reiyw (rev-), stretch, for rey-tw;
κείρω (kep-), shear, for xepew; κρίνω (κριν-), Judge, for κρινικω;
ἀμύνω (ἀμυν-), ward of, for ἀμυνίω; σύρω (ovp-), draw, for
συρ-εὦω.
597. So γείνομαι (γεν-), κτείνω (κτέν-), and poetic θείνω (Bev-) ;
ἀγείρω (dyep-), δείρω (Sep-), ἐγείρω (eyep-), ἱμείρω (tuep-), μείρομαι
(μερ-), φθείρω (φθερ-), σπείρω (σπερ-), with poetic πείρω (mep-),
Κλένω (κλιν-), σένομαι (our), αἰσχύνω (αἰσχυν-), θαρσύνω (θαρσυν.),
ὀξύνω (ὀξυν-), πλὕνω {πλυν-), μαρτύρομαι (paprup-), ὀλοφύρομαι
(ddropup-). Οἰκτέρω (οἰκτιρ-), pity (commonly written οἰκτείρω),
is the only verb in tpw.
598. N. ᾿οΟφείλω (ὀφελ-), be obliged, owe, follows the analogy
of stems in ev, to avoid confusion with ὀφέλλω (ὀφελ-), increase ;
but in Homer it has the regular present ὀφέλλω. Homer has
εἴλομαι, press, froin stein ἐλ-.
599. N. Verbs of this division (III.) regularly have futures
and aorists active and middle of the liquid form (663). For excep-
tions (in poetry), see 668.
600. N. Many verbs with Hquid stems do not belong to this
class; as δέμω and δέρω in Class I. For βαίψω etc. in Class V.,
see 610.
601. IV. (Stems in av.) Were belong καίω, burn, and
κλαίω, weep (Attic also κἄω and xAdw). The stems xav- and
κλαν- (seen in καύσω aud κλαύσομαι) became καρι- and κλαρί"
whence και- and xAa- (90, 2). (See 574.)
602. N. The poets form some other presents in this way; as δαίω
(8af-), burn, ναίω (vaf-), swim. So, from stems in ασ-, μαίομαι (μασ-,
pagi-, μαι-), seek, δαίομαι (Sac-), divide. ᾿Οπνίω, marry, has stem émv-,
whence fut. ὀπύσω.
603, Frrru Cuass. (N Class.) (1) Some verb stems
are strengthened in the present by adding ν before the
thematic vowel %-; as @Odv-w (φθα-), anticipate (present
stem pbuv%-) ; Pbiv-w (PO-), waste; Sdxr-w (dax-), bite 5
κάμν-ω (καμ-), be weary; τέμν-ω (τεμ-), Cul.
604. So βαίνω (βα-, βαν-, 610), πένω (me, see also 621), τίνω
(re), δύνω (with δύω), Hom. θύνω (with θύω), rush; for ἐλαύνω
(éda-), see 612.
612] EIGHT CLASSES OF VERBS. 141
605. (2) (2) Some consonant stems add av; ἁμαρτάν-ω
(dpapt-), err (present stem ἁμαρτανϑέ-); αἰσθάν-ομαι (aic6-),
perceive; βλαστάν-ω (βλαστ-Ὺ, sprout.
(0) Here, if the last vowel of the stem is short, another
nasal (μ᾽ before a labial, vy before a lingual, y before a pala-
tal) is inserted after this vowel; as AavOdv-w (λαθ-, Aav6-),
escupe notice (AavOav%-) 3 λαμβάν-ω (λαβ-, λαμβ.), take; θιγ-
γάνω (Ory-, θιγγ-), touch.
606. So αὐξάντω (with avéw), δαρθώντω (δαρθ.), da-eyOdv-opat
(ἐχθ-), iLdvew (with fw), οἰδάν-ω (οἰδ-), ὀλισθάν-ω (ὀλισθ-), ὀφλι-
σκάν-ω (ὀφλ-, ὀφλισκ-, 614); with poctic ἀλιταΐίντομαι (ἀλιτ-» 610),
ἀλφάν-ω (dAP-), ἐριδαίν-ω (épd-). Wath inserted ν, y, or μ, ἀνδάντω
(a8-), κιγχάνω, epic κιχάνω {κιχ-), Aayyarw (Aay-), μανθάν-ω (pad-),
πυνθάνομαι (πυθ.), τυγχάν-ω (Tvx-), With poetic χανδάντω (χαδ-),
ἐρυγγάν-ω (€pvy-).
607. (3) A few stems add ve: Borve-w (with βιξω), stop up,
ἱκνέομαι (With ftx-w), come, κυνέτω (κυ-), kiss; also ἀμπεισχνέ-
opat, have on, and ὑπ-ιισχνέομαι, promise, from ἔσχτεω.
608. (4) Some stems add νυ or (after a vowel) ννυ, These
form the seeond elass (in νῦμι) of verbs in μὲ, as δείκνῦ-μι
(dex-), show, Kepdvvd-pe (xepa-), mia, and are enumerated in
797, 1. Some of these have also presents in vow. (See 502, 2.)
609. (5) A few poetic (chiefly epie) verbs add va to the stem,
forming presents in ynge(or deponents in vayac): most of these lave
presents in yaw; as δάμνημι (Sau-va-), also δαμνάω, subdue. ‘These
form a third class of verbs in μὲ, and are enumerated in 797, 2.
610. N. Βαΐίνω (Ba-, Bav-), go, aud ὀσφραίνομαι (ὀσφρ-, ὀσφραν-),
smell, not only add ν or ἂν, but lengthen ay to av on the principle
of Class IV. (04). ‘They belong here, however, because they do not
have the inflection of liquid verbs (599). See also κερδαίνω, paiva,
tetpaivw, with Lomeric ἀλιταίνομαι (ἀλιτ-, ἀλιταν-).
611. N. Soine stems of this class lengthen a short vowel (on
the principle of Class 11.} in other tenses than the present; as
λαμβάνω (λαβ-), fut. λήψομαι (AnB-): so ddxvu, Aayxdvw, λαν-
θάνω, τυγχάνω. See also ἐρυγγάνω, ἔρχομαι, and πυνθάνομαι.
Three verbs in rope (GUS), ζευγνῦμι, πήγνῦμι, ῥήγνῦμι, belong
equally to Class IT. and Class V.
612. N. ᾿Ελαύνω (ἐλα-), drive, is irregular in the present ster
(probably for éAa-vu-w). "OA-Av-us (6A-), destroy, adds Av (by
assinilation) instead of νυ to the stem ὀλ-:
142 INFLECTION. [618
618. ΒΙχτπ Crass. (Verbs in oxw.) These add ox%- or
tox%- to the verb stem to form the present stem; as
ynpa-oxw (-ynpa-), grow old (present stem ynpack%-); ebp-ioxw
(cdp-), find (ciprox%-) 5 dpé-oxw (dpe-), please, στερ-ίσκω (orep-),
deprive.
614. These verbs are, further, ἀλ-ίσκομαι, ἀμβλ-ίσκω, ἀμπλακ-
ἔσκω (poetic), ἀναλ-ίσκω, ἀπαφ-ίσκω (pocl.), ἀραρ-ίσκω (port.),
βάσκω (poet.), BeBpu-oxnw (Bpo), ἀναβιώ:σκομαι (Bio-), βλώ-
σκω (μολ-, Baro), γεγων-ίσκω, γι-γνώ:σκω (yvo-), δι-δρά-σκω (δρα-),
ἐπαυρ- ioxw (poet.), ἡβά-σκω, θνησκω (θαν-, Ova-), θρώ-σκω (Gop-,
pc), ἰλά- σκομαι, μεθύσκω, κικλή- σκω (κλη-) (poet.), κυ- ἴσκομαι
(κυ), μεμνῃ-σκω (μνα-), πιπίσκω (lon. and Pind.), rempé-oxw,
πιφαύσκω (φαν-), declare (Hom.), τιτρώτσκω (τρο-), φά:σκω,
χά-σκω. See also the verbs in 017. ᾿Οφλιισκάνω (ὀφλ-) takes tox
and then adds av (606).
615. N. Many presents of this classs are reduplicated (336) ;
as γι-γνώσκω (yvo-). See 652, 1. ᾿Αρ-αρ-ίσκω has w form of Attic
reduplication (529).
616. Ν. Final o of the verb stem becomes w, and final é sometimes
becomes ἃ or ἢ; aS in γιγνώσκω (yvo-), διδράσκω (Spa-); θνήσκω (Bar-,
Ova-), orice θνάσκω (for Ova-coxw).
617. N. Three verbs, adv-onw (ἀλυκ-), anoid, διδά-σκω (6:6ax-),
teach, and λά-σκω (Aax-), speak, omit « or x before σκω. So Homeric
éloxw or ἴσκω (ἐϊκ- or lx-), ken, aud τιτύσκομαι (exes tux-), for ri-TuK-
σκομαι, prepare. Sec also μίσγω (for μιγ-σκω) and πάσχω (for παθ-σκω).
618, N. These verbs, from their ending oxw, are called inceptive,
though few have any inceptive meaning.
619. Seventy Crass. (Presents ta μὲ with simple stems.)
Here the verb stem, sometimes reduplicated (652), withont
the thematic vowel, appears as the present stem. Eg.
Φημί (φι-), say, φα-μέν, φα-τέ; τίθημι (Ge-), put, τίθε-μεν,
τίθε-τε, τίθε-μαι, τιθέμεθα, ἐ-τίθε-σθε, ἐ-τίθειντο; δίδωμι (δο-),
δί-δο-μεν.
For the strong form of these stems in the singular of the
active, see 627.
620. All verbs in pu, except those in νῦμι under 608, and the
epic forms in νημὲ (or vapat) with ya added to the stein (609), are
of this class. ‘They are enumerated in 794. (See 502, 1.)
621. Eicuru Crass. (Mixed Class.) This includes the
few irregular verbs which have any of the tense stems so
essentially different from others, or are otherwise so pecul-
621} PRESENT AND IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. 143
iar in formation, that they cannot be brought under any
of the preceding classes. They are the following : —
αἱρέω (aipe, €A-), take, fut. αἱρήσω, 2 aor. εἷλον.
εἶδον (ειδ', ἰδ.}, save, vidi, 2 δον ἰοῦ (ny present act.) ; 2 pf. οἶδα,
know (830). Mid. εἴδομαι (poet.). Εἶδον is used as 2 aor. of
ὁράω (see below).
εἶπον (εἶπ-, ἐρ-, pe-), spoke, 2 aor. (uo pres.) Ὁ fut. (ἐρέω) ἐρῶ,
pl. εἴρηκα. The stem ép- (pe) is for cep (cpe), seen in Lat.
ver-bum (G49). So év-Grw.
ἔρχομαι (épy-, ἐλευθ-, ἐλυθ., ἐλθ.), go, fut. ἐλεύσομαι (poet.),
2 perf. ἐλήλυθα, 2 avr. ἦλθον. The Attic future is us, shall go
(808).
ἐσθίω (€06-, &-. hay-), eat, ful. ἔδομαι, 2 aor. ἔφαγον.
ὁμάω (pa-, ὀπ-, ριδ'), Sec, ful. ὄψομαι, pt. ἑόρακα, 2 aor. εἶδον
(see above).
πάσχω (παθ-, πενθ.), suffer, fut. πείσομαι, 2 pf. πέπονθα, 2 aor.
ἔπαθον. (See 617.)
πίνω (πι-, πο.), drink, fut. réopat, pf. πέπωκα, 2 aor. ἔπιον. (See
604.)
τρέχω (τρεχ-, Spap-), run, fut. δραμοῦμαι, pf. δεδράμηκα (657),
2 aor. ἔδραμον.
φέρω (pep, oi, ἐνεκ-, by reduplication and syncope éy-ever,
ἐνεγκ-}, bear, fero: fut. οἴσω, aur. ἤνεγκα, 2 p. ἐν-ήνοχ-α (643; 62),
€v-2vey-par aor. pr. ἠἡνέχθην.
For fall forms of these verbs, see the Catalogue. See also the
irregular verhs in pe (S05-S20).
622, N. Oecasional Homeric or pactic irregular forins appear even
Jn some verbs of the first seven clisses, See ἀκαχίζω, ἀλέξω, γίγνομαι,
and xavédvw in the Catalogue.
IxvLectioN OF THE Presexr ann Iuprenvect IxvicaTive.
623. (Common Form.) The present indicative adds the
primary endings (552) to the present tense stem in %-, ex-
cept in the singular of the active, where it has the terni-
nations ὦ, es, εὦ the origin of whieh is uncertain. The
first person in ὦ is independent of that iu pe and both the
forms in ὦ and in pe were probably inherited by the Greek
from the parent language. lor the third person in ovec (for
over), sce SSG, 5.
624. Of the two forms of the second person singular middle
in y and εἰ (568, 6), that in εἰ is the true Attic form, which was
144 INFLECTION, [625
used in prose and in comedy. But the tragedians seein to have
preferred the form in y,! which is the regular form in the other
dialeets, except Ionic, and in the later common dialeet. This
applies to the future middle and passive and to the future perfect,
as well as to the present.
625. Βούλομαι, wish, and οἴομαι, think, have only βούλει and οἴει,
with no foris in y. So ὄψομαι, future of ὁράω, see, has only ὄψει.
626, The imperfect adds the secondary endings to the
tense stem in %-. See the paradigm of Abw.
627, (Mc-form.) Here the final vowel of the stem is long
(with , ὦ, Ὁ) in the stxgular of both present und inperfect.
indicative active, but short (with ἃ or ¢ 0, ¥) in the dual and
plural, aud also in most other forms derived from the present
stem. This change from the strong stem in the indicative
singular to the weak stem in other forms is one of the most
important distinctions between the peform and that in ὦ.
The endings here include py, s, σὲ in the singular of the present,
and σὰν in the third person plural of the imperfect. (See 506.)
628. The third person plural of the present active has
the ending ao. (552), which is always coutracted with a
(but uever with ¢, 0, or v) of the stem; as ἱστᾶσι (for tora-
aor), but τιθέᾶσι, διδό-ἄσι, δεικνύ-ἄσι.
629. ‘The only verbs in μὲ with consonant stems are the irregu-
lar εἰμί (€o-), be, and ἦμαι (Yo-), sit. (See 806 and 814.)
630, Some verbs in nyt and wpe have forms which follow the
inflection of verbs in ew and ow. Thus the imperfect forms ἐτίθεις
and ἐτίθει (as if from τιθέω), and ἐδίδουν, ἐδίδους, ἐδίδου (as if from |
διδόω), are much more common than the regular forms in ys, ἡ and
wy, ὡς, ow So τιθεῖς for τέθης in the present. (866 also 741.)
631. Some verbs in dye have also presents in ve; as δεικνύω for
Seckvupu.
632. Δύναμαι. can, and ἐπίσταμαι, I:now, often have ἐδύνω (or
ἠδύνω) aud ἠπίστω for ἐδύνασο and ἠπίστασο in the imperfect, and
occasionally δύνᾳ and ἐπίστᾳ for δύνασαι and ἐπίστασαι in the
present.
633. For the present (with the other tenses) in the dependent
moods and the participle, see the account of these (718-775).
1 Kirchhoff and Wecklein in Aeschylus, aud Bergk in Sophocles,
give only the form in ῃ.
689] MODIFICATION OF THE VERB STEM. 145
MODIFICATION OF THE ΝΠ 1} STEM IN CERTAIN
TENSE SYSTEMS.
684. Before discussing the other tense systems (IT.-IX.), we
must inention some modifications which the verb stem regularly
undergoes in certain forms. Mere irregularities, such as are found
only in verbs of the eighth class (621), are not noticed here.
635. (Lengthening of Vowels.) Most stems ending in a
short vowel lengthen this vowel before the tense suffix
(561, 5) in all tenses formed from thein, except the present
and imperfect. A and ε become ἡ, and o becomes ὡς; but a
atter «, 4 or p becomes ἃ (29). Evg.
Τιμάω (ripa-), honor, ripy-cw, ἐτίμη-σα, τετΐμη-κα, τετέμη-μαι,
ἐτιμή- θην; φιλέω (pire-), love, φιλήσω, ἐφίλησα, πεφίληκα, πεφίλη-
μαι, ἐφιλήθην;; δηλύω (δηλο-), show, δηλώσω, ἐδήλωσα, δεδήλωκα,
δακρύω, δακρύσω. But dw, ἐάσω; ἰάομαι, ἰάσομαι; δράω, δράσω,
ἔδρασα, δέδρακα.
636. This applies also to stems which lecome vowel stems by
metathesis (649); as βάλλω (βαλ-, Bdu-), throw, pl. βέβλη-κα;
κάμνω (καμ-, κμα-}, labor, Kékuy-xa; or by adding € (697); as Bow
Avopat (βουλ-, βουλε-), wish, βουλή-σομαι, BeBovdAr-pas, ἐβουλή-θην.
637, For the long stem vowel in the singular of the present
and imperfect indicative of verbs in μὲ, see G27.
638. N. ᾿Ακροάομαι, hear, has ἀκροάσομαι ete.5 χράω, give oracles,
lengthens a to 43 as χρήσω ete. So τρήσω and ἔτρησα from stem
Tpa-; see τετραΐνω, bure.
639. Some vowel stems retain the short vowel, contrary
to the general rule (635); as yeAdw, laugh, γελᾶσομαι, ἐγέ-
λᾶσα; dpxéw, suffice, ἀρκέσω, ἤρκεσα; μάχομαι (poxe-), Jiyht,
μαχέσομαι (1on.), ἐμαχεσάμην.
(a) This occurs in the following verbs: (pnre verbs) ἄγαμαι,
αἰδέομαι, ἀκέομαι, ἀλέω, ἀνύω, ἀμκέω, dpow, ἀρίω, γελάω, ἑλκύω (see
ἕλκω), ἐμέω, ἐράω, ζέω, ϑλάω, κλάω, break, ξέω, πτύω, σπάω, τελέω,
τρέω. Adm, χαλάω; and epic ἀκηδέω, κοτέω, λοέω, νεικέω, and the
stems (ἀα-) and (de-);— (other verbs with vowel stems) ἀρέσκω
(ἀρε-). ἄχθομαι (dxOe-), ἐλαύνω (€da-), ἱλάσκομαι (ἷλα-), μεθύσκω
(μεθυ-}» also all verbs in ἀννῦμε and ἐννῦμι, with stems ina and ε
(given in 797, 1), with ὀλλῦμι (dAe-) andl ὄμνῦμι (dpo-).
(b) The final vowel of the stem is variable in quantity in differ.
ent icnses in the following verbs: (pure verbs) αἰνέω, αἱρέω, δέω,
146 INFLECTION. [640
bind, δύω (see divw), ἐρύω (epic), θύω, sacrific 6, καλέω, λύω, μύω,
ποθέω, πονέω ; --- (other verbs) βαίνω (Ba-), εὑρίσκω (ebp-, ebpe-),
μάχομαι (μαχε-), πίνω {πι-, ro-), φθάνω (Pbu-), φθίνω (φθι-).
640, (Insertion of o.) Vowe) stems which retain the
short vowel (639) und soine others add ¢ to the final vowel
before all endings not beginuing with o in the perfect and
pluperfect middle. ‘Phe same verbs have o before θὲ or θη 11
the first passive teuse system. Κλ.
Τελέω, finish, τετέλε-σ-μαι, ἐτετελέσμην, ἐτελέσθην, τελεσθήσομαι"
γελάω, laugh, ἐγελά-σ-θην, γελασθῆναι; χράω, give oracles, χρήσω,
κέχρη-σ-μαι, ἐχρήσθην.
641. ‘This occurs in all the verbs of 639 (a), except ἀρόω, so
far as they forin these tenses; and in the following: ἀκούω, δράω,
θραύω, κελεύω, κλείω (κλήω), κνάω, κναίω, κρονω, κυλίω (ον κυλώνδω),
λεύω, γέω. heap, ξύω. παίω, παλαΐω, παΐω, πλέω, πρίω, σείω, τίνω, du,
χύω, χράω, xpiw, and poetic paiw. Soime, however, have forms both
with and without o. See the Catalogue.
642, (Strong Form of Stem in Second Class.) 1. Verbs
of the second class have the strong form of the stem (572),
as λειπ- OY λοιπ- iN λείτω, THK- IN τήκω, νευ- ἴῃ (verw) νέω, In all
tenses except in the second aorist aud second passive tense
systems; as φεύγω, φεύξομαι, πέφευγα, ἔφυγον ; λείπω, λείψω,
λέλοιπα, ἔλιπον; τήκω, τήξω, τέτηκα, ἐτάκην; pew (for pero),
ῥεύσομαι, ἐρρύην.
2. Exceptions are the perfect and aorist. passive of τεύχω (tvyx-),
which are regdlar in Tonic, and tnost tenses of χέω (yv-) aud σεύω
(av-). After the Attic reduplication (529) the weak form appears;
as in ἀλείφω (ἀλιφ-), ἀλ-ήλιφα : see also ἐρείκω and ἐρεύτω. The
perfects ἐρρύηκα (ῥέω) and ἐστίβημαι are from stems in ε- (658, 2).
643. (E changed to o in Second Perfect.) In the second
perfect systein, ε οὐ the verb stem is changed too Eg.
Στέργω, love, Catepya; πέμπω, send, πέπομφα;; κλέπτω, seal,
κέκλοφα (576; G92) 5 τρέφω, nourish, τέτροφα ; tiktw {τεκ-). bring
Sorth, τέτοκα; γώγομαι (yev-), become, γέγονα, ἐγεγόνη, γεγονέναι,
γεγονώς.
So ἐγείρω (ἐγερ-), ἐγρήγορα (582) 5 κτείνω (xtev-), ἔκτονα (in
compos.) ; λέγω, collect, εἴλοχα; πάσχω (παθ-, πενθ.), πέπονθα;
πέρδομαι, πέπορδιι; τρέπω, τέτροφα ; φέρω (ἐνεκ-), ἐνήνοχα ; φθείρω
(Pbep-). ἔφθορα; χίζω (χεδ.), κέχοδα.
For λείπ-ὦ, λέλοιπ-α, aid πείθεω, πέτποιθ-α, see 313 642, 1.
649) MODIFICATION OF THE VERB STEM. 147
644, (A lengthened to ἡ or ἃ in Second Perfect.) In some
verbs ἃ of the stein is lengthened to qora in the second perfect.
These are ἄγνῦμι (ay: ), €aya (lonic ἔηγα) ; θάλλω (θαλ- -), τέθηλα; ;
κράζω (κραγ- ), κέκραγα; λάσκω (λακ-), λέλάκα;; μαίνομαι (μαν-),
μέμηνα; σαίρω (σαρ:), σέσηρα; φαίνω (φαν-), πέφηνα.
645. (E changed to &) In monosyllabic liquid stems, ε
is generally changed to & in the first perfect, perfect imid-
dle, and second passive tense systems. Eg.
Στέλλω (στελ.), send, ἔσταλκα, ἔσταλμωι, ἐστάλην, σταλήσομαι;
κείρω (κερ- » shear, κέκαρμαι, ἐκάρην (lon. di σπείρω (σπερ-), sow,
ἔσπαρμαι, ἐσπάρην. So in δέρω, κτείνω, μείρομαι, τείνω, τέλλω, anid
φθείρω.
646. N. The same change of ε to a (after ρ) occurs in στρέφω.
tura, ἔστραμμαι, ἐστράφην, στραφήσομαι (but 1 aor. ἐστρέφθην,
rare); τρέπω, lurn, τέτραμμαι, ἐτράπην (but ἐτρέφθην, lon. ἐτρά
φθην); τρέφω, out TéOpuppat, ἐτράφην (Lut ἐθρέφθην) ; also
in the second aorist passive of κλέπτω, steal, πλέκω, weave, and
τέρπω, delight, ἐκλάπην, ἐπλάκην, and (epic) ἐτάρπην (1 aor. éxaAé
POnv, ἐπλέχθην, ἐτέρφθην, rarely epic ἐτάρφθην). It occurs, further,
in the second aorist (active or middle) of κτείνω, dill, τέμνω, cul,
τρέπων. aud répmw; viz, in Extavoy (puet.), ἔταμον, ἐταμόμην, ἔτρα-
πον, ἐτραπόμην, τεταρπόμην (llou.); also in several Homeric and
poetic forms (see δέρκομαι, πέρθω, and πτήσσω). For τείνω, ἐτάθην,
sce 11].
647. (N of stem dropped.) Four verbs in vw drop v of the
stem in the perfect and first passive systenis, and thus have
vowel stems in these forms : —
κρίνω (κριν-), separate, κέκρικα, κέκριμαι, ἐκρίθην ; κλίνω (KAtw-),
incline, κέκλικα, κέκλιμαι, ἐκλίθην;; πλύνον (πλυν-), Wash, τπτέπλυμκιιν,
ἐπλύθην; τείνων (rev-), stretch, τέτακα (010), τέταμαι, ἐτάθην, ἐκ-
ταθήσομαι. So κτείνω in some poetic forms; as ἐκτά-θην, ἐκτά-μην.
See also epic stem dev, gu. For the regular Homeric ἐκλίνθην
anid ἐκρίνθην, set TOY,
648. When final ν of a stein is uot thus dropped, it becomes
nasal y before κα (78, 1), and is generally replaced Ly o before μαι
(83); as φαίνω (φαν-), πέφαγκα, πέφασμαι, ἐφάνθην. (See 700.)
θ49. (λ]οιωιλονὶκ.) The stem sometimes suffers mefathesis (64):
(1) in the present, as θνησκω (θον-, Ova-), die, (616) ;
(2) in other tenses, as βάλλω (βαλ-, BAra-), throw, βέβληκα,
βέβλημαι, EBAYOyv; aud (poetic) δέρκομαι (depx-), see,2 aor. ἔδρακον
(δρακ-, 020).
148 INFLECTION. [650
650. (Syncope.) Sometimes syncope (65):
(1) in the present, as γίγνομαι (yev-), become, for ye-yev-opat;
(2) in the second aorist, as ἐπτόμην for ἐππετ-ομην ;
(3) in the perfect, as πετάννῦμι {πετα-), expand, πέπταμαι for
memweta-pat. See φέρω in 621,
651. (Reduplication.) Sometimes reduplication, besides the reg-
ular reduplication of the perfect stem (520):
(1) in the present, as γι-γνώσκω, know, γίγνομαι, τίθημι.
(2) in the second aorist, as πείθω (m6-), persuade, πέπιθον
(epic); so ἄγω, ἤγαγον (Attic).
652. 1. ‘The following are reduplicated in the present : —
(a) In Class 1., γέγνομαι (for γι γεντομαι) ; ἴσχω (for a-aex-w) ;
μίμνω (for pepevw), poetic for μένω; πίπτω (Sor πι-πετ-ω) ; τίκτω
(for re-rTex-w).
(Ὁ) In Class VI, βι.-βρώσκω (Bpo-), ye γνώσκω (yvo-), δι-δρᾶσκω
(δρα.), μεμνήσκω μία: ), πιπρᾶσκω (πρα:), τιτρώσκω (rpo-), With
poetic πεπίσκω and πι-φαύσκω, and dpapioxw with peculiar Attic
reduplication (615).
(c) In Class VII., the verbs in μὲ which are enumerated in
794, 2.
2. For reduplicated second aorists, see 534 and 535.
653. (E added to Stem.) New stems are often formed by
adding ε to the verb stem.
654. (1) From this new stem in « some verbs form the
present stem | (by adding %-), sometimes also other tense
stems. E.g.
Δοκέω (Soe), seem, pres. stem (Soxe%-, fut. δόξω; γαμξω (yop-)s
marry, fut. γαμῶ, pf. yeydunxa; abo (a6-), push, fut. dow (poet.
ὠθήσωλ).
655. These verbs are, further, γεγωνέω, γηθέω, κτυπέω, κυρέω,
μαρτυρέω (also μαρτύρομαι), ῥϊπτέω (also ῥίπτω), φιλέω (see epic
forms) ; 3; and poetic δουπέω, εἰλέω, ἐπαυρέω, κελαδέω, κεντέω, πατέο.
μαι, piyew, στυγέω, τορέω, and Χχραισμέω. See also πεκτέω (7reK-,
TEKT-).
Most verbs in ew have their regular stems in €, aS ποιέω {(ποιε-}»
make, fut. ἜΤΗ
656. N. A few chiefly poetic verbs add ἃ in the same way to
the ci stem. See Bpvxdopat, youw, Sypidw, μηκάομαι, μητιάω,
μύκάομαι.
657. (2) Gencrally the new stem in ¢ does not appear in
661) PRESENT SYSTEM. 149
the present. But in some verbs it forms special tenses; in
others it forms all the tenses except the present, imperfect,
second perfect, and the second aorists. £.g.
Βούλομαι (Bova-). wish, βουλήσομαι (Bovdc, G36); αἰσθάνομαι
(αἰσύ. ), perceive, αἰσθήσομαι (αἰσθε-), ἤσθημαι; μένω (mev-), 1 remain,
μεμένηκα (peve-); μάχομαι (μαχ-), fight, ful. (μαχέομαι) μαχοῦμαι,
ἐμαχεσάμην, μεμάχημαι.
658. 1. The following have the stem in ¢ in all tenses except
those mentioned (657) : αἰσθάνομει (αἰσθ-), ἀλέξω, ἄλθομαι (lon.),
ἁμαρτάνω (auupr-), avddvw (a8-), ἀπ-εχθάνομαι (-εχθ'), αὐξάνω (αὐξ-),
ἄχθομαι, βλαστάνω (βλαστ- ) βούλομαι, Boanw, Sew, want, ἐθέλω aud
θέλω, ἔ ἔρομαι and εἴρομαι (Ton.), ἔρρω, εὔδω, εὑρίσκω. ἔψω, κέλομαι
(poet.), κιχάνω {κιχ- ) λάσκω (λακ- ἡ, μανθάνω (μειθ.), μάχομαι, μεδο-
μαι, μέλλω, μέλω, pit, οἴομαι, οἴχομαι, ὀλισθάν:» (ὀλισθ =. ὀλλῦμι,
ὀφλισκάνω (ὀφλ-), πέτομαι, στύρνυμιε: See Poetic ἀμπλακίσκω and
ἀπαφίσκω, and the stem δα-. See also κερδαίνω.
2. The following lave the stem in ¢ in special teuses formed from
the verb stem or the weak stem (31): dupbivw (dup6-). μένω, νίμω,
ὀσφραίνομαι (Gadp-), παίω, πέτομαι, πείθω {πιθ.). ῥέω (pu-), στείβω
(στιβ-), τυγχάνω (τυχ-), χάζω (xad-); with γίγνομαι, ἔχω, τρέχω.
3. The following form certain tenses from a stem made by add-
ing ε to the present stem without the thematic vowel: διδάσκω,
καθίζω, κήδω, κλαίω, ὄζω, ὀφείλω, τύπτω, χαίρω.
659. N. In ὄμνῦμι, swear, the stem ὀμ- is enlarged to ὁμο- in
soine tenses, a3 in ὦμο-σα;; i dAdcoKopue, be captured, ἀλ- is enlarged
to ado, as in ἁλώσομαι. So tpixw (τρῦχο), exhaust, τρυχώσω. So
probably οἴχομαι, be gone, has steni οἶχο- for ofye in the perfect
οἴχω-κα (cf. lon. oxy pat).
FORMATION OF TENSE STEMS AND INFLECTION OF
TENSE SYSTEMS IN THE INDICATIVE.
I. Present Sysrem.
660. ‘he formation of the present stem and the inflee-
tion of the present and imperfect indicative have been
explained in 568-622 and 623-632.
661. The eight remaining tense stems (11.-1X.) are
formed from the verlh stem. This is the simplest form of
the stem in all classes of verbs except the Second, where it
is the strong form (575; 642).
For special modifications of certain tense stems, see 634-649.
150 INFLECTION. [862
For the inflection of the subjunctive, optative, and imperative
in 8}} tenses, see 718-758; for the formation of the infinitive, see
759-769; and for that of the participles and verbals in -ros and
“τεὸς, see 770-776.
II, Furvure System.
662. (Future Active and Middle.) Vowel and mute stems
(460) add o%- to form the stem of the future active and
middle. ‘he indicative active thus ends in ow, and the
middle in σομαι. They are inflected like the present (see
480). £19.
Τιμάω, honor, τμήσω (rinno%-) ; δράω, do, δράσω (635); κόπτω
(xor-), cul, κόψω; βλάπτω (βλαβ.), hurt, βλάψω, βλάψομαι (14);
γράφω, write, γράψω, γράψομαι; πλέκω, twist, πλέξω; πράσσω
(mpay-), do, πράξω, πρἄξομαι; ταράσσω (ταραχ-), confuse, ταράξω,
ταράξομαι; φράζω (φραδ.), tell, φράσω (for ppud-ow) ; πείθω, per-
suade, πείσω (for πειθ-σω) ; λεύτω, leave, λείψω, λείψομαι (042). So
σπένδω, pour, σπείσω (ἴον σπενδισω, 19). τρέφω, nourish, θρέψω,
θρέψομαι (98, 5).
663. (Liquid Futures.) Liquid stems (460) add «%- to
form the future stem, making forms in ἕω and ἕομαι, Con-
tracted to ὦ and odpat, and inflected like φιλῶ and φιλοῦμαι
(492). See 482. 2g.
Paivw (dav-), show, ΤΕ (φανέω) φανῶ, (φανέομαι) φανοῦμαι;
στέλλω (στελ-), send, (στελέ ω) στελῶ, (στελέομαι) στελοῦμαι;
νέμω, divide, (νεμέτω) vend; κρίνω (κριν-), 7ωάψο, (κρινέω) κρινῶ.
664. N. Here ¢%- is for an original ἐσϑέ-, the o being dropped
between two vowels (88).
665. (Attic Future.) 1. The futures of καλέω, call, and τελέω,
finish, καλέσω and τελέσω (639), drop σ of the future stem, and
contract καλε- and reAe with ὦ and opal, making καλῶ, καλοῦμαι,
τελῶ and (poetic) τελοῦμαι. ‘These futures have thus the same
forms as the presents.
So ὄλλῦμι (ὀλ-, dre), destroy, has future ὀλέσω (Hom. » ὀλέω
(Hadt.), ὀλῶ (Attic). So μαχέσομαι, Hfomeric future of μάχομαι
(μαχε-). fight, becomes μαχοῦμαι in Attic. Καθέζομαι (6), sit, bas
καθεδοῦμαι.
2. In like manner, futures in agw froin verbs in αννῦμι, some in
egw from verbs in ἐννῦμι, and some in agw from verbs in aw, drop
σ and contract aw and ew to & Thus σκεδάννῦμι (oxeda-), scatter,
fut. σκεδάσω, (σκεδάω) σκεδῶ ; στορέννῦμι (στορε-), spread, στορίσω,
(στορέω) στορῶ; βιβάζω, cause to go, βιβάσω, (βιβάω) βιβῶ. So
669] FIRST AORIST SYSTEM. 151
ἐλαύνω (€da-), drive (612), future ἐλάσω, (ἐλάω) ἐλῶ. For future
ἐλόύω, ἐλόωσι, etc. in Homer, see 784, 2 } (c).
3. Futures in iow and ἰσομαι from verbs in tfw of more than
two syllables regularly drop σ and insert εἰ then ἐέω and εέομαι
are contracted to w and widper; as κομίζω, carry, κομίσω, (κομεέω)
κομιῶ, κομίσομαι, (κομιέομαι) κομιοῦμαι, inflected like φιλῶ, φιλοῦ-
μαι (453). See 785, 1 (end).
These forins of future (665, 1-3) are called Attic, because the
purer Attic seldom uses any others in these tenses; but they are
found also in other dialects aud even in Homer.
666. (Doric Future.) 1. These verbs form the stem of the
future middle in o¢%-, and contract céopat to σοῦμαι: πλέω, sail,
πλευσοῦμαι (574); πνέω, breathe, rvevootpot; νέω, Swim, vevoovpat;
κλαίω, weep, κλαυσοῦμαι (001); φεύγω, flee, φενξοῦμαι; πέπτω, fall,
πεσοῦμαι. See also παίζω (590) and πυνθάνομαι.
The Attic has these, with the regular futures wAevoopat, πνεύ-
σομαι, κλαύσομαι, φεύξομαι (but never πέσομαι).
2. These are called Dorie futures, because the Doric forms
futures in σῶ, and σέομαι, σοῦμαι.
667. N. A few irregular futures drop σ of the stem, which thus-
has the eae of a present stem, Such are yéw and χέομαι,
ful. of yéw, pour; ἔδομαι, from ἐσθίω (ἐδ-), eat; πίομαι, from πίνω
(m-), drink (621).
668. N. A few poetic Hquid stems add o like mute stems;
κέλλω (κελ-), land, κέλσω; Kipw, meet, κύρσω; Spvupe (dp-), rouse,
ὄρσω. So θέρομαι, be warmed, Hon. fut. θέρσομαι; φθείρω (φθερ-),
destroy, Hom. fut. φθέρσω. For the corresponding aorists, see
674 (b).
III. First Aorist System.
669. (First Aorist Active and Middle.) 1. Vowel and
mute stems (460) add oa to form the stem of the first
aorist active and middle. The indicative active thus ends
in ga, which becomes σὲ in the third person singular; and
the iniddle ends in σαμην. Eg.
Tipdw, ἐτίμησα, ἐτϊμησάμην (635); δράω, paca; κόπτω, ἔκοψα,
ἐκοψάμην; βλάπτω, ἔβλαψα; γράφω, ἔγραψα, ἐγραψάμην; πλέκω,
ἔπλεξα, ἐπλεξάμην; πράσσω, Erpaka, ἐπραξάμην; ταράσσω, ἐτάραξα;
φράζω. ἔφρασα (for éppad-ca); πείθω. ἔπεισα (74); σπένδω, ἔσπεισα
(for ἐσπενδ-σα); τρέφω, ἔθρεψα, ἐθρεψάμην (95, 5); τήκω, melt,
ἔτηξα ; πλέω, sail, ἔπλευσα (514).
For the inflection, see 480,
152 INFLECTION. (676
670. Three verbs in μι, δίδωμι (80-). give, ἴημα (é), send, and
τίθημι (Ge-), put, have xa for ga in the first aorist active, giving
ἔδωκα, ἡκα, and ἔθηκα. These forms are seldom used except in the
indicative, and are most common in the singular, where the second
aorists are not in use. (See 802.) Even the middle forms ἡκάμην
and ἐθηκάμην occur, the latter not in Attic Greek (810).
671. N. Χέω, pour, has aovists ἔχεα (Hom. ἔχευα) and ἐχεάμην,
corresponding to the futures yéw and χέομαι (007), Εἶπον, said,
has also first aorist εἶπα ; and φέρω, bear, has ἤνεγκ-α (from stem
ἐνεγκ-).
For Homeric aorists like ἐβήσετο, ἐδύσετο, ἵξον, etc., see 777, 8.
672. (Liquid Aorists.) Liquid stems (460) drop σ in oa,
leaving a, and lengthen their last vowel, a to y (after ὁ or p
toa) and e toe (39). See 482. Lg.
Paivw (φαν-), ἔφην-α (for ἐφανσα) ; στέλλω (στελ-), ἔστειλα
(for ἐστελ-σα) ἐστειλιάμην; ἀγγέλλω (dyya- ), announce, ἤγγειλα,
ἠγγειλάμην; περαίνω (σερων- yy fi Jinish, ἐ err epavea ; μιαίνω (ptav- » stain,
€uiava } νέμω, divide, ἔνειμα, ἐνειμάμην; κρΐνω, judge, € EKPLVO.} ἀμύνω,
keep off, ἡμῦνα, ἠμύνάμην ; φθείρω (φθερ-), destroy, ἔφθειρα. Corn-
pare the futures in 663, and see 664.
673. N. A few liquid stems lengthen av to av irregularly; as
κερδαίνω (κερδαν-), yain, exépdava. A few lengthen ραν to pv; as
τετραίνω (τετραν-), Lore, ἐτέτρηνα.
674. N. (a) Αἴρω (ἀρ- ds raise, has ἦρα, ἠράμην (auginented) :
but ἃ in other forins, as dpw. ἄρον. ἄρᾶς, ἄρωμαι, ἀραίμην, ἀράμενος
(0) The poetic κέλλω, κύρω, and ὄρνῦμι have aorists ἔκελσα,
ἔκυρσα, aud ὥρσα. See the corresponding futures (068), But
ὀκέλλω (in prose) has ὠκειλα (see $9).
IV. S:conp Aonist System,
675. (Second Aorist Active and Middle.) The stem of
the second aorist active and middle of the common form
(565) is the verb stem (in the second class, the weak stem)
with %- affixed. These tenses are inflected in the indicative
like the imperfect (see 626). Evy.
Aetrw (572), ἔλιπον, ἐλιπόύμην (2 aor. stem Aur%-); λαμβάνω
(AaB-), take, ἔλαβον, ἐλαβόμην (2 aor. stem AaB%-). See 451.
676. N. A few second aorist stems change ε to a; as τέμνω
(rep-), cul, Jonic and poetic ἔταμον, ἐταμόμην. See 646.
677. N. A few stems are syncopated (650); as πέτομαι {πετ-),
fly, 2 aor. m. ἐπτόμην for ἐπετ-ομην ; ἐγείρω (eyep-), rouse, ἠγρόμην
683] FIRST PERFECT SYSTEM. 153
for ἠγερ-ομην; ἦλθον, went, from stem ἐλυθ-, for ἤλυθον (Tom.);
ἕπομαι (aer-), follow, ἑσπόμην, for écem-opny; ἔχω (σεχ-), have,
ἔσχον for ἐσεχον. So the Homeric ἐκεκλόμην, for é-Kexed-ouny, or
κεκλόμην, froin κέλομαι, command ; ἄλαλκον, for dd-adex-ov, from
ἀλέξω (drex-), ward off: for these and other reduplicated second
aorists, see O31; 535. For ἤγαγον, 2 aor. of ἄγω, seo 15,
678. (Me-form.) The stem of the second aorist of the
pe-form is the simple verb stem with no suffix. ‘The stem
vowel is regularly long (y, ὦ, or 5) throughout the indicative
active, and the third person hits the ending oav. (or the long
vowel] in the imperative and infinitive, see 150; 766, 2.) 10.
ἽἼστημι (ora-), 2 aor. ἔστην, ἔστης, ἔστη. ἔστησαν, otc. Lor the
inflection, see 06, Fur δίδωμι, ἔγμι, ad τίϑημι, see 5U2.
For the great variety of forms in these second aorists, see the
complete enumeration (795; 799).
679. The second aorist middle of the peform regularly drops
σ in go in the second person singular (04, 6) afier a short vowel,
and then contracts that vowel with 0; as ἔθου for é-Geoo (ἐθεο);
ἔδου for é-80-c0 (€800).
680. Verbs in due form no Attic second aorists from the stem
in v (797, 1).
681. For sceond avrisis middle in nen, yany, and ὑμὴν, and
some from consonant stems, see S00.
V. First Perrecr Sysrem.
682. (First Perfect and Pluperfect Active.) The stem of
the first perfeet active is formed by adding καὶ to the redu-
plicuted verb stem. It has κα, nas, we in the indicative
singular, and κάσι (for xa-vor), rarely κἄσι i poetry, in the
third person plural. For the inflection, see 480. FLg.
Abe, (AeAuK) λέλνκα;; πείθω, persuade, πέπεικα (Lor me-med-xa) ;
κομίζω (κομιδ.), carry, κεκόμικα (ἴον Ke-Kopud-Ka, 73).
683. 1. The pluperfeet changes final a- of the perfect
Stein to ε-, to which are added aoristie terminations a, as, €
(G69) in the singular, ea, eas, ce(v) being contracted to ἡ» ys,
a(v) in Attic. The dual and plural add the regular sec
ondary endings (552) to the stem ine, with gay in the third
person plural. 24g.
᾿Ελελύκη, ἐλελύκης, ἐλελύκει(ν), ἐλελύκειτον, ἐλελύκειμεν, ἐλελύ
κε-τε, ἐλελύκε-σαν : στέλλω, ἔσταλκα. ἐσ τάλκη, ἐστάλκης, CUTaAKEL(Y),
ἐστάλκε-μεν, ἐστάλκεισαν. Ἰδὼν a(v), see ὅδ.
154 INFLECTION. [684
2. In the singular, Herodotus has the original ea, eas, ἐε, and
Homer has eu, ys, ee(v); later Attic writers, and soinetimes the ora-
tors, have εἰν; ets, a. In the dual and plural εἰ for ¢€ is not classic.
684. The stem may be modified before « in both perfect and
pluperfect, by lengthening its final vowel (635), by changing € to
& in monosyllabic liquid stems (645), by dropping ν in a few verbs
(847), or by metathesis (649); as φιλέω, love, πεφίληκα; φθείρω
(φθέερ-), destroy, ἔφθαρκα; xpivw (xpw-), Judge, κέκρικα ; βάλλω
(βαλ-), throw, βέβληκα (636).
685. N. Ex of the stem becomes ot in (δείδω) δέδοικα (31).
686. N. The first perfect (or perfect in κα) belongs especially
to vowel stems, and in Homer it is found only with these. It was
afterwards formed frou: many liquid stems, and from some lingual
stems, 7, δ, or 8 being dropped before κα.
VI. Srconp Perrecr System.
687. (Second Perfect Active.) The stem of the second
perfect of the common form is the reduplicated verb stem
with a affixed; as ypdd-w, write, γέγραφα (stem yeypuda-) ;
φεύγω, flee, πέφευγα (642).
688. 1. For the change of ¢ to o in the stem, see 643. For
λέλοιπα and πέποιθα, see 642, 1, and 31.
2. For the lengthening of ἄ to y or ἃ in some verbs, see 644.
3. For the lengthening of the stem vowel in λαγχάνω (Aay-),
λαμβάνω (AaB-), λανθάνω (λαθ.), τυγχάνω (τυχ-), and some other
verbs, see θ1].
688. Ν. Ἔρρωγα from ῥήγνῦμι (pny-) and εἴωθα (537, 2) from
ἔθω (96-) change ἡ of the steni to ὦ (31).
680. N. Vowel stems do not form second perfects; dxyxo-a, from
ἀκούω, hear (stem ἀκου-, dxog-), is only an apparent exception.
681. N. Homer has many second perfects not found in Attic;
as mpo-BéBovra from βούλομαι, wish; μέμηλα froin μέλω, concern ;
ἔολπα from ἔλπω, hope; δέδουπα from δουπέω (Sour-), resound.
692. (Aspirated Second Perfects.) Most stems ending in
m or β change these to ¢, and most ending in « or y change
these to x, in the second perfect, if a short vowel precedes.
Those in ¢ and y make no change. £.g.
BAdrrw (BdraB-), βέβλαφα; κόπτω (Kom-), κέκοφα; ἀλλάσσω
(ἀλλαγ-), ἤλλαχα; φυλάσσω (φυλακ-), πεφύλαχα.
But πλήσσω, πέπληγα: φεύγω. πέφευγα: στέργω, ἔστοργα; λάμπω,
λέλαμπα. In ἄγω (ἀγ-), ἦχα, 7 is lengthened by reduplication.
699] PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM. 155
693. The following verbs form aspirated second perfects : ἄγω,
ἀλλάσσω, ἀνοίγω, βλάπτω, δείκνῦμι, κηρύσσω, κλέπτω, κόπτω, λαμ-
βάνω, λάπτω, λέγω (collect), μάσσω, πέμπω, πράσσω, πτήσσω, τάσσω,
τρέπω, τρίβω, φέρω, φνλάσσω. Of these δείκνῦμι, κηρύσσω, λαμ-
βάνω, πέμπω, and πτήσσω are exceptions to 692. ᾿Ανοίγω has both
dylwya and ἀνέῳχα, and mpacow has both πέπραχα, have done, and
mempaya, fare (well or ill).
694. N. The aspirated perfect is not found in Homer: only
τέτροφα (τρέπω) occurs in tragedy, and only πέπομφα in Herodotus
and ‘Thucydides. Jt is common in comedy and in the subsequent
prose.
695. The inflection of the second perfect of the common form
is the same as that of the first perfect (see 682).
696. (Second Pluperfect Active.) ‘The stem of the second
pluperfect changes final a- of the second perfect stem to e.
It has the same inflection as the first pluperfect (683). Evg.
᾿Ἐπεφήνη, ἐπεφήνης, ἐπεφήνει(ν), ἐπεφήνεμεν, ἐπεφήνεσαν, etc.
697. (Mcforms.) A few verbs have second perfects and plu-
perfects of the simple weform, which affix the endings directly to
the verb stem. They are never found in the singular of the
indicative. £.g.
Θνήσκω (Ova-, θαν-), die, 2 perf. τέθνα-τον, τέθνα-μεν, τέθνασι;
2 pipf. ἐτέθνασαν. (See 508.)
These pe-forms are enumerated in 804.
VIT. Perrecrt Minnie System.
698. (Perfect and Pluperfect Middle.) The stem of the
perfect and pluperfect middle is the reduplicated verb stem,
to which the endings are directly affixed. Eg.
Abu, λέλυ-μαι, A€Av-gat, A€Av-rat, λέλυ-σθε, λέλυται; ἐλελύ.
μην, ἐλελύμεθα, ἐλέλυντο; λεύτω (λειπ-), λέλειμεμαι (75), λέλειψαι,
λέλειπ-ται.
For the inflection, sec 480.
699. ‘The stem may be modified (in general as in the first per-
fect active), by lengthening its final vowel (635), by changing ε to
a in monosyllabic liquid stems (645), by dropping ν in a few verbs
(617), or by metathesis (649); as φιλέω, πεφίλη-μαι, ἐπεφιλή-
μην; φθείρω (Pbep-), EPOap-pat, ἐφθάρ-μην ; κρένω (κριν-), κέκρι-μαι,
ἐκεκρίμην; βάλλω (βαλ-, βλα-), βέβλητμαι, ἐβεβλήμην. (See
684.)
150 INFLECTION. (700
700. When ν is not dropped before μαι (647), it is generally
replaced by @ (883), and it sometimes becomes μ (78, 2); a8 φαίνω
(φων-), πέφασ-μαι, ἐπεφάσ-μην; ὀξύνω (dbvv-), sharpen, ὥξυμοεμαι.
Before endings not beginning with μι, the original y reappears;
as wépay-rat, réepav-Oe; but forms in γισαι and y-co (like πέφαν-σαι,
ἐπέφαν-σο) seein not to occur.
701. In the third person plural of the perfect and pluperfect
middle, conson:ut stems are compelled to use the perfect participle
with ead and ἦσαν (486, 2
Here, however, the Tonic endings arat and aro for yrat and yro
(777, 3) are oceasionally used even in Attic prose; as reray-arat
and ἐτετάχατο (Thucyd.) for τεταγμένοι εἰσί and ἦσαν.
702. 1. For perfects in appac of στρέφω, τρέπω, τρέφω, see 646.
2. For the addition of o to certain vowel stems before endings
not beginning with o, as rereAcopat, see 640.
703. (Future Perfect.) The stem of the future perfect
is formed by adding o%- to the stem of the perfect middle.
It ends in σομαι, and las the inflection of the future mid-
dle (662). A short final vowel is always lengthened before
σομαι. Lg.
Λύω, λειλῦ-, λελύσομαι; ypad-w, yeypud-, γεγράψομαι (74);
λείπω, λελειπο, λελείψομαι; δέω, bind, δέδεμαι (0639), δεδήτσομαι;
πράσσω (xpay-), πεπρᾶγ-, πεπράξομαι.
704. The future perfect is generally passive in sense. But it
has a middle meaning in μεμνήσομαι, shall remember, and πεπαύσο-
pat, shall have ceased; and it is active in κεκτήσομαι, shall possess.
10 is found in only a small number of verbs.
705. N. Two verbs have a special form in Attic Greek for the
future perfect active; θνήσκω, die, has τεθνήξω, shall be dead, formed
from the perfect. stem reOvnx-; aud ἵστημι, set, has ἑστήξω, shall
stand, froin ἑστηκ-, stem of perfect ἕστηκα, stand. In Homer, we
have also κεχαρήσω and κεχαρήσομαι, from χαίρω (xap-), refoice ;
and κεκαδήσω (irreg.), from χάζω (xu8), yield.
706. N. In most verbs the future perfect active is expressed by
the perfect participle and ἔσομαι (future of εἰμί be); as ἐγνωκότες
ἐσόμεθα, we shall have learnt. The future perfect passive may also
be expressed in this way; as ἀπηλλαγμένοι ἐσόμεθα, we shall have
been freed.
VII. First Passrve Systre.
707. (First Aorist Passive.) The stem of the first aorist
passive is formed by adding θε to the stem as it appears in
112] SECOND PASSIVE SYSTEM. 157
the perfect middle (omitting the reduplication). In the
indicative and infinitive, and in the imperative except be-
fore vr, θε becomes θη. It has the secondary active end-
ings (552), and is inflected (in general) like the second
aorist active in ἣν of the pe-form (678). Eg.
Ato, λέλυ-μαι, ἐλύθην (Av6r) 5 λείπω, λέλειμ:μαι, ἐλείφθην
(λειπ-θη;, .11); πράσσω (mpay-), πέπρᾶγμαι, ἐπράχθην (πρᾶγθη:);}
πείθω, πέπεισ-μαι, ἐπείσ-θην ; φιλέω, πεφίλγμαι, ἐφιλήθην; πλέω
(πλυ:), πέπλευσ-μαι, ἐπλεύσθην (641); τείνω (rer), τέτα-μαι, ἐτάθην
(647); βάλλω (βαλ-, βλα-), βέβλημαι, ἐβλήθην ; τελέω, τετέλεσ-μαι
(640), ἐτελέσθην ; ἀκούω, ἤκουσμαι, ἠκούσθην. See 480.
708, N. Ὑρέπω has τέτραμμαι (646), but ἐτρέφθην (on. ἐτρά-
POnv): τρέφω has τέθραμμαι, ἐθρέφθην; aud στρέφω has ἔστραμ-
μαι, with (rare) ἐστρέφθην (Ion. and Dor. ἐστράφθην). Φαίνω has
πέφασμαι (700), but ἐφάνθην.
709. Κ΄ N is added iu Homer to some vowel stems before @ of the
aorist passive; aS ἱδρύω, erect, ἵδρῦμαι, ἱδρύν-θΘην, as if from a stem in
vy (Attic ἱδρύϑην). So Hom. ἐκλένθην and ἐκρίνθην (647), from original
stems In ».
For ἐτέθην from τέθημι (θε-), and ἐτύθην from θύω, sacrifice, see 95, 3.
For ἐθρέφθην from τρέφω, nourish, and other forms with interchange-
able aspirates, see θῦ, 5.
710. (First Future Passive.) The stem of the first future
passive adds o%- to the prolonged stem (in θη) of the first
aorist passive. It ends in θήσομαι, and is inflected like the
future middle (062). E-g.
Ai, ἐλύθην, λυθήσομαι (stem AvOne%-); λείπω, ἐλείφθην, λει-
φθήσομαι; πράσσω (mpay- ), ἐπράχθην, πράχθήσομαι; πείθω, ἐπεί:
σθην, πεισθήσομαι; τείνω, ἐτάθην, ταθήσομαι; πλέκω, ἐπλέχθην,
πλεχθήσομαι; τἱμάω, ἐτιμήθην, τιμηθήσομαι; τελέω, ἐτελέσθην,
τελεσθήσομαι; κλίνω, ἐκλίθην, κλιθήσομαι.
711. The first passive system rarely appears in verbs with
monosyllabic liquid stems (645). But τείνω (rev), stretch (647),
has ἐτάθην and ταθήσομαι.
IX. Srcoxp Passive System.
712. (Second Aorist Passive.) The stem of the second
aorist passive is formed by adding ε to the verb stem (in
the second class, to the weak stem, 31). In the indicative,
infinitive, and imperative, except before vr (707), « becomes
ἡ. The only regular modification of the stem is the change
of «toa (645). For the inflection, see 482. Eg.
158 INFLECTION. [118
Βλάπτω (βλαβ.), hurt, ἐβλάβην , γράφω (γραφ-), write, ἐγράφην ;
ῥίΐπτω (ῥιφ-), throw, ἐρρίφην; φαίνω (φαν-), ἐφάνην ; στρέφω, turn,
ἐστράφην( 46); τέρπω, amuse, ἐτάρπην; στέλλω(στελ-), send, ἐστάλην.
713. N. Πλήσσω (rAny-), strike, has 2 aor. pass. ἐπλήγην, but
in composition ἐξεπλάγην and xat-erAdyny (from stem mAay-).
714, N. Some verbs have both passive aorists; as βλάπτω
(Braf-), hurt, ἐβλάφθην and ἐβλάβην; στρέφω, turn, ἐστρέφθην (rare)
and ἐστράφην (040). Τρέπω, turn, has all the six aorists: érpepa,
ἐτρεψάμην, ἔτραπον (epic and lyric), ἐτραπόμην, ἐτρέφθην, ἐτράπην.
715. (Second Future Passive.) The stem of the second
future passive adds o%- to the prolonged stem (in 7) of
the second aorist passive. It ends in yoou and is inflected
like the first future (710). Εἰ.
Βλάπτω (Braf-), ἐβλάβην, βλαβή:σομαι; γράφω, ἐγράφην, ypadr-
σομαι; φαίνω (pav-), ἐφάνην, φανήσομαι; στέλλω (στελ-), ἐστάλην,
σταλήσομαι; στρέφω, ἐστράφην, στραφήξσομωι.
716. N. The weak stem of verbs of the second class, which
seldom appears in other tenses than the second aorists (642), is
seen especially in the second passive system; as σήπω (σαπ-), cor
rupt, ἐσάπην, σαπήσομαι; τήκω (τακ-), melt, ἐτάκην ; pew (pv-), flow,
ἐρρύην, ῥνήσομαι; ἐρείπω (ἐριπ-), throw down, ἠρίπην (poetic), but
1 aor, ἠρείφθην (ἐρειπ-).
717. The following table shows the nine tense stems (so
far as they exist) of λύω, λείτω, mpdcow (mpay-), φαίνω
(φαν-), and στέλλω (στελ-), With their sub-divisions.
Tense SYSTEM.,
Present. ADR - Aaw%- πρᾶσσοζ- daw%- oreadr(%-
Future. λῦσος- hep %- ampat%- have%- στελεῦζς-
1 Aorist. λυσα- πρᾶξα- φηνα- στειλα-
2 Aorist. λιπός-
1 Perfect. λελυκα- mepayxa- ἐσταλκα-
2 Perfect. λελοιπα- oe πεφηνα-
πέπραχα-
Perf. (Perf. dedv- λελειπ- πεπρᾶγ- πεφαν- ἐσταλ-
Mid. )¥ut.P.rodio%- χελειψθς- πεπρᾶξος-
1 Pass, (ΔοΥ. λνυθε(η)- λειφθε(η)- πρᾶχθε(η)- φανθε(η)-
Fut. λυθησός- λειφθησός- πρᾶχθησοξ- davOno %-
2 Pass. πὰ φανε(η)- σταλε(η)-
φανησῦςζ- σταλησύς-
124] SUBJUNCTIVE, 159
FORMATION OF THE DEPENDENT MOODS AND
THE PARTICIPLE.
SULJUNCTIVE,
718. The subjunctive as the primary endings (552) in
all its tenses. In all forms (even in verbs in pe) it has a
long thematic vowel /,- (561, 2).
719. (Common Form.) In the common form of inflec-
tion, the present and second aorist tense stems change Ve
to “/y-, and the first aorist tense stem changes final « to “/,-.
All have ὦ, ys, 7 in the singular, and wot for ὠνσι (78, 3) in
the third person plural, of the active. Εἰ.
Acéru, pres. subj. λείπω, λείπωμαι, 2 aor. λίπω, λύτωμαι; λύω,
1 aor. λύσω, λύσωμαι.
720, A perfect subjunctive active is rarely formed, on the
analogy of the present, by chauging final a of the tense stem to
Ply} 85 λέλυκα, λελύκω; εἴληφα, εἰλήφω. (See 731.) But the
more common form of the tense is the perfect active participle
with ὦ (subjunctive of εἰμί, be); as λελυκὼς ὦ, εἰληφὼς ὦ.
721. The perfect subjunctive middle is almost always
expressed by the perfect middle participle aud ὦ; as λελυ-
μένος ὦ ἧς, }, etc.
722. A few verbs with vowel stems form a perfect subjune-
tive middle directly, by adding “/, to the tense stem ; as κτάομαι,
acquir 6, pi. κέκτημαι, Possess, uj. ᾿κεκτῶμαι (for κεικτητωμαι), κεκτῇ,
κεκτῆται; BO μιμνῇσκω, remind, μέμνημαι, remember (memini), subj.
μεμνῶμαι, μεμνώμεθα (dt. μεμνεώμεθα). These follow the analogy
of ἱστῶμαι, -ἢ, -ἥται, etc. (724). (For a similar optative, see 734.)
723. (Meform.) In all pe-forms, including both passive
aorists (564), the final vowel of the stem is contracted with
the thematic vowel (w ory), so that the subjunctive ends
in @ oY ὥμαι.
724. 1. Verbs in ype (with stems in © and a-) have ὦ, ἧς, ἢ»
Spat, ἢ, ται, etc., in the subjunctive, as if all had steins In «. Thus
ἴστημι (ora-) has ἱστῆς, ἱστῇ, ἱστῆται, στῆς, στῇ, etc., as if the
uncontracted form were tarew, not iora-w. These aetise have
Tonic stems in ε- (see 788, 1).
2. ‘The inflection is that of the subjunctives φιλῶ and φιλῶμαι
(492).
160 INFLECTION. (726
725. For the inflection of the aorist passive subjunctive, with
ε of the tense stem contracted with ὦ or ἡ, as λυθῶ (for λυθέω),
λυθῶμεν (for λυθξωμεν), ete., φανῶ (for φανέω), ete., see 480, 3.
726. For a few subjunctives of the simple perfect of the pu-
form, 88 ἑστῶ (for écra-w), βεβῶσι (for BeBa-wor), see 508,
727. Verbs in ws (with stem in 0) have by contraction ὦ, ds,
@; CtC., Guat, @, Oras, etc. (for ow, Ons, 0-7, Cwpat, etc.) ; as δίδωμι,
subj. διδῶ, διδῷς, διδῷ; διδῶμαι, διδῷ, διδῶται, etc.
728. Verbs in νῦμε form the subjunctive (as the optative, 743)
like verbs in w; as δείκνῦμι, subj. δεικνύω, Sexvi-wpat.
729. N. Δύναμαι, Con, ἐπίσταμαι, understand, κρέμαμαι, hang,
and the second aorist ἐπριάμην, bought, accent the subjunctive (as
the optative, 742) as if there were no contraction; thus δύνωμαι,
ἐπίστωμαι, κρέμωμαι, πρίωμαι (compare τιθῶμαι).
OPTATIVE,.
730. 1. The optative adds the secondary endings (552)
to the tense stem, preceded by the mood suffix (562) c or wy
(ce); as λύοιτε (for Avotre), ἱσταΐην (for ἱστα-ιη-ν), λυθεῖεν
(for AvOe-te-v). For the ending w, see ΤΟΙ,
2. The form ty appears only before active endings. It
is always used in the singular of p-forms with these end-
ings (including the aorist passive, 564, 7) and of contracted
presents in omy and φην of verbs in aw, éw, and ow. After en
the first person singular always has the ending ν. See ex-
amples in 737 and 739.
8. Before the ending ν of the third person plural te is
always used; as λύοιεν (for Avo-ue-v).
4, In the second person singular middle, co drops σ (564,
6); as ἱσταῖο (for lora-t-oo, ἱστα-ι-ο).
781. (Verde in w.) Verbs in ὦ have the ending μὲ (for v)
in the first person singular in all tenses of the active voice.
In the present, future, and second aorist systems, the the-
matie vowel (always o) is contracted with . to οἱ, giving
οιμί, OLS, οἱ, ELC., οἰμὴν, oto, otro, etc. In the first aorist sys-
tem, final a of the tense stem is contracted with 1, giving
atpt, ats, at, ete, (but see 732), αἰμην, ato, atro, ete. The rare
perfect active (like the subjunctive, 720) follows the anal
“ogy of the present. Eg.
181) OPTATIVE. 161
Adyoyu (for Acyotpt), λέγοις (for Aeyors), λέγοι (for Acyor),
λέγοιτε (for Aeyou-re), λέγοιεν (for Aeyowev). ΔΛεύτω, 2 aor. λίτοιμι
(for Aurot-pt), Adrovey (for λιποιεν). Λύσαιμι (for Adoa-t-p),
λύσαιμεν (for Adaa-t-pev), λῦσαίμην (for λῦσα-ι-μην), λύσαισθε (for
λύσα-ι-σθε). Perf. εἴληφα, opt. εἰλήφοιμι, ete.
732. The Attic generally uses the socalled Acolic terminations
cus, ee, and εἰν, for ats, at, atev, in the aorist active; as λύσειας,
λύσειε, λύσειαν. See Abw and φαίνω in 480, 1 and 482.
733. The perfect middle is almost always expressed by the
perfect middle participle and εἴην; as λελυμένος εἴην (see 480, 2).
The perfect active is more frequently expressed by the perfect
active participle and εἴην than by the form in oe given in the
paradigms; as λελυκὼς εἴην. (See 720; 721.)
784. 1. A few verbs with vowel stems form a perfect optative
middle (like the subjunctive, 722) directly, by adding ὑμὴν OF
orpyy to the tense stem; as κτάομαι, pf. κέκτημαι, opt. κεκτήμην,
KEKTI}O, KERTHTO (for KEKTI-E NY, KEKTIPLO, KEKTypt-TO), etc.; also
κεκτῴμην, κεκτῷο, κεκτῷτο (ἴον κεκτηο μὴν, etc.); so μιμνήσκω,
μέμνημαι, opt. μεμνή μην OF μεμνῴμην ; καλέω, κέκλημαι, opt. κεκλη-
μην, κεκλῇο, κεκλήμεθα; and βάλλω, βέβλημαι, opt. δια-βεβλῇσθε.
So Hom. λελῦτο or λελῦντο (for AcAvero or λελυεντο), perf. opt. of
λύω. Compare δαινῦτο, pres. opt. of δαίνῦμι.
2, The fornns in ῳμὴν belong to the common form of inflection
(with the thematic vowel); those in ἡμὴν, etc. and tro have the
pe-forin (740).
735. A few verbs have ony (787) in the second perfect opta-
tive; as ἐκπέφενγα, ἐκπεφευγοίην.
The second aorist optative of ἔχω, have, is σχοίην, but the regu-
lar cae is used in composition.
736. A very few relics remain of an older active optative with »
for μι in the first person singular; as τρέφοι-ν for τρέφοι-μι, ἁμάρτοι-ν
for ἁμάρτοι-μι (frou ἁμαρτάνω).
737. (Contract Verbs.) In the present active of contract
verbs, forms in uy, ups, ty, ete., contracted with the the-
matic vowel o to otnr, orgs, oy, ete., are much more common
in the singular than the regular forms in out, ots, οἱ, but
they seldom occur in the dual and plural. Both the forms
in omy and those in oyu are again contracted with ana of
the verb stem to ῳην and gp, and with an ec or o to omy and
ome. Eg.
162 INFLECTION. [738
Tipo-oury, τιμα-οίην, Tipwnv; pire σαγν, φιλε- -οίην, φιλοίην ;
δηλοσίιην, δηλοοίην, δηλοίην; τἴματ-οτ-μι, τιμά-οιμι, τιμῷμε; φιλε-ο-
tpt, φιλέοιμι, φιλοῖμι; δηλοσιμι, Spro-oyu, δηλοῖμι. (See the
inflection in 492.)
It is only the second contraction which makes these contract
forms.
738. For the optative piywny, from fiyde, shiver, see 497.
738, (Mcform.) 1. The present and second aorist active
of the pe-form, and both aorists passive in all verbs, have
the suffix cy, and in the first person singular the ending ».
Here a, «¢, or o of the stem is contracted with ey to aty, en,
Or on; AS toratnyv, ἱσταίην; στατίητμεν, σταίΐίημεν ; AvOe-ty-v,
λυθείην ; So-upv, δοίην.
2. In the dual and plural, forms with ¢ for τη, and tey for
tyoay in the third person plural, are much more common
than the longer forms with wm; aS σταῖμεν, oratre, σταῖεν
(better than σταίημεν, σταίητε, σταίησαν). See 506.
740, In the present and second aorist middle of verbs in
μι and wyt, final a, ¢ or o of the stem is contracted with
t into at, εἰ, or οἱ, to which the simple endings μην, etc., are
added. E.g.
Ἱσταίμην (for ἱστα-ι-μην), ἱσταῖο, ἱσταῖτο; θείμην (θε-- μην)»,
θεῖο (Ge-t-c0, θε--ο), θεῖτο; δοίμην (δο-ι-μην). See the inflection in
506; and 780, 4. See also the cases of perfect optative middle
in ῃμὴν and vro in 784,
741. N. The optatives τιθοίμην, τιθοῖο, τιθοῖτο, etc. (also
accented τίθοιο, τίθοιτο, etc.) and (in composition) θοίμην, θοῖο,
θοῖτο, εἰς. (also accented σύν-θοιτο, πρόσ-θοισθε, etc.), as if
formed from τιθέω (or τιθω), are found, as well as the regular
τιθείμην θείμην, etc. See also πρόοιτο and other forms of tu
(810, 2).
742. N. Δύναμαι, ἐπίσταμαι, κρέμαμαι, and the second aorists
ἐπριάμην (505) and ὠνήμην (from ὀνίνημι), accent the optative as
if there were no contraction; δυναίμην, δύναιο, δύναιτο ; ἐπίσταιτο,
ἐπίσταισθε, κρέμαιο, mpiato, mpiawro, ὄναισθε. For the similar sub-
junctives, see 729.
743, Verbs in νῦμι form the optative (as the subjunctive,
728) like verbs in w; as δείκνῦμι, Opt. δεικνύοιμι, δεικνυοίμην
(inflected like λύοιμι, λδοίμην).
162] IMPERATIVE. 163
744, N. Second aorists from stems in v of the pu-form (88
uv) have no optative in Attic (see 506). But Homer has a few
forms like δύη, δῦμεν (for δυ-ίη, dv-t-pev), from ἔδῦν.
745. A few second perfect optatives of the form are made
by adding ἐητν to stems in a-; as τεθναίην (for τεθνα-ιη-ν), ἑσταίην
(508). See the enumeration of ze-forms, 804.
IMPERATIVE.
746. (Common Form.) The present and the second
aorist active and middle of the common form have the
thematic vowel ¢ (o before vrwv), to which the imperative
endings (553) are affixed. But the second person singular
in the active has no ending; in the middle it drops a in go
and contracts eo to ov. Εἰ.
ΔΛεῖπε, λειπέτω, λείπε-τον, λειπέττων, λείπε-τε, λειπόνντων ; λείπου,
λειτέσθω, λείπεισθον, λειπέσθων, λείπε-σθε, λειπέσθων. So λίπε
and λιποῦ.
747. ‘Yhe first aorist active and middle are also irregular in
the second person singular, where the active has a termination oy
and the middle a for final a of the stem. In other persons they
add the regular endings to the stein in σα- (or a-). Eug.
Adgov, λύσάττω, λύσα-τον, λύσά-ττων, λύσα-τε, λύσα-ντων; λῦσαι,
λυσάσθω, λύσα-σθε, λῦσά-σθων. Φῆνον, φηνά-τω, εἴο.; φῆναι, φηνά-
σθω, φήνα-σθε, φηνά-σθων.
748. ‘The perfect active is very rare, except in a few cases of
the ge-form (508) with a present meaning. But Aristophanes has
kexpayere, screech, from κράζω (Kpay-), and κεχήνετε, yape, from
χάσκω (χων-).
749. The third person singular of the perfect passive is the
only form of perfect imperative in common use; for this see 1274,
750. N. The secand person singular of the middle occasionally
occurs as an emphatic form; as πέπαυσο, stop!
751. N. The perfect imperative in all voices can be expressed
by the perfect participle and ἴσθι, ἔστω, etc. (imperative of εἰμί,
be) ; as εἰρημένον ἔστω, for εἰρήσθω, let it have heen said (i.e. let what
has been said stand), πεπεισμένοι ἔστων, suppose them to have been
persuaded.
752. (Mcform.) The present imperative of the yu-form retains
θι in the second person singular active only in a few primitive
164 INFLECTION. [763
verbs; as in φα-θί from φημί (φα-), say, ἴτθι from εἶμι (i-), go, ἴστθι
from εἰμί, be, and from οἶδα, know. (See 806; 808; 812; 820.)
For Homeric forms in θι, see 790.
753, The present active commonly omits & in the second
person, and lengthens the preceding vowel of the stem (a,
€, 0, OF v) tO ἡ, εἰ, ov, OF ὕ; as ἵστη, τίθει, δίδου, and δείκνῦ.
The other persons add the regular endings (553) to the
short stem; as ἱστά-τω, ἵστατε, ἱστάνντων; τιθέτω; δίδοτε;
δεικνύντων.
754, The present middle of verbs in nae and wm has the
regular form in go, and also poetic forms in w (for aco) and ov
(for eco and ogo), in the second person singular; as ἵστασο or
ἴστω, τίθεσο or τίθου, δίδοσο or δίδου. But verbs in vps always
retain υσο; as δείκνῦμι, δείκνυσο. In the other persons the inflec-
tion is regular: see the paradigms (506).
755. 1. In the second aorist active the stem vowel is
regularly long (η, ὦ, ὕ), except before ντων (553), and & is
retained in the second person singular. E.g.
Sry (στα-), στήτω, oripte, ord-vrwv; βῆ-θι (Ba-), βήτω,
βῆτε, Ba-vrov; yvO-0, γνώ-τω, γνῶ-τε, γνόντων; 50-6, δύ-τω, δῦ τε,
δύντων. (See 678 and 766, 2.)
2. But we have s for & in θές (from τίθημι), δός (from δίδωμι),
és (from tnt), and σχές (from ἔσχον, 2 aor. of ἔχω). These verbs
have the short vowel in all persons; as θές, θέτω, θέτε, θέντων;
δός, δό-τω, δόττε, δόντων.
8. Στῆθι and ᾿βῆθι have poetic forms ora and Ba, used only in
composition; as xara-Ba, come down, παράστα, stand near.
756. 1. In the second aorist middle, oo drops o in the
second person singular after a short vowel, and contracts
that vowel with o. E.g.
᾿Επριάμην, πρίασο (poet.), πρίω (for wpw-o), ἐθέμην, θοῦ (for
θε-σο, θε-ο)}; ἐδύμην, Sut (for bu-ce, 0-0). But epic δέξο (δεχ-σο»
λέξο (λεχ-σο).
2. The other persons have the regular endings (553); as
πριάσθω; θέσθω, θέσθων; δό-σθω, 86-06, δόσθων.
757. 1. The first aorist passive adds the ordinary active
endings (6, rw, etc.) directly to θε- (4n-) of the tense stem (707)
after which 6 becomes re (95, 2); as λύθητ-τι, λυθή-τω, ete.
2. The second aorist passive adds the same terminations
766) INFINITIVE. 165
to ε- (x) of the tense stem (712), & being retained; as
φάνηθι, φανήτω; στάλη-θι, σταλή-τω, etc.
3. Both aorists have εντων in the third person plural; as
λυθέντων, φανέντων, σταλέντων.
758. N. A few second perfects of the yu-form have imperatives
in Oc: see θνήσκω, τέθναθι, and δείδω, δέδιθι, in 804.
INFINITIVE.
759. (Common Form.) The present, second aorist, and
future active add ey to the tense stem, the thematic vowel
(here always ¢-) being contracted with ἐν to av; as λέγειν
(for λεγ-ε-εν), ἰδεῖν (for i8-é-ev), λέξειν (for λεξ-ε- ἐν).
760. N. The ending ey (without preceding €) appears in Doric;
Ὁ tae in Pindar (Attic γηρύειν).
761, N. For contract presents in ἂν (not ἀν) for dev, and οὖν
for det, see 39, 5.
762, N. ‘The second aorist in εἶν is probably contracted from
έτεν, not from éev (759).
763, The first aorist active substitutes αἱ (of uncertain
origin) for final α of the tense stem (669) ; as λῦσαι, φῆναι.
764. The perfect active substitutes eva: for final a of the
tense stem; as λελυκ-έ-ναι, yeypad-é-vat, redyy-e-vat, AeAour-E-vat.
765. 1. The infinitive middle adds σθαι to the tense stem
in the present, future, and first and seeond aorists. Εἰ.
Λέγε-σθαι, λέξεσσθαι, φαίνεσθαι, φανεῖσθαι (for φανέε-σθαι),
φήνα-σθαι, λύσασθαι, λιπέ-σθαι.
2. Both passive futures likewise add σθαι. 1.9.
Λυθήσε-σθαι, λειφθήσε-σθαι, φανήσε-σθαι, σταλήσε-σθαι.
3. For the perfect middle aud the passive aorists, see 766, 1; 708.
766. (Mi-forms.) 1. The present, second aorist, and
second perfect active of the ,t-form, and both passive
aorists, add va to the tense stem in the infinitive. Z.g.
‘Tord-vat, τιθέναι, Sdd-var, δεικνύναι, στῆναι, γνῶναι, δῦναι,
τεθνά-ναι, λυθῆ-ναι (707), φανῆ-ναι (712).
2. In the second aorist active the final vowel of the stem
is regularly long (678; 755, 1); as ἔστημι (στα-), στῆναι;
ἔβην (βα:), βῆναι.
166 INFLECTION. (767
767. Some pu-forms have the more primitive ending eva: (for
ξέναι) in the infinitive active. Such are δοῦναι (from old d0-fevat,
do-evut) ; θεῖναι (for Oe-fevac); εἶναι, 2 aor. of ἕημι (for éfevar);
2 perf. δεδιέναι (for de-dpe-pevat).
768. Ju all the simple forms of the middle voice (the
present and sceoud aorist of the weform, and al) perfects),
vowel stems add σθαι directly to the tense stem. E.g.
ἽἼστα-σθαι, τίθεσθαι, δίδοισθω, θέσθαι, δό-σθω, ἵεσθαι (from
ἴημι) ; λελύσθαι, τετιμῆσθαι, δεδηλῶ-σθαι, δεδόσθαι, πτά-σθαι (from
WeTO-pul, πτα-).
769, Consonant stems here (768) add the more primitive
ending Ou (554). Hg.
"Eotad-Oat, λελεῖφιθαι (71), πεπλέχεθαι, τετρῖφ-θαι, πεφάνεθαι.
So ἦσ-θαι, pres. inf. of μαι (ἦσ-), sit.
PARTICIPLES AND VERBALS ΙΝ τὸς AND Teos.
770. All active tenses (exeept the perfect) and both
aorists passive add vr to their tense stem to form the stem
of the participle. Stems in ovr of the common form have
nominatives in wy; those of the g-form have numinatives
in ous. Fg.
Λέγω: pres. Aeyorr-, nom. λέγων; fut. Ackorr-, nom. λέξων;
1 aor. λεξα-ντ-, nom. λέξας. Φαίνω: aor. Pyva-vt-, nom. φήνας.
Λείτω: 2 aor. Aurovr-, nom. λιπών; 1 aor. pass. λειφθειντ-, Nom.
λειφθείς (79). Στέλλω (σταλ-) : 2 aor. pass. gTaAe-vr-, NOM. oTa-
λείς. ἽἼστημι : pres. ἑσταςντ-, nom. lords, 2 aor. ora-vr-, Nom. στᾶς,
Tine: pres. rOevr-, nom. reBeis; 2 aor. Bevr-, nom. θείς. Δίδωμι:
pres. &8o-vr-, nom. διδούς, 2 aor. Svvr-, nom. dos. Δείκνυμι:
δεικνυντ-, nom. δεικνύς. Δύνω : 2 aor. Su-vr-, non. dis.
771. For the inflection of these participles and the formation
of the feminines, see 335-337.
772, ‘Yhe perfect active participle changes fiual α of the
tense stem to or in the stem of the participle. Εἰ.
Λελνκα-, λελυκοτ-, Nom. λελυκώς; πεῴφηνα-, πεῴφηνοτ-, NOM.
πεφηνώς.
For the inflection, and for the ivregular feminine in wa, see
335; 337, 2.
773. N. Homer has many varieties of the second perfect participle
of the peform; in ads, gen. adros (sometimes aéros), fem, avia, as
. ͵ “ . 4
yeyaus, βεβαώς; in ηώς, Zen. ηῶτος Or ηότος, fem. quia, as τεθνηώς, TE
977] DIALECTIC AND POETIC FORMS OF VERBS 1N ἢ, 167
θνηῶτος or -670s, τεθνηυῖα (804). Herodotus has ews, edoa, eds, gen.
εῶτος, ewons, aS ἐστεώς, etc., some forms of which (ey. ἐστεῶτα, τεθνεῶτι)
occur in llomer. ‘Lhe Attic contracts aus, adoa, ads, to ὡς, Goa, bs
(or ws) (342), gen. Gros, wons, etc., but leaves τεθνεώς (2 perfect of
θνήσκω) Uncontracted,
774, N. The stem of the feminine of the second perfect participle
in Homer often has a short vowel when the other genders have a long
Ohe ; as ἀρηρώς, andpvia ; τεθηλώς, TeOdAVia.
775. All tenses of the middle voice add pevo to the
tense stem to form the stem of the participle. 24g.
Avopevos (Avo-pero-), Avadpevas (Avoo-pevo-), λύσάμενος (λῦσα-
μένου), ἱστάμενος (tara-pevo-), θέμενος (Be-pevo-), πριάμενος (πρια-
μενο-), λιπόμενος (λιποιμένο:), λελυμένος (λελν-μενο-).
For the inflection of participles in μένος, see 301.
776. 1. The stem of the verbals in ros and reos is formed
hy adding ro or reo to the verb stem, whieh generally
has the same form as in the first aorist passive (with the
change of φ and y to π and x, 71); us Avrds, λυτέος (Stems
Av-ro-, Av-reo-), 80}. pass. ἐλύθην; τρῖπτός, πειστέος (Stems
τρῖπ-το-, πεισ-τεο-Ὑ, ACY. PASS. ἐτρίφθην, ἐπείσθην ; τακτύς, τακ-
τέος, from τάσσω (Stem tay-), aor. pass. ἐτάχιθην; θρεπτός
from τρέφω (95, 5),
2. The verbal in ros is sometimes equivalent to a perfect
passive participle, as κριτός, decided, τακτός, ordered ; but ottener
it expresses capability, as λυτός, capable of being loosed, ἀκουστύς,
audible; πρᾶκτός, that may be done.
3. The verbal in reos is equivalent to a future passive participle
(the Latin participle in dus); as Aureos, that must be loosed, solnen-
dus ; τιμητέος, to be honored, honorandus. (See 1504.)
For the impersonal use of the neuter in reo in the sense of δεῖ
and the infinitive active, see 1597.
DIALECTIC ANID POETIC FORMS OF VERBS IN 2.
777, 1. The Doric has the personal endings τὶ for ot, μὲς for
μεν, τᾶν for την, σθὰν for σθην, μᾶν for μην, vrefor vow. ‘The poets
have peoGa for μεθα.
2. When o is dropped in cae aud go of the second person
(565, 6), Homer often keeps the uucontracted forms eat, nat, ao, €o.
Herodotus has ea and ao (indic.), but generally ἢ for nae (sulj.).
Ju Hdt. and sometimes in Tomer, co may become ev. In Homer
gat and go sometimes drop o even in the perf. and pluperf.; as
108 INFLECTION. [118
μέμνηαι for μέμνησαι, ἔσσνο for ἔσσυσος A lingual sometimes
becomes o before gat; as in κέκασσαι for κεκαδ-σαι (κέκασμαι).
For Ionic contract forms, see 785, 2.
8, The Tonic has arat aud aro for yrat and ντὸ in the third
person plural of the perfect and pluperfect, and aro for ντὸ in the
optative. Before these endings π᾿ 8, x, and y are aspirated (4, x);
as κρύπτω (κρυβ-), κεκρύφ-αται; λέγω, λελέχ-αται, λελέχατο. Hat.
shortens to ε before arat and aro; as οἰκέαται (pf. of οἰκέω), Att.
ᾧκηνται; éreriveato (plpf. of rizdw), Att. ἐτετέμηιντο. Hom.
rarely inserts δ between the vowel of a stem and arat or aro; as
€AnArc-S-aro (ἐλαύνω) ; see also ῥαίνω.
The forms arat and aro sometimes occur in Attic (701).
Herodotus has them also in the present and imperfect of verbs
in μι.
4. Herodotus has ea, eas, εε(ν) in the pluperfect active, as
ἐτεθήπεα; whence comes the older and better Attic 7, 9s, εἰ(ν).
Homer has ea, ys, a(v), with ce in ἤδεε (821, 2), and rarely ov, es, &
5. Homer and Herodotus generally have the uncontracted forms
of the future (in ew and eopat) of liquid steins; as pevéw, Attic
μενῶ. When they are contracted, they follow the analogy of verbs
I ἕω.
6. The Doric has σέω, σέομαι (contracted σῶ, σοῦμαι or σεῦμαι)
for gw, σομαι in the future. ‘The Attic has σοῦμαι in the future
middle of a few verbs (666).
7. In Homer o is sometimes doubled after a short vowel in the
future and aorist; as reAdw, τελέσσω; καλέω, ἐκάλεσσα. In κομίζω,
Hom. ἐκόμισσα, ἐκομισσάμην, the stem ends in ὃ (see 777, 2).
8. In Homer aorists with o sometimes have the inflection of
second aorists; as ἷξον, fées, from ἱκνέομαι, come ; ἐβήσετο (more com-
mon than ἐβήσατο), from βαίνω, go. These are called mized aorists.
9. In the poets yoav of the aorist passive indicative often becomes
εν; aS ὥρμηθεν for ὡρμήθησαν. from ὅρμάω, urge. So ἄν or ev for
σὰν or ἐσαν in the active of verbs in pe (787, 4).
778, Womer and Herodotus have iterative forms in σκὸν and
σκομὴν it the imperfect and second aorist active and middle.
Homer has them also in the first aorist. These are added to the
tense stem; as ἔχω, iimpf. ἔχεισκον ; ἐρύω, 1 aor. ἐρύσα-σκε; φεύγω,
2 aor. (φυγ-) φύγεσκον; ἵστημι (ora-), στά:σκε; δίδωμι (δο-), δόσκε.
Verbs in ew have ee-oxov or ἐ-σκον in the imperfect ; as καλέε-σκον ;
πωλέσκετο (dropping one e). Verbs in aw have aacxov or acKov;
as γοάα-σκε, νικά-σκομεν. Rarely other verbs have agxoy in the
imperfect; as κρύπτασκον from κρύπτω.
781] DIALECTIC AND POETIC FORMS OF VERBS IN 9. 169
These forms are inflected like imperfects, aud are confined to
the indicative, and denote repetition; as πωλέσκετο, he went (regu-
larly). They generally (in Hat. always) omit the augment.
For peforms with these endings see 787, 5.
779. Some verbs have poctic stems, made by adding 6%- to
the present or the second aorist tense stem, in which ἃ or ¢ (rarely
v) takes the place of the thematic vowel; as ἀμύναθθζ-, διωκαθθέ-,
prcyeO%-, from ἀμὕνω, ward off, διώκω, pursue, φλέγω. burn. From
these special forms are derived, — sometimes presents, as φλεγέθω;
sometimes imperfects, as ἐδιώκαθον ; sometimes second aorists, as
ἔσχεθον (axe6%-); also subjunctives and optatives, as εἰκάθω,
εἰκάθοιμι, ἀμυνάθοιτο ; iinperatives, aS ἀμυνάθατε, ἀμυνάθου ; iufini-
tives, as ἀμυνάθειν, διωκάθειν, εἰκάθειν, σχεθεῖν, and participles,
as εἰκάθων, σχεθών. As few of these stems form a present indica
tive, many scholars consider ἐδιώκαθον, ἔργαθον, etc., with the
subjunctives, etc., second aorists, and accent the infinitives and
participles διωκαθεῖν, ἀμυναθεῖν, εἰκαθεῖν, εἰκαθών, elc., ullhough the
traditional accent is on the penult.
See in the Lexicon ἀλκάθειν, ἀμυνάθω, διωκάθω, εἰκάθειν, ἐργάθειν,
ἠερέθομαι, ἠγερέθομαι, μετακιάθω, σχέθω, φθινύθω, φλεγέθω.
180. (Subjunetive.) 1. In Homer the subjunctive (especially
in the first aor. act. and mid.) often has the short thematic vowels
ς« and o (Attic ἡ and w), yet never jn the singular of the active
voice nor in the third person plural; as ἐρύσσομεν, ἀλγήσετε, μυθή-
copa, εὔξεαι, δηλήσεται, ἀμείψεται, ἐγείρομεν, ἱμείρεται. So some-
tines in Pindar.
2. In both aorist passive subjiuuctives Herodotus generally has
the uncontracted forms in ew, ewper, ewot, but contracts en and ef
to η and ἡ; as ἀφαιρεθέω (Att. -00), φανέωσι (Att. -aor), but φανῇ
and φανῆτε (as in Attic).
3. In the second aorist passive subjunctive of some verbs, Homer
has forms in cw, nys, ny, εἰομέν, nere (780, 1), a5 they are commonly
written; as δαμείω (from ἐδώμην, 2 aor. pass. of δαμνάω. subdue),
δαμήης, δαμήη, δαμήετε; τραπείομεν (trom ἐτάρπην, of τέρπω, amuse).
lt is highly probable that y should be written for εἰ in all persons.
This is more fully developed in the second aorist active of the
pe-form (see 788, 2).
4. In the subjunctive active Homer often has wat, ῃσθα, yor;
as ἐθέλωμι, ἐθέλῃσθα, ἐθέλῃσι.
781. (Optative.) 1. The so-called Aeolic forms of the first
aorist optative active in eas, ee, av are the common forms in
all dialects.
170 INFLECTION. (782
2. ITomer sometimes has οισθα (556, 1) in the second person for
os; as κλαίοισθα. For aro (for ντο) see 777, ὃ.
782. (Infinitive.) 1. Homer often has μεναι and μὲν for ev
(759) in the infinitive active; a3 ἀμύνέμεναι, ἀμυνέμεν (Attic ἀμύ-
vey); ἐλθέμεναι, ἐλθέμεν (ἐλθεῖν); ἀξέμεναι, ἀξέμεν (ἄξειν). For
the perfect (only of the μεῖοιι), see 79): the pert. iu ἕνας does not
occur in Homer. So Mom. pevat, Dor. μὲν for vat in the aorist
passive; as ὁμοιωθή:μεναι (ὁμοιωθῆναι), Sarj-perat (also day-vat),
Hon; αἰσχυνθῆ-μεν (αἰσχυνθῆ-ναι), Pind. (See 784, δ.)
2. The Doric has ev (760) and the Aeolic ἣν for εἰν in the infin. ;
thus ἀεῖδεν and γάρύεν (Dor.) for ἀείδειν and γηρύειν ; φέρην and
ἔχην (Aeol.) for φέρειν and ἔχειν; εἴπην (Aeol.) tor εἰπεῖν.
783, (Participle.) The Aeolic has ova for ουσα, and ats, atou
for as, aga, in the participle; as ἔχοισα, θρέψαις, θρέψαισα.
SrrcarL DiaLecric Foras or Conrracr VERBS.
784. (Verbs inaw.) 1. In Homer verbs in aw are often con-
tracted as in Attic. Ina few cases they remain uncontracted ; soine-
times without change, as vacerdovot, ναιετάων, from ναιετάω, dwell ;
sometimes with ἃ, as iu πεινάω, hunger, διψάω, thirst; sometimes with
cov for ἄον in the imperfect, as μενοίνεον from μενοινάω, long for.
2. (a) ‘The Mss. of Homer often give peculiar forms of verbs in
aw, by which the two vowels (or the vowel and diphthong) which
elsewhere are contracted are assimilated, so as to give a double
A or a double O sound.’ The second syllable, if it is short by
nature or has ἃ diphthong with a short initial vowel, is generally
prolonged; sometines the former syllable; rarely both. We tins
have aa (sometimes aa) for ae or ay (aa for ae or an), and ow
(sometimes wo or ww) for ao or aw (ow for aor) :
ὁράᾳς for ὁράεις ὁρόω ἴοι ὁράω
ὁράᾳ “Spade or ὁράῃ ὁρόωσι ' ὁράουσι (7.e. ὁραονσι)
ὁράασθε “: ὁράεσθε ὁρόωσα “" ὁράουσα (ἱ.6.ὁραοντ-ια)
ὁράασθαι ‘* ὁράεσθαι dpdwev “ ὁράοιεν
μνάασθαι ““ μνάεσϑαι ὁρόωνται “"" ὁράονται
ὁράᾶν ‘© δράειν (Dor. ὁράεν) | alriowo ᾿" αἰτιάοιο
(b) The lengthening of the former vowel occurs ouly when the
word could not otherwise stand in the Homeric verse; as in
1 Although these forms are found in all editions of Homer, yet most
Homeric scholars are agreed that they are not genuine, but are early
substitutes for the regular forms in aw etc. which they represent, See
Monro, //omeric Grammar (2 ed.), pp. 50-54.
785) SPECIAL FORMS OF CONTRACT VERBS, 171
ἡ βώοντες for ἡβάοντες, HBwoyu for ἡβάοιμι, μνάασθαι for μνάεσθαι,
μνώοντο for (ἐγμνάοντο. In this case the second vowel or diph-
thong is not lengthened. But it may be long in a final syllable,
as in pevowda (for et), or when wou or wot comes from ovri or
ovat, aS in ἡ βώωσα, δρώωσι, for 7Bu-ovria, δρατονσι. The assimila-
tion ever occurs unless the second vowel is long either by nature
or by position; thus ὁράομεν, dpaere, ὁραέτω cannot become ὁροωμεν,
ὅραατε, dpaaro.
(c) These forms extend also to the so-called Attic futures in
dow, dw, ὦ (655,2); as ἐλόω, ἐλόωσι, κρεμύω, δαμάᾳ, δαμόωσι, for
ἐλάσω (€Adw), etc.
3. The Doric contracts ae aud an to ἡ; as dpyre for dpdere,
ὁρῇ for ὁράει and dpay. A peculiar form (of contraction ?) occurs
in the dual of a few imperfects in Homer, as προσαυδήτην (from
προσαυδάω), φοιτήτην (φοιτάω). συλήτην (συλάω). So Hom. ὄρηαι
(or ὁρῆαι) for ὁράεαι (Attic ὁρ(1} in the pres. ind. middle of ὁράω.
(See 785, 4.)
4. Herodotus sometimes changes aw, ao, and aav to ew, εο, and
€ov, especially in ὁράω, cipwrdw, aud φοιτάω; as ὁρέω, ὁρέοντες,
bpéovor, εἰρώτεον, ἐφοίτεον. ‘These forms are generally wicontracted.
In other cases Herodotus contracts verbs in aw regularly.
5. Llomer sometimes forms the present infinitive active of verbs
in aw and ew in ἡμέναι; aS γοήμεναι (yodw), πεινήμεναι (πεινάω),
pirnpevat (φιλέω). (See 789, 4.)
785. (Verbs in ew.) 1. Verbs in ew generally remain uncon-
tracted in hoth Homer ‘and Herodotus. But Homer sometitnes
contracts ἐξ or ce to εἰ, as τάρβει (τάρβεε). Hat. has generally
δεῖ, must, and δεῖν, but impf. ἔδεε. Both Homer and Herodotus
sometimes have εὖ as a contract form for €0; as ἀγνοεῦντες, δια-
νοεῦντο: 50 in the Attic futures in tow, ἰσόμαι (665, 3), as κομκεύμεθα
(Hdt.). Forms in ev for cov, like οἰχνεῦσι, ποιεῦσι, are of very
cones authority.
. HJomer sometimes drops ε in eat and eo (for ἐσαι, coo, 777, 2)
re εν thus changing éeat and éeo to éat and έο, as μυθέαι for μυθέεαι
(from μυθέομαι), ἀποαιρέο (for drroapéeo) ; and he also contracts
éeat and éeo to etat and eto, as μυθεῖαι, aideto (for αἰδέεο). Herodotus
sometimes drops the second ¢ in ἕεο ; as φοβέο, αἰτέο, ἐξηγέο.
3. Homer sometimes has a form in ew for that in ew; as νεικείω
(vexéw). So in ἐτελείετο from τελείω (τελέω).
4. For Homerie infinitives in nevat, see 784, 5. Φορέω, carry,
has φορήμεναι and φορῆναι. Ilomer has a few dual imperfects like
ὁμαρτήτην (ὁμαρτέω) aiid ἀπειλήτην (ἀπειλέω). (See 784, 3.)
172 INFLECTION. [786
786. (Verbs in ow.) 1. Verbs in ow are always contracted in
Herodotus, and his Mss. sometimes have ev (for ov) froin oo or oov,
especially in δικαιόω, think just.
2. They are always contracted in Homer, except in the few
eases in which they have forms in ow or ow resembling those of
verbs in aw (784, 2); as dpdwor (froin dpow, plough); δηιόῳεν and
(impf.) δηιόωντο (from δηιόω).
DIALECTIC FORMS OF VERBS ΙΝ MI.
787. 1. Homer and Herodotus have many forms (some doubt-
ful) in which verbs in nue (with stems in €) and ww have the
inflection of verbs in ew and ow; as τιθεῖ, διδοῖς, διδοῖ. So in com-
pounds of ¢ ἴημι, as ἀνιεῖς (or dvies), μεθιεῖ (or -(ει) in pres., and
προΐειν, προΐεις, ἀνίει, in impf. Hom. has imperat. καθ-ίστα (Attic
-y). Hdt. has ἱστᾷ (for ἵστησι), ὑπερ-ετίθεα in impf., and προσ-
θέοιτο (for -θεῖτο), etc. in opt. For ἐδίδουν, etc. and ἐτίθεις, ἐτίθει
(also Attic), see 630.
2. In the Aeolic dialect most verbs in aw, ew, and ow take the
form in μὲ; as φίλημι (with φίλεισθα, φίλει) in Sappho, for
φιλέω, etc.; ὄρημι (for dpdw), κάλημι, αἴνημαι.
3. A few verbs in Hom. and Hdt. drop o in σαι and go of the
second person after a vowel; a3 imperat. παρίσταο (for -aco) and
impf. ἐμάρναο (Hom.); ἐξεπίστεαι (for -ασαι) with change of a ἰο ε
(Hat.). So θέο, imperat. for θεσο (Att. θοῦ) and ἔνθεο (Hom.).
4. The Doric has τι, ντὶ for ot, vot. Homer sometimes has ofa
(556, 1) for o in 2 pers. sing., as δίδωσθα (δίδοισθα or διδοῖσθα),
τίθησθα. ‘The poets have ν for σαν (with preceding vowel short)
in 3 pers. plut., as ἔσταν (for ἔστησαν), tev (for ἵεσαν), πρότιθεν (for
προετίθεσαν) ; see 777, 9.
5. Herodotus sometimes has arat, aro for yrat, vro in the pres-
ent and imperfect of verbs in μὲ, with preceding a changed to εἰ as
προτιθέαται (for -evrat), ἐδυνέατο (for -avro). For the iterative end-
ings σκον, σκομὴν, see 778; these are added directly to the stem of
verbs in μι, as ἵἴστα-σκον, 86-cxov, ζωννύ-σκετο, ἔτσκον (εἰμί, be).
G. For poetic (chiefly Homeric) second aorists in ἡμὴν, {{79}»
vpny, and from consonant stems, see 800.
788. 1. Herodotus sometimes leaves ew uncontracted in the
subjunctive of verbs in yu; as θέωμεν (Att. θῶμεν), διαθέωνται
(θῶνται), ἀπ-ιέωσι (Att. ἀφ-τῶσι, from ἀφ-ΐημι). He forms the
subj. with ew in the plural also from stems in a; 85 ἀποστέωσι
(-στῶσι), ἐπιστέωνται (for ἐπιστα-ονται, Att. ἐπίστωνται). Homer
sometimes has these forms with ew; as θέωμεν, στέωμεν (724, 1).
199] DIALECTIC FORMS OF VERBS IN MI. 173
2. Generally, when the second aorist subjunctive active is
uncontracted in Homer, the final vowel of the stem is lengthened,
€ (or a) to 7 or εἰ, 0 to ὦ, while the short theinatic vowels ε and o
are used in the dual and plural, except before ot (for var). ‘Thus
we Sind in Homer: —
(Stems in a.) θήῃς
βείω (Attic Bo) θήῃ; ἀν-ήῃ
στήῃς θείομεν
able βίῃ, φθήῃ (Stems in 9.)
στήομεν, στείομεν, στέωμεν ae
στήωσι, στείωσι, φθέωσι wens
yey, δώῃ, δώῃσιν
(Stems in ¢.) γνώομεν, Sdopev
θείω, ἐφ-είω γνώωσι, δώωσι
The editions of Homer retain εἰ of the Mss. before o and w; but
probably ἡ is the correct form in all persons (see 780, 3).
3. A few cases of the middle inflected as in 2 occur in Homer;
as βλή-εται (βάλλω), ἅλ-εται (ἄλλομαι), ἀπο-θείομαι, κατα-θείομαι;
80 κατα-θῆαι (Ilesiod) for καταθε-ηαι (Att. καταθῇ).
789. For Homeric optatives of δαίνῦμι, δύω, λύω, and P60, —
δαινῦτο, din and δῦμεν, λελῦτο or λελῦντο, φθέμην (for φθειμην), ---
see these verbs in the Catalogue, with 734, 1; 744.
790. Homer sometiines retains θὲ in the present imperative, as
δίδωθι, ὄμνυθι (752). Pindar often has δίδοι.
791. Homer has μεναι or μὲν (the Jatter only after a short
vowel) for vac in the infinitive. The final vowel of the stem is
seldom long in the present; as ford-pevas, ἱέμεναι, μεθιέιμεν, ὀρνύ-
μέναι, dpvi-pev, τιθέμεν, but τιθή:μεναι. In the second aorist active
the vowel is regularly long (766, 2), a8 στή-μεναι, γνώ-μεναι; but
τίθημι. δίδωμι, and ἴημι have θέμεναι and θέμεν, δόμεναι and δόμεν,
and (ἔμεν) μεθιέμεν. (See 802.) In the perfect of the μεῖον πὶ
we have ἑστά-μεναι, ἑστά-μεν, τεθνά-μεναι, τεθνά-μεν.
792. Homer rarely has nuevos for ἐμένος in the participle. For
second-perfect participles in ws (aws, ews, nws), see 773.
ENUMERATION OF THE MI-FORMS.
The forms with this inflection are as follows : —
793, I. Presents in ps. These belong to the Seventh and
the Fifth Class of verbs (see 619 and 608).
114 INFLECTION. [794
794. Those of the Seventh Class are
1. Verbs in μὲ with the simple stem in the present.
These are the irregular elud, be, εἶμι, go, φημί, say, μαι, sit,
and κεῖμαι, lie, which are inflected in 806-818; with ἡμί say,
and the deponents ἄγαμαι, δύναμαι, ἐπίσταμαι, ἔραμαι, κρέμαμαι.
See these last in the Catalogue, and also Jonie or poetic (chiefly
Homeric) forms under ἄγμι, δίαμαι, δίεμαι (stem διε-), δίζημαι, ἔδω,
ἵλημι, κιχάνω, ὄνυμαι, Proper and ἐρύομαι, σεύω. στέῦμαι; φέρω.
For δάμνημι and other verbs in νήμι, see 797, 2.
2. Verbs in μὲ with reduplicated present stems (651).
These are ἔστημι, τίθημι, and δίδωμι, inflected in 506, ἔγμι,
inflected in S10, δίδημι (rare for δέω), bind, κίχρημι (χρα-),
lend, ὀνίνημι (dva-), Lenefit, πίμπλημι (πλα-), fill, πίμπρημι
(mpa-), burn. (For the last five, sec the Catalogue.)
See also frrapat (late), and Hom. βιβάς, striding, ‘present par-
ticiple of rare βίβημι.
795, N. ΤΠμπλημι and πίμπρημι insert » before πὶ but the μ
generally disappears after μ (for v) in ἐμ-πίπλημι and ἐμ-πίπρημι;
but not after ν itself, as in ἐν-ἐπίμπλασαν.
796. N. ᾿Ονίνημι (of uncertain formation) is perhaps for dv-
ovy-pe, by reduplication from stem ὀνα-.
787. Those of the Fifth Class are
1. Verbs in vive, which add ve (after a vowel, ννυ) to the
verb stem in the present (608). ‘These are all inflected
like δείκνυμι (506), and, except σβέννυμι, quench (8038, 1),
they have no‘ Attic peforms except in the present and
imperfect. The following belong to this eluss: —
(Stems in a), κερά-ννῦμι, κρεμά-ννῦμι. πετά-ννυμι, σκεδά-ννῦμι; ---
(stems in ¢foreo), ἐνννῦμε, κορέ-ννυ μι. σβέννυμι; --- (steins in w), ζώ-
Wut, ῥώ- ννῦμι, στρώ. υνῦμα: :- (consonant stems), ay- vo pt, dp- νυμαι͵
δεύσνυμι, εἴργινυμι, ζεύγινυμι, ἀπου-κτίν. νῦμι (χτεΐζω), aly: νῦμι, οἴγ-
γῦμι (in com pos. ), OA- λῦμι, ὄμνυμι, ὀμόργ. νῦμι, ὄρ- νῦμι, πήγνῦμι
(παγ- ), πτάρ-νυμαι, pyy-vope (ῥηγ-). στόρ-νυμι, φράγινῦυμι. See these
in the C: atalogue, and also Tonic or poetic (chiefly Homers) forms
under αἴνυμαι, ἄχνυμαι, γάνυμαι, δαίνύμι, καίνυμαι, κίνυμαι, dpey-vope,
τάνυμαι (See τείνω), τίνυμαι (sce τίνω).
2. Verbs in νημι (chiefly epic), which add va to the verb stem
in the present (009). These are δάμνημι, κίρνημι, κρήμνημι, μάρνα-
μαι, πέρνημα, πίλναμαι, πίτνημι, σκίδνημι OY κίδνημι. Many of these
have also forms in vaw. (See the Catalogue.)
800} ENUMERATION OF THE MI-FORMS. 175
798. Il. Second Aorists of the pe-Form. ‘The only second
aorists formed from verbs in μὲ are those of ἴημι (810), of
ἵστημι, τίθημι, and δίδωμι (506), of oBevwips (808, 1); with
ἐπριάμην (000); also the irregular ὠνήμην (later ὠνάμην), of
ὀνίνημι, and ἐπλήμην (poetic) of mimAnpe.
See also Homeric aorist middle forms of μέγνυμι, dpvope, and
myyvups, in the Catalovue.
799. ‘The seeond aorists of this form belonging to verbs
in ὦ are the following: —
“Αλίσκομαι (dA-), he taken: ἑάλων or ἥλων, was taken, dda,
adoiny, ἁλῶναι, ἁλούς. (See 803, 2.)
Βαίνω (Ba-), yo: ἔβην, Ba, βαίην. βῆθι (also Ba in comp.),
βῆναι, Bas. Hoi. βάτην for ἐβήτην.
Βιύω (Buw-), lire: ἐβίων, Bid, βιῴην (irregular), βιῶναι, βιούς.
(Hom. imper. βιώτω.)
Τηράσκω (ynpa-), grow old, 2 vor. inf. γηράναι (poet.), Hom. part.
γηρίῖς.
Γιγνώσκω (yvo-), know: ἔγνων, γνῶ, γνοίην, γνῶθι, γνῶναι, γνούς.
Διδράσκω (δμα-), runs ἔδρᾶν, pas, Epa, etc. subj. δρῶ, δρᾷς,
Spa. cic. opt. δραίην, δρᾶναι, Spas. 1161. ἕδρην, δρῆναι, dpés. Only
in composition. (See $01.)
Δύω (Sv-), enter: uy, entered (306), δύω, (for opt. see 744), δῦθι,
δῦναι. δύς.
Κτείνω {κτεν-, κτα-), kill: act. (poetic) ἔκτᾶν, ἐκτᾶς, exrd, Extra μεν
(3 pl. ἔκταν, subj. κτέωμεν, inf, κτάμεναι, κτάμεν, llum.), κτᾶς.
Mid. (Hlom.) ἐκτάμην, was killed, κτάσθαι, κτάμενος.
Πέτομαι {πτα-, mre-), flys act. (poetic) ἔπτην, (778, late), πταίην
(πτῆθι, πτῆναι, late), ards. Mid. ἐπτάμην, πτάσθαι, πτάμενος..
[Γλάω] (τλα:), endures ἔτλην, TAG, τλαίην, τλῆθι, τλῆναι, τλάς.
φθάνω (Pbu-), anticipate: ἔφθην, φθῶ, φθαίην, φθῆναι, φθάς.
Piw (φυ.), produce: ἔφῦν, wus produced, an. φύω, φῦναι, pis
(like ἔδυν).
Add to these the single forms, ἀποσκλῆναι, of ἀποσκέλλω, dry
up, σχές, Imperal. of ἔχω, hace, wiht, iinperat. of πένω, drink, and
epic forms of EvpBddAw (800, 1) and of κιγχάνω (κιχάνω).
800. 1. Some poetic (chiefly Homeric) second aorists of the
peform it μὴν, ἐμὴν, and ὑμὴν are formed from stems in a, ¢ and
v belonging to verbs in ὦ. 7...
Βάλλω (βαλ-, βλα-), throw, 2 aor. act. (ἔβλην) ξυμ-βλήτην
(dual); nid. (ἐβλήμην) ἔβλητο; φθίνω (PO), waste, 2 a.m. ἐφθέ
μην! σεύω (συ-), urge, ἐσσύμην (in Attic poets ἔσυτο, σύμενος);
χέω (χυ-), pour, ἐχύμην, χύμενος.
116 INFLECTION. (801
See these verbs in the Catalogue. For other Homeric aorists
see dw, ἀπαυράω, βιβρώσκω, κλύω, κτίζω, Adu, οὐτάω, πελάζω, TAGE,
πνέω, πτήσσω.
2. Some are formed from consonant stems, with the simple
ending μην. E.9.
“AdXopat (λον, leap, 2 a.m. (dA-pyv) ddvo, ἄλτο; δέχομαι (Sex),
receive, (é5€y-pnv) δέκτο; (ἐλέγιμην) ἔλεκτο, laid himself to rest (see
stem dex-).
Besides these, see dpaptoxw, γέντο, grasped, πάλλω, πέρθω.
3. For the inflection, see 803, 3.
801. N. Second aorists in ἣν or ἀμὴν from stems in a are inflected
like ἔστην or ἐπριάμην; but par substitutes a (after p) for ἢ»
and ἔκταν is irregular.
802. 1. The second aorists active of τίθημι, ἴημι, and δίδωμι have
the short vowel (ε or ὁ) of the stem (678; 755) in the indicative
(dual and plural) and imperative (efrov, εἶμεν, ete., being augmented):
in the infinitive they have θεῖναι, εἶναι, and δοῦναι, and in the second
person of the imperative θές, és, aud δός.
2. As these tenses have no forms for the indicative singular,
this is supplied by the irregular first aorists ἔθηκα, xa, and ἔδωκα
(670); so that the actual aorist indicative active is as follows :—
ἔθηκα, ἔθηκας, ἔθηκε. ἔθετον, ἐθέτην, ἔθεμεν, ἔθετε, ἔθεσαν.
ἦκα, ἧκας, ἧκε, εἶτον, εἴτην, εἶμεν. εἶτε, εἶσαν.
ἔδωκα, ἔδωκας, ἔδωκε, ἔδοτον, ἐδότην, ἔδομεν, ἔδοτε, ἔδοσαν.
808, 1. The two other second aorists active from stems in ¢ are
ἔσβην, went out (σβέννῦμι, quench), inflected like ἔστην, and ἀπο-
σκλῆναι, dry up (σκέλλω). See 797, 1; 799.
2. The other second aorists, from stem in 0, are inflected like
ἔγνων, as follows : —
Indic. ἔγνων, ἔγνως, ἔγνω, ἔγνωτον, ἐγνώτην, ἔγνωμεν, ἔγνωτε,
ἔγνωσαν. Sul. γνῶ (like δῶ). Opt. γνοίην (like δοίην). Ππρόν. γνῶθι,
γνώτω, γνῶτον, γνώτων, γνῶτε, γνόντων (755). Infin. γνῶναι,
Partic. γνούς (like δούς).
3. The second aorists ὠνήμην and ἐπλήμην (798), and the poetic
aorists in nny, μην, and υμὴην (800, 1) or in μην from consonant
steins (800, 2), are inflected like the pluperfect middle (698).
804. 111. Second Perfects and Pluperfects of the ys-Form.
The following verbs have forms of this class in Attic Greek,
most of them even in prose : —
Ἴστημι (στα-); see 508 (paradigm). For Ionic forms of the
participle, see 773.
806] IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE MI-FORM. 177
Βαίνω (Ba-), go; poetic 2 pf. βεβᾶσι (Hom. BeBdacr), subj.
βεβῶσι, int. BeBavar (Hom. BeBaper), part. BeBus (Hom. βεβαώς,
BeBovia); 2 plup. (Hom. βύβασοι):
Γίγνομαι (yer, ya-), become, 2 pt. γέγονα, am; (Hom. 2 pf. γεγάᾶσι,
2 plup. dual γεγάτην, inf. γεγάμεν, part. γεγαώς, yeyavia), Att. γεγώς,
γεγῶσα (poetic).
Θνήσκω (θαν-, θνα-), die; 2 pf. τέθνατον, τέθναμεν, τεθνᾶσι, opt.
τεθναίην, inper. τέθναθι, τεθνάτω, inf. τεθνάναι (Hom. τεθνάμεναι
or τεθνάμεν), part. τεθνεώς (773), τεθνεῶσα (Llom. τεθνηώς, with
τεθνηνίης), 2 plup. ἐτέθνασαν.
Δείδω (δει-, de-), epic in pres., fear, Attic 2 pf. δέδια, δέδιας, δέδιε,
plur. δέδιμεν, δέδιτε, δεδίασι; 2 plup. ἐδεδίειν, ἐδέδισαν ; subj. δεδίῃ,
δεδίωσι, opt. Sedce’y, imper. δέδιθι, inf. δεδιέναι, part. δεδιώς. (Horn.
2 pf. δείδια, δείδιας. δείδιε, pl. δείδιμεν, imper. δείδιθι, δείδιτε, inf.
δειδίμεν, part. δειδιώς ; plup. ἐδείδιμεν, ἐδείδισαν, rarely δείδιε (777, 4).
[Εἴκω] (εἰκ-, ix-), 2 pf. ἔοικα, seem; also 2 pf. ἔοιγμεν, εἴξᾶσι (for
ἐοίκασι), inf. εἰκέναι, part. εἰκώς (Hom. 2 pf. ἔϊκτον, 2 plup. ἐΐκτην),
used with the regular forms of ἔοικα, ἐῴκη (see Catalogue).
Olda (i8-), know; see 820 (paradigin).
See also poetic, chiefly Homeric, forms under the following verbs
in the Catalogue: ἀνώγω, βιβρώσκω, ἐγείρω, ἔρχομαι, κράζω, μαίομαι,
πάσχω, πείθω, πΐπτω, [τλάω], φύω, and stem (δα-).
IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE MI-FORM.
805. The verbs εἰμί, be, εἶμι, go, ἴημι, send, φημί, Say, μαι,
sit, κεῖμαι, lie, and the second perfect ofSa, know, are thus
inflected.
806. 1. εἰμί (stem ἐσ-, Latin es-se), be.
PRESENT.
Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. τ Imperative.
1. εἰμί ® εἴην
Sing. Ἔ εἕ ἧς εἴης ἴσθι
8. ἐστί ἧ εἴη ἴστω
Dual { 2. ἐστόν ἦτον εἶτον or εἴητον ἔστον
3. ἐστόν ἦτον εἴτην or afta ἔστων
1. ἐσμέν ὦμεν εἶμεν or εἴημεν
Plur. | 2. ἐστέ ἦτε εἶτε or εἴητε ἔστε
8. εἰσί oor εἶεν or dyoav ἴστων, ἔστωσαν.
ὄντων
Infin. εἶναι. Partic. dv, οὖσα, ὄν, gen. ὄντος, ovens, etc.
Verbal Adjective, ἐστέος (συν-εστέον).
118 INFLECTION, [80]
IMPERFECT, Future.
Indicatice. Indicative. Optative. Infinitive.
1. ἦ οἱ ἦν ἔσομαι ἐσοίμην ἔσεσθαι
Sing. {2 ῆσθα ἔσει, ἔσῃ ἔσοιο
3. ἦν ἔσται ἔσοιτο
Dual {: ἦστον OF ἦτον ἔσεσθον ἔσοισθον = Partie.
3. ἤστην ΟΥ̓́ἥτην ἴσεσθον ἰσοίσθην ἐσόμενος
1. ἦμεν ἐσόμεθα ἐσοίμεθα
Plur. | 2. ἦτε or ἦστε ἔσεσθε ἔσοισθε
3. ἦσαν ἔσονται ἴσοιντο
2. Εἰμί is for éa-ye (footnote on 556, 5), εἶ for ἐσ-σί (ἐστ), for
ἐστί see 550, 1; ὦ is for ἔω (€o-w), εἴην for ἐστ-ιη-ν), εἶναι tor ἐσ-ναι,
ov for ἔων (ἐστων). ὁ. For the accent, see 141, ὃ and 144,5, The
participle ὧν keeps its accent in composition, as παρών, παροῦσα,
παρόντος, ete.; 80 ἔσται (for ἔσεται), as παρέσται.
807. Diarects. 1. Present Indic. Acolic ἔμμι, the most. primi-,
tive form, nearest to ἐσ-μὲ (800,9). Hom. ἐσσί and εἷς (for εἶ), εἰμέν
(for ἐσμέν), ἔασι. Hat. εἷς and εἰμέν. Doric ἡμί, ἐσσί, εἰμέν and
εἰμές (older ἡμέν), ἐντί (ἴον εἰσί).
2. Imperfect. Hom. ἦα, ἔα, ξον; ἔησθα, ἦεν, ἔην, ἥην; ἔσαν (for
ἦσαν). Hat. ἔα, gas, gate. Tonic (iterative) ἔσκον. Later ἧς for
ἦσθα. Dorie 3 sing. ἧς, 1 pl. ques. ὃ. Future. Hom. ἔσσομαι, etc.,
with ἐσσεῖται and ἔσεται; Dor. ἐσσῇ. ἐοσεῖται, ἐσσοῦνται.
4. Subj. Jonic ἔω, ξης, ἔη (ἔησι, Hot), cte., ἔωσι; Hom. also εἴω.
5. Opt. Tonie fois, ἔοι. 6. Imper. Hom. ἔσ-σο (a regular niddle
form). 7. Ingin. Hom. ἔμμεναι, ἔμεναι, ἔμεν, ἔμμεν; Dor. ἦμεν or
εἶμεν: lyric ἔμμεν. 8. Partic. Ionic and Doric ἐών.
808. 1. εἶμι (stem ἐς Latin tre), go.
Present.
Indicative. Subjunctine, Optative. Imperative.
1. εἶμι ἴω ἴοιμι or ἰοίην
Sing. {2 at {ys Yous ἴθι
3. εἶσι ἴῃ ἴοι {tw
Dual trov ἴητον ἴοιτον ἴτον
trov ἴητον ἰοίτην ἴτων
1. ἵμεν ἴωμεν ἴοιμεν
Plur. {2 tre ἴητε ἴοιτε ἴτε
ἃ. ἴασι ἴωσι ἴοιεν ἰόντων, ἵτων, or ἴτωσαν
: 7 ἢ
Infin. ἰέναι. 1Ραγιίς. ἰών, ἰοῦσα, ἰόν, gen. ἰόντος, ἰούσης, etc.
Verbal Adjectives, ἰτός, ircos, ἰτητέος.
810] IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE MI-FORM. 179
IMPERVECT.
Sing. Dual, Plural.
1. ga or ἥειν ἦμεν
2, fas or ἤεισθα ἥτον ἦτε
3, ἤει or jew ἄτην ἦσαν or ἤισαν
Imperfect forms yeysev and jee are rare and doubted.
2. In compounds the participle ἰών keeps the accent of the
simple forin; as παρεών, παριοῦσα, παριόντος, παριοῦσι. (See 800, 3.)
3. The present εἶμε generally (always in Attic) has a future
sense, shall yo, taking the place of a future of ἔρχομαι, whose future
ἐλεύσομαι is rarely τ never) used in Attic prose.
809. Diavecrs. 1. Present Indic. Hom. εἶσθα for εἶ, 2. Imperf.
Hom. ] » ta, wien ε p. ἤϊε, γεν te dual ὦ nny uh 1 p. ἤομεν,
3p. τον, yivay (Ἶἶσαν), ἴσαν. Lidt. ἡἠζα, ἡΐε, gioay. ὁ. Subj. Hom.
ἴῃσθα, i ἴῃσι. 4. Opt. Mom. ἰεώγ (for ἴοι). ὃ. Jrifin. Hom. ἔμεναι,
or t-pev (for ἐ-έγαε), rarely ἔμμεναι.
6. Huture, Nom. εἴσομαι; Aorist, Mom. εἰσάμην or ἐεισάμην.
810. 1. ine (stem é), send.
ACTIVE
Present.
Indicative. NSubjunctive. Optative. Imperative.
1. type to ἱείην
Sing {2 {ns tis teins ἵει Infin.
3. ἴησι [ἢ ἱείη ἱέτω ἱέναι
Dual { 2. ἴἵετον ἰῆτον ἑἱεῖτον or ἰείητον ἵετον
ἵετον ἰῆτον ἰἰείτην or ἱειήτην ἱέτων Partic.
1. fepev ἰῶμεν ἱεῖμεν or ἑείημεν (είς,
Plur | tere tyre feire or ἱείητε tere ἱεῖσα, tév
8. ἰᾶσι ἰῶσι ἱεῖεν or ἑείησαν ἑέντων
or férwoay
Invrrrrcr.
ι. ἔην
Sing. {2 fes
3. te
Dual {2 terov Future, ἥσω, etc., regular.
3. ἐέτην First Aorist, xa, ἧκας, ἧκε, only
1. tepev in indie. (802).
Plur | tere Perfect. (in composition), εἶκα,
3. ἔεσαν ete., regular.
180 INFLECTION. [810
Seconp Aorist (generally in composition).
Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. Imperative.
1. ——-(802) ᾧ εἴην Infin.
Sing. Ϊ ῶ, --- ἧς εἴης is εἶναι
3. ἡ εἴη ἕτω
Dual { 2. εἶτον ἧτον εἶτον or εἴητον ἕτον Partic.
8. εἵτην ἦτον εἵτην or εἱήτην ἕτων εἵς, εἶσα,
« 9 ἕν
1. dpev ὧμεν εἶμεν or εἴημεν
Plur. 2. elre are εἶτε or εἴητε tre
3. εἶσαν ize elev or εἔἴησαν ἕντων
or ἕτωσαν
MIDDLE.
Present.
Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. Imperative.
1. ἵεμαι ἰῶμαι ἱείμην Infin. -
Sing. | 2. ἴεσαι th teto ἵεσο ἵεσθαι
8. ἵεται ἰῆται ξεῖτο tio bw
Dual 4 2: ἕεσθον ἰῆσθον ἱεῖσθον ferBov
(3, terBov ἰῆσθον ἱείσθην ἰέσθων Partic.
1, ἱέμεθα ἰώμεθα te(peba ἱέμενος
Plur. 2. terbe ἰῆσθε ἱεῖσθε ἕεσθε
3. ἕενται ἰῶνται ἱεῖντο ἰέσθων
or ἱέσθωσαν
IMPERFECT.
1. ἱέμην
Sing. {> tero
3. ἵετο
2. terboy
Dual /
δα ἰέσθην
τ, ἐέμεθα
Plur. 2. ἵἕεσθε
8. ἕεντο
Future (in composition), ἤσομαι, etc. regular.
First Aorist (in composition), ἡκάμην (only in indic.), 670.
Perfect (in composition), εἶμαι. Imper. εἴσθω. Infin. εἶσθαι.
Partic. εἱμένος.
812] IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE MI-FORM. 181
Secoxp Aorist (generally in composition).
Indicative. Subjuactive. Optative. Imperative.
1, εἵμην ὧμαι εἴμην
Sing. 42. doo a elo οὗ Infin.
3, dro ἧται εἶτο ἔσθω ἴσϑαι
Dual . εἶσθον ἦσθον εἶσϑον ἔσθον
3. ἐἴσϑην ἦσθον clo byv ἔσθων Partic.
1. ἐμιθα ὥμεθα εἴμεθα ἕμενος
Plur 12 εἶσθε ἦσθε εἶσϑε ἐσθε
ἃ. εἶντο ὦνται εἶντο ἔσθων or ἔσθωσαν
Aorist Passive (in composition), εἴθην. Subj. ἐθῶ, Partic. Beis.
Future Passive (in composition), ἐθήσομαι.
Verbal Adjectives (in composition), érds, ἑτέος.
9. The imperfect active of ἀφίημι is ἀφίην or ἠφίηι (044).
The optatives ddfare and ἀφίοιεν, for ddietre and ἀφτεῖεν, and
πρόοιτο, πρόοισθε, and πρόοιντο (also accented προοῖτο, etc.), for
προεῖτο, προεῖσθε, and προεῖντο, sometimes occur. For similar forms
of τίθημι, see 14}.
811, Diarects. 1. Hom. ἴημι (with initial Ὁ}. imp. few for
inv; 1 aor. ἕηκα for ἦκα: 2 aor. ἔσαν, μην, ἕντο, hy omission of ang-
ment, for εἴσαν, εἴμην, εἶντο; infin. ἔμεν for εἶναι. In ἀνέημι, Hom.
fut. dvéow, aOr. ἄνεσα.
2. Hdt. perf. mid. dy-cwvrae for ἀν-εἶνται, and perf, pass. partic.
pe-per-t-pevos, for μεθ-ειμένος, Summoned.
812. φημί (stem ga-), say.
Pres, ἵμνεεν,
φημί ἔφην Suby. φῶ, φής, Gy, etc.
dys or φής ἴφησθα or ἔφης Opt. φαίην, φαίης, etc.
φησί ἔφη Tinper. φαθί or φάθι, φάτω,
φατόν ἔφατον ete.
φατόν ἐφάτην infin. φάναι.
φαμέν ἔφαμεν Partic. φᾷς, φᾶσα, φάν, --- ἰὴ
φατέ ἔφατε Attic prose φάσκων is used.
φασί ἔφασαν
Future, φήσω, φήσειν, φήσων.
Aorist, ἔφησα, φήσω, φήσαιμι, φῆσαι, φήσας.
Verbal Adjectives, Paros, φατέος.
A perfect passive imperative (3 pers.) πεφάσθω occurs.
182 INFLECTION. [818
813. Diarrets. 1. Present. Ind. Dorie Papi, dare, φαντί;
Nom. φῇῆσθα for φής. Infin. poet. φάμεν.
Imperfect. Hom. φῆν, φῆς or φῆσθα, φῆ (Doric ἔφα aud fa),
ἔφαν and φάν (for ἔφασαν and φάσαν).
Aorist. Voric pace for ἔφησε.
2. Homer has some middle forms of dyuls pres. imper. dao,
φάσθω, φάσθε; infin. φάσθαι; partic. φώμενος ; imperf. ἐφάμην or
φάμην, ἔφατο or φάτο, ἔφαντο and φάντος Dorie ful. φάσομαι.
These all have an active sense.
814, Apa (stem jo-), sit.
(Chiefly poetic in simple form: in Attic prose «dO-npat is
generally used.)
Present. Indic. ἡμαι, ἦσαι, ἧσται; ἧσθον; ἥμεθα, Habe, ἦνται.
Imper. ἧσο, ἥσθω, etc. Lnfin, ἧσθαι. Purtic. ἥμενος.
Imperfect. ἤμην, ἦσο, ἧστο; ἧσθον, ἡσθην; ἤμεθα, ἦσθε, ἦντο.
815. Κάθημαι is thus inflected : ~
Present. [ndic. κάθημαι, κάθησαι, xdbntar: κάθησθον; καθήμεθα,
κάθησθε, κάθηντιιι. Subj. καθῶμαι, καθῇ, καθῆται, ete. Opt. καθοίμην,
καθοῖο, καθοῖτο, ete. Imper. κάθησο (in comedy, κάθον), καθήσθω,
ete. 7η Μη. καθῆσθαι. Partic. καθήμενος.
Imperfect. ἐκαθήμην, ἐκάθησο, ἐκάθητο, etc., also καθήμην, καθῆσο,
καθῆστο aid καθῆτο, etc.
816, N. The σ of the stem is dropped except before rae and το,
and in κάθηται and (ἐ)κάθη-το even there. ‘The middle endiugs
added directly to a consonant stem or to a long vowel or diphthong
(as in κεῖμαι) give the present and iuperfect the appearance of a
perfect and pluperfect (503, 3).
817. Diavecrs. Homer has εἴαται, rarely gatas, for ἦνται; and
claro, rarely ἔατο, for qyro. Hdt. has κατίατας and κατέατο.
818, κεῖμαι (stem Ker-, Ke-), lie.
Present. Indie. κεῖμαι, κεῖσαι, κεῖται; κεῖσθον ; κείμεθα, κεῖσθε,
κεῖνται. Subj. and Opt. These forms oceur: κέηται, δια-κέησθε,
κέοιτο, προσ-κέοιντος Jmper. κεῖσο, κείσθω, ete. Infr. κεῖσθαι.
Partic. κείμενος.
Imperfect. ἐκείμην, ἔκεισο, ἔκειτο; ἔκεισθον, ἐκείσθην; ἐκείμεθα,
ἔκεισθε, ἔκειντο.
future. κείσομαι, regular.
821] IRREGULAR VERBS OF ‘THE MI-FORM. 183
819. Diatects. Homer has κέαται, κείαται, and κέονται, for
κεῖνται ; κέσκετο (iterative) for ἔκειτο; κέατο and κείατο for ἔκειντο;
subj. κῆται. Hdt. has κέεται, κεέσθω, κέεσθαι, aud ἐκέετο, for κεῖται,
etc.; and always κέαται and ἐκέατο for κεῖνται and ἔκειντο.
820. οἶδα (stem (6-), know.
(Οἶδα is a second perfect of the stem i-: see εἶδον in
the Catalogue, and 804.)
Srcoxp Perrecr.
Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. Imperative.
1. ofa εἰδῶ εἰδείην
Sing. 2. οἶσθα εἰδῇς εἰδείης ἴσθι
3. οἷδε εἰδῇ εἰδείη ἴστω
Dual ἡ ἴστον ete. ete. ἴστον
ὃ. ἴστον regular regular ἴστων
1. ἴσμεν
Plur. 2. ἴστε ἴστε
4, ἴσασι ἴστων or ἴστωσαν
Infin. εἰδέναι. Partic. εἰδώς, εἰδυῖα, εἰδός, gen. εἰδότος, εἰδυίας (335),
Secorp PLUPERFECT,
Sing. Dual. ιν.
1. ἤδη or ἤδειν ἥσμεν
2. ἥἤδησθα or ἤδεισθα oro qore
3. ἤδει(ν) ἤστην ἦσαν or ἤδεσαν
Future, εἴσομαι οἷς., regular. Verbal Adjective, ἰστέος.
821. Dianects. 1. The Tonic occasionally has the regular
forms οἶδας, οἴδαμεν, οἴδασι; and very often ἴδμεν for ἴσμεν. Tonic
fut. εἰδήσω (rare and doubtful in Attic).
2. Ionie yea, ἤδεε, ἠδέατε, Hom. ἠείδης and ἥδης. ἠείδη, ἴσαν,
in pluperfect. The Attic poets rarely have ἤδεμεν and ἤδετε (like
ἤδεσαν).
3. Hom. εἴδομεν εἰς., for εἰδῶμεν in subj.; ἔδμεναι and ἔδμεν in
infin.; ἰδυῦα for εἰδυῖα in the participle.
4. Aeolic Boeotian trrw for ἔστω in imperative.
δ. For Doric ἔσᾶμι (= οἶδα), see Catalogue.
PART IIL
FORMATION OF WORDS.
822. (Simple aud Compound Words.) A simple word
is tormed from a single stem; as λόγος (stem Aey-), speeck,
γράφω (ypad-), write. A compound word is formed by com-
bining two or more stems; aS λογογράφος (Aoyo, ypad-),
specch-writer ; dxpd-rodis, citadel (upper city).
FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS.
823. (Primitives and Denominatives.) (a) Nouns or adjec-
tives formed directly from a root (153) or from a verb stem
are called primitives; as ἀρχή (stem dpxa-), beginning, from
épy-, stem of dpyw; γραφεύς (γραφευ-), writer, ypadis (γραφιδ-),
style (for writing), γραμμή (γραμμᾶ- for ypag-pa-), dine (828),
γράμμα (γραμματ-), written document, γραφικός (ypadxo-), able
to write, all from ypad-, stem of γράφω, write; ποιη-τής, poet
(maker), ποίησις, poesy (making), ποίημα, pocnd, ποιη-τικός,
able to muke, from ποιε-, Stem of ποιέω, make. Sou δίκη (δικὰ-}»
justice, from the root δικ-; κακός, bad, from κακ-.
824, Nouns, adjectives, and verbs formed from the stems
of nouns or adjectives, are called denominatives; as βασι-
λεία, kingdom, from βασιλε(υ)- (263); ἀρχαῖος, ancient, from
dpxa- (stem of ἀρχήν; δικαιοσύνη, justice, from bdixato-; Tipd-w,
honor, from ripa-, stem of the noun τῖμή.
825. N. (1) The name verbal is often applied to primitive words,
because generally their root or stem actually occurs as a verb stem.
This, however, does not show that the noun or adjective is derived
from the verb, but merely that both have the same root or stem. Thus
the raat. Ὑραφ- contains only the general idea write, not as yet devel-
oped Into a noun, adjective, or verb. By adding ἃ it becomes ypapa-,
184
891) FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS, 185
the stem of γραφή, a writing, which stem generally appears as ypaga-
in the plural, and is modified by case-endings wo ypagd-l, γραφά-ς, ete.
(See 163; 170.) By adding the thematic vowel % (861, 1), γὙράφ- is
developed into yeapo%-, the present stem of the verb Ὑράφω, wrile,
which is modified by personal endings to ypdqo-pev, we write, Ὑράφε-τε,
you rite, ete.
(2) Even ἃ noun or adjective derived from the stem of a denomina-
tive verb is called primitive; as αὐλητής, flute-player, from adde-, the
stein of αὐλέω, play the flute; the latter, however, is formed from the
stent Of αὐλό-ς, lute (829).
826. (Sufixes.) Roots or stems are developed into new
stems by the addition of syllables (not themselves stems)
called suffixes. ‘Thus, in the examples in 823, final a in
dpya-, εὐ- in ypadev-, ιδ- in γραφιδ-, μα- in γραμμα-, ματ- in
ypappar-, tko- 11 γραφικο-, etc. are suffixes.
827. N. Rarely a noun stem has no suffix, and is identical with the
verb stem; as in φύλαξ, guard, from stem φυλακ-, Seen also in φυλάσσω,
1 guard (580); φλόξ (proy-), flume, from same stem) as φλέγτω (831).
828. N. ‘The final consonant of a stem is subject to we same eu-
phonic changes before a suftix as before an ending; as in γράμ-μα for
yrap-na, λέξις for λεγ-σις, δικασ-τής fox dixad-rys. (See 71; 74; 10.)
829. N. A final vowel of the stem may be contracted with a vowel
of the suthx; as in ἀρχαῖος, ancient, from dpya- and ιο-ς (850). But
such a@ vowel is sometimes dropped; as in odpay-cos, heavenly, from
odpavo- and ιο-5, βασιλεικός, kingly, from βασιλε(υ)- aud cxo-s; εὔνο-ια,
govd-will, trom edvoo- and «a (842).
A tinal stem vowel is sometimes changed; especially frowi o to εἴ in
denominatives, as in ofxé-w, diell (olxo-s, house), οἰκέ-της, house-servant,
and οἰκεῖος (orxe-cos), @omestic ; — sometimes from ἃ to w, as in στρατιώ.
τῆς, soldier (orpatia-), Σικελιώ-της, Sicilian Greek (Σικελιᾶ-}; τος some-
times from a to ἡ, as in ὑλήτεις, woody, from ὕλη (bda-).
830. N. (1) Many vowel stcins (especially verb stems) lengthen
their final vowel before a consonant of the suffix, as in verbs (639) ;
as woly-pa, ποίη-σιξ, ποιη-τικός, ποιη-τής, {POI ποιέ-.
(2) Many add σ before » and 7 of a suffix, as in the perfect and
aorist passive (640); as κεχευ-σ-τής, commander, κέλενεσομα, command,
from xedeu- (κελεύω), κεκέλεν-σο-μαι,
(3) Others add 4, as σταθο-μός, station, from στα- (torn).
(4) Others drop a final consonant, a8 σωφρο-σύνη, Lemperance, from
σωφρον-.
831. N. In many nouns and adjectives, especially those in os and »,
the interior vowel of the stem is lengthened or otherwise modified, as
in the second perfect (643; 644). A ehange, of ε ta o {ει and εὖ to οἱ
and ov) is,especially common (31). Thus λήθη, forgetfulness, from dad-
(cf, λέληθα): γόνος, Offspring, from Ὑεν- (cf. yéyova); λοιπός, remaining,
from λειπ- (cf. MATa); στοργή, Affection, from orepy- (cf. ἔστοργα) ;
πομπή, sending, from πέμπ- (cf. πέπομφα) ; τρόπος, turn, from rper-;
φλόξ, flame, yen. φλογός, from φλεγ- ; σπουδή, haste, from σπεὺ-. So
also {n adverbs; see συλ-λήβ-δην (AaB-): see 860, 2.
180 FORMATION OF WORDS. [832
I. FORMATION OF NOUNS.
7 PRIMITIVE NOUNS.
832. The simplest and most. common suffixes in nouns are o-
(nom. os or ov) and ἃ- (nom. α or yn). Nouns thus formed have
a great variety of meanings. The change of ε to o (881) is here
vegular. Leg.
Adyo-s (Aoy-o-), speech, from λεγ-, stein of λέγω (831) ; τρόπος,
turn, from τρεπ- (stem of τρέπω, turn); στόλος, expedition, and
στολή, equipment, from στελ- (stem of στέλλω, send) ; μάχ-η (μαχ-α-),
Dattle, from pax- (stem of μάχομαι, fight).
833. (Agent.) 1. The following suffixes denote the agent :—
εὐ- (om. €us) : γραφ-εύ-ς, writer, from ypad- (γράφω); γον-εύςς,
parent, from γεν-.
τηρ- (NOM. τήρ) : σωτήρ, saviour, from cur (σώω, σῴζω, save).
τορ- (nom. Twp): ῥήτωρ, orator, from ῥε- (ἐρέω, ἐρῶ, shall say).
τα- (Nom. τῆς) : ποιητής, poet (maker), from mote- (ποιέω) ; ὀρχη-
σ-τής, dancer, from ὀρχε- (ὀρχέομαι, dance). (See 890, 1,9.)
2. Τὸ these correspond the following feminine forms :—
τειρᾶ- (nom. τειρᾶ) : σώτειρα, fem. of σωτήρ.
τριᾶ- (0m. Tyra) : ποιήτρια, Poeless; ὀρχήστρια, dancing-girl.
τριδ- (nom. τρίς) : ὀρχηστρίς, dancing-girl, geu. τίδος.
τιδ- (nom. τις} : προφῆτις, prophetess ; οἰκέτις, female servant.
3. Verbals in typ and τρὶς are oxytoue: those in τωρ, τρία, and
τειρα have recessive accent (110, 4).
834. (Action) These sullixes denote action: —
τι- (num, τίς, Sem.) : πίσ-τις, belief; froin πιθ. (πείθω, believe).
σι- (om. σις, fer.) : λύσις, loosing, from Av- (λύω).
σιᾶ- (om. od, fem.) : Soxyua-aia, testing (δοκιμάζω, test).
po- (om. μός, mase.) > ὀδυρμός, wailing (ὀδύρ-ομαι, wail); σπασ-
BOs, spasm (ard-w, draw); ῥυθμὸς (830, 3), rhythm (ῥέω, flow, stem
pu-). (See 574.)
835. N. ‘The suffix μᾶ- (nom μη, fem.) has the same force as simple
G-(832)5 as yroun, knowledye (yvo-); ὀδμή, σάν (ὄξω, 65-).
836. N. Froin stems in ev (ef) of verbs in evw come nouns in fa
denoting action; as βασιλεία, kingly power, kingdom, παιδεία, educativn.
Jor feminines in ed of nouns in evs, see 841.
897. (Result.) ‘These suflixes denote the result of an action: —
par- (nom. μα, neul.): πρᾶγιμα, thing, act, from mpay- (πράσσω,
do): ῥῆμα, saying (thing said), fron pe- (fut. ἐρῶ); τμῆμα, Section,
gon. τμήματος, from tye, τεμ- (τέμνω, cul).
842] DENOMINATIVE NOUNS. 187
«o- (nom. og, neut.): λάχος (Aaxeo-), lof, from λαχ- (λαγχάνω,
gain by lot); ἔθος (ἐθεσ-), custom, trom €6- (εἴωθα, ani uccustomed) ;
γένος (yeveo-), race, from γεν- (γέγον-α, 831).
Jn some primitives this sutfix ἐσ- denotes quality ; as βάθος (Babes-),
depth (froin root Baé-); βάρος (Bapeo-), weight (trom root Bap-); θάλπος
(Gadmea-), heat (θάλπ-ω, warn).
838. (Means or Instrument.) This is denoted by
tpo- (1:0I. tpov, Latin trum): ἄροτρον, plough, aratrum, from
dpo- (ἀρύω, plough); λύτρον, ransom, trom Av- (λύω) ; λοῦτρον,
bath, trom λου- (Aovw, wash).
839. N. The feminine in rpa sometimes denotes an castrument, as
χύτρα, earthen pot, trom xv- (xéw, pour); ξύ-σ-τρὰ, scraper (Liew, scrape) ;
sometiines other relations, e.g. place, aS wadal-o-rpa, place for wrestling,
from παλαι- (παλαίω, wrestle, G40).
840. Some primitives are formed from stems in
avo-, as στέφ-ανος, crown (arédp-w, crown) ;
ova-, as ἡδιονή, pleasure (ἥδιομαι, be pleased) ;
ov- or wv-, as εἰκ-ών, imuge, from εἰκ- (ἔοικα, resemble), κλύδιων,
wave, from κλυδ- (κλύζω, dash).
DENOMINATIVE NOUNS.
841. (Person Concerned.) A person concerned with anything
may be denoted by the following suffixes :—
ev-, mase. (nom. evs), Sometimes ea- (for e¢-ta), fem. (nom.
ect): ἱερ-εύς, priest, from lepo-s, sacred (820), fem. tep-era, priestess ;
βασιλ-εύς, king (derivation uncertain), fem. βασίλ-εια, queen;
πορθμ-εύς, ferryman, frou πορθμό-ς, ferry.
τᾶς, Inasc. (nom. τῆς}, τιδ-, fem. (nom. tis): πολίτης, citizen,
froin πόλεος, city, fem. πολῖτις, female citizen: οἰκέτης, house-servant,
from οἶκο-ς, house, fem. οἰκέτις, housemuid ; otpatis-tys, soldier,
from στρατιά, army (3249).
842. ( Quality.) Nouns denoting quality are formed from adjee-
tive stems by these suffixes :—
τητ- (nous. τῆς, fem.) : νεότης (veoryt-), youth, fron νέοις young ;
ἐσό-της (ἰσοτητ-), equality, from too-s, eyual (ef. Latin véritus, gen.
veritatis, and virtis, gen. vir-tilis).
συνᾶ- (nom. σύνη, fem.) : δικαιοσύνη, justice, from δίκαιοςς, just;
σωφροσύνη, lemperance, from σώφρων {(σωφρον-), temperate.
ta- (nom. ed or ta, fem.): σοφ-ία wisdom (σοφό-ς), κακία, vice
(κωακό-ς), ἀλήθεια, truth, for ἀληθεσ-ιὰ (ἀληθής, true), εὔνοια, kind
ness, for εὐνοία (εὔνους, εὔνους, kind).
188 FORMATION OF WORDS. [843
843. (Place.) This is-denoted by these suffixes: —
1. to- (nom. tov, neut.) with the termination typ-wov: δικαστήρ-
tov, court-house, ἀκροα-τήρτ-ιον, place of hearing (auditorium). These
are probably from old stems in τηρ- (Babrius has δικαστήρων, froin
δικαστήρ, for δικαστῶν, of judges). So σημαν-τήρ-ιον, seal ( place of
sealing), from σημαντήρ.
eto- for e-to-: κουρεῖον, barber’s shop, from xoupev-s, barber ; ‘so
λογ-εἴον (λόγος), speaking-place, Movo-tiov (Μοῦσα), haunt of the
Muses.
2. wv- (nom. ὦν, mase.): ἀνδρών, men's apartment, from ἀνήρ,
gen. ἀνδρ-ός, man; ἀμπελών, vineyard, from dpredo-s, vine.
844. (Diminutives.) These ave formed from noun stems by
the following suffixes : —
to- (nom. τὸν, neut.): wasd-dov, little child, from παιδ- (παῖς,
child); xym-lov, litle garden (κῆπος). Sometimes also ιδιο-, apso-,
υδριο-, νλλιο- (all with nom. in cov); οἰκ-ἔδιον, little house (otxos) ;
mawd-dptov, little child τ ped-vdpov. little song (μέλος); ἐπ-ύλλιον, hiltle
verse, versicle, Latin versiculus (ἔπος). Here final ἐσ- of the stem
is dropped.
trKo- (liom. ἔσκος, masc.) and ἰσκᾶ- (nom. ἔσκην fem.) : wad
taxos, young boy, mad-(onn, young girl; 50. veavioxos, νεάνίσκην from
stem vedy- (om. vedy, youth).
845. N. Diminutives sometimes express endearment, and some-
times conlempl; as πατρίδιον, papa (πατήρ, father), Σωκρατίδιον,
Εὐριπίϑιον.
846. (Patronymics.) These denote descent from a parent or
ancestor (generally ἃ father), and are formed froin proper names
by the suffixes δᾶ- (nom. dys, mase. parox.) and 8- (nom. ς for és,
fein. oxytone); after a consonant ιδᾶ- and s8- (uom. (ys and is).
1. Stems (in a-) of the first declension shorten a and add 6a-
and δι; as Boped-dys, son of Boreas, ad Boped-s, gen. Boped-Sos,
daughter af Boreas, trom Bopéas, Boreas.
2. Stems of the second declension drop the final o and add ιδᾶ-
and δον as IIptau-(8ys, son of Priam, ἸΠριαμ-ίς, gen. Πριωμίδος,
daughter of Priam, fron Πρίαμος. Except those in to, which
change o to a, making nominatives in ἰάδης and ids (as in 1); as
Θεστιάδης and Θεστιάς, son and daughter of Thestius (Θέστιο-ς).
3. Stems of the third declension add .8é- and ¢&-, those in ev
dropping v before t; as Κεκροπ-ίδης, son (or descendant) of Cecrops,
Kexpom-is, gen. (0s, daughter of Cecrops, from Κέκροψ, gen.
Κέκροπος; ᾿Ατρείδης (I]om. ᾿Ατρεΐδης), son of Alreus, from
᾿Ατρεύς, gen. ᾿Ατρέως ; 11ηλείδης (Hom. Πηλεΐδης), son of Peleus,
851) ADJECTIVES. 189
from Πηλεύς, gen. Πηλέως, Hom. also Πηληιάδης (as it from a
form Πηλήιος).
847. N. Occasionally patronymics are formed by the suffix tov-
or ἴων- (nom. twv); as Κρονίων, gen. Kportwvos or Kpovtoves (to
suit the metre), son of Cronus (Kpovers ).
848. (Gentiles.) 1. These designate a person as belonging to
some country or town, and are formed by the following suffixes : —
av- (om. evs, masc.): ᾿Ερετρι-εύς, Eretrian (‘Eperpia) ; Meyap.
evs, Megarian (Μέγαρα, pl.) ; Κολωνεύς, of Colonos (Κολωνό-ς).
va- (uom. τῆς, masc. parox.): Teyed-rys, of Tegea (Teyéa),
᾿Ἠπειρώτης, of Epirus (Ἤπειρος), Σικελιώτης, Sicilian Greek
(Σικελία). (See 829.)
2. Feminine stems in +8- (nom. és, gen, (dos) correspond to mascu-
lines in ev-; as Meyapls, Megarian woman ; and feminines in τιδ- (nom.
τις, Zen. ridos), to masculines in ra-, 85 Σικελιῶ-τις, Sicilian woman.
ADJECTIVES.
849. 1. The simplest suftixes by which primitive adjectives
(like nouns) are formed from roots or stems are o- and a- (nom.
tase. os; fem. ἢ, ἃ, or os; neut. ov): σοφός, σοφή, σοφόν, wise ;
κακ-ός, bad ; λοιπ-ός, remaining (λειπ-, λοιπ-, 831).
2. Some have v- (nom. us, εἴα, ¥), added only to roots: ἡδύς,
sweet, from ἦδ- (ἤδομαι, be pleased); Bup-vs, heavy (root Bap-, ef.
Bap-os, weight) ; ταχεούς, swift (root ταχ-, cf. τάχος, swiftness).
3. Some have ἐσ- (nom. ἧς, es): ψευδής (ψευδεσ-), false (pers
opat, lie); σαφ-ἥς (σαφεσ-), plain (root ca¢-).
Most adjectives in ys are compounds (881).
4. Some expressing inclination or tendency have pov- (nom. por,
μον): μνήμων, mindful, from μνα- (μέμνημαι) ; τλήμων, suffering,
from τλα- (see τλάω) ; ἐπελήσιμων, forgetful, from λαθ- (λανθάνω).
850. Adjectives signifying belonging or related in any way fo a
person or thing are formed from noun stems by the suffix vo-
(1lom. tos): οὐράν-ιος, heavenly (otpavd-s), οἰκεῖος, domestic (olxo-s,
see 829); δίκαιος, just (δικᾶ-), "APyvaios, Athenian (᾿ Αθῆναι, stein
᾿Αθηνὰ-).
851. 1. Denominatives formed by exo- (nom. ἐκός) denote rela-
tion, like adjectives in cos (850), sometimes fitness or ability. Stems
in edrope before wo. Eng.
᾿Αρχοικός, fit for rule (ἀρχή, rule); πολεμεικός, warlike, of war
(πόλεμο-ς); φυσ-ικός, natural (φυσι); βασιλοικός, kingly (βασιλ-
evs); γραφ-ικός, capable of writing or drawing (γραφὴ).
2. Similar adjectives are formed directly from verb stems by
190 FORMATION OF WORDS. [852
τικο- (NOM. TiKos): πράκ-τικός, fit for action, practical, from mpay-
(πράσσω); αἰσθη-τικός, capable of feeling.
852. Adjectives denoting material are formed by
Wvo- (nom. «wos, proparoxytone), as λίθ. “νος; of stone (λίθος);
ἐο- (Nom. ἐος, CONtr. ots), aS χρύσεος, χρυσοῦς, golden (χρυσός).
853. N. Adjectives in wés (oxytone) denote time, as ἑαρ-ινός, vernal
(fap, spring), νυκτερεινός, by night (νύξ, night, vixrepos, by night).
854. Those denoting fulness (chiefly poetic) are formed by ἐντ-
(noin. εἰς, εσσα, ev); χαρίεις, 4 graceful (yapt-s), gen. XUPE-EVTOS 5
vArp-es (872), wooly ; cf. 829. Latin gratidsus, silvdsus.
855. Other adjectives with various meanings are formed by
various suffixes besides the simple o-; a5 vo-, Ao-, po-, τμο-, μο-, OF
σιμο-, τῆριο-, all with nom. in og: δεινός (Set-), terrible, δειλός,
timid, φθονερός, ennrious (φθονός, envy), μάχιμος, warlike, χρή:
omos, useful, ἱππά-σιμος, fil for riding (or for cavalry) (from ἱππά
Copat), πεισ-τήριος, persuasive (πείθω). Verbals in Ads are active,
those in yds are passive; those in pds are generally active but
sometimes passive, as φοβερός, both frightful and afraid.
856, N. Most adjectives in vos, Aos, and pos are oxytone.
857. All participles are primitive (verbal) adjectives: so the
verbals in τὸς and reos.
858. Comparatives aud superlatives in repos and τατὸς are
denominatives; but those in τὼν and toros are primitives, adding
these terminations directly to the root (357, 2).
ADVERBS.
859. Most adverbs are formed from adjectives (see 365-367).
860. Adverbs may be formed also from the stems of nouns or
verbs by the following suffixes : —
1. δόν (or δά), ηδόν: dva-par-dév, openly (ἀνα-φαίνω, φαν-Ὺ, poet.
also ἀναφανδά ; κυν-ηδόν, like a dog (κύων, gen. κυν-ὅς}),
2. δὴν or ἄδην: κρύβ-δην, secretly (κρύπτω, conceal); συλλήβ-δην,
collectively (συλλαμβάνω, λαβ-, 611); σπορ- -άδην, sealteredly (σπείρω,
sow, Pree stom omep-); ἀνέ-δην, profusely (dav-inus, let vut, stem é-).
. τί: ὀνομασ-τί, by name (ὀνομάζων ; ἐλληνισ-τί, In Greek (ἑλληνίζωλ),
4. See also the Jocal endings θὲ, θεν, δε, etc. (292- 26).
DENOMINATIVE VERBS.
861. A verb whose stem is derived from the stem of a noun
or adjective is called a denominatire (824). The following are the
principal terminations of such verbs in the present indicative
active: —
810] COMPOUND WORDS, 191
3. aw (stem in a): rinda, donor, from noun τιμή (τὶ μᾶ-), honor.
2. ew (€-): ἀριθμέω, count, from ἀριθμό-ς, nwaber (824).
3. ow (0): μισθόύω, let for hire, trom μισθό-ς, pay.
4. eva (ev-): βασιλεύω, be king, from βασιλεύς, king (see $63).
5. afw (a8-): δικάζω, judge, from δίκη, (dixa-), justice (S62).
Ὁ, tw (εδ.}: ἐλπίζω, hope, from ἐλπίς (€Amd-), hope (862).
7. atv (av-): onanive, signyy, from σῆμα (onpar-). vega (865).
8. ὕνω (uv-): ἡδόνω, sweeten, trom dirs, sweet (502).
862. Verbs in alu, Lu, ave, and ὥνω are of the fourth class:
for their formation, see 379-396. Some denominatives of this
class end in AAw, aipw, apw, and tow; as ἀγγέλλω (dyyedos),
announce, καθαίρω (xudapd-s), purify, ἱμείρω (ΐμερο-ς), lony for,
μαρτύρομαι (μαρτύς, stem puproup-), call to witness.
863. Many verbs in evw are formed merely by the analogy of those
(like Pagdev-w) with steims m ev: thus βουλεύω, tae counsel, trou
βουλή; ἁληθεύω, Le trithful, from ἀληθής.
864. Likewise many in Ww and most jn agw merely follow the
anaiogy of those like ἐλπίζω (ἐλπεδ-}) and φράζω (gyad-}, Which Inve
aclual stems in δ (see 587).
865. ‘The stems in av and ὧν of verbs in aww and www come from
nominal stems without v: see the examples above.
866. Some verbs in ew come fram adjectives in ys by dropping ἐσ-
of the stem; as εὐτυχέω, be fortunate, from εὐτυχήν ζεύτυχεσ-).
867. XN. Verbs formed from the same noun stem with different
endings sometimes have different meanings; as πολεμέω and (poctic)
πολεμίζω, make war, πολεμόω, make Losiile, both from πόλεμο-ς, wer ;
δουλόω, cnslave, δουλεύω, be ἃ slave, tron dobdo-s, sluve.
868. (Desideratives.) 1. Verbs expressing a desire tu do auy-
thing are sometimes fornied frou other verbs and trom uouns by
the ending gew (stem in ge-), Sometimes aw or tw (α- OF ca); as
Spa-ceiw, desire to do (δρά- ὦ); γελωσείω, desire to laugh (yeAe-w);
φον-ἅἄω, be hluod-thirsty (φόνος) : κλαυτστιάω, desire lo weep (κλαίω,
stem xAav-).
2. Some verbs in caw denote a bodily condition; as ὀφθαλμιάω,
have discased eyes (ophthalmia), ὠχριάω, be pale, ἐρυθριάω, lush.
COMPOUND WORDS.
869. In a compound word we have to consider (1) the
first part of the compound, (2) the last part, and (38) the
meaning of the whole.
870. N. The modifications which are necessary when a compound
consists of more than two parts will suggest themselves ab once.
192 FORMATION OF WORDS. [871
J. FIRST PART OF A COMPOUND WORD.
871. 1. When the first part of a compound is a noun or
adjective, only its stem appears in the compound.
2. Before a consonant, stems of the first declension gen-
erally change final ἃ to 0; those of the second declension
retain oj aud those of the third add o. Before a vowel,
stems of the first and second declensions drop ἃ oro. Lg.
Θαλασσοκράτωρ (θαλασσᾶ-), ruler of the sea, χορο-διδάσκαλος
(xopo-), chorus-teacher, παιδο-τρίβης (παιδ-), trainer of boys, κεφαλ-
αλγής (κεφαλᾶ-), causing headache, χορ-ηγός (xopo-), (orig.) chorus-
director; so ἰχθυο- φάγος (ἰχθυ-), fish-eater, φυσιο λόγος, enquiring
into nature. The analogy of the second (or o-) declension prevails
throughout.
872. N. There are many exceptions. Sometimes 7 takes the place
of 0; as xon-pdbpos (χοή, Libation), bringer of libations, ἐλαφη-βόλος
(¢Aago-s), deer-slayer. Stems in ἐσ (226) often change ἐσ to 0; as
τειχο-μαχία (rexer-), wull-fighting. ‘The stems of ναῦς, ship, and βοῦς,
ox, generally appear without change (vav- and βου); as ναυ-μαχία, sea-
fight, βου-κόλος, herdsman Sometimes a noun appears in one of its
cases, as if it were a distinct word ; as νεώστοικος, ship-house, vaval-ropos,
traversed by ships.
873. Compounds of which the first part is the stem of
a verb are chiefly poetic.
1. Here the verbal stem sometimes appears without change
before a vowel, and with ¢, ὦ, or o added before ἃ consonant. ἐσ.
Πείθιαρχος, obedient to authority; μεν-ε-πτόλεμος, steadfast in
batile; dpx--téxtwy, master-huilder ; λιπιό γαμος, marriage-leaving
(adulterous). Ἵ
2. Sometimes ot (before a vowel σὴ is added to the verb
stem. EF.9.
Δὺύ-σώπονος, toil-relieving; orpepi-Sixos (στρεφ.), Justice-twisting ;
τερψίνοος (repm-), soul-delighting ; πλήξιυππος (rAny-), horse-lashing.
874. 1. A preposition ur an adverb may be the first part of a
compound word; as in προ-βάλλω, throw before (882, 1), ἀει-λογίά,
continual talking, εὐγενής, well-born.
2. Here no change of form occurs, except when a final vowel is
elided, or when πρό contracts o with a following € or o into ov, as
in mpovyw (πρό, ἔχω), hold before; προὔργου (πρό, ἔργου), forward,
φροῦδος (πρὸ, ὁδοῦ), gune (93).
3. Euphonic changes occur here as usual; as in ἐγχώριος (ἐν
and xwpa): see 78.
881] COMPOUND WORDS. 193
875. The following inseparable prefixes are uever used
alone: —
1. av- (a- before a consonant), called alpha privative, with a
negative force, like English un-, Latin in- It is prefixed to noun,
adjective, and verb stems, to forin adjectives; as ἀν-ελεύθερος, unfree,
ἀναιδής, shameless, dy-dpocos, unlike, d-mass, childless, ἄ γραφος, un-
written, ἄ-θεος, godless, &-(¢ )utvas, wineless.
2. δυσ-, tl (opposed to εὖ, well), denoting difficulty or (rouble;
as δύσ-πορος, hard to pass (opposed to εὔ-πορος); δυσ-τυχής, unfor-
tunale (opposed to εὐτυχής).
3. νη- (Latin ne), a poetic negative prefix; as νήποινος, un-
avenged ; νημερτής, unerring (for νηταμερτής).
4. ἡμι- (Latin semr-), half; as ἡμίθεος, demiyod.
876. N. A few intensive prefixes are found in poetry,— dpr,
épt-, δα-, Zar, as dpt-yvwros, well-known; δα-φοινύς, bloody.
877. N. The prefix α- is sometines copulanve (denoting union);
as in ἄσλοχος, bedfellow (from λέχος).
Ii, LAST PART OF A COMPOUND WOLD.
878. At the beginning of the last part of a compound
noun or adjective, ἃ, 4, or ὁ (unless it is long by position)
is very often lengthened to yor ὦ. E.9.
Xtpat-nyds (orpatés, ἄγω), general; ὑπήκοος (ὑπό, ἀκούω),
obedient; κατ-ηρεφής (κατά, ἐρέφω), covered ; ἐπ-ώνυμος (ἐπί, ὄνομα),
naming or named for; κατ-ήγορος (κατά, ἀγοράν, accuser ; but ἄντολβος,
unblest.
879, The last part of a compound noun or adjective
is often changed in form before the suffix. ‘This takes
place especially in compound adjectives, and when an
abstract noun forms the Jast part of a compound noun.
Eg.
DAG Tipos {τιμή}, honorloving ; et-dpwv (φρήν), joyous; πολυ-
πρᾶγμων (mpaypa), meddlesome; Oo Boria (λίθος, βολή), stone:
throwing, vaw-puyia (ναῦς, μάχη), seasfight; εὐπραξία (πρᾶξις), success
(doing well).
880. N. An abstract noun compounded with a preposition may
retain its form; as mpo-Bovdy, forethought.
881. Compound adjectives in ys (849, 3) are especially
frequent.
1. The last part may be a noun, generafly a neuter it os (stem
194 FORMATION OF WORDS. [882
iu ἐστ): as εὐγενής (γένος), well born, δεκα-ετής (ἔτος), of ten years;
εὐτυχής (τύχη), fortunate,
2. The last part may be formed from a verb stem; as ἀ-φαν-ἧς
(dav), unseen, ἡμι-θανής (Bav-), half-dead.
882. 1. A compound verb can be formed directly only by
prefixing a preposition to a verb; as προσ-άγω, bring to.
2. Indirect compounds (denominatives) are formed from
compound nouns or adjectives. Eg.
Λιθοβολέω, throw stones, denom. froin ArOo-Boros, stone-thrower ;
νομοθετέω, make laws, from νομο-θέτης, lav-maker; ἀπειθέω, disobey,
from ἀπειθής, disobedient; κατηγορέω, accuse, frou κατ-ήγορος (878),
accuser, See 543.
II. MEANING OF COMPOUNDS.
883. Compound nouns and adjectives are of three classes,
distinguished by the relation of the parts of the compound
to cach other and to the whole,
884. (1) Objective compounds are those composed of a
noun and a verb, adjective, or preposition, in which the
noun (as first or second part) stands to the other part in
some relation (commonly that of object) which could be
expressed by an oblique case of the noun. Εἰ.
Aoyo-ypados. speech-triter (λόγους γράφων); μισ-ἄνθρωπος, man-
hanng (μισῶν ἀνθρώπους); λυσί-πονος, foil-releving; στρατ-ηγός,
general (army-leading, στρατὸν ἄγων); ἀξιό-λογος, worthy of mention
(ἄξιος λόγου): ἁμαρτ-ἔνοος (873, 1), erring wm mind (ἁμαρτὼν νοῦ);
ἰσόθεος, godlike (ἴσος Gea); τερποι-κέραυνος (873, 1), delighting in
thunder (τερπόμενος κεραυνῷ); διοτρεφής, reared by Zeus (cf. bu-
πετής, fallen or sent from Zeus, and Qu-tpedys, ἃ proper name).
So with a preposition : éy-ywptos, native (ἐν yopu); ἐφ-ΐππιος, belong-
ing on a horse (ἐφ᾽ ἵππῳ); ἐφ-έστιος, on the hearth (ἐφ᾽ aria).
885, N. When the last part of an objective compound is a cransitive
verhal in os formed by We sux o (832), it gcuerally aceents the
penult if this is shure, otherwise the last syllable. But jf the last part
is intransitive or passive (in sense), the accent is recessive. ‘Thus
λογο-γὙράφος, spevch-wriler ; λιθο βόλος, thrower of stones, DUL λιθό-βολος,
pelted with stones ; μητρο-κτόνος, matricide, matricadal ; but orpar-nyés,
general ; λογο-ποιός, story-muker, ᾿
886. (2) Determinative compounds are nouns or adjec-
tives in which the first part, generally as adjective or
adverb, qualifies (or determines) the second part. Εἰ.
8891 MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. 195
᾿Ακρόπολις, citadel (ἀκρὰ πόλις); peo-nuBpia (μεσὴ ἡμέρα, 66),
mid-day; ψευδόςμαντις, false prophet; ὁμόδουλος, fellow-slave (ὁμοῦ
δουλεύων) ; δυσ-μαθής, learning with difficulty; ὠκυ-πέτης, swift-flying ;
προ-βουλή, forethought; ἀμφι- θέατρον, amphitheatre (theatre extending
all rounl); ἄτγραφος, unwritten. Here belong adjectives like weAt
ηδής (dus), honey-sweet, Apyi-Boos, swift as Ares (Ares-swift).
887. N. Here belong a few compounds sometimes called copulative,
made of two nouns or two adjectives, and signifying a combination of
the two things or qualities. Strictly, the first part limits the last, like
an adjective or adverb. Such are ἑἰατρό-μαντις, phusician-prophet (a
prophet who is also ἃ physician); ξιφο-μάχαιρα, sword-sabre ; dvdpb-mais,
man-child ; yAuxv-mexpos, sweetly Litter θεόνταυρος, gud-bull (of Zeus
changed to a bull).
888. (3) Possessive or altributive compounds are adjee-
tives in which the first part qualifies the second (as in
determinatives), and the whole denotes a quality or attri-
bute belonging to some person or thing. E.g.
Apyupo-rofos, with silver-bow (ἀργυροῦν τύξον ἔχων); κακο-δαίμων,
ill-fated (κακὸν δαίμονα ἔχων); mixpd-yapos, toretchedly married (πικρὸν
γάμον ἔχων); 640-vopos, having the same laws; ἑκατογ-κέφαλος, hundred-
headed ; δεκα-ετής, of ten years (duration); ἀγαθο-ειδής, Aaving the
appearance (εἶδος) of gool; év-Beos, inspired (having God within) ;
ὠκύπους, swifi-footed (ὠκεῖς πόδας ἔχων), — Lut ποδ-ώκης (πόδας
ὠκύς), foot-swift, is a determinative.
889. N. In compound verbs, the original verb remains the funda-
mental part, inoditied more or less in meaning by the preposition
prefixed. Other compounds than those here mentioned present no
ditticulties in respect to meaning.
PART IV.
SYNTAX.
DEFINITIONS.
890. (Subject and Predicate.) Every sentence must
contain two parts, a sulject and a predicate. The subject
is that of which something is stated. The predicate is
that which is stated of the subject. Thus in the sentence
Δαρεῖος βασιλεύει τῶν Περσῶν, Darius is king of the
Persians, Δαρεῖος is the subject and βασιλεύει τῶν
Περσῶν is the predicate.
891. 7. When any part of εἰμί be, connects the subject with a
following noun or adjective, the verb is called the copula (i.e.
means of coupling), and what follows is called the predicate; as
Δαρεῖός ἐστι βασιλεύς, Darius is king, Σόλων ἐστὶ σοφός, Solon is
wise, where ἐστί ἰδ the copula. The copulas ἐστί and εἰσί are often
omitted, especially in proverbial sayings, as χαλεπὰ τὰ καλά, fine
things are hard, P. Rp.435¢, with nouns like ἀνάγκη, necessity, ὥρα,
aime, and with the impersonal verbal in -τέον, For copulative verbs,
see 908.
2. Elvi, however, can form a complete predicate, as in εἰσὶ θεοί,
Gods exist.
892. (Olyect.) That upon which the action of a verb
is exerted is called the object. The object may be either
direct or indirect: thus, in ἔδωκε τὰ χρήματα τῷ ἀνδρί,
he gave the money to the man, χρήματα is the direct
object and ἀνδρί is the indirect (or remote) object.
893. Verbs which can have a direct object are called
transitive; those which cannot are called intransitive.
196
898] SUBJECT. 197
SUBJECT AND PREDICATE.
SUBJECT.
894. The subject of a finite verb (446) is in the
nominative ; as ὁ ἀνὴρ ἦλθεν, the man came.
895. 1. The subject of the infinitive is in the aecusa-
tive; aS φησὶ τοὺς ἄνδρας ἀπελθεῖν, he says that the men
went away.
2. But the subject of the infinitive is generally
omitted when it is the same as the subject or the object
(direct or indirect) of the leading verb; as βούλεται
ἀπελθεῖν, he wishes to yo away; φησὶ γράφειν, he says
that he is writing; παραινοῦμέν σοι μένειν, we advise you
to remain.
8. So when it is the same with any important adjunct of the
leading verb; as κακούργου ἐστὶ κριθέντ᾽ ἀποθανεῖν, it is like a male-
Sactor to die by sentence of the law (928, 2), D.4,47.
896. The subject nominative of the first or second person is
omitted, except when special emphasis is required.
897. The nominative of the third person is omitted : —
1. When it is expressed or implied in the context; as ὁ Κῦρος
πράσσει ἃ βούλεται, Cyrus does what he (Cyrus) pleases ;
2. When it is a general word for persons; as λέγουσι, they say,
it is said ;
3. When it is indefinite; as in ὀψὲ ἦν, it was late; καλῶς ἔχει, tt
is well; δηλοῖ, it is evident (the case shows): 50. in the impersonal
construction with the verbal in τέον, as in πειστέον (ἐστὶ) τῷ νόμῳ,
we must obey the law (1597).
4. When the verb implies its own subject, as κηρύσσει, the her-
ald (κῆρυξ) proclaims, ἐσάλπιγξε, the trumpeter sounded the trumpet,
κωλύει, α hindrance occurs. In passive expressions like παρεσκεύ.
ασταί μοι, preparation has been made by me (IJ am prepared), the
subject is really the idea of preparation etc. contained in the verb.
See 1240.
5. With verbs like ve, it rains, ἀστράπτει, it lightens, σείει, there
is an earthquake (it shakes), where, however, some subject like Zevs
or θεός was originally supplied.
898. Many verbs in the third person singular have an infini-
tive or a sentence as their subject. These are called impersonal
198 SYNTAX. [899
verbs. Such are πρέπει and προσήκει, it is proper, ἔνεστι and ἔξεστι,
it is possible, δοκεῖ, it seems yood, συμβαίνει, it happens, and the like;
as ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν τοῦτο ποιεῖν, it is in your power to do this (to do this
is possible for you). ἕῳ also δεῖ and χρή, it is required, we ought ;
as δεῖ ἡμᾶς ἀπελθεῖν, we must yo amay.
The name impersonal is applied with greater propriety (though
less frequently) to the verbs of 897, 3 and 4.
SUBJECT NOMINATIVE AND VERB.
899. 1. A verb agrees with its subject nominative in
number and person; as (ἐγὼ) λέγω, 1 say, οὗτος λέγει,
this man says, οἱ ἄνδρες R€yovary, the men say.
2. But a nominative in the neuter plural regululy
takes a singular verb; as ταῦτα ἐγένετο, these thinys
happened, τὰ οἰκήματα ἔπεσεν, the buildings fell. So
ἀδύνατώ ἐστι (or ἀδύνατόν ἐστι). it 15 impossible.
Exceptions sometimes occur, especially with nouns denoting
persons. Several are found in Xenophon; as in A.1,7".
900. A singular collective noun denoting persons may
take a plural verb; as τὸ πλῆθος ἐψηφίσαντο πολεμεῖν,
the majority voted for war, T.1, 125.
901. N. When several subjects are connected by and, they
generally have a plural verb. But the verb nay agree with one
of the subjects (generally the nearest), aud be understood with
the rest. ‘The Jatter generally happens when they are connected
by or or ποῦ. £.9.
Σοφοὶ ἐγώ τε καὶ ob ἦμεν, you and I were wise, P.7'h. 1544;
μαχούμεθα Koy ἐγώ τε καὶ σύ, you and Jf will fight together, P. Rp. 335%}
οὐ σὺ μόνος οὐδὲ οἱ σοὶ φίλοι πρῶτον ταύτην δόξαν ἔσχετε, it Was nol
you alone nor your friends who first took up this notion, P. Lg. 338°.
"Ene οὔτε καιρὸς οὔτ᾽ ἐλπὶς οὔτε φόβος οὔτ᾽ ἄλλο οὐδὲν ἐπῆρεν,
neither opportunity nor hope nor fear nor anything else incited me,
J.18, 298.
902. N. If the subjects are of different persons, the verb is in
the first person rather than the second or third, and in the second
rather than the third. (See examples under 901.)
903. N. A verb in the dual may follow two snbjects in the
singular, or even a plural subject denoting two persous or things.
Bat even a subject in the dual may bave a verb in the plural.
(See Jl. 4, 453; 5, 10, 275; 16, 218.)
910] PREDICATE NOUN ANI) ADJECTIVE, 199
904. N. Sometimes a verb agrees with the predicate nomina-
tive; as αἱ δὲ εἰσφοραὶ καὶ χορηγίαι ebdatpovius ἱκανὸν σημεῖόν
ἐστιν, his taxes and payments fur choruses are a sufficient sign of
prosperity, Ant. 2,γ. 8,
905. N. Rarely a singular verb has a masculine or feminine
subject in the plural; as ἔστι δὲ ἑπτὰ στάδιοι ἐξ “AB Wou ἐς τὴν
ἀπαντίον, and there is a distance of seven stades from Abydos to the
opposite coast, Hd.7,34. In such cases the plural form often seems
to have arisen from an afterthought, especially when the subject
follows the verb.
See also the phrases ἔστιν of ete., 1029.
906. N. A preposition with a numeral may represent the snb-
ject of a verb; as ἀπέθανον αὐτῶν mepi τριακοσίους, about three hun-
dred of them perished, X. H.4,6".
PREDICATE NOUN AND ADJECTIVE.
907. With verbs signifying to le, to become, to appear,
to be named, chosen, made, thought or reyarded, and the
like, a noun or adjective in the predicate is in the same
case as the subject. Ey.
Οὗτός ἐστι βασιλεύς, this man is king; ᾿Αλέξανδρος θεὸς ὠνομά-
ζετο, Alexander was named a God; ἠρέϑθη στρατηγός, he was
chosen general; ἡ πόλις φρούριον κατέστη, the city became a for-
tress, T.7,283 οὗτός ἐστιν εὐδαίμων, this man is happy: ἡ πόλις
μεγάλη ἐγένετο, the city became great; ηὔξηται μέγας, ke has grown
(to Le) great; νομίζεται σοφός, he is thought wise.
908. The verbs which ave here included with the copula epi
(891, 1) are called copulative verbs. The predicate nominative
with the passive verbs of this class represents the predicate accusa-
tive of the active construction (1077).
909. ‘The predicate adjective with these verbs agrees with the
subject in gender and uuimber, as well as in case. (See 919.)
910. The predicate of an infinitive with its subject accusative
expressed (895, 1) is in the acensutive; as βούλεται τὸν υἱὸν εἶναι
σοφόν, he wishes his son to be wise. Sv when the participle is
used like the infinitive in indirect discourse (1494); as ἥδεσαν
τὸν Κῦρον βασιλέα γενόμενον, they knew that Cyrus had become
king.
For such a predicate with the subject omitted, see 927 and
928.
200 SYNTAX, [911
APPOSITION.
911. A noun annexed to another noun to describe it,
and denoting the same person or thing, agrees with it
in case. ‘This is called apposition, and the noun thus
used is called an appositive. Eg.
Δαρεῖος ὁ βασιλεύς, Darius the king. ᾿Αθῆναι, μεγάλῃ πόλις,
Athens, a great city, Ὑμᾶς τοὺς σοφούς. you, the wise ones. Ἡμῶν
τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, of us, the Athenians. Θεμιστοκλῆς ἥκω (se. ἐγὼ)
παρὰ σέ, 1, Themistocles, am come to you, T.1,137. Φιλήσιος καὶ
Λύκων of ᾿Αχαιοί, Philesius and Lycon, the Achaeans, X. A.5, 6%.
912. N. A noun in apposition with two or more nouns is gen-
erally plural (or dual); as ὕπνος πόνος re, κύριοι ξυνωμόται, sleep
and toil, lordly conspirators, A. Eu.127; θάρρος καὶ φόβον, adpove
ξυμβούλω, daring and fear, two senseless counsellors, P. Ti. 694.
913. N. An adjective may have a genitive in apposition with
a genitive which it implies; as ᾿Αθηναῖος dv, πόλεως τῆς μεγίστης,
being (a citizen) of Athens, the greatest city, 1". Ap. 294.
For a genitive in apposition with the genitive implied in a
possessive prononn, see 1001.
914. N. A noun which might stand in the partitive genitive
(1088) sometimes takes the case of the words denoting its parts,
especially when the latter include the whole of the former; as οἰκίαι
ai μὲν πολλαὶ πεπτώκεσαν, ὀλίγαι δὲ περιῆσαν, most of the houses had
fallen, but a few remained (where we night have τῶν οἰκιῶν), 1.1,
89. So οὗτοι ἄλλος ἄλλα λέγει, these men all say different things,
X.A.2,1% This is called partitive apposition.
915. N. A noun may be in apposition with a whole sentence,
being in the nominative when it is closely connected in thought
with the subject of the sentence, elsewhere in the accusative; 43
κεῖνται πεσόντες, πίστις οὐ σμικρὰ πόλει, they lie prostrate, — no small
(cause of) confidence to the city, K.i2h.415. «Ἑλένην κτάνωμεν,
Μενέλεῳ λύπην πικράν, let us kill Helen, (which will be) a bitter grief
to Menelaus, le. ΟΥ. 1106.
916. NX. A noun may be in apposition with the subject or the
object of a sentence, where we usc as or a like word; as ἵπποι
ἤγοντο θῦμα τῷ Ἡλίῳ, horses were brought as an offering to the Sun
(in active, ἵππους ἄγειν θῦμα, to bring hurses as an offering), X.C.8,
3%; ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν ἡμᾶς λαβεῖν ξυμμάχους, you can gain us as allies,
X.A.5,46 So τυχεῖν τινος φίλου, to gain some one as a friend;
χρῶμαι τούτῳ φίλῳ, J treat him as a friend. So τίνος διδάσκαλοι
ἥκετε τ as teachers of what are you come? P. Eu.287*. See 1080.
921] AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 201
917. N. Homer often adds an appositive denoting a part to a
noun or pronoun denoting a person; as Δηιοπίτην οὕτασεν ὦμον,
he wounded J). in the shoulder, J1.11,420; ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ᾿Ατρεΐδηῃ “Aya-
μέμνονι ἥνδανε θυμῷ, but he was not pleasing to the heart of Agamem-
non, son of Atreus (lit. to A., his heart), [1.1,24.
For ὁ δέ in Homer followed by a noun in apposition, see 987, 1.
AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES.
918. Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender,
number, and case. This applies also to the article and
to adjective pronouns and participles. E.g.
Ὃ σοφὸς ἀνήρ, the wise man; τοῦ σοφοῦ ἀνδρός, τῷ σοφῷ ἀνδρί,
τὸν σοφὸν ἄνδρα, τῶν σοφῶν ἀνδρῶν, etc. Οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ, this man;
τούτου τοῦ ἀνδρός, τούτων τῶν ἀνδρῶν. Αἱ πρὸ τοῦ στόματος γῆες
ναυμαχοῦσαι, the ships engaged in battle befure the mouth (of the
harbor), T.7, 23.
This includes predicate adjectives with copulative verbs, the case
of which has already been considered (907); as αἱ ἄρισται δοκοῦσαι
εἶναι φύσεις, the natures which seem to be best, X. M.4, 13.
919. The adjective may be either attributive or predicate. An
attributive adjective simply qualifies the noun, without the inter-
vention of any verbal form (like all the adjectives in 918, except
ἄρισται). The predicate adjective may be counected with its noun
by the copnla (89}) or by a copulative verb (908); as ὁ ἀνὴρ
ἀγαθός ἐστιν, the man is good: καλεῖται ἀγαθός, he is called good. It
may stand to its noun jn any relation which implies some part of
εἰμί; as πτηνὰς διώκεις τὰς ἐλπέδας, you are pursuing hopes which are
winged (i.e. hopes being winged), E.frag.273; ἀθάνατον τὴν μνήμην
καταλείψουσιν, immortal is the memory they will leave behind them (i.e.
τὴν μνήμην οὖσαν ἀθάνατον), 1.9,3; ποιεῖ τοὺς Μήδους ἀσθενεῖς,
he makes the Medes (to be) weak. Every adjective which is not
attributive is classed as a predicate.
A predicate adjective is often known by its position with
respect to the article; see $71, and the cxamples.
920. N. A collective noun in the singular denoting persons
may take a plural participle; as Τροίαν ἑλόντες ᾿Αργείων στόλος,
the Argives’ army having taken Troy, A. Ag.577.
921. N. An adjective may conform to the real rather than the
grammatical gender of a noun denoting a person; as φίλε τέκνον,
dear child} Jl.22,84.
202 SYNTAX. [922
922. N. Δύο, two, is often used with a plural noun; as εὖρος
δύο πλέθρων (1083, 5), of two plethra in breadth, X.A.1, 28,
923, N. An attributive adjective belonging to several nouns
generally agrees with the nearest or the most prominent one, and
is understood with the rest; as τὸν καλὸν κἀγαθὸν. ἄνδρα καὶ γυναῖκα,
the honorable man and woman, P.G.470¢; παντὶ καὶ λόγῳ καὶ μηχανῇ,
by every word and device.
924. N. (a) A predicate adjective (like a verb, 901) is regu-
larly plural if it belongs to several singular nouns, or dual if it
belongs to two. Hf the nouns are of different genders, the adjec-
tive is commonly masculine if one of the nouns denotes a male
person, and commonly neuter if a)l denote things. Thus, εἶδε
πατέρα τε καὶ μητέρα καὶ ἀδελφοὺς καὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα αἰχμα:
λώτους γεγενημένους, he saw that both his father and his mother, his
brothers, and kis own wife had been made captives, X.C. 3, 17; δόξα
δὴ καὶ ἐπιμέλεια καὶ νοῦς Kal τέχνη καὶ νόμος σκληρῶν καὶ μαλακῶν
πρότερα ἂν εἴη, 1". Ly. 8924,
(ὦ) But it sometimes follows both the gender and number of
the nearest or most. prominent noun; as πρόρριζος αὐτὸς, ἡ γυνὴ.
τὰ παιδία, KixtoT ἀπολοίμην, may 1 perish most wretchedly root and
branch, myself, my wife, my children, Av. R.AST.
925. N. A masculine or feminine noun in the singular, denot-
ing a class rather than an individual, may have a neuter predicate
adjective, which is used as a noun; as καλὸν ἡ ἀλήθεια, a beau
tiful thing is truth, P. Lg. 663°; ἀθάνατον dpa ἡ ψυχή; ts the soul
then immortal (an immortal thing)? 1. Ph. 105%
926, N. A predicate adjective is sometinies used where we
should use an adverb or adverbial phrase; as ἑκόντες ἦλθον, they
came willingly; ὄρκιος δέ σοι λέγω, J say it lo you on my oath,
$.An.3805; πρῶτος δ᾽ ἐξερέεινε Νέστωρ, and first, Nestor tnquired,
71.10,543. There is often, however, a great distinction between
the adjective and the adverb; as πρῶτος αὐτοὺς εἶδον, J was the
Jirst to seo thems πρώτους αὐτοὺς εἶδον, ey were the first whom I
saw; πρῶτον (adv.) αὐτοὺς εἶδον, first (of all that 1 did) 1 saw
them. ;
ADJECTIVES BELONGING TO THE OMITTED SUBJECT
OF AN INFINITIVE,
927. When the subject of an infinitive is omitted because
it is the same as the subject nominative of the leading verb
(895, 2), adjective words and nouns which would agree
928] OMITTED SUBJECT OF ΑΝ INFINITIVE, 203
with the omitted subject are assimilated to the preceding
nominative. E.g.
Βούλεται σοφὸς εἶναι, he wishes to be wise; Πέρσης ἔφῃ εἶναι,
he said he was a Persian, X.A.4,4". Οὐχ ὁμολογήσω ἄκλητος
ἥκειν, 1 shall not admit that I am come unbidden, P. 87.1744; οὐκ
ἔφη αὐτὸς ἀλλ᾽ ἐκεῖνον στρατηγεῖν, he (Cleon) said that not (he)
himself, Lut ke (Nicias) was gencral; he said οὐκ (ἐγὼ) αὐτὸς (στρα-
tyy®) ἀλλ᾽ ἐκεῖνος στρατηγεῖ, αὐτός being adjective (969, 1) and
ἐκεῖνος substantive; 1.4,25. Such adjective words or nouns may
be in the predicate with copulative verbs (907) or in other con-
structions. The assimilating nominative may be either expressed
or understood,
928. But when the subject of an infinitive is omitted
because it is the same as the object or other adjunct (895, 3)
of the leading verb, —
1. 1f this adjunet is a dative, adjective words and nouns
may either be assimilated to the dative, or stand in the
accusative in agreement with the omitted subject of the
infinitive. Eg.
Πρέπει σοι εἶναι προθύμῳ (or πρόθυμον), it becomes you to
be zealous; viv oot ἔξεστιν ἀνδρὶ γενέσθαι, now it is in your power
to show yourself aman, X.A.7,19; παντὶ mpoonxe ἄρχοντι φρονίμῳ
εἶναι, it becomes every ruler to be prudent, X. Hip.7,1; συμφέρει αὐτοῖς
φίλους εἶναι, it is for their interest to be friends, Χ.Ος.11,38, Ἔδοξεν
αὐτοῖς συσκενασαμένοις ἃ εἶχον Kal ἐξοπλισαμένοις προιέμαι,
they decided to pack up what they had and arm themselves completely,
and to advance, X. A.2,12; but ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς προφυλακὰς καταστή-
σαντας συγκαλεῖν τοὺς στρατιώτας, they decided to station pickets
and to assemble the soldiers (ib.38,2'); in 1,91, we find two datives
and an accusative.
2. 1f the adjunct is a genitive, predicate adjectives are
generally assimilated to it; but other adjective words and
all nouns stand in the accusative. 2.9.
Κύρου ἐδέοντο ὡς προθυμοτάτου γενέσθαι, they asked Cyrus to
be as devoted to them as possible, X.H.1,52; but (with a noun)
᾿Αθηναίων ἐδεήθησαν σφίσι βοηθοὺς γενέσθαι, they asked the A the-
nians to become their helpers, 11. 0.100; κακούργου ἐστὶ κριθέντ'
ἀποθανεῖν, στρατηγοῦ δὲ μαχόμενον τοῖς πολεμίοις, it ts like a
malefactor to die by the sentence af a court, but like a general (to die)
Fighting the enemy, 1.4.47; δέομαι ὑμῶν μεμνημένους τῶν εἰρημέ-
νων τὰ δίκαια ψηφίσασθαι, I beg of you to remember whut has been
said, and lo vote what is just, 1.19, 51.
204 SYNTAX, [929
929. Words in the construction of 928 which refer to a preced-
ing accusative are of course in the accusative; as ἄλλους πέπεικα
συμμαθητάς por φοιτᾶν, 1 have induced others to go as my fellow-,
pupils, P. Bu. 272¢.
930, N. The principles of 927 and 928 apply also to a predicate
with wy or with the participle of a copulative verb; as ἥδεσαν
σοφοὶ ὄντες, they knew that they were wise (but ἥδεσαν τούτους
σοφοὺς ὄντας, they knew that these men 106} wise).
931. N. When an infinitive depends on a participle which sup-
plies its omitted subject, predicate words take the case of the par-
ticiple; as ἦλθον ἐπί twa τῶν δοκούντων εἶναι σοφῶν, 1 went to one
of those who seemed to be wise, P.Ap.21>; τῶν προσποιουμένων εἶναι
σοφιστῶν τινας, some of those who profess to be sophists, 1.15, 221,
So τοῖς δοκοῦσιν εἶναι σοφοῖς, to those who seem to be wise.
ADJECTIVE USED AS A NOUN.
932. 1. An adjective or participle, generally with the
article, may be used as a noun. Eg.
Ὃ δίκαιος, the just man; ὃ ἐχθρός, the enemy; φίλος, a friend ;
κακή, α base woman; τὸ μέσον or μέσον, the middle ; of κακοί, the bad ;
τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς, to the good; τῶν κρατούντων, of those in power; κακά,
evils ; τὰ θνητά, mortal things: of γραψάμενοι Σωκράτην, the accusers
of Socrates.
2. In some cases, a noun is distinctly implied; as τῇ ὑστεραῖᾳ
(sc. ἡμέρᾳ). on the next day; ἡ δεξιά (sc. χείρ), the right hand; ἡ
εὐθεῖα (sc. 586s), the straight road; ὃ ἄκρατος (sc. οἶνος), unmixed
wine; ἐς τὴν ἑὰυτῶν (sc. γῆν), into their own land.
933, The neuter singular of an adjective with the article
is often used as an abstract noun; 85 τὸ καλόν, beauty
(= κάλλος), τὸ δίκαιον, justice (= δικαιοσύνη).
934. N. The participle, which is a verbal adjective, is occasion-
ally thus used for the infinitive, which is a verbal noun; as τὸ
δεδιός, fear (= τὸ δεδιέναι), T.1,36; ἐν τῷ μὴ μελετῶντι, in the want
of practice (in the not practising) (= ἐν τῷ μὴ μελετᾶν), T.1,142.
So in Latin, opus est maturato, there is need of haste.
THE ARTICLE.
HOMERIC USE OF THE ARTICLE,
935. In Homer the article appears geverally as a demon-
939] HOMERIC USE OF THE ARTICLE, 205
strative or personal pronoun; sometimes (in the forms
beginning with 7) as a relative. Eg.
Τὴν δ᾽ ἐγὼ οὐ λύσω, but I will not free her, 11.1,29; τοῦ δὲ κλύε
Φοῖβος ᾿Απόλλων, and Phoebus Apollo heard him, 11.1,43; & γὰρ
ἦλθε θοὰς ἐπὶ νῆας ᾿Αχαιῶν, for he came to the swift ships of the
Achaeans, J1.1,12. As relative, πυρὰ πολλὰ τὰ καίετο, many fires
which were burning, 11.10,12; δῶρα τά οἱ ξεῖνος δῶκε, gifts which a
stranger gave him, Od.21, 13.
936, N. Even in Homer, adjectives and participles used as
nouns (982, 1) have the article, as in Attic Greek; as οἱ yap
ἄριστοι ἐν νηυσὶν κέαται, for the bravest sit by the ships, [1.11,658; of
ἄλλοι, the others; τά τ᾽ ἐόντα τά τ᾽ ἐσσόμενα, both things that are and
things that are to de, 11.1,70.
937, 1. When the article is used with nouns in Homey, it is
generally a pronoun (especially ὁ δέ), with which the noun is in
apposition; as ὁ δ᾽ ἔβραχε χάλκεος “Apys, and he, brazen Ares,
roared, J1.5, 859; ἡ 8 ἀέκουσ᾽ ἅμα τοῖσι γυνὴ κίεν, and she, the woman,
went with them unwilling, 111,348. :
2. Nearer the Attic use of the article are examples like these :
αὐτὰρ ὁ τοῖσι γέρων ὁδὸν ἡγεμόνευεν, but he, the old man, showed them
the way, Od.24,225; τὸν 8 οἷον πατέρ᾽ εὗρον, and they found him, the
Sather, alone, ib. 226.
3. Hardly, if at all, to be distinguished from the Attic article is
that found in examples like these: ὅτε δὴ τὴν νῆσον ἀφικόμεθ', when
now we came to the island, Od.9,543; τό τε σθένος ‘Opiwvos, and the
might of Orion, I1.18,486; αἱ δὲ γυναῖκες ἱστάμεναι θαύμαζον, and the
women stood and wondered, I1.18, 495.
4. It is, therefore, often difficult to decide the exact force of an
article in early Greek. The above examples show a gradual tran-
sition, even in Homer, from the original pronoun to the true defi-
nite article.
938, N. The examples in 937, 3, are exceptional; and in such
cases the nouns usually stand without the article in Homer, as in
Latin. Thus δεινὴ δὲ κλαγγὴ γένετ᾽ ἀργυρέοιο βιοῖο, and terrible
came the clang from the silver bow, I1.1,49, would in Attic Greek
require ἡ κλαγγὴ and τοῦ βιοῦ.
939. Herodotus generally uses the forms of the article begin-
ning with + in the place of the ordinary relative, — of which he
uses only the forms ὅς, 4, of, and ai, except after prepositions.
Thus ἄλλος ὄρνις ἱρὸς, τῷ οὔνομα Φοϊνιξ, another sacred bird, whose
name is Phoenix, 2,73. Yn other respects, he uses the article as it
is used in Attic prose.
200 SYNTAX. [940
940. N. The lyric poets follow the Homeric usage with respect
to the article more closely than Herodotus; and the tragic poets,
especially in the lyrie chorus, adinit the Homeric use of the article
as ἃ relative or a personal pronoun.
ATTIC USE OF THE ARTICLE.
941, In Attic Greek the article generally corresponds
to our article the; as ὁ ἀνήρ, the man; τῶν πόλεων, of
the etties; τοῖς “EXAnow, to the Greeks; τὰ δέκα ἔτη,
the (well known) ten years (at Troy), T.1,11.
942. The Greek may use the article in certain cases in
which the English omits it. Such are the following (940-
951) :—
943. Proper names may take the article; as ὁ Σωκράτης or
Σωκράτης, Socrates.
944, Abstract nouns often take the article; as ἡ ἀρετή. virtue,
ἡ δικαιοσύνη, justice; ἡ εὐλάβεια, caution. But ἀρετή ete. are also
used in the same sense.
945. 1. Nouns qualified by a demonstrative pronoun regularly
take the article; as οὗτος & ἀνήρ, this mun; ἐν ταῖσδε ταῖς πόλεσιν,
in these cities. (For the position, sve 974.)
2. But this article may be omitted with proper names, as οὗτος
Νεοπτόλεμος, this Neoptolemus, D.18,114; also where the demon-
strative is equivalent to here or there, as ὁρῶμεν ὀλίγους τούτους
ἀνθρώπους. we see few men here, X.A.4,75; so οὑτοσὶ ἀνήρ, this man
here, and οὗτος ἀνήρ used contemptuously; sce also νῆες ἐκεῖναι
ἐπιπλέουσι, ships are sailing up yonder, T.1, 51.
3. The tragedians often omit this article with demonstratives.
946. 1. Nouns with a possessive pronoun take the article when
they refer to definite individuals, but not otherwise; as 6 ἐμὸς
πατήρ, my father, ὁ σὸς κοινωνός, your partner, 1.18,21; but σὸς
κοινωνός Would Ineau ἃ purtuer of yours. (For predicates, see 956.)
2. So also with nouns on which a possessive genitive of a per-
sonal, demonstrative, or reflexive pronoun depends; as 6 πατήρ
pov, my father; ὁ ἐμαυτοῦ πατήρ, my own father; ὁ τούτων πατήρ,
their father ; ἡ ξαυτῶν γῇ, their own land. But παῖς ἑαυτοῦ, a child
of his own.
947. Τοιοῦτος, τοσοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τοσόσδε. and τηλικοῦτος may
take the article; as τὸν τοιοῦτον ἄνδρα, suck a man. It is always
used with δεῖνα, such a one (420),
9647 ATTIC USE OF THE ARTICLE, 207
948, A numeral may have the article, (a) to distinguish a part
of a number; (ὁ) to express a round number, especially with ἀμφί,
περί, ὑπέρ, Or εἰς; (6) to express nierely ἃ number in the abstract.
Thus, τῶν πέντε τὰς δύο μοίρας νέμονται, they hold two of the sive
parts, T.1,10; ἔμειναν ἡμέρας ἀμφὶ τὰς τριάκοντα, they remained
ahout thirty days, ΧΟ Αν 4, 8%; ὅπως μὴ ἐρεῖς ὅτι ἐστὶ τὰ δώδεκα δὶς ἐξ,
don't say that twelre is twice siz, P. Rp. 337%.
949, The article is often used, where we use a possessive pro-
houn, to mark something as belonging to a person or thing men-
tioned in the sentence; as ἔρχεται αὐτή τε ἡ Μανδάνη πρὸς τὸν
πατέρα καὶ τὸν Κῦρον “ dv υἱὸν ἔχουσα, Mandane comes to her futher
(lit. to the father) herself, and with her son Cyrus, X.C.1, 31.
950. The article may have a generic foree, marking an object
as the representative of a cluss; as ὁ ἄνθρωπος, man (in general) ;
οἱ γέροντες, the aged (as a class).
951. The article sometimes has a distributive force, where we
should use each or a; as ὑπισχνεῖται δώσειν τρία ἡμιδαρεικὰ τοῦ
μηνὸς τῷ στρατιώτῃ, he promises to give three half-darics a mouth to
each soldier, X.A.1,34.
952. 1. An adverb, a preposition with its case, or any similar
expression, may be used with the article to qualify a noun, like an
attributive adjective; as ot τότε ἄνθρωποι, the men of that time; τοῦ
πάλαι Κάδμου, of ancient Cudmus, 8.0.1.1; οἱ ἐν ἄστει ᾿Αθηναῖοι, the
Athenians in the city,
2. Here a nean denoting men or tings is often omitted; as οἱ ἐν
ἄστει, those in the cily; τοῖς τότε, to those of that tine; οἱ ἀμφὶ 11λά-
twa, those ubout Plato (gencrally Plato und his sekoul, or simply
Plato).
953. ‘The nouns γῇ, land, πράγματα, things or affairs, vids, son,
and sometines other nouns which are readily suggested by the
context, may be omitted after the article, when a qualifying adjec-
tive or genitive is added; as εἰς τὴν ἑαυτῶν (s¢. γῆν)», fo Ueir own
land ; ἐκ τῆς περιοικέδος, from the neighboring country; τὰ τῆς TO
λεῳς, the affairs of the state; τὰ τῶν πολεμίων, whut belongs to the
enemy; Περικλῆς ὁ Ξανθίππου (sc. vids), Pericles, the son of Xan-
thippus; τὴν ταχίστην (se. ὁδόν), the quickest way. Expressions like
τὰ (or τὸ) τῆς Τύχης, τὰ τῆς ὀργῆς, with no definite nouns under-
stood, sometines do not differ from Tuyn, Fortune, and ὀργή, wrath.
954, Instead of yepeating a noun with new adjuncts in the
name sentence, it may be sufficient. to repeat ifs article; as οἱ τῶν
πολιτῶν παῖδες καὶ οἱ τῶν ἄλλων, the children of the citizens and those
of the others.
208 SYNTAX. [965
955. 1, The infinitive, as a verbal noun (1516), may take a
neuter article; as τὸ εἰδέναι, the knowing; σοὶ τὸ μὴ σιγῆσαι λοιπὸν
ἦν, it remained for you not to be silent, D.18, 23.
2. In like manner, a neuter article may precede a whole clause
considered as a noun; as τὸ γνῶθι σαυτὸν πανταχοῦ ‘ort χρήσι-
μον, the saying “know thyself” is everywhere useful.
956. A predicate noun or adjective seldom has the article; as
νὺξ ἡ ἡμέρῃ ἐγένετο, the day became night, Hd.1,103; καλεῖται ἡ
ἀκρόπολις ἔτι ὑπ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων πόλις, the citadel is still called “ city” by
the Athenians, T.2,15. So when it has a possessive pronoun; as
οὗτος ἐμὸς ἑταῖρος ἦν, he was my companion, P. Ap.2)*.
But when the predicate refers definitely to distinct persons or
things, it may have the article; as εἰσὶ δ᾽ οὗτοι οἱ εἰδότες τἀληθές ;
and are these those (whom I mean) who know the truth? P. H. M.284*.
957. N. Βασιλεύς is generally used without the article to desig.
nate the king of Persia; as τούτους ἀποπέμπει βασιλεῖ, he sends
these to the King, T.1,128. But the article is sometimes found:
compare 1.4,166 and 179. So sometimes μέγας βασιλεύς ; aS μεγά-
λου βασιλέως βασίλεια, a palace of the Great King, X.A.1, 2°.
958, N. The article is often omitted in some familiar expressions
of time and place, which are probably older than the Attic use of
the article; as dua ἕῳ, at daybreak; νυκτός, by night; ἅμα ἦρι, at the
opening of spring; ἐν ἀγορᾷ, in the market-place; κατ᾽ ἄγρον, in the
country; κατὰ γῆν, by land; κατὰ θάλασσαν, by sea; ἐκ δεξιᾶς. from
the right; ete.
POSITION OF THE ARTICLE.
959. (Attributive Position.) 1. An attributive adjective
which qualifies a noun with the article commonly stands
between the article and the noun; as ὁ σοφὸς ἀνήρ, the
wise man; τῶν μεγάλων πόλεων, of the great cities.
2. The noun with the article may be followed by the
adjective with the article repeated. The first article is
sometimes omitted. In these cases the noun has greater
emphasis than in the preceding form (1). £.g.
Ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ σοφός, sometimes ἀνὴρ ὁ σοφός, the wise man (but nol
ὃ ἀνὴρ σοφός, see 971); αἱ πόλεις αἱ δημοκρατούμεναι, the states which
are under democracies ; ἄνθρωποι οἱ ἀδικώτατοι, men who are the most
unjust; πῶς ἡ ἄκρατος δικαιοσύνη πρὸς ἀδικίαν τὴν ἄκρατον ἔχει, (the
question) how pure justice is related to pure injustice, P. Rp. 545%
960] POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 209
960. This applies to possessive pronouns and all expressions
which have the force of attributive adjectives, when they are pre.
ceded by the article (952, 1), and to dependent genitives (except
parlitives and the genitive of the personal pronoun); as 6 ἐμὸς
πατήρ, my father; ἡ σὴ μήτηρ, thy mother ; 6 ἐμαυτοῦ πατήρ, my own
father (but 6 πατήρ pov, my futher, see 977); of ἐν ἄστει ἄνθρωποι
or οἱ ἄνθρωποι οἱ ἐν ἄστει, the men in the city; οὐδεὶς τῶν τότε ᾿Ελλή-
νων, none of the Greeks of that time, τὸ τῷ ὄντι ψεῦδος, the real
falsehood ; εἰς τὴν ἐκείνων πόλιν, into their city; οἱ τῶν Θηβαίων
στρατηγοί, the generals of the Thebans, ἐν τῇ ἀναβάσει τῇ μετὰ
Κύρου, in the upward march with Cyrus, X.A.5,1. For participles,
see 909,
961. N. Two or even three articles may thus stand together;
as τὰ γὰρ τῆς τῶν πολλῶν ψυχῆς ὄμματα, the eyes of the soul of the
mulatude, P. So. 2544,
962. An adjective in either of these positions with reference to
the article (959) is said to be in the attribulive position, as opposed
to the predicate position (see 971).
963. N. Of the three attributive positions, the first (e.g. ὃ σοφὸς
ἀνήρ) is the most common and the most simple and natural; the
second (ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ σοφός) is the most formal; the third (ἀνὴρ 6
σοφός) is the least common. -
964. N. The article at the beginning of a clause may be sepa-
rated from its noun by μέν, δέ, τέ, γέ, yap, δή, οὖν, and by τὶς in
Herodotus.
965. The partitive genitive (1088) rarely stands in either of the
attributive positions (962), but either precedes or follows the gov-
erning noun and its article; as of κακοὶ τῶν πολιτῶν, OY τῶν πολιτῶν
οἱ κακοί, the bad among the citizens (rarely of τῶν πολιτῶν κακοί).
Even the other forms of the aduomiual genitive occasionally
have this position, as διὰ τὸν ὄλεθρον τῶν σνστρατιωτῶν ὀργιζόμενοι,
angered by the death of their fellow soldiers, Χ. A.1,2%.
966. 1.°O ἄλλος in the singular generally means the rest, seldom
the other; of ἄλλοι means the others: as ἡ ἄλλη πόλις, the rest of the
state (but ἄλλη πόλις, another state); ot ἄλλοι “EAAnves, the other
Greeks.
2. Both ὃ ἄλλος and ἄλλος (rarely ἕτερος) may have the mean-
ing of besides; as εὐδιωιμονιζόμενος ὑπὸ τῶν πολιτῶν καὶ τῶν ἄλλων
ξένων, congratulated by the citizens and the foreigners besides, Ῥ. Ο. 476,
οὐ yap ἦν χορτὸς οὐδὲ ἄλλο οὐδὲν δένδρον, for there was no grass,
neither any tree (lit. nor any other tree), X.A.1,55,
210 SYNTAX. [967
967. N. Todds with the article generally (though not always)
means the greater part, especially in οἱ πολλοΐ, the multitude, the
majority, and τὸ πολύ, the greater part. So ot πλεώνες, the majority,
TO πλεῖον, the greater part, οἱ πλεῖστοι and τὸ πλεῖστον, the greatest
number or part.
968. N. When a noun has two or more qualifying words, each
of them may take an article and stand in either attributive posi-
tion (959), or all may stand between one article and its noun; as
κατὰ τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν τὴν παλαιὰν φωνήν, according to the old Attic dia-
lect, P.Crat.8989; τὰ τείχη τὰ ἑαυτῶν τὰ μακρά, Heir own long walls,
T.1,108; πέμποντες εἰς τὰς ἄλλας ᾿Λρκαδικὰς πόλεις, sending to the
other Arcadian cities, Ἃ. Ἡ.Ἴ, 485, τὴν ὑπ᾽ ᾿Λρετῆς Ἡρακλέους παίδευ-
σιν, the mstruction of Hercules by Virtue, X.M.2,1*4. Occasionally
one stands between the article aud the noun, while another follows
the noun without an article; as of ἀπὸ τῶν ἐν τῇ “Agta πόλεων
“Ἑλληνίδων, those (coming) from the Greek cities in Asia, X.H.4,3%
969. N. When an attributive participle (919) with dependent
words qualifies a noun with the article, either the participle or the
dependent words may follow the noun; as τὸν ῥέοντα ποταμὸν
διὰ τῆς πόλεως, the river which runs through the city, X. 125,24; τὸν
ἐφεστηκότα κίνδυνον τῇ πόλει, the danger dnpending over the eity,
1).18, 176; ἡ ἐν τῷ ᾿Ισθμῴ ἐπιμονὴ. γενομένη, the delay which
occurred at the Isthmus, T.2,1S. But such expressions may also
take either of the attributive positions (959, 1 or 2).
970. N. The Greeks commonly said the Euphrates river, τὸν Et
φράτην ποταμόν, ete., rather Unan the river Euphrates. So sometimes
with names of mountains (rarely with those of cities or islands).
971. (Predicate Position.) When an adjective either
precedes the article, or follows the noun without taking
an article, it is always a predicate adjective (see 919). Jy.
Ὃ ἀνὴρ σοφύς or sodas ὁ ἀνήρ (sc. ἐστίν), the man is wise, or
wise is the man; πολλοὶ οἱ πανοῦργοι, mony are the enil-dvers ; ἐφημέ-
pos γε τὰς τύχας κεκτήμεθα, we possess our fortunes Jor a day (50.
οὔσας), Gnom.
972. N. The predicate force of such adjectives must often be
expressed by # periphrasis; as πτηνὰς διώκεις τὰς ἐλπίδας, the
hopes you are pursuing are winged, lil. you are pursuing hopes (being)
winged, E.frag.273; ἡγούμενοι abrovopwy τῶν ξυμμάχων, being
deaders of allies who were independent, T.1,97; ψιλὴν ἔχων τὴν
κεφαλήν, having his head bare, X.AA,8% So πύσον ἄγει τὸ στρά.
τευμα: how great is the army he is bringing?
979] POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 211
978. The position of such an adjective (971) with reference to
the article is called the predicate position.
974. A noun qualified by a demonstrative pronoun
regularly takes the article, and the pronoun stands in
the predicate position (911). Eg.
Οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ, this man, or ὁ ἀνὴρ οὗτος (never ὁ οὗτος ἀνήρ).
Περὶ τούτων τῶν πύλεων, about these cities. (See 945, 1-3.)
975. N. But if an adjective or other qualifying word is added,
the demonstrative may stand between this and its noun; as ἡ
στενὴ αὕτη ὁδός, this narrow road, X.A.4,29; τῷ ἀφικομένῳ τούτῳ
ξένῳ, to this stranger who has come, P. Pr.313%. (See 977, 2.)
976. Ν. Ἕκαστος, ἑκάτερος, ἄμφω, and duddrepos have the
predicate position like a demonstrative, as ἑκάστη ἡ ἡμέρα, each
day; but with ἕκαστος the article may be omitted. Τοιοῦτος,
τοσοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τοσόσδε and τηλικοῦτος, When they take the
article, lave the first attributive position (959, 1).
977. 1. A dependent genitive of the personal pronoun (whether
partitive or not) has the predicate position (971), while that of
other pronouns (unless it is partitive) has the first attributive
position (959, 1); as ἡμῶν ἡ πόλις or ἡ πόλις ἡ μῶν, Gur city (uot
ἡ ἡμῶν πόλις); ἡ τούτων πόλις, these men’s city (ποῦ ἡ πόλις τού.
των); μετεπέμψατο ᾿Αστυάγης τὴν ἑαυτοῦ θυγατέρα καὶ τὸν παῖδα
αὐτῆς, Astyages sent for his own daughter and her son, Ἃ. ΟἹ, 81,
2. But if a qualifying word is added, the personal pronoun may
stand between this and the noun; as ἡ δοκοῦσα ἡ μῶν πρότερον
σωφροσύνη, what previously scemed to be our modesty, T.1,32. (See
975.)
978. 1. The adjectives ἄκρος, μέσος, and ἔσχατος, when they
are in the predicate position (971), mean the top (or extremity), the
middle, the last, of the thing which their nouns denote; as ἡ ἀγορὰ
μέση or μέση ἡ ἀγορά, the middle of the market (while ἡ μέση ἀγορά
would mean the middle market); ἄκρα ἡ χείρ, the extremity of the
hand.
2. When no article is used, as in the older poetry, the context
inust decide the ineaning. Compare summus, medius, extremus, and
ultimus in Latin.
979. Πᾶς and σύμπας, all, and ὅλος, whole, generally have the
predicate position; as πάντες of ἄνδρες or of ἄνδρες πάντες, all the
men; ὅλη ἡ πόλις or ἡ πόλις ὅλη, all the city. But they can also
be used like attributive adjectives, preceded by the article; as ἥ
πᾶσα Σικελία, the whole of Sicily, τὸ ὅλον γένος, the entire ruce.
212 SYNTAX. [980
The distinction here was probably no greater than that between
all the city and the whole city in English. We find even oi πάντες
ἄνθρωποι, all mankind, X.A.5, 67.
980. Αὐτός as an intensive pronoun, ipse (989, 1), has the
predicate position ; as αὐτὸς ὁ ἀνήρ, the man himself. But ὁ αὐτὸς
ἀνήρ, the same man (989, 2).
PRONOMINAL ARTICLE IN ATTIC GREEK.
981. In Attic prose the article retains its original
demonstrative force chiefly in the expression ὁ wey...
ὁ δέ, the one... the other) Ey.
Οἱ μὲν αὐτῶν ἐτόξευον, of 8 ἐσφενδόνων, some of them shot with
bows, and others used slings, X.A.3,3'. Δεῖ τοὺς μὲν εἶναι δυστυ-
xets, τοὺς δ᾽ εὐτυχεῖς, some must be unfortunate, and others fortunate,
Ἐς frag.207. Tay πόλεων af μὲν τυραννοῦνται, αἱ δὲ δημοκρατοῦνται,
αἱ δὲ ἀριστοκρατοῦνται, some states are governed by tyrants, others
by demucracies, and others by aristocracies, P. Rp.335%
982. N. The neuter τὸ μέν... τὸ δέ may be used adverbially,
partly ... partly. For τοῦτο pév ... τοῦτο δέ in this sense, see 1010.
983. N. (a) ‘O δέ etc. sometimes mean and ke, but he, ete., even
when no ὁ μέν precedes; as Ἱνάρως ᾿Αθηναίους ἐπηγάγετο" of δὲ
ἦλθον, Inaros called in Athenians; and they came, T.1, 104.
(Ὁ) With prepositions these expressions are generally inverted ;
as πολλὰ piv... ἐν δὲ τοῖς, P. Eu.803°; παρὰ μὲν τοῦ ξύλα, παρὰ δὲ
τοῦ σίδηρος, X. Rp. A.2, 11.
984, A few other relics of the demonstrative meaning of
the article are found in Attic, chiefly the following: —
Tov καὶ τόν. this man and thal; τὸ καὶ τό, this and that; τὰ καὶ τά,
these and those; as ἔδει yap τὸ καὶ τὸ ποιῆσαι, Kal τὸ μὴ ποιῆσαι, for
we ought to have done this thing and that, and not to have done the
other, D. 9, 68.
Πρὸ τοῦ (or προτοῦ», before this, formerly.
Καὶ τόν or καὶ τήν, before an infinitive; as καὶ τὸν κελεῦσαι
δοῦναι (sc. λέγεται), and (it is said) he commanded him to give it,
X. C.1, 3%
So occasionally τῷ, therefore, which is cominon in Homer.
1In this use, and in other pronominal uses of the article (as in
Homer), the forms ὁ, ἡ, of, and ai were probably oxytone (δ, ἥ, οἵ, ai).
They are printed here without accents in conformity with the prevail-
ing usage in school editious of Greek authors. Sce 138.
9891] PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS, 213
PRONOUNS,
PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS.
985. ‘The nominatives of the personal pronouns are
seldom used, except for emphasis. (See 896.)
986. The forms ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, and ἐμέ are more emphatic than the
enclitics μοῦ, μοί, μέ. The latter seldom occur after prepositions,
except in πρός pe.
987, Of the personal pronouns of the third person, of, of,
etc. (389), only of and the plural forms in o¢- are used in
Attic prose. There they are generally indirect reflexives,
that is, in a dependent clause (or joined with an infinitive
or participle in the leading clause) referring to the subject
of the leading verb. Εἰ.
"Ἔλεξαν ὅτι πέμψειε σφᾶς ὁ ᾿Ινδῶν βασιλεύς, they said that the
king of the Indians had sent them, X.C.2,47. ᾿Ἐπρεσβεύοντο ἐγκλή-
para ποιούμενοι, ὅπως σφίσιν ὅτι μεγίστη πρόφασις εἴη τοῦ πολε-
μεῖν, they sent embassies, making charges, that they might have the
strongest possible ground for war, T.1,126. Ἐνταῦθα λέγεται ᾿Απόλ-
λων ἐκδεῖραι Μαρσύαν νικήσας ἐρίζοντά οἱ περὶ σοφίας, here Apollo
is said to have flayed Marsyas, having beaten him in a contest (with
himself, ot) in skill, X.A.3, 28
For the restricted use of these pronouns in Attic Greek, see
also 392.
988. In Homer and Herodotus, and when they occur in
the Attic pocts, all these pronouns are generally personal
pronouns, though sometimes (direct or indirect) reflexives.
Eq.
Ἔκ γάρ σφεων φρίνας εἵλετο Παλλὰς ᾿Αθήνη, for Pallus Athena
bereft them of thetr senses, 11.18,311; τὸν κριὸν ἀπὸ €o (144, 4)
πέμπε θύραζε, he sent the ram forth from himself through the door,
Od.9,46). Αὐτίκα δέ of εὔδοντι ἐπέστη ὄνειρος. and soon a dream
came to him in his sleep, Hd.1,34; οὐδαμοῖσι τῶν νῦν σφεας περιοι-
κεόντων εἰσὶ ὁμόγλωσσοι, they have the same speech with none of their
present neighbors, 11ἃ.1,57. Τίνι τρόπῳ θανεῖν ope pis; tn whut
manner do you say she died? S. Tr. 818.
989. Αὐτός has three uses: —
1. In all its cases it may be an intensive adjective pro-
noun, himself, hersel/, itself, themselves (like ipse). Lg.
214 SYNTAX, [990
Αὐτὸς ὁ στρατηγός, the general himself; ἐπ᾿ αὐτοῖς τοῖς alyto-
λοῖς, on the very cousis, ‘1.1,7; ἐπιστήμη αὐτή, knowledye itself.
2. Aurds in all its cases, when preceded by the article,
means the same (tdem). Fg.
Ὁ αὐτὸς ἀνήρ, the same man; τὸν αὐτὸν πόλεμον, the same war ;
ταὐτά, the same things (42).
3. ‘Lhe oblique cases of αὐτός are the ordinary personal
pronouns of the third person, Jam, her, it, them. Eg.
Στρατηγὸν αὐτὸν ἀπέδειξε, he designated him as general. See
four other examples in X.A.1,1,98&3.
It will be noticed that the nominative of αὐτός is never a per-
sonal pronoun.
For σφέ, σφώ, viv, and μέν, sce 394 and 395.
990. N. A pronoun with which αὐτός intensive agrees is often
omitied; as ταῦτα ἐποιεῖτε αὐτοί (se. ὑμεῖς), you did this yourselves ;
πλευστέον εἰς ταύτας αὐτοῖς ἐμβᾶσιν (se. ὑμῖν), you must sail,
embarking on these yourselves (in person), 1.4,16. δὸ αὐτὸς ἔφη
(ipse dixit), himself (the master) said it.
991. Ν Αὐτός with an ordinal numeral (372) may designate
a person as the chief of a given munber; as ἠρέθη πρεσβεντὴς
δέκατος αὐτός, he was chosen ambassador as the chief of ten (himself
the tenth), X. 11,2,2",
992. N. The oblique cases of αὐτός are often used where the
indirect reflexives (487) might stand, and sometimes even where
the direct reflexives (995) would he allowed; as ἁπλῶς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ
γνώμην ἀπεφαίνετο Σωκράτης πρὸς τοὺς ὁμιλοῦντας αὐτῷ, Svcrates
used to declare his oon opoion plainly to those who conversed with him,
X. 47.4,73, where of inight have been used; but in 1,23, we have
ἐλπίζειν ἐποίει τοὺς συνδιατρίβοντας ἑαυτῷ. The union of an inten-
sive and a personal pronoun in atrus explains this freedom of
usage.
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
993. The reflexive pronouns (40!) refer to the subject
of the clause in which they stand. Sometimes in a de-
pendent clause they refer to the subject of the leading
verb, — that is, they are indirect reflexives (987). Eg.
Γνῶθι σαυτόν, know duyself; ἐπέσφαξεν Eavt ov, he slew him-
self. Δίδωμί σοι ἐμαυτὸν δοῦλον, I give myself to you as a slave,
X.0.4,62 Οἱ ἡττώμενοι ἑαυτούς τε καὶ τὰ ἑαυτῶν πάντα ἀπο-
βάλλουσιν, the vanquished lose Loth themselves and all that belongs to
1001} POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 215
them, Χ. 6.3,545,, "Ἕπεισεν ᾿Αθηναίους ἑαυτὸν κατάγειν, he per-
suaded the Athenians to restore him (from exile), .1.1,111.
994. N. Occasionally a reflexive refers to some emphatic word
which is neither the leading nor a dependent subject; as ἀπὸ
σαυτοῦ yw σε διδάξω, J will teach you from your own case (from
yourself), Arv..N.385. In faet, these pronouns correspond almost
exactly in their use to the English reflexives, myse/f, viyself, him-
self, etc.
995. N. The third person of the reflexive is sometimes used
for the first or second; as δεῖ ἡμᾶς ἐρέσθαι ἑαυτούς, we must ask
ourselves, P. Ph. 78%.
996. N. The reflexive. is sometimes used for the reciprocal
(404); ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς διαλλέόμεθω, we will discourse with one another
(i.e. among ourselves), 1). 48,0,
997. N. A reflexive nay be strengthened by a preceding αὐτός ;
as οἷός τε αὐτὸς αὑτῷ βοηθεῖν, able (himself) to help himself,
P.G.485", Τὸ γιγνώσκειν αὐτὸν ἑαυτόν, for one (himse/f) to know
himself, P. Ch. 165".
For the personal pronouns οὗ, of, ete. as direct and indireet
reflexives, see 987 and 988.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
998. 1. The possessive pronouns (496) are generally
equivalent to the possessive genitive (1085, 1) of the
personal pronouns. Thus ὁ σὸς πατήρ -- ὁ πατήρ cou,
your father.
For the article with possessives, see 946, 1.
2. For ἐμός and σός here the enelitic forms μοῦ (not ἐμοῦ) and
σοῦ may be used; ἡμῶν and ὑμῶν for ἡμέτερος and ὑμέτερος ave
less frequent. ‘These genitives have the predicate position as
regards the article (971).
999. The possessive is occasionally equivalent. to the objective
genitive of the personal pronoun; as ἡ ἐμὴ εὔνοια, which commonly
means my good-will (towards others), rarely means good-will (shown)
io me; as εὐνοίᾳ yap ἐρῶ τῇ a7, for 1 shall speak out of good-will to
you, P.G.485* (See 1083, 3.)
1000. N. Σφέτερος, their, and (poetic) ds, his, her, is, are regu-
larly (directly or indirectly) reflexive.
1001. N. An adjective or an appositive in the genitive may
refer to the genitive implicd in a possessive; as τἀμὰ δυστήνου
216 SYNTAX. [1002
κακά, the woes of me, unhappy one, S.0.C.344; τὴν ὑμετέραν τῶν
σοφιστῶν τέχνην, the art of you Sophists, 1". H. M2814. See 918.
1002. N. By the possessive pronouns and the possessive geni-
tive, the words my father can be expressed in Greek in five forms:
ὁ ἐμὸς πατήρ, ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐμός, πατὴρ ὁ ἐμός, ὁ πατήρ μου, and
(after another word) μου ὁ πατήρ (as ἔφη μου ὁ πατήρ). So ὁ σὸς
πατήρ, etc.
1003. N. (a) Our own, your own (plural), and their own are
generally expressed by ἡμέτερος, ὑμέτερος, aud oérepos, with
αὐτῶν (989, 1) strengthening the ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν, or σφῶν iinplied in
the possessive; as τὸν ἡμέτερον αὐτῶν πατέρα, our own father; τῇ
ὑμετέρᾳ αὐτῶν μητρί, to your own mother; τοὺς σφετέρους αὐτῶν
παῖδας, their own children. For the third person plural ἑαυτῶν can
be used; as τοὺς ἑαυτῶν παῖδας (also σφῶν αὐτῶν παῖδας, without
the article) ; but we seldoin find ἡμῶν (or ὑμῶν) αὐτῶν.
(Ὁ) Expressions like τὸν ἐμὸν αὐτοῦ πατέρα for τὸν ἐμαυτοῦ
πατέρα, etc., with singular possessives, are poetic. In prose the
genitive of the reflexive (ἐμαυτοῦ, σεαυτοῦ, or ἑαντοῦ), in the
attributive position (959), is the regular forin; as μετεπέμψατο τὴν
ἑαυτοῦ θυγατέρα, he sent for his (own) daughter, X.C.1,31.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
1004. Οὗτος and ὅδε, this, generally refer to what is
near in place, time, or thought; ἐκεῖνος, that, refers to
what is more remote.
1005. N. The distinction between οὗτος and ὅδε, both of which
correspond to our thés, must be learned by practice. In the histo-
rians, οὗτος (with τοιοῦτος, τοσοῦτος, and οὕτως. frequently refers
to a speech just made, while ὅδε (with τοιόσδε, τοσόσδε, and ὧδε)
yefers to one about to be made; as τάδε εἶπεν, he spoke as follows,
but ταῦτα εἶπεν, thus he spoke (said after the speech): see T.1,72
and 79, 85, and 87. But elsewhere οὗτος (especially in the neuter)
often refers to something that follows; as ῥᾷον yap τούτων προει-
ρημένων μαθήσει, for you will more easily understand it when this
(the folowing) is premised, P. Rp. 510%.
1006. N. Οὗτος is sometimes exclamatory, as οὗτος, τί ποιεῖς ;
You there! what are you doing? A. R.198.
1007. N. The Greek has no word exactly corresponding to the
unemphatic demonstrative which is often used in English as the
antecedent of a relative, as J saw those who were present. Here ἃ
participle with the article is generally used; as εἶδον tots παρόντας j
10)6] INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUN, 217
if a demonstrative is used (εἶδον τούτους of παρῆσαν, 7 saw these men
who were present), it has special emphasis (1030). A relative with
oinitted antecedent sometines expresses the sense required; as
εἶδον οὖς ἔλαβεν, 1 saw (those) whom he took (1026).
1008. N. The demonstratives, especially ὅδε, nay call attention
to the presence or approach of an object, in the sense of here or
there; ὅδε yap δὴ βασιλεὺς χώρας, for here now is the king of the
land, 8. An. 158; for νῆες ἐκεῖναι (T.1,51) see 945, 2.
1009. N. Οὗτος sometimes repeats a preceding description for
emphasis iu ἃ single word; as 6 yap τὸ σπέρμα παρασχὼν, οὗτος
τῶν φύντων αἴτιος, for he who supplied the seed — that man is respon-
sible for the harvest, D.18,159.
1010. N. Τοῦτο μέν... τοῦτο δέ, first... secondly, partly...
partly, is used nearly in the sense of τὸ μέν... τὸ δέ (982), espe-
cially by Herodotus.
For οὑτοσί, ὁδί, ἐκεινοσί, οὑτωσί, wi, etc., sce 412.
INTIERROGATIVE PRONOUN.
1011. The interrogative ris; who? what? may be
either substantive or adjective; as τίνας εἶδον; whom
did I see? or τίνας ἄνδρας εἶδον ; what men did I sce?
1012. ‘Is may be used both in direct and in indirect
questions; as τί βούλεται; what does he want? ἐρωτᾷ τί
βούλεσθε, he asks what you want.
1013. N. In indirect questions, however, the relative’ ὅστις is
more common; as ἐρωτᾷ 6 τι βούλεσθε (1600).
1014. N. The sane principles apply to the pronominal adjec-
tives πόσος, ποῖος, etc. (424).
INDEFINITE PRONOUN.
1015. 1. The indefinite ris (enclitic) generally means
some, any, and may be either substantive or adjective ;
as τοῦτο λέγει Tis, some one says this; ἄνθρωπός τις,
some man.
2. It is sometimes nearly equivalent to the English a
or an; as εἶδον ἄνθρωπόν τινα, I saw a certain man, or
1 saw a man.
1016. N. Tis sometimes implies that the word to which it is
218 SYNTAX. £1017
joined is not to be taken in its strict meaning; as κλέπτης τις
ἀναπέφανται, he has been shown up as a sort of thief, Τὴ. Rp.334%;
μέγας τις, rather large; τριάκοντά τινας ἀπέκτειναν, they killed some
thirty, T.8, 73.
So with the adverbial ri (1060); as σχέδον τι, very nearly, T.3, 68,
1017. XN. Occasionally tis means every one, like πᾶς tis; as εὖ
μέν τις δόρυ θηξάσθω, let every one sharpen well kis spear, 1.2, 382.
1018. N. ‘The neuter τὶ may mean something important; as οἴονταί
τι εἶναι, ὄντες οὐδενὸς ἄξιοι, they think they are something, when they
are worth nothing, P. Ap.Ale
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
1019. A relative agrees with its antecedent in gender
and number; but its case depends on the coustruetion
of the clause in which it stands. dy.
Εἶδον τοὺς ἄνδρας of ἦλθον, 1 saw the men wha came; οἱ ἄνδρες
οὗς εἶδες ἀπῆλθον, the men whom you saw went away.
1020, N. The relative follows the person of the antecedent; as
ὑμεῖς οἱ τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, you who do this; ἐγὼ ὃς τοῦτο ἐποίησα,
1 who did this.
1021. N. (a) A relative referring to several antecedents follows
the rule given for predicate adjectives (924); as περὶ πολέμου καὶ
εἰρήνης, ἃ μεγίστην ἔχει δύναμιν ἐν τῷ βίῳ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, about war
and peace, which have the greatest power in the life of men, 1.5,2;
ἀπαλλαγέντες πολέμων καὶ κινδύνων Kal ταραχῆς, εἰς ayy νῦν πρὸς
ἀλλήλους καθέσταμεν. freed from wars, dangers, and confusion, in
which we are nor divoleed with one another, 1.8, 20.
(b) ‘Vhe relative may be plural if it refers to a collective noun
(900); 45 πλήθει οἵπερ δικάσουσιν, fo the multitude who are to Judge,
P. Phir. 2608,
(¢) On the other hand. doris, whoever, may have a plural ante-
cedent; as πάντα 6 te βούλονται, everyting, whalsvever they want.
1022. NX. A neuter relative may refer to a masculine or femi-
nine antecedent. denoting a thing; as διὰ τὴν πλεονεξίαν. ὃ πᾶσα
φύσις διώκειν πέφυκεν, fur gain, which every nature naturally follows,
P. fp. 359%, (Sec 925.)
1023. 1. In Homer the forms of the relative are sometimes
used as demonstrative pronouns, like the article (935); as ὃς yap
δεύτατος ἦλθεν, for he came second, Od.1,286; ὃ yap γέρας ἐστὲ
θανόντων, for this ἐδ the right of the dead, 11.23, 9,
1027] RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 219
2. A few similar expressions occur in Attic prose, especially the
Platonic ἢ 8 ds, said he (where 7 is imperfect of Hud, say). So καὶ
ὅς, and he, καὶ οἷ, and they, and (in 1141.) ὃς καὶ ds, this man and
that. (Compare τὸν καὶ τόν, 984.) So also ὃς μέν... ὃς δέ, in the
oblique cases, are occasionally used tor 6 μέν -.. ὁ δέ; as πόλεις
Ἑλληνίδας, ἃς μὲν ἀναιρῶν, εἰς ἃς δὲ τοὺς φυγάδας κατάγων, destroy-
ing some Greek cities, and restoring their exiles to others, 1).18,11.
1024. XN. (a) In the epic and lyric poets τέ is often appended
to relative words without affecting their meaning; as οὐκ dies ἃ
τέ φησι θεά; dost thou not hear what the Goddess says? 11.18, 130.
Sometimes it seems to make the relative more indefinite, like res
in ὅστις, whoever, Quicumque.
(b) But οἷός re in Attic Greek means able, capable, like δυνατός,
being originally elliptical for τοιοῦτος οἷος, such as, τέ having no
apparent force.
1025. (Preposition omitted.) When the relative and its ante-
cedent would properly have the same preposition, it is usually
expressed only with the antecedent; as ἀπὸ τῆς αὐτῆς ἀγνοίας
ἧσπερ πολλὰ προΐεσθε τῶν κοινῶν, by the same want of sense by which
(for ag’ ἧσπερ) you sacrifice many of your public interests, D.18, 134.
Omission OF THE ANTECEDENT.
1026. The antecedent of a relative may be omitted
when it can easily be supplied from the context, espe-
cially if it is indefinite (1426). Evy.
Ἔλαβεν ἃ ἐβούλετο, he took what he wanted; ἔπειθεν ὁπόσους
ἐδύνατο, he persuaded as many as he could. “A μὴ otda οὐδὲ οἴομαι
εἰδέναι, what 1 do not know 1 do not even think 1 know, Ὁ. Ap. 214.
᾿Εγὼ καὶ ὧν ἐγὼ κρατῶ μενοῦμεν παρὰ σοί, 1 and those whom I com.
mand will remain with you, X.C.5, 126.
1027. Ν In such cases it is a mistake to say that ταῦτα, ἐκεῖνοι,
etc., are understood; see 1030. The relative clause here really
becumes a substantive, and contains its antecedent within itself.
Such a relative clause, as a substantive, may even have the article ;
as ἔχουσα τὴν ἐπωνυμίαν τὴν τοῦ ὃ ἔστιν, having the name of the
absolutely existent (of the “what is”), P.Ph.92%; ἐκείνου ὀρέγεται
τοῦ ὃ ἔστιν ἴσον, they aim at that absolute equality (at the “what is
equal”), ibid. 75%; τῷ σμικρῷ μέρει, τῷ O ἦρχε ἐν αὐτῷ, through the
small part, which was shown to be the ruling power within him (the
“what ruled”), P. Rp.442%. Here it must not be thought that τοῦ
aud ro are antecedents, or pronouns at all.
220 SYNTAX. [1028
1028. N. Most relative adverbs regularly omit the antece-
deut; as ἦλθεν ὅτε τοῦτο εἶδεν, he came when he saw this (for then,
when).
1029. N. The following expressions belong here:—éortv of
(ὧν, οἷς,. οὕς), some (905), more common than the regular eloty
οἵ, sunt qui, there are (those) who; ἔστιν οἵτινες (especially in ques-
tions); €veoe (from ἔνι, = ἔνεστι or ἔνεισι, and οἵ), some; ἐνίοτε
(ἔνι and ὅτε), sometimes; ἔστιν οὗ, somewhere; ἔστιν ἡ, in some
way; ἔστιν ὅπως, somehow.
1080. N. When a clause containing a relative with omitted
antecedent precedes the leading clause, the latter often contains a
demonstrative referring back with emphasis to the omitted ante-
cedent; as a ἐβούλετο ταῦτα ἔλαβεν, what he wanted, that he took,
entirely different from ταῦτα ἃ ἐβούλετο ἔλαβεν, he took these (definite)
things, which he wanted; di ποιεῖν αἰσχρὸν, ταῦτα νόμιζε μηδὲ λέγειν
εἶναι καλόν, what it is base to do, this believe that it is not good even to
say, T.1,15 (here ταῦτα is not the antecedent of ἅ, which is indefinite
and is not expressed). Sce 1007. ͵
ASSIMILATION AND ATTRACTION.
1031. When a relative would naturally be in the ac-
cusative as the object of a verb, it is generally assdmi-
lated to the case of its antecedent if this is a genitive or
dative. E.g.
"Ex τῶν πόλεων ὧν ἔχει, from the cities which he holds (for ἃς
ἔχει); τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς οἷς ἔχομεν, with the good things which we have
(for ἃ ἔχομεν). Αξιοι τῆς ἐλευθερίας ἧς κέκτησθε, worthy of the
freedom which you have, X.A.1,78; εἰ τῷ ἡγεμόνι πιστεύσομεν ᾧ ἂν
Κῦρος διδῷ, if we shall trust the guide whom Cyrus may give us, X. A,
1,39 This assimilation is also called attraction.
1032. N. When an antecedent is omitted which (if expressed)
would have been a genitive or dative, the assimilation still takes
place; and a preposition which would have belonged to the ante-
cedent passes over to the relative; as ἐδήλωσε τοῦτο οἷς ἔπραττε,
he showed this by what he did (like ἐκείνοις ἅ); σὺν οἷς μάλιστα
φιλεῖς, with those whom you most love (σὺν ἐκείνοις οὖς), X.A.1,9%;
ἀμελήσας dv με δεῖ πράττειν, having neglected what (ἐκείνων &) I
ought to do, X.C.5,18; οἷς εὐτυχήκεσαν ἐν Λεύκτροις οὐ μετρίως
ἐκέχρηντο, they had not used moderately the successes which they had
sgained at Leuctra (τοῖς εὐτυχήμασιν ἃ εὐτυχήκεσαν, see 1054),
D.18, 18.
1038) RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 221
1033. N. A relative is seldom assimilated from any other con-
struction than that of the object accusative, or info any other case
than the genitive or dative. Yet exceptions occur; as παρ᾽ ὧν
βοηθεῖς οὐκ ἀπολήψει χάριν, you will get no thanks from those whom
(παρ᾽ ἐκείνων ots) you help, Aesch.2,117. Even the nominative
may be assimilated; as βλάπτεσθαι ἀφ᾽ ὧν ἡμῖν παρεσκεύασται,
to be injured by what has been prepared by us (like ἀπ᾽ ἐκείνων ἅλ),
T.7, 67.
1034. N. A like assimilation takes place in relative adverbs ;
as διεκομίζοντο εὐθὺς ὅθεν ὑπεξέθεντο παῖδας καὶ γυναῖκας, they
immediately brought over their children and women from the places in
which they had placed them for safety (where ὅθεν, from which, stands
for ἐκεῖθεν of, from the places whither), T.1,89.
1035. N. The antecedent occasionally is assimilated to the
case of the relative, when this immediately follows; as ἔλεγον ὅτι
πάντων ὧν δέονται πεπραγότες εἶεν, they said that they had done all
things which (πάντα ὧν) they needel, Χ. Π.1,43, Tay οὐσίαν ἣν
κατέλιπε οὐ πλείονος ἀξία ἐστὶν ἣ τεττάρων καὶ δέκα ταλάντων, the
estate which he left is not worth more than fourteen talents, L.19,47.
Compare urdem quam statuo vestra est, Verg. Aen.1,573. Such
expressions involve an anacoluthon.
This inverted assimilation takes place in οὐδεὶς ὄστις οὐ, every-
body, in which οὐδείς follows the case of the relative; as οὐδένε
ὅτῳ οὐκ ἀποκρινόμενος (for οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅτῳ), replying to everybody,
DP. Men. 70¢.
1036. N. A peculiar assimilation occurs in certain expressions
with οἷος ; 85 χαριζόμενον οἴῳ σοι ἀνδρί, pleasing a man like you
(for roiovrw οἷος ov), X. Af. 2,08; πρὸς ἄνδρας τολμηροὺς οἵους καὶ
᾿Αθηναίους,. against bold men like the Athenians, T.7,21.
1037. ‘The antecedent is often attracted into the rela-
tive clause, and ¢ agrees with the relative. Eg.
Μὴ ἀφέλησθε ὑμῶν αὐτῶν ἣν διὰ παντὸς ἀεὶ τοῦ χρόνου δόξαν
κέκτησθε καλήν, do not take from yourselves the σοοιὶ reputation which
(what good reputation) you have always had through all time (for
τὴν καλὴν δόξαν ἣν κέκτησθε), D.20,142: notice the omission
of the article, which regularly oceurs.
The subject of a verb is rarely thus attracted; as οἴχεται φεύγων
ὃν εἶχες μάρτυρα, the witness whom you had (for ὁ μάρτυς ὃν εἶχες)
has run away, Ar. P1933.
1038. N. This astraction may be joined with assimilation
(1031); as ἀμαθέστατοί ἐστε ὧν ἐγὼ οἶδα Ελλήνων, you are the most
222 SYNTAX. [1080
tgnorant of the Grecks whom 1 know (for τῶν Ἑλλήνων οὖς οἶδα),
V.6,40; ἐξ ἧς τὸ πρῶτον ἔσχε γυναικός, from the wife which he took
Jirst, 1.57, 37; ἐπορεύετο, σὺν ἢ ἢ εἶχε δυνάμει, he marched with the
force which he had (for σὺν τῇ δυνάμει ἡ nv εἶχεν), X. 17.4, 1%.
Revative IN EXcLaMaTions,
1039. Ofos, ὅσος, and ὡς are used in exclamations; as ὅσα
πράγματα ἔχεις, how much trouble you have! X.C.1,84; ὡς
ἀστεῖος, how witty !
RELATIVE NOT REPEATED.
1040. A relative is seldom repeated in a new case in the
same sentence, but a personal or demonstrative pronoun
commonly takes its place. Κ᾿.
Ἐκεῖνοι τοίνυν, οἷς οὐκ ἐχαρίζονθ᾽ of λέγοντες οὐδ᾽ ἐφίλουν αὐτοὺς
ὥσπερ ὑμᾶς οὗτοι νῦν, those men, then, whom the orators did not (ry to
gratify, and whom they did not love as these now love you (lit. nor
did they love them as etc.), D.3,24. Ilere αὐτούς is used to avoid
repeating the relative in a new case, ovs.
1041. N. Sometimes, however, a new case of the relative is
understood in the latter part. of a sentence; as ᾿Αριαῖος δὲ, ὃν ἡμεῖς
ἠθέλομεν βασιλέα καθιστάναι, καὶ ἐδώκαμεν καὶ ἐλάβομεν πιστά, anid
Ariaeus, whom we wished to make king, and (to whom) we gave and
(from whom) we received pledges, ete. X. A.3, 25
THE CASES.
1042, The Greek is descended from a language which had
eight cases, — an ablative, a locative, and an instrwnental, besides the
five found in Greek. ‘The functions of ihe ablative were absorbed
chiefly by the genitive, partly by the dative; those of the instru
mental and locative chiefly by the dative.
NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE.
1043. The nominative is used chiefly as the subject
of a finite verb (894), or in the predicate after verbs
signifying ¢o be, etc. (907).
1044, The voeative, with or without ὦ, is uscd
addressing a person or thing; as ὦ avdpes’AAnvaior, men
of Athens! ἀκούεις, Αἰσχίνη; dost thou hear, Aeschines?
1001] ACCUSATIVE. 223
1045. N. The nominative is sometimes used in exclamations,
and even in other expressions, where the voeative is more com-
won; AS ὦμοι ἐγὼ δειλός, O wretched me! So ἡ Πρόκνη ἔκβαινε,
Procne, come out! Ay. Av. 665.
ACCUSATIVE.
1046. ‘Vhe primary purpose of the accusative is to denote the
nearer or direct object of a verb, as opposed to the remoter or
tndarect object denoted by the dative (892). It thus bears the same
relation toa verb which the objective genitive (1085, 3) bears to a
noun, ‘The object denoted by the accusative may be the external
object uf the action of a transitive verb, or the internal (cognate)
object which is often iuplied in the mnganing of even an intransi-
tive verb. But the accusative has also assumed other functions,
as will be seen, which cannot be brought under this or any other
single category.
ACCUSATIVE OF DIRECT (EXTERNAL) OBJECT.
1047. The direct object of the action of a transitive
verb is put in the accusative; as τοῦτο σῴζει ἡμᾶς, this
preserves us; ταῦτα ποιοῦμεν, we do these thinys.
1048. N. Many verbs which are transitive in English, and
govern the objective case, take either a genitive or a dative in
Greek. (See 1099; 1160; 1153.)
1049. N. Many verbs which are transitive in Greek are intran-
sitive in English; as ὀμοῦμαι τοὺς θεούς, 1] will swear by the Gods;
πάντως ἔλαθεν, he escaped the notice of all; αἰσχύνεται τὸν πατέρα,
he feels shame befure his futher; σιγᾷ (or σιωπᾷ) τι, he keeps silent
about something.
1050. N. Verbal adjectives and cven verbal nouns occasionally
tuke an object accusative instead of the regular objective genitive
(1142; 1085, 3), as ἐπιστήμονες ἦσαν τὰ προσήκοντα, they were
acquainted with what was proper, X.C.3,3% So τὰ μετέωρα
φροντιστής, one who ponders on the things above (like φροντίζων),
P. Ap. 18".
COGNATE ACCUSATIVE (INTERNAL OBJECT).
1051. Any verb whose meaning permits it may take
an accusative of kindred signification. This accusative
224 SYNTAX. [1052
repeats the idea already contained in the verb, and may
follow intransitive as well as transitive verbs. Eg.
Πάσας ἡδονὰς ἥδεσθαι, to enjoy all pleasures, P. Phil. 63%.
Εὐτύχησαν τοῦτο τὸ εὐτύχημα, they enjoyed this good fortune,
X.A.6,3% 50 πεσεῖν πτώματα, (0 suffer (to fall) falls, A. Pr.919.
Νόσον νοσεῖν or νόσον ἀσθενεῖν or νόσον κάμνειν, (0 suffer under a
disease; ἁμάρτημα ἁμαρτάνειν, to commit an error (ty sin @ sin);
δουλεών δουλεύειν, fo be subject to slavery; ἀρχὴν ἄρχειν, to hold an
office; ἀγῶνα ἀγωνίζεσθαι, to undergo a contest; γραφὴν γράφεσθαι,
to bring an indictment; γραφὴν διώκειν, fo prosecute an indictment ;
δίκην ὀφλεῖν, to lose a lawsuit; νίκην νικᾶν, to gain a victory; μάχην
νικᾶν, to gain a battle; πομπὴν πέμπειν, to form or conduct @ proces-
sion; πληγὴν τύπτειν, to strike a blow; ἐξῆλθον ἐξόδου ς, they went
oul on expeditions, X. H.1,2".
1052. N. It will be seen that this construction is far more
extensive in Greek than in English. 10 includes not only accusa-
tives of kindred formation and meaning, as νίκην νικᾶν, to gain a
victory ; but also those of merely kindred meaning, as μάχην νικᾶν,
to gain a battle. The accusative may also limit the meaning of the
verb to one of many applications; as Ὀλύμπια νικᾶν, to gain an
Olympic victory, T.1,126; ἑστιᾶν γάμους, to give a wedding feast,
Ar. Av.1825 ψήφισμα νικᾷ, he curries a decree (gains a victury with
a decree), Aesch.3, 68; βοηδρόμια πέμπειν, to celebrate the Boedromia
by a procession, 1).3,31. So also (in poetry) βαίνειν (or ἐλθεῖν)
πόδα, to step (the foot): see FE. Al. 1158.
. For the cognate accusative becoming the subject of a passive
yerb, see 1240...
1053. The cognate accusative may follow adjectives or
even nouns. £.g.
Κακοὶ πᾶσαν κακίαν, bad with all badness, P. Rp.4904; δοῦλος
τὰς μεγίστας δουλείας, a slave to the direst slavery, ibid. 5794.
1054. A neuter adjective sometimes represents a cognate
accusative, its noun being iinplied in the verb. Dg.
Μεγάλα ἁμαρτάνειν (sc. ἁμαρτήματα), to commit great faults ;
ταὐτὰ λυπεῖσθαι καὶ ταὐτὰ χαίρειν, fo have the same griefs and
the same joys, D.18,292. So ri χρήσομαι τούτῳ; (= τίνα χρεών
χρήσομαι;), whal use shall 1 make of this? and οὐδὲν χρήσομαι τούτῳ,
I shall make no use of this (1183). So χρήσιμος οὐδέν, good for
nothing (1053). See 1060.
1055. 1. Here belongs the accusative of effect, which
1059] ACCUSATIVE. 225
expresses a result beyond the action of the verb, which is
effected by that action. E.g.
HpeoBevew τὴν εἰρήνην, to negotiate a peace (as ambassadors,
πρέσβεις), 1.19, 134; but πρεσβεύειν πρεσβείαν, to go on an embassy.
Compare the English breaking a hole, as opposed to breaking a
stick.
2. So after verbs of looking (i poetry); as "A py δεδορκέναι, to
look war (Ares) (see A. Se.53); ἡ βουλὴ ἔβλεψε var, the Senate
looked mustard, Ay. Ἐφ. 681.
1056. N. For verbs which take a cognate accusative and an
ordinary object accusative at the same time, see 1076.
1057. N. Connected with the cognate accusative is that which
follows verbs of motion to express the ground over which the motion
passes; as ὁδὸν ἰέναι (ἐλθεῖν, πορεύεσθαι, etc.), 10 go (aver) a road ;
πλεῖν θάλασσαν, to satl the sea; ὄρος καταβαίνειν, to descend @ moun-
tain; etc. These verbs thus acquire a transitive meaning.
ACCUSATIVE OF SPECIFICATION, — ADVERBIAL
ACCUSATIVE.,
1058. The accusative of specification may be joined
with a verls, adjective, noun, or even a whole sentence,
to denote a part, character, or quality to which the
expression refers. Zig.
Τυφλὸς τὰ ὄμματ᾽ εἶ, you are blind in your eyes, S.0.7.371;
καλὸς τὸ εἶδος, beautiful in form; ἄπειροι τὸ πλῆθος, infinite in num-
ber ; δίκαιος τὸν τρόπον, just in his character; δεινοὶ μάχην, mighty in
battle; κάμνω τὴν κεφαλήν, 1 have a pain in my head; ras φρένας
ὑγιαίνειν, (a be sound in their minds; διαφέρει τὴν φύσιν, he differs
in nature. Tlotapds, Κύδνος ὄνομα, εὖρος δύο πλέθρων, α river,
Cydnus ly name, of two plethra in breadth (922), X.4.1,27% Ἕλληνές
εἰσι τὸ γένος, they are Greeks by race. Γένεσθε τὴν διάνοιαν μὴ
ἐν τῷ δικαστηρίῳ, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν τῷ θεάτρῳ, imagine yourselves (become in
thought) not in court, but in the theatre, Aesch.3,153. Ἐπίστασθέ
(με) οὐ μόνον τὰ μεγάλα ἀλλὰ καὶ τὰ μικρὰ πειρώμενον ἀεὶ ἀπὸ
θεῶν ὁρμᾶσθαι, you know that, not only in great but even in smail
things, I try to begin with the Gods, K.C.1,5™.
1059. N. This is sometimes called the accusative by synecdoche,
or the limiting accusative. It most frequently denotes a part; but
it may refer to any circumstance to which the meaning of the
expression js restricted. ‘Chis construction sometimes resembles
that of 1239, with which it must not be confounded.
228 SYNTAX. [1000
1060. An accusative in certain expressions has the
force of an adverb. Hy.
Τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον, in this way, thus; τὴν ταχίστην (sc. ὁδόν), in
the quickest way; (τὴν) ἀρχήν, al first (with negative, noe αἱ all):
τέλος, finally ; προῖκα, us « gift, gratis; χάριν, for the sake of; δίκην,
in the munner of; TO πρῶτον οἱ πρῶτον, αἱ first; τὸ λοιπόν, for the
rest; πάντα, in all things ; τἄλλα, in other respects ; οὐδέν, in nothing,
not at all; τί; in what, why? τὶ, iu any respect, at all; ταῦτα, in
respect to this, therefore. So τοῦτο pév... τοῦτο δέ (1010).
1061. N. Several of these (1000) are to he explained by 1058,
as τἄλλα, τί; why? ταῦτα, τοῦτο (with μέν and δέ), and sometimes
οὐδέν and ri. Some are to be explained as cognate aecusatives
(see 1053 and 1054), and some are of doubtful origin.
ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT.
1062. The accusative may denote extent of time or
space. Eg.
Al σπονδαὶ ἐνιαυτὸν ἔσονται, the truce is to be for a year, T.4, 118.
Ἔμεινεν ἡμέρας πέντε, he remained five days. ᾿Απέχει ἡ Ἰλάτωα
τῶν Θηβῶν σταδίους ἑβδομήκοντα, Plataca is seventy stades distant
from Thebes, 'V.2,5. ᾿Απέχοντα Συρακουσῶν οὔτε mAoty πολὺν
οὔτε ὁδόν, (Mewar a) not a long sail or land-journey distant from
Syracuse, T. 6,49.
1063. N. This accusative with an ordinal number denotes how
long since (including the date of the event); as ἑβδόμην ἡμέραν τῆς
θυγατρὸς αὐτῷ τετελευτηκνίας, when his daughter had died six days
before (i.e. this being the seventh duy), Aeseh.3,77.
1064. N. A peculiar idiom is found in expressions like τρίτον
ἔτος τουτί (this the third year), 1.6. two years ago; as ἀπηγγέλθη
Φίλιππος τρίτον ἢ τέταρτον ἔτος τουτὶ ραϊον τεῖχος πολιορκῶν,
two or three years ayo Philip was reported to be besieging Heraion
Teichos, 1). 8,4.
TERMINAL ACCUSATIVE (PORTIC).
1065. In poctry, the accusative without a preposition
may denote the place or object towards which motion is
directed. Lg.
Μνηστῆρας ἀφίκετο, she cume to the suitors, Od.1,382. ᾿Ανέβη
μέγαν οὐρανὸν Οὐλυμπόν τε, she ascended to great heaven and
1072) ACCUSATIV EL. 227
Olympus, 1t.1,497. To κοῖλον "A pyos Bas φυγάς, going as an exile
to the hollow Argos, $.O.C. 378.
In prose a preposition would be used here.
ACCUSATIVE IN OATHS WITH vy) AND μα.
1066. The avcusative follows the adverbs of swearing
vj and μά, by.
1067. An oath introduced by vy is affirmative; one intro-
duced by μά (unless pad, yes, precedes) is negative; ἃ8 νὴ τὸν
Ava, yes, by Zeus; μὰ τὸν Δία, no, by Zeus; but vai, pa Ac,
yes, by Zeus.
1068. N. Μά is sometimes omitted when a negative precedes ;
as ov, τόνδ᾽ Ὄλυμπον, no, by this Olympus, ὃ. 4.708,
{TWO ACCUSATIVES WITH ONE VER.
1069. Verbs signifying to ask, to demand, to teach, to
remind, to eluthe or unclothe, to conceal, to deprive, and
to take away, may take two object accusatives. Fy.
Οὐ τοῦτ᾽ ἐρωτῶ σε, J am not asking you this, Ay. Ν 61} οὐδένα
τῆς συνουσίας ἀργύριον πράττει, you demand no fee for your teaching
Jrom any one, X. AL.1, 61; πόθεν ἡρξατό σε διδάσκειν τὴν στρατηγίαν;
with what did he beyin to teach you strategy? ibid.3,\8; τὴν ξυμμα-
Xtav ἀναμιμνήσκοντες τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, reminding the Athenians of
the alliance, 'V.6,6; τὸν μὲν ἑαυτοῦ (χιτῶνα) ἐκεῖνον ἠμφίεσε, he put
his own (tunic) on the other boy, X.Cy.1, 37; ἐκδύων ἐμὲ χρηστηρίαν
ἐσθῆτα, stripping me of my oracular garb, A. Ay.31269; τὴν θυγατέρα
ἔκρυπτε τὸν θάνατον τοῦ ἀνδρός, he conceuled from his daughter her
husband's death, 1.. 85,7; τούτων τὴν τιμὴν ἀποστερεῖ με, he cheats
me oul of the price uf these, 1). 38,13; τὸν πάντα δ᾽ ὄλβον ἦμαρ ἕν μ᾽
ἀφείλετο, bul oue day deprived me of all my happiness, 10. Hee. 388,
1070, N. In poetry some other verbs have this construction ;
thus xpoa viLero ἄλμην, he washed the dried spray from his skin,
Od.6,2243 su τιμωρεῖσθαίΐ twa αἷμα, lo punish one for biood (shed),
see KE, 41.733.
1071. N. Verbs of this class sometimes have other construe-
tious. Four verbs of depriving and taking away, see 1118. For the
accusative and genitive with verbs of reminding, see 1106.
1072. N. ‘The accusative of a thing with some of these verbs
is really a cognate accusative (1070).
228 SYNTAX. [1078
1073. Verbs signifying to do anything to or to say any-
thing of a person or thing take two accusatives. Hg.
Tauri με ποιοῦσιν, they do these things to me; τί μ᾽ εἰργάσω; what
didst thou do to me? Kaxa πολλὰ ἔοργεν Τρῶας, he has done many
evils to the Trojans, 11. 16,424. Ἔκεῖνόν re καὶ τοὺς Κορινθίους πολλά
τε καὶ κακὰ ἔλεγε, of him and the Corinthians he said much that was
bad, Hd.8,81; ob φροντιστέον τί ἐροῦσιν οἱ πολλοὶ ἡμᾶς, we must
not consider what the multitude will say of us, Ῥ. ΟΥ.485,
1074. These verbs often take εὖ or καλῶς, well, or κακῶς, ill,
instead of the accusative of a thing; τούτους εὖ ποιεῖ, he does them
good; ὑμᾶς κακῶς ποιεῖ, he does you harm; κακῶς ἡμᾶς λέγει, he
speaks ill of us.
~ For εὖ πάσχειν, εὖ ἀκούειν, etc., as passives of these expressions,
see 124].
1075. N. Πράσσω, do, very seldom takes two accusatives in this
construction, ποιέω being generally used. Ed πράσσω and κακῶς
πράσσω are intransitive, meaning to be well off, to be badly off:
1076. A transitive verb may have a cognate accusative
(1051) and an ordinary object accusative at the same
time. ΒΕ.
Μέλητός pe ἐγράψατο τὴν γραφὴν ταύτην, Meletus brought this
indictment against me, P.Ap.19%; Μιλτιάδης ὁ τὴν ἐν Μαραθῶνι
μάχην τοὺς βαρβάρους νικήσας, Afiltiades, who gaincd the battle αἱ
Marathon over the barbarians, Aesch.3,181; ὥρκωσαν πάντας τοὺς
στρατιώτας τοὺς μεγίστους ὅρκους, they made all the soldiers swear
the strongest oaths, T.8,75.
On this principle (1076) verbs of dividing may take two accusi
tives; as τὸ στράτευμα κατένειμε δώδεκα μέρη, he made twelve divis-
ions of the army, X.C.7, 018,
1077. Verbs signifying to name, to chovse or appoint,
to make, to think or regard, aud the like, may take a
predicate accusative besides the object accusative. 1.
Τί τὴν πόλιν προσαγορεύεις ; what do you call the state? Viv
τοιαύτην δύναμιν ἀνδρείαν ἔγωγε καλῶ, such a power 1 call courage,
P. dtp.430%. Στρατηγὸν αὐτὸν ἀπέδειξε, he appointed him general,
X.A.1,1?; εὐεργέτην τὸν Φίλιππον ἡγοῦντο, they thought Philip α
benefactor, 1). 18,43} πάντων δεσπότην ἑαντὸν πεπούγκεν, he has made
himself master of all, X.C.1, 338.
1078. This is the active construction corresponding to the
passive with copulative verbs (90S), in which the object accusative
1084] GENITIVE. 229
becomes the subject nominative (1234) and the predicate accusa-
tive becomes a predicate nominative (907). Like the latter, it
includes also predicate adjectives; as τοὺς συμμάχους προθύμους
ποιεῖσθαι, to make the allies eager; τὰς dpuprias μεγάλας ἦγεν, he
thought the faults great.
1079. N. With verbs of naming the infinitive εἶναι may connect
the two accusatives; as σοφιστὴν ὀνομάζουσι τὸν ἄνδρα εἶναι, they
name the man (to be) a sophist, P. Pr. 8}1",
1080. N. Many other transitive verbs may take a predicate
accusative in apposition with the object accusative; as ἔλαβε τοῦτο
δῶρον, he took this as a gift; ἵππους ἄγειν θῦμα τῷ Ἡλίῳ, to bring
horses as an offering to the Sun, X.C.8,3" (see 916). Especially au
interrogative pronoun niay be so used; a8 τίνας τούτους ὁρῶ; who
are these whom 1 see? lit. I see these, being whum? (See 919; 972.)
1081. N. A predicate accusative may denote the effect of the
action of the verb upon its direct object; as παιδεύειν τινὰ σοφόν
(or κακόν), to train one (to be) wise (or bad); τοὺς υἱεῖς ἱππότας
ἐδίδαξεν, he taught his sons to be horsemen. See 1035.
1082, N. For one of two accusatives retained with the passive,
see 1239.
For the accusative absolute, see 1569.
GENITIVE.
1083. As the chief use of the accusative is to limit the meaning
of a verb, so the chief use of the genitive is to limit the meaning
of anoun. When the genitive is used as the objcct of a verb, it
seems to depend on the nominal idea which belongs to the verb:
thus ἐπιθυμῶ involves ἐπιθυμίαν (as we can say ἐπιθυμῶ ἐπιθυμίαν,
1051); and in ἐπιθυμῶ τούτου, 7 hane a desire for this, the nominal
idea preponderates over the verbal. So βασιλεύει τῆς χώρας (1109)
involves the idea βασιλεύς ἐστι τῆς χώρας, he is king of the country.
The Greek is somewhat arbitrary in deciding when it will allow
either idea to preponderate in the construction, and after some verbs
it allows both the accusative and the genitive (1108). In the same
general sense the geuitive follows verbal adjectives. It has also
uses which originally belonged to the ablative; for example, with
verbs of separation and to express source. (See 1042.)
GENITIVE AFTER NOUNS (ATIRIBUTIVE GENITIVE).
1084. A noun in the genitive may limit the meaning
of another noun, to express various relations, most of
200 SYNTAX. {1085
which are denotcd by of or by the possessive case in
buglish.
1085. The genitive thus depending ou a noun is called
attributive (sec 919). 105 most important relations are the
following : —
1. Possessron or other close relation: as ἡ τοῦ πατρὸς
οἰκία, the futher’s house; ἡμῶν ἡ πατρίς, our country; τὸ τῶν
ἀνδρῶν γένος, the lineage of the men. SoH τοῦ Διός, the daugh-
ter of Zeus; τὰ τῶν θεῶν, the things of the Gods (953). The
Possessive Genitive.
2. The Sunsecr of an actiou or feeling: as ἡ τοῦ δήμον
εὔνοια, the good-will of the people (i.e. which the se feel).
The Subjective Genitive.
The Onsecr of an action or feeling: as διὰ τὸ Παυσα-
iy μῖσος, owiny to the hatred of (1.6. felt against) Punsanius,
T.1,965 πρὸς τὰς τοῦ χειμῶνος καρτερήσεις, as regards his cn
durance of the winter, P.Sy.220* Su οἱ θεῶν ὅρκοι, the oaths
(sworn) te the name of the Gods (as we say θεοὺς ὀμνύναι,
1049), X..4.2,57. The Objective Genitive.
4. Marertan or Conrenvs, including that of which any-
thing consists: as βοῶν ἀγέλη, α herd of oe > ἄλσος ἡμέρων
δένδρων, « grove of cultivated trees, X.A.! cr κρήνη ἡδέος
ὕδατος, α spring of fresh water, X..4.6,44; Bio χυίνικες ἀλφίτων,
two quarts of meal. Genitive of Material. .
ὅ. Meastrer, of space, time, or value: as τριῶν ἡμερῶν
ὁδός, @ journey of three days; ὀκτὼ σταδίων τεῖχος, ὦ wall of
eight stades (in length) ; τριάκοντα ταλάντων οὐσία, AN estate
of thirty talents; μισθὸς τεττάρων μηνῶν, pay for four months ;
πράγματα πολλῶν ταλάντων, affairs of (ic. tuvolving) many
talents, Ay.N.472, Genitive of Measure.
0. Cause or OniGin: μεγάλων ἀδικημάτων ὀργή, anyer αἱ
great offences; γραφὴ ἀσεβείας, an indictment for tanpiety.
The Causal Genitive.
7. ‘Tun Wuo.y, after nouns denoting a part: as πολλοὶ
τῶν ῥητόρων, many of the orators; ἀνὴρ τῶν ἐλευθέρων, ἃ MAN
(1.6. one) of the freemen. The Partitive Genitive. (See
also 1088.)
These seven classes are not exhaustive; but they will give a gen-
eral idea of these relations, many of which it is difficult to classify.
1001 GENITIVE. 234
1086. N. Examples like πόλις “Apyous, the city of Argos, Ar.
Ἐφ.513, Τροίης πτολίεθρον, the city of Troy, Od.1,2, in which the
genitive is used instead of apposition, are poetic.
1087. Two genitives denoting different relations may depend
on one noun; as ἵππου δρύμον ἡμέρας, within a day's run for a horse,
1).19, 273; διὰ τὴν τοῦ ἀνέμου ἄπωσιν αὐτῶν ἐς τὸ πέλαγος, by the
wind’s driving them (the wrecks) out into the sea, T.7,34.
1088. (Partitive Genitive.) The partitive genitive
(1085, 7) may follow all nouns, pronouns, adjectives
(especially superlatives), participles with the article,
and adverbs, which denote a part. J.
Οἱ ἀγαθοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, the good anong the men; ὁ ἥμισυς
τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ, the half of the number ; ἄνδρα οἷδα τοῦ δήμον, J know
aman of the people; τοῖς θρανίταις τῶν ναυτῶν, to the upper benches
uf the sadors, 'Y.6,511 οὐδεὶς τῶν παίδων, no one of the children;
πάντων τῶν ῥητόρων δεινότατος, the most cloquent af all the orators,
ὁ βουλύμενος Koi ἀστῶν Kai ξένων, any one who pleases of both citizens
and strangers, V.2,36; δία γυναικῶν, diving among women, Οὐ ἡ,
305; ποῦ τῆς γῆς ;Σ Ubi tervarum? where on the earth? τίς τῶν moAL
τῶν; who of the citizens’? δὶς τῆς ἡ μέρας, tice a day: εἰς τοῦτο
ἀνοίας, to this pitch of folly; ἐπὶ μέγα δυνάμεως, fo a great degree
of pare, Ἵν 1.118: ἐν τούτῳ παρασ κευῆ ς, in this state of prepara
tion. “A μὲν διώκει τοῦ ψηφίσματος ταῦτ᾽ ἐστίν, the paris of the
decree which he prosecutes are these (it. what parts of the decree he
prosecutes, ete.), D.18,56. Εὐφημότατ᾽ ἀνθρώπων, tn the most
plausible way possitle (most plansilly of men), D.19,50. “Ore δεινό-
τατος σαυτοῦ ταῦτα Hoda, when you were αἱ the height of your power
tn these matters, X. AL.1, 24. (See 965.)
1089. The partitive genitive has the predicate position as
regards the article (O71), while other attributive penitives (except
personal pronouns, 977) have the attributive position (954),
1090. N. An adjective or participle generally agrees in gender
with a dependent partilive genitive. But sometimes, especially
when ib is singular, it is nenter, aprecing with μέρος, part, under-
stood; as τῶν πολεμίων τὸ πολύ (for οἱ πολλοί), the greater part
of the enemy.
1091. N. A partitive penitive sometimes depends on τὶς or
μέρος understood; as ἔφασαν ἐπιμιγνύναι σφῶν τε πρὸς ἐκείνους
καὶ ἐκείνων πρὸς ἑαυτούς, they said that same of their on men had
mited with them, and some of them with their piwa mon (twas being
understood with σφῶν aud ἐκείνων), X..4.38, 53%
232 SYNTAX. [1092
1092. N. Similar to such phrases as ποῦ γῆς͵; εἰς τοῦτο ἀνοίας,
etc., is the use of ἔχω and an adverb with the genitive; as πῶς
ἔχεις δόξης 3 in what state of opinion are you? P. Rp.4564; εὖ
σώματος ἔχειν, to be in a good condition of body, thid.4049; ὡς εἶχε
τάχους, as fast as he could (jit. in the condition of speed in which he
was), T.2,90; so ὡς ποδῶν εἶχον, Hd.6, 116; εὖ ἔχειν φρενῶν, to be
right in his mind (see I. Hip. 462).
GENITIVE AFTER VERBS.
Prenicaty Genitive.
1093. As the attributive genitive (1084) stands in the
relation of an attributive adjective to its leading substan-
tive, so a genitive nay stand in the relation of a predicate
adjective (907) to a verb.
1094. Verbs signifying to be or to become and other
copulative verbs may have a predicate genitive express-
ing any of the relations of the attributive genitive
(1085). Fy.
1. (Possessive.) 'O νόμος ἐστὶν οὗτος Δράκοντος, this law is
Draco's, 1).23,51. Πενίν φέρειν οὐ παντὺς, ἀλλ᾽ ἀνδρὸς σοφ οὔ,
to bear poverty is not in the power of every one, but in that of a wise
man, Men. Mon.463. Tod θεῶν νομίζεται (ὁ χῶρος) ; to what God
is the pluce held sacred # $.O.C.38.
2. (Subjective.) Οἶμαι αὐτὸ (τὸ ῥῆμα) Περιάνδρου εἶναι, 1]
think it (the saying) is Periander’s, P. Rp. 3363.
3. (Objective.) Ob τῶν κακούργων οἶκτος, ἀλλὰ τῆς δίκης»
pity ts not for evil doers, but for justice, Mi. frag. 272.
4. (Material.) "Epupa X lO wv πεποιημένον, a wall built of stones,
T.4, 31. Οἱ θεμέλιοι παντοίων λίθων ὑπόκεινται, the foundations
are laid (consisting) of all kinds of stones, Ὑ 1.93.
ὥς (Measure.) (Τὰ τείχη) σταδίων ἦν ὀκτώ, He walls were eight
stades (in length), 1. 4.00. Ἐπειδὰν ἐτῶν ἢ τὶς τριάκοντα, when
one ts thirty years old, ΤῸ Lig. 1215.
Ὁ. (Origin.) Τοιούτων ἐστὲ προγόνων, from such ancestors are
you sprung, X..4.3, 24,
1. (Partitive.) Ὑούτων γενοῦ pot, become one of these for my
sake, Ar.N.107. Σόλων τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφιστῶν ἐκλήθη, Solon was
called one of the Seven Wise Men, 1.15,335.
1085. Verbs siguifying to name, to choose or appotnt,
1099] GENITIVE, 233
to make, to think or reyard, and the like, which gener-
ally take two accusatives (1077); may take a genitive
in place of the predicate accusative. Ly.
Τὴν ᾿Ασίαν ἑαυτῶν ποιοῦνται, they make Asia their own, X.Ay.
1,33. Ἐμὲ θὲς τῶν πεπεισμένων, put me down as (one) of those
who are persuaded, DP. Rp.424e. (Potro) τῆς ἡμετέρας ἀμελείας
ἄν τις θείη δικαίως, any one might justly regard this as belonying to
our neglect, 1).1,10.
1096. ‘These verbs (1095) in the passive are among the copula
tive verbs of 907, and they still retain the genitive, See the last
example under 1094, 7.
GENITIVE EXPRESSING A Parr,
1097. 1. Any verb may take a genitive if its action
affects the object only in part. ΟΕ.
ΠΠέμπει τῶν Λυδῶν, he sends some of the Lydians (but πέμπει
τοὺς Λυδούς, fe sends the Lydians). Viver rod οἶνον, he drinks of
the wine. Ths γῆς ἔτεμον, they ravaged (sume) of the land, 1.1, 30,
2. This principle applies especially to verbs signifying
to share (i.e. to give or take @ part) or to enjoy. Ey.
Μετεῖχον τῆς λείας, they shared in the hooty ; so often μεταποιεῖ-
σθαί τινος, tu claim a share of anything (cf. 1090); ἀπολαύομεν τῶν
ἀγαθῶν, we enjoy the blessinys (ie. our share of them); οὕτως
ὄναισθε τούτων, thus may you enjoy these, D.28,20. So οὐ προσήκει
μοι τῆς ἀρχῆς, 1 have no concern in the government; μέτεστί μοι
τούτου, f have @ share in this (1101).
1098. N. Many of these verbs also take an accusative, when
they refer to the whole object. Thus ἔλαχε τούτον meus ke
obtained a share of this by lot, but ἔλαχε τοῦτο, he obtained this-by lot.
Meréyw and similar verbs may reyularly take an accusative like
μέρος, part; as τῶν κινδύνων πλεῖστον μέρος μεθέξουσιν, they will
have the greatest share of te dangers, 1.0.3. (where μέρους would
mean that they have only @ part of @ share). This use of μέρος
shows the nature of the genitive after these verbs.
In συντρίβειν τῆς κεφαλῆς, (ὁ druixe his head, and κατεαγέναι τῆς
κεφαλῆς, to have his head broken, the genitive is probably partitive.
See Ar. Ach.1180, Pa.71; 1.18,52. ‘These verbs take also the
accusative.
Genitive witit Vawous VExns.
1099. The genitive follows verbs signifying to take
234 SYNTAX. [1100
hold of, to touch, to claim, to aim at, to hit, tu attain, to
miss, to make trial of, to beyin. Ly.
"Edd Bero τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ, he look Ἧς ἫΝ X. Μ.4,185 πυρὸς
ἔστι θιγόντα μὴ εὐθὺς καίεσθαι, it is possible to touch fire and not
be burned onmediately, X.C.5, 1; τῆς ξυνέσεως μεταποιεῖσθαι, to
lay claim to sugacity, 11,140; ἥκιστα τῶν ἀλλοτρίων ὀρέγονται,
they ure leust eager for rohit i is another's, X. Ny. 4,425 οὐδὲ μὴν ἄλλου
στοχαζύμενος ἔτυχε τούτου, nor did he aon at another man and hit
this ane, AukuZa,ds τῆς ἀμετῆς ἐφικέσθαι, to attain to virtue, 1.1, 5;
ὁδοῦ εὐπόμου τυχεῖν, to δ a passable road, ἋΧ. {{{0. 5}, πολλῶν
καὶ χαλεπῶν χωρίων eredi Porto, they took possession of many rough
places, dud. ; ταύτης ἀποσφαλέντω τῆς ἐλπίδος, disappointed in this
dupe, W655 σφιλεὶς τῆς ἀληθείας, having missed the truth,
PRP ASTI; τὸ ἐψεῦσθαι τῆς ἀληθείας, fo be cheated ow of the
truth, bed. 4139; πειμάσαντες τοῦ χωρίον. having made an attempt on
the place, V.1, 613 εἰκὸς ἄρχειν pe Ad you, i is proper that I should
speak first, Χο νυ, 18
1100, N. Verbs of tating hold may have an object accusative,
with a genitive of the part taken hold of; as ἔλαβον τῆς ζώνης τὸν
*Opovruy, they seized Oroutas by his girdle, X.A.1, U2
1101. 1. ‘The poets extend the construction of verbs of taking
hald to those of pulling, dragging, leading, and the like; as ἄλλον
μὲν χλαίνης ἐρύων ἄλλον δὲ χιτῶνος, pulling one by the cloak,
another by the tunic, Fl. 55, 455) βοῦν ἀγίτην κεράων, the tev led
the heifer by the horns, Od.3,4139.
2. So even in prose: τὰ νήπια ποιδία Stover τοῦ ποδὸς σπάρτῳ,
they We the infants by the foot with a cord, Wd.5, 1G; μήποτε ἄγειν
τῆς ἡνίας τὸν ἵππον, never to lead the horse by the bridle, X. Εφ.0,9.
3. Under dis head is usually placed the poetic genitive with
verbs of duploring, denoting the part grasped by the suppliant;
as ἐμὲ λισσέσκετο γούνων, she implored me by (i.e. clasping) my
Knees, 719,951, ‘The explanation is less simple in λίσσομαι Zyvos
᾿Ολυμπίου, | tmplare by Olympian Zeus, Od.2,68: compare viv δέ
σε πρὸς πατρὸς γουνάζομοι, and now 1 implore thee by thy futher,
Od. 13,324.
1102, ‘The genitive follows verbs signifying to taste,
to smell, to hear, to perceive, to comprehend, to remember,
to forget, to desire, to care for, to spare, to neglect, to
wonder at, to admire, to despise. Eg.
᾿Ἐλευθερίης yevodpevor, having tasted of freedom, Hd. 6,5;
κρομμύων ὀσφρωίνομαι, 1 smell onions, Ar. R.654;, φωνῇς ἀκούειν
1108] GENITIVE, 235
ι δοκῶ, methinks 1 hear a voice, Ar. Pa.Gl; aicbdverbus, μεμνῆ.-
σθαι, or ἐπιλανθάνεσθαι τούτων, to perceive, remember, or forget
these; ὅσοι ἀλλήλων ξυνίεσαν, all who comprehended each other's
speech, ‘V.1,3 (1104); τούτων τῶν μαθημάτων ἐπιθυμῶ, } long for
this learning, X.M.2.6%; χρημάτων φείδεσθαι, to be sparing of
money, hid. 1,2”; τῆς ἀρετῆς ἀμελεῖν, to neglect virtue, 11,45; εἰ
ἄγασαι τοῦ Tarpds, if you admire your father, X.C.3, 1) Μ ηδενὸς
οὖν ὀλιγωρεῖτε μηδὲ καταφρονεῖτε τῶν προστεταγμένων, do nol then
negleet or despise any of my injunctions, 1.3,48. Tov κατηγόρων
θαυμάζω, Tam astonished at my accusers, 1..25,1. (for a causal
genitive with verbs like θαυμάζω, see 1126.)
1108. XN. Verhs of dearing, learning, ete. may take an accusa-
tive of the thing heard cte. and a genitive of the person heard
from; as τούτων τοιούτους ἀκούω λόγους, 1 hear such sayings
Jrom these men; πυθέσθαι τοῦτο ὑμῶν. to learn this from you. Vhe
genitive here belongs under 1130. A sentence may take the place
of the accusative; as τούτων ἄκουε τί λέγουσιν, hear from these tohat
they say. See also ἀποδέχομαι, aceept (a statement) from, in the
, Lexicon,
1104. N. Verbs of understanding, as ἐπίσταμαι, have the aceu-
sative. Συνώμι, quoted above with the genitive (1102), usually
takes the accusative of a thing.
1105. The impersonals μέλει and μεταμέλει take the geni-
tive of a thing with the dative of a person (1161); as μέλει μοι
τούτου, J care for this; μεταμέλει σοι τούτου, thou repentest of this.
Προσήκει, it concerns, has the same construetion, but the genitive
belongs under ]u97, 2.
1106. Causative verbs of this class take the accusative of a
person and the genitive of a thing; as μή μ᾽ ἀναμνήσῃς κακῶν, do
not remind me of cvils (i.e. cause me to remember them), Fb. ALAS;
τοὺς παῖδας γευστέον αἵματος, we must make the children taste blood,
P. Rp. 5374,
But verbs of reminding also take two accusatives (1069).
1107. N. "Ὄξω, emit smell (smell of), has a genitive (perhaps by
an ellipsis of ὀσμήν, odor); as ὄζουσ᾽ ἀμβροσίας καὶ νέκταρος, they
smell of amlrosia and nectar, Ay. Ach.196. A second genitive may
le added to designate the souree of the odor; as εἰ τῆς κεφαλῆς
ὄζω μύρον, if my head smells of perfume, Ar. Eccl. 524.
1108. N. Many of the verbs of 1099 and 1102 may take also
the accusative. See the Lexicon.
236 SYNTAX. [1109
1109. The genitive follows verbs signifying to rule, to
lead, or to direct. Eg.
Ἔρως τῶν θεῶν βασιλεύει, Love is king of the Gods, P. Sy.195*3
Πολυκράτης Σάμον τυραννῶν, Polycrates, while he was tyrant of
Samos, T.1,13; Μίνως τῆς viv “ΕΣλληνικῆς θαλάσσης ἐκράτησε καὶ
τῶν Κυκλάδων νήσων ἦρξε, Minos became master of what is now
the Greek sea, and ruler of the Cyclades, 'T.1,4; ἡδονῶν ἐκράτει,
he was master of pleasures, X.A1.1,5%; ἡγούμενοι αὐτονόμων τῶν ξυμ-
μάχων, leading their allies (who were) independent (972), ‘T.1,97.
1110. N. This construction is sometimes connected with that
of 1120. But the genitive here depends on the idea of king or
ruler implied in the verb, while there it depends on the idea of
comparison (sce 1083),
1111. N. For other cases after many of these verbs, see the Lexi-
con. For the dative in poetry after ἡγέομαι and ἀνάσσω, sve 1164,
1112. Verbs signifying fudness and want take the
genitive of material (1085, 4). Aig.
Χρημάτων εὐπόρει, he kal abundance of money, 3.18, 235;
σεσαγμένος πλούτου τὴν ψυχὴν ἔσομαι, 1 shall have my soul loaded
with wealth, Χ. Sy.4, 64. Οὐκ ἂν ἀποροῖ παραδειγμάτων, he would
be at no lass for examples, P. Rp. 5574; οὐδὲν δεήσει πολλῶν γραμμά-
τῶν, there will be no need of many writings, 1.4, 78.
1113. Verbs signifying to fill take the accusative of
the thing filled and the genitive of material. Z£yg.
Δακρύων͵ ἔπλησεν ἐμέ, he filled me with tears, E. Or. 368.
1114. Ν. Δέομαι, I want, besides the ordinary genitive (as
τούτων ἐδέοντο, they were in want of these), may take a cognate
accusative of the thing; as δεήσομαι ὑμῶν μετρίαν δέησιν, I will
make of you a moderate request, Aesch.3,61. (See 1076.)
1115. N. Ae? may take a dative (sometimes in poetry an
accusative) of the person besides the genitive; as δεῖ μοι τούτου,
1 need this; αὐτὸν γάρ σε δεῖ ΠΙρομήθεως, for thou thyself needest a
Prometheus, A. Pr.80 (cf. ob Set με ἐλθεῖν).
1116. N. (a) Besides the common phases πολλοῦ δεῖ, it ts
far from it. ὀλίγου δεῖ, it wants little of it, we have in Demosthenes
οὐδὲ πολλοῦ δεῖ (like παντὸς δεῖ), t wants everything of it (lit.
if does not even want much).
(ὁ) By an ellipsis of δεῖν (1534), ὀλίγου and μικροῦ come to
mean almost; as ὀλίγον πάντες, almost all, P. Rp. 5524,
1120] GENITIVE. 237
GENITIVE OF SEPARATION ΑΝ COMPARISON,
1117. The genitive (as ablative) may denote that
from which anything is separated or distinguished. On
this principle the genitive follows verbs denoting to
remove, to restrain, to release, to cease, to fail, to differ,
to give up, and the like. Zig.
Ἧ νῆσος οὐ πολὺ διέχει τῆς Qrecpon, the island is not far dis-
tant from the main-land. ᾿Ἐπιστήμη χωριζομένη δικαιοσύνης,
knowledge separated from justice, V. Menez.246%; λῦσόν pe Seo μῶν,
release me from chains; ἐπέσχον τῆς τειχήσεως, they ceased from
building the wall; τούτους οὐ παύσω τῆς ἀρχῆς, 10 will not depose
these from their authority, X.C.8,68; οὐ παύεσθε τῆς μοχθηρίας,
you do not cease from your rascality ; οὐκ ἐψεύσθη τῆς ἐλπίδος, he
was not disappointed in his hope, X.H.7,5%; οὐδὲν διοίσεις Kat pe
φῶντος, you will not differ from Chaerephon, Ar.N.503; τῆς ἐλεὺυ-
θερίας παραχωρῆσαι Φιλίππῳ, to surrender freedom to Philip, VD.
18,68. So εἶπον (αὐτῷ) τοῦ κήρυκος μὴ λείπεσθαι, they told him
not to be left behind the herald (i.e. to follow close upon him), T.1,151;
ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἣν οὗτος ἔγραψεν ἀπολειφθεὶς ἡμῶν, the letter which this
man wrote without our knowledge (lit. separated from us), ).15,36.
Transitive verbs of this class may take also an accusative.
1118. Verbs of depriving may take a genitive in place of the
accusative of a thing, and those of taking away a genitive in place
of the accusative of a person (1069; 1071); as ἐμὲ τῶν πατρῴων
ἀπεστέρηκε, he has deprived me of my paternal property, D.24,3; τῶν
ἄλλων ἀφαιρούμενοι χρήματα, taking away property from the others,
A. AL.1, 58; πόσων ἀπεστέρησθε, of how much have you been bereft!
1). ὃ, 63.
1119, N. The poets use this genitive with verbs of motion; as
Οὐλύμποιο κατήλθομεν, we descended from Olympus, 11.20, 125;
ἸΠυθῶνος ἔβας. thou didst come from Pytho, $.0. 1.152. Here a
preposition would be used in prose.
1120. The genitive follows verbs signifying to sur-
pass, to be inferior, and all others which imply com-
parison. E.g.
(‘AvOpwros) ξυνέσει ὑπερέχει τῶν ἄλλων, man surpasses the
others in sagacity, P. Mcnex.2374; ἐπιδείξαντες τὴν ἀρετὴν τοῦ πλή-
θους περιγιγνομένην, showing that bravery proves superior to numbers,
1.4,91; ὁρῶν ὑστερίζουσαν τὴν πόλιν τῶν καιρῶν, secing the city (oo
late for its opportunities, D.18,102; ἐμπειρίᾳ πολὺ προέχετε τῶν
288 SYNTAX. [1151
ἄλλων, in experience you far excel the others, X. H.7,14; οὐδὲν
πλήθει γε ἡμῶν λειφθέντες, when they were not αἱ all inferior ie
(left behind hy) us in numbers, X.A.7, 73. : So τῶν ἐχθρῶν νικᾶσθα,
(or ἡσσᾶσθαι), to be overcome hy one’s enemies; but these two verbs
take also the genitive with ὑπό (1234). So τῶν ἐχθρῶν κρατεῖν, to
prevail aver one's enemies, and τῆς θαλάσσης κρατεῖν, 10 be rm astey of
the sea. Compare the exainples under 1100, and see 1110.
GexerivE with Verns OF ACCUSING Frc.
1121, Verbs signifying to accuse, to prosecute, ty con.
υἱοὶ, to acquit, and to condemn take a genitive denoting
the erime, with an accusative of the person. Eig,
Αἰτιῶμαι αὐτὸν τοῦ φόνου, 2 accuse him of the murder: ἐγράψατο
αὐτὸν παρανόμων, he indicted hin for an illegal proposition = διώκεις
με δώρων, he prosecutes me for bribery (for gifts). Kr<wra δώρω 3
ἑλόντες καὶ κλοπῆς, having convicted Cleon of bribery and the ft
Av. N.5UL. "Eqevye προδοσίας, he was brought to trial for (eachery,
but ἀπέφυγε προδοσίας. he was acquitted of treachery. Ψευδο.
μαρτυριῶν ἁλώσεσθαι προσδοκῶν, expecting tu be convicted of false-
witness, 1,39, 18.
1122. ᾿Οφλισκάνω, lose a suit, has the construction of ἢ passive
of this class (1239); as ὦφλε κλοπῆς. he vas convicted of theft. It,
may also have a counate accusative; as ὦφλε κλοπῆς δίκην, he was
conmeted of theft 1051). For other accusatives wilh ὀφλισκάνω, as
μωρῶν, folly, αἰσχύνην, shame, χρήματα, money (fine), see the Lexicon,
1123, Compounds of κατά of this class, including κατη-
γορῶ (882, 2), commonly take a genitive of the persoy,
which depends on the κατά. ‘They may take also an object,
aecusative denoting the crime or punishment. E.g.
Οὐδεὶς αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ κατηγόρησε πώποτε, NO MAN ever himsels’
accused himself, 1).38,26; κατεβόων τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, they decried
the Athenians, T.1,87; θάνατον κατέγνωσαν αὐτοῦ, they Condemned
him to death, 0.6.01; ὑμῶν δέομαι μὴ καταγνῶναι δωροδοκίαν ἐμοῦ,
1 beg you not to declare me quilty af taking bribes, 121,91; τὰ
πλεῖστα κατεψεύσατό μου. he told the most lies agaist me, 1.18,9;
λέγω πρὸς τοὺς ἐμοῦ καταψηφισαμένους θάνατον, 1 speak to those
who noted to condemn me to death, P. 4.0. 3.84,
1124. N. Verbs of condemning which are compounds of κατά
may take three cases; as πολλῶν ol πατέρες ἡμῶν μηδισμοῦ
θάνατον κατέγνωσαν, our fathers condemned many to dear) for
Medism, 1.4. 157.
For a genitive (of value) denoting the penalty, see 1133,
1180] GENITIVE, 239
1125. N. The verbs of 1121 often take a cognate accusative
(1001) on which the genitive depends; as γραφὴν γράφεσθαι
ὕβρεως, tv bring an indictment for outraye ; γραφὴν Cor δίκην) ὑπέ-
χειν, φεύγειν, ἀποφεύγειν, ὀφλεῖν, ἁλῶνοι, etc. ‘The force of this
accusative scems to be felt in the construction of 1121.
GENITIVE OF CAUSE AND SOURCE.
1126. The genitive often denotes a cause, especially
with verbs expressing emotions, as admiration, wonder,
affection, hatred, pity, anyer, enny, or revenge. Ly.
(Τούτους) τῆς μὲν τόλμης οὐ θαυμάζω, τῆς δὲ ἀξυνεσίας, I
wonder not at their boldness, but at thea polly, ‘T.G,36; πολλάκις oe
εὐδαιμύνισα τοῦ τρόπου, | often counted you happy for your char-
acter, P.C'r.438; ζηλῶ σε τοῦ νοῦ, τῆς δὲ δειλίας στυγῶ, 4 envy
you for your mind, but loathe you for your cowardice, S. ΠΕ 1027;
μή μοι φθονήσῃς τοῦ μαθήματος, don't yrudye me the knowledge,
PL Eu.297"; συγγιγνώσκειν αὐτοῖς χρὴ τῆς ἐπιθυμίας. we must 70ν-
give them for thety desire, ibid. 3UGS; καί σφεας τιμωρήσομαι τῆς
ἐνθάδε ἀπίξιος, and 1 shall punish them for coming hither, Hd.3, 145.
Τούτους oiktipw τῆς νόσου, f pity these for their disease, X.Sy.4%7;
τῶν ἀδικημάτων ὀργίζεσθαι, tu be angry at the offences, 1.31, 11.
Most of these verbs may take also an accusative or dative of the
person.
1127. N. The genitive sometimes denotes a purpose or motive
(where ἕνεκα is eenerally expressed); as τῆς τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐλευθε-
pias, for the liberty of the Greeks, 1).18,100; so 19,76. (See 1548.)
1128. N. Verbs of disputing take a causal genitive; as οὐ
βασιλεῖ ἀντιποιούμεθα τῆς apXHs. we do not dispute with the King
ahout his dominion, X.A.2,33; Evpodros ἠμφισβήτησεν ᾿Ἐρεχθεῖ
τῆς πόλεως, Lumolpus disputed with Evechtheus for the city (i.e.
disputed its possession with him), 1.12, 193.
1129. The genitive is sometimes used in exclamations, tu
give the cause of the astonisliment. E.g.
5 Ὦ Πόρειδον, τῆς τέχνης, O Poseidon, what α ἀνα’ Ay, Eq. 144.
Ὦ Ζεῦ βασιλεῦ, τῆς λεπτότητος τῶν φρενῶν! O King Zeus!
what subllety of intellect! Ar. Ν. 185.
1130, 1. ‘Lhe genitive sometimes denotes the source. Eg.
Τοῦτο truysy σου, 4 obtained this from you. Μάθε pov τάδε,
learn this from me, X.C.1,6%, Add the examples under 1103.
2. So with γίγνομαι, in the sense to be born; as Δορείου καὶ
ΤΙαρυκάτιδος γίγνονται παῖδες δύο, of Durius and Parysatis are born
a eave ONE
foes . “αν αν
240 SYNTAX. (1131
1181. In poetry, the genitive occasionally denotes the
agent after a passive verb, or is used like the instrumental
dative (1181). Eg.
Ἔν “Aiba δὴ κεῖσαι, σὰς ἀλόχον σφαγεὶς Αἰγίσθου τε, thou
liest now in Hades, slain by thy wife and Acyisthus, E. ΕἸ, 122.
Ἰρῆσαι πυρὸς δηΐοιο θύρετρα, to burn the gates with destructive
fire, 11.2,415.
‘These constructions would not be allowed in prose.
GENITIVE AFTER COMPOUND VERBS.
1132. The genitive often depends on a preposition
included in a compound verb. £9.
Πρόκειται τῆς χώρας ἡμῶν ὄρη μεγάλα, high mountains lie in
front of our land, Χ. M.3,5°5; ὑπερεφάνησαν τοῦ λόφου, they ap-
peared above the hill, 'Y.4,93; οὕτως ὑμῶν ὑπεραλγῶ, I grieve so
Sor you, Ar. Av.466; ἀποτρέπει με τούτου, it turns me from this,
P.Ap.314; τῷ ἐπιβάντι πρώτῳ τοῦ τείχους, lo him who should first
mount the wall, ‘£.4,110; οὐκ ἀνθρώπων ὑπερεφρόνει, he did not
despise men, X. Ag. 11,2.
For the genitive alter verbs of accusing and condemning, com-
pounds of κατά, see 1123.
GENITIVE OF PRICE OR VALUE.
1133. The genitive may denote the price or value of
athing. Hy.
Tevye’ ἄμειβεν, χρύσεα χαλκείων, ἑκατόμβοι᾽ ἐννεα βοίων, he
gace gold armor for bronze, armor worth a hundred oxen for that
worth nine oxén, 116,235. Δόξα χρημάτων οὐκ ὠνητή (56. ἐστίν),
glory is not to be bought with money, 1.2, 32. ΤΙ όσον διδάσκει; πέντε
μνῶν. For what price does he teach? For fiee minae. Ὁ Ap. 20, Οὐκ
ἂν ἀπεδόμην πολλοῦ τὰς ἐλπίδας, J would nof have sold my hopes for
« great deal, ΟΡ δῦ, μείζονος αὐτὰ τιμῶνται, they value them
more, X.C.2, 13. (But with verbs of valumy περί with the geni-
tive is more common.)
In judicial language, τιμᾶν τινί τινος is said of the court’s judg-
ment in estimating the penalty, τεμᾶσθαί τινί τινος of either party
to the suit in proposing a penalty; as ἀλλὰ δὴ φυγῆς τιμήσωμαι;
ἴσως γὰρ ἄν μοι τούτον τιμήσαιτε, but now shall 1 propose exile as
my prurishinent?— you (the court) might perhaps fix my penalty at
this, P.Ap. 37. So τιμᾶται δ᾽ οὖν μοι ὁ ἀνὴρ θανάτου, so the man
esitmates my punishment at death (i.e. proposes death as my punish-
1138] GENITIVE, 241
ment), P.Ap.36°. So also Σφοδρίαν ὑπῆγον θανάτου, they im-
peached Sphodrias on a capital charge (cf. 1124), X. H.5,4%.
1134. The thing bought sometimes stands in the genitive,
either by analogy to the genitive of price, or in a causal sense
(1126); as τοῦ δώδεκα μνᾶς Πασίᾳ (sc. ὀφείλω); for what (do I
owe) twelve minae to Pasias? Ar..N.22; οὐδένα τῆς σννουσίας
ἀργύριον πράττει, you ask no money of anybody for your teaching,
X. AL, 63).
1135. The genitive depending on ἄξιος, worth, worthy, aud its
compounds, or on ἀξιόω, think worthy, is the genitive of price or
value; as ἄξιός ἐστι θανάτου, he is worthy of death; ob Θεμιστοκλέα
τῶν μεγίστων δωρεῶν ἠξίωσαν; did they not think Themistocles
worthy of the highest gifts? 1.4,154. So sometimes ἄτιμος and
ἀτιμάζω take the genitive. (See 1140.)
GENITIVE OF TIME AND PLACE.
1136. The genitive may denote the time within which
anything takes place. Eg.
Ποίον χρόνου δὲ καὶ πεπύρθηται πόλις ; well, how long since
(within what tine) was the city really taken? A.Ag.278. Tod ἐπιγι-
γνομένου χειμῶνος, during the following winter, 1.8,29. Ταῦτα
τῆς ἡμέρας ἐγένετο, this happened during the day, X.A.7,4™ (τὴν
ἡμέραν would mean trough the whole day, 1062). Δέκα ἐτῶν οὐχ
ἥξουσι, they will not come within ten years, P. Ly. 042°. So δραχμὴν
ἐλάμβανς τῆς ἡμέρας, he received a drachma u day (951).
1137. A similar genitive of the place within which or at
which is found in poetry. Eg.
7H οὐκ “Apyeos ἦεν ᾿Α χαιικοῦ ; was he not in Achaean Argos?
Od.3,251; Oty viv οὐκ ἔστι γυνὴ κατ᾽ ᾿Αχαιίδα γαῖαν, οὔτε Πύλον
ἱερῆς οὔτ᾽ Ἄργεος οὔτε Μυκήνη ς-, @ woman whose like there ts not
in the Achaean land, not at sacred Pylos, nor at Argos, nor at
Mycenae, Od. 21,107. Soin the Homeric weSloco θέειν, to run on
the plain (i.e. within its limits), 11.22, 23, χούεσθαι ποταμοῖο, to Lathe
in the river, J1.6,508, and similar expressions. So ἀριστερῆς χειρός,
on the left hand, even in Hdt. (5,77).
1138. N. A genitive denoting place occurs in Attic prose in a
few such expressions as iévat τοῦ πρόσω, to yo forward, X.A.1,3),
aud ἐπετάχυνον τῆς ὁδοῦ τοὺς σχολαίτεμον προσιόντας, they hurried
over the road those who came up more slowly, 1. 4,47. ‘These genitives
are variously explained.
242 SYNTAX. [1189
GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES.
1139. The objective genitive follows many verbal
adjectives.
1140. ‘Phese adjectives are chiefly kindred (in meaning
or derivation) to verbs which take the genitive. Δ 6.
Μέτοχος σοφίας, partuking of wisdom, P. Lg. G80"; ἰσόμοιροι τῶν
πατρῴων, sharing equally their father’s estate, ἰελο. 6,325. (1007, ὦ,
Ἐπιστήμιης ἐπήβολοι, having attained knowledge, P. Πα. δου,
θαλάσσης ἐμπειρότατοι, most experienced in the sea (in naviga-
tion). T.1,80, (1099.)
Ὑπήκοος τῶν you' wry, obedient (hearkening) to his parents, 4 Rp.
4632; ἀμνήμων τῶν κινδύνων, unnindful of the dangers, Ant.2a,7;
ἄγευστος κακῶν. without «taste of ens, δι An. 582; ἐπιμελὴς dya-
Gay, ἀμελὴς κακῶν, Caring Jor the φρο, neyleetfal of the bad;
φειδωλοὶ xP ἡμάτω ν, sparing 4 money, Τὸ Rp. δ δυ,, (1109.)
Tov ἡδονῶν πασῶν ἐγκρατέστατος, most perfeet master of all pleas-
ures, X.A1.1,2%; νεὼς ἀρχικός, fit to command a ship, P. Rp. Ass;
ἑαυτοῦ ὧν dxpatwp, not leing master of himself, ibid. 579. (1109.)
Μευστὸς κακῶν, full of cus; ἐπιστήμης κενός, void of knowt-
edge, P. Rp. 480°; λήθης ὧν πλέως. ὑς ing full of foryetfulness, thid. ;
πλείστων ἐνδεέστατος, most wanting in most things, ibid. 579°, ἡ
ψυχὴ γυμνὴ τοῦ σώματος. the soul stript of the body, P.Crat. 403%;
καθαρὰ πάντων τῶν περὶ τὸ σῶμα κακῶν. free (pure) from all the
evils that belang ta the body, νι. 40 6. τοιούτων ἀνδρῶν ὀρφανή,
bereft af such men, 1.2.60; ἐπιστήμη ἐπιστήμης διάφορος, knowl-
edge distinct from knowledge, P. Phil. 614; ἕτερον τὸ ἡδὺ τοῦ ἀγα θοῦ,
the pleasant (as) distinct from the good, Ἐς Οὐ πῦρ, (11225 1117.)
“Evoxos δειλίας, chargeable with cowardice, 414,53; τούτων
αἴτιος, yesponsihle for this, P.G.497" (1131.
Λξιος πολλῶν, worth much, genitive of value (1135).
1141. Compounds of alpha privative (875, 1) sometimes take a
genitive of kindred meaning, which depends ou the idea of sepa-
ration implied in them; as ἅπαις ἀρρένων ποίδων, destitute (οἰκεῖ:
less) of mate clatdren, X. CAG. τιμῆς ἄτιμος πάσης, destitute of
all hanor, BP. Lg. 774"; χρημάτων dduporatos. mast free fram taking
bribes, ‘1.2,05; ἀπήνεμον πάντων χειμώνων, free frou the blasts of
all storms, S.O.C.077, dWodatoas ὀξέων κωκυμάτων, without the
sound of shrill wailings, S. 47.321.
1142, Some of these adjectives (1139) are kindred to
verbs which take the accusative. 22.9.
᾿ΕἘπιστήμων τῆς τέχνης. understanding the art, P.G.448® (1104);
1147] GENITIVE, 243
ἐπιτήδευμα πόλεως ἀνατρεπτικόν, α practice subversive ofa state,
Pp. Rp. 3898, κακοῦργος τών ἄλλων, ἑαυτοῦ δὲ πολὺ κακουργύτερος,,
doing evil to the others, but fur greater evil to himself, X. AL.1, 5%;
συγγνώμων Tov ἀνθρωπίνων dpapt ημάτων, considerate of hwnan
faults, X.C.6, 135 σύμψηφός σοί εἰμι τούτον τοῦ νόμον, J vote with
you for this law, P. Ry. 380%.
1143. The possessive genitive sometimes follows adjec-
tives dcnoting possession. Κ᾿.
Οἱ κίνδυνοι τῶν ἐφεστηκότων ἴδιοι, the dangers belong to the
commanders, D.2,28, ἱερὸς ὁ χῶρος τῆς ᾿Αρτέμιδος, the place is
sacred to Artemts, X..4.5,35 κοινὸν πάντων, common to all,
P. Sy. 200%.
For the dative with such adjectives, sce 1174.
1144. 1. Such a genitive sometimes denotes mere connection;
as συγγενὴς αὐτοῦ, a relative of his, X.C.4,1%; Σωκράτους
ὁμώνυμος, a namesake of S crates, P. So. 215%
She adjective is here really used as a substantive. Such adjec-
tives uaturally take the dative (1175).
2. Here probably belongs ἐναγὴς τοῦ ᾿Απόλλωνος, accursed
(one) af Apollo, Nesch.3,110; also ἐναγεῖς Kut ἀλιτήριοι τῆς θεοῦ,
accursed of the Goddess, T.1, 126, and ἐκ τῶν ἀλιτηρίων τῶν τῆς θεοῦ,
Av By. 415: — ἐναγής cic. being really substantives.
1145. After some adjectives the genitive can be best explained
as depending on ie substantive implied in them: as τῆς ἀρχῆς
ὑπεύθυνος, responsihle for the offic e, La. liable to εὔθυναι for it, DL 18,
17 (see δέδωκά γε εὐθύνας ἐκείνων, in the saine section): παρθένοι
γάμων ὡραῖαι, maidens ripe for mrerriage, Le. having reached the age
(wpa) fur marriage, Hd.1,196 (see ἐς γάμου ὥρην ἀπικομένην,
Hd. 6,61); φόρου ὑποτελεῖς, subject to the payment (τέλος) of
tribute, T. 1,19.
1146, XN. Some adjectives of place, like ἐναντίος, opposite, may
take the genitive instead of the regular dative (1174), but chiefly in
poetry: as ἐγαντίοι ἔσταν 'Λ yatay, they stood opposite the Achacans,
11.17, 343.
See also τοῦ Πύντου émixdpout, at an angle with the Pontus,
Hd. 7, 36.
GENITIVE WITH ADVERBS.
1147. The genitive follows adverbs derived from ad-
jectives which take the genitive. Lug.
Οἱ ἐμπείρως αὐτοῦ ἔχοντες. those who are acquainted with him,
ἀναξίως τῆς πόλεως, κι a manner unworthy of the state. Tay ἄλλων
244 SYNTAX. [1148
᾿Αθηναίων ἁπάντων διαφερόντως, beyond all the other Athenians,
PL Cr. δὲν, "Eudyovto ἀξίως λόγου, they (the Athenians at Mara-
thon) fought in a manner worthy of note, Hd.6, 112. So ἐναντίον (1146).
1148. The genitive follows many adverbs of place. E.g.
Εἴσω τοῦ ἐρύματος, within the fortress; ἔξω τοῦ τείχους, outside
of the wall; ἐκτὸς τῶν ὅρων, without the boundaries; χωρὶς τοῦ
σώματος, apart from the body; πέραν τοῦ ποταμοῦ, beyond the river,
T.6,101; πρόσθεν τοῦ στρατοπέδου, in front of the camp, X.H.
4,133. ἀμφοτέρωθεν τῆς ὁδοῦ, on Lath sides of the road, ibid. 5,26;
εὐθὺ τῆς Φασήλιδος, straight towards Phasélis, 1). 8, 88,
1149. N. Such adverbs, besides those given above, are chiefly
ἐντός, within; δίχα, apart from; ἐγγύς, ἄγχι, πέλας, and πλησίον,
near; πόρρω (πρόσω), far from; ὄπισθεν and κατόπιν, behind; and
a few others of siinilar meaning. The genitive after most of them
can be explained as a partitive genitive or as a genitive of separa-
tion; that after εὐθύ resembles that after verbs of aiming at (1099).
1150. N. A dOpa(Ionic λάθρῃ) and κρύφα, without the knowledge
of, sometimes take the genitive; as λάθρῃ Λαυμέδοντος, without the
knowledge of Laomedon, 11.5,269; κρύφα τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, T.1,101.
1151. N.“Avev and ἄτερ, without, ἄχρι and μέχρι, until, ἕνεκα
(οὕνεκα), on account of, μετα ξ ύ, letween, and πλήν, except, take the
genitive like prepositions. See 1220.
GENITIVE ABSOLUTE.
1152, A noun and a participle not grammatically con-
nected with the main construction of the sentence may
stand by themselves in the genitive. This is called the
genitive absolute. Eg.
Ταῦτ᾽ ἐπράχθη Κόνωνος στρατηγοῦντος, this was done when
Conon was general, 1.9,56. Οὐδὲν τῶν δεόντων ποιούντων ὑμῶν
κακώς τὰ πράγματα ἔχει, affairs are ina had state while you do nothing
which you ought to do, 1).4,2. Θεῶν διδόντων οὐκ ἂν ἐκφύγοι
κακά, if the Gods should grant (it to be so), he could not escape evils,
A.Se.719. “Ovros ye ψεύδους ἔστιν ἀπάτη, when there is false-
hood, there is deceit, P. So. 2606.
See 1508 and 1563.
GENITIVE WITH COMPARATIVES,
1153. Adjectives and adverbs of the comparative de-
grec take the genitive (without }, than). Eg.
Κρείττων ἐστὶ τούτων. he is better than these. Νέοις τὸ σιγᾶν
κρεῖττόν ἐστι τοῦ λαλεῖν, for youth silence is better than prating,
Men. Mon. 387. (KLovnpia) θᾶττον θανάτου θεῖ, wickedness runs
faster than death, P, Ap. 39%,
1154. N. All adjectives and adverbs which imply a comparison
_ may take a genitive: as ἕτεροι τούτων, others than these; ὕστεροι τῆς
μάχης: too late for (later than) the hatile; rq ὑστεραίᾳ τῆς μάχης, on
the day after the battle. So τριπλάσιον ἡμῶν, thrice as much as we.
1155. N. The genitive is less common than 7 when, if 7 were
used, it would be followed by any other case than the nominative
or the accusative without a preposition. Thus for ἔξεστι δ᾽ ἡμῖν
μᾶλλον ἑτέρων, and we can (do this) better than others (1.1, 80),
μᾶλλον ἢ ἑτέροις Would be more common.
1156. N. After πλέον (πλεῖν), more, or ἔλασσον (μεῖον), less, ἢ
is occasionally omitted betore a numeral without affecting the case;
as πέμψω dpvis ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν, πλεῖν ἑξακοσίους τὸν ἀριθμόν, 1 will
send birds agatnst him, more than siz hundred in number, Ay, Av. 1551,
DATIVE.
1157. The primary use of the darive case is to denote that ¢o or
for which anything is or is done: this includes the dative of the
remote or indirect object, and the dative of advantage or disadcan-
tage. It also denotes that dy which or with which, and the time
(sometimes the place) in which, anything takes place, — ie. if is not
merely a dative, but also an instrumental and a lovative case. (See
1042.) The object of motion after éo is not regularly expressed by
the Greek dative, but by the accusative with a preposition. (See
1085.)
DATIVE EXPRESSING TO OR FOR.
Dative of sne Ixpirecr Onsecr.
1158. The indirect object of the action of a transitive
verb is put in the dative. This object is generally in-
troduced in English by to. 2g.
Δέδωσι μισθὸν τῷ στρατεύματι, he gives pay to the army; ὑπισ-
χνεῖταί σοι δέκα τάλαντα, he promises ten talents to you (or he prom-
ises you ten talents); βοήθειαν πέμψομεν τοῖς συμμάχοις, we will
send aid to our allies; ἔλεγον τῷ βασιλεῖ τὰ γεγενημένα, they told
the King whut had happened.
1159. Certain intransitive verbs take the dative, many
246 SYNTAX. [1160
of which in English may have a direct object with-
out to. Bg.
Tots θεοῖς εὔχομαι, 1 pray (to) the Gods, D.18,1; λυσιτελοῦν τῷ
ἔχοντι, advantageous to the one having it, P. Rp. 302°; εἴκουσ᾽ ἀνάγκῃ
τῇδε, yielding to this necessity, A.Ag.1U071; τοῖς νόμοις πείθοντοι,
they are obedient to the lawy (they obey the laws), X. AL. 4,49; βοηθεῖν
δικαιοσύνῃ, to assist justice, Ὁ, 11.451», Ei τοῖς πλέοσιν dpe
σκοντές ἐσμεν, τοῖσδ᾽ ἂν μόνοις οὐκ dpOws ἀπαρέσκοιμεν, if we are
pleasing to the majority, it cannot be right that we should be displeasing
to these alone, T.1,38. ᾿Ἐπίστευον αὐτῷ αἱ πόλεις, the cities trusted
him, X.A.1,9% Τοῖς ᾽Λ θηναίοις παρήνει, he uscd to advise the
Athenians, ‘11,93. Tov μάλιστα ἐπιτιμῶντα τοῖς πεπραγμένοις
ἡδίως ἂν ἐροίμην, 1 should Uke ta ask the man who censtures most
severely what has heen done, D.18,64. Te ἐγκαλῶν ἡ μῖν ἐπιχειρεῖς
ἡμᾶς ἀπολλύναι; what fault do you find with us that you try to destroy
us? P.Cr.30%. Τούτοις μέμφει te; have you anything to blame
these for? ibid. ᾿Επηρεάζουσιν ἀλλήλοις καὶ φθονοῦσιν ἑαυτοῖς
μᾶλλον ἢ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἀνθρώποις, they revile one another, and are
more malicious to themselves than to other men, X. AL3,5% "Eyade
watvov τοῖς στρατηγοῖς. they were angry with the generals, X.A.1,
412; ἐμοὶ ὀργίζονται. they are angry with me, VP. Ap.23% So πρέπει
poe λέγειν, it is Uecuming (te) me to speak; προσήκει pot, tt belongs
lo me; δοκεῖ μοι, it seems to me; δοκῶ μοι, methinks.
1160. The verbs of this class which are not translated
with to in English are chiefly those signifying to benefit,
serve, obey, defend, assist, please, trust, satisfy, advise, exhort,
or any oftheir opposites; also those expressing friendlé-
ness, hostility, blame, abuse, reproach, envy, anger, threats.
1161, N. The impersonals δεῖ, μέτεστι, μέλει, μεταμέλει,
and προσήκει take the dative of a person with the genitive of a
thing; as δεῖ μοι τούτου, 1 have need of this; μέτεστί μοι τούτον, 1
have a shure in this; μέλει μοι τούτου, 1] am interested in this; mpo-
σήκει μοι τούτον, 1 am concerned in this. (Kor the genitive, 508
1097,2; 1105; 1115.) "Εξεστι, it is possible, takes the dative alone.
1162. WN. Δεῖ and χρή take the accusative when an infinitive
follows. Yor δεῖ (in poetry) with the accusative and the genitive,
see 1115,
1168. N. Some verbs of this class (1160) may take the accnsa-
tive; as οὐδεὶς αὐτοὺς ἐμέμφετο, no one blamed them, X. A.2, 6%
Others, whose meaning would place them here (as pucca, hate),
take only the accusative. Δοιδορέω, revile, has the accusative, but
1167] DATIVE. 241
λοιδορέομαι (middle) has the dative. Ὀνειδίζω, reproach, and ἐπιτι-
μῶ, CenSUTE, have the accusative as well as the dative; we have also
ὀνειδίζειν (ἐπιτιμᾶν) τί τινι, to cast any reproach (or censure) on any
vane. Τιμωρεῖν τινι means regularly to avenge some one (to take ven-
geance for him); τιμωρεῖσθαι (rarely τιμωρεῖν) τίνα, to punish some
one (to avenge oneself on him): see X.C.4,68, τιμωρήσειν σοι τοῦ
παιδὸς τὸν φονέα ὑπισχνοῦμαι, 7 promise to avenge you on the mur-
derer of your son (or for your son, 1126).
1164. 1. Verbs of ruling (as dvdoow), which take the genitive
in prose (1109), have the dative in poetry, especially in Homer; as
πολλῆσιν νήσοισι καὶ “Apyet παντὶ ἀνάσσειν, tu rule over many
islands and all Argos, 112,108; δαρὸν οὐκ ἄρξει θεοῖς, he will nat
rule the Gods long, A. Pr. 940. Κελεύω. so command, which in Attie
Greek has only the accusative (generally with the infinitive), has
the dative in Homer: see Ji.2, 50.
“Hyéopar, in the sense of guide or direct, takes the dative
even in prose; as οὐκέτι ἡμῖν ἡγήσεται, he will no longer be our
guide, X.A.3, 2”
Dative OF ADVANTAGE OR Disapvaxrace.
1165. The person or thing for whose advantage or dis-
advantage anything is or is done is put in the dative
(dativus commodi et incommod?). This dative is gener-
ally introduced in English by for. Lg.
Πᾶς ἀνὴρ αὑτῷ πονεῖ, every man labors for hinself, ὃ, 47.1366.
Σύλων “A θηναίοις νόμους ἔθηκε, Solon made laws for the Athenians.
Καιροὶ προεῖνται τῇ πόλει, lit. opportunities hare been sacrificed for
the state (for its disadvantage), D.19,8. “Hyetro αὐτῶν ἕκαστος οὐχὶ
τῷ πατρὶ καὶ TH μητρὶ μόνον γεγενῆσθαι, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῇ πατρίδι,
each of them believed that he was born not merely for his father aad
mother, but for his country also, D.18, 205.
1166. N. A peculiar use of this dative is found in statements
of time; as τῷ ἤδη) δύο γενεαὶ ἐφθίατο, two generations had already
passed away for him (ie. he had seen them pass away), 1.1, 250.
Ἡμέραι μάλιστα ἦσαν τῇ Μντιλήνῃ ἑαλωκυίᾳ ἑπτά, for fe
Captured (1.8, since its capture) there had been about seven days, 1. 8,29
Ἦν ἡ ἡμέρα πέμπτη ἐπιπλέουσι τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις, it was the fifth dey
for the Athenians sailing out (i.e. tt was the fifth day since they began
to sail out), X. H.2, 147.
1167. N. Here belong such Homeric expressions as τοῖσι δ᾽
ἀνέστη, and he rose up for them (i.e. to address them), 111,685 τοῖσι
μύθων ἦρχεν, he began to speak before them (for them), Od. 1,28.
248 SYNTAX. [1168
1168. N. In Homer, verbs signifying to ward off take an
accusative of the thing and a dative of the person; as Δαναοῖσι
λοιγὸν ἄμυνον, ward off destruction from the Danai (lit. for the Danat),
111,456. Here the accusative may be omitted, so that Δαναοῖσι
ἀμύνειν means to defend the Danai. For other constructions of
ἀμύνω, see the Lexicon.
1169. N. Δέχομαι, receive, takes a dative in Homer by a
similar idiom; as δέξατό οἱ σκῆπτρον, he took his sceptre from him
(lit. for him), 11.2, 186.
1170. N. Sometimes this dative has a force which seems to
approach that of the possessive genitive; as γλώσσα δέ οἱ δέδεται,
and his tongue is tied (lit. for him), Theog.178; οἱ ἕπποι αὐτοῖς
δέδενται, they have their horses ticd (lit. the horses are tied for them),
X. A.3, 485, The dative here is the dativus incommodi (1165).
1171. N. Here belongs the so-called ethical dative, in which the
personal pronouns have the force of for my sake ctc., and some-
times cannot easily be translated; as τί cot μαθήσομαι ; what an
Ito learn for you? Av.N.111; τούτω πάνυ μοι προσέχετε τὸν νοῦν,
to this, I beg you, give your close attention, 1). 18,178.
For a dative with the dative of βουλόμενος etc., see 1584.
Dative or RELATION.
1172. 1. The dative may denote a person to whose case
a statement is limited, — often belonging to the whole seu-
tence rather than to any special word. E.g.
“Aravra τῷ φοβουμένῳ popes everything sounds to one who
ts afraid, S.frag.58. Σ φῷν μὲν ἐντολὴ Διὸς ἔχει τέλος, as regards
you two, the order of Zeus is fully executed, A.Pr.12. Ὑπολαμβά-
νειν δεῖ τῷ τοιούτῳ, ὅτι εὐήθης τις ἄνθρωπος, with regard to such a
one we must suppose that he is a simple person, P. Πρ. 9884, Τέθνηχ᾽
ὑμῖν πάλαι, 1 have long been dead to you, 5. Ph. 1030.
2. So in such expressions as these: ἐν δεξιᾷ ἐσπλέοντι, on the
right as you sail in (with respect to one sailing in), T.1,24; σὺν ε-
λόντι, OY ὡς συνελόντι εἰπεῖν, concisely, ΟΥ to speak concisely (lit.
for one having made the matter concise). So ὡς ἐμοί, in my opinion.
Darive oF Possession.
1173. The dative with εἰμί, γίγνομαι, and similar verbs
may denote the possessor. Eg.
Εἰσὶν ἐμοὶ ἐκεῖ ξένοι, 1 have (sunt mihi) friends there, P. Cr. 45°;
τίς ξύμμαχος γενήσεταί μοι; what ally shall ] find? Av. Eq.222;
ἄλλοις μὲν χρήματά ἐστι πολλὰ, ἡ μῖν δὲ ξύμμαχοι ἀγαθοί, others
have plenty of money, but we have yood allies, T.1, 86.
1175] DATIVE. 249
DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS.
1174. The dative follows many adjectives and ad-
verbs and some verbal nouns of kindred meaning with
the verbs of 1160 and 1165. Ely.
Δυσμενὴς φίλοις, hostile to friends, E. Me.1151; ὕποχος τοῖς
νόμοις, subject to the laws; ἐπικίνδυνον τῇ πόλει, danger ‘ous lo the
stale ; βλαβερὸν τῷ σώματι, hurtful to the body: εὔνους ἑαυτῷ,
kind to himself; ἐναντίος αὐτῷ, opposed to him (cf. 1146) ; τοῖσδ᾽
ἅπασι κοινόν, common to all these, Α..14. 38. Συμφερόντως
αὑτῷ, profitably to himself; ἐμποδὼν ἐμοί, in my way.
(With Nouns.) Ta παρ᾽ ἡμῶν δώρα τοῖς θεοῖς, the gifts (given) by
us fo the Gods, P. Euthyph.15*. So with an objective genitive and
a dative; as ἐπὶ καταδουλώσει τῶν θλλήνων ᾿Αθηναίοις, for the
subjugation of the Greeks to Athenians, T.3, 10.
DATIVE OF RESEMBLANCE AND UNION,
1175. The dative is used with all words implying
likeness or undikeness, agreement or disagreement, union
or approach. This includes verbs, adjectives, adverbs,
and nouns. ΟΕ.
Σκιαῖς ἐοικότες, like shaduws; τὸ ὁμοιοῦν ἑαυτὸν ἄλλῳ, to make
himself like to another, P. δριόθθο, τούτοις ὁμοιότατον, most like
these, P.G.513°; ὡπλισμένοι τοῖς αὐτοῖς Kupw ὅπλοις, armed with
the same arms ax Cyrus, X.C.7,12; ἢ ὁμοίον ὄντος τούτοις ἢ
ἀνομοίου, being either Like or unlike these, P. Ph. 74°; ὁμοίως δίκαιον
ἀδίκῳ βλάψειν, thal he will punish a just and an unjust man alike,
BP. Rp. 304: ἰέγαι ἀλλήλοις ἀνομοίως, to move unlike one another,
Ρ 7.364; τὸν ὁμώνυμον ἐμαυτῷ, my namesake, 1.3.21. Odre
ἑαυτοῖς οὔτε ἀλλήλοις ὁμολογοῦσιν, they agree neither with them-
selves nor with one another, P. Phir. 237°; ἀμφισβητοῦσι ot φίλοι
τοῖς φιλοῖς, €piCovere δὲ οἱ ἐχθροὶ ἀλλήλοις, friends dispute att
friends, but enemies quarrel with one another, P. Pr. 837%; τοῖς
πονηροῖς διαφέρεσθαι, fo be at variance with the bad, X.M.2,98;
ἦν αὐτῷ ὁμογνώμων, he was of the same mind with kim, T.8,92.
Κακοῖς ὁμιλῶν, associating with bad men, Men. Mon.274; τοῖς
φρονιμωτάτοις πλησίαζε, draw near to the wisest, 1.2,13; ψόφοις
πλησιάζειν (τὸν ἵππον), to bring him near to noises, X.Eq.2,5;
ἄλλοις κοινωνεῖν, to shure with others, P. Rp.369e; τὸ ἑαυτοῦ ἔργον
ἅπασι κοινὸν κατατιθέναι, to make his own work common to all, thid.;
δεόμενοι τοὺς φεύγοντας ξυναλλάξαι σφίσι, asking to bring the exiies
250 SYNTAX. [1176
to terms with them, T.1.24; βούλομαί σε αὐτῷ διαλέγεσθαι, I want
you (ὁ converse with him, P. Lys. 241%
(With Nouns.) ΓΆτοπος ἡ ὁμοιότης τούτων ἐκείνοις, the likencss
of these to those is strange, P. 6}. Ἰδδο, ἔχει κοινωνίαν ἀλλήλοις,
they have something in common with cach other, P. 30.2379; προσβολὰς
ποιούμενοι τῷ τείχει, muking attacks upon the wall, ἐπιδρομὴν τῷ
τειχίσματι, an assault ou the wall, ‘I'.4,23; Διὸς βρονταῖσιν εἰς
ἔριν. in vicalry wih the thunderings of Zeus, Ee Cyc. 328; ἐπανάστασις
μέρους τινὸς τῷ ὅλῳ τῆς ψυχῆς, a rebellion of one part of the soul
against the whole, P. 1 ν.41110,
1176. ‘Vhe dative thus depends on adverbs of pluce and time;
as ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, αἱ daybreak, X.A.2,1?; ὕδωρ ὁμοῦ τῷ πηλῷ
Ἡ)ματωμένον, water stained with blovd fiigeiiee with the mud, V7 ΠΣ];
τὰ τούτοις ἐψεξῆς, what comes next to this, P. 11. 05, τοῖσ δ' ἐγγύς,
near these, bk. Her.37 (ἐγγύς generally has the genitive, }119).
1177. ‘Yo this class belong μάχομαι, πολεμέω, and others
signifying to contend or quarrel with; as μάχεσθαι τοῖς Θηβαίοις,
to fight wih the Thebans; πολεμοῦσιν ἡ μῖν, they are at war with us.
So ἐς χεῖρας ἐλθεῖν τινι, Or ἐς λόγους ἐλθεῖν τινι, Lo Come to a conflict
(or fo words) with any one; also διὰ φιλίας ἰέναι ae to be friendly
(to ga through friendship) with one: see T.7,44: 8,48; X..4.3, 28
1178. N. After adjectives of eee an ait ged form of
expression nay be used; as κόμαι Χαρίτεσσιν ὁμοῖμι, hair like
(that af) the Graces, I1.17,51; τὰς ἴσας πληγὰς ἐμοί, the same
number of hlaws with me, Ar. R. 636.
© DATIVE AFTER COMPOUND VERBS,
1179. ‘The dative follows many verbs compounded
with ἐν, σύν, or ἐπί; and some compounded with πρὸς,
παρά. περί, and bre. Hg.
Tots ὅρκοις ἐμμένει ὁ δῆμος, the people abale by the vaths, X.1L
2,493; ab... ἡδυναὶ ψυχῇ ἐπιστήμην οὐδεμίαν ἐμποιοῦσιν, (such)
eee pr alae te no knowledge in the soul, X. 1.3, 1”; ἐνέκειντο τῷ
Περικλεῖ, they pressed hard on Pericles, T.2,595 ἐμαυτῷ συνήδη
οὐδὲν ἐπισταμένῳ, 7 was conscious to myself that 1 knew nothing (lt.
with myself), P. Ap. 224; ἡδη ποτέ σοι ἐπῆλθεν; did it ever occur to
you? X.M.4.53; προσέβαλλον τῷ τειχίσματι, Mey attacked the
Sortification, T.4,11; ἀδελφὸς dvdpt παρείη, let a brother stand by a
man (1.6. lel @ man's brother stand by him), P. Rp. 3624; τοῖς κακοῖς
περιπίπτουσιν, they are inveloed in evils, X.A1.4,2°7; ὑπόκειται τὸ
πεδίον τῷ ἱερῷ, the plain Nex below the temple, Aesch. 3, 115.
1184] DATIVE, 201
1180. N. This dative sometimes depends strictly on the prepo-
sition, and sometimes on the idea of the compound as @ whole.
CAUSAL AND INSTRUMENTAL DATIVE,
1181, The dative is used to denote cause, manner, and
means or instrument. Ey.
Cause: Νόσῳ ἀποθανών, having dicd of disease, T.8,84; οἱ
γὰρ KaKovola τοῦτο ποιεῖ, ἀλλ᾽ ἀγνοίᾳ, fur he does not do this from
ill-will, but from ignorance, X.C.3, 188; βιαζόμενοι τοῦ πιεῖν ἐπιθυμίᾳ,
forced by a desire to drink, ‘T.7,81; αἰσχύνομαί τοι ταῖς πρότερον
ἁμαρτίαις, 1am ashamed of (because of ) my former faults, Av. N.
3355. Masser: Apopw ἵεντο ἐς τοὺς βαρβάρους, they rushed against
the barhariaas on the run, 14.0.12: κραυγὴ πολλῇ ἐπίισιν, they will
advance with aloud shout, X.A.3,7% Τῇ ἀληθείας in ruth: τῷ ὄντι,
in reality: βίᾳ, forcibly ; ταύτη, in this manner, thus; λόγῳ, in word,
ἔργῳ, m deed ; τῇ ἐμῇ γνώμῃ» in my Judgment; ἰδία, pricateliys
δημοσίᾳ, publicly ; κοινῆ, i conmon. Means or INStRUMENT:
Ὁρῶμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, we sea with our eyes; γνωσθέντες τῇ
σκευῇ τῶν ὄπλων, recugnized by the fashion of their arms, T.1,5;
κακοῖς ἰᾶσθαι Kaka, to cure evils by evds, δ. frag. 73 ; οὐδεὶς ἔπαινον
ἡδοναῖς ἐκτήσατο, no one gains praise by pleasures, Stob.29, 31.
1182. N. The dative of respect is a form of the dative of man-
ner; as τοῖς σώμασιν AdvvaTo,... ταῖς ψυχαῖς ἀνύητοι, incapable
in their bodies,... senseless in their minds, X.AL.2,15; ὕστερον ὃν
τῇ τάξει, πρότερον τῇ δυνάμει καὶ κρεῖττόν ἐστιν, although it is
later in order, it is prior and superior in power, 1.3.15. So πόλις,
Θάψακος ὀνόματι, a city, Thapsacus by nume, X.A.1,4¥.
This dative often is equivalent to the accusative of specification
(1058). ΄
1188, Xpdopat, to use (to serve one's self by), takes the dative
of means; as χρῶνται ἀργυρίῳ, they use money. A neuter pronoun
(c.g. τί, τὶ, ὅ τι, OF τοῦτο) nay he added as a coguate accusative
(1051); as τί χρήσεταί ποτ᾽ αὐτῷ 3 what will he do with him? (hit.
what use will he make of him?), Atv. Ach. 935, Νομίζω has sometines
the saine meaning and construction as χράομαι.
1184, ‘The dative of manner is used with comparatives
to denote the deyree of difference. Πα.
Πολλῷ κρεῖττόν ἐστιν, if is much better (better by much); ἐὰν τῇ
κεφαλῇ μείζονά τινα φῆς εἶναι καὶ ἐλάττω, if you say that anyone is
ἃ head taller ov shorter (lit. by the head), P.Ph.101%, Thode λογέμῳ
Ἑλλὰς γέγονε ἀσθενεστέρη, Greece has become weaker by one
252 SYNTAX. (1185.
illustrious city, Hd.6,106. Τοσούτῳ ἥδιον ζῶ, f live so much the more
happily, X.C.8,3"; τέχνη 8 ἀνάγκης ἀσθενεστέρα μακρῷ, and art
is weaker than necessity by far, A. Pr.514.
1185. So sometimes with superlatives, and even with other
expressions which imply comparison; as ὀρθότατα μακρῷ, most
correctly by far, P..Lg.768¢; σχεδὸν δέκα ἔτεσι πρὸ τῆς ἐν Σαλαμῖνι
ναυμαχίας, about ten years before the sea-fight at Salamis, ibid. 6985,
DATIVE OF AGENT.
1186, The dative sometimes denotes the agent with the
pertect and pluperfect passive, rarely with other passive
tenses. Lg.
ἜἘξετάσαι τί πέπρακται τοῖς ἄλλοις, «0 ask what has been done by
the others, ).2,27; ἐπειδὴ αὐτοῖς παρεσκεύαστο, when preparation had
been made by them (when they had their preparation made), ‘T.1,40;
πολλαὶ θεραπεῖαι τοῖς ἰατροῖς εὕρηνται, many cures have been dis-
covered by physicians, 1.8, 39.
1187. N. Here there seems to be a reference to the agent’s
wwterest in the result of the completed action expressed by the
perfect and pluperfect. With other tenses, the agent is regularly
expressed by ὑπό ete. and the genitive (1234); only rarely by the
dative, except in poetry.
1188. With the verbal adjective in -réos, in its personal
construction (1595), the agent is expressed by the dative;
in its impersonal construction (1597), by the dative or the
accusative.
DATIVE OF ACCOMPANIMENT.
1189, The dative is used to denote that by which any
person or thing is accompanied. ΕΟ. :
*EXOdvrwy Περσῶν παμπληθεῖ στόλῳ, when the Persians came
with an army in full force, X. A.3, 2"; ἡμεῖς καὶ ἵπποις τοῖς δυνατω-
Tatas καὶ ἀνδράσι πορενώμεθα, let us march both with the strongest
horses and with men, X.C.5,8%; of Λακεδαιμόνιοι τῷ τε κατὰ γῆν
στρατῷ προσέβαλλον τῷ τειχίσματι Kai ταῖς ναυσίν, the Laccdae-
monians attacked the wall both with their land army and with their
ships, 'T.4,11.
1190, This dative is used chiefly in reference to military forces,
and is originally connected with the dative of means. The last
example might be placed equally well under 1181.
1190] DATIVE. 253
1191. This dative sometimes takes the dative of αὐτός for
emphasis; as μίαν (ναῦν) αὐτοῖς ἀνδράσιν εἷλον, they took one
(ship) men and all, ‘T.2,90. Here no instrumental force is seen,
and the dative may refer to any class of persons or things; as
χαμαὶ Bare δένδρεα μακρὰ abryow ῥίζησι καὶ αὐτοῖς ἄνθεσι
μήλων, he threw to the ground tall trees, with their very roots and their
fruit-blossoms, 11.9, 541.
DATIVE OF TIME.
1192. The dative without a preposition often denotes
time when, This is confined chiefly to nouns denoting
day, night, month, or year, and to names of festivals. E.g.
Τῇ αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἀπέθανεν, he died on the same day; (Ἑρμαῖ) μιᾷ
νυκτὶ οἱ πλεῖστοι περιεκόπησαν, the most of the Hermae were mutt-
lated in one night, 'T.6,27; οἱ Σάμιοι ἐξεπολιορκήθησαν ἐνάτῳ
μηνί, the Samiuns were taken by siege in the ninth month, “1. 1,117}
δεκάτῳ ἔτει ξυνέβησαν, they came to terms in the tenth year, 1.1,
103; ὠσπερεὶ Θεσμοφορίοις νηστεύομεν, we fast as if it were
(on) the Thesmophoria, Ay. Av. 1519. So τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ (sc. ἡμέρᾳ), on
the following day, and δευτέρᾳ, τρίτη, on the second, third, etc., in
giving the day of the month.
1193. N. Even the words mentioned, except naines of fes-
tivals, generally take ἐν when no adjective word is joined with
them. Thus ἐν νυκτί, at night (rarely, in poetry, vu«rd), but ag
νυκτί, in one night.
1194. N. A few expressions occur like ὑστέρῳ χρόνῳ, in after
time ; χειμῶνος ὥρᾳ, in the winter season ; νουμηνίᾳ (new-moun day),
on the first of the month; and others in poetry.
1195. N. With other datives expressing time ἐν is regularly
used; as ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ χειμῶνι, in the same winter, “1. 2, 34. But it is
occasionally oinitted.
DATIVE OF PLACE.
1196. In poetry, the dative without a preposition
often denotes the place where. Ey.
Ἑλλάδι οἰκία ναίων, inhabiting dwellings in Hellas, 11.16,505;
αἰθέρι ναίων, dwelling in heaven, 114,166; οὔρεσι, on the moun-
tains, 11.13,390; τόξ᾽ ὦὥμοισιν ἔχων, having his bow on his shoulders,
111,45; μίμνει dy po, he remains in the country, Od.11,188. Ἧσθαι
Benois. to sit at home, A. Ag.802. Νῦν dypotos τυγχάνει (50. ov),
now he happens to be in the country, 8. El.313.
254 SYNTAX. {1197
1197. In prose, the dative of place is chiefly confined to the
names of Attic demes; as ἡ Μαραθῶνι μάχη, the batile at Mara-
thon (but ἐν ᾿Αθήναις): see μὰ τοὺς Μαραθῶνι προκινδυνεύ.
σαντας τῶν προγόνων καὶ τοὺς ἐν Πλαταίαις παραταξαμένους καὶ
τοὺς ἐν Σαλαμῖνι ναυμαχήσαντας, no, by those of vur ancestors who
stoud inthe front of danger at Marathon, and those who arrayed them.
selres at Plataea, and those who fought the sea-fight at Salamis, D.13, 208.
Sul) some exceptions oecur.
1198. N. Some adverbs of place are really loral datives; as
ταύτη, τῇδε, here; οἴκοι, at home. So κύκλῳ, in a circle, all around,
(See 436.)
PREPOSITIONS.
1199. ‘Te prepositions were originally adverbs, and as
such they appear in composition with verbs (see 882, 1).
They ave used also as independent words, to connect nouns
with other parts of the sentence.
1200. Besides the prepositions properly so called, there are
certain adverbs used in the same way, which cannot be com-
pounded with verbs, These are called oaproper prepositions. For
these seg 1221).
1201. 1. Four prepositions take the genitive only: ἀντί, ἀπό,
ἐξ (ἐκ), mpo,— with the improper prepositions ἄνευ, ἄτερ, ἄχρι.
μέχρι, μεταξύ, ἕνεκα, πλήν.
2. ‘Two take the dative only: ἐν and σύν.
3. Two take the aecusative only: ἀνά and εἰς or és, — with the
improper preposition ὡς. For ἀνά in poetry with the dative, see
1203.
4. Four take the genitive and accusative: διά, κατά, μετά, and
ὑπέρ. For μετά with the dative in Tomer, see 1212, 2.
5. Six lake the genitive, dative, and accusative: ἀμφί (rare with
genitive), ἐπί, rapa, περί, πρός, aNd ὑπό. :
USES OF THIS PREPOSTTIONS.?
1202. ἀμφί (Lat. amb-, compare ἄμφω, both), originally on bath
sides of; hones about. Chietly poetic and Jonie. In Attic
prose περί is generally used in most senses of ἀμφί.
1. with the Genrer (very rare in prose), about, concerning:
ἀμφὶ yurackds, about α woman, A. Ag. 02.
1Only a general statement of the various uses of the prepositions
is given here. Fur the details the Lexicon must be consulted.
1200] USES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 955
ὦ, with the vayive (only poctic and Tonic), about, concerning,
on account of: ἀμφ᾽ ὥμοισι, about his shoulders, 11.13, 527;
ἀμφὶ τῷ νόμῳ τούτῳ, cunccrniny this luw, t1d.1, 1405; ἀμφὶ
φόβῳ, through fear, I. Or. 820.
8. with the accusavive, aboat, vear, of place, tine, number,
Cle: ἀμφ᾽ ἅλα, by he aca, LL. 1.09; ἀμφὶ δείλην, uear even:
tug, N.CLOAd 5 ἀμφὶ Wreddwy δύσιν, aboud (the time of;
the Vetads’ settling, Av Ay. δῦ, So ἀμφὶ δείπνον εἶχεν, he
was ab supper, XN νος GH, Οὐ ἀμφί τινα (as of ἀμφὶ Πλάτωνα)
means @ near with his followers.
In comp: about, ou bolle sides,
1203. ἀνά (cf. adv. ἄνω, alocc), originally up (opposed to kara).
1. with the pavive (only cpic and lyric), a ons ἀνὰ σκήπτρῳ,
ona stud, 111,10.
2. with the accusative, wa alony ; and of motion over, derougly,
amouy (Gl. κατα): —
(ὦ) of PLACE: ἀνὰ τὸν ποταμὸν, tip the steer, HA.2, 96 5 ἀνὰ
στρατῶν, through the aru, 101,105 οἰκεῖν ἀνὰ τὰ ὕμη, tu
dwell un the taps of Ue hills, XA AM.
(b) of vise: ἀνὰ τὸν πόλεμον, Crvagh Ge war, Wd. 8, 1255 ἀνὰ
χρόνον, te course of tine, Valo, 27.
(6) Th mistaipuyivi ¢xpressions: ἀνὰ ἑκατόν, by hundreds,
X.A.5, {τ ἀνὰ πᾶσαν ἡμέρην, every day, [τὰ 2, 1 (su XC
1,25). ; ΜΝ . ;
Tn coma: ag, beck, again
1204. ἀντί, with cesimver only, tuatead af, for: ἀντὶ πολέμου εἰρή-
γὴν ἐλώμεδα, tu place of wur let us choose peace, ‘V4, 20;
ard ὧν, wherefore, A. Dr ols avr ἀδελφοῦ, fur ἃ brother's
sake, ὃς δ). πὶ Original meaning, ever agaist, agacnst.
In cosy: against, tr opposition, ta return, tustead.
1205. ἀπό (Lit. ab), with Gexrrive only, fren, uf from, away
from, oviginally (as opposcd to ἐκ) denoting separation or
departare trom someding τ τ
(a) Of pack: ἀφ᾽ ἵππων andro, he leuped from the car (horses),
11.16, 753, ἀπὸ θαλάσσης. ata distance Mon the sea, "T1, 7,
(hb) Of visas; ἀπὸ τούτου τοῦ χρόνου, from this time, X.A.7, ὁδὶ
(9) of Cavan or Omiein: ἀπὸ τούτου τοῦ τολμήματος ἐπηνέθη,
for this bold act he was pratsed, ἽΝ ἢ, θδ; τὸ ζῆν ἀπὸ πολέμον,
tu lire by war, Πα. ὃ, ὁ; ἀπ᾽ οὗ ἡμεῖς γεγόναμεν, from ushoue
we are sprig, Hd. 7, 180. 5 sometimes the aqent (as source):
ἐπράχθη ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν οὐδέν, nothing was dane by them, 'V.1,17.
In comp.: froin, aug, off, tr recurn.
1206. διά, throwyh (Lat. di-, dis-).
1. with the Gesitive:
(a) of phace: διὰ donidos ἦλθε, τὰ went through the shield,
11.7.281.
256 SYNTAX. [1207
(ὃ) of ΤΙΜῈ : διὰ νυκτός, through the night, X.A.4, 0%.
(0) of isrervacs of time or place: διὰ πολλοῦ χρόνον, after a
long time, Ar. P1145; διὰ τρίτης ἡμέρης, every other day,
fu. 2, 37.
(ὦ) of Means: ἔλεγε δι ἑρμηνέως, he spoke through an inter-
preter, X. 4.2, 811,
(6) in various phrases like 80 οἴκτου ἔχειν, bo pity; διὰ φιλίας
ἰέναι, to Le in friendship (with one). See 1177.
2. with the accusative:
(a) of AGENCY, On @ccount Of, by help of, by reason of: διὰ
τοῦτο, on this account; δὲ ᾿Αθήνην, by help of Athena, Od.
8, 520; οὐ δ ἐμέ, not owiny to me, 1). 18, 18.
(Ὁ) Of PLack or τίμα, through, during (poetic) : διὰ δώματα,
through the hulls, 11.1, 000; διὰ νύκτα, through the night,
Ou. 19, 66.
IX compr.: through, also apart (Lat, di-, dis-).
1207. εἰς or ἐς, with accusative only, into, to, originally (as op-
posed to ἐκ to within (Lat. in with Ue accusative): εἰς
always in Attic prose, except in Thucydides, who has ἐς,
Both εἰς and és are tor évs ; see also ἐν.
(a) of place: διέβησαν ἐς Σικελίαν, they crossed ΝΡ into
Sicily, 6,2; εἰς Πέρσας ἐπορεύετο, he departed for Persia
(the Persians), X.C.8, 54); τὸ és ]αλλήνην τεῖχος, the wall
touards (luvking lo) Patlene, ‘T.1, 6.
(Y) of crimes ἐς ἠῶ, until dawn, Od.11,575; so of a time
looked forward to: προεῖπε τοῖς ἑαυτοῦ els τρίτην ἡμέραν
παρεῖναι, he yave notice tu his men to be present the next day
but one, X.C.3, 142, Su ἔτος εἰς ἔτος, from year to year,
$. An. 840. So ἐς 8, until; εἰς τὸν ἅπαντα χρόνον, for all
time. i
(ὦ of kuMBER and MEASURE: εἰς διακοσίους, (amounting) to
two hundred; ets δύναμιν, up lo one’s power.
(ἃ) of purvosE or REFERENCE: παιδεύειν εἰς τὴν ἀρετήν, (0
train for virtue, Τὶ Ο.δ1θο; εἰς πάντα πρῶτον εἶναι, to be Jsirst
Sor everything. P. Ch. 158%; χρήσιμον εἴς τι, useful for anything.
In come,: tnéo, ti, to.
1208. ἐν, with varive only, ὧν (Hom. éf), equivalent to Lat. ja
with the ablative:
(a) of pack: ἐν Σπάρτῃ, tn Sparta ;— with words implying
a musmber of people, among: ἐν γυναιξὶ ἄλκιμος, Urave among
women, Or. 74; ἐν πᾶσι, tn the presence of all; ἐν δικα-
σταῖς, before (coram) @ court.
(δ) of time: ἐν τούτῳ τῷ tre, in this year; ἐν χειμῶνι, in
winter; ἐν ἔτεσι πεντήκοντα, within fifty yours, T.1, 118.
(ὦ of other velations: τὸν ἸΤερικλέα ἐν ὀργῇ εἶχον, they were
angry with DP. (held him in anger), 1.2, 21; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ
τούτον τέλος ἦν, οὐκ ἐν ἐμοί, the issue of thts was with (in the
1210] USES OF THE PREPOSITIONS, 257
power of) God, not with me, 1.18,193; ἐν πολλῇ ἀπορίᾳ
ἦσαν, they were in great perplexity, X.A.3, 1%.
As ἐν (like εἰς and és) comes from ἐνς (see eds), it originally allowed
the accusative (like Latin in), and in Aeolic ἐν may be used like εἰς;
as ἐν Καλλίσταν, to Culliste, Pind. Py. 4, 258.
In comr.: tr, on, at.
1209. ἐξ or ἐκ, with Genitive only (Lat. ex, e), frum, out of;
originally (as opposed to ἀπό) from within (compare es).
(a) Of PLACE: ἐκ Σπάρτης φεύγει, he is banished from Sparta,
(b) of τιμὴ; : ἐκ παλαιοτάτου, from the most ancient time,'Y.1,18,
(c) of ontGin: ὄναρ ἐκ Διός ἐστιν, the dream comes from Zeus,
11.1,63. So also with passive verbs (instead of ὑπό with gen.):
ἐκ Φοίβου dayels, destroyed by Phocbus, ὃ. Ph. 335 (the agent
viewed as the source), seldom in Attic prose. (See 1205.)
(d) of Grounn for a judginent: ἐβουλεύοντο ἐπ τῶν παρόντων,
they took counsel with ἃ view tu (starting from) the present
state uf things, Y.3, 29.
In comr.: out, from, aay, off.
1210. ἐπί, on, upon.
1. with the GeNirive:
(a) of pLacn: ἐπὶ πύργον ἔστη, he stood on a tower, 12.16, 700;
solnetimes towards: πλεύσαντες ἐπὶ Σάμου, having sailed
towards Sanus, ‘V.1,116; so ἐπὶ τῆς τοιαύτης γενέσθαι γνώ-
μης, tu adopt (go vver tv) such an opinion, 1).4,6.
(0) of Time: ἐφ᾽ ἡμῶν, in our time; én’ εἰρήνης, in time of
peace, Il.2, 797.
(6) Of RELATION or REFERENCE to an object: τοὺς ἐπὶ τῶν
πραγμάτων, those m charge of (jublic) affairs, D.18, 247; ἐπὶ
Λιβύης ἔχειν τὸ ὄνομα, to be named for Libya, 11d.4,45; ἐπί
τινος λέγων, speaking with reference to some one, see ?.Ch,
1584; so ἐπὶ σχολῆς, at leisure; ἐπ' ἴσας (sc. polpas), in cyual
measure, ὥς £11061,
2. with the pative:
(a) Of PLacK: ἦντ᾽ ἐπὶ πύργῳ, they sat on a tower, 11.3, 153;
πόλις ἐπὶ τῇ θαλάττῃ οἰκουμένη, a city situated upon (by) the
sea, X.A.1, 4).
(δ) of time (of immediate succession) : ἐπὶ τούτοις, thereupon,
ΧΟ δ, 621,
(0) Of CAUSE, PURPOSE, CONDITIONS, Ctc.: ἐπὶ παιδεύσει μέγα
φρονοῦντες, proud of their education, 1». Pr. 3424; ἐπ᾽ ἐξα-
γωγῇ, for exportation, d.1, 156; ἐπὶ τοῖσδε, on these con-
ditions, Av. Av. 1602 ; ἐπὶ τῇ ton καὶ ὁμοίᾳ, on fair and equal
terms, T.1,27. So ἐφ᾽ ᾧ and ἐφ᾽ ᾧ re (1460).
(4) Likewise over, fur, at, in addition to, in the power of ; and
iu many other relations: sce the Lexicon.
8, with the accusaTIvE:
(a) οὗ PLacE: to, up to, towards, against: ἀναβὰς ἐπὶ τὸν
2
ὃ
ὃ SYNTAX, [1211]
ἵππον, mounting his horse, X.A.1,8°3 ἐπὶ δεξιά, to the right,
on th: riyke lind, NA. ὐ, 41, πὶ βασιλέα ἰέναι, ty march
against the Ning, NA. Lat,
(b) of vine or sracn, denoting extension: ért δέκα ἔτη, for
ten yours, V5, G8; ἐπ᾽ ἐννέα γεῖτο πέλεθρα, he covered (lay
over) nine ple thra, Od.11, 5773 80 ἐπὶ πολύ, widely; τὸ ἐπὶ
πολύ, for the ros part; éx τοῦ ἐπὶ πλεῖστον, from the remot-
est pertod, ‘V1, 2.
(¢) of an obseer aimed at: κατῆλθον ἐπὶ ποιητήν, 1 came doum
here yor a poet, Ay. R148.
In comp.; upon, over, afler, toward, to, for, at, against, vesides.
1211. κατά (cf. adverb κάτω, below), originally down (opposed to
ava).
1. with the cexrtives
(@) down from: ἀλλόμενοι κατὰ τῆς πέτρας, leupiny down from
thesrock, X. AA 2".
(b) down upon: μύρον κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς καταχέαντες, Pouring
perfunes on his head, Ὁ. dep. 0988
(ὦ beneath: κατὰ χθονὸς ἔκρυψε, he buried beneath the earth,
S. AM. ZAS οἱ κατὰ χθονὸς θεοί, the Gods below, A. Pe. G89,
(a) against: yor καθ᾽ ἡμῶν, saying ayainst me (us), S. Ph. 65,
2. with the accusative, doun along; of motion over, through,
among, tuto, against s also decording to, concerning.
(@) of PLACE: κατὰ ῥοῦν, dun stream; xata γῆν καὶ κατὰ
θάλατταν, by land and hy sea, Ν. “1... 25 κατὰ Σινώπην
πόλιν, opposite the city Sinope, Wd. 1, 76.
(b) of timc: κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον, during (at the time af) the
war, Wd. 7, 137.
(¢) DISFRIBETIVELY : κατὰ τρεῖς, by {πόσας three hy three ; καθ᾽
ἡμέραν, day by day, daily. Ν᾽
(4) according to, concerning: κατὰ τηὺς νόμους, wecording lo lar,
D.4,2; τὸ κατ᾽ dud, as regards myself, 18, 2475 so κατὰ
πάντα, in Ql respects; τὰ κατὰ πόλεμον, nuilitary mutters.
Jn comp: dum, against.
1212. μετά, with, amid, airong. See σύν.
1. with the Gexrrivic;
(a) with. tn δον μαι} with» per ἄλλων ko ἑταίρων, le down
ΘΝ Δ the vest of Un compantons, OAV, 320; μετὰ ζώντων,
among the licong, SL 101}.
(b) te anton with, with the coijperation of: μετὰ Μαντινέων
ξυνεπολέμουν, they fought in alliance with the Mantineans,
“ὅς, 105; οἵδε μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἧσαν, these were on his side, V3, 56 ;
Ὕπέρβολον ἀποκτείνουσι μετὰ Napylvov, they put Hyperbolus
ty death by the aid af Charminus, ἡ ὃς 7
2. with the pative (poetic, chiefly epic), mnong: μετὰ δὲ τριτά-
rows ἄνασσεν, and he wus reigning in the third generation,
J1.1,252.
1214] USES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 2359
8. with the accusaTIVE;
(a) into (the midst wh), after (in quest af), for (poetic) :
μετὰ στρατὸν ἥλασ᾽ ᾿Αχαιῶν, he drove intu the αν my of the
Achacans, 11.5, 580; πλέων μετὰ χαλκόν, sailing afler (in
quest uf ) copper, Od. 1, 184.
(δ) generally εν nett tus μετὰ τὸν πόλεμον, afler the war ;
μέγιστος μετὰ “lotpov, the luryest (river) newt to the Isler,
Wid. 4, 53,
In comv.: with (of sharing), amoung, after (in quest of): it also dc-
notes chanye, as in peravodw, chanye ones mind, repent.
1213. παρά (Juin. also mapal), by, near, alongside af (see 1221, 2).
1. with the cunitive, from beside, from: mapa νηῶν ἀπονοστή-
σειν, tu return from the ships, (12.114; παρ᾽ ἡμῶν ἀπάγ-
γελλε τάδε, take this message Jrom us, N,AL2. 1".
2. with the parive, with, beside, near: παρὰ Πριάμοιο θύρησιν,
αἱ ἢ) νίαν δ gates, 17,546 5 παρὰ σοὶ κατέλνον, they lodged
with you (vere your quests), 1). 18, 80,
3. with the accesvrive, to (place) near, tas also by the side
of, beyond or beside, cxecepl, along with, because of.
(@) of whack: τρέψας πὰρ ποταμόν, Qurutny to the (lauk af
the) river, 1L21,603 5 ἐσιόντες παρὰ τοὺς φίλους, gory in to
(visit) their fricuds, 'P.2, 51.
(0) of wim: παρὰ πάντα τὸν χρόνον, throughout the whole
time, 19.18, 10.
(¢) of cause: παρὰ τὴν ἡμετέραν ἀμέλειαν, on account of our
neglect, 10.4, 11.
(d) of CoMPanisox: mapa τἄλλα ζῴα, compared with (hy the
side of) other aninats, X.M.1,4".
(c) with idea of beyoud or beside, And creept: οὐκ ἔστι παρὰ
ταῦτ᾽ ἄλλα, there are no otters besides ese, Ay. N68 ;
παρὰ τὸ» νόμον, contrary to the lew (properly beyond it).
In comp.: beside, aloug by, hitkerward, wrongly (beside the mark), over
(as i overstep).
1214. περί, around (on all sides), about (compare dpi).
1. with the Gexirive, who, coucerntny (at. de): περὶ πατρὸς
ἐρέσθαι, to inguire about his father, Od.3,77 ; δεδιὼς περὶ
αὐτοῦ, fearing concerning htm, VY. Pr.8208% Poetic (chiefly
epic) aburc, surpassing . κρατερὸς περὶ πάντων, mighty above
all, 711. 21, οὐ.
2. with the parive, abort, around, concerning, Of PLACE or
causn (ehiutly poetic) : ἔνδυνε περὶ στήθεσσι χιτῶνα, he put
on his tunte ahont his breast, 11.102) 5 ἔδδεισεν περὶ Meve-
haw, he feared for Monclaus, 11.10, 240; δείσαντες περὶ τῇ
χώρᾳ, through sear for our land, 'Y.1,74.
3. with the accusative (nearly the same as ἀμφί), about, near:
éotdpevat περὶ τοῖχον, lo stand aruund the wall, L118, 974 ;
περὶ 'Βλλήσποντον, abuul (ncn) the Hellespont, 39.8,9; περὶ
260 SYNTAX. [1215
τούτους τοὺς χρόνους, about these tines, ‘T.3,89; ὧν περὶ
ταῦτα, being about (engaged in) this, Ὁ. τ, 81.
In comy.: Gruund, about, exceedingly.
1215. πρό (.at. pro), with the GeNirive only, before:
(a) of νά; πρὸ θυρῶν, befure the dour, S. BL. 109,
()) of time: πρὸ δείπνου, before supper, X.C.5, 59%
(2) Of pernsce: μάχεσθαι mpd παίδων, to sight for their chil-
dren, 118,57 5 διακινδυνεύειν mpd βασιλέως, tu run risk in
behalf of the king, ¥.C.8, δι,
(4) Of Cloice Or PREFERENCE: κέρδος αἰνῆσαι πρὸ δίκας, to
approve craft before justice, Pind. Py.4, 140; πρὸ τούτον
τεθνάναι ἂν ἕλοιτο, Uefore this he would prefer death,
P, Sy. 1794,
in comp.: before, in defence of, forward.
1216. πρόφςΨ (Hom. also προτί or word), at or by (in front of).
1. with the Gexirive:
(a) in front of, looking tuwards: κεῖται πρὸς Θράκης, τέ lies
over against Thrace, 1),23,182. In swearing: πρὸς θεῶν,
berore (hy) the Gods. Sometimes pertaining tu (as char-
acter): ἦ κάρτα πρὸς γυναικός, surely it is very like ἃ woman,
AL Ag. 892,
(4) from (on the part of): τιμὴν πρὸς Anvds ἔχοντες, having
honor from Zeus, Od.11, 802. Sometimes with passive verbs
(like ὑπό), especially Ionic: ἀτιμάζεσθαι πρὸς lleowrpdrou,
to be dishonored hy Pisistratus, ἨᾺ. 1,06}, ἀδοξοῦνται πρὸς
τῶν πόλεων, they are held in contempt hy states, X.Oce.4, 2.
2. with the native:
(4) at: ἐπεὶ πρὸς Ἰαβυλῶνι ἣν ὁ Κῦρος, when Cyrus was at
Babylon, X.C.7, οὶ.
(1) in addition to: πρὸς τούτοις, besides this; πρὸς τοῖς ἄλλοις,
besides all the rest, ‘T.2,61.
3. with the accusaTIVE:
(a) to: εἶμ᾽ αὐτὴ πρὸς “Odvpror, 1 am going myself to Olym-
pus, 71.1, 420.
(b) towards: πρὸς Βορρᾶν, towards the North, 'T.6,2; (of
persons) πρὸς ἀλλήλους ἡσυχίαν εἶχον, they kept the peace
towards one another, 1.1, 51.
(ὦ with @ view to, according to: πρὸς τί με ταῦτ᾽ ἐρωτᾷς, (LO
what end) for what do you ask me this? Χ, ἢ, 11) πρὸς
τὴν παροῦσαν δύναμιν, according to their porwer at the lime,
D.15, 28.
In come.: te, towards, against, besides.
1217. σύν, older Attic ξύν (Lat. cum), with parive only, with,
ta company with, ov by aid of. Σύν is chiefly poetic; it
ΒΘ Δ} Oucurs in Attic prose except in Xenophon, μετὰ
with the genitive taking its place.
1219] USES OF TILE PREPOSITIONS. 261
(a) in company with: ἤλυθε σὺν Μενελάῳ, he came with Mene-
laus, 11.3, 206,
(δ) by aid of: σὺν θεῷ, with God’s help, 11.9, 49.
(c) in accordance with: σὺν δίκᾳ, with justice, Pind. Py.9, 96.
(d) sometimes instrumental (like simple dative): μέγαν πλοῦ-
τον ἐκτήσω ξὺν αἰχμῇ, thou didst gain great wealth by (with)
thy spear, A. Pe. 155.
In comp.: with, dugether, altogether.
1218. ὑπέρ (Hom. also ὑπείρ), over (Lat. super).
1, with the cenrrive;:
(a) οἵ PLACK: στῇ ὑπὲρ κεφαλῆς, tt stood over (hts) head,
11.2,20; of wotion over: ὑπὲρ θαλάσσης καὶ χθονὸς ποτωμέ-
vos (56, ἡμῖν), as we flit vver sea und land, ΔΑ. Ag. 516.
(b) for, in behalf of (opposed to κατά) ; θυόμενα ὑπὲρ τῆς
πόλεως, sucrificed in behalf of the city, X. AL 2,213; ὑπὲρ
πάντων ἀγών, a struggle sor vur all, A. Pe.405, Seme-
times with τοῦ and infin, like ἕνα with subj.: ὑπὲρ τοῦ τὰ
συνήθη μὴ γίγνεσθαι, to prevent what is customary from
being done, Aesch.3, 1.
(ὦ chiefly in the orators, concerning (like περί): τὴν ὑπὲρ
τοῦ πολέμου γνώμην ἔχοντας, having such an opinion about
the war, 1). 2,1,
2. with the accusaTive, over, beyond, exceeding: ὑπὲρ οὐδὸν
ἐβήσετο δώματος, he stepped over the threshold of the house,
0d.7,1385; ὑπεὶρ dda, over the sea, Od.3,75; ὑπὲρ τὸ βέλτι-
στον, beyond what is best, A. Ασ 18; ὑπὲρ δύναμιν, Leyond
its power, T.6,16.
In come. : over, above, beyond, in defence of, for the sake uf.
1219. ὑπό (Hom. also bral), under (Lat. sub), by.
1. with the GENITIVE:
(a) of rracus: τὰ ὑπὸ γῆς, things under the earth, P. Ap. 18%.
Sometimes from under (chiefly poetic): οὖς ὑπὸ χθονὸς ἧκε
φόωσδε, whom he sent to light from veneath the carth,
Hes. 7h. 669.
(Ὁ) to denote the aGent with passive verbs: εἴ τις ἐτιμᾶτο ὑπὸ
τοῦ δήμου, if any one was honored by the people, X. 11.2,3%,
(c) of causu: ὑπὸ δέους, through fear; ὑφ᾽ ἡδονῆς, through
pleasure ; ὑπ᾽ ἁπλοίας, Ly delention in port, ‘T.2, 85.
2. with the vative (especially poctic): τῶν ὑπὸ ποσσί, beneath
their fect, 11.2,784; τῶν θανόντων ὑπ᾽ ᾿Ιλίῳ, of those who
Sell under (the walls of) Ilium, Τὰ. [Tec.764 ; ὑπὸ τῇ axpo-
πόλι, under the acropolis, Hd. 6,105; of ὑπὸ βασιλεῖ ὄντες,
those who are under the king, X.C.8, 15,
3. with the accusaTIVE :
(a) of place, under, properly to (a pluce) under: ὑπὸ σπέος
ἥλασε μῆλα, he drives (drove) the sheep into (under) a cave,
202 SYNTAX. [1220
114,279; ἤλθεθ᾽ ὑπὸ Ὑροίην, you came to Troy (i.e. to
besiege it), Od. 4,146; τάδε πάντα ὑπὸ σφᾶς ποιεῖσθαι, to
bring all these under their suay, 'T.4, 60.
(0) of rime, tuwards (entering into): ὑπὸ νύκτα, at nightfall
(Lat. sub noetem), Ἔν ας 116. Sometimes at the time of,
during: ὑπὸ τὸν σεισμόν, at the time of the earthquake,
V2, 27,
In comp. : under (in place or rank), underhand, slightly, gradually
(like sub).
1220. (Improper Prepositions.) These are ἄνευ, ἄτερ, ἄχρι,
μέχρι, μεταξύ, ἕνεκα, πλήν, and ὡς (see 1500). All take the geui-
tive except ὡς, which takes the accusative. They are never used
in composition.
1. Gvev, without, except, apart from: Evev ἀκολούθου, without an
attendant, 1". Sy.2179; ἄνευ τοῦ καλὴν δόξαν ἐνεγκεῖν, apart from (Le-
sides) bringing good reputation, 1).18, 84.
2. ἄτερ, without, apart from (poetic): ἄτερ Φηνός, without (the
help of) Zeus, 11.15,202.
5. ἄχρι, τονε, as fiir ads: ἄχρι ris τελευτῆς, until the end, 18,
ἢ oo μέχρι, undl, as fur as: μέχρι τῆς πόλεως, as fur as the city,
ὃ. μεταξύ, between: μεταξὺ σοφίας καὶ ἀμαθίας, between wisdom aud
tgnorance, P. Sy. 2028,
G. ἕνεκα or ἕνεκεν (louie εἵνεκα, εἵνεκεν), on account of, for the sake
of (generally atter its noun): ὕβριος εἵνεκα τῆσδε, on wecunnt of thts
outrage, 1.1. 2143 μηδένα κολακεύειν ἕνεκα μισθοῦ, ἰὼ flutter ἢ one for a
reward, X. 1.5, 17, Alsy οὕνεκα (ot ἕνεκα) for ἕνεκα, chiefly in the
dramatists,
7. πλήν, except: πλήν Ὑ ἐμοῦ καὶ σοῦ, except myself and you,
5. £1,909,
8. ὡς, to, used with the accusative like efs, but only with personal
objects: ἀφίκετο ὡς Περδίκκαν καὶ és τὴν Χαλκιδικήν, he came to Per-
diccas and into Chaleidice, 1.4, 79.
1221. 1. In general, the accusative is the case used with prepo-
sitions to denote that towards which, aver which, along which, or
upon which motion takes place; the genitive, to denote that from
which anything proceeds; the dative, to denote that in which any-
thing takes place.
2. Ib will be noticed how the peculiar meaning of each case
often modifies the expression by which we translate a given prepo-
sition : thus παρά means near, hy the side of: and we have παρὰ τοῦ
βασιλέως, from the neighhorhood of the king; παρὰ τῷ βασιλεῖ,
in the neighborhood of the king? παρὰ τὸν βασιλέα, into the neigh-
borhuud of the king,
1220] USES OF ‘THE PREPOSITIONS. 263
1222. 1. The original adverbial use of the prepositions some-
times appears when they are used without a noun; this occurs
especially in the older Greek, seldom in Attic prose. Thus περί
round about or exceedingly, in Homer; and πρὸς δέ or καὶ πρύς,
and besides; ἐν δέ, and among them; ἐπὶ δέ, and upon this; μετὰ δέ,
and next; in Merodotus.
2, Lhe preposition of a compound verb may also stand sepa-
rately, in which case its adverbial force plainly appears; as ἐπὶ
κνέφας ἦλθεν (κνέφας ἐπῆλθεν), darkness came on, 11,4755 ἡμῖν ἀπὸ
λοιγὸν ἀμῦναι (ἀπαμῦναι), to ward off destruction from us, 14. 1,01.
This is called tmesis, and is found chiefly in Lloimer and the
early poets.
1223. A preposition sometimes follows its case, or a verb to
which it belongs; aS νεῶν dao, matdds πέρι; ὀλέσας ἄπο (for ἀπολέ-
σας), Od. 9,534. For the change of acceut (anastrophe), see 116, 1.
1224. N. A few prepositions are used adverbially, with a verb
(generally ἐστί) understood; as mapa for πάρεστι, ἔπι and μέτα
(iu Homer) for ἔπεστε and μέτεστι. So ἔνε for ἔνεστι, and poetic
ἄνα, up! for ἀνάστα (ἀνάστηθι). For the accent, see 116, 2.
1225. 1. Sometimes εἰς with the accusative, and ἐκ or ἀπό with
the genitive, are used in expressions which themselves imply no
motion, with reference to some motion implied or expressed in the
context; as at ξύνοδοι ἐς τὸ ἱερὸν ἐγίγνοντο, the synods were held
in the temple (lit. into the temple, involving the idea of going into the
temple to hold the synods), T.3,96; τοῖς ἐκ Πύλου ληφθεῖσι
(ἐοικότες), like those captured (in Pylos, and brought home) from
Pylos, i.e. the captives from Pylos, Ay. N.18G6; διήρπαστο καὶ αὐτὰ
τὰ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν ξύλα, even the very tinbers in the houses (lit.
Srom the houses) had been stolen, X.A.2, 2%.
2. So ἐν with the dative sometimes occurs with verbs of motion,
referring to rest which follows the motion; as ἐν τῷ ποταμῷ ἔπεσον,
they fell (into and remained) in the rirer, X.Ag.1,52: ἐν γούνασι
πῖπτε Διώνης, she fell on Dione’s knees, 115,370: see S. 12]. 1476.
These (Land 2) are instances of the so-called constructio prac qnamns.
1226. N. Adverbs of place are sometimes interchanged in the
same way (1225); as ὅποι καθέσταμεν, where we are standing, lit.
whither having come we are standing, 8.0.C.23; τίς ἀγνοεῖ τὸν
ἐκεῖθεν πόλεμον δεῦρο ἥξοντα; wha does not know that the war that
ws there will come hither? J).1,15.
So ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν, on this side and on thal, like ἐκ δεξιᾶς (a dextra),
on the right.
264 SYNTAX. (1227
1227. A preposition is often followed by its own case
when it is part of a compound verb. Lug.
ΠΑαρεκομίζοντο τὴν ᾿Ιταλίαν, they sailed along the coast of Italy,
T.6,44; ἐσηῆλθέ με, it occurred to me, Hd.7,46; ἐξελθέτω τις δωμά-
τῶν, lel some one come forth from the house, A. Ch. 663; gvvérpaccov
αὐτῷ ᾿Αμφισσῆς, Amphisseans assisted him, T.3,101. For other
examples of the genitive, see 1182; for those of the dative, see
1179.
ADVERBS.
1228. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, and other
adverbs. ΖΦ.
Οὕτως εἶπεν, thus he spoke; ὡς δύναμαι, as J am able; πρῶτον
ἀπῆλθε, he first went away; τὸ ἀληθῶς κακόν, that which is truly
evil; αὗταί σ᾽ ὁδηγήσουσι καὶ μάλ᾽ ἀσμένως, these will guide you even
most gladly, A. Pr. 728,
1229. N. For adjectives used as adverbs, see 926. For adverbs
preecded by the article, and qualifying a noun like adjectives, see 952.
For adverbs with the genitive or dative, see 1088; 1092; 1148, 1174;
1175, Sur adverbs used as prepositions, see 1220.
THE VERB.
VOICES.:
ACTIVE.
1230. In the active voice the subject is represented
as acting; as τρέπω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς, J turn my eyes ;
ὁ πατὴρ φιλεῖ τὸν παῖδα, the father loves the child; ὁ
δ ΄, Ld
ἵππος τρέχει, the horse runs.
1281. The form of the active voice includes most intransitive
verbs; as τρέχω, run. On the other hand, the form of the middle
or passive voice includes mauy deponent verbs which are active
and transitive in meauing; as βούλομαι τοῦτο, J want this. Some
transitive verbs have certain intransitive tenses, which generally
have the meaning of the middle voice, as ἕστηκα, J stand, ἔστην,
I stood, from toryps, place; others have a passive force, as ἀνέστη:
σαν ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ, (λον were driven out by him, T.1, 8.
1232. The same verb may be both transitive and intransitive;
1239] THE VERB.— VOICES. 265
as ἐλαύνω, drive (trans. or intrans.) or march; ἔχω, have, sometimes
hold or stay (as ἔχε δή, stay now, P. Pr. 349%); with adverbs, be, as
εὖ ἔχει, it is well, bene se habet. So πράττω, do, εὖ (or κακῶς)
πράττω, ] am well (or badly) off, J do well (or badly), ‘The intransi-
tive use sometimes arose from the omission of a familiar object;
as ἐλαύνειν (ἴππον or ἅρμα), to drive, τελευτᾶν (τὸν βίον), to end
(life) or to die. Compare the English verbs drive, turn, move, in-
crease, etc.
PASSIVE.
1233. Jn the passive voice the subject is represented
as acted upon; as ὁ παῖς ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς φιλεῖται, the
child is loved by the father.
1234. The object of the active becomes the subject
of the passive. ‘The subject of the active, the personal
agent, is generally expressed by ὑπό with the genitive
in the passive construction.
1235. ‘The dative here, as elsewhere, generally expresses
the inanimate instrument; as βάλλονται λίθοις, they are pelted
by stones.
1236. Even a genitive or dative depending on a verb in the
active voice can become the subject of the passive; as καταφρονεῖται
ta’ ἐμοῦ, he is despised by me (active, καταφρονῶ αὐτοῦ, 1102);
πιστεύεται ὑπὸ τῶν ἀρχομένων, he is trusted by his subjects (active,
πιστεύουσιν alta, 1160); ἄρχονται ὑπὸ βασιλέων, they are ruled by
kings (active, βασιλεῖς ἄρχουσιν αὐτῶν). Ὑπὸ ἀλλοφύλων μᾶλλον
ἐπεβουλεύοντο, they were more plotted against by men of other races,
T.1,2 (active, ἐπεβούλευον αὐτοῖς).
1287. N. Other prepositions than ὑπό with the genitive of the
agent, though used in poetry, are not coninon in Attic prose: such
are παρά, πρός, ἐκ. wnd ἀπό. (See 1209, c.)
1238. 1. The perfect aud pluperfect passive may have
the dative of the agent.
2. ‘Che personal verbal in -réos takes the dative (1596),
the impersonal in -τέον the dative or accusative, of the
agent (1597).
1239. When the active is followed by two accusatives,
or by an accusative of a thing and a dative of a person,
the case denoting a person is generally made the subject of
200 SYNTAX, {1240
the passive, and the other (an accusative) remains un-
changed. 2.9.
Οὐδὲν ἄλλο διδάσκεται ἄνθρωπος, a mun is taught nothing else
(in the active, οὐδὲν ἄλλο διδάσκουσι ἄνθρωπον), P. Men. 87%. “AAXo
τι μεῖζον ἐπιταχθήσεσθε, you will have some other greater command
amposed on you (active, ἄλλο τι μεῖζον ὑμῖν ἐπιτάξουσιν, they will
impose same other greater connnand on you), ‘V1, 140. Οἱ ἐπιτετραμ-
μένοι τὴν φυλακήν, those to whom the guard has been intrusted
(active, ἐπιτρέπειν τὴν φυλακὴν τούτοις), ‘1.1,126. Διφϑέραν
ἐνημμένος, clad in a leathern jerkin (achive, ἐνάπτειν τί τινι, to fit a
thing on one), Ay. N.72. So ἐκκόπτεσθαι τὸν ὀφθαλμόν, to have his
eye cut oul, aud ἀποτέμνεσθαι τὴν κεφαλήν, to have his head cut off,
etc, from possible active constructions ἐκκόπτειν τί τινι, atid ἀποτέ-
pve τί τινι. ‘Chis construction has nothing tu do with that of 1058.
The first lwo examples ave cases of the cognate accusative (1051)
of the ding retained with the passive, while the accusative or dative
of the persyn is made the suljeet.
1240, 1. A cognate accusative (1051) of the active form, or a
neuter pronoun or adjective representing such an accusative, may
become the subject of the passive. 2.9.
Ὁ κίνδυνος κινδυνεύεται, the risk is run (active, τὸν κίνδυνον κινδυ-
vevet, he runs the risk): sce P, Lach. 187%. Et οὐδὲν ἡμάρτηταί μοι, if
πὸ fault hus been committed by me (active, οὐδὲν ἡμάρτηκα), Aud. 1,33.
2. The passive may also be used impersonally, the cognate sub-
ject being implied in the verb itself; as ἐπειδὴ αὐτοῖς taper xed
agro, when preparation had been made, 1. 1,10; οὔτε ἠσέβηται οὔτε
ὡμολόγηται (se. ἐμοί), no sacrilege hus been done aud no confession
has been mady (by me), And. 1,71.
3. This oecurs chiefly in such neuter participial expressions as
τὰ σοὶ κἀμοὶ βεβιωμένα. the lives passed by you and by me, D.18,
205; αἱ τῶν πεπολιτευμένων εὔθυναι, the uccuInds of their public
aels, D.1,28: 80 τὰ Hoe Sypéva, the impivus acts which have heen
done; τὰ κινδυνευθέντα, the risks which were run; τὰ ἡμαρτης
μένα, the errors which have boen committed, ele. Even an intransitive
verb may thus have a passive voice.
1241. N. Some intransitive active forms are used as passives
of other verbs. ‘Thus εὖ ποιεῖν, to benefit, εὖ πάσχειν, to be benefited ;
εὖ λέγειν, to praise, εὖ ἀκούειν (poet. κλύειν), to be praised ; αἱρεῖν, to
capture, ἁλῶναι, to be captured; ἀποκτείνειν, to kill, ἀποθνήσκειν, (0
he killed; ἐκβάλλειν, lo cast out, ἐκπίπτειν, to he cast oul} διώκειν,
to prosecute, φεύγειν, to be prosecuted (ta be a defendant); ἀπολύων
to acquil, ἀποφεύγω, tu be acquitted.
1246] VOICES. 267
MIDDLE.
1242. In the middle voice the subject is represented
as acting upon himself, or in scme manner which cou-
cerns himself.
1. As acting on himself. 2g.
᾿Ἑτράποντο πρὸς ληστείαν, they turned themselves to piracy, 'T.1, 5.
So παύομαι, cease (stop one’s self), πείθεσθαι, trust (persuade one's
self), φαίνομαι, appear (show one's self). ‘This most natural use of
the middle is the least common,
2. As acting for himself or with reference to him-
self. Jig.
‘O δῆμος τίθεται νύμους, the people male laws for themselves,
whereas τίθησι νόμους would properly be said of a lawgiver; τοῦτον
μεταπέμπομαι, 1 send for him (to come to me); ἀπεπέμπετο αὐτούς,
he dismissed them; προβάλλεται τὴν ἀσπίδα, he holds his shield to
protect hanself.
3. As acting on an object belonging to himself. Bug.
Ἦλθε λυσόμενος θύγατρα, he came to ransom his (own) daughter,
11,18.
1248, N. The last two uses may be united in one verb, as in
the last example.
1244. N. Often the middle expresses no more than is tmplicd
in the active; thus τρόπαιον ἔστασθαι, to raise a trophy fur them-
selves, generally adds nothing but the expression to what is implied
in τρόπαιον ἱστάναι, to raise a Quphy; and either form can be
used, ‘The middle sometimes appears not to differ at all from the
active in meaning ; as the poetic ἰδέσθαι, tv see, and Weir.
1245. N. The middle sometimes has a causative meaning; as
ἐδιδαξάμην σε, 1 had you taught, Av N.1335; but ἐδιδαξάμην
means also 1 learned.
This gives rise to some special uses of the middle; as in δανείζω,
lend, δανείζομαι, borrow (cause somebody to lend to one's self); prada,
let, μισθοῦμαι, hire (cause to be let to ones self); 1 let myself for pay
is ἐμαυτὸν μισυθῶ. So τίνω, pay a penalty, τίνομας, punish (make
another puy a penalty).
1246. N. The middle of certain verbs is peculiar in its meaning.
Thus, αἱρῶ, take, αἱροῦμαι, choose ; ἀποδίδωμι, give back, ἀποδίδομαι,
sell; ἅπτω, fasten, ἅπτομαι, cliny 1 (fasten myself (0), so ἔχομαι, hold
to, both with genitive; γαμῶ τινα, marry (said of a man), yapodpat
268 SYNTAX. [1247
τίνι, marry (said of a woman); γράφω, write or propose a vole, ypado-
μαι, indict; τιμωρῶ τινι, I avenge a person, τιμωροῦμαί τινα, J avenge
myself on a person or I punish a person; φυλάττω τινά, 1 guard
some one, φυλάττομαί τινα, J am on my guard against some one.
1247. N. The passive of some of these verbs is used as a pas-
sive to both active and middle; thus γρὰ φῆναι can mean either
to be written or to be indicted, αἱρεθῆναι either to be taken or to be
chosen.
1248. N. The future middle of some verbs has a passive sense ;
as ἀδικῶ, I wrong, ἀδικήσομαι, I shall be wronged.
TENSES.
1249. The tenses may express two relations. They may desig-
nate the time of an action as present, past, or future; and also its
character as going on, as simply taking place, or as finished. The
latter relation appears iu all the moods and in the infinitive and
participle; the former appears always in the indicative, and to a
certain extent (hereafter to be explained) in some of the dependent
mods aud in the participle.
T. TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.
1250. The tenses of the indicative express action as
follows :—
1. Preseny, action going on in present time: γράφω, 1
am writing.
2. IMprnrect, action going on in past time: ἔγραφον,
I wus writing.
3. Prnevrcr, action finished in present time: γέγραφα, J
have written.
4. Puuverrercr, action finished in past time: éyeypddy,
1 had written.
5. Aonist, action simply taking place in past time:
ἔγραψα, I wrote.
6. Fururr, future action (either in its progress or in
its mere occurrence): γράψω, I shall write or I shall be
writing.
7. Future Perrect, action to be finished in future time:
γεγράψεται, it will have been written.
1257} TENSES. 269
1251. This is shown in the following table: —
ij
Present Time. | Past Time. Future Time.
|--- set
Action going
ai PRESENT ImPEerrecr Future
taking place
Action
finished
Penrecr PLUPeRrEecY Fur, Perrect
Action ane Aorist Future
7
J
For the present and the aorist expressing a general truth
(gnomic), see 1292.
1252. In narration, the present is sometimes used vividly
for the aorist. E.g.
Κελεύει πέμψαι ἄνδρας: ἀποστέλλουσιν οὖν, καὶ περὶ αὐτῶν ὁ
Θεμιστοκλῆς κρύφα πέμπει, he bids them send men: accordingly they
dispatch them, and Themistocles sends secretly about them, ‘l’.1, 91.
This is called the Historie Present.
1258, 1. The present often expresses a customary or repeated
action in present time; as οὗτος μὲν ὕδωρ, ἐγὼ δὲ οἶνον πίνω, he
drinks water, and I drink wine, D.19,46. (See 1292.)
2. The imperfect likewise may express customary or repeated
past action; as Σωκράτης ὥσπερ ἐγίγνωσκεν οὕτως ἔλεγε, as
Socrates thought, so he used to speak, X. M.1, 14.
1254. The present μέλλω, with the present or future (seldom
the aorist) infinitive, forms a periphrastic future, which sometimes
denotes intention or expectation; as μέλλει τοῦτο ποιεῖν (Or ποιή-
σειν), he is about to do this; εἰ μέλλει ἡ πολιτεία σῴζεσθαι, if the
constitution is to be saved, P. Rp.412.
1255. The present and especially the imperfect often express
an attempted action; as πείθουσιν ὑμᾶς, they are trying to persuade
you, Isae. 1,26; ᾿Αλόννησον ἐδίδουν, he offered (tried to give) THalon-
nesus, Aesch.3,83; ἃ ἐπράσσετο οὐκ ἐγένετο, what twas attempted
did not happen, Τ. 6,74.
1256, The presents ἥκω, 1 am come, and οἴχομαι, I am gone,
have the force of perfects; the imperfects having the force of
pluperfects.
1257. The present εἶμι, 7 am going, with its compounds, has a
future sense, and is used as a future of ἔρχομαι, ἐλεύσομαι not being
in good use in Attic prose. In Homer εἶμε is also present in sense.
270 SYNTAX. [1258
1258. The present with πάλαι or any other expression of past
time has the force of a present and perfect combined; as πάλαι
τοῦτο λέγω, f have lony been telling this (which 1 now tell).
1259. 1. The aorist takes its name (ἀόριστος, unlimited, unquali-
fied) from its denoting a simple past occurrence, with none of the
liinitations (ὅροι) as to completion, continuance, repetition, etc., which
belong to the other past tenses. It corresponds to the ordinary
preterite in English, whereas the Greck imperfect corresponds to
the forms / was doing, ete. Thus, ἐποίει τοῦτο is ke was doing this
or he did this habitually; πεποίηκε τοῦτο is he has already done
this; ἐπεποιήκει τοῦτο is he had already (at some past time) done
this; Nut ἐποίησε τοῦτο is simply he did this, without qualification
of any kind. ‘The aorist is therefore commonly used in rapid uar-
ration, the imperfect in detailed description. ‘he aorist is more
cominon in negative sentences.
2. As it is not always important to distinguish between the
progress of an action aud its aiere occurrence, it is occasionally
indifferent whether the imperfect or the aorist is used; compare
ἔλεγον in ‘T.1,72 (end) with εἶπον, ἔλεξαν, and ἔλεξε in 1,79. The
two tenses show different views (both nataral views) of the same
act of speaking.
1260. The aorist of verbs which denote a state or condition may
express the entrance info that, state or condition; as πλουτῶ, Tam
rich; ἐπλούτουν, 1 was rich; ἐπλούτησα, I became rich. So ἐβασί
λευσε, he became king ; ἦρξε, he wok office (also he held office).
1261, After ἐπεί and ἐπειδή, aficr that, the aorist is generally to
be translated by our pluperfect; as ἐπειδὴ ἀπῆλθον, after they had
departed. Compare postquam venit.
1262, N. ‘Lhe aorist (sometimes the perfect) participle with
ἔχω may form a periphrastic perfect, especially in Attic poetry; as
θαυμάσας ἔχω τόδε, T have wondered at this, 5. Ph.1362. ΠῚ prose,
ἔχω with a participle generally has its common force; a8 τὴν προῖκα
ἔχει λαβών, he has received and has the dowry (not simply ke has
tuken it), D. 27,17.
1263. N. Some perfects have a present meaning; as θνήσκειν,
to die, τεθνηκέναι, to be dead; γίγνεσθαι, to become, γεγονέναι,
to be; μιμνήσκειν, to remind, μεμνῆσθαι, to remember ; καλεῖν, to
call, κεκλῆσθαι, to he called. So οἶδα, J know, wovi, and many
others. This is usually explained by the meaning of the verb.
Tn such verbs the pluperfect has the foree of an imperfect; as
79y, 1 knew.
1270) TENSES. 271
1264, N. The perfect sometimes refers vividly to the future ;
as εἴ pe αἰσθήσεται, ὄλωλα, if he shall perceive me, 1 am ruined
(perii), 8.4.75. So sometimes the present, as ἀπόλλυμαι, 1 perish?
(for J shall perish), 112,14; and even the aorist, as ἀπωλόμην
εἴ με λείψεις, J perish Uf you leave me, Ἰὰ. AL 38b.
1265. N. The sceoud person of the future may express a per-
mission, OY OVEN a command ; as πράξεις οἷον ἂν θέλῃς, you may
aclas you please, 8. O.C. 93565 πάντως δὲ τοῦτο δράσεις, aud by all
means do this (you shall do this), Ave N.V352. So in imprecations 5
as ἀπολεῖσθε, ty destruction with you! (ik. you shall perish).
For the periphrastic future with μέλλω and the infinitive, see
1901.
1266, N. The future perfect is sometimes merely an emphatic
fulure, denoting that a Suture act will be dnamediate or decisive; as
φράζε. καὶ πεπράξεται, speak, aud it shull be (no sooner suid than)
doue, Av. PL 70:1. Compare the siunlar use of the perfect infini-
tive, 1275.
1267, 1. The division of the tenses of the indicative
into primary (or principal) and secundary (or historical)
is explained in 448.
2. In dependent clauses, when the construction allows
both subjunctive and optative, or both indicative and
yptative, the subjuuctive or indicative regularly fol-
lows primary tenses, and the optative follows second-
ary tenses. Ivy.
Wpdrrovaty ἃ ἂν βούλωνται, they lo whatever they please ;
ἔπραττον ἃ βούλοιντο, they did whatever they pleased. Λέγουσιεν
ore τοῦτο βούλονται, they say that they wish for this; ἔλεξαν ὅτι
τοῦτο βούλοιντο, they said that they wished far this.
These constructions will be explained hereafter (1131; 1487).
1268. N. ‘The gnuimic aorist is a primary tense, as it refers to
present tine (1202); and the historic present is secondary, as it
refers to past time (1252).
1269. ‘The only exception to this principle (1267, 2) occurs in
indirect discourse, where the form of the direct discourse can always
be retained, even after secondary tenses. (See 1481, 2).
1270, 1. The distinction of primary and secondary tenses ex-
lends to the dependent moods only where the tenses there keep the
saine distinetion of time which they have in the indicative, as in
the optative and infinitive of indirect discourse (1280).
272 SYNTAX. [1271
2. An optative of future time generally assimilates a dependent
conditional relative clause or protasis to the optative when it might
otherwise be in the subjunctive: thus we should generally have
πράττοιεν ἂν ἃ βούλοιντο, they would dv whatever they might please.
See 1439. Such an optative seldom assimilates the subjunctive or
indicative of a final or object clause (1362) in prose; but oftener in
poetry. It very rarely assimilates an indicative of indirect discourse,
although it may assimilate an interrogative suljunctive (1358).
II. TENSES OF THE DEPENDENT MOODS,
A. Norn Jxpirecr Discoursn.
1271. In the subjunctive and imperative, and also in
the optative and infinitive when they are not in indirect
discourse (1279), the tenses chiefly used are the present
and aorist.
1272. 1. These tenses here differ only in this, that the
present expresses an action in its duration, that is, as
going on or repeated, while the aorist expresses simply its
occurrence, the tine of both being otherwise precisely the
sume. E.g.
"Edy ποιῇ τοῦτο, if he shall be doing this, or if he shall do this
(habitually), ἐὰν ποιήσῃ τοῦτο, (simply) if he shall do this; et
ποιοίη Τοῦτο, if he should be doing this, or if he should do this
(habitually), εἰ ποιήσειε τοῦτο, (simply) if he should do this ; ποίει
τοῦτο, do this (habitually), ποίησον τοῦτο, (simply) do this. Οὕτω
νικήσαιμί τ᾿ ἐγὼ καὶ νομιζοίμην σοφός, on this condition may
4 gain the victory (aor.) and be thought (pres.) wise, Ar. N. 690,
Βούλεται τοῦτο ποιεῖν, he wishes w be doing this ov to do this (habit-
ually), βούλεται τοῦτο ποιῆσαι, (simply) ke wishes to do this.
2. This isa distinction entirely unknown to the Latin, which has
(for example) only one form, st faciat, corresponding to εἰ ποιοίη
and εἰ ποιήσειεν.
1273, The perfect, which seldom occurs in these con-
structions, represents an action as finished at the tine at
which the present would represent it as going on. E.g.
Δέδοικα μὴ λήθην πεποιήκη, I fear lest it may prove to have
caused forgetfulness (μὴ ποιῇ would mean lest it may cause), D.19,3.
Μηδενὶ βοηθεῖν ὃς ἂν μὴ πρότερος βεβοηθηκὼς ὑμῖν ἡ, to help no
une who shall not previously have helped you (ὃς ἂν μὴ... βοηθῇ
would mean who shall not previously help you), D.19,16. Οὐκ ἂν διὰ
1270] TENSES. 278
τοῦτό γ᾽ εἶεν οὐκ εὐθὺς δεδωκότες, they would not (on enquiry)
prove to have failed to pay immediately on this account (with διδοῖεν
this would mean they would not fail to pay), D.30,10. Οὐ Bovrev
εσθαι ἔτι apa, ἀλλὰ βεβουλεῦσθας, it ts no longer time to be
deliberating, but (it is time) to have finished deliberating, P. Cr. 46%.
1274. N. The perfect imperative generally expresses a command
that something shall be decisive and permanent ; as ταῦτα εἰρήσθω,
let this have been said (i.e. let what has been said be final), or let this
(which follows) be said once for all; μέχρι τοῦδε ὡρίσθω ὑμῶν ἡ
βραδυτής, at this point let the limit of your slugyishness be fixed, 'l.1,71.
‘This is confined to the third person singular passive; the rare
second person singular middle being merely emphatic. The active
is used only when the perfect has a present meaning (1263).
1275. N. The perfect infinitive sometimes expresses decision or
permanence (like the imperative, 1274), and sometimes it is merely
more emphatic than the present; as εἶπον τὴν θύραν κεκλεῖσθαι,
they ordered the gate to be shut (and kept sv), X.H.5, 41. “HAauvev
ἐπὶ τοὺς Μένωνος, ὥστ᾽ ἐκείνους ἐκπεπλῆχθαι καὶ τρέχειν ἐπὶ τὰ
ὅπλα, so that they were (once for all) thoroughly frightened and ran to
arms, X.A.1,5'%. The regular meaning of this tense, when it is
not in indirect discourse, is that given in 1273.
1276. The future infinitive is regularly used only to
represent the future indicative in indirect discourse (1280).
1277, It occurs occasionally in other constructions, in
place of the regular present or aorist, to make more
emphatic a future idea which the infinitive receives from
the context. Eig.
᾿Ἐδεήθησαν τῶν Μεγαρέων ναυσὶ σφᾶς ξυμπροπέμψειν, they
asked the Megariuns to escort them with ships, Τ. 1,27. Οὐκ ἀποκω-
λύσειν δυνατοὶ ὄντες, not being able to prevent, T.3,28. Jn all sueh
cases the future is strictly exceptional (see 1271).
1278. One regular exception to the principle just stated is
found in the periphrastic future (1254).
B. In Inptrect Discourse.
1279. The term indircet discourse includes all clauses depending
on a verb of saying or thinking which contain the thoughts or words
of any person stated indirectly, i.e. incorporated into the general
structure of the sentence. It ineludes of course all indirect quota-
tions and questions.
274 SYNTAX, [1280
1280, When the optative and infinitive stand in indireet
discourse, each tense represents the corresponding tense of
“the same verb in the direct discourse. Eg.
Ἔλεγεν ὅτι γράφοι, he said that he was writing (he said γράφω,
Lam writing); ἔλεγεν ὅτι γράψοι, he said that he would twrite (he
said γράψω, 1 will write); ἔλεγεν ὅτι γράψειεν, he said that he had
written (he said ἔγραψαν); ἔλεγεν ὅτι γεγραφὼς εἴη, he said that
he had already written (he said γέγραφα). “Hpcro εἴ τις ἐμοῦ ein
σοφώτερος, he asked whether any one was wiser than 1 (he asked ἔστι
τις })ν Pi Ap. 2d
Φησὶ γράφειν, he says thai he is writing (he says γράφω); φησὶ
γράψειν, he says that he will write (γράψω) ; φησὶ γράψαι, he says
that he wrote (ἔγραψα); φησὶ yeypadevas, he says that he has
written (γέγραφα). For the participle, see 1288.
Kiev ὅτι ἄνδρα ἄγοι ὃν εἶρξαι δέοι, he said that he was bringing a
man whom it was necessary to confine (he said ἄνδρα ἄγω ὃν εἶρξαι
δεῖ), X. 17.5, 48 "EdoyZovro ὡς, εἰ μὴ μάχοιντο. ATOTT YT OLVTO
αἱ πόλεις, they considered that, if they should not fight, the cities would
revalt (they Ghought ἐὰν μὴ μαχώμεθα, ἀποστήσονται, if we do
not fight, hey will revalt), hid. G, 4%
1281. N. These constructions are explained in 1487, 1494, and
1497. Here they merely show the foree of the tenses in indirect
disconrse. Compare especially the difference between φησὶ ypa-
gecv and φησὶ γράψαι above with that between βούλεται ποιεῖν
and βούλεται ποιῆσαι under 1272. Notice also the same distine-
tion in the present and aorist optative.
1282. N. The construction of 1280 is the strictly proper use of
the future infinitive (1276; 1277).
1283. N. The future perfect infinitive is occasionally used
here, to express future completion ; as νομίζετε ἐν τήδε τῇ ἡμέρᾳ
ἐμὲ κατακεκόψεσθαι, heliene that on that day 1 shall have heen
already (ic. shall he the same as) cut in pieces, ἽΝ. “1.1, 51%
1284. N. The futnre perfect. participle very rarely occurs in a
similar sense (see 'T.7, 25).
1285. 1. The present infinitive may represent the ΠΗ ΟΡ ΛΟ as
woll as the present indicative; as τίνας εὐχὰς ὑπολαμβάνετ᾽ εὖχε-
σθαι τὸν Φιλιππον ὅτ᾽ ἔσπενδεν j what proyers do you suppose Philip
made when he was pauring libations? (i.c. τίνας ηὔχετο), D.19, 180.
The perfect infinitive likewise represents both perfect and pluper-
fect. In such eases the time of the infinitive must always be
shown by the context (as above by ὅτ᾽ ἔσπενδεν). See 1289.
2, For the present optative representing the imperfect, see 1488.
1289} TENSES. 275
1286. Verbs of hoping, expecting, promising, swearing, and a few
others, form au intermediate class between verbs which take the
infinitive iu tudirect discourse and those which do not (see 1279);
and though they regularly have the future infinitive (1286), the
present and aorist are allowed. Fug.
*HAm{or μάχην ἔσεσθαι, they expeeted that there would be a
patie, T.4,71; but ἃ οὔποτε ἤλπισεν παθεῖν, what he never expected
tw suffer, KIL P74. Xenophou bas ὑπέσχετο μηχανὴν παρέξειν,
Ο. ὁ, 151, and also ὑπέσχετο βουλεύσασθαι, 4.2,3%. ᾽Ομόσαντες
ταύταις ἐμμὲεν εἶν, hucing sworn to abide by these, Ἀ. 1.0, 996. but
ὀμόσαι εἶναι μὲν τὴν ἀρχὴν κοινὴν, πάντας δ᾽ ὑμῖν ἀποδοῦναι τὴν
Χχιώραν, (0 swear that the government should be common, but that all
should give up the land to you, Y.23, 170.
Ju English we can say J hope (etpeet or promise) to do this, like
ποιεῖν or ποιῆσαι; or 1 haope 1 shall do this, like ποιήσειν.
1287. N. The future optative is never used except as the
representative of the future indicative, either in indirect discourse
(see }280), or in the construction of 1872 (whieh is governed by
the principles of indirect discourse). Even in these the future
indicative is generally retained. See also 1500.
WW. TENSES OF THE PARTICIPLE.
1288, ‘The tenses of the participle generally express the
siune time as those of the indicative; but they are present,
past, or future relutively to the time of the verb with which
they are counected. 2.9.
‘ApapTavet τοῦτο ποιῶν, he errs in doing this: ἡμάρτανε τοῦτο
ποιῶν, he erred in doing this; ἁμαρτήσεται τοῦτο ποιῶν, he will
err in doy this, (Here ποιῶν is first present, then past, then
future, absolutely; but always present to the verb of the scutenee.)
So in indirect discomse: οἶδα τοῦτον γράφοντα (γράψαντα,
γράψοντα, or yeypuddta), 1 know that ke is writing (that he
wrote, will write, ov has writlen). Οὐ πολλοὶ φαίνονται ἐλθόντες,
nol many appear to have gone (on the expedition), V.1,1G. (For
other examples, see 1488.)
Ταῦτα εἰπόντες, ἀπῆλθον, having said this, they departed. Ἔπῃ-
νεσαν τοὺς εἰρηκότας, they praised those who had (already) spoken.
Touro ποιήσων ἔρχεται, he is coming to do this; τοῦτο ποιήσων
ἦλθεν, he came to do this. Απελθε ταῦτα λαβών, take this and be aff
(λαβών Ucing past to ἄπελθε, but absolutely future).
1289. ‘The present may here also represent the imperfect; as
276 SYNTAX. [1290
οἶδα κἀκείνω σω φρονοῦντε, ἔστε Σωκράτει συνήστην, I know that
they both were temperate as long as they associated with Socrates (1.6.
ἐσωφρονείτηνν, X.M.1,2!8 (See 1285.)
1290. N. ‘The aorist participle in certain coustructions (gen-
erally with a verb in the aorist} does not denote time past with
reference to the leading verb, but expresses time coiucident with
that of the verb. See examples in 1563, δ; 1585; 1086. See Greek
foods, §§ 144-150.
IV. GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES.
1291. The present is the tense commonly used in
Greek, as in English, to denote a general truth or an
habitual action. Eg.
Τίκτει τοι κόρος ὕβριν, ὅταν κακῷ ὄλβος ἕπηται, satiety begets
tmsolence, whenever prosperity follows the wicked, Theog. 1 50.
1292. In animated language the aorist is used in this
sense. This is called the gnomie aorist, and is generally
translated by the English present. Ey.
"Hy τις τούτων τι παραβαίνῃ, ζημίαν αὐτοῖς ἐπέθεσα ν, Le. they
impose a penally on all who ansgress, X.C.1,2% Me ἡμέρα τὸν
μὲν καθεῖλεν ὑψόθεν, τὸν δ᾽ Hp ἄνω, one day (uften) brings down
one man from a height and raises another high, LE. frag.424.
1293. N. Here one case in past time is vividly used to repre-
sent all possible cases. Examples containing such adverbs as
πολλάκις, often, ἤδη, already, οὔπω, never yet, illustrate the construc-
tion; as ἀθυμοῦντες ἄνδρες οὕπω τρόπαιον ἔστησαν, disheartened
men never yet raised (1.6. never raise) a trophy, P. Critias, 108*.
1294. N. An aorist resembling the guomic is found in Homeric
similes; as ἤριπε δ᾽ ὡς ὅτε tis δρῦς ἥριπεν, and he fell, as when
some oak falls (lit. as when an oak once fell), 11.13, 80.
1295, The perfect is sometimes gnomic, like the aorist.
Evy.
Τὸ δὲ μὴ ἐμποδὼν ἀνανταγωνίστῳ εὐνοίᾳ τετίμηται, bul those who
are not before men's eyes are honored with a good will which has no
rivalry, ‘T.2,45.
1296. The imperfect and aorist are sometimes used with
the adverb ἄν to denote a customary action. E.g.
Διηρώτων ἂν αὐτοὺς τί λέγοιεν, 1 used to ask them (I would
often ask them) what they suid, P. Ap.22% Πολλάκις ἠκούσαμεν
ἂν ὑμᾶς, we used often to hear you, Ar. Lys.511.
1303] THE PARTICLE “AN, 277
1297. N. This iterative construction must be distinguished
from that of the potential indicative with dy (1835). It is equiva
lent to our phrase he would often do this for he used to do this.
1298. N. ‘The Ionic has iterative forms in -cxov and -σκομὴν
in both imperfect and aorist. (See 778.) Herodotus uses these
also with ay, as above (1296).
THE PARTICLE "AN.
1299. The adverb ἄν (epic κέ, Doric κά) has two
distinct uses.
1. It may be joined to all the secondary tenses of the
indicative (iu Homer also to the future indicative),
and to the optative, infinitive, or participle, to denote
that the action of the verb is dependent on sume cir-
cumstances or condition, expressed or implied. Here
it belongs strictly to the verb.
2. It is joined regularly to εἰ, if, to all relative and
temporal words, and sometimes to the final particles ws,
ὅπως, and ὄφρα, when these are followed by the sub-
junctive. Here, although as an adverb it qualifies the
verb, it is always closely attached to the particle or
relative, with which it often forms one word, as in ἐάν,
ὅταν, ἐπειδάν.
1800. N. There is no English word which can translate ἄν.
In its first use it is expressed in the would or should of the verb
(βούλοιτο ἄν, he would wish; ἑλοίμην ἄν, ἰ should chouse). In its
second use it generally has no foree which can be made apparent
in English. ;
1301. N. The following sections (1302-1309) enmnerate the
various uses of av: when these are explained more fully elsewhere,
reference is made to the proper sections.
1802. The present and perfect indicative never take ἄν.
1303. ‘The future indicative sometimes takes dy (or κέ)
in the early poets, especially Homer; very rarely in Attic
Greek. Eg.
Kad κέ τις ὧδ᾽ ἐρέει, and some one will (or may) thus speak, 11.4,
176; ἄλλοι of κέ με τιμήσουσι, others who will (perchance) honor me,
218 SYNTAX, (1304
141,174. The future with ἄν seems to be an intermediate form
between the simple future, wild donor, and the optative with dy,
would honor, One of the few examples in Attic prose is in
Pp. Ap. 20.
1304. 1. ‘The past tenses of the indicative (generally
the imperfect or aorist) are used with ἄν in a potential
sense (1335), or in the apodosis of an unfulfilled condition
(1897). Eig.
Οὐδὲν ἂν κακὸν ἐποίησαν, they could (or would) have done no
harm; ἦλθεν ἂν εἰ ἐκέλευσα, he would have come if 1 had conomanded
him,
2. ‘The imperfect and aorist indicative with ἄν may also
have an iterttive sense. (See 1296.)
1305. 1. In Attic Greck the subjunctive is used with ὧν
only in the dependent constructions mentioned in 1299, 2,
where ἄν is attached to the introductory particle or relative
word.
See 1367 ; 1876; 1382; 1428, 2.
2. In epic poetry, where the independent subjunctive
often has the sense of the tuture indicative (1355), it may
take κέ or dy, like the future (1500). Eg.
Ei δέ κε μὴ δώῃσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι, and if he does not
give her up, 1 will take her myself, 11.1, 324.
1306. The optative with ἄν has a potential sense
(1327), aud it often forms the apodosis of a condition
expressed by the optative with εἰ, denoting what would
happen if the condition should be fulfilled (1408).
1307. N. The future optative is never used with ἄν (1287).
1308. 1. The present and aorist (rarely the perfect)
infinitive and participle with dv yepresent the indicative
or optative with ἄν; each tense being equivalent to the
corresponding tense of one of these moods with dv, — the
present representing also the imperfect, aud the perfect also
the pluperfect (1285 ; 1289).
2. Thus the present infinitive or participle with ἄν may
represent either an imperfect indicative or a present opta-
tive with dy; the aorist, citler an aorist indicative or an
1311] TUE PARTICLE “AX. 270
aorist optative with ἄν; the perfect, either a pluperfect
indicative or a perfect optative with ἄν. Εἰ.
(Pres.) Φησὶν αὐτοὺς ἐλευθέρους ἂν εἶναι, εἰ τοῦτο ἔπρα ξαν, he
says that they would (now) be free (ἦσαν av), 7 they had done this;
noiv αὐτοὺς ἐλευθέρους ἂν εἶναι, εἰ τοῦτο πράξειαν, he says that
they would (hereafter) he free (dev ἂν), if they should do this. Οἶδα
αὐτοὺς ἐλευθέρους ἂν ὄντας, εἰ τοῦτο ἔπραξαν, I know that they
would (now) be free (ἦσαν ἄν), if they had done this; οἶδα αὐτοὺς
ἐλευθέρους ἂν ὄντας, εἰ ταῦτα πράξειαν, I know that they would
(hereafter) be free (εἶεν dv), if they should do this. Πολλ᾽ ἂν ἔχων
ἕτερ᾽ εἰπεῖν, although I might (= ἔχοιμι dv) say many other things,
D.18, 258.
(Aor.) Φασὶν αὐτὸν ἐλθεῖν ἂν (or οἶδα αὐτὸν ἐλθόντα av), εἰ
τοῦτο ἐγένετο, they say (or 1 know) that he would have come (ἦλθεν
av), if this had happened; φασὶν αὐτὸν ἐλθεῖν ἂν (or οἶδα αὐτὸν
ἐλθόντα Gv), εἰ τοῦτο γένοιτο, they say (ar I Lnow) that he would
come (ἔλθοι div), if this shorded happen. 'Ῥαδίως ἂν ἀφεθεὶς, mpoct
Aero ἀποθανεῖν, whereas he might easily have been acquitted (ἀφείθη
dv), he preferred ty die, X. MAAS
(Perf) Et μὴ tas ἀρετὰς ἐκείνας παρέσχοντο, πάντα ταῦθ᾽ ὑπὸ τῶν
βαρβάρων ἂν ἑαλωκέναι (φήσειεν ἂν τις), had they not exhibiied
those exploits of valor, we might say that all this would have been cap-
tured by the lurhariaus (ἑαλώκες av), 1).19,312. Οὐκ dv ἡγοῦμαι
αὐτοὺς δίκην ἀξίαν δεδωκέναι, εἰ αὐτῶν καταψηφίσαισθε, Γ do not think
they tcaudd (then, in the future, proce to) have suffered proper punish
ment (δεδωκότες ἂν dev), if you should condemn them, 1.27, 9.
The context must decide in each case whether we have the equiva.
Jent of the judicative or of the optative with ἄν. Jn the examples
given, the form of the protasis generally settles the question.
1309. ‘The infinitive with dy is used chiefy in indirect dis-
course (144); bat the participle with ἄν is more common in other
coustructions (see examples above).
As the early poets who use the future indicative with av (1303)
seldom use this consirnetion, the future infinitive and participle
with ay are very rare.
1310. When dy is used with the subjunctive (as in
1299, 2), it is generally separated from the introductory
word only by monosyllabic particles like μέν, δέ, τέ, yap, ote.
1311. When ἄν is used with the indicative or optative, or in
any other potential construction, it may either be placed next to
its νον], or be attached to some other emphatic word (as a nega-
280 SYNTAX. £1812
tive or interrogative, or au important adverb); as τάχιστ᾽ dv τε
πόλιν οἱ τοιοῦτοι ἑτέρους πείσαντες ἀπολέσειαν, Such men, if they
shuuld get others to follow them, would very soon destroy a state,
T.2,63.
1312. In a long apodosis dy may be used twice or even
three times with the same verb. Εἰ.
Οὐκ ἂν ἡγεῖσθ' αὐτὸν κἂν ἐπιδραμεῖν; do you not think that he
would even have rushed thither? D.27,56. In 11.3.41, dy is used
three times with παρέχεσθαι.
1313. “Avy may be used elliptically with a verb under-
stood. Εἰ.
Ob οἰκέται ῥέγκουσιν: ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἂν πρὸ τοῦ (sc. Eppeyxor), the
slaves are snoring; but in old times they wouldn't have done so,
Ar.N.5. So in φοβούμενος ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ παῖς, fearing like a child
(ὥσπερ ἂν ἐφοβεῖτο εἰ παῖς ἦν), P.G. 479%.
1814, When an apodosis consists of several co-ordinate
verbs, ἄν generally stands only with the first. 2.0.
Οὐδὲν ἂν διάφορον τοῦ ἑτέρου ποιοῖ, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ ταὐτὸν ἴοιεν ἀμφό-
τεέροι, he would do nothing different from the other, but both would ain
at the same object (ἄν belongs also to ἴοιεν), P. Rp. 360%.
1815. “Av never begius a sentence or a clause.
1816. N. The adverb τάχα, quickly, soon, readily, is often pre-
fixed to ἄν, in which case τάχ᾽ ἄν is nearly equivalent to ἴσως,
perhaps. The ἄν here always belongs in its regular sense (1299,1)
to the verb of the sentence; as τάχ᾽ ἂν ἔλθοι, perhaps he would
come; τάχ᾽ ἂν ἦλθεν, perhaps he would (or might) have come.
THE MOODS.
1317. The indicative is used in simple, absolute asser-
tions, and in questions which include or concern such
assertions; us γράφει, he writes; ἔγραψεν, he wrote ;
γράψει, he will write; γέγραφεν, he has written; τί
éypawere ; what did you write? ἔγραψε τοῦτο ; did he
write this ?
1318. The indicative has a tense to express every variety
of time which is recognized by the Greek verb, and thus
it can state a supposition as well as make an assertion
in the past, present, or future. It also expresses certain
1322) THE MUODS. 281
other relations which in other languages (as in Latin) are
generally expressed by a different mood. The following
examples will illustrate these uses : —
Εἰ τοῦτο ἀληθές ἐστι, χαίρω, if this is true, I rejoice (1390); εἰ
ἔγραψεν, ἦλθον ἄν, if he had written, 1 should have come (1397);
εἰ γράψει, γνώσομαι, if he shall write (or tf he writes), 1 shall know
(1405). ᾿Ἐπιμελεῖται ὅπως τοῦτο γενήσεται, he takes care that this
shall happen (1372). Aéyet dre τοῦτο ποιεῖ, he says that he is duing
this; sometimes, εἶπεν ὅτι τοῦτο ποιεῖ, he said that he was doing this (he
said ποιῶ). (1487.) Εἴθε pe ἔκτεινας, ὡς μήποτε τοῦτο ἐποίησα,
O that thou hadst killed me, that 1 might never have done this! (1511;
1371). Εἴθε τοῦτο ἀληθὲς ἦν, O that this were true! (1511).
1319. N. These constructions are explained in the sections
referred to. Their variety shows the impossibility of including
all the actual uses even of the indicative under any single funda
mental idea.
1320. The various uses of the subjunctive are shown
by the following examples : —
Ἴωμεν, let us go (1844). My θαυμάσητε, do not wonder
(1846). Τί εἴπω; what shall J say? (1358). Οὐ μὴ τοῦτο γένηται,
this (surely) will not happen (1360). Οὐδὲ ἴδωμαι (Llomeric), nor
shall I see (1355).
Ἔρχεται ἵνα τοῦτο (dn, he is coming that he may see this (1365) ;
φοβεῖται μὴ τοῦτο γένηται, he fears lest this may happen (1378).
᾿Εὰν ἔλθῃ, τοῦτο ποιήσω, if he comes (or if he shall come), 1 shall do
this (1403); ἐάν τις ἔλθη, τοῦτο ποιῶ, Uf any one (ener) comes, 1
(always) do this (1393, 1). Ὅταν ἔλ θη, τοῦτο ποιήσω, when he comes
(or when he shall come), I shall do this (1434); ὅταν τις ἔλθῃ,
τοῦτο ποιῶ, when any one comes, T (always) do this (1431, 1).
1321. N. The subjunctive, in its simplest aud apparently most.
primitive use, expresses simple futurity, like the future indicative ;
this is seen in the Homeric independent construction, ἴδωμαι, ἢ
shall see; εἴπῃσί τις, one will say. Then, in exhortations and pro-
hibitions it is still future; as ἴωμεν, let us yo; μὴ ποιήσητε τοῦτο,
do not do this. In final and object clauses it expresses a future
purpose or a future object of fear. In conditional and conditional
relative sentences it expresses a future supposition; except in
general conditions, where it is indefinite (but never strictly pres-
ent) in its time.
1322. The various uses of the optative are shown by
the following examples : —
282 SYNTAX. [1828
Εὐτυχοίης, may you be fortunute; μὴ γένοιτο, may it not be
dune; εἴθε μὴ ἀπόλοιντο, O thal (μὸν may not perish (1507).
Ἕλθοι ἄν, he may yo, or ke might go (1827). .
Ἦλθεν ἵνα τοῦτο (Sou he cume that he might see dis (1365);
ἐφοβεῖτο μὴ τοῦτο γένοιτο, he feared lest His should happon (1378).
"ἔλθοι, τοῦτ᾽ ἂν ποιήσαιμι, if he should come, 1 should do Uus
(1405); εἴ τις ἔλθοι, τοῦτ᾽ ἐποίουν, if any one (ecer) cane, I
(always) did this (1303,2). Ὅτε ἔλθοι, τοῦτ᾽ ἂν ποιήσαιμι,
whenever he shyuld come (al any tine when he should come), 1 should
do this (1430); ὅτε τις ἔλθοι, τοῦτ᾽ ἐποίουν, wheneeey any one came,
1 (always) did this (1431, 2). ᾿Ἐπεμελεῖτο ὕπως τοῦτο γενήσοιτο,
he took care that Ueis should happen (1312). Edney ὅτι τοῦτο ποιοίη
(ποιήσοι οἱ ποιήσειε), he suid that he was doiny (would do ov had
done) this (1487).
1823. N. The optative in qmany of ils uses is a vaguer and
less distinct form of expression than the subjuuctive, indicative,
or imperative, in constructions of the same general character.
This appears especially in its independent uses; as in the Homeric
Ἑλένην ἄγοιτο, he may take Helen away, 14,19 (see γυναῖκα
ἀγέσθω, 1.3, 72, referring to the same thing, aud καί ποτέ τις
εἴπῃσεν, and sometime one will say, 105, above); tomer, way we
go (cf. ἴωμεν, let us yo); μὴ γένοιτο, may it not happen (οἴ. μὴ
γένηταε, let it not happen); ἕλοιτο ἄν (Jlom. sometimes ἕλοιτο aloue),
he wowd take (ef. Hom. ἕληται sonictimes while κέ, ke will take).
So in future conditions; as εἰ γένοιτο, if it should happen (cf. ἐὰν
γένηται, if it shall happen). Vu other dependent clauses it is gen-
erally a correlative of the subjunctive, sometimes of the Indicative;
here it represents a dependent subjunctive or indicative in its
changed relation when the verb on which it depends is changed
from present or future to past time. The same change in relation
is expressed in Euglish by a change from shall, wil, may, da, ts,
etc. to should, would, might. did, was, ele. To iustrate these last
relations, compare ἔρχεται ἵνα iby, φοβεῖται μὴ γένηται, ἐάν τις ἔλθη
τοῦτο ποιῶ, ἐπιμελεῖται ὅπως τοῦτο γενήσεται, αν} λέγει ὅτι τοῦτο
ποιεῖ, With the corresponding forms after past leading verbs given
in 1822.
For a discussion of the whole relation of the optative to the
subjunctive and the other moods, and of the original meaning of
the subjunctive and optative, see Afoods and Teuses, pp. 871-380.
1324. The imperative is used to express commands
and prohibitions; as τοῦτο ποίει, do this; μὴ φεύγετε,
do not fly.
1327] : THE MOODS. 283
1325. The infinitive, which is a verbal noun, and the
participle and the verbal in -réos, which are verbal adjec-
tives, are closely connected with the moods of the verb in
many constructions,
1326. ‘The following seetions (1327-1515) treat of all
constructions which require any other form of the finite
verb than the indicative in simple assertions and questions
(1817). The infinitive and participle are included here
so fur as cither of them is used in indirect discourse, in
protasis or apodosis, or after ὥστε (ὡς, ἐφ᾽ ᾧ or ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε) and
mpw. These constructions are divided as follows : —
. Potential Optative and Indicative with dy.
I}. Imperative and Subjunetive in commands, exhorta
tions, and prohibitions. —Subjunetive and Indica-
tive with μή or μὴ οὐ in cautious Assertions. --- Ὅπως
and ὅπως μή with the independent Future Indicative.
III. Independent Homeric Subjunctive, like Future Jn-
dicative. —Interrogative Subjunctive.
IV. Οὐ μή with Subjunctive and Future Indicative.
V. Final and Object Clauses with ἕνα, ὡς; ὅπως, ὄφρα,
and μή.
VI. Conditional Sentences.
VIL. Relative and Temporal Sentences, including consecu-
tive sentences with ὥστε cte.
VITI. Indirect Discourse or Oratio Obliqua.
1X. Causal Sentences.
X. Expressions of ἃ Wish.
1. POTENTIAL OPTATIVE AND INDICATIVE WITH ay.
POTENTIAL OPTATIVE.
1327. The optative with dy expresses a future action as
dependent on circumstances or conditions. Thus ἔλθοι ἂν
is he may go, he might (could or would) go, or he would be
likely to go, as opposed to an absolute statement like he will
go. Lg.
Ἔτι γάρ κεν ἀλύξαιμεν κακὸν ἦμαρ, for (perhaps) we may καὶ
escape the evil day, Od.10,269. Πᾶν γὰρ ἂν πύθοιό μου, for you
284 SYNTAX. [1328
can learn anything you please from me, A.Pr.617. Τί τόνδ᾽ ἂν
εἴποις ἄλλο; what else could you say of this man? §.An.646. Οὐκ
ἂν λει φθείην, 1 would not be left behind (in any case), d.4,97.
Ais ἐς τὸν αὐτὸν ποταμὸν οὐκ ἂν ἐμ Bains, you cannot (could not)
step twice into the same river, 1). (ται. 4095, Ἡδέως ἂν ἐροίμην
Λεπτίνην, I would gladly ask (I should like to ask) Leptines, D.20,
129. Ποῖ οὖν τραποίμεθ᾽ ἂν ἔτι; in what other direction can we
(could we) possibly turn? P.J/u.290%. So βουλοίμην ἄν, velim, [
should like: cf. ἐβουλόμην av, vellem (1339).
1328. The optative thus used is called potential, and corre-
sponds generally to the Euglish potential forms with may, can,
might, could, would, etc. It is equivalent to the Latin potential
subjunctive, as dicas, credas, cernas, putes, etc., you may say, believe,
perceive, think, etc. The limiting condition is generally too indefi-
nite to be distinctly present to the mind, and can be expressed
only by words like perhaps, possibly, or probably, or by such vague
forms as if he pleased, if he should try, if he could, if there should be
an opportunity, etc. Sometimes a general condition, like in any
possible case, is felt to be implied, so that the optative with ap
hardly differs from an absolute future; as in οὐκ dv μεθείμην
τοῦ θρόνου, 1 mill not (would never) give up the throne, Ar. R880.
See the examples in 1330.
1329. ‘The potential optative can express every degree
of potentiality from the almost absolute future of the last
example to the apodosis of a future condition expressed by
the optative with εἰ (1408), where the form of the condi-
tion is assimilated to that of the conclusion, The inter-
mediate steps may be seen in the following examples : —
Οὐκ ἂν δικαίως ἐς κακὸν πέσοιμί τι, 1 could not justly fall into
any (rouble, 8. An. 240, where δικαίως puints to the condition if jus-
tice should be done. Οὔτε ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἡ δύνανται φέρειν " διαρ-
ραγεῖεν γὰρ ἄν, nor do they eat more than they can carry, for (if
they did) they would burst, X.C.8,27, where εἰ ἐσθίοιεν is implied
by the former clause.
1830. N. The potential optative of the second person may
express a mild command or exhortation; as ywpots ἂν εἴσω, you
may go in, or go in, 5. Ph.674; κλύοις ἂν ἤδη, hear me now, 5. El.637.
See 1328.
1331. N. The potential optative may express what may here-
after prove to be true or to have been true; as ἡ ἐμὴ (σοφία)
φαύλῃ τις ἂν εἴη, my wisdom may turn out to be of a mean kind,
1337] THE MOODS, 285
Pp. Sy.175*; ποῦ δῆτ᾽ ἂν εἶεν οἱ ξένοι; where may the strangers be?
(ie. where is i likely to prove that they are)? S. El.1450; εἴησαν δ᾽
ἂν οὗτοι Κρῆτες, and these would probably prove to be (or to have been)
Cretans, Hd.1,2; αὗται δὲ οὐκ ἂν πολλαὶ εἴησαν, and these (the
islands) would not prove to be many, T.1,9.
1332, N. Occasionally ἄν is omitted with the potential optative,
chiefly in Homer; as ov τι xaxwrepov ἄλλο πάθοιμι, I could suffer
nothing else that is worse, 1.19, 321.
1333. N. The Attic poets sometimes omit dv after such indef-
nite expressions as ἔστιν ὅστις, ἔστιν ὅπως, ἔστιν ὅποι, etc.; as ἔστ᾽
οὖν ὅπως “AAkyotis ἐς γῆρας μόλοι; is it possible then that Alcestis
can come lo old aye? 15. Al.52; so 113, and A. Pr.292,
1334. N. For the potential optative in Homer referring to
past time, see 1399.
POTENTIAL INDICATIVE.
1335. The past tenses of the indicative with dv express
a past action as dependent on past circumstances or condi-
tions. ‘Thus, while ἦλθεν means he went, ἦλθεν dv means he
would have gone (under sone past circumstances).
1336. This is called the potential indicative; and it probably
arose as a past form of the potential optative, so that, while ἔλθοι
dy meant originally he may go or he would be likely to go, ἦλθεν ἄν
meant he may have gone or he would have been likely to go. It is the
equivalent of the Latin forms like diceres, you would have said,
crederes, you would have believed, cerneres, putares, etc., which are
past potential forms corresponding to dicas, credas, cernas, putes,
etc. (1338). Thus putet and putaret are equivalent to οἴοιτο ἄν,
he would be likely to think, and ero ἄν, he would have been likely to
think.
1337. ‘The potential indicative sometimes expresses (in its
original force) what. would have been likely to happen, i.e. might have
happened (and perhaps did happen) with no reference to any
definite condition. Ε΄.
Ὑπό κεν ταλασίφρονά περ δέος εἷλεν, fear might have seized (ie.
would have been likely to seize) even a man of stout heart, 7.4, 421,
"HAGE τοῦτο τοὔνειδος τάχ᾽ ἂν ὀργῇ Buby, this disgrace may per-
haps have come from violence of wrath, 8.0. 1. 523. "Ey ταύτῃ τῇ
ἡλικίᾳ λέγοντες πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐν 7 ἂν μάλιστα ἐπιστεύσατε, talking
lo you at that age at which you would have been most likely to put
trust in them, P. Ap.18*
286 SYNTAX. {1338
1338, Generally, however, the potential indicative implies a
reference to some circumstances different from the real ones, so
that ἦλθεν ἄν commonly means he would have gone (if something had
not been as if was). The unreal past condition here may be as
vague and indefinite as the future condition to which the potential
optative refers (1328). #.9.
Οὐ γάρ κεν δυνάμεσθα (impf.) θυράων ἀπώσασθαι λίθον, for
we could not have moved the stone from the doorway, Οὐ. ὃ, 804. Com-
pare οὐδὲν ἂν κακὸν ποιήσεων, they could do no harm (if they should
try), with οὐδὲν ἂν κακὸν ἐποίησαν, they could have done no harm
(if they had tried). Τούτου ris dv σοι tdvdpis ἀμείνων εὑρέθη;
who could have been found betier than this man? S.Aj.119. “Owe ἦν,
καὶ Tas χεῖρας αὐκ dv καθεώρων, it was late, and they would not have
seen the show of hands, X. 1.1.77, ἸΙοίων ἂν ἔργων ἀπέστησαν;
from what labors would they have shrunk? 1.4.83.
1339. When no definite condition is understood with the poten-
tial indicative, the imperfect with ἂν is regularly past, as it always
is in Homer (1398). See the examples in 1888.
Lhe imperfect with dy referring to present. tine, which is coin-
mon in apodosis after Homer (1397), appears seldoin in purely
potential expression, chiefly in ἐβουλόμην dv, vellem, 7 should wish,
1 should like (which can mean also J should have wished); as
ἐβουλόμην ἂν αὐτοὺς ἀληθῆ λέγειν, J should like it if they spoke
the truth, L. 12,22.
1340, ‘The potential indicative may express every degree
of potentiality from that seen in 1837 to that of the apodosis
of an unfulfilled condition actually expressed. (Compare
the potential optative, 1329.) ere, after Homer, the im-
perfect with dy inay express present time (see 1397). The
intermediate steps to the complete apodosis imay be seen in
the following examples : —
"Hyere τὴν εἰρήνην ὅμως" ob γὰρ ἣν 6 τι ἂν ἐποιεῖτε, you still
kept the peace; for there was nothing which you could have done
(if you had not), D.38,43. Woddod yap ἂν τὰ ὄργανα ἣν ἄξια,
for the tools would be worth much (if they had this power), P. tp.
3744,
For the full conditiona) sentences, see 1397.
1841. N. Fora peenliar potential expression formed by imper-
fects denoting obligation etc., like ἔδει, χρῆν, etc., with the infinitive,
see 1400.
1348] ᾿ THE MOODS. 287
Il IMPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE IN COMMANDS, EX-
HORTATIONS, AND PROHIBITIONS. -SUBJUNCTIVE AND
INDICATIVE WITH μή OR μὴ οὐ IN CAUTIOUS ASSER-
TIONS. -- Ὅπως AND ὅπως μή WITH FUTURE INDICATIVE
IN COMMANDS AND PROHIBITIONS.
1342. ‘The imperative expresses a command, exhorta-
tion, or entreaty ; as λέγε, speak thou; φεῦγε, begone !
ἐλθέτω, let him come ; χαιρόντων, let them rejoice.
1343. N. A combination of ἃ command and a question is found
in such phrases as οἶσθ᾽ ὃ dpacov; dost thou know what to dof
Ar. Au.51, where the iniperative is the verb of the relative clause.
So οἶσθα viv ἅ μοι γενέσθω; do you know what must be done for met
EK. 1. 7.1203.
1344. The first person of the subjunctive (generally
plural) is used in exhortations. Its negative is μή. Hy.
Ἴωμεν, lel us gu; ἴδωμεν, let us see; μὴ τοῦτο ποιῶμεν, let us
not do this. ‘This supplies the want of a first person of the imperative.
1345. N. Both subjunctive and imperative may be preceded by
ἄγε (ἄγετε), φέρε, or ἔθι, come! These words are used without
reyard to the number or person of the verb which follows; as aye
μίμνετε πάντες, 11.2,331,
1346. In prohibitions, in the second and third per-
sous, the present imperative or the aorist subjunctive is
used with μή and its compounds. Eig.
Μὴ ποίει τοῦτο, dy not do tis (huhitually), or do not go on doing
this: μὴ ποιήσης τοῦτο, (simply) do not do this. My κατὰ τοὺς
νόμους δικάσητε' μὴ βοηθήσητε τῷ πεπονθότι δεινά" μὴ εὐορ-
κεῖτε, “do not judye uccording to the laws; do not help him who has
suffered outrages ; do not abide by your oaths,” D.21, 211.
The two forms here differ merely as present and aorist (1272).
1347, N. The dird persou of the avurist imperative sometimes
occurs in prohibitions; the second person very rarely.
1348. In Homer the independent subjanctive with μή
(generally in the third person) may express fear or anxiety,
with a desire to avert the object of the fear. E.g.
Μὴ δὴ νῆας CA woe, may they not seize the ships (as I fear they may),
11.16,128. My τι χολωσάμενος ῥ ἐξῃ κακὸν υἷας ᾿Α χαιῶν, may he
not (as I fear he may) in his wrath do any harm to the sons of the
Achaeans, [1.2,195.
288 SYNTAX. ᾿ [1349
1349, N. This usage occurs also in Euripides and Plato.
See Moods and Tenses, §§ 261-264.
1860, An independent subjunctive with μή may express
a cautious assertion, or a suspicion that something may be
true; and with μὴ οὐ a cautious negation, or a suspicion that
something may not be true. This is a favorite usage with
Plato. Eg.
Μὴ ἀγροικότερον ἢ τὸ ἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν, I suspect that the truth may
be too rude a thing to tell, P.G.462%. ᾿Αλλὰ μὴ ob τοῦτ᾽ 7 χαλεπόν
but 1 rather think that this may not be a difficult thing, P. Ap.39%
1851. The indicative may be thus used (1350) with μή or μὴ
ot, referring to present or past time. Eg.
᾿Αλλὰ μὴ τοῦτο οὐ καλῶς ὑμολογήσαμεν, Lut perhaps we did
not do well in assenting to this, P. Men.80°. (Coinpare φοβοῦμαι μὴ
ἔπαθεν, I fear that he suffered, 1380.)
1352, In Attic Greek ὅπως and ὅπως μή are used collo-
quially with the future indicative in commands and prohi-
bitions. E.g.
Nov οὖν ὅπως σώσεις με, so now save me, Av. N.1177, Κατάθου
τὰ σκεύη, χώπως ἐρεῖς ἐνταῦθα μηδὲν ψεῦδος, pul down the ‘packs,
and tell no lies here, Av. 2.627. Ὅπως οὖν ἔσεσθε ἄξιοι τῆς ἐλευ-
Oepias, (see that you) prove yoursrlves worthy of freedom, X.A.1,7.
Ὅπως pot μὴ ἐρεῖς ὅτι ἔστι τὰ δώδεκα dis ἕξ, see that you do not tell
me that twelve ts twice siz, P. Rp. 337%,
1358. N. The construction of 1352 is often explained by an
ellipsis of ακόπει or σκοπεῖτε (see 1372). -
1354. N. The subjunctive occasionally occurs here with ὅπως
py, but not with ὅπως aloue.
I. HOMERIC SUBJUNCTIVE LIKE FUTURE INDICATIVE.
—INTERROGATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.
1355. In Homer, the subjunctive in independent sen-
tences soinetimes has the force of a future indicative. Eg.
Οὐ γάρ πω τοίους ἴδον ἀνέρας, οὐδὲ ἔδωμαι, for 1 never yet saw
nor shall I ever see such men, 11.1,262. Καί ποτέ τις εἴπῃσιν, and
one will (or may) sume time say, 11.6, 459.
1356, N. This subjunctive may, like the future indicative, take
κέ or dv in a potential sense. (See 1305, 2.)
1961] THE MOODS. 289
1357. N. The question τί πάθω; what will become of me? or
what harm will it do me? (literally, what shall Z undergo) carries
this use even into Attic Greek. Εν.
"OQ μοι ἐγὼ, τί πάθω; Od.5,465. Τί πάθω τλήμων; what will
become of me, wretched one? A. P.912. Τὸ μέλλον, εἰ χρὴ, πείσομαι"
τί yop πάθω; 1 shall suffer what is to come, if it must be ; for what
harm can it do me? ἘΣ. Ph. 895.
1358. The first person of the subjunctive may be
used in questions of appeal, where a person asks him-
self or another what he is todo. The negative is μή.
It is often introduced by βούλει or βούλεσθε (in poetry
θέλεις or θέλετε). Lig.
Εἴπω ταῦτα; shall 1 say this? or βούλει εἴπω ταῦτα; do you
wish that 1 should say this? Ποῖ τράπωμαι; ποῖ πορευθῶ;
whither shall I turn? whither shall I got E.Hec.1099. Ποῦ δὴ
βούλει καθιζόμενοι dvayvapev; where now wilt thou that we sit
down and read? P. Phdr. 228“,
1359. N. The third person is sometimes found in these ques-
tions, chiefly when τὶς has the force of we; as Τί tis εἶναι τοῦτο
oy ; what shall we say this is? D.19, 88.
Ιν. Οὐ μὴ WITH SUBJUNCTIVE AND FUTURE INDICATIVE,
1360. The subjunctive (generally the aorist) and
sometimes the future indicative are used with the
double negative οὐ μή in the sense of an emphatic
future indicative with od. E.g.
Οὐ μὴ πίθηται, he will not obey, S.Ph.108. Οὔτε yap γίγνεται
οὔτε γέγονεν, οὐδὲ οὖν μὴ γένηται, for there is not, nor has there
been, nor will there ever be, ete., P. Rp.492%. Ov ποτ᾽ ἐξ ἐμοῦ ye μὴ
πάθῃς τόδε, you never shall suffer this at my hands, S. Εἰ. 1039, Οὐ
τοι pyroTé we... ἄκοντά τις ἄξει, no one shall ever take you against
your will, etc., δ. O. C.176.
1361. In the dramatic poets, the second person singular
of the future indicative (occasionally of the aorist subjunc-
tive) with ob μή may express a strong prohibition. 2g.
Οὐ μὴ καταβήσει, don't come down (you shall not come down),
Av.V.397. Οὐ μὴ τάδε γηρύσει, do not speak out in this way,
E. Hip.213. Οὐ μὴ σκώψης, do not jeer, Ar. N.296.
This construction is not interrogative.
200 SYNTAX. {1363
V. FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES AFTER ἵνα, ὡς, ὅπως, ὄφρα,
AND μή.
1362, The final particles are ἵνα, ws, ὅπως, and (epic
and lyric) ὄφρα, that, in order that. To these must be
added μή, lest or that, which became in use a negative
final particle. The clauses which are introduced by
these particles may be divided into three classes :—
1. Pure final clauses, expressing a purpose or motive;
as ἔρχεται ἵνα τοῦτο ἴδῃ, he is coming that he may see
this. Herve all the final particles are used (see 1368).
2. Olject clauses with ὅπως after verbs signifying to
strive for, to care for, to effect; aS σκόπει ὅπως τοῦτο
γενήσεται, see to it that this is done.
3. Clauses with μή after verbs of fear or caution ; as
φοβεῖται μὴ τοῦτο γένηται, he fears that (or lest) this
may happen.
1868, The first two classes are to be specially distinguished.
The object clauses in 2 are the direct object of the leading verb,
and can even stand in apposition to an object accusative like
τοῦτο; AS σκόπει τοῦτο, ὅπως μῇ σε ὄψεται, 866 to this, namely, that
he does not see you. But a final clause could stand in apposition
only to τούτου ἕνεκα, for the sake of this, or διὰ τοῦτο, lo this end; as
ἔρχεται τούτον ἕνεκα, ἵνα ἡμᾶς ἴδῃ, he is coming for this purpose,
namely, that he may see us.
For the origin of the clauses in 3, and the development of final
clauses, see Moads and Tenses, §§ 307-316.
1364. The negative in all these clauses is μή; except
after μή, lest, where οὐ is used.
J. PURE FINAL CLAUSES.
1365. Final clauses take the subjunctive after primary
tenses, and the optative after secondary tenses. Fug.
Δοκεῖ μοι κατακαῦσαι τὰς ἱμάξας, ἵνα μὴ τὰ ζεύγη ἡμῶν oT pa-
τηγῇ. 1 think we should burn our wagons, that our cattle may not le
our commanders, X.A.3,27%. Eizrw re δῆτα κἄλλ᾽, ἵν᾽ ὀργίσῃ πλέον;
shall I speak still Further, that you may be the more angry? 8.0.7.
364. Πωρακαλεῖς ἰατροὺς. ὕπως μὴ ἀποθάνῃ, you call in physicians,
that he may not die, X.M.2,10% Avocredct ἐᾶσαι ἐν τῷ παρόντι, μὴ
1810] THE MOODS, 291
καὶ τοῦτον πολέμιον προυθώμεθα, it is expedient to allow tt for
α time, lest we add him to the number of our enemies, X.C.2, 41,
Φίλος ἐβούλετο εἶναι τοῖς μέγιστα δυναμένοις, ἵνα ἀδικῶν μὴ δι δοίη
δίκην, he wished to be a friend to the most powerful, that he might do
wrong and nol be punished, X.A.2,6%. Ῥούτου ἕνεκα φίλων wero
δεῖσθαι, ὡς συνέργους ἔχοι, he thought he needed friends for this pur-
pose, namely, that he might have helpers, X.A.1, 9". ᾿Αφικόμην, ὅπως
σοῦ πρὸς δόμους ἐλθύντος εὖ πράξαιμί τι, / came that 1 might gain
some good by your return home, S. O. 7’. 1005.
Κεφαλῇ κατανεύσομαι, ὄφρα πεποίθῃς, 1 will nod my assent, that
you may trust me, 111,522. Ενθα κατέσχετ᾽, Opp’ ἕταρον θάπτοι,
he tarried there, that he might bury his companion, Od.3, 254.
1866. N. ‘The future indicative is rarely found in final clauses
afler ὅπως, ὄφρα, ὡς, and μή. This is almost entirely confined to
poetry. See Od.1,56,4,163; /1.20,301; Ay. Evel. 495.
1367. N. The adverb dy (κέ) is sometimes joined with ὡς,
ὅπως, aud ὄφρα before the subjunctive in final clauses; as ὡς ἂν
μάθης. ἀντάκουσον, hear the other side, that you may learn, X.A.2, 615,
For this use, see Afvods and Tenses, §§ 325-98. ‘The final opta-
tive with ἄν is probably always pulenutial (1327).
1368. Ν. "Οφρα is the most conmmon final particle in Homer,
ὡς in tragedy, and ἕνα in comedy and prose. But ὅπως exceeds ἕνα
in Thucydides and Xenophon. ‘Os was never in good use in prose,
except in Xenophon.
1369. As final clauses express the purpose or motive of
some person, they admit the double construction of indirect
discourse (1481, 2; 1503). Hence, instead of the optative
after past tenses, we can have the mood and tense which
would be used when a person conceived the purpose;
that is, we can say either ἦλθεν iva (801, he came that he
might see (1365), or ἦλθεν ἵνα Sy, because the person
himsclf would have said ἔρχυμαι ἵνα (Su, I come that J may
see. E.g.
Ἐυνεβούλευε τοῖς ἄλλοις ἐκπλεῦσαι, ὅπως ἐπὶ πλέον ὁ σῖτος
ἀντίσχῃ, he advised the rest to sail away, that the provisions might
hold out longer, T.1,65. Ta πλοῖα κατέκαυσεν, ἵνα μὴ Κῦρος δια β ἥ,
he burned the vessels, that Cyrus might not pass over, Χ.Α.1,4}8,
1370. N. The subjunctive is even more common than the
optative after past tenses in certain authors, as Thucydides and
Hferodotus; but much less so in others, as Homer and Xenophon.
292 SYNTAX. (1872
1871, The past tenses of the indicative are used in final
clauses with ἵνα, sometimes with ὅπως or ds, to denote that
the purpose is dependent on some act which does not or
did not take place (as on some unfulfilled condition or
some unaccomplished wish), and therefore ts not or was
not attained. E.g.
Τί μ᾽ ob λαβὼν Exrevas εὐθὺς, ὡς ἔδειξα μήποτε, «.7.r.; why did
you not take me and kill me at once, that I might never have shown
(as I have done), etc.? 5. 0. 1.1891. Φεῦ, hed, τὸ μὴ τὰ πράγματ᾽
ἀνθρώποις ἔχειν φωνὴν, ἵν᾿ ἦσαν μηδὲν οἱ δεινοὶ λόγοι, Alas! alus!
that the facts have no voice for men, so that words of eloquence might
be as nothing, E. fray. 442.
1, OBJECT CLAUSES WITH ὅπως AFTER VERBS OF
STRIVING, ETC.
1372. Object clauses depending on verbs signifying
to strive for, to care for, to effect, regularly take the
future indicative with ὅπτως or ὅπως μή after both pri-
mary and secondary tenses.
The future optative may be used after secondary
tenses, as the correlative of the future indicative, but
commonly the indicative is retained on the principle of
- 1869. Ey.
Φρόντιζ᾽ ὅπως μηδὲν ἀνάξιον τῆς τιμῆς ταύτης πράξεις, take heed
that you Wo nothing unworthy of this honor, 1.2, 81. ᾿Επεμελεῖτο ὅπως
μὴ dowrol ποτε ἔσοιντο, he look care that they should never be without
food, X.C.8,1 (here ἔσονται would be more common). "Empac-
σον ὅπως τις βοήθεια ἡ Fer, they were trying to effect (this), that some
assistance should come, 'T.3,4.
For ὅπως and ὅπως μή with the future indicative in com-
mands and prohibitions, often explained by an ellipsis of σκόπει
or σκοπεῖτε in this construction, see 1352.
1878. The future indicative with ὅπως sometimes follows verbs
of exhorting, entreating, commanding, and forbidding, which com-
monly take an infinitive of the object; as διακελεύονται ὅπως
Tipwpycerat πάντας τοὺς τοιούτους, they exhort him to take ven-
geance on all such, P. Rp.549¢. (See 1377.)
1374. 1. Sometimes the present or aorist subjunctive
and optative is used here, as in final clauses, Eg.
1379) THE MOODS. 293
“Addov Tov ἐπιμελήσει ἢ ὅπως 6 τι βέλτιστοι πολῖται ὦμεν;
will you care for anything except that we may be the best possible citi-
zens? P.G.515%, Ἐπεμέλετο αὐτῶν, ὅπως ἀεὶ ἀνδράποδα Stare
λοῖεν, he took care that they should always remain slaves, X. Ο. 8,144.
2. Xenophon allows ws with the subjunctive or optative here.
1375. N. My, lest, may be uscd for ὅπως μή with thesubjunctive.
1376. N. “Ay or κέ can be used here, as in final clauses (1867),
with ὅπως or ὡς and the subjunctive.
1377. In Homer the construction of 1372 with ὅπως and
the future is not found; but verbs signifying to plan, con-
sider, and try take ὅπως or ὡς and the subjunctive or opta-
tive. Fug,
Φραζώμεθ᾽ ὅπως dy’ ἄριστα γένηται, let us consider how the very
best may be done, Od.13,365. Φράσσεται ὡς κε νέηται, he will plan
for his return, Od.1,205. Βούλευον ὅπως oy’ ἄριστα γένοιτο, they
deliberated that the very best might be done, Od.9,420. So rarely with
λίσσομαι, entreat (see 1373).
HI. CLAUSES WITH μή AFTER VERBS OF FEARING, ETC.
1378, After verbs denoting fear, cautiun, or danger,
μή, that or lest, takes the subjunctive after primary
tenses, and the optative after secondary tenses. The
subjunctive may also follow secondary tenses, to retain
the mood in which the fear originally occurred to the
mind. The negative form is μὴ οὐ (13864). By.
Φοβοῦμαι μὴ τοῦτο γένηται (vereor ne accidat), J fear that this
may happen; φοβοῦμαι μὴ οὐ τοῦτο γένηται (vereor ut accidat),
I fear that this may not happen (1864). Φροντίζω μὴ κράτιστον ἡ
μοι σιγᾶν, J am anxious lest it may be best for me to be silent, X. Μ.
4,328, Οὐκέτι ἐπετίθεντο, δεδιότες μὴ ἀποτμηθείησαν, they no
longer made attacks, fearing lest they should be cut off, X.A.3,4%.
᾿Ἐφοβοῦντο μή τι πάθη, they feared lest he should suffer anything
(1369), X. Sy.2, 11.
1879. N. The future indicative is very rarely used after μή in
this construction. But ὅπως μή is sometimes used here, as in the
object clauses of 1372, with both future indicative and subjunc-
tive; as δέδοικα ὅπως μὴ ἀνάγκη γενήσεται, I fear that there may
come a necessity, D.9,75. Ὅπως μή here is the equivalent of μή,
that or lest, in the ordinary coustruction.
294 SYNTAX. [1380
1380. Verbs of fearing may refer to objects of fear which
are present ov past. Here μή takes the present aud past
tenses of the indicative. Eg.
Δέδοικα μὴ πληγῶν δέει, I fear that you need blows, Ar. N.493.
Φοβούμεθα μὴ ἀμφοτέρων dua ἡμαρτήκαμεν, we fear that we have
missed both at once, T.3,53. Δείδω μὴ δὴ πάντα θεὰ νημερτέα εἶπεν,
1 fear that all which the Goddess said was true, Οὐ. 5,300. Ὅρα μὴ
παίζων ἔλεγεν, beware lest he was speaking in jest, P. Th. 145.
νι. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
1381. In conditional sentences the clause containing
the condition is called the protasis, and that contaming
the conclusion is called the apodosis. ‘The protasis is
introduced by some form of εἰ, if.
Ai for εἰ is sometimes used in Homer.
1382. The adverb ἄν (epic κέ or κέν) is regularly
joined to εἰ in the protasis when the verb is in the
subjunctive, εἰ with ἄν forming ἐών, dv, or ἦν. (See
1299,2.) The simple εἰ is used with the indicative
and optative. The same adverb ἄν is used in the
apodosis with the optative, and also with the past tenses
of the indicative when it is implied that the condition
is not fulfilled.
1383. 1.. The negative adverb of the protasis is regu-
larly μή, that of the apodosis is ov.
2. When οὐ stands in a protasis, it generally belongs to some
particular word (as in ob πολλοί, few, οὔ φημι, 1 deny), and not. to
the protasis as a whole; as ἐάν τε σὺ καὶ “Avuros ov Pare ἐάν τε
φῆτε, doth if you and Anytus deny it and if you admit it, P. Ap. 25°.
1384, 1. The supposition contained in a protasis may
be either particular or general. A particular supposition
refers to a definite act or to several definite acts, supposed
to occur at some definite time or times; as if he (now) has
this, he will give it: if he had it, he gave it; if he had had
the power, he would have helped me; if he shull receive it (or
uf he receives it), he will give it; if he should receive it, he
would give it. A general supposition refers indefinitely to
auy act or acts of a given class, which may be supposed to
1887] THE MOODS. 295
occur or to have occurred at any time; as tf ever he receives
anything, he (always) gives it; tf ever he received anything,
he (always) gave it; if (on any occasion) he had had the power,
he would (always) have helped ne; tf ever any one shall (or
should) wish to go, he will (or would) always be permitted.
2. Although this distinction is seen in all classes of conditions
(as the examples show), it is only in the present and past conditions
which do not imply nun-fulfilment, de. in those of class 1. (below),
that the distinction affects the construction. Here, however, we have
two classes of conditions which contain only general suppositions.
CLASSIFICATION OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
1385. The classification of conditional sentences is based partly
on the time to which the supposition refers, partly on what is
implied with regard to the fulfilment of the condition, and partly
on the distinction between particular and general suppositions
explained in 1384.
1386. Conditional sentences have four classes, two (I.
and 11.) containing present and past suppositions, and two
(IU. and IV.) containing future suppositions. Class I.
has two forms, one (a) with chiefly particular suppositions
(present and past), the other (b) with only general suppo-
sitions (1. present, 2. past).
1387. We have thus the following forms: —
J. Present and past suppositions implying uothing as to
fulfilment of condition:
(protusis) εἰ with indicative; (apodosis) any
(a) Chiefly [ior οἱ the verb. Εἰ πράσσει τοῦτο, καλῶς
Particular; Ἷ ἔχεν 17 he ts doing this, it is well. Ei ἔπραξε
| τοῦτο, καλῶς ἔχει, tf he did this, it is well. (See
1390.) —In Latin: st hoc facit, bene est.
( 1. (prot.) ἐάν with subjunctive; (apud.) pres-
ent Indicative. "Edy rus κλέπτῃ, KoAacerat,
if any one (ever) steals, he is (always) pur-
ished. (See 1393, 1.)
(prot.) εἰ with optative; (apod.) imperfect
indicative. ἘΠ τὶς κλέπτοι, ἐκολάζετο, Thany
one erer stole, he was (always) punished.
(8) | 9
{ See 1393, 2.) — For the Latin, see 1388.
296 SYNTAX. {1388
II, Present and past suppositions implying that the
condition is not fulfilled:
(protasis) εἰ with past tense of indicative; (apodosis)
past tense of indicative with ay. El ἔπραξε τοῦτο,
καλῶς ἂν ἔσχεν, if he had done this, tt would have been
well. Ei ἔπρασσε τοῦτο, καλῶς ἂν εἶχεν, if he were doing
this, it would (now) be well, or if he had done this, it
would have been well. (See 1397.)
In Latin: si hoc faceret, bene esset (present) ; st hoc
Secisset, bene fuisset (past).
III. Yuture suppositions in more vivid form:
(prot.) ἐάν with subjunctive (sometimes εἰ with future
indicative) ; (apod.) any future form. Ἐὰν πράσσῃ
(or πράξη) τοῦτο, καλῶς ἕξει, if he shall do this (or if
he does this), tt will be well (sometimes also εἰ πράξει
τοῦτο, ctc.). (See 1403 and 1405.)
In Latin: st hoc faciet (or fecerit), bene erit.
IV. Future suppositions in less vivid forin:
(prot.) εἰ with optative; (apod.) optative with dv.
Εἰ πράσσοι (or πράξειε) τοῦτο, καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι, if he
should do this, it would be well. (See 1408.)
In Latin: si hoc faciat, bene sit.
1888. N. The Latin commonly agrees with the English in not
marking the distinction between the general and the particular
present and past conditions by different forins, and uses the indica-
tive in both alike. Occasionally even the Greek does the same (1395).
1889. N. In external form (ἐάν with the subjunctive) the gen-
eral present condition agrees with the more vivid future condition.
But in sense there is a much closer connection between the general
and the particular present condition, which in most languages (and
sometimes even in Greck) coincide also in form (1388). On the
other hand, ἐάν with the subjunctive in a future condition agrees
generally in sense with εἰ and the future indicative (1405), and is
never iuterchangeable with εἰ and the present indicative.
I. PRESENT AND PAST CONDITIONS WITH NOTHING
IMPLIED.
(a) Stmece Survositions, CHIEVLY PARTICULAR.
1390. When the protasis simply states a present or
1393} THE MOODS. 297
past particular supposition, linplying nothing as to the
fulfilment of the condition, it has the indicative with εἰ,
Any form of the verb may stand in the apodosis. E.g.
Εἰ ἡσυχίαν Φίλιππος ἄγει, οὐκέτι δεῖ λέγειν, if Philip is keeping
peace (with us), we need talk no longer, D.8,5. Εἰ ἐγὼ Φαῖδρον
ἀγνοῶ, καὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐπιλέλησμαι" ἀλλὰ yap οὐδέτερα ἐστι τούτων,
if 1 do not know Phaedrus, 1 have forgotten myself; but neither of these
is so, P. Phdr. 228%. Et θεοῦ ἦν, οὐκ ἦν αἰσχροκερδής, if he was the
son of a God, he was not avaricious, P. Rp.408%. ᾿Αλλ᾽ εἰ δοκεῖ,
πλέωμεν, but if it pleases you, let us suil, 8. Ph.526. Κάκιστ᾽ ἀπολοί
pny, Ἐανθίαν εἰ μὴ φιλῶ, may 1 die most wreichedly, if 1 do not love
Xanthias, Ar. 12.579. :
1391. N. Even the future indicative can stand in a protasis of
this class if it expresses merely a present intention or necessity that
something shall hereafter be done; as alpe πλῆκτρον, εἰ μαχεῖ,
raise your spur, if you are going tu fight, Ay. Av. 759. Here εἰ μέλλεις
μάχεσθαι would he the more common expression in prose. It is
important to notice that a future of this kind could never be changed
to the subjunctive, like the ordinary future in protasis (1405).
1392. N. For present or past conditions containing a potential
indicative or optative (with dv), see 142], 3.
(Ὁ) Present anv Past ΘΕ, Surrosrnoxs.
1393. In general suppositions, the apodosis expresses
a customary oy repeated action or a general truth in
present or past time, and the protasis refers in a general
way to any of a class of acts.
1. Present general suppositions have ἐών with the
subjunctive in the protasis, and the present indicative
(or some other present form denoting repetition) in the
apodosis. Eig.
Ἢν ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνήσκειν, if death
comes near, no one is (ever) willing to die, Τὴ. 41.011. “Anus λόγος,
ἂν ἀπῇ τὰ πράγματα, μάταιόν τι φαίνεται καὶ κενόν, all speech, if
deeds are wanting, appears a vain and empty thing, D.2, 12.
2. Past general suppositions have ei with the opta-
tive in the protasis, and the imperfect indicative Cor
some other form denoting past repetition) in the
apodosis. Ey.
298 SYNTAX. [1394
Ἐξ τινὰς θυρυβουμένους αἴσθοιτο, κατασβεννύναι τὴν ταραχὴν
ἐπειρᾶτο, if he saw any fulling into disorder (or whenever he saw,
elc.), he (always) tried to quiet the confusion, X.C.5, 3%. EC τις
ἀντείποι, εὐθὺς τεθνήκει, if any one refused, he was immediately
put to death, T.8,66. This construction occurs only once in Homer,
1394. N. The guomic aorist, which is a primary tense (1268),
can always be used here in the apodosis with a dependent sub-
junctive; as ἥν τις παρα βαίνῃ, ζημίαν αὐτοῖς ἐπέθεσαν, if any
one transgresses, they (always) impose @ penalty on him, X.C. 1,27.
1395. N. The indicative is occasionally used in the place of the
subjunetive or optative in general suppositions; that is, these sen-
tences may follow the construction of ordinary preset aud past
suppositions (1390), as in Latin and English; as εἴ τις δύο ἢ καὶ
πλέους τις ἡμέρας λογίζεται, μάταιός ἐστιν, if any one counts on
two or even more days, he is ἃ fuol, 5. ΤῊ. 9.4.
1396. N. Here, as in future conditions (1406), ef (without ἄν)
is sometimes used with the subjunctive in poetry. Jn Homer this
is the more frequent fori in general conditions.
1. PRESENT AND PAST CONDITIONS WITH SUPPOSI-
TION CONTRARY TO FACT.
1397, When the protasis states a present or past sup-
position, implying that the condition ts not or was not
Fulfilled, the secondary teuses of the indicative are used
in both protasis and apodosis. The apodosis has the
adverb ἄν.
The imperfect here refers to present time or to an
act as going on or repeated in past time, the aorist to
a simple occurrence in past time, and the (rare) pluper-
fect to an act completed in past or present time. Eg.
Totru οὐκ ἂν ἐδύναντο ποιεῖν, εἰ μὴ διαίτῃ μετρί ἐχρῶντο,
they would not he able (ας they are) to do this, if they did not lead an
abstemious life, X.C.1,2%% Todd ἂν θαυμαστύτερον ἦν, εἰ ἐτι μῶν το,
it would be far more wonderful, if they were honored, VP. Ἰὲρ. 455",
Ei ἦσαν dvdpes ἀγαθοὶ, ὡς σὺ φὴς, οὐκ ἄν ποτε ταῦτα ἔπασχον,
if they had heen good men, as you say, they would never have suffered
these things (referring to several cases), P.G.516% Kat ἴσως ἂν
ἀπέθανον, εἰ μὴ ἡ ἀρχὴ κατελύθη, and perhaps I should have
perished, if the government had not been put down, P.Ap.324 EK
1401) THE MOODS. 599
ἀπεκρίνω, ἱκανῶς ἂν ἤδη ἐμεμαθήκη, if you had answered, }
should already have learned enough (which now I have not done),
P. Luthyph.14% Ei μὴ ὑμεῖς ἤλθετε, ἐπορενόμεθα ἂν ἐπὶ τὸν
βασιλέα, if you had not come (aor.), we should now be on our way
(impf.) to the King, X.A.2, 14.
1398. N. Jn Homer the imperfect in this class of sentences is
always past (see 71.7, 273 ; 8,130); and the present optative is used
where the Attic would have the imperfect referring to present time;
as εἰ μέν τις τὸν ὄνειρον ἄλλος ἔνισπεν, Weidds κεν φαῖμεν καὶ
νοσφιζοίμεθα μᾶλλον, if any other had told this dream (1397), we
should call ita le and rather turn away from it, I1.2,80: see 24, 229.
1399, N. In Homer the optative with κέ is occasionally past in
apodosis; as καί νύ κεν ἐνθ' ἀπόλοιτο Αἰνείς, εἰ μὴ νύησε ᾽Α φρο.
δίτη, and now Aeneas would there have perished, had not Aphrodite
perceived him, £1.5, 311. (Ilere ἀπώλετο would be the regular form
in Hower, as in other Greek.)
Homer has also a past potential optative : see 71.5, 85.
1400. 1. The imperfects ἔδει, χρῆν or ἐχρῆν, ἐξῆν, εἰκὸς
ἦν, and others denoting obliqution, propriety, possibility, and
the like, are often used with the infinitive to form an
apodosis implying the non-fulfilinent of a condition. "Av
is not used here, as these phrases simply express in other
words what is usually expressed by the indicative with ἄν.
Thus, ἔδει σε τοῦτον φιλεῖν, you ought to love him (but do not),
or you ought to have loved him (but did not), is substantially equiva
lent to you would love him, or would have loved him (ἐφίλεις ἂν
τοῦτον), if you did your duty (τὰ δέοντα). So ἐξῆν σοι τοῦτο
ποιῆσαι, you might have done this (but you did not do it); εἰκὸς ἦν
σε τοῦτο ποιῆσαι, you would properly (εἰκότως) have done this.
The actual apodosis is here always in the infinitive, and the reality
of the action of the infinitive is generally denied.
2. When the present infinitive is used, the construction
refers to the present or to continued or repeated action in
the past; when the aorist is used, it refers to the past. Eg.
Tovode μὴ ζῆν ἔδει, these ought not to be living (as they are),
S.Ph.418. Μένειν yap ἐξῆν, for he might have stood his ground
(but did not), 1). 8,17. @avety σε χρῆν πάρος τέκνων, you ought to
have died before your children, K. And.1208, Et ἐβούλετο δίκαιος
εἶναι, ἐξῆν αὐτῷ μισθῶσαι τὸν οἶκον, he might have let the house, if
he had wished to be just, 1,.32, 23.
1401. N. When the actual apodosis is in the verb of obligation,
800 SYNTAX. (1402
etc., ἔδει ἄν can be used; as ef τὰ δέοντα οὗτοι συνεβούλευσαν, οὐδὲν
ἂν ὑμᾶς νῦν ἔδει βουλεύεσθαι, if these men had given you the advice
you needed, there would now be no need of your deliberating, D.4.1.
1402. 1. Other imperfects, especially ἐβουλόμην, sometimes
take the infinitive without dy on the same principle with ἔδει ete. ;
as ἐβουλόμην οὐκ ἐρίζειν ἐνθάδε, 1 would I were not contending
here (as I am), or I would not be contending here, Ar. R. 866.
2. So ὥφελον or ὥφελλον, ought, aorist and imperfect of ὀφέλλω,
owe (epic for ὀφείλω), in Homer; whence comes the use of ὥφελον
in wishes (1512); as ὥφελε Κῦρος ζῆν, would that Cyrus were alive,
X. A214
3. So ἔμελλον with the infinitive; as φθίσεσθαι ἔμελλον, εἰ μὴ
ἔειπες, J should, have perished (was about to perish), if thou hadst not
spoken, Od. 13,383. So D.19,159.
ΠῚ. FUTURE CONDITIONS, MORE VIVID FORM.
Supsunctive iw Prorasis witn Future Apovosis.
1403. When a supposed future case is stated dis-
tinetly and vividly (as in English, if I shall go, or if 1
go), the protasis has the subjunctive with ἐάν (epic εἴ
xe), aud the apodosis has the future indicative or some
other forn: of future time. Lg.
Εἰ μέν κεν Μενέλαον ᾿Αλέξανδρος καταπέφνῃ, αὐτὸς ἔπειθ᾽
“Eddy ἐχέτω καὶ κτήματα πάντα, if Alexander shall slay Menelaus,
then let him have Helen and all the goods himself, 113,281. “Av τις
ἀνθιστῆται, πειρασόμεθα χειροῦσθαι, if any one shall stand opposed
to us, we shall (ry to overcome him, X.A.7,3%. "Eady οὖν ἴῃς νῦν,
πότε ἔσει οἴκοι; if therefore you go now, when will you be at home?
X.C.5, 3.
1404. N. The older English forms if he shall go and if he go
both express the force of the Greek subjunctive and future indica
tive in protasis; but the ordinary modern English uses if he goes
even when the time is clearly future.
1405. The future indicative with εἰ is very often used
for the subjunctive in future conditions, as a still more
vivid form of expression, especially in appeals to the feel-
ings, and in threats and warnings. Eg.
Ei μὴ καθέξεις γλῶσσαν, ἔσται σοι κακά, tf you do not (shall
not) restrain your tongue, you will have trouble, E.frag.5. This com-
moon use of the future must not be confounded with that of 1391.
1413] THE MOODS. 301
1406. N. In Homer εἰ (without ἄν or κέ) is sometimes used
with the subjunctive in future conditions, apparently in the same
sense as εἴ xe or ἦν; as εἰ δὲ νῇ ἐθέλῃ ὀλέσαι, bul if he shall wish to
destroy our ship, Od. 12,348. This is inore common in general con-
ditions in Homer (see 1396). The same use of εἰ for ἐάν is found
occasionally even in Attic poetry.
1407, N. For the Homeric subjunctive with κέ in the apodosis
of a future condition, sce 1305, 2.
IV. FUTURE CONDITIONS, LESS VIVID FORM.
OPTATIVE IN BOTH PROTASIS AND APODOSIS.
1408. When a supposed future case is stated in a less
distinct and vivid form (as in English, if .1 should go),
the protasis has the optative with e:,and the apodosis
has the optative with ἄν. E.g.
Elns φορητὸς οὐκ ἂν, εἰ πράσσοις καλῶς, you would not be
endurable, if you should be in prosperity, A. τ. 979. Οὐ πολλὴ ἂν
ἀλογώ εἴη, εἰ φοβοῖτο τὸν θάνατον ὁ τοιοῦτος ; would it not bea
great absurdity, if such a man should fear death? P. Ph. 68%. Οἶκος
δ᾽ αὐτὸς, εἰ φθογγὴν λάβοι, σαφέστατ᾽ ἂν λέξειεν, bul the house
itself, if it should find a voice, would speak most plainly, Α.4..87.
1409. ‘The optative with ὧν in apodosis is the potential opta-
tive: see 1329.
1410. N. The future optative cannot be used in protasis or
apodosis, except in indirect discourse representing the future in-
dicative after a past tense (see the second exainple under 1497, 2).
1411. N. ἘΠ xe is sometimes found with the optative in Homer,
in place of the simple εἰ (1408); as εἰ δέ κεν "Apyos ἱκοίμεθ', . ..
γαμβρός κέν μοι ἔοι, and if we should ever come to Argos, he would be
my son-in-law, 11.9, 141.
1412. N. For the Homeric optative used like the past tenses of
the indicative in unreal conditions, see 1398 and 1800.
PECULIAR FORMS OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
Evuirsis anp SusstituTion ΙΝ Protasis oR APoposis.
1413. The protasis sometimes is not expressed in its
regular form with εἰ or ἐάν, but is contained in a parti-
ciple, or implied in an adverb or some other part of the
sentence. .When a participle represents the protasis,
802 SYNTAX. [1414
its tense is always that in which the verb itself would
have stood in the indicative, subjunctive, or optative, —
the present (as usual) including the imperfect. Dy,
Πῶς δίκης οὔσης ὁ Ζεὺς οὐκ ἀπόλωλεν ; how ts it that Zeus has
not been destroyed, if Justice exists? (εἰ δίκη ἐστίν), Ar. ΝΜ 904. Σὺ
δὲ κλύων doe τάχα, but you will suvon know, if you listen (= ἐὰν
κλύης), Ar. Av. 1390, ᾿Απολοῦμαι μὴ τοῦτο μα θών, I shall be ruined
unless I learn this (ἐὰν μὴ μάθω). Τοιαῦτά τἂν γυναιξὶ συνναίων
ἔχοις, Such things would you have to endure if you should dwell among
women (i.€. εἰ συνναίοις). A.Se.195. "Halotrnoey dv τις ἀκούσας,
any oue would have dishelieved (such a thing) if he had heard u (1.6. @
ἤκουσεν), ‘T.7,28. Μαμμᾶν δ᾽ ἂν αἰτήσαντος (sc. σοῦ) ἧκόν σοι
φέρων ἂν ἄρτον, and if you (ever) cried for fool (et αἰτήσειας,
1393, 2), } used to come to you with bread (1296), Av. N. 1383.
Διά ye ὑμᾶς αὐτοὺς πάλαι ἂν ἀπολώλειτε, if it had depended on
yourselves, you would long ayo have been ruined, 1).18,49. Οὕτω
γὰρ οὐκέτι τοῦ λοιποῦ πάσχοιμεν ἂν κακῶς, for in that case we should
no longer suffer harm (the protasis being in οὕτω), X.A.1,1%
Οὐδ᾽ ἂν δικαίως ἐς κακὸν πέσοιμί τι, nor should J justly (ic. ὑ 1 had
justice) fall into any trouble, ὃ. An. 240.
1414, 1. There is a (probably unconscious) suppression of the
verb of the protasis in several phrases introduced by εἰ μή, except. Eg.
Tis τοι ἄλλος ὁμοῖος, εἰ μὴ Πάτροκλος ; who else is like you, except
Patroclus (i.e. unless it is P.)? 117,475. El μὴ διὰ τὸν πρύτανιν,
ἐνέπεσεν ἄν, had it not been for the Prytanis (except for the D.), he
would have been thrown in (to the Pit), P.G. 5168.
2. The Protasis | or the apodosis, or both, may be Suppressed
with the Homeric ὡς εἰ or ὡς εἴ τε; as τῶν νέες ὠκεῖαι ὡς εἰ πτέρον
ἠὲ νόημα, their ships are swift as a wing or thought (as they would be
if they were, etc.), Od.7, 36.
For the ee ellipsis in ὥσπερ ἂν ei, see 1313.
1415. Ν In neither of the cases of 1414 is St probable that any
definite a was in the speaker's mind.
1416. N. The apodosis is sometimes entirely suppressed for
rhetorical effect; as εἰ μὲν δώσουσι γέρας, if they shall give me a
prize, — very well, 111,185; ef.1,580.
1417. N. Et δὲ μή without a verb often has the meaning other-
wise, even where the clause would not be negative if completed. or
where the verb if supplied would be a subjunctive; as μὴ ποιήσῃς
ταῦτα" εἰ δὲ μὴ, αἰτίαν ἕξεις, do not do this; otherwise (if you do not
do what I say) you will be blamed, X. An.7, 15.
1421] THE MOODS. 308
1418. The apodosis may be expressed by an infinitive or
participle in indirect discourse, each tense representing its
own tenses of the indicative or optative (1280; 1285). If
the finite verb in the apodosis would have taken ἄν, this
particle is used with the infinitive or participle. 2g.
‘Hyotpat, εἰ τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, πάντα καλῶς ἔχειν, I believe thal, if
you are duing this, all is well; ἡγοῦμαι, ἐὰν τοῦτο ποιῆτε, πάντα
καλῶς ἕξειν, 1 believe that, if you (shall) do this, all will be well; ofa
ὑμᾶς, ἐὰν ταῦτα γένηται, εὖ πράξοντας, J know thal you will prosper if
this is (shall be) done. For examples of the infinitive and participle
with ay, see 1308.
1419. The apodosis may be expressed in an infinitive
not in indirect discourse (1271), especially one depending
on a verb of wishing, commanding, advising, ete. from which
the infinitive receives a future meaning. Εἰ.
Βούλεται € ἐλθεῖν ἐ ἐὰν τοῦτο γένηται, he wishes ty go if this (shall)
be done: κελεύω ὑμᾶς ἐὰν dcvyo Ge ἀπελθεῖν, I command you to
depart if you can. For the principle of indirect discourse which
appears in the protasis here after past tenses, see 1502, 1.
1420, N. Sometimes the apodosis is merely implied in
the context, and in sueh eases εἰ or ἐάν is often to be
translated supposing that, in case that, if perchance, or if
haply. Eg.
“Axovuoy καὶ ἐμοῦ, ἐάν σοι ταὐτὰ δοκῇ, hear me also, in case the
same shall please you (i.e. that then you may assent to it), P. Rp. 308°.
Su πρὸς τὴν πόλιν, εἰ ἐπι βοηθοῖεν, ἐχώρουν, they marched towards
the cily, in cuse they (the citizens) should rush oul (ie, to meet them
uf they should rush out), T.6,100. On this principle we must
explain at κέν rus βούλεται, if haply he may wish (i.e. in hope that
he may wish), 111,60; αἵ κ᾿ ἐθέλησθα, Ov.3,92; and similar pas-
sages. For this construction, both in Homer and elsewhere, see
Moods and Tenses, §§ 486-491.
Mixkb Consrruciions. — ΔΕ αν Apovosis.
1421, Lhe protasis and apodosis sometimes belong to
difterent forms.
1. Especially any tense of the indicative with εἰ in the
protasis may be followed by a potential optative with ἄν in
the apodosis. Εἰ.
Ei κατ᾽ οὐρανοῦ εἰλήλουθας, οὐκ ἂν θεοῖσι μα χοίμην, if you
804 SYNTAX. [1422
have come down from heaven, I would not fight against the Gods,
116,128, Εἰ viv ye δυστυχοῦμεν, πῶς τἀναντί᾽ ἂν πράττοντες οὐ
σῳζοίμεθ' ἄν; if we are now unfortunate, how could we help being
saved if we should do the opposite? Ar. R.1449 (here πράττοντες = εἰ
πράττοιμεν). El οὗτοι ὀρθῶς ἀπέστησαν, ὑμεῖς ἂν οὐ χρεὼν dpyorre,
if these had a right to secede, you cannot (could not) possibly hold your
power rightfully, T.3, 40.
2. Sometimes a subjunctive or a future indicative in the
protasis has a potential optative in the apodosis. Eg.
*Hy ἐφῆς μοι, λέξαι μ᾽ dv, if you (will) permit me, I would fain
speak, 8. El.554; οὐδὲ yap ἂν πολλαὶ γέφυραι ὦσιν, ἔχοιμεν ἂν
ὅποι φυγόντες σωθῶμεν, for not even if there shall be many bridges,
could we find q place to fly to and be saved, X.A.2,4%; ἀδικοίημεν
ἂν, εἰ μὴ ἀποδώσω, 1 should be guilty of wrong, should 1 (shall 1)
not restore her, E. Hel.1010.
8. A potential optative (with dv) may express a present condi-
tion, and a potential indicative (with dv) may express a present or
past condition; as εἴπερ ἄλλῳ τῳ πειθοίμην ἂν, καὶ σοὶ πείθομαι,
if there is any man whom 1 would trust, 1 trust you, P. Pr. 329%, εἰ
τοῦτο ἰσχυρὸν ἦν ἂν τούτῳ τεκμήριον, κἀμοὶ γενέσθω τεκμήριον, if this
would have been a strony proof for him, so let it be also a proof for
me, Ὦ. 49, 58.
1422. The apodosis is sometimes introduced by δέ, ἀλλά,
or αὐτάρ, Which cannot be translated in English. Εἰ.
Εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι, but if they do not give
her up, then 1 will take her myself, 11.1,187.
El AFTER VERBS OF WowverinG, ETC.
1423. Some verbs expressing wonder, delight, contentment,
disappointment, indignation, etc. are followed by a protasis
with εἰ where a causal sentence would often seem more
natural. £E.g.
Θαυμάζω δ᾽ ἔγωγε εἰ μηδεὶς ὑμῶν μήτ᾽ ἐνθυμεῖται μήτ᾽ ὀργίζεται,
and I wonder that no one of you is either concerned or angry (lit. ὑΓ
no one of you is, etc., 1 wonder), D.4,43; ἀγανακτῶ εἰ ὦ vow μὴ οἷός
τ᾽ εἰμὶ εἰπεῖν, 1 ain indignant that (or if) [am not able to say what 1
mean, P. Lach.194*. See also 1502, 2, for the principle of indirect
discourse applied to these sentences.
1424. N. Such verbs are especially θαυμάζω, αἰσχύνομαι, ἀγα-
πάω, and ἀγανακτέω. with δεινόν ἐστιν. They sometimes take ὅτι,
because, and a causal sentence (1505).
1428] THE MOODS. 305
Vil. RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES,
1425. The principles of construction of relative clauses include
all temporal clauses. ‘Those introduced by ἕως, πρίν, and other
articles meaning until, have special peculiarities, and are there-
fore treated separately (1463-1474).
Relative clauses may be introduced by relative pronouns or
adverbs.
1426. The antecedent of a relative is either definite
or indefinite. It is definite when the relative refers to
a definite person or thing, or to some definite time,
place, or manner; it is indefinite when no such definite
person, thing, time, place, or manner is referred to.
Both definite and indefinite antecedents may be either
expressed or understood. Ey.
(Definite.) Ταῦτα a ἔχω ὁρᾷς, you see these things which I have ;
or ἃ ἔχω ὁρᾷς. “Ore ἐβούλετο ἦλθεν, (once) when he wished, he came.
(Indefinite.) Πάντα ἃ ἂν βούλωνται ἕξουσιν, they will have every:
thing which they may want; or ἃ ἂν βούλωνται ἕξουσιν, they will have
whatever they may want. Ὅταν ἔλθῃ, τοῦτο πράξω, when he shall cume
(or when he comes), J will do this. "Ore βούλοιτο, τοῦτο ἔπρασσεν,
whenever he wished, he (always) did this. ‘Qs ἂν εἴπω, ποιῶμεν, as f
shall direct, let us act. "A ἔχει βούλομαι λαβεῖν, 1 want to take what-
ever he has.
DEFINITE ANTECEDENT.
1427. A yelative as such has no effect on the mood
of the following verb. A relative with a definite ante-
cedent therefore may take the indicative (with οὐ for
its negative) or any other construction which could
occur in an independent sentence. δι.
Tis ἔσθ᾽ ὁ χῶρος δῆτ᾽ ἐν ᾧ βεβήκαμεν ; what is the place to which
we have come? 5.0. Ἁ,δὸ, Ἕως ἐστὶ καιρὸς, ἀντιλάβεσθε τῶν
πραγμάτων, (now) while there is an opportunity, take hold of the busi-
ness, D.1,20. Τοῦτο οὐκ ἐποίησεν, ἐν ᾧ τὸν δῆμον ἐτίμησεν ἄν, he did
not do this, in which he might have honored the people, D.21,69. So
ὃ μὴ γένοιτο, and may this not happen, 1.27, 67.
INDEFINITE ANTECEDENT. — CONDITIONAL RELATIVE.
1428. 1. A relative clause with an indefinite antece-
dent has a conditional force, and is called a conditional
relative clause. s Its negative is always μή.
306 SYNTAX. [1429
2. Relative words, like εἰ, if, take ἄν before the subjune.
tive. (See 12992.) With ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἐπεί, and ἐπειδή, ἂν
forms ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἐπάν or ἐπήν (louic ἐπεάν), and ἐπειδάν.
“A with ἄν may form ἄν. In Homer we generally find ὅτε
κε etc. (like εἴ κε, 1403), or dre ete. alone (1437).
1429, Conditional relative sentences have fowr classes,
two (1. II.) containing present and past, and two (1Π].
IV.) containing future conditions, which correspond to
those of ordinary protasis (1386). Class I. has two
forms, one (4) with chiefly particnlar suppositions, the
other (2) with only general suppositions.
1430. I. (a) Present or past condition simply stated,
with the indicative, — chiefly in particular suppositions
(1890). Eg.
"O τι βούλεται δώσω, 1 will give him whatever he (now) wishes
(like ef τι βούλεται, δώσω, if he now wishes anything, 1 will give it).
“A μὴ οἶδα, οὐδὲ οἴομαι εἰδέναι, what Ido not know, 1 do not even think
1 know (hike εἴ τινα μὴ οἷδα, if there are any things which I do nat
know), P.Ap.214; οὖς μὴ evptokor, κενοτάφιον αὐτοῖς ἐποίησαν,
for any whom they did not find (= τινας μὴ εὕρισκον), they raised
a cenotaph, X.6, 49.
1431, (4) 1. Present general condition, depending on
a present form denoting repetition, with subjunctive
(1398, 1).
2. Past general condition, depending on a past form
denoting repetition, with optative (1898, 2). By.
Ὃ τι ἂν βούληται δίδωμι, | (always) give him whatever he wants
(like ἐάν τι βούληται, if he ever wants anything); ὃ Te βούλοιτο
ἐδίδουν, 1 (always) yace him whatever he wanted (like εἴ τι βούλοιτο).
Συμμαχεῖν τούτοις ἐθέλουσιν ἅπαντες, οὖς ἂν ὁρῶσι παρεσκευασμέ-
vous, all wish to be allies of those whom they see prepared, D.4,6.
Ἡνίκ᾽ ἂν οἴκοι γένωνται, δρῶσιν οὐκ ἀνασχετά, when they get home,
they Jo things unbearable, Ar. Palli9. Οὖς μὲν ἴδοι εὐτάκτως
ἰόντας, tives τε εἶεν ἠρώτα, καὶ ἐπεὶ πύθοιτο ἐπηνει, he (always)
asked those whom he saw (at any time) marching in good order, who
they were; and when he learned, he praised them. X.C.5. 3%. "Brady
δὲ ἀνοιχθείη, εἰσήειμεν παρὰ τὸν Σωκράτη, and (each morning)
when the prison was opened, we went in to Socrates, P. Ph. 54,
1431) THE MOODS, 307
1432. N. The indicative sometimes takes the place of the sub-
junctive or optative here, as in other general suppositions (1395).
This occurs especially with ὅσ τις, which itself expresses the same
idea of indefiniteness which ds with the subjunctive or optative
usually expresses; as ὅστις μὴ τῶν ἀρίστων ἅπτεται βουλευμα-
των, κάκιστος εἶναι δοκεῖ, whoever does not cling to the best counsels
seems to be most hase, ὃ. An.178. (Here és dv μὴ ἅπτηται would be
the common expres-ion.)
1433. I]. Present or past condition stated so as to
imply that the condition 8 mot or was not fulfilled
(supposition contrary to fact), with the secondary tenses
of indicative (1397). Evg.
“A μὴ ἐβούλετο δοῦναι, οὐκ dv ἔδωκεν, he would not have given
what he had not wished to give (like εἴ twa μὴ ἐβούλετο δοῦναι, οὐκ
ἂν ἔδωκεν, if he had not wished to give certain things, he would not
hare given them). Οὐκ ἂν ἐπεχειροῦμεν πράττειν ἃ μὴ ἠπιστάμεθα,
we should not (then) be undertaking to do (as we now are) things which
we did not understand (like εἴ τινα μὴ ἠπιστάμεθα, if there were any
things which we did not understand, the whole belonging to a suppo-
sition not realized), 2. Ch.171% So ὃν γῆρας ἔτετμεν, Od. 1, 218.
This case occnrs much Jess frequeutly than the others.
1434, III. Future condition in the more vivid form,
with ἄν and the subjunctive (1408). Ey.
"Ore dv βούληται, δώσω, J will yive him whatever he may wish
(like ἐάν te βούληται, δώσω, tf he shall wish anything, 1 will give it).
Ὅταν μὴ σθένω, πεπάυσομαι, when I (shall) have no more strength,
1 shall cease, 5. An.91. ᾿Αλόχους καὶ νήπια τέκνα ἄξομεν ἐν νήεσσιν,
ἐπὴν πτολίεθρον ἔλω μεν, we will bear off their wives and young chil-
dren in our ships, when we (shall) have taken the city, 11.4, 238.
1435. N. The future indicative cannot be substituted for the
subjunctive here, as it van in common protasis (1405).
1436. JV. Future condition in the less vivid form,
with the optative (1408). Fy.
°O τι βούλοιτο, δοίην ἄν, ] should give him whatever he might
wish (like εἴ re βούλοιτο δοίην ἄν. if he should wish anything, 1 should
give i). Πεινῶν φάγοι dv ὑπότε βούλοιτο, if he were hungry, he
would eat whenever he might wish (like εἴ more βούλοιτο, if he should
ever wish), X.A1.2, 115,
1437. Conditional relative sentences have most of the pecnli-
arities and irregularities of common protasis. Thus, the protasis
808 SYNTAX. [1438
and apodosis may have different fornis (1421); the relative with.
out ἄν or κέ is sometimes found in poetry with the subjunctive
(like εἰ for ἐάν or ef κε, 1396; 1406), especially in general condi-
tions in Homer; the relative (like εἰ, 1411) in Homer may take κέ
or av with the optative; the relative clause may depend on an
infinitive, participle, or other construction (1416; 1419); and the
conjunction δέ may connect the relative clause to the antecedent
clause (1422).
1488. Homeric similes often have the subjunctive with ὡς dre
(oceasionally ws ὅτ᾽ ἄν), sometimes with ws or ὥς τε; as ὡς ὅτε
κινήσῃ Ζέφυρος βαθὺ λήιον, as (happens) when the west wind moves
a deep grain-field, 11.2, 147; ὡς γυνὴ κλαΐῃσι. ... ὡς Ὀδυσεὺς δάκρυον
εἶβεν, as a wife weeps, etc., so did Ulysses shed tears, Οὐ. 8, 523.
ASSIMILATION ΙΝ CONDITIONAL RELATIVE CLAUSES,
1439. When a conditional relative clause expressing
either a future or a general supposition depends on a sub-
junetive or optative, it regularly takes the same mood by
assimilation. Eg.
Ἐάν τινες οἱ ἂν δύνωνται τοῦτο ποιῶσι, καλῶς ἕξει, if any who
may be able shall do this, it will be well; εἴ τινες οἱ δύναιντο τοῦτο
ποιοῖεν, καλῶς ay ἔχοι, Uf any who should be (or were) able should
do this, it would be well. Et@e πάντες ot δύναιντο τοῦτο ποιοῖεν
O that all who may be (or were) able would do this. (Here the opta-
tive ποιοῖεν [1507] makes of δύναιντο preferable to ot dy δύνωνται,
which would express the same idea.) Ἐπειδὰν ὧν ἂν πρίηται
κύριος γένηται, when (in any case) he becomes master of what he has
bought, D.18,47. Ὡς ἀπόλοιτο Kai ἄλλος, ὅ τις τοιαῦτά ye ῥέζοι,
O that any other might likewise perish who should do the like, Οὐ. 1, 47.
TeOvainy dre μοι μηκέτι ταῦτα μέλοι, may 1 die whenever 1 shall
no longer care for these (ὅταν μέλῃ would express the same idea),
Minn. 1,2. Soin Latin: Injurias quas ferre nequeas defugiendo
relinquas.
1440. Likewise, when a conditional relative seutence
depends on a s<coudary tense of the indicative implying
the non-fulfilinent of a condition, it takes by assimilation
a similar form. Εἰ.
Et τινες οἱ ἐδύναντο τοῦτο ἔπρα ξαν, καλῶς ἂν εἶχεν, if any who
had heen able had done this, it would have been well. Εἰ ἐν ἐκείνῃ TH
φωνῇ τε καὶ τῷ τρόπῳ ἔλεγον ἐν οἷς ἐτεθρώμμην, if 1 were speak
ing to you in the dialect and in the manner in which I had been
1447] THE MOODS. 309
brought up (all introduced by εἰ ξένος ἐτύγχανον ὧν, if 1 happened to
be a foreigner), P.Ap.174. So in Latin: Si sulos eos diceres miseros
quibus moriendum essef, neminem tu quidem eorum qui viverent
exciperes.
4441. N. All clauses which come under this principle of assimila-
tion belong (as conditional forms) equally under 1434, 1436, 1431, or
1433. This principle often decides which furm shal) be used in future
conditions (1270, 2).
RELATIVE CLAUSES EXPRESSING PURPOSE.
1442. The relative with the future indicative may ex-
press a purpose. Eg.
Πρεσβείαν πέμπειν ἥτις ταῦτ᾽ épet καὶ παρέσται τοῖς πράγμασιν,
to send an embassy to say this, and to be present at the (ransactions,
D.1,2. Οὐ yap ἔστι μοι χρήματα, ὁπόθεν ἐκτίσω, for 1 have no
money to pay the fine with, P. Ap.d37*.
The antecedent here may be definite or indefinite; but the
negative particle is always μή, as in final clauses (1364).
1443. N. Homer generally has the subjunctive (with κέ joined
to the relative) in this construction after primary tenses, and the
optative (without κέ) after secondary tenses. ‘The optative is
sometiines found even in Attic prose. The earlier Greek here
agrees with the Latin.
1444, N. In this construction the future indicative is very
rarely changed to the future optative after past tenses.
RELATIVE CLAUSES EXPRESSING RESULT.
1445. The relative with any tense of the indicative, or
with a potential optative, may express a result. ‘The nega-
tive is ot. Eg.
Tis οὕτω μαίνεται ὅστις ob βούλεταί σοι φίλος εἶναι ; who is so
mad that he dues not wish to be your friend? Χ. (3, 5% | (Here
wore οὐ βούλεται would have the same meaning.) Οὐδεὶς ἂν γένοιτο
οὕτως ἀδαμάντινος, ὃς ἂν μείνειεν ἐν τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ, nO one would ever
become so like adamant that he would remain firm in his justice
(= Wore peiverey dv), P. Rp.360%.
1446. N. This is equivalent to the use of ὥστε with the finite
moods (1450; 1454). It occurs chiefly after uegative leading
clauses or interrogatives implying ἃ negative.
1447, The relative with a future (sometimes a present)
810 SYNTAX. [1448
indicative may express a result which is aimed at. The
negative here is py. Εἰ.
Εὔχετο μηδεμίών οἱ συντυχίην γενέσθαι, ἡ μιν παύσει καταστρέ.
ψασθαι τὴν Εὐρώπην, he prayed that no such chance might befall him
as to prevent him frum subjugating Europe (= wore pw παῦσαι), Hd.
7,54. Βουληθεὶς τοιοῦτον μνημεῖον καταλιπεῖν ὁ μὴ τῆς ἀνθρωπίνης
φύσεώς ἐστιν, when he wished to leave such a memurial as might be
beyond human nature (= ὥστε μὴ εἶναι), 1.4, 89.
1448, N. This construction (1447) is generally equivalent to
that of ὥστε with the infinitive (1450).
CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES WITH THE INFINITIVE AND
THE FINUPE MOODS.
1449. “Ὥστε (sometimes ws), 80 as, so that, is used
with the infinitive and with the indicative to express
@ result.
1450. With the infinitive (the negative being μή), the
result is stated as one which the action of the leading verb
tends to produce; with the indicative (the negative being
on}, us one which that action actually does produce. Ey.
Πᾶν ποιοῦσιν ὦστε δίκην μὴ διδόναι, they do everything sa as
(1.6. in such @ uray as) not to be punished, ie. they aim at not being
punished, not implying that they actually escape; P.G.479% (But
πᾶν ποιοῦσιν ὥστε δίκην οὐ διδόασιν would mean they do everything
xo thal they are not punished.) Οὕτως ἀγνωμόνως ἔχετε, ὥστε €ATE
Cere αὐτὰ χρηστὰ γενήσεσθαι, ure you so senseless that you expect
them to become good? D.2,26. (But with ὥστε ἐλπίζειν the mean
ing would be so senseless as (0 expect, i.e. senseless enough to expect,
without implying necessarily that you do expect.)
1451, N. These two constructions are essentially distinct in
their nature, even when it is indifferent to the general sense
which is used in a given case; as in οὕτος ἐστὶ δεινὸς ὥστε δίκην
py διδόναι, he is so skilful as not tn be punished, and οὕτως ἐστὶ
δεινὸς ὥστε δίκην οὐ δίδωσιν, ke is so skilful that he is nol punished.
The use of py with the infinitive and of od with the indicative
shows that the distinction was really felt. When the infinitive
with ὥστε has οὐ, it generally represents, in indirect discourse, an
indicative with οὐ of the direct form (see Afvods and Tenses,
§§ 594-598).
1452, The infinitive with ὥστε may express a purpose like a
1460] THE MOODS. 211
final clause: see ὥστε δίκην μὴ διδόναι (= ἵνα μὴ διδῶσι), quoted in
1420. Τὸ may also be equivalent to an object clause with ὅπως
(137 72); as in μηχανὰς εὑρήσομεν, ὥστ᾽ ἐς τὸ πᾶν σε τῶνδ᾽ ἀπαλλάξαι
πόνων, we will find devices to wholly free you from these troubles
(= ὅπως σε ἀπαλλάξυμεν), A. Eu. $2.
1453. Whe infinitive after ὥστε sometimes expresses a
condition, like that after ἐφ᾽ ᾧ or ἐφ᾽ dre (1100). Eg.
᾿Ἐξὸν αὐτοῖς τῶν λοιπῶν ἄρχειν Ἑλλήνων, ὥστ᾽ αὐτοὺς ὑπακούειν
βασιλεῖ, it being ὧν their power to rule the rest of the Greeks, on condi:
tion thal they should themselves obey the King, 1). 0,11.
1454. As ὥστε with the indicative has no effect on the form
of the verb, it may be used in the same way with any verbal form
which can stand in an independent sentence; as ὥστ᾽ οὐκ dy αὐτὸν
γνωρίσαιμι, so that I should not know him, Ἐς Or.379; ὥστε μὴ
Awy στένε, sv do nol lament overmuch, S. El. 1172.
1455. Ν. Ὡς re (never dare) in Homer has the infinitive ouly
twice; elsewhere it meaus simply as, like ὥσπερ.
1456. Ὡς is sometimes used like dere with the infinitive
and the finite moods, but chiefly in Aeschylus, Sophocles,
Herodotus, and Xenophon.
1457, N. Verbs, adjectives, and nouns which cominonly take
the simple infinitive occasionally have the infinitive with ὦστε or
ὡς; as ψηφισάμενοι ὥστε ἀμύνειν, having voted to defend them, T.6,
83; πείθουσιν ὥστε ἐπιχειρῆσαι, they persuade them to make an
attempt, ‘Y.3, 102; φρονιμώτεροι ὥστε μαθεῖν, wiser in learning,
X.0.4, 34; ὀλίγοι ὡς ἐγκρατεῖς εἶναι, too few to have the al
4.C.4,5; ἀνάγκη wore κινδυνεύειν, a necessity of incurring risk
1.6, 51.
1458, N. In the same way (1457) ὥστε or ws with the infinitive
may follow the Comparative with # (1531); as ἐλάττω ἔχοντα
δύναμιν ἢ ἢ ὥστε τοὺς φίλους ὠφελεῖν, having too little power to aid his
friends, X. H.4, 823,
1459. N. Ὥστε or ὡς is occasionally followed by a participle;
aS ὥστε λυ ψαθθαι δέον, so that we must consider, D.3, 1.
1460, Ἐφ᾽ ᾧ or ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε, on condition that, is followed by
the infinitive, and occasion: lly by the future Indicative. Lg.
"Adtepev σε, ἐπὶ τούτῳ μέντοι, ἐφ᾽ ore μηκέτι φιλοσοφεῖν, we
release you, but on this condition, that you shall ny longer bea palate:
pher, PAp.2ue; ἐπὶ τούτῳ ὑπεξίσταμαι, ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε ὑπ᾽ οὐδενὸς ὑμέων
ἄρξομα ἜΣ ἢ withdrare on this condition, that ] shall be ruled by none
of you, Hd.3,83.
312 SYNTAX. [1461
CAUSAL RELATIVE.
1461. A relative clause may express a cause. The verb
is in the indicative, as in causal sentences (1505), and the
negative is generally o& Eg.
Θαυμαστὸν ποιεῖς, ὃς ἡμῖν οὐδὲν δίδως, you do a strange thing in
giving us nothing (like dre σὺ οὐδὲν δίδως), X. A1.2,733; δόξας ἀμαθέᾳ
εἶναι, ὃς . .. ἐκέλευε, Lelieving him to be unlearned, because he
commanded, ete., Tid. 1,33.
Compare causal relative sentences in Latin.
1462. N. When the negative is μή, the sentence is conditional
as well as causal; as ταλαίπωρος εἶ, ᾧ μήτε θεοὶ πατρῷοί εἰσι μήθ᾽
ἱερά, you are wreiched, since you have neither ancestral yods nor tem-
ples- (implying also if you really have none), P. Eu.302%. Compare
the use of siguidem in Latin.
TEMPORAL PARTICLES SIGNIFYING UNTIL AND
BEFORE,
. Ἕως, ἔστε, ἄχρι, μέχρι, ακν ὄφρα.
1463, When ἕως, ἔστε, ἄχρι, μέχρι, and the epic ὄφρα mean
while, so long as, they are not distinguished in their use
from other relatives. But when they mean until, they have
many peculianties. Homer has εἶος or εἴως for ἕως.
1464, When ἕως, ἔστε; ἄχρι, μέχρι, and ὄφρα, until,
refer to a definite past action they take the indicative,
usually the aorist. Eig.
Νῇῆχον πάλιν, clos ἐπῆλθον εἰς ποταμόν, I swam on again, until
1 came into a river, Od.7,280. Ταῦτα ἐποίουν, μέχρι σκότος eye
vero, this they did until darkness came on, X. A.4, 24.
This is the construction of the relative with a definite antece-
dent (1427).
1465. ‘These particles follow the construction of con-
ditional relatives in both forms of future conditions, in
unfulfilled conditions, and in present and past general
suppositions. Eg.
Ἐπώσχες, ἔστ᾽ ἂν καὶ τὰ λοιτὰ προσ μάθης, wait until you (shall)
learn the rest besides (1434), A. Pr.697. Ἐϊποιμ᾽ ἂν... ἕως παρα
τείναιμι τοῦτον, 1 should tell him, ete. until I put him to torture
(1436), X.C.1,37. “Ἡδέως ἂν τούτῳ ἔτι διελεγόμην, ἕως αὐτῷ...
ἀπέδωκα, I should (in that case) gladly have continued (ὁ talk with
1471) THE MOODS. 313
him until I had given him back, etc. (1483), P.G.506. “A δ᾽ ἂν
ἀσύντακτα 3, ἀνάγκη ταῦτα ἀεὶ πράγματα παρέχειν, ἕως ἂν χώραν
λάβη, whatever things are in disorder, these must always make trouble
until they are put in order (1431, 1), X.C.4, 881, Ἡεριεμένομεν
ἑκάστοτε, ἕως ἀνοιχθείη τὸ δεσμωτήριον, we waited each day until
the prison was opened (1431, 2), P. Ph. 594
1466. N. The omission of dy after these particles, when the
verb is in the subjunctive, is more common than it is after εἰ or
ordinary relatives (1406), occurring sometimes in Attic prose; as
μέχρ'. πλοῦς γένηται, until the ship sails, T.1, 187.
1467. Clauses introduced by ἕως ete. frequently imply a pur-
pose; see the examples under 1465. When such clauses depend
upon a past tense, they admit the double construction of indirect
discourse (1502, 3), like final clauses (1369).
1468. N. Homer uses εἰς 6 xe, until, like ἕως xe; and Herodotus
uses ἐς 6 and ἐς οὗ like ἕως.
piv, before, until,
1469. Πρίν is followed by the infinitive, and also
(like ws) by the finite moods.
1470. In Homer πρίν generally has the infinitive without
reference to its meaning or to the nature of the leading
verb. But in other Greek it has the infinitive chiefly when
it means simply before and when the leading clause is
affirmative; it has the finite moods only when it meaus
until (as well as before), and chiefly when the leading verb
is negative or implies a negative. It has the subjunctive
and optative only after negatives.
1471. 1. Examples of πρίν with the infinitive : —
Nate δὲ Tjdaov πρὶν ἐλθεῖν υἷας ᾿Αχαιῶν, and he dwelt in
Pedacum before the coming of the sons of the Achaeans, 11.18, 1T2
(here πρὶν ἐλθεῖν = πρὸ τοῦ ἐλθεῖν). Οὐ μ᾽ ἀποτρέψεις πρὶν χαλκῷ
μαχέσασθαι, you shall not turn me away before (i.e. until) we have
fought together, 11. 30, 957 (here the Attic would prefer πρὶν ἂν
μαχεσώμεθα). ᾿Αποπέμπουσιν αὐτὸν πρὶν ἀκοῦσαι, they send him
away before hearing him, T.9,12. Μεσσήνην εἵλομεν πρὶν Πέρσας
λαβεῖν τὴν βασιλείαν, we took Messene before the Persians obtained
their kingdom, 1.6,26. Πρὶν ὡς ΓΑ φοβον ἐλθεῖν μίαν ἡμέραν οὐκ
ἐχήρευσεν, she was not a widuw a single day before she went to Apho-
bus, D. 30, 33 (here the infinitive is required, as πρίν does not mean
until).
314 SYNTAX. [1472
2. Examples of πρίν, until, with the indicative (generally
after negatives), aid with the subjunctive and optative
{always after negatives), the constructions being the same
as those with ἕως (1464-1467) ; —
Οὐκ ἦν ἀλέξημ᾽ οὐδὲν, πρίν γ᾽ ἐγώ σφισιν ἔδειξα, etc., there was
no relief, until 1 showed them, etc. (1464), A.Pr.479. Οὐ χρή pe
ἐνθένδε ἀπελθεῖν, πρὶν ἂν δῶ δίκην, ] must not depart hence until [am
punished (1434), X..An.5,75 Οὐκ ἂν εἰδείης πρὶν πειρηθείης, you
cannot know until you have wied it (1436), Theog.125. Ἐχρῆν μὴ
πρότερον συμβουλεύειν, πρὶν ἡμᾶς ἐδίδαξαν, etc., they ought not to
have given advice until they had instructed us, etc. (1432), J.4,19.
Ὁρῶσι τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους οὐ πρόσθεν ἀπιόντας, πρὶν av ἀφῶσιν ot
ἄρχοντες, they see that the elders never go away until the authorities
dismiss them (1431, 1), X.Cy. 1,28. ᾿Απηγόρενε μηδένα βάλλειν, πρὶν
Κῦρος ἐμπλησθείη θηρῶν, he forbade uny one to shout until Cyrus
Should be sated with the hunt (1467; 1302, 3), X.C.1, 4"
1472, NX. In Homer πρίν γ᾽ ὅτε (never the simple πρίν) is used
with the indicative, aud πρίν γ᾽ ὅτ᾽ dv (sometimes πρίν, without
av) with the subjunctive.
1473. N. piv, like ἕως ete. (1466), sometimes has the subjunc-
tive without ἄν, even in Attic Greek; as μὴ στέναζε πρὶν μάθῃς, do
not lament before you know, ἃ. Pk. 917.
1474. Πρὶν ἢ (a developed form for πρίν) is used by Herodotus
(rarely by Homer), and πρότερον 7, sooner than, before, by Herodo-
tus and ‘Thucydides, in most of the constructions of πρίν. So
πάρος, before, in Homer with the infinitive. Even ὕστερον ἢ» luter
than, once takes the infinitive by analogy. 7.9.
Πρὶν yap ἢ ὀπίσω σφέας ἀναπλῶσαι. ἥλω ὁ Κροῖσος, for before
they had sailed back, Croesus was taken, Hd.1,78. Οὐδὲ ἥδεσαν
πρότερον ἢ περ ἐπύθοντο Τρηχινίων. they did not even know of it
until they heard from the Trachinians, Hd.7, 175. Μὴ ἀπανίστασθαι
ἀπὸ τῆς πόλιος πρύτερον ἢ ἐξέλωσι, nol lo withdraw from the city
unnl they capture it, Hd.9,86. Πρότερον ἢ αἰσθέσθαι αὐτούς, be-
fore they perceived them. T.6,58. See 'T.1,69; 2,65. Τέκνα ἐξείλοντο
πάρος πετεηνὰ γενέσθαι, they took away the nestlings before they
were fledyed, Od.16,218. So also ἔτεσιν ὕστερον ἑκατὸν ἢ αὐτοὺς
οἰκῆσαι, a hundred years after their own settlement, ‘T. 6,4.
VI. INDIRECT DISCOURSE OR ORATIO OBLIQUA.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES.
1475. A direct quotation or question gives the exact
1481] THE MOODS. 315
words of the original speaker or writer (1.8. of the oratio
recta). In an indirect quotation or question (oratio
obliqua) the original words conform to the construction
of the sentence in which they are quoted.
Thus the words ταῦτα βούλομαι may he quoted either
directly, λέγει τὶς “ταῦτα βούλομαι" or indirectly, λέγει τις ὅτι
ταῦτα βούλεται or φησί τις ταῦτα βούλεσθαι, sume one says thal he
wishes for this. So ἐρωτᾷ “ τί BovAa;” he asks, © what do you want?”
but indirectly ἐρωτᾷ τί βούλεται, he asks what he wants.
1476. Indirect. quotations may be introduced by ὅτι
or ws, that, with a finite verb, or by the infinitive (as
in the above example); sometimes also by the participle.
1477. N. Ὅτι, that, may introduce even a direct quotation; as
εἶπον ὅτι ἱκανοί ἐσμεν, they said, “we are able,” X.A.5,49%
1478. 1. Ὅπως is sometimes used like ὡς, that, especially in
poetry; as τοῦτο μή μοι φράζ᾽, ὅπως οὐκ εἶ κακός, S.0.7. 548.
2. Homer rarely has 6 (neuter of ὅς) for ὅτι, that; as λεύσσετε
γὰρ τό ye πάντες, ὅ μοι γέρας ἔρχεται ἄλλῃ, for you all see this, that
my prize goes another way, 1.1, 120; so 5, 433.
3. Obvexa and ὁθούνεκα, that, sometimes introduce indirect quo-
tatious in poetry.
1479. Indirect questions follow the same principles as
indirect quotations with ὅτε or ws, in regard to their
moods and tenses.
For the words used to introduce indirect questions, see 1605
and 1606,
1480. The term indirect discourse applies to all clauses (even
single clauses in sentences of different construction) which indi-
rectly express the words or thought of any person, even those of
the speaker himself (see 1502).
1481. Indirect quotations after ὅτι and ὡς and indirect
questions follow these general rules : —
1. After primary tenses, each verb retains both the mood
and the tense of the direct discourse.
2. After past tenses, each indicative or subjunctive of the
direct discourse may be either changed to the same tense
of the optative or retained in its original mood and tense.
But all secondary tenses of the indicative in unreal coudi-
tions (1397; 1433) and all optatives remain unchanged.
316 SYNTAX. [1482
1482. N. The imperfect and pluperfect, having no tenses in
the optative, generally remain unchanged in all kinds of sen.
tences (but see 1488). ‘The aorist indicative likewise remaing
unchanged when it belongs to a dependent clause of the direct
discourse (1497, 2). (See 1499.)
1483, When the quotation depends on a verb which
takes the infinitive or participle, its leading verb is changed
to the corresponding tense of the infinitive or participle (ἄν
being retained when there is one), and its dependent verbs
follow the preceding rule (1481).
1484. “Av is never omitted with the indicative or optative
in indirect discourse, if it was used in the direct form; but
when a particle or a relative word has ἄν with the subjunc-
tive in the direct form, as in ἐάν, ὅταν, ὃς dv, etc. (1299, 2),
the ἄν is dropped when the subjunctive is changed to the
optative after a past tense in indirect discourse.
1485. N. “Av is never added in indirect discourse when it was
not used in the direct form.
1486. The negative particle of the direct discourse is
regularly retained in the indirect form. (But see 1496.)
SIMPLE SENTENCES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
IspicaTIve AND OPTATIVE AFTER ὅτι AND ὧς, AND IN INDIRECT
Questions.
1487. After primary tenses an indicative (without ἄν
retains both its mood and its tense in indirect discourse.
After past tenses it is either changed to the same tense
of the optative or retained in the original mood and
tense. Fg.
Λέγει ὅτι γράφει, he says that he is writing ; λέγει ὅτι ἔγρα Φ εν,
he says that he wus writing; λέγει ὅτι ἔγραψεν, he says that he wrote ;
λέξει ὅτι γέγοαφεν, he will say that he has written. "Epwra ti
βούλονται, he asks what they want; ἀγνοῶ τί ποιήσουσιν, I do
not know what they will do.
Εΐπεν ὅτι γράφοι or ὅτι γράφει, he said that he was writing (he "
said γράφω). Ἐπεν ὅτι γράψοι or ὅτι γράψει, he said that he
would write (he said γράψω). Elwev ὅτι ypdwecev or ὅτι ἔγραψεν,
he said that he had written (he said ἔγραψα, 1 wrote). ἘΠπεν on
γεγραφὼς εἴη or ὅτι γέγραφεν, he said that he had written (he
said γέγραφα, I have writien).
1490] THE MOODS. 317
(Ovt.) ᾿Ἐπειρώμην αὐτῷ δεικνύναι; ὅτι of otro μὲν εἶναι σοφὺς, εἴη
δ᾽ οὔ, [ tried to show him that he believed himself to be wise, but was
nol xo (ie. οἴεται μὲν... ἔστε δ᾽ οὔ), PAp LIS. “Ὑπειπὼν ὅτι αὐτὸς
τἀκεῖ πράξοι, ῴχετο, hinting that he would himself attend to Uangs
there, he departed (lie said αὐτὸς τἀκεῖ πράξω), ‘1.1, 90. βλεξαν ὅτι
πέμψειε σφᾶς ὃ ᾿Ινδῶν βασιλεύς, κελεύων ἐρωτᾶν ἐξ ὅτου ὁ πόλεμος
εἴη, they said that the king of the Indians had sent them, commanils
ing them to ask on what account there was war (they said ἔπεμψεν
ἡμᾶς, ἀνὰ the question was ἐκ τίνος ἐστὶν ὁ πόλεμος ;), Χ. (2.11.
Ἤρσο εἴ τις ἐμοῦ εἴη σοφώτερος, he asked whether there wus any one
wiser than 1 (ie. ἔστι τις σοφώτερος 3), 1". Ap. 21%
(inwic.) Ἔλεγον ὅτι ἐλπίζουσι σὲ καὶ τὴν πόλιν ev μοι
χάριν, they said that they hoped you and the state would be grateful to
me, 1.5,23. “Hee δ᾽ ἀγγέλλων τις ὡς ᾿Ελάτεω κατείληπται, same
one was come with a report that Elutea kad been taken (here the per-
fect optative might have heen used). 1.18, 169. ᾿Αποκρινάμενοι dre
πέμψουσι πρέσβεις, εὐθὺς ἀπήλλαξαν, having replied that they
would send ambassadors, they dismissed them at once, V1, 90. "Hare
pow τί ποτε λέγει, 1 was uncertain what he meant {τί ποτε λέγει 5),
P.Ap.21. ᾿Εβουλεύοντο τίν᾽ αὐτοῦ καταλείψουσιν. they were
considering (the question) whom they should leave here, D.19, 122.
1488. N. Occasionally the present optative represents the im-
perfect indicative in this construction; as ἀπεκρίναντο ὅτι οὐδεὶς
μάρτυς παρείη, they replied that there had been no witness present
(οὐδεὶς παρῆν), D.30,2U (here the context makes it clear that wapecy
does not stand for πάρεστι).
1489, 1. In a few cases the Greck changes a present indicative
to the tinperfect, or a perfect to the pluperfect, in indirect discourse,
instead of retaining it or changing it to the optative; as ἐν ἀπορίᾳ
ἦσαν, ἐννοούμενοι ὅτι ἐπὶ ταῖς βασιλέως θύραις ἦσαν, tpotdedu-
κεσαν δὲ αὐτοὺς οἱ βάρβαροι, they were in despair, considering that
they were al the King's gates, and that the barbarians had betrayed
them, X.A.3.1% (See the whole passage.) This is also the Eng-
lish usage.
2. In Homer this is the ordinary construction : see Od.3, 166.
Supstxcrive OR OPTATIVE REPRESENTING THE ISTERROGATIVE
ΘΟ ΝΟ ΤΙΝ,
1490. An interrogative subjunctive (13858), after ἃ
primary tense, retains its mood and tense in an indirect
question; after a past tense, it may be either changed
318 SYNTAX. [1491
to the same tense of the optative or retained in the sub-
junctive. big.
Βονυλεύομαι ὅπως σε ἀποδρῶ, 1 am trying to think how 1 shall
escape you (πῶς σε ἀποδρῶ;), Χ. (΄.1,418.. Οὐκ οἶδ᾽ εἰ Χρυσάντᾳ
τούτῳ δῶ, 1 do not know whether J shal! give (them) to Chrysantas
here, ihid.8,4°% Οὐκ ἔχω τί εἴπω, 1 do not know what] shall say
(τί eimw;), D.9,54. Cf Non habeo quid dicam. "Emyjpovto εἰ
παραδοῖεν τὴν πόλιν, they asked whether they should give up the city
(παραδῶμεν τὴν πόλιν; shall we give up the city?), 11,25. Ἡπόρει
ὃ τι χρήσαιτο τῷ πράγματι, he was ot a loss how to deal with the
matter (τί χρήσωμαι ;), X.H.7,4. “EBowAcvovro εἴτε κατακαύ:
σωσιν εἴτε τι ἄλλο χρήσωνται, they were deliberating whether
they should buxn them or dispose of them in some other way, 'T.2,4.
1491. N. In these questions εἰ (not ἐάν) is used for whether,
with both subjunctive and optative (see the second example in
1490).
1492, NK. An interrogative subjunctive may be changed to the
optative when the leading verb is optative, contrary to the general
usage of indirect discourse (1270, 2); as οὐκ ἂν ἔχοις 6 τι χρήσαιο
σαντῷ, you would not know what to do with yourself, P.G.486%.
IxbicaTIVE OR OPYATIVE WITH av.
1493. An indicative or optative with ἄν retains its mood
and tense (with ἄν) unchanged iu indirect discourse after
ὅτι or ws and in indirect questions. Eg.
Λέγει (or ἔλεγεν) ὅτι τοῦτο ἂν ἐγένετο, he says (or said) that
this would have happened; ἔλεγεν ὅτι οὗτος δικαίως ἂν ἀποθάνοι, he
said that this man would justly die. ᾿Ηρώτων εἰ δοῖεν dy τὰ πιστά,
they asked whether they would give the pledges (δοίητε ἄν ;), X.A.4, 8.
INFINITIVE AND ParticipLe IN Ispinect Discourse.
1494, Each tense of the infinitive or participle in in-
direct discourse represents the tense of the finite verb
which would be used in the direct form, the present
and perfect including the imperfect and pluperfect.
Each tense with ἄν can represent the corresponding
tenses of either indicative or optutive with ἄν. Eg.
᾿Αρρωστεῖν προφασίζεται, he pretends that he is sick, ἐξώμοσεν
ἀρρωστεῖν τουτονί he (οὐ an oath that this man was sick, D.19, 124.
Κατασχεῖν φησι τούτους, he says that he detained them, ibid. 39.
1497] THE MOODS. 319
«
Ἔφη χρήμαθ᾽ ἑαντῷ τοὺς Θηβαίους ἐπικεκηρνχέναι, he said that
the Thebuns had offered a reward for him, ibid. 2). ᾿Ἐπαγγέλλεται τὰ
δίκαια ποιήσειν, he promises (0 do what is right, ibid. 40.
Ἤγγειλε τούτους ἐρχομένους, he aunvunced that these were
coming (οῦτοι ἔρχονται); ; ἀγγίλλει τούτους ἐ ἐλόοντας, he announces
that these came (οὗτοι ἦλθον) ; ἀγγέλλει τοῦτο γενησόμενον, he
announces that Us wil be done: ἤγγειλε τοῦτο γενησόμενον,
he announced that this would Le donee ἤγγειλε τοῦτο γεγενημένον,
he announced that Uas had been done (τοῦτο γεγένηται).
See examples of dy with infinitive and participle in 1308. For
the present infinitive and participle as imperfect, see 1285 and 1289.
1495. ‘Uhe infinitive is said to stand in indirect discourse, and
its tenses correspond to those of the finite moods, when it depends
on a verb implying thought or the expression of thought, and when
also the thought, as originally conceived, would have been expressed
by some tense of the indicative (with or without dy) or optative
(with av), so that. it can be transferred without change of tense to
the iufinitive. Thus in βούλεται ἐλθεῖν, he wishes to go, ἐλθεῖν
represents no form of either aorist indicative or aorist optative,
and is not iu indirect discourse. But in φησὶν ἐλθεῖν, he says that
he went, ἐλθεῖν represents ἦλθον of the direct discourse. (See Greek
Moods and Tenses, § 681.)
1496. ‘The regular negative of the infinitive and participle in
“Inttirect discourse is οὐ, but exceptions occur. Especially the
infinitive after verbs of hoping, promising, and swearing (see 1286)
regularly has μή for its negative; as ὥμνυε μηδὲν εἰρηκέναι, he swore
that he had said nothing, D.2), 119.
INDIRNECE QUOTATION Ol COMPLEX SENTENCES.
1497. 1. When a complex sentence is indirectly
quoted, its leading verb follows the rule for simple
sentences (1487-1494).
2. After primary tenses the dependent verbs retain
the same mood and tense. After past tenses, dependent
primary tenscs of the indicative and all dependent sub-
junctives may either be changed to the same tense of
the optative or retain their original mood and tense.
When a subjunctive becomes optative, ἄν is dropped, ἐάν,
ὅταν, ele. becoming εἰς ὅτε, ete. But dependent second-
ary tenses of the indicative remain unchanged. Ey.
320 SYNTAX. (1498
‘
*Av ὑμεῖς λέγητε, ποιήσειν (φησὶν) ὃ μήτ᾽ αἰσχύνην μήτ'
ει αὐτῷ φέρει, yf you (shall) say so, he says he will do Ai
does not bring shame or discredit fo hin, D.19, 41. Here no change
is made, except in ποιήσειν (1493).
2. *Arexpivuto 6 OTL μανθάνοιεν ἃ οὐκ ἐπίσταιντο, he replied,
that they were learning what they did not understand (he said μανθά-
vovow ἃ οὐκ ἐπίστανται, which might have been retained), P.Eu
276% EY τινα φεύγοντα λήψοιτο, προηγόρενεν ὅτι ὡς πολεμίῳ
χρήσοιτο, he announced that, if he should catch any one running
away, he should treat him as an enemy (he said εἴ τινα λήψομαι, χρή-
copar), X.C.3,13 (1405). Νομίζων, doa τῆς πόλεως προλάβοι,
πάντα ταῦτα BeBulws ἕξειν. believing that he should hold all those
places securely which he should take Sra the city beforehand (σ᾽ ἂν
προλάβω, ἕξων, |).18,30. Ἐδόκει μοι ταύτῃ πειρᾶσθαι σωθῆναι, ἐνθυ-
μουμένῳ ὅτι, ἐὰν μὲν λάθω, σωθήσομαι, if seemed Lest lo me fo try
to gain safety in this way, thinking that, if I should escape notice,
1 should be saved (we wight have had εἰ λάθοιμι, σωθησοίμην),
L.12,15. "Edagav τοὺς ἄνδρας ἀποκτενεῖν ols ἔχουσι ζῶντας,
they said that they should bill the men whom they had alive (ἀποκτε-
νοῦμεν οἷς ἔχομεν, which might have Leen changed to ἀποκτενεῖν
οὖς ἔχοιεν), 'T.2,5. Πρόδηλον ἦν (τοῦτο) ἐσόμενον, εἰ μὴ κωλύ:
σέετε, il was plain that this would be so unless you should prevent
(ἔσται, εἰ μὴ κωλύσετε, which might have become εἰ μὴ κωλύσοιτε),
Aesch. 3, 90.
Ἤλπιζον τοὺς Σικελοὺς ταύτῃ, ods μετεπέμψαντο, ἀπαντή-
σέεσθαι, they hoped the Sikels whom they had sent for would meet them
here, ἜΝ 7, 80.
1498. (ne verb may be changed to the optative while another
is retained; as δηλώσας ὅτι ἕτοιμοί εἰσι μάχεσθαι. εἴ τις ἐξέρχοιτο,
having shown that they were ready to fight if any one should come
Jorth (ἕτοιμοί ἐσμεν, ἐάν τις ἐξέρχηται), X.C.4, 1}, This sometimes
causes ἃ variety uf constructions in the same sentence.
1499, The aorist indicative is not changed to the aorist opta-
tive in dependent clauses, beciuse in these the aorist optative yen-
erally represents the aorist subjunctive.
The present indicative is seldom changed to the present optative
in dependent clauses, for a similar reason.
Vor the imperfect and pluperfect, see 1482.
1500. N. A dependent optative of the dircet form of course
remains unchanged in all indirect discourse (1481, 2).
1501. N. Occasionally a dependent present or perfect indica-
tive is changed to the imperfect or pluperfect, as in the leading
clause (1459).
1602] THE MOODS. 221
1502, The principles of 1497 apply also to all depen-
dent clauses after past tenses, which express indirectly
the past thought of any person. This applies especially
to the following constructions : —
1. Clauses depending on an infinitive after verbs of wish-
ing, commanding, advising, and others which imply thought
but do not take the infinitive ip indirect discourse (1495).
2. Clauses containing a protasis with the apodosis implied
in the context (1420), or with the apodosis expressed in a
verb like θαυμάζω (1423).
3. Temporal clauses expressing a past intention, purpose,
or expectation, especially those introduced by ἕως or πρίν.
4. Even ordinary relative sentences, which would regu-
larly take the indicative.
(1) ᾿Ἐβούλοντο ἐλθεῖν, εἰ τοῦτο γένοιτο. they wished to go if this
should happen. (We might have ἐὰν τοῦτο yévytat, expressing
the forin, if this shall happen, in which the wish would be conceived).
Here ἐλθεῖν is not in indirect discourse (1495). "ExéAevoey 6 te
δύναιντο λαβόντας μεταδιώκειν, he commanded them to take what
they could and pursue (we might have 6 re dy δύνωνται, represent-
ing 6 τι ἂν δύνησθε), X.C.7, 37. Προεῖπον αὐτοῖς μὴ ναυμαχεῖν
"κι Κορινθίοις, ἣν μὴ ἐπὶ Κέρκυραν πλέωσι καὶ μέλλωσιν ἀποβαίνειν,
they instructed them not to engage in a sea-fight with Corinthians,
unless these should be sailing against Corcyra and should be on the
point of landing (we might have εἰ μὴ πλέοιεν καὶ μέλλοιεν),
T.1, 45.
(2) Φύλακας συμπέμπει, ὅπως φυλάττοιεν αὐτὸν, καὶ εἰ τῶν ἀγρίων
τι φανείη θηρίων, he sends (sent) guards, to guard him and (to he
ready) in case any of the savage beasts should appear (the thought
heing ἐάν re φανῇ), X.C.1,4% Τάλλω, ἣν ἔτι ναυμαχεῖν οἱ ᾿Αθη-
ναῖοι τολμήσωσι, παρεσκευάζοντο, they made the other preparations,
(to he ready) in case the Athenians should still venture ἃ naval battle,
T.7,59. "Ὠικτειρον, εἰ ἁλώσοιντο, they pitted them, if they were
to be captured (the thought being we pity them if they are to he
captured, εἰ ἁλώσονται, which might be retained), X.4.1,4%
"Ἔχαιρον ἀγαπῶν εἴ τις ἐάσοι, I reyoired, being cantent if any one
would let it pass (the thought was ἀγαπῶ εἴ τις ἐάσ εἰ), 1". Rp. 450%
᾿Εθαύμαζεν εἴ τις ἀργύριον πράττοιτο, he wondered that any one
demanded. money, X. M.1, 27; but in the same book (1, 118) we find
ἐθαύμαζε δ᾽ εἰ μὴ φανερὸν αὐτοῖς ἐσ τιν, he wondered that i was not
plain.
322 SYNTAX. [15038
(8) Σπονδὰς ἐποιήσαντο ἕως ἀπαγγελθείη τὰ λεχθέντα εἰς Λακε-
δαίμονα, they made a truce, (to continue) until whut had been said
should be reported at Sparta (theiy thought was ἕως ἂν ἀπα γγελθῇ),
X.H.3,2". Οὐ yap δή σφεας ἀπίει ὁ θεὸς THs ἀποικίης, πρὶν δὴ
ἀπίκωνται ἐς αὐτὴν Λιβύην, for the God did not mean to release
them from the colony until they should actually come to Libya (we
might have ἀπίκοιντο), Hd.4,157. Mdvorres ἕστασαν ὁππότε πύρ.
γος Τρώων ὁρμήσειε, they stood waiting until (for the time when)
a column should rush upon the Trojans, [1.4,334.
(4) Kai ἥτεε σῆμα ἰδέσθαι, ὅττι ῥά ot γαμβροῖο πάρα Προίτοιο
φέροιτο, he asked to see the token, which le was bringing (as he
said) from Proetus, 116,176. Κατηγύρεον τῶν Αἰγινητέων τὰ πε-
ποιήκοιεν προδόντες τὴν Ἑλλάδα, they accused the Aeginetans for
what (as they suid) they had done in betraying Greece, Hd.6, 49.
For the same principle in causal sentences, see 1506.
1503. N. On this principle, clauses introduced by ἕνα, ὅπως, ὡς,
ὄφρα, and μή adinit the double construction of indirect discourse,
and allow the subjunctive or future indicative to stand unchanged
after past tenses (see 1369). The same principle extends to all
conditional and all conditional relative and temporal sentences
depending on clauses with ἔνα, etc., as these too belong to the in-
direct discourse.
Οὐχ ὅτι, οὐχ ὅπως, μὴ ὅτι, μὴ ὅπως,
1δ04, These expressions, hy the ellipsis of a verb of
saying, often mean J do not speak of, or not lo speak of.
With οὐχ an indicative (6.5. λέγω) was originally under-
stood, and with μή an imperative or subjunctive (e.g. λέγε
or εἴπῃς). Eg.
Οὐχ ὅπως τὰ σκεύη ἀπέδοσθε, ἀλλὰ καὶ αἱ θύραι ἀφηρπάσθησαν,
I do not mention your selling the furniture (i.e. not only did you sell
the furniture), out even the dvors were carried off, Lys.19,31. My
ὅτι θεὸς, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀνθρωποὶ ... οὐ φιλοῦσι τοὺς ἀπιστοῦντας, not only
God (not to speak of God), but also men fail to lave those who distrust
them, X.C.7,2", Πεπαύμεθ' ἡμεῖς. οὐχ ὅπως σε παύσομεν, we have
been stopped ourselves ; there is no talk af stopping you, S. FL. 796.
When these forms were thus used, the original ellipsis was prob-
ably never present to the mind.
IX. CAUSAL SENTENCES.
1505. Causal sentences express a cause, and are intro-
duced by ὅτι; ws, because, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, Ste, ὁπότε, Since,
1509) THE MOODS. 323
and by other particles of similar meaning. They have
the indicative after both primary and secondary tenses.
The negative particle is od. E.y.
Κήδετο γὰρ Δαναῶν. ὅτι pa θνήσκοντας ὁρᾶτο, Sor she pitied the
Danai, because she saw them dying, 111,56. “Ore τοῦθ᾽ οὕτως ἔχει,
προσήκει προθύμως ἐθέλειν ἀκούειν, since this ts sv, iis becoming that
you should be willing to hear eagerly, 1).1,1.
A potential optative or indicative may stand in a causal sen-
tence: see J).18,49 and 79.
1506. XN. On the principle of indirect discourse (1502), a
causal mares after a past tense may have the optative, to imply
that the canse is assigned on the authority of some other person
than the writer; as τὸν Περικλία ἐκάκιζον, ὅτι στρατηγὸς ὧν οὐκ
ἐπεξάγοι, they abused Pericles, because (as they said) being general
he did not lead them out, 1.9.3}. (This assigns the Athenians’
reason for abusing Pericles, but does not show the historian’s
opinion.)
X. EXPRESSION OF A WISH,
1507, When a wish refers to the future, it is expressed
by the optative, either with or without ee or εἰ yap
(Homeric also αἴθε, at γάρ), O that, O if. The nega-
‘Tiveis joy, Which can stand alone with the optative. Eg.
Ὑμῖν θεοὶ δοῖεν ἐκπέρσαι Πριάμοιο πόλιν, may the Gods grant to
you (ὁ destroy Prian’s cily, 1..1,18.. At γὰρ ἐμοὶ τοσσήνδε θεοὶ δύνα-
μιν περιθεῖεν, O that the Gods would clothe me with so much strength,
04.3,205. To μὲν viv ταῦτα πρήσσοις τάπερ ἐν χερσὶ ἔχεις, for
the present may you continue to do these things which you have now in
hand, Md.7,5. Εἴθε φίλος ἡμῖν γένοιο, O that you may become
our friend, X.11.4,13. Μηκίτι ζῴην ἐγώ, may 1 no longer live,
Ay. N.1255. Τεθναίην, dre pot μηκίτι ταῦτα μέλοι, may 1 die
then 1 shall na linger care for hese things (1439), Minn. }, 2.
The force of the tenses here is the same as in protasis (see 1272).
1508. Tn poetry ef alone is sometimes used with the optative in
wishes ; ws εἴ por γένοιτο φθύγγος ἐν βραχίοσιν, O that 7 might find
a voice in my arms, KE. Hee. 836.
1509. N. The pocts, especially Homer, sometimes prefix ὡς
(probably exclaniatory) to the optative in wishes; as ws ἀπόλοιτο
καὶ ἄλλος ὅτις τοιαῦτά ye ῥ΄ ζοι, likutoise let any other parish who
may do the like, Od.3,47.
324 SYNTAX. £1510
1510. In poetry, especially in Homer, the optative alone some-
times expresses a concession or permission, sometimes 8 command or
exhortation; as αὖτις ᾿Αργείην “Ἑλένην Μενέλαος ἄγοιτο, Menelaus
may take hack Argive Helen, 1|.4,10. Τεθναίης, ὦ Προῖτ᾽, ἢ κά-
κτανε Βελλεροφόντην, either die, or kill Bellerophontes, 1|.0,.164,
Here, and in wishes without εἰ, εἰ γάρ, ete, we probably have an
original independent use of the optative; while wishes introduced
by any form of εἰ are probably elliptical protases.
(See Appendix I. in Greek Moods and Tenses, pp. 371-389.)
1511. When a wish refers to the present or the past,
and it is iinplied that its object ἐς wot or was not at-
tained, it is expressed in Attic Greck by a secondary
tense of the indicative with εἴθε or εἰ yap, which here
caunot be omitted. The negative is μή. The imper-
fect and aorist are distinguished here as πὶ protasis
(1897). Ey.
Εϊθε τοῦτο ἐποίει, O that he were doing this, or O that ἂς had
done this. Εἴθε τοῦτο ἐποίησεν, O that he had done this; εἰ yap μὴ
ἐγένετο τοῦτο, Ὁ that this had nol happened. Ei0” εἶχες βελτίους
φρένας, O that thou hadst a better understanding, Vi. El.106), Et yap
τοσαύτην δύναμιν εἶχον, O that 1 had so grew power, ELA 107,
Kide σοι τότε συνεγενόμην, O that I had then met with you,
X. 47.1. 245.
1512, The aorist ὥφελον, ought, of ὀφείλω, debeo, owe, and
in Homer sometimes the imperfect ὥφελλον, are used with
the infinitive, chiefly in poetry, to express ἃ present or past
unattained wish (1402, 2). Eig.
ὌὭφελε τοῦτο ποιεῖν, would that he were doing this (lit. he ought
to be doing this), ov would that he had done this (habitually) ; ὥφελε
τοῦτο ποιῆσαι, would that ke had done this. (or the distinction
made by the different tenses of the infinitive, see 1400, 2). Τὴν
Oper ἐν νήεσσι κατακτάμεν Άρτεμις, would that Artemis had
slain her at the ships, 11.19, 59.
1513. N. "Qdedrov with the infinitive is uegatived by μή (not
οὐ), and it may even be preceded by εἴθε, εἰ γάρ, or ws; aS μή ποτ᾽
ὥφελον λιπεῖν τὴν Σκῦρον; O that I had never left Seyros, S. Ph. 969;
εἰ yap ὥφελον οἷοί re εἶναι, O shat they were able, P.Cr.444;
ὡς wperes ὀλέσθαι, would thal you had perished, 11.3, 428.
1514. In Homer the present optative (uenerally with ee or εἰ
yop) may express an unattained wish in present time; as εἴθ᾽ ὡς
1517] THE INFINITIVE, 325
ἡβώοιμι Bin δέ μοι ἔμπεδος εἴη, O that 1 were again as young and
my strength were firm, 11.11, 670.
This corresponds to the Homeric use of the optative in unreal
conditions and their apodoses (1398). In both constructions the
present optative is commonly future in Homer, as in other Greck.
1515. Homer never uses the indicative (1511) in wishes. He
always expresses a past wish by the construction with ὠφελον
(1512), and a present wish sometimes by ὥφελον and sometimes
by the present optative (1514).
THE INFINITIVE.
1516. 1. The infinitive is originally a neuter verbal
noun, with many attributes of a verb. Thus, like a
verb, it has voices and tenses; it may have a subject or
object; and it is qualified by adverbs, not by adjectives.
2. When the definite article came into use with other
nouns (see 937, 4), it was used also with the infinitive,
which thus becaine more distinctly a noun with four cases.
For the subject of the infinitive, see 895. Fur the case of predi-
cate nouns and adjectives when the subject is omitted, see 927
and 928.
INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE.
As Sungect, Prepicarr, Onsecr, Or APPOSITIVE,
1517. The infinitive may be the subject nominative
of a finite verb (especially of an impersonal verb, 898,
or of ἐστί), or the subject accusative of another infini-
tive. It may be a predicate nominative (907), and it
may stand in apposition to a noun (911). Eg.
Συνέβη αὐτῷ ἐλθεῖν, it happened to him to go; ἐξῆν μένειν, τ
was possible to remain; ἡδὺ πολλοὺς ἐχθροὺς ἔχειν; is it pleasant to
have many enemies? Φησὶν ἐξεῖναι τούτοις μένειν, he says it is posst-
ble for these to remain (μένειν being subject of ἐξεῖναι). To γνῶναι
ἐπιστήμην λαβεῖν ἐστιν, to learn is to ucquire knowledge, P.7h. 209%,
Τὸ yap θάνατον δεδιέναι οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἐστὶν ἢ δοκεῖν σοφὸν εἶναι
μὴ ὄντα, for to fear death (the fear of death) is nothing else than to
seem to be wise without being so, P.Ap.29% Els οἰωνὸς ἄριστος,
ἀμύνεσθαι περὶ πάτρης, one omen is best, to fight for our country,
11.12, 243. For the subject infinitives with the article, see 1542.
326 SYNTAX. [1518
1518. ‘The infinitive may be the object of a verb. It
generally has the force of an object accusative, some-
times that of an accusative of kindred signification
(1081), and sometimes that of an object genitive.
1519. The object infinitive not in indirect discourse
(1495) follows verbs whose action naturally implies another
action as its object, especially those expressing wish, com-
mand, advice, cause, attempl, intention, prevention, ability, jit-
ness, necessity, or their opposites. Such verbs are in general
the same in Greek as in English, and others will be learned
by practice. The negative is μή. Eg.
Βούλεται ἐλθεῖν, he wishes to go; βούλεται τοὺς πολίτας πολε-
μικοὺς εἶναι, he wishes the citizens to be warlike; παραινοῦμέν σοι
μένειν, we advise you to remain; προείλετο πολεμῆσαι, he pre-
Jerred to make war; κελεύει σε μὴ ἀπελθεῖν, he commands you not
to depart; ἀξιοῦσιν ἄρχειν, they claim the right to rule; ἀξιοῦται
θανεῖν, he is thought to deserve to die; δέομαι ὑμῶν συγγνώμην μοι
ἔχειν, J ask you tu have consideration for me. So κωλύει σε βαδί
ζειν, he prevents you from marching: ob πίφυκε δουλεύειν, he is
not horn ta be a slave; ἀναβάλλεται τοῦτο ποιεῖν, he postpones doing
this; κινδυνεύει θανεῖν, he is in danger of death.
1520. XN. The tenses here used are chiefly the present and
aorist, and these do not differ in their time (1272). In this con-
struction the infinitive has no more reference to time than any
other verbal noun would have, but the meaning of the verb gener
ally gives it a reference to the future; as in ἀξιοῦται θανεῖν (above)
θανεῖν expresses time only so far as θανάτου would do so in its
place.
1521. The infinitive may depend on a noun and a verb
(generally ἐστί) which together are equivalent to a verb
which takes an object infinitive (1510). Fug.
᾿Ανάγκη ἐστὶ πάντας ἀπελθεῖν, there is a necessity that all
should withdraw ; κίνδυνος ἣν αὐτῷ παθεῖν τι, he was in danger of
suffering something; ἐλπίδας ἔχει totto ποιῆσαι, he has hopes of
doing this. "Opa ἀπιέναι, it is time lo go away, P.Ap.424. Tots
στρατιώταις ὁρμὴ ἐνέπεσε ἐκτειχίσαι τὸ χωρίον, an impulse to
Jortify the place fell upon the soldiers, 'V.4,4.
For the infinitive with τοῦ depending on a noun, see 1547.
1522. 1. The infinitive in indirect discourse (1495) is
1526) THE INFINITIVE, 327
generally the object of a verb of saying or thinking or some
equivalent expression. Here each tense of the infinitive
corresponds in time to the same tense of some finite mood.
See 1494, with the examyples.
2. Many verbs of this class (especially the passive of
λέγω) allow both ἃ personal and an impersonal construction.
Thus we can say λέγεται ὁ Κῦρος ἐλθεῖν, Cyrus is said to have
gone, or λέγεται τὸν Κῦρον ἐλθεῖν, tt is said that Cyrus went.
Aoxéw, scent, is generally used personally; as δοκεῖ εἶναι σοφός,
he seems to be wise.
1523. 1. Of the three common verbs meaning to say, —
{a) φημί regularly takes the infinitive in indirect dis-
course ;
(v) εἶπον regularly takes ὅτι or ὡς with the indicative or
optative ;
(c) λέγω allows either construction, but in the active
voice it generally takes ὅτι or ὡς.
Other verbs which regularly take the infinitive in indirect
discourse are οἴομαι, ἡγέομαι, νομίζω, and δοκέω, Meaning 10
believe, or to think.
2, Exceptional cases of εἶπον with the infinitive are more com-
mon than those of φημί with ὅτε or ὡς (which are very rare).
Εἶπον, commanded, takes the infinitive regularly (1519).
For the two constructions allowed after verbs of hoping, expect-
ing, etc., see 1286.
1524. N. A relative clause depending on an infinitive in indi-
rect discourse sometimes takes the infinitive by assimilation; as
ἐπειδὴ δὲ γενέσθαι ἐπὶ τῇ οἰκία, (ἔφη) ἀνεῳγμένην καταλαμβάνειν
τὴν θύραν, and when they came to the house, (he καλή} they found the
door open, P. Sy.1744. Herodotus allows this assinilation even
after εἰ, Uf, and Sere because.
1525. In narration, the infinitive often seems to stand
for the indicative, when it depends on some word like
λέγεται, tt ts said, expressed or even implied in what pre-
cedes. Eg.
᾿Απικομένους δὲ ἐς τὸ Ἄργος, διατίθεσθαι τὸν φόρτον. and
having came to Argus, they were (it is said) setting out their cargo for
sale, Hd.1,1. Διατίθεσθαι is an imperfect infinitive (1285, 1): see
also Hd. 1,24, and Χ. C.1, 35
328 SYNTAX. {1526
INrixitive with ADJECTIVES.
1526. The infinitive may depend on adjectives cor.
responding in meaning to verbs which take an object
infinitive (1519), especially those expressing ability,
finess, desert, willingness, and their opposites. Eg.
Δυνατὸς ποιεῖν τοῦτο, able to do this; δεινὸς λέγειν, skilled in
speaking; ἄξιος τοῦτο Aa βεῖν, worthy to receive this; πρόθυμος λέ:
γειν, eager to speak. Madaxot καρτερεῖν, (100) effeminate to
endure, P.Rp.556"; ἐπιστήμων λέγειν τε καὶ σιγ ἂν, knowing how
bath to speak and to be silent, Ὁ. Phair. 2768,
So τοιοῦτοι οἷοι πονηροῦ τινος ἔργου ἐφίεσθαι, capable of aiming
(such as to aim) at any vicious act, X.C.1,23; also with οἷος alone,
οἷος ἀεί wore weta βάλλεσθαι, one likely to be always changing,
X. A. 2,34,
1527. Ν Δίκαιος, just, and some other adjectives may thus be
used personally with the infinitive; as δίκαιός ἐστι τοῦτο ποιεῖν,
he has a right to do this (equivalent to δίκαιόν ἐστιν αὐτὸν τοῦτο
ποιεῖν).
ΤΑΜΊΤΙΝΟ ἸΧΕΙΝΊΤΙΝΕ with AbsEctIvES, ADVERBS, AND Nouns.
1528. Any adjective or adverb may take an infinitive
to limit its meaning to a particular action. Fy.
Θέαμα αἰσχρὸν ὁρᾶν, a sight disyraceful to behold ; λόγοι ὑμῖν
χρησιμώτατοι ἀκοῦσαι, words most useful for you to hear ; τὰ χαλε-
πώτατα εὑρεῖν, the things hardest to find. ἸΓολιτεία ἥκιστα χαλεπῇ
συζῆν, a government least hard to live under, 1’. Pol. 302%. Olxca
ἡδίστη ἐνδιαιτᾶσθαι, α house most pleasant to live in, X.M.3, 8%
Κάλλιστα (adv.) ἰδεῖν, in αὐ manner most delightful to behold,
X. €.8, 36
1529. N. This infinitive (1528) is generally active rather than
Passive; as πρᾶγμα χαλεπὸν ποιεῖν, ἃ thing hard to do, rather than
χαλεπὸν ποιεῖσθαι, hard to be done.
1580, N. Nouns and even verbs may take the infinitive as a
limiting accusative (1058); as θαῦμα ἰδέσθαι, a wonder to Leholil,
Od.8,366, ᾿Αριστεύεσκε μάχεσθαι, he was the first in fighting
(like μάχην), 116,400. Aoxets διαφέρειν αὐτοὺς ἰδεῖν; do you think
they differ in appearance (to lool: at)? P. Rp. 4956.
1531. N. Here belongs the infinitive after a comparative with
%, than; as νόσημα μεῖζον ἢ φέρειν, a disease too heavy to bear
5.0. T.1293.
For ὥστε with this infinitive, see 1458.
1536) THE INFINITIVE, 329
INFINITIVE OF PuRPOSE.
1532. 1. The infinitive may express a purpose. Eg.
Οἱ ἄρχοντες, ots εἵλεσθε ἄρχειν pou, the rulers, whom you chose
to rule me, P.Ap.28% Τὴν πύλιν φυλάττειν αὐτοῖς παρέδωκαν,
they deliwered the city to them to guard, Η.4,415, Θεάσασθαι παρὴν
τὰς γυναῖκας πιεῖν φερούσας, the women were to be seen bringing
them (something) to drink, X. H.7, 29.
2. Here, as with adjectives (1529), the infinitive is active rather
than passive; aS κτανεῖν ἐμοί νιν ἔδοσαν, they gave her to me to
kill (to be killed), I. Tro. 874.
1538. N. In Homer, where ὥστε only rarely has the sense of so as
(1455), the simple infinitive may express a result; as τίς σφωε ξυνέηκε
μάχεσ θαι; who brought them into conflict so as to contend ? 11.1,8.
AxssOLeTE Ixrinitive.
1534, The infinitive may stand absolutely in parentheti-
cal phrases, generally with ὡς or ὅσον. Eg.
The most common of these is ws ἔπος εἰπεῖν or ws εἰπεῖν, 50 to
speak. Others are ὡς συντόμως (or συνελόντι, 1172, 2) εἰπεῖν, to speak
concisely ; τὸ ξύμπαν εἰπεῖν, on the whole; ὡς ἀπεικάσαι, to judge
(i.e. as far as we can judge); ὅσον γέ μ᾽ εἰδέναι, as fur as I know;
ws ἐμοὶ δοκεῖν, or ἐμοὶ δοκεῖν, as il seems to me; ὡς οὕτω γ᾽ ἀκοῦ-
σαι, αἱ first heariny (or without ὡς). So ὀλίγου δεῖν and μικροῦ
δεῖν, to want litile, ie. almost (see 1110, b).
Herodotus has ὡς λόγῳ εἰπεῖν and ov πολλῷ λόγῳ εἰπεῖν, not
to make a long story, in short.
1535. N. In certain cases εἶναι seems to be superfluous; espe-
cially in ἑκὼν εἶναι, willing or willingly, which generally stands in
a negative sentence. So in τὸ νῦν εἶναι, at present; τὸ τήμερον
εἶναι, to-day; τὸ ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνοις εἶναι and similar phrases, as far as
depends on them; τὴν πρώτην εἶναι, at first, Hd.1,153; κατὰ τοῦτο
εἶναι, so far as concerns this, P.2Pr.317*; ὡς πάλαια el vat, consider-
ing their age, 'T.1,21; and some other phrases.
Inrinitive ix Commanns, Wises, Laws, ETc.
1536. The infinitive with a subject nominative is some-
times used like the second person of the imperative, espe-
cially in Homer. Eg.
Μή ποτε καὶ σὺ γυναικί περ ἤπιος εἶναι, he thou never indulgent
to thy wife, Οἀ.11,411. Οἷς μὴ πελάζειν, do not approach these
(= μὴ πέλαζε), A. Pr.712.
For the third person, with a subject accusative, see 1537.
330 SYNTAX. (1637
1537, The infinitive with a subject accusative sometimes
expresses a wish, like the optative (1507); and sometimes
a command, like the third person of the imperative. E.g.
Ζεῦ πάτερ, ἡ Αἴαντα λαχεῖν ἢ Τυδέος υἱόν, Father Zeus, may the
lot fall either on Ajax or on the son of Tydeus (- Αἴας λάχοι, etc.),
11.7,179; θεοὶ πολῖται, μή με δουλείας τυχεῖν, O ye Gods who hold
our city, may slavery not be my lol, A. Se.253. 'Γρῶας ἔπειθ᾽ 'Ελένην
ἀποδοῦναι, fet the Trufans then surrender Helen (= ἀποδοϊενὶ, 11. 3,285.
1538. X. This construction (1537) has been explained by sup-
plying a verb like δός, grant (see δὸς τίσασθαι, grant that 1 may take
vengeance, 11.3,331), or γίνοιτο, may it Le.
1539, N. For the infinitive in exclamations, which generally
has the article, see 1554.
1540. In laws, treaties, and proclamations, the infinitive
often depends on ἔδοξε or δίδοκται, be it enacted, or κελεύεται,
it is commanded; which may be expressed in a previous
sentence or understood. E.g.
Δικάζειν δὲ τὴν ἐν ᾿Αρείῳ πάγῳ φόνου, and (be it enacted) that
the Senate on the Areopagqus shall hace Jurisdiction in cases of murder,
D.23,22. "Ἔτη δὲ εἶναι τὰς σπονδὰς πεντήκοντα, and that the treaty
shall continue fifty years, TL δ,18. ᾿Ακούετε λεῴώ: τοὺς ὁπλίτας
ἀπιέναι πάλιν οἴκαδε, hear ye people! let the heavy armed go back
again home, Ar. Av. 448,
INFINITIVE WITH THE ARTICLE,
1541. When the infinitive has the article, its character
as a neuter noun becomes more distinct, while it loses none
of its attributes asa verb. The addition of the article ex-
tends its usc to many πᾶν eonstruetions, especially to those
with prepositions; and the article is sometimes allowed
even in many of the older toustructions in which the infin-
itive regularly stands alone.
INFINITIVE WITH τό aS SUBJECT OR OBJECT.
1542, The subject infinitive (1517) may take the article
to make it more distinctly a noun. E.g.
To γνῶναι ἐπιστήμην λαβεῖν ἐστιν, to learn is to acquire knowl-
edge, 1.1}. 3095, Yotro ἐστι τὸ ἀδικεῖν, this is to commit injustice,
P.G.483°. Τὸ γὰρ θάνατον δεδιέναι οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἐστὶν ἢ δοκεῖν
σοφὸν εἶναι μὴ ὄντα, for to fear death (the fear af death) ix nothing
1547] THE INFINITIVE. 2531
else than to seem to be wise without being so, P. 4.}..395, The predi-
cate infinitives here omit the article (15]7). See 956.
1543. The object infinitive takes the article chiefly after
verbs which do uot regularly take the simple infinitive (see
1519), or when the relation of the infinitive to the verb is
less close than it usually is. Eg.
Τὸ τελευτῆσαι πάντων ἡ πεπρωμένη κατέκρινεν, Fate adjudged
death to all (like θάνατον πάντων κατέκρινεν), 1.1,43; εἰ τὸ κωλῦσαι
τὴν τῶν Ἑλλήνων κοινωνίαν ἐπεπράκειν ἐγὼ Φιλίππῳ, if] had sold to
Philip the prevention of the unity of the Creeks (i.e. had prevented this
as Philip's hireling), D.18,28. To ξυνοικεῖν τῇδ᾽ ὁμοῦ τίς ἂν γυνὴ
δύναιτο ; (ὁ live with her — what woman could do it? 8.Tr. δ4ῦ,
1544. N. Sometimes in poetry the distinction between the
object infinitive with and without τό is hardly perceptible; as in
τλήσομαι τὸ κατθανεῖν, [ shall endure to die, A.Ag.1290; τὸ δρᾶν
οὐκ ἠθέλησαν, they were unwilling to act, S.O.C.442.
Invinitive With τό With AbDtECTIVES AND Nowxs.
1545. N. The infinitive with τό is sometimes used with
the adjectives and nouns which regularly take the simple
infinitive (1526). Fug.
Τὸ Bia πολιτῶν δρᾶν ἔφυν ἀμήχανος, [ am helpless to act in defi-
ance of the citizens, S.An.79. Τὸ és τὴν γῆν ἡμῶν ἐσβάλλειν...
ἱκανοί εἰσι, they have the power to invade our land, T.6,17.
INFINITIVE With τοῦ, τῷ, OR τό IN VaRtous ConsTRUCTIONS.
1546. The genitive, dative, or accusative of the in-
finitive with the article may depend on ἃ preposi-
tion, Fig.
Πρὸ τοῦ τοὺς dpxous ἀποδοῦναι, before taking the oaths, 1). 18,26;
πρὸς τῷ μηδὲν ἐκ THs πρεσβείας Aa Beir, besides receiving nothing by
the embassy, D.19, 029; διὰ τὸ ξένος εἶναις οὐκ ἂν vice ἀδικηθῆναι;
do you think you would not be wronged on account of your being a
stranger ? Ἃ. 1.5.1}, Ὑπὲρ τοῦ τὰ μέτρια py γίγνεσθαι, that
moderate counsels may not prevail (= ἵνα μὴ γίγνηται), Aesch.3, 1}.
1547. ‘The genitive and dative of the infinitive, with
the article, can stand in most of the constructions be-
longing to those cases; as in that of the attributive
genitive, the genitive after a comparative or after verbs
332 ; SYNTAX. (1548
and adjectives, the dative of cause, manner, or means,
and the dative after verbs and adjectives. Ely.
Tot πιεῖν ἐπιθυμία, a desire to drink, T.7,84; veots τὸ σιγᾶν
κρεῖττόν ἐστι τοῦ λαλεῖν, for youth silence is better than prating,
Men. Mon. 387; ἐπέσχομεν rod δακρύειν, we ceased our weeping,
P.Ph.117°; ἀήθεις τοῦ κατακούειν τινός εἶσιν, they are unused to
obeying any one, D.1,23. Ta φανερὸς εἶναι τοιοῦτος wr, by having it
evulent that he was such a man, X.41.1,28; τῷ κοσμίως ζῆν moren
εἰν, fo (rust in an orderly life, 1.15,24; ἴσον τῷ προστένειν, equal
tu lamenting beforehand, A. Ag.253.
1548. The infinitive with τοῦ may express a purpose,
generally a negative purpose, where with ordinary genitives
ἕνεκα is regularly used (see 1127). Eg.
᾿Ἐτειχίσθη ᾿Αταλάντη, τοῦ μὴ λῃστὰς κακουργεῖν τὴν Εὔβοιαν,
Alalante was fortified, that pirates might not ravage Eublvea, 1.3, 32,
Μίνως τὸ λῃστικὸν καθήρει, τοῦ τὰς προσόδους μᾶλλον ἰέναι αὐτῷ,
Minos put down piracy, that his revenues might come in more abun-
dantly, T.1,4.
1549. Verbs and expressions denoting hindrance or free-
dom from anything allow either the infinitive with τοῦ
(1547) or the simple infinitive (1519). As the infinitive
after such verbs can take the negative μή without atfecting
the sensc (1615), we have a third and fourth form, still
with the same meaning. (See 1551.) Eg.
Ἐΐργει σε τοῦτο ποιεῖν, εἴργει σε Tov τοῦτο ποιεῖν, εἴργει σε μὴ
τοῦτο ποιεῖν, εἴργει σε τοῦ μὴ τοῦτο ποιεῖν, all meaning he pre-
vents you from doing this. Τὸν Φίλιππον παρελθεῖν οὐκ ἐδύναντο
κωλῦσαι, they could not hinder Philip from passing through, D.5,20.
Τοῦ δραπετεύειν ἀπείργουσι; do they restrain them from running
away? X.M.2,136. Ὅπερ ἔσχε μὴ τὴν Πελοπόννησον πορθεῖν,
which prevented (him) from ravaging Peloponnesus, T.1,73. Avo
ἄνδρας ἕξει τοῦ μὴ καταδῦναι, tt will keep two men from sinking,
X.A.2, 50,
1550. N. When the Jeading verb is negatived (or is iuterrogative
implying 8 negative), the double negative μὴ οὐ is generally used
with the infinitive rather than the simple μή (1616), 80 that we
can say οὐκ εἴργει σε μὴ οὐ τοῦτο ποιεῖν, he does not prevent you
from doing this. Tod μὴ οὐ ποιεῖν is rarely (if ever) used.
1551. The infinitive with τὸ μή may be used after expres-
sions denoting hindrance. and also after all which even imply
1555} THE INFINITIVE. 388
prevention, omission, or denial. This infinitive with τό is
less closely connected with the leading verb than are the
fornis before mentioned (1549), and it may often be con-
sidered an accusative of spectfication (1058), and sometimes
(as after verbs of denial) an object accusative. Sometimes
it expresses merely a result. Eg.
Tov ὅμιλον εἶργον τὸ μὴ τὰ ἐγγὺς τῆς πόλεως κακουργεῖν, they
prevented the crowd from injuring the neighboring paris of the city,
T.3,1. Κίμωνα παρὰ τρεῖς ἀφεῖσαν ψήφους τὸ μὴ θανάτῳ ζημιῶ-
σαι, they allowed Cimon by three votes to escape the punishment of
death (they let him off from the punishment of death), D.23, 205.
Φόβος ἀνθ᾽ ὕπνου παραστατεῖ, τὸ μὴ βλέφαρα συμβαλεῖν, fear stands
by me instead of sleep, preventing me from closing my eyelids, A. Ag. 18.
Thus we have a jifth form, εἴργει σε τὸ μὴ τοῦτο ποιεῖν, added
to those given in 1549, as equivalents of the English he prevents
you from doing this.
1552, N. Here, as above (1550), μὴ οὐ is generally used when
the leading verb is negatived ; as οὐδὲν yap αὐτῷ ταῦτ᾽ ἐπαρκέσει τὸ
μὴ οὐ πεσεῖν, for this will not at all suffice to prevent him from
falling, A. Pr.918,
1553, N. The infinitive with rod μή and with τὸ μή may also
be used in the ordinary negative sense; as οὐδεμία πρόφασις τοῦ
μὴ δρᾶν rudra, no ground for not doing this, P. Ti. 20°
1554. 1. The infinitive with τό may be used in exclama-
tions, to express surprise or indignation. Εἰ.
Τῆς μωρίας" τὸ Mia νομίζειν, ὄντα τηλικουτονί, what folly! to
believe in Zeus, now you are so big! Αν. Ν. 819, Soin Latin: Mene
incepto desistere victain!
2. The article here is sometimes oinitted ; as τοιουτονὶ τρέφειν
κύνα, to keep a dog like that! Av. V.835.
1555. ‘The infinitive with its subject, object, or other
adjuncts (sometimes inelnding dependent clauses) may be
preceded by τό, the whole standing as a single noun in any
ordinary construction. E.g.
Τὸ δὲ μήτε πάλαι τοῦτο πεπονθέναι, πεφηνέναι τέ τινα ἡμῖν
συμμαχίαν τούτων ἀντίρροπον, ἂν βουλώμεθα χρῆσθαι, τῆς παρ᾽ ἐκεί.
νων εὐνοίας εὐεργέτημ᾽ ἂν ἔγωγε θείην, but the fact that we have not
suffered this long ago, and that an alliance has appeared to us to
balance these, if me (shall) wish to use it, — this I should ascribe as a
benefaction to their good-will, D.1,10. (Here the whole sentence
τὸ «ο χρῆσθαι is the object accusative of env.)
834 SYNTAX. (2556
1556. 1. For the infinitive as well as the finite moods with
ὥστε, ὡς, ἐφ᾽ ᾧ and ἐφ᾽ dre, sce 1449-1460.
2. For the infinitive and finite moods with πρίν, see 1469-1474,
3. For the infinitive with dy, see 1308.
THE PARTICIPLE.
1557. The participle is a verbal adjective, and has three
uses. First, it may express an attribute, qualifying ἃ noun
like an ordinary adjective (1559-1562) ; secondly, it may
define the circumstances under which an action takes place
(1563-1577); thirdly, it may be joined to certain verbs to
supplement their meaning, often having a force resembling
that of the infinitive (1578-1593).
1558. N. These distinctions are not always exact, and the
same participle may belong to more than one class. Thus, in ὁ μὴ
δαρεὶς ἄνθρωπος, the unflogged man, δαρείς is both attributive and
conditional (1563, 5).
ATTRIBUTLVE PARTICIPLE.
1559. ‘The participle may qualify a noun, like an
attributive adjective. Here it may often be translated
by a relative and a finite verb, especially when it has
the article. Fy.
Ὃ παρὼν καιρός, the present occasion, D.3,3; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες,
immortal Gods, 1..91,518: πόλις κάλλει διαφέρουσα, α city excel-
ling in beauty; ἀνὴρ καλῶς πεπαιδευμένος, a man who has been
well educated (or a well educated man); οἱ πρέσβεις οἱ ὑπὸ Φιλύτπον
πεμφθέντες, the ambassadors who were sent by Philip; ἄνδρες ot
τοῦτο ποιήσοντες, men who are to do this.
1560. 1. The participle with the article may he used
substantively, like any adjective. It is then equivalent
to he who or those whe with a finite verb. Eg.
Οἱ κρατοῦντες, the conguerars; οἱ πεπεισμένοι, those who have
been conuinced ; παρὰ τοῖς ἀρίστοις δοκοῦσιν εἶναι. among those who
seem (0 be best, X. M1.4,28; ὃ τὴν γνώμην ταύτην εἰπών, the one who
gane this opinion, T.8,68; rots Apxdduv σφετέροις οὖσι ξυμμάχοις
προεῖπον, they proclaimed to those wha were their allies amung the
Arcadians, .1.5, 64.
1663) THE PARTICIPLE. 335
2. The article is sometimes omitted; as πολεμούντων πόλις, α
city of belligerents, X. C.7, 578,
1561. N. Sometimes a participle becomes so completely a
noun that it takes au object genitive instead of an object accusa-
tive; as ὁ ἐκείνου rexwy, kis father (for ὁ ἐκεῖνον rexwy), Ke. El. 335.
1562, N. The neuter participle with the article is sometimes
used as an abstract noun, like the infinitive; as τὸ debs, fear, and
τὸ θαρσοῦν, courage, for τὸ δεδιέναι and τὸ θαρσεῖν, ‘T.1,36. Com-
pare τὸ καλόν for τὸ κάλλος, beauty. In both cases the adjective is
used for the noun.
CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE.
1563. The participle may define the ctrewnstances of
an action. It may express the following relations : —
1. Time; the tenses denoting various points of time, which
is relative to that of the verb of the sentence (1288). F.g.
Tatra ἔπραττε στρατηγῶν, he did this while he was general ;
ταῦτα πράξει στρατηγῶν, he will do this while he ts general.
Tupuvvevous δὲ ἔτη τρία Ἵππώς ἐχώρει ἐς Σίγειον», and when he
had been tyrant three years, Lippias withdrew to Sigeum, ‘V.0, 59.
2. Cause. Eq.
Λέγω δὲ τοῦδ᾽ ἕνεκα, βουλόμενος δόξαι σοι ὅπερ ἐμοί, and 1
speak for this reason, because I wish that to seem good tv you which
seems so to me, P. Ph. 1024,
3. Means, manner, and similar relations, including man-
ner of employment. E.g.
ΤΠροείλετο μᾶλλον τοῖς νόμοις ἐμμένων ἀποθανεῖν ἢ wapavo-
μῶν ζῆν, he preferred ta die abiting by the laws rather than to live
transqressing them, X.AL.4.44. Τοῦτο ἐποίησε λαθών, he did this
secretly. ᾿Απεδήμει τριηραρχῶν, he was absent on duty us wrierarch.
Λῃζόμενοι ζῶσιν, they live hy plunder, X.C.3.2,
4. Purpose οὐ intention; generally expressed by the fut-
ure participle. ΖΕ.
Ἦλθε λυσόμενος θύγατρα. he came to ransom his daughter, [L.1,13.
Πέμπειν πρέσβεις ταῦτα ἐροῦντας καὶ Λύσανδρον αἰτήσοντας,
to send ambassadors to say this and to ask for Lysander, X. 11,2, 16%
5. Condition; the tenses of the participle representing
the corresponding tenses of the indicative, subjunctive, or
optative, in all classes of protasis.
See 1414, where examples will be found.
990 SYNTAX. [1564
6. Opposition, limitation, or concession; where the par-
ticiple is generally to be translated by although and a
verb. 2.0.
Ὀλίγα δυνάμενοι προορᾶν πολλὰ ἐπιχειροῦμεν πράττειν, although
we are able to foresee few things, we try to do many things, X.C.3, 2.
7. Any attendant circumstance, the participle being
merely descriptive. This is one of the most common re-
lations of this participle. Eg.
Ἔρχεται tov υἱὸν ἔχουσα, she comes bringing her son, X.C.1,31
Παραλαβόντες Bowrots ἐστράτευσαν ἐπὶ Φάρσαλον, they took
Boeotians with them and marched against Pharsdlus, T.1,111.
The participle here can often be best translated by a verb, as
in the last example.
8. That in which the action of the verb consists. Eg.
Td εἶπε φωνῶν, thus he spake saying, A.Ay.205. Εῤ᾽ γ᾽ ἐποίη-
σας ἀναμνήσας pe, you did well in reminding me, P. Ph. 60°
For the time of the aorist participle here, see 1290.
1564, N. Certain participles of rime and manner have almost
the force of adverbs by idiomatic usage. Such are ἀρχόμενος, at
Jirst; τελευτῶν, at last, finally; διαλιπὼν χρόνον, after a while, φέρων,
hastily; φερόμενος, with arush ; κατατείνας, carnestly; φθάσας, sooner
(anticipating); λαθών, secretly; ἔχων, continually; ἀνύσας, quickly
(hastening) ; κλαίων, to one’s sorrow; χαίρων, to one’s joy, with im-
puny. Eg.
“Amep ἀρχύμενος εἶπον, as I said at first, T.4,64. Ἐσέπεσον
φερόμενοι ἐς τοὺς Ἕλληνας, they fell upon the Greeks with a rush,
Yd.7,210. Τί κυπτάζεις ἔχων; why do you keep poking about?
Ar.N.509. KAaiwy ape τῶνδε, you will lay hands on them to your
sorrow, EF. Her. 270.
1565. N. Ἔχων, φέρων, ἄγων, λαβών, and χρώμενος may often
be translated with. E.g.
Mic ᾧχετο πρέσβεις ἄγουσα, one (ship) was gone with ambassa-
dors, T.7,25. See X.€.1,31, in 1503,7. Boy χρώμενοι, with a
shout, T. 2,84.
1566. N. Τί παθών ; having suffered what? or what has happened
to him? and τί μαθών; what has he taken into his head? are used in
the general sense of why? E.g.
Τί τοῦτο μαθὼν προσέγραψεν ; with what idea did he add this
clause? D.20,127. Τί παθοῦσαι θνηταῖς εἴξασι γυναιξίν; whal
makes them look like mortal women? Ar. Ν. 840,
48714 THE PARTICIPLE. 337
1567. N. The same participle may sometimes be placed under
more than one of these heads (1558).
GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE.
1568. When a circumstantial participle belongs to a
noun which is not grammatically connected with the
main construction of the sentence, they stand together °
in the genitive absolute. e.g.
᾿Ανέβη οὐδενὸς κωλύοντος, he made the ascent with no one inter-
fering, X.A.1,2°% See 1152, and the examples there given.
Sometimes a participle stauds alone in the genitive absolute,
when a subject can easily be supplied from the context, or when
some general subject, like ἀνθρώπων or πραγμάτων, is understood ;
aS οἱ πολέμιοι, προσιόντων, τέως μὲν ἡσύχαζον, Lut the enemy, as they
(men before mentioned) came on, kept quiet for a time, Ἃ. 4.5, 415,
Οὕτω δ᾽ ἐχόντων, εἰκός (ἐστιν), κιτιλ., and this being the case (sc. πραγ-
μάτων), itis likely, etc. Χ, 4..,510,. So with verbs like ὕει (597,8);
AS ὕοντος πολλῷ, when it was ruiiing heavily (where originally Διός
was understood), X. 77.1, 110,
1569. The participles of impersonal verbs stand in the
accusative absolute, in the neuter singwar, when others
would be in the genitive absolute. So passive partici-
ples and ὄν, when they are used impersonally. ΟΖ.
Τί δὴ, ὑμᾶς ἐξὸν ἀπολέσαι, οὐκ ἐπὶ τοῦτο ἤλθομεν ; why now, when
we nught have destroyed you, did we not proceed to do it? Χ. Α.2, 55,
Οἱ δ᾽ οὐ βοηθήσαντες δέον ὑγιεῖς ἀπῆλθον ; and did those who
brought no aid when it was needed escape safe and sound ὃ P. Alc.i.
115%. So εὖ δὲ παρασχόν, and when a good opportunily offers,
T.1,120; ob προσῆκον, improperly (it being not becoming), T.4, 95;
τυχόν, by chance (it having happened); προσταχθέν μοι, when J
had been commanded ; εἰρη μένον, when tt has heen said; ἀδύνατον
ὃν ἐν νυκτὶ σημῆναι, it being impossible to signal by night, T.7,44.
1570. N. The participles of personal verbs sometimes stand
with their notfns in the accusative absolute; but very seldom
unless they are preceded by ws or ὥσπερ. E.g.
Σιωπῇ ἐδείπνουν, ὥσπερ τοῦτο προστεταγμένον αὐτοῖς, they were
supping im silence, as if Uas had heen the command given to them,
X. Sy.1, 11.
1571. N. Ὧν as a circumstantial participle is seldom omitted,
except with the adjectives ἑκών, willing, and ἄκων, unwilling, aud
338 SYNTAX. [157
after ἅτε, οἷα, ὡς, or καίπερ. See ἐμοῦ οὐχ ἑκόντος, against my will,
S. Aj.455; Ζεὺς, καίπερ αὐθάδης φρενῶν, Zeus, although stubborn in
mind, A. Pr.907; also ἀπόρρητον πόλει, when it ts forbidden to the
State, 8.An.44. See 1612.
ADVERBS wiTH CIRCUMSTANTIAL PaRrTICIPLe.
1572. N. The adverbs ἅμα, μεταξύ, εὐθύς, αὐτίκα, ἄρτι,
and ἐξαίφνης are often counected (in position and in sense)
with the temporal participle, while grammatically they qualify
the leading verb; as ἅμα καταλαβόντες προσεκέατό σφι, as svon
as they overtook them, they pressed hard upon them, Md.9,57. Νεκὼς
μεταξὺ ὀρύσσων ἐπαύσατο, Necho stopped while digging (the
canal), ld. 2,158.
1573. N..The participle denoting opposition is often strength.
ened by xador καύτερ, even (ILomeric also καί... περ), and in nega-
tive sentences by οὐδέ or μηδέ; also by καὶ ταῦτα, and that too; as
ἐποικτίρω νιν, καίπερ ὄντα δυσμενῆ, 1 pity him, even though he is
an enemy, ὃ. 47.155, Οὐκ ἂν προδοίην, οὐδέ περ πράσσων κακῶς, I
would not be faithless, even though J amina wretched state, 1. Ph. 1624.
1574. Circumstantial participles, especially those denot-
ing cause or purpose, are often preceded by ὡς. This shows
that they express the idea or the assertion of the subject of
the leading verb or that of some other person prominent in
the sentence, without implying that it is also the idea of the
speaker or writer. Eg.
Tov Περικλέα ἐν αἰτίᾳ εἶχον ὡς πείσαντα σφᾶς πολεμεῖν, they
found fault with Pericles, on the ground that he had persuaded theu to
engage in war, T.2,59. ᾿Αγανακτοῦσιν ὡς μεγάλων τινῶν ἀπέεστε-
ρημένοι, they ure indiqnant, because (as they say) they have been
deprived of some great Vlessings, Ὁ, Rp. 320".
1575. The causal participle is often emphasized by dre and
οἷον or ofa, as, inasmuch as; but these particles have no such force
as ws (1574); as dre παῖς ὧν, ἥδετο, inasmuch as he toas a child, he
was pleased, X.C.1, 3%,
1576. Ὥσπερ, as, as it were, with the participle expresses
a comparison between the action of the verb and that of
the participle. Εἰ.
Ὠρχοῦντο ὥσπερ ἄλλοις ἐπιδεικνύμενοι, they danced as if they
were showing off to others (i.e. they danced, apparentiy showing off).
X.A.5,45 Ti rotro λέγεις, ὥσπερ οὐκ ἐπὶ σοὶ ὃν 6 τι ἂν βούλῃ
λέγειν; why do you say this, as if i were not in your power to say τολαὶ
1581] THE PARTICIPLE. 339
you please? X. Af.2, 636, Although we find as if a convenient
᾿ anslation, there is really no condition, as appears from the nega-
tive οὐ (not μή). See 1612.
1577. N. “Ὥσπερ, like other words meaning as, may be fol-
lowed by ἃ protasis; as ὥσπερ εἰ παρεστάτεις, as (it would be) if
you had lived near, A. Ag. 1201. For ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ, see 1313.
SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE.
1578. ‘The supplementary participle completes the
idea expressed by the verb, by showing to what its
action relates. It may belong to either the subject or
the object of the verb, and agree with it in case. Ey.
Παύομέν σε λέγοντα, we stop you from speaking; πανόμεθα
λέγοντες, we cease speaking.
1579. This participle has many points of resemblance to the
infinitive in similar constructions. In the use of the participle (as
in that of the infinitive) we must distinguish between indirect
discourse (where each tense preserves its force) and other con-
structions.
PanvicipLy ΝΌΤΟΝ Ixpixect Discourse.
1580. In this sense the participle is used with verbs sig-
nifying to begin, to continue, to endure, to persevere, to cease,
to repent, to be weary, to be pleased, displeased, or ashamed ;
and with the object of verbs signifying to permit or to cause
tocease. Eg.
"Hpxov χαλεπαίνων, J was the first to be angry, 11.2,378; οὐκ
ἀνέξομαι ζῶσα, I shall not endure my life, Ἐ. Hip. 354; ἑπτὰ ἡμέρας
μαχόμε vou διετέλεσαν, they continued fighting seven days, X. A.4, 83,
τιμώμε νοι χαίρουσιν, they delight in being honored, Ἰὰ. Hip.8; ἐλεγ-
χόμε vot ἤχθοντο, they were displeased at being tested, X. M3, 26.
τοῦτο οὐκ αἰσχύνομαι λέγων, 1 say this without shame (see 1581), X
C.5,17); τὴν φιλοσοφίαν παῦσον ταῦτα λέγουσαν, make Philosophy
stop talking in this style, P. G.4899; παύεται λ ἔγων, he s/ups talking.
1581. Some of these verbs also take the infinitive, but gener-
ally with some difference of meaning; thus, αἰσχύνεται τοῦτο A€-
yet, he is ashamed to say this (aud does not say it), — see 1580;
ἀποκάμνει τοῦτο ποιεῖν, ke ceases to do this, through weariness (but
ἀποκάμνει τοῦτο ποιῶν, he is weary of doing this). So ἄρχεται λ έ-
γειν, he begins to speak (but ἄρχεται λέγων, he begins by speaking
or he is at the beginning of his speech); παύω σε μάχεσθαι, ἴ pre
340 SYNTAX. [1582
vent you from fighting (but παύω σε μαχόμενον, I stop you while
Sighting).
1582. The participle may be used with verbs signifying
to perceive (in any way), to find, or to represent, denoting an
act or state in which the object is perceived, found, or rep.
resented. Zig.
Ὁρῶ ce κρύπτοντα χεῖρα, I see you hiding your hand, E. Hec.342;
ἤκουσά gov λέγοντος, I heard you speak; εὗρε Κρονίδην ἄτερ
ἥμενον ἄλλων, he found the son of Cronos sitting apart from the
others, [1.1,498; βασιλέας πεποίηκε τοὺς ἐν “Atdou τιμωρουμένους,
he has represented kings in Hades as suffering punishment, P.G.5264,
1583, N. This must not be coufounded with indirect discourse,
in which δρῶ σε κρύπτοντα would mean 7 see that you are hiding;
ἀκούω σε λέγοντα, 1 hear that you say (ἀκούω taking the accusative).
See 1588.
1584. The participles βουλόμενος, wishing, ἡδόμενος, pleased,
προσδεχόμενος, expecting, and some others, may agree in case with
a dative which depends on εἰμί, γίγνομαι, or some similar verb. Lg.
Τῷ πλήθει ob βουλομένῳ ἦν, it wus not pleasiny to the majority (it
was nol to them wishing it), ‘T.2,3; προσδεχομένῳ pot τὰ τῆς
ὀργῆς ὑμῶν ἐς ἐμὲ γεγένηται, I have been expecting the manifestations
of your wrath against me, ‘T.2, 60.
1585. With verbs signifying to overlook or see, in the
sense of to allow or let happen (περιορῶ and ἐφορῶ, with
περιεῖδον and ἐπεῖδον, sometiines εἶδον), the participle is used
in a sense, which approaches that of the object infinitive,
the present and aorist participles differing merely as the
present and aorist infinitives would differ in similar con-
structions. £.g.
My περιίδωμεν ὑβρισθεῖσαν τὴν Λακεδαίμονα καὶ κατα φρονη-
θεῖσαν, let us not see Lacedaemon insulted and despised, 1.8, 108,
My p ἰδεῖν θανόνθ᾽ ὑπ᾽ ἀστῶν, not to sce me killed by citizens,
E.Or.716. Περιιδεῖν τὴν γῆν τμηθεῖσαν, to let the land be ravaged,
ie. to look on and see it ravaged, ‘J'.2,18; but in 2,20 we have
περιιδεῖν τὴν γῆν τμηθῆναι, lo permit the land to be ravaged, refer-
ring to the same thing from another point of view, τμηθῆναι being
strictly future to περιιδεῖν, while τμηθεῖσαν is coincident with it.
1586. The participle with λανθάνω, escape the notice of,
τυγχάνω, happen, and φθάνω, anticipate, contains the leading
idea of the expression and is usually translated by a verb.
1588] THE PARTICIVLE, 341
The aorist participle here coincides in time with the verb
(unless this expresses duration) and dves not denote past
time in itself. (See 1290.) Eg.
Φονέα τοῦ παιδὸς ἐλάνθανε βόσκων, he was unconsciously support-
ing the slayer of his son, Hd.1,44; ἔτυχον καθήμενος ἐνταῦθα, |
happened to be sitting there (= τύχῃ ἐκαθήμην ἐνταῦθα), P. Lu. 272°;
αὐτοὶ φθήσονται τοῦτο δράσαντες, they will do this themselves first
(= τοῦτο δράσουσι πρότεροι), P. Rp.375°; τοὺς δ᾽ ἔλαθ᾽ εἰσελθών,
and he entered unnoticed by them (= εἰσῆλθε λάθρᾳ), 11.24,477;
ἔφθησαν πολλῷ τοὺς Ἰέρσας ἀπικόμενοι, they arrived long Lefore
the Persians, Hd.4,136; τοὺς ἀνθρώπους λήσομεν ἐπιπεσόντες, we
shall rush in unnoticed by the men, X. A.7, 38.
The perfect participle here has its ordinary force.
1587, N. The participle with δια τελ έω, continue (1580), of xo
pat, be gone (1256), θαμίζω, be wont or be frequent, and soime
others, expresses the leading idea; but the aorist participle with
these has ‘no peculiar force; as οἴχεται φεύγων, he has taken flight,
Ar. P1933 ; οὐ θαμίζεις κατα βαίνων εἰς τὸν Πειραιᾶ, you don’t come
down to the Petraeus very often, P. Rp.328¢.
So with the Homeric By and ἔβαν or βάν from βαίνω; as βῆ
φεύγων, he took Aight, 1l.2,665; so 2,167.
ParricipLte ΙΝ Invirect Discouxsr.
1588. With many verbs the participle stands in indi-
rect discourse, each tense representing the corresponding
tense of a finite mood.
Such verbs are chiefly those signifying to see, to hear
or learn, to perceive, to know, to be ignorant of, to remem-
ber, to forget, to show, to appear, to prove, to acknowledge,
and ἀγγέλλω, announce. Fg.
ὋὉρῶ δέ μ᾽ ἔργον δεινὸν ἐξειργασμένην, bul I see that I have
done a dreadful deed, 8. Tr. 706; ἤκουσε Κῦρον ἐν Κιλικίᾳ ὄντα, he
heard that Cyrus was in Cilicia (ct. 1583), %.A.1,4°; ὅταν κλύη
ἢ ξοντ᾽ ᾿Ορέστην, when she hears that Orestes will come, 8. El. 293.
Oldu οὐδὲν ἐπιστάμενος, I know that I understand nothing; οὐκ
ἥδεσαν αὐτὸν τεθνηκότα, they did not know that he was dead,
X.A.1,10'8; ἐπειδὰν γνῶσιν ἀπιστούμενοι, after they find out that
they are distrusted, X.C.7,2"; μέμνημαι ἐλθών, 1 remember that
1 went; μέμνημαι αὐτὸν ἐλθόντα, 1 remember that he went; δείξω
τοῦτον ἐχθρὸν ὄντα, ἱ shall show that this man is an enemy (passive
842 SYNTAX. [1589
οὗτος δειχθήσεται ἐχθρὺς av). Αὐτῷ Κῦρον ἐπιστρατεύοντα
πρῶτος ἡγγεῖλα, 1 first annvunced to him that Cyrus was on his march
against him, X. A.2, 3,
See 1494; and 1308 for examples of the participle with ἂν
representing both indicative and optative with dv.
1589, N. δῆλός εἰμι and φανερός cipetake the participle
in indirect discourse, where we use an impersonal construe.
tion ; as δῆλος ἦν οἰόμενος, ie wus evident that he thought (like
δῆλον ἦν ὅτι οἴοιτο).
1690. N. With σύνοιδα or συγγιγνώσκω and a dative of
the reflexive, a participle may be in either the nominative or the
dative; as σύνοιδα ἐμαυτῷ ἠδικημένῳ (or ἠδικημένος), 1 am
conscious to myself that I have been wronged.
1591. Most of the verbs included in 1588 may also take
a clause with ὅτι or «ὡς in indirect discourse.
1592. 1. Some of these verbs have the infinitive of indirect
discourse in nearly or quite the same sense as the participle.
Others have the infinitive in a different sense: thus φαίνεται σοφὸς
ὧν generally meaus he is manifestly wise, and φαίνεται σοφὸς εἶναι,
he seems to be wise; but sometimes this distinction is not observed.
2. Others, again, may be used in ἃ peculiar sense, in which they
have the infinitive noe in indirect discourse. Thus οἦδα and ἐπέ
orapas regularly have this infinitive when they mean know how; as
οἶδα τοῦτο ποιῆσαι, 1 know how to do this (but οἶδα τοῦτο ποι ἡ-
σας, J know that 1 did this). Μανθάνω, μέμνημαι, and ἐπιλανθά-
vopat, in the sense of learn, remember, or forget to do anything, take
the regular object infinitive. See also the uses of γιγνώσκω, bet
κνυμι, dno, φαίνομαι, and εὑρίσκω in the Lexicon.
1593, 1. Ὡς may be used with the participle of indirect
discourse in the sense explained in 1674. E.g.
Ὡς μηκέτ᾽ ὄντα κεῖνον ἐν φάει νόει, think of him as no longer living,
5. Ph.415. See 1614.
2. The genitive absolute with ὡς is sometimes found where we
should expect the participle to agree with the object of the verb;
as ὡς πολέμου ὄντος παρ᾽ ὑμῶν ἀπαγγελῶ ; shall J announce from
you that there is war? (lit. asswning that there is war, shall J announce
it from you?), X.A.2,1%,— where we might have πόλεμον ὄντα with
less emphasis and in closer connection with the verb. So ὡς wid
ἐχόντων τῶνδ᾽ ἐπίστασθαί σε χρή, you must understand that tis
is 80 (lit. believing this to be so, you must understand it), 8. A. 281,
1699] VERBAL ADJECTIVES, 343
VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -réos AND -réov.
1594. The verbal in -réos has both a personal and an
impersonal construction, of which the latter is more
comimnon.,
1595. In the personal construction it is passive in
sense, and expresses necessity, like the Latin participle
in -dus, agreeing with the subject. Lg.
Ὠφελητέα σοι ἡ πόλις ἐστίν, the city must be benefited by you,
X.M.3,68% “AdAas μεταπεμπτέας εἶναι (ἔφη), he said that other
(ships) must be sent for, ‘T.6, 25.
1596. N. The noun denoting the agent is here in the dative
(1188). ‘This construction is of course confined to transitive verbs,
1597. Iu the impersonal construction the verbal is
in the neuter of the nominative singular (sometimes
plural), with ἔστί expressed or understood. The ex-
pression is equivalent to δεῖ, (one) must, with the in-
finitive. It is practically active in sense, and allows
transitive verbals to have an object like their verbs.
The agent is generally expressed by the dative, some-
times by the accusative. Zig.
Ταῦτα ἡμῖν (or ἡμᾶς) ποιητέον ἐστίν, we must do this (equiva.
lent to ταῦτα ἡμᾶς δεῖ ποιῆσαι). Οἰστέον rade, we must bear these
things (sc. ἡμῖν), EK. Or.769. Τί ἂν αὐτῷ ποιητέον ety; what would
he be obliged to do? (= τί δέοι ἂν αὐτὸν ποιῆσαι), X.M.1,77 (1598).
᾿Εψηφίσαντο πολεμητέα εἶναι, they voted that they must go to war
(= δεῖν πολεμεῖν), ‘1,85. Ἐύμμαχοι, ots ob παραδοτέα τοῖς
᾿Αθηναίοις ἐστίν, allies, whom we must not abandon to the Athenians,
T.1,88.
1598. N. Though the verbal in -réoy allows hoth the dative
and the accusative of the agent (1188), the equivalent de with the
infinitive allows only the accusative (1162).
1599. N. The Latin has this construction (1597), but generally
only with verbs which do not take an object accusative; as Kun-
dun est tibi (ἰτέον ἐστί got), — Moriendum est omnibus. So Bello
utendum est nobis (τῷ πολέμῳ χρηστέον ἐστὶν ἡμῖν), we must go Lo
war. The earlier Latin occasionally has the exact equivalent of
the Greek impersonal construction ; as Aeternas poenas timendum
est, Lucr.1,112. (See Madvig’s Latin Grammar, § 421.)
844 SYNTAX. [1600
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
1600. All interrogative pronouns, pronominal adjectives,
and adverbs can be used in both direct and indirect ques-
tions. The relative ὅστις (rarely ὅς) and the relative pro-
nominal adjectives (429) may be used in indirect questions.
£.g.
Τί λέγει; what does he say? dre ἦλθεν; when did he come?
Πόσα εἶδες ; how many did you see? “Hpovto τί λέγοι (or ὅ τι
λέγοι), they asked what he said. “Hpovro πότε (or ὁπότε) ἦλθεν, they
asked when he came. ‘Opas ἡμᾶς, ὅσοι ἐσμέν; do you see how many
of us there are ἵν Ῥ. Rp. 327%
1601. N. The Greek, unlike the English, freely uses two
or more interrogatives with the same verb, Eg.
Ἡ τίσι τί ἀποδιδοῦσα τέχνη δικαιοσύνη ἂν καλοῖτο; the art which
renders what to what would be called Justice? P. Rp.332% See the
five interrogatives (used for comic effect) in D.4,36: πρόοιδεν
ἕκαστος Tis χορηγὸς, . -. πότε Kal παρὰ τοῦ Kai τί λαβόντα τί δεῖ
ποιεῖν, Meaning everybody knows who the χορηγός is to be, what he is
to get, when and from whom he is to get tt, and what he is to do with wt.
1602. N. An interrogative | sometimes stands as a predicate
with a demonstrative ; as τί τοῦτο ἔλεξας ; what is this that you said?
(Ξ ἔλεξας τοῦτο, τί ὄν; lit. y you said this, being τοαι 3}; τίνας τούσδ᾽
εἰσορῶ ; who are these that 1 see? Ἰὰ. ΟΥν. 1847.
Such expressions cannot be literally translated.
-1603, ‘The principal direct interrogative particles are dpa
and (chiefly poetic) #. These imply nothing as to the
answer expected ; but dpa οὐ implies an affirmative and dpa
py ἃ negative auswer. Οὐ and μή are used alone with the
same force as with dpa. So μῶν (for μὴ οὖν) implies a nega-
tive answer, and οὐκοῦν, therefore (with no negative force),
implies an affirmative answer. Eg.
Ἦ σχολὴ ἔσται ; will there be leisure? ἾΑρ᾽ εἰσί τινες ἄξιοι; are
there any deserting ones? "Ap’ οὐ βούλεσθε ἐλθεῖν ; or οὐ βούλεσθε
ἐλθεῖν; do you not wish to go (i.e. you wish, do you not)? "Apa μὴ
βούλεσθε ἐλθεῖν ; or μὴ (or μῶν) βούλεσθε ἐλθεῖν ; do you wish to go
(you don’t wish to go, do you)? Οὐκοῦν σοι δοκεῖ σύμφορον εἶναι;
does it not seem to you to be of advantage? X.C.2, 418 This distine-
tion between ob and μή does not apply to questions with the inter.
rogative subjunctive (1358), which allow only py.
1609] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. —NEGATIVES. 345
1604, “Addo τι 4; 18 it anything else than? or (more fre-
quently) ἄλλο τι; ἐδ ἐξ not? is sumetimes used as a direct
interrogative. Εἰ.
ἌΑλλο τι ἢ ὁμολογοῦμεν; do we not agree? (do we do anything
else than agree?), P.G.470%. "AAAo τι οὖν δύο ταῦτα ἔλεγες ; did
you nol call these too? ibid. 495°,
1605. Indirect questions may be introduced by ei, whether ;
and in Homer by yore. Eg.
ἪἨρώτησα εἰ βούλοιτο ἐλθεῖν, 7 asked whether he wished to go.
“Quyero mevadpevos ἢ mou ἔτ᾽ εἴης, he was gone to inquire whether you
were still living, Oud. 13,415. Ta ἐκπώματα οὐκ ofdu εἰ τούτῳ δῶ
(1490), 1 do not know whether 1 shall give him the cups, X.C.8,4°
(Here εἰ is used even with the subjunctive: see 1491.)
1606. Alternative questions (both direct and indirect)
may be introduced by πότερον (πότερα) .. . 4, whether... or.
Indirect alternative questions can also be introduced by εἰ
...9 OV dre... εἴτε, whether ...or. Homer has ἦ (je)...
% (He) in direct, and ἢ (4é)... ἦ Ge) in indirect, alterna-
tives, — never πότερον. Eg.
Πότερον ἐᾷς ἄρχειν ἢ ἄλλον καθίστης 3 do you allow him to rule,
or do you appoint another? X.C.3,19% "EBovdevero εἰ πέμποιέν
τινας ἢ πάντες ἴοιεν, he was deliberating whether they should send some
or should all go, X.A.1, 108.
NEGATIVES.
1607. The Greek has two negative adverbs, οὐ and μή.
What is suid of each of these generally applies to its com-
pounds, — οὐδείς, οὐδέ, οὔτε, etc., and μηδείς, μηδέ, μήτε, ete.
1608. Οὐ is used with the indicative and optative in all
independent sentences, except wishes; also in indirect dis-
course after dre and ws, and in causal sentences.
1609. N. Jn indirect questions, introduced hy εἰ, whether, μή
can be used as well as ob; as βουλόμενος ἐρέσθαι εἰ μαθών τίς τι
μεμνημένος μὴ οἶδεν, wishing to ask whether one who has learnt a
thing and remembers it does not know it? P.Th.1634. Also, in the
second part of an indirect alternative question (1606), both οὐ and
py are allowed; as σκοπῶμεν εἰ ἡμῖν πρέπει ἢ οὔ, let us look and see
whether it suits us or not, P.Rp.4514; εἰ δὲ ἀληθὲς ἡ py, πειράσομαι
μαθεῖν, but 1 will uy lo learn whether it is true or not, ibid. 339%
346 SYNTAX, [1010
1610. Μή is used with the subjunctive aud imperative
in all constructions, except with the Homeric subjunctive
(1855), which has the force of a future indicative. My is
used in all fiual aud object clauses after ἕνα, ὅπως, ete, with
the subjunctive, optative, and indicative; except after μή,
lest, which takes of. It is used in all conditional and econ-
ditional relative clauses, and in the corresponding temporal
sentences after ἕως, πρίν, etc., in relative sentences express.
ing a purpose (1442), and in all expressions of a wish with
both indicative and optative (1507; 1511).
For causal relative clauses with py (also conditional), see 1462.
For εἰ οὐ oceasionally used in protasis, see 1383, 2.
1611, Μὴ is used with the infinitive in all constructions,
both with aud without the article, except in indirect dis-
course. The infinitive in indirect discourse regularly has
οὐ, to retain the negative of the direct discourse ; but some
exceptions accur (1496).
For ὥστε οὐ with the infinitive, see 145}. For py with the
infinitive after verbs of hoping, promising, swearing, étc., see 1496.
1612, When a participle expresses a condition (1563, 5),
it takes μή; so when it is equivalent to a conditional rela-
tive clause; a8 οἱ μὴ βουλόμενοι, any who du not wish. Other-
wise it takes of. In indirect discourse it sometimes, like
the infinitive, takes μή irregularly (1496).
1613. Adjectives follow the same principle with partici-
ples, taking μή only when they do not refer to definite per-
sons or things (1.6. when they can be expressed by a rela-
tive clause with an indefinite antecedent); as of μὴ ἀγαθοὶ
πολῖται, (any) citizens who are not good, but οἱ οὐκ ἀγαθοὶ πολῖ.
ται Means speciul citizens who ure not yuod.
1614, Participles or adjectives connected with a protasis, a
cominand, or an infinitive which would be negatived by μή, gener:
ally take py, even if they would otherwise have ov.
1615. When verbs which contain a negative idea (as
those of hindering, forbidding, denying, concealing, and dis-
trusting) take the infinitive, μή can be added to the infini-
tive to strengthen the negation. Such a negative cannot
be translated in English, and cau always be omitted in
Greek. For examples, see 1549-1551.
16191 NEGATIVES. 347
1616. An infinitive which would regularly be negatived
by μή, either in the ordinary way (1611) or to strengthen a
preceding negation (1615), generally takes the double nega-
tive μὴ οὐ if the verb on which it depends itself has a negative,
Thus δίκαιόν ἐστι μὴ τοῦτον ἀφεῖναι, it ts just not fo acquit him, if
we nevative the leading verb, generally becomes οὐ δίκαιόν ἐστι μὴ
ov τοῦτον ἀφεῖναι, it is not just not to acquit him. So ὡς οὐχ ὅσιόν
σοι ov μὴ οὐ βοηθεῖν δικαιοσύνῃ, since (us you said) it wus a failure
in piety for you not to assist Justice, P. Itp.427%. Again, εἴργει σε μὴ
τοῦτο ποιεῖν (1900), he prevents you from doing this, becomes, with
εἴργει negatived, οὐκ εἴργεε σε μὴ οὐ τοῦτο ποιεῖν, he does not pre-
vent you from doing this.
1617. NX. (ὦ Μὴ od is used also when the leading verb is
interrogative implying ἃ negative; as τί ἐμποδὼν μὴ obyt ὑβριζο-
μένους ἀποθανεῖν ; what is there to prevent (us) from being insulted
and perishing? X.An.3, V3.
(4) It is sometimes used with participles, or even nouns, to
ex] ress an exception to a negative (or implied negative) statement;
as πόλεις χαλεπαὶ λαβεῖν, μὴ οὐ πολιορκίᾳ, cities hard (i.e. not easy)
to caplure, except by siege, D.149, 123.
1618. When a negative is followed by a simple negative
(οὐ or μή) in the same clause, each retains its own force.
If they belong te the same word or expression, they make
an affirmative; but if they belong to different words, each
is independent of the other. Eg.
Οὐδὲ τὸν Φορμίωνα οὐχ δρᾷ, nor does he not see Phormio (i.e.
he sees Phormio well enough), D.36,46. Ov δι᾿ ἀπειρῶν ye οὐ φήσεις
ἔχειν ὅ τι εἴπῃς, it is nat surely through inexperience that you will
deny that you have anything to say, 1).19,120. Εὲ μὴ Wpogevoy οὐχ
ὑπεδέξαντο, if they had not refused to receive Proxenus (had not not-
received him), D.19,74. So μὴ οὖν... διὰ ταῦτα μὴ δότω δίκην, do
not then on this account let him escape punishment (do not let him not
be punished), 1).19, 77.
1619. But when a negative is followed by a compound
negative (or by several compound negatives) in the same
clause, the negation is strengthened. Eg.
Οὐδεὶς εἰς οὐδὲν οὐδενὸς ἂν ἡμῶν οὐδέποτε γένοιτο ἄξιος,
no one of us (in that case) would ever come to be of any value for
anything, P. Ph.19>,
For the double negative οὐ μή, see 1860 and 1361. For οὐχ ὅτι,
μὴ ὅτι, οὐχ ὅπως, μὴ ὅπως, 566 1504.
PART V.
VERSIFICATION.
RHYTHM AND METRE.
1620. Every verse is composed of definite portions called
Jeet. ‘Thus we have four feet in each of these verses : —
Prjcol|pev πρὸς | τοὺς στρατηγούς. |
Far from | mortal | céres rejtredting. |
1621. In each foot there is a certain part on which falls
a special stress of voice called ictus (stroke), and another
part on which there is no such stress. The part of the foot
on which the ictus falls is called the arsis, and the rest of
the foot is called the thesis.’ The regular alternation of arsis
and thesis in successive feet produces the rhythm (harmonious
movement) of the verse.
1622. In this English verse (as in all English poetry) the
rhythin depends entirely on the ordinary accent of the words,
with which the ictus coincides. In the Greek verse, how-
ever, the ictus is entirely independent of the word-accent;
and the feet (with the ictus marked by dots) are dno, —
μὲν προς, --- τοὺς στρα, ---τῇγου. In Greek poetry a foot
consists of a regular combination of syllables of a certain
The term ἄρσις (ratsing) and θέσις (placing), as they were used by
nearly all the Greek writers on Rhythm, referred to the raising and
putting dowon of the foot in marching, dancing, or beating time, so that
θέσις denoted the part of the foot on which the ictus fell, and ἄρσις the
lighter part. Most of the Roman writers, however, inverted this use,
and referred arsis to the raising of the voice and thesis to the lowering
of the voice in reading. ‘The prevailing modern use of these terms
unfortunately fullows that of the Roman writers, and attempts to
reverse the settled usage of Janguage are apt to end in confusion.
348
1624) RHYTHM AND VERSE, 349
length; and the place of the ictus here depends on the
quantity (ie. the length or shortness) of the syllables
which compose the foot, the ictus naturally falling upon a
long syllable (1629). The regular alternation of long and
ghort syllables in successive feet makes the verse metrical,
je. measured in its time. The rhythm of a Greek verse
thus depends closely on its metre, ie. on the measure or
quantity of its syllables.
1623. ‘The fundamental distinction between ancient and most
modern poetry is simply this, that in modern poetry the verse con-
sists of a regular combination of accented and unaccented syllables,
while in ancient puetry it consists of a regular combination of long
and short syllables. ‘The rhy/ln is the one essential requisite in the
external form of all poetry, ancient and modern; but in ancient
poetry, rhythm: depends on metre and not on accent; in modern
poetry it depends on accent, and the quantity of the syllables (ze.
the metre) is generally 110 more regarded than it is in prose. Both
are equally rhythmical; but the ancient is also metrical, and its metre
is the basis of its rhythin. What is called metre in English poetry
is strictly only rhytlin.
1624. ‘The change from metrical to accentual rhythm can best
be seen in modern Greek poetry, in which, even when the forms of
the ancient language are retained, the rhythm is generally accentual
and the metre is uo more regarded than it is in English poetry.
These are the first two verses in a modern translation of the
Odyssey : —
Ψάλλε τὸν | ἄνδρα, Θεὰ, τὸν πολύτροπον, | ὅστις το]σούτους
Ἰόπους διῆλθε, πορθήσας τῆς Τροίας τὴν | ἔνδοξον πόλιν.
The original verses are: ---
"Ἄνδρα por | ἔννεπε, | Μοῦσα, πο[λύτροπον, | ὃς μάλα | πολλὰ
Πλάγχθη, Eel Τροίης ἱεὶρὸν πτολίεθρον ἔϊπερσεν.
If the former verses set our teeth on edge, it is only through
force of acquired habit; for these verses have much more of the
nature of modern poetry than the Homeric originals, and their rhythm
is precisely what we are accustomed to in English verse, where
Still stands the | forest prilimeval; but | under the | shade of its | branches
is dactylic, and
And the oliive of peace | spreads its branchles abroad
is anapaestic.
350 VERSIFICATION, [1625
1625. It is very difficult for us to appreciate the ease with which
the Greeks distinguished and reconciled the stress of voice which
constituted the ictus and the raising of tone which constituted the
word-accent (107, 1). Any combination of the two is now very
difficult, and for most persons impossible, because we have only
stress of voice to represent both accent and ictus. In reading
Greek poetry we usually mark the ictus by our accent, and either
neglect the word-accent or make it subordinate to the ictus. Care
should always be taken in reading to distinguish the words, not
the feet.
FEET.
1626. 1. The unit of measure in Greek verse is the short
syllable (v), which has the value of Sor an ἃ note in music,
This is ealled a time or mora. ‘Ihe long syllable (—) has
generally twice the length of a short one, and has the value
of a $ note or J in music.
2. But a long syllable sometimes has the length of three shorts,
and is called a triseme (i_), and sometimes that of four shorts, and
is called a fetraseme (wu). The triseme has the value of ae in music,
and the tetraseme that of |
1627. Feet are distinguished according to the number of
times which they contain. The most comnon feet are the
following : —
1. Of Three Times (in ὃ time).
Trochee ae φαῖνε ᾿ J
Jambus ὡς - ἔφην ὶ ὦ
Tribrach CG λέγετε ἮΝ ἂν -
2. Of Four Times (in ὃ or 2 time).
Dacty] —vuyL paivere ᾿ 71
Anapaest υυ-- σέβομαι Ja 2
Spondee pt εἰπών ᾿ 2
8. Of Five Times (in ἃ time).
Cretic Ss φαινέτω ὦ Bi
ἐ
d
Paeon primus = _UUY ἐκτρέπετε Je
Paeon quartus UUU καταλέγω Ja ἣν ᾿
d
δ
4
Bacchius Gr ἀφεγγής By ὶ
Antibacchius __ wu φαίνητε ᾿
1631} FEET, ETC. 351
4. Of Six Times (in ἃ or 3 time).
Tonie a maiore ἐκλεύτετε 1 ] |
aan λεί ΄ ὁ ἐσ
Tonic a minore προσιδέσθαι , | d
SOE τα p ” eee
Choriambus —vuwy _— éxtpéropat J e d
Molossus (rare) . .. βουλεύων ᾿ ’ 4
5. A foot of four shorts (σι ὦ ὦ) is called a proceleusmatic,
and one of two shorts (UU) a pyrrhic.
For the dochmius, U_ — vu —, see 169]. For the epitrite, sce
1654.
1628. The feet in } time (1), in which the arsis is twice as long
as the thesis, forin the double class (γένος διπλάσιον), as opposed
to those in } time (2), in which the arsis and thesis are of equal
length, and which form the eyual class (γένος ἔσον). ‘The more
complicated relations of arsis aud thesis in the feet of five and six
times are not considered here. :
1629. The ictus falls naturally on a long syllable. ‘The
first syllable of the trochee und the dactyl, and the last
syllable of the iambus and the anayuest, therefore, form
the arsis, the remainder of the foot being the thesis; as
΄
— MS Zs iss GPL
1630, When a long syllable in the arsis is resolved into two
short syllables (1631), the ictus properly belongs on the two taken
together, but in reading it is usually placed on the first. Thus a
tribrach used for a trochee (2 U) is GU; one used for an
jJabus (U4) is ὦ ὦ. Likewise a spondee used for a dactyl is
—; one used for an anapaest is __ <2. Soa dactyl used for an
anapaest (_ Uv for _ - for VU _) is — ὦ ὦ. The only use
of the tribrach aud the chief use of the spondee are (as above) to
represent other feet which have their arsis naturally marked by a
long syllable.
RESOLUTION AND CONTRACTION. — IRRATIONAL
TIME. — ANACRUSIS.—SYLLABA ANCEPS.
1631. A long syllable, being naturally the metrical equiv-
alent of two short ones (1626), is often resolved into these ;
as when a tribrach UUW stands for a trochee —v or an
iambus v—. On the other hand, two short syllables are
often contracted into one long syllable; as when a spondee
352 VERSIFICATION. [1682
— — stands for a dactyl _v ὦ or an anapaest UU. The
mark for a long resolved into two shorts is wv; that for
two shorts contracted into one long is «x.
1632, 1. When a long syllable has the measure of three
or four short syllables (1626, 2), it may represent a whole
foot: this is called syncope. ‘Thus a triseme (L = J.) may
represent a trochee (_ uv), and a tetraseme (u = 2) may rep-
resent a dacty] (_ Uv).
2. An apparent trochee (_v), consisting of a triseme (_)
and a short syllable, may be the equivalent of a dacty] ora
spondee, that is, a foot of four times. This is called a long
trochee, or aDoric trochee (see 1684).
1633, On the other hand, a long syllable may in certain
cases be shortened so as to take the place of a short syllable.
Such a syllable is called irrational, and is marked >. The
foot in which it occurs is also called irrational (ποὺς ddoyos).
Thus, in ἀλλ᾽ ἀπ᾽ ἐχθρῶν (4 ὦ +>), the apparent spondee
which takes the place of the second trochee is called an
irrational trochee; in δοῦναι δίκην (Ὁ -Ζ ὦ +) that which
takes the place of the first iambus is called au trrational
tambus.
1634. A similar shortening occurs in the so-called cyclic
dacty! (marked -τῷ ὦ) and cyclic anapaest (marked ὦ ὦ),
which have the time of only three short syllables instead of
four. The cyclic dactyl takes the place of a trochee — v,
especially in logaoedic verses (1679). ‘[he cyclic anapaest
takes the place of an iambus ὦ _, and is found especially in
the iambic trimeter of comedy (1658).
1635. An anacrusis (ἀνάκρουσις, upward beat) consists of
a single syllable (which may be long, short, or irrational)
or of two short syllables, prefixed to a verse which begins
with an arsis.
1636. The last syllable of every verse is common, and
it may be made long or short to suit the metre, without
regard to its usual quantity. It is called syllaba anceps.
But the continuous systems described in 1654, 1666, and
1677 allow this only at the end of the system.
1642} RHYTHMICAL SERIES, ETC. 853
RHYTHMICAL SERIES. — VERSE. — CATALEXIS. —
PAUSE.
1637. A rhythmical series is a continuous succession of
feet of the same measure. A verse may consist of one such
series, or of several such united.
Thus the verse
πολλὰ τὰ δεινὰ, κοὐδὲν ἀνθρώπου δεινότερον πέλει
consists of a First Glyconic (1682, 4), -͵ῦ".. UI__ UL (at the
end of a verse, -»Uu!l_Uul—ul—ap), followed by a Second
Glyconic, _21-4ul—ul—,. Each part forms a series, the
former ending with the first syllable of ἀνθρώπου (see above); and
either series might have formed a distinct verse.
1638. The verse must close in such a way as to be dis-
tinctly marked off from what follows.
1. It must end with the end of a word.
2. It allows the last syllable (syllaba anceps) to be either
long or short (1636).
3. It allows hiatus (34) before a vowel in the next verse.
1639. A verse which has an unfinished foot at the close
is called catalectic (xaradyxrixds, stopped short). A eomplete
verse is called acatalectic.
1640, 1. If the omitted syllable or syllables in a catalectic
verse are the thesis of the foot (as in trochaic and dactylic verses),
their place is filled by a pause. A pause of one time, equivalent to
a short syllable (WU), is marked A (for A, the initial of λεῖμμα);
a pause of two times (__) is marked J.
2. But in catalectic iambic and anapaestic verses, the thesis of
the last foot is lost, and the place is filled by prolonging the pre-
ceding arsis: thus we have U4 4 (not U.zu ,) as the catalectic
form of τ «Ὁ and ὦ 2.2 (not VU ZU UA) as that of
vunuu—- (See 1664 and 1665.)
1641. A verse measured by dipodies (1646) is called brachy-
catalectic if it wants a complete foot at the end, and Aypercatalectic
if it has a single syllable beyond its last complete dipody.
CAESURA AND DIAERESIS.
1642, 1. Caesura (i.e. cutting) of the foot occurs whenever
354 VERSIFICATION. [1643
a word ends before a foot is finished; as in three cases in
the following verse : —
πολλὰς | δ᾽ ἰφθίϊμους ψυ!χὰς “Atld: mpotlaper.
2. This becomes important only when it coincides with
the cugsura of the verse (as after ip@ipous). This caesura is
a pause within a foot introduced to make the verse more
melodious or to aid in its recital. Jn some verses, as in
the iambie trimeter acatalectic (1658) and the heroie hexa.
meter (1669), it follows definite principles.
1643. When the end of a word coincides with the end of a
foot, the double division is called diaeresis (διαίρεσις, division);
as after the first foot in the line just quoted. Diaeresis
becomes important only when it coincides with a natural
pause produced by the ending of a rhythmic series; as in
the trochaic tetrameter (1651) and the dactylie pentameter
(1670).
1644. The following verse of Aristophanes (Nub. 519), in tro-
chaic (() rhythm, shows the irrational long (1633) in the first,
second, and sixth feet; the cyclic dacty] (1634) in the third; syn-
cope (1632) in the fourth; and at the end catalexis and pause
(1699 ; 1640), with sylaba anceps (1636).
τἀληϊθὴ νὴ | τὸν Διόϊνυϊσον τὸν | &xBpélWarra | pe
τ πὶ πίοι ἰς -οἵτο κλ
A rhythmical series (1037) ends with the penult οἵ Διόνυσον. This
is a logavedic verse, called Eupolidéan (1682, 7).
VERSES.
1645. Verses are called T'rochaic, lambic, Dactylic, etc.,
from their fundamental foot.
1646. In most kinds of verse, a monometer consists of
one foot, a dimeter of two feet, a trimeter, tetrameter, penta-
meter, or hexameter of thyce, four, five, or six feet. But in
trochaic, iambic, and anapaestie verses, which are measured
by dipodies (i.e. pairs of feet), a monometer consists of one
dipody (or two fect), a dimeter of four feet, a trimeter of
six feet, and a tetrameter of eight feet.
.1661] TROCHAIC RHYTHMS. 855
1647. When trochaic or iambic verses are measured by single
feet, they are called tripodies, tetrapodies, hexapodies, etc. (as having
three, four, six, ete. feet). Here irrational syllables (1683) seldom
occur. (See 1656.)
1648. Rhythins are divided into rising and falling rhythms.
In rising rhythms the arsis follows the thesis, as in the jambus
and anapaest; in falling rhythins the thesis follows the arsis, as in
the trochee and the dactyl.
1649, In Greck poetry, the same kind of verse may be
used by the line (κατὰ στίχον), that is, repeated continuously,
as in the heroic hexameter and the iambic trimeter of the
drama. Secondly, similar verses may be combined into
distichs (1670) or into simple systems (1654). Verses of
both these classes were composed for recitation or for simple
chanting. Thirdly, in lyrie poetry, which was composed to
be sung to musie, verses may be combined into strophes of
complex rhythmical and metrical structure, with anti-
strophes corresponding to them in form. A strophe and
antistrophe may be followed by an epode (after-song) in
a different metre, as in most of the odes of Pindar.
TROCHAIC RHYTHMS.
1650. ‘Trochaic verses are generally measured by dipodies
(1646). The irrational trochee < > (1633) in the form of
a spondee can stand in the second place of each trochaic
dipody except the last, that is, in the even feet (second,
fourth, ete.), so that the dipody has the form -Ζ ὦ -Ζ Ὁ.
An apparent anapaest (ὦ ὦ > for +>) is sometimes used
as the equivalent of the irrational trochee. The cyclic
dacty] ~»v (1634) sometiines stands for the trochee in
proper names in both parts of the dipody, except at the end
of the verse.
The tribrach (ὦ uu) may stand for the trochee (1631)
in every foot except the Jast.
1651. The chief trochaic verse which is used by the line
(1649) is the TETRAMETER CATALECTIC, Consisting of seven
feet and a syllable, divided into two rhythmical series (1637)
by a diaeresis (1643) after the second dipody. Eg.
356 VERSIFICATION, [1652
(1) ὦ σοφώτατοι θεάταὶ, || δεῦρο τὸν νοῦν | πρόσχετε.1
. ὦ .-υ.. Ὁ... » Cas > 2 ὦ... λ
(2) κατὰ σελήνην | ὡς ἄγειν χρὴ || τοῦ βίου τὰς | ἡμέρας.
νυνυ-». -͵ν..»» το {ξΞοος ὁ
τὸν τάδε ξυν'δρῶντά μοι.
ODS
(8) ἐύγγονόν τ᾽ ἐμὴν Πυλάδην τε
“νον PNP RA ss —VYV-A
Notice the tribrach in the first place of (2), and the cyclic
dacty] in the third place of (3).
This verse is familiar in English poetry, as
Tel) me not in mournful numbers, life is but an empty dreaia.
1652, Thevlame tetrameter (σχάζων), called Hipponactean from
Hipponax (see 1663), is the preceding verse with the last syllable
but one long. E.g.
ἀμφιδέξιος γάρ εἰμι κοὐχ ἁμαρτάνω κόπτων."ἡ
NF Ts ee NI Be
1653. The following are some of the more important
lyric trochaic verses : —
1. Tripody acatalectic (the Ithyphallic) :
μήποτ᾽ éxraxeine τοὺ --ὖ (1647)
2. Tripody catalectic:
ὅς ye σὰν λιπών.δ “νον -ολ
3. Tetrapody or dimeter acatalectic:
τοῦτο τοῦ μὲν ἦρος ἀεὶ —voivintveyv
βλαστάνει καὶ σῦκοφαντ! ἷΪἾ Ue 1) Oe
4, Tetrapody or dimeter catalectic:
δεινὰ πράγματ᾽ εἴδομεν.3 —~v—vi-v—Aa
ἀσπίδας φυλλορροεῖ. a PN ef
5. Hexapody or trimeter catalectic:
ἁρπαγαὶ δὲ διαδρομᾶν ὁμαίμονες ἢ
aevevilvuvevin“rven
2 Ar. N. 575. 4 Hippon. 83. 1 Ar, Av. 1478, 1479, 10 A. Se. 351.
2 ibid. 626. SA. Pr. 538. 8 ibid. 1472.
8 E. Or. 1635. 6S. Ph. 1216. 9 thid. 1481.
1658] IAMBIC RHYTHMS. 357
1654. A stanza consisting of a series of dimeters acata-
lectic (1653, 3), rarely with an occasional monometer
τὸν —v), and ending in a dimeter catalectic (1653, 4),
is called a trochaic system. £.9.
ταῦτα μὲν πρὸς ἀνδρός ἐστι = υὑ--σἱ νον
vow ἔχοντος καὶ φρένας αὶ OL
πολλὰ περιπεπλευκότος.} -.,.͵αησυυυϊ--ὧ-- λ
For iambic and anapaestic systems, formed on the saine prin-
ciple, see 1666 and 1677. See also 1636.
1655. The following contain examples of syncopated
trochaic verses (1632, 1):—
vov καταστροφαὶ νέων aS eee eae εν ἃ
θεσμίων, εἰ κρατήσει δίκᾶ τε καὶ βλάβα
εξ. ὧἷὧς] - viv leva
τοῦδε μητροκτόνον.ἢ ΠῚ ἘΝῚ ΠΝ τ ΡΝ
δωμάτων γὰρ εἱλόμᾶν τὸς τσ ἃ
ἀνατροπᾶς, ὅταν “Apys τιθασὸς ὧν φίλον ἐλῃ.ἦ
VUUVELIGUULIGUULIGUULA
1656. In lyric trochaic and iambic verses, the irrational sy)lable
is found chiefly in comedy, and is avoided in tragedy.
JAMBIC RHYTHMS.
1657. lainbic verses are generally measured by dipodies
(1040). The irrational iambus >< (1633) in the form of
a spondee can stand in the first place of each iambie dipody,
that is, in the odd places (first, third, etc.), so that the
dipody has the form Ὁ - ὦ +. An apparent dactyl (> Gu
for > +) is sometimes used as the equivalent of the irra-
tional iambus; and the cyclic anapaest ὦ τ΄ (1634) is used
for the iambus in both parts of the dipody, except in the
last foot, especially by the Attic comedians (1658). The
tribrach (Ὁ ὦ wv) may stand for the iambus in every foot
except the last.
1658. The inost common of all iambic verses is the
TRIMETER ACATALECTIC, in which most of the dialogue of
ΣΑΣ. ἢ. 634 ff. 2A, Bu. 490 ff. 8 ibid. 354 ff.
358 VERSIFICATION. [1659
the Attic drama is composed. It never allows any substi-
tution in the last foot. With this exception it may have
the tribrach in any place. The irrational iambus > = in
the form of a spondee can stand in the first place of every
dipody. The tragedians allow the (apparent) dactyl > ou
only in the first and third places, and the cyclic anapaest
only in the first place; but in proper naines they allow the
anapaest in every place except the last. he comedians
allow the dactyl > U ὦ in all the odd places, and the cyclic
anapaest in every place except the last (1657). The most
cominon caesura is that after the thesis of the third foot.
1659. The following scheme shows the tragic and the
comic iambic trimeter compared, —the forms peculiar to
comedy being enclosed in [ ].
vive wer we Fe οὖς.
Pk »ο- is
νννννν νυν νον boyy
>vuy |>ue [>vv]
uuu υ--Ἰ [Ὁ υ--} [υ vw) [υ υ--
1660. When the tragic trimeter ends in a word forming a cretic
(— v—), this is regularly preceded by a short syllable or by a
monosyllable.! In general the tragedians avoid the feet of three
syllables, even where they are allowed.
1661. The following are examples of both the tragic and
the comic form of the iambic trimeter : —
(Tragic) χθονὸς μὲν εἰς | τηλουρὸν ἤϊκομεν πέδον,
Σκύθην ἐς οἷ μον, ἄβατον εἰς | ἐρημίαν.
Ἥφαιστε, σοὶ | δὲ χρὴ μέλειν | ἐπιστολάς. A. Pr. 1-3.
(Comic) ὦ Ζεῦ βασιλεῦ - | τὸ χρῆμα τῶν [νυκτῶν ὅσον
ἀπέραντον" οὐ!δέποθ' ἡμέρα | γενήσεται;
ἀπόλοιο δῆτ᾽, | ὦ πόλεμε, πολλῶν οὕνεκα. Ar. Ν. 2, ὃ, 6.
1 This is known as ‘ Porson’s rule.” ‘*Nempe hance regulam ple-
rumque in senariis observabant ‘Tragici, ut, si voce quae Creticum
pede efficeret terminaretur versus, camqne vocem hypermonosy)-
Jabon praecederet, quintus pes iaimbus vel tribrachys ésse deberct.”
Suppl. ad Praef. ad Hecubam.
1665] IAMBIC RHYTHMS, 359
1662, The Iambic Trimeter appears in English as the
Alexandrine, which is seldom used except at the end of a
stanza : —
And hdpe to mérlit Hedven by makling Edrth a Héll.
1663. The lame trimeter (σχάζων), called the Choliambus and the
Hipponactean (see 1652), is the preceding verse with the last syl-
lable but one long. It is said to have been invented by Hipponax
(about 540 B.c.), and it is used in the newly discovered mimes of
Herondas. E.g.
ἀκούσαθ᾽ ᾿ἱἹππώνακτος ᾿ ob yap ἀλλ᾽ ἥκω."
οὕτω τί σοι δοίησαν αἱ φίλαι Μοῦσαι.
τὴς Woe τος Pa Se
1664. The rerramMrTER CATALECTIC, consisting of seven
feet and a syllable, is common in Attic comedy. There is
a regular diaeresis (1643) after’ the second dipody, where
the first rhythmical series ends (1637).
ddanoes.
uit (1640,2)
καὶ μὴ γέλωτ᾽
Ίξῳυ...
ὑπερβαλεῖ,
΄
“ως.
ν ν » >
εἴπερ τὸν ἄνδρ
a
— VY _
In English poetry we have
A captain bold | of Halifax, || who lived in coun'try quarters.
1665, ‘The following are some of the more important
lyric iambic verses : —
1. Dipody or monometer :
τί δῆθ᾽ ὁρᾷς; 4 ξεως.
2. Tripody (acatalectic and catalectic) :
τί τῶνδ᾽ ἄνευ κακῶν; ὃ iO Sas
ἐπ᾽ ἄλλο πήδα.5 τ στ -ὦ
3. Dimeter (acatalectic and catalectic) :
ἰαλτὸς ἐκ δόμων ἔβαν.ἷ vivuilutuve
ζηλῶ σε τῆς | εὐβουλίάς 5 > U1 >i ve
καὶ τὸν λόγον | τὸν ἥττωξΥὈ > Vl ur — (1640, 2)
1 Hipp. 47. « ibid. 1098. TA, Ch. 22.
4 Herond. 3, 1. oA. Ay. 211. 8 Ar. Ach. 1008.
8 Ar. Ν, 10385. 6 Ar, Ν' 708. 9 ar. NV. 1452.
360 VERSIFICATION. [1666
4. Hexapody or trimeter catalectic :
πρέπει παρηὶς φοινίοις ἀμυγμοῖςὦ
ὐπξ ἰφῷοι τιν
1666. Iambic systems are formed on the same principle as
trochaic systems (1654), of acatalectic dimeters with an occasional
monometer, ending with a catalectic dimeter. E.9.
ἡττήμεθ᾽ > ὦ βινούμενοι, >i vil > ue
πρὸς τῶν θεῶν δέξασθέ pov >i vi ον
θοἰμάτιον, ὡς »νυων..
ἐξαυτομολῶ πρὸς ὑμᾶς. Pe VR IU
These verses end a long iambic system in Ar. Nud. 1090-1104:
see also Nub. 1446-1452, and Eq. 911-940.
1667. For the irrational syllable in lyric verse, see 1656.
DACTYLIC RHYTHMS.
1668, The only regular substitute for the dactyl is the
spondee, which arises by contraction of the two short syl-
lables of the dactyl (4 — from 2 uv).
1669. ‘The most comnion of all Greek verses is the HEROIC
HEXAMETER, the Homeric verse. It always has a spondee
in the last place, often in the first four places, seldom in the
fifth (the verse being then called spondaic). There is com-
monly a caesura in the third foot, either after the arsis or
(rather more frequently) dividing the thesis. There is
sometimes a caesura after the arsis of the fourth foot, and
rarely one in the thesis. ‘he caesura after the arsis is
ealled masculine, that in the thesis feminine or trochaic. A
diaeresis after the fourth foot, common in bucolic poetry, is
called bucolic. Eg.
ἄνδρα μοι ἔννεπε, Μοῦσα, πολύτροπον, ὃς μάλα πολλὰ
-.«υυἹο νυ --οὐυἱ.-υσν !--ὐν 1...
πλάγχθη ἐπεὶ Τροίης ἱερὸν πτολάθρον ἔπερσεν.2
--υυ..-ἰτοὺ νυ τ υυ ἰ--ὐὧν 1.- Ὁ
͵
LA. Ch. 24. 2 Od. 1, 1 and 2.
1672] DACTYLIC RIYTHMS. 361
re as
tint’ abr’, αἰγιόχοιο Διὸς τέκος, εἰλήλουθας"
ξ Δ ε υ οι σσ υξϊ οι
. 2
εἶπέ μοι, ὦ Κορύδων, τίνος αἱ βόες; ἦρα Φιλώνδα, ἢ
-.οὐν ᾿-ὐν].-υν]-- νου].
1670. The ἘΠΈΘΤΑΟ DisTICcH consists of an heroic hexam-
eter followed by the so-called Elegiac pentameter. ‘This
last verse consists really of two dactylic trimeters with
syncope (1632, 1) or catalexis in the Jast measure ; as —
Παλλὰς ᾿Αἰθηναίη || χεῖρας ὕϊπερθεν ἔϊχει.ὃ
—vv lect VeVi VV ILA
At the end of the pentameter verse the pause (A) takes the
place of syncope (vs) in the middle. ‘Ihe verse probably arose
from a repetition of the first penthemin (πενθ-ημι-μερές, sive half:
Jeet) of the hexameter. But syllaba anceps and hiatus are uot
allowed after the first trimeter, but only at the end of the verse
(1688). The last two complete feet are always dactyls. A diaeresis
(1643) divides the two parts of the verse. ‘The pentaimeter is
never used by itself.
1671. The following is an Elegiac Distich: —
τίς δὲ βίος τί δὲ | τερπνὸν ἄϊνευ χρυ]σέης "A ppoldfrys ;
τεθναίην ὅτε | μοι ἢ μηκέτι | ταῦτα μέϊλοι."
en Beare Pe a et Ps
~—-loevveululovvlntvvliAa
1672. In the Homeric verse a long vowel or a diphthong in the
thesis (not in the arsis) is often shortened at the end of a word
when the next word begins with a vowel. This sometimes occurs
in the middle of a word. E.g.
ὦ πόποι, ἦ pads | δὴ μετειβούλευίσαν θεοὶ | ἄλλως.
χρυσέῳ ἀϊνὰ σκήϊπτρῳ, καὶ | λίσσετο | πάντας ᾿Αἰχαιούς (see 47, 1).6
βέβληαι, οὐδ᾽ ἅλιον βέλος ἔκφυγεν, ὡς ὄφελόν τοι.ἷ
But ἥἡμετέρῳ ἐνὶ οἴκῳ ἐν “Apyet, τηλόθι πάτρης.
3 71.1, 202. 4 Mimn.1, 1 and 2, 7 JU. 11, 380.
2 Theoc. 4, 1. § Od. 5, 286. 8 72.1, 30.
® Solon, 4, 4. 671, 15.
362 VERSIFICATION. [1673
1673. When a short vowel stands in Homer where a long one
is required by the verse, it ay be explained in various ways.
1, By supposing A, », % p, of & to be doubled at the beginning
of certain words; as πολλὰ λισσομένω (....- ὦ .-.). 10.29.9]
(we have ἐλλίσσετο in Il. 6, 45).
2. By the original presence of ¢ making position (see 3; 90; 91);
as τοῖόν fot πῦρ (_.___. __), I.5,7. So before δείδω, fear, and
other derivatives of the atem δέει, and before δήν (for δεην).
3. By a pause in the verse (1642, 2) prolonging the time; as in
»
φεύγωμεν: ἔτι γάρ κεν ἀλύξαιμεν κακὸν ἦμαρ."
πα λοι a εις ες
1674, The following are some of the chief lyric dactylic
verses : =~
1, Dineter :
μυστοδόϊκος δόμος 3 aH—vvulovy
μοῖρα διώκει ee AS Ps
2. Trimeter (acatalectic and catalectic) :
παμπρέπτοις ἐν ἕδραισιν." Soho fen
παρθένοι | 6uBpopdipr® Ul vul—Aa
With anacrusis (1635):
ἐγείνατο μὲν μόρον αὐτῷ υὧυἱ-.-ὐ κῶν -...ὄ.
πατροκτόνον Οἰδιπόδαν ViLUuUuiVUHA
3. Tetrameter (acatalectic and catalectic) :
πέμπει ξὺν δορὶ καὶ χερὶ πράκτοριΪ . -Ι. vu l_uul_vy
οὐρανίοις τε θεοῖς Swlpypatra® . υὐἱ- -υὐἱ ---Ἰυν
ἔλθετ᾽ ἐποψόμεϊναι δύνα)μιν.ἢ -οᾳυὐυἹ ον ]--Δ
ANAPAESTIC RHYTHMS.
1675. Anapaestic verses are generally measured by dipo-
dies (1646). The spondee and the dactyl (_ < and — dv)
may stand for the anapaest.
The long syllable of an anapaest is rarely resolved into two
short, making UG vu for UU «2.
1 Od. 10, 269, 4A. Ag. 117. 7A. Ag. 11.
2 Ar. NV. 808. 6 Ar, N. 299. 8 Ar. N. 805.
8 E. Her. 612. 6 A. Se. 751, 752. 9 Ar. ἢ. 879,
1611] ANAPAESTIC RITYTHMS. 363
1676, The following are the most common anapaestic
verses : —
1. The monometer:
τρόπον αἰϊγυπιῶν. υν.--ἰυν--
καὶ θέμις | αἰνεῖν. ~vuloe
σύμφωΪνος ὁμοῦ. εἰς σα
2. The dimeter acatalectic :
μέγαν ἐκ | θυμοῦ | κλάξονϊτες “Apy§ UU --Ἰ---ΟἸ.- --Φἃεἀἀάσσόν.-
ot’ ἐκ[πατίοις | ἄλγεσι | παίδων ὁ -.. bP tev J
And the dllive of pedce | sends its brinchjes abrodd.
3. The dimeter cutalectic, or paroemiuc :
ἦραν | στρατιῶ᾽τιν ἀρωγήν. 1 uu — lu vist — (1640, 2)
οὕτω] πλουτήϊσετε πάνιτε ἢ -Ι-. -ΟἸυνιυ )--
The Lord | is advdnclivg. Prepare { ye!
4. The TerraMETER GATALKCTIC, consisting of seven feet
and a syllable, or of the two preceding verses combined.
There is a regular diaeresis after the second dipody. This
verse is frequently used by the line (1649) in long passages
of Aristophanes.
- πρόσχετε τὸν νοῦν | τοῖς ἀθανάτοις || ἡμῖν, τοῖς αἰϊὲν ἐοῦσι
τοῖς αἰθερίοις, | τοῖσιν ἀγήρῳς, || τοῖς ἄφθιτα μηϊδομένοισιν.δ
HYD Ii mK de ew
1677. An ANAPArSTIC system consists of a series of
anapacstic dimeters acatalectic, with occasionally a mono-
meter, ending always with the paroemiac (or dimeter
catalectic). These are very frequently employed in both
tragedy and comedy. Εἰ.
δέκατον μὲν ἔτος τόδ᾽ ἐπεὶ Πριάμου UU LU UP UU ee
μέγας ἀντίδικος, ωυνκ--ουνν.-
Μενέλδος ἄναξ ἠδ᾽ ᾿Αγαμέμνω, ψω--ὧὐ--ἰ--ν .----
διθρόνου Διόθεν καὶ δισακήππρυ OU υὧὐ.--.1.-- -- -ο--
τιμῆς ὀχυρὸν ζεῦγος ᾿Ατρειδᾶν, ete WR oe es os
στόλον ᾿Αργείων xidtovavray ὥς πον levee
τῆσδ᾽ ἀπὸ χώρᾶς τοι we
ἦραν, στρατιῶτιν ἀρωγήν. -ἰὐν luv,
1A. Ag.49. δ Ar. 4υ. 221. * ibid. δ0, 7 Ar. Av. 186. 9.Α. Ag. 40-47.
8 ἰδίά. 98. 4 A. Ag. 48. 5 wid. 47. 5 ibid. 689.
864 VERSIFICATION. [1673
1678. Anapaestic systems are especially common in march
movements in tragedy, where they were probably chanted by the
leader of the chorus, as in the πάροδος.
LOGAVEDIC RHYTHMS.
1679, Logaoedic rhythm is a rhythm in } time, having
the trochee as its foundation, but admitting great freedom
of construction. Besides the trochee — ὦ, it admits the
irrational trochee — >, the tribrach u vu ὦν, the cyclic dacty]
—v v, and the triseme (1632, 1) or syncopated trochee
These are all equivalent feet, of three times (=U ὦ υ).
1680. ‘Phe first foot of a logacedic verse allows special freedom.
{t may be a trochce or an irrational trochee _ >, and sometimes
a tribrach UU. An apparent iambus (probably with ietus
Ὁ —) sometimes occurs (1682, 7). Great license is here per-
mitted in using different forms in strophe and antistrophe, even
in verses which otherwise correspond precisely: see 1682, 7.
When a logaoedic verse has more than one rhythmical series
(1637), the first foot of each series has this freedom of form (see
1682, 7).
1681. An anacrusis (1635) may introduce any logaoedic verse.
1682. The following are some of the most important
logaoedic verses which have special names : —
1. Adonic: σύμμαχος ἔσσοΣ π΄. ὦ This is the final
verse of the Sapphic stanza (6).
2. First Pherecratic: ἑπταπύλοισι Θήβαις VU 1 ub
Catal. ἃς τρέμομεν λέγειν —~vUlouvl—an
3. Second Pherecratic: παιδὸς δύσφορον ἄταν. > I |
Catal. ἐκ μὲν δὴ πολέμω δ > Iw IA
4, Glyconic: (Three forms) :
(a) inne ἄναξ Πόσειδον, ᾧ. wulivlnvlAa
(Ὁ) Θήβᾳ τῶν προτέρων φάος Ὁ _ > lt vln~a
(6) φῶτα Barra πανσαγίᾳ -.αυἱ--υἰτπυυϊ--τλ
Δ Sapph. 1, 28. 4S. Aj. 648. 18, An. 101.
2 Pind. Py. 11,11. ὃ 5, An. 150. 8 ¢did. 107.
5 5. 0.C. 129. 8 Ar. Eq. 551.
1683] LOGAOEDIC RHYTHMS. 365
5. Three Alcaics, which form the Aleaic stanza (a, a, ὃ, 6):
(a) ἀσυνέτημι τῶν ἀνέμων στάσιν *
͵:--υϊἹ..-υοἱπυυ ]--υυ.. λα
(a) τὸ μὲν γὰρ ἔνθεν κῦμα κυλίνδεται
σσ:-υἹ..»Ιπυω [-ὐ.--α
(b) τὸ δ᾽ ἔνθεν - ἄμμες δ᾽ ἂν τὸ μέσσον
τὐξαή ς οὐ ΞΟ
(c) vai φορήμεθα σὺν μελαίνᾳ.}
πυυϊπνωυ!Π --υἹ-ὦ
Compare in Horace (Οἀ.},9}:
Vides ut alta stet nive candiduin
Soracte, nec iam sustineant onus
Silvae laborantes, geluque
Flumina constiterint acuto.
6. Sapphic: ποικιλόθρον᾽ 1 ἀθάνατ᾽ | * Agpoldira.?
-υἱ
may | συ leulny
>
Three Sapphies and an Adouie (1) form the Sapphic stanza.
7. Eupolidéan: ὦ θεϊώμεϊνοι, κατε!ρῶ || πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐϊλευθέρως.8
Ι
—v|-v we lelovuleie --}-- Δ
= S| mca
oy VuY
(See 1644.)
The Eupolidean verse is used by the line in comedy; as in Ar,
Nub. 518-562.
1683, The first strophe of the first Olympic ode of
Pindar is given as an example of the free use of logavedics
in lyric poetry.
Ve “.-
" ΠΝ: δ: Ἂς Saas. ants mn
ἄριστον μὲν ὕδωρ, ὁ δὲ || χρυσὸς αἰθύμενον πῦρ
ωϊι- πω --ὐἹιει-"- υϊἱτυω
Ψ , . t ν , ῷ
are διαπρέπει | νυκτὶ μεγάνορος ἔξοχα πλούτου
ωων!--υἹε-πυυ ἰπυν ἰπυν ον
εἰ δ᾽ ἄε΄λα yapver
ἀπ Ὡς τ] ιν ὰ
1 Alcae, 18, 1-4. 2 Sapph. 1, I. 8 Ar. WV. 618.
366 VERSIFICATION, (1684
beat, φίλον Hrop,
ey aye ‘
μηκέτ᾽ ἀελίου σκόπει
¥ , 2 Ld ΄ " , 7 =, > 4,44’
ἄλλο θαλπνότερον ἐν ἁμέρᾳ φάεννον ἄστρον ἐρήϊμᾶς δι᾿ αἰθέρος,
--υἹ.--ο»οσοἱυνυϊο.υ "συ πυῦ lel le ta,
μήδ᾽ ᾿ολυμπίᾶς ἀγῶνα || φέρτερον αὐδάσομεν *
--Υἱ--α͵ἱ- ὦ]. -οΪπυυ τι --ο ].. Δ
ὅθεν ὁ πολύφατος ὕμνος ἀμφιβάλλεται
vivvvlvuvlivloivlivlia
σοφῶν μητίεσσι, κελαδεῖν
ώτ ]--ὦὺ ι-ἰ νυ !--λ
Κρόνον παῖδ᾽, ἐς ἀφνεὰν ἱκομένους
vitLlwvuloivuluetuvvulia
ἐν =
paxatpay ‘lépwvos ἐστίαν.
vinluvvelivulivulug
DACTYLO-EPITRITIC RAYTHMS.
1684, 1. About half of the odes of Pindar are com-
posed in a measure called dactylo-epitritic, which consists
of dactyls, with their equivalent spondees and syncopated
forins (.-, and epitrites. ‘The epitrite (LU ——) is com-
posed of a long (or Dorie) trochee (_ Ὁ, see 1632, 2) and
aspondee. ‘The ΠΡΟΜ parts of the verse genetally ONS
the form UU 4UuU 4~ or (catalectic) UU -Φ υυ tA.
The epitrite also may be catalectic, .U—A. ‘The verse
may have an anacrusis.
2. It will be noticed that in this verse the long trochee (tv)
has the same length as the dactyl and the dacty! has its full time,
while in logaoedic verse the trochee has its ordinary time and the
dactyl is cyclic (equivalent in time to the trochiee).
1685. ‘The first strophe of Pindar’s third Olympic ode
is an example of this easure : —
Τυνδαρίδαις τε φιλοξείνοις ἀδεῖν καλλιπλοκάμῳ θ᾽ Ἑλένᾳ
τσ tev _ Ile le Ie
κλεινᾶν ᾿Ακράγαντα γεραίρων εὔχομαι,
Ses) Sie le eae Ἃ
1688) FEET OF FIVE OR SIX TIMES. 367
Θήρωνος ᾿Ολυμπιονίκᾶν [ὕμνον ὀρθώσαις, ἀκαμαντοπόδων
οἰ υνϊυ -Π.--Ἰουυ I Κ
ἵππων ἄωτον. || Μοῖσα οὕτω μοι παρεστάϊκοι νεοσέγαλον εὑρόντι τρόπον
H—inv Hey οὐ J eV fe
Δωρίῳ φωνὰν ἐναρμόξαι πεδίἴλῳ.
τ» ὦ ΘΟ i agit ΠΟΥ ΞΕ ἫΝ
RHYTHMS WITH FEET OF FIVE OR SIX TIMES.
1686. Some of the more important rhythms with feet of
five or six times (1627, 3 and 4) are the following: —
1687. 1. Choriambic rhythms, with the choriambus
—~vvu— as the fundamental foot: —
παῖδα μὲν adjras πόσιν αὐϊτᾷ θεμένα.}
ΠΥ σ΄ ΠΝ Ὁ Ὁ
δεινὰ μὲν οὖν, δεινὰ ταράσσει σοφὸς οἰωνοθέτας.2
2. Choriambic verses of this class are rare. Most verses formerly
called churiambic are here explained as logaoedic (1682).
1688. 1. Jonic rhythins, with the ionic a minore ὦ ὦ --. --
as the fundamental foot, admitting also the equivalent
vu (1626, 2):—
πεπέρακεν)μὲν ὁ περσίγπτολις ἤδη
βασίλειος | στρατὸς εἰς ἀνἰτίπορον γείτονα χώρᾶν,
λινοδέσμῳ [σχεδίᾳ πορθμὸν ἀμείψᾶς
᾿Αθαμαν)τίδος “Ἑλλὰς.
Zz Zz ld
cates One Gem be serine
vue u Ve UV Ue
Vey — Ὡς Na a ea Se
vveuw Juve
2. A double trochee _U — ὦ often takes the place of the two
long syllables and the two following shorts. This is called anacldsts
(ἀνάκλασις, breaking up), as it breaks up the feet. Eg.
τίς ὁ κραιπνῷ | ποδὶ πηδήϊματος εὐπείτοῦς ἀνάσσων , ἡ
1A. Se. 929. 28.0. 7. 484, ® A. Pe. 65-70. 4 ibid. 95.
368 VERSIFICATION, [1689
1689, Cretic rhythms, in which paeons occur by resolu-
tion of long syllables (LU Uv or νυν for ~U_):—
οὐκ ἀνα σχήσομαι" μηδὲ λέγε | poe σὺ λόγον *
ὡς μεμϊ)σηκά σε Κλέωνος ἔτι | μᾶλλον, ὃν
κατατεμῶ | τοῖσιν ἱππεῦσι κατ[τύματα.}
-κ-υ--ΚΓ--:͵οὧ--ἰ-ιΡ͵ἦυυ ᾳ[-ιὐὧὖν
-υ-.--ἰἸ--υνυ ᾳψ-τυων [--ὐ--
υωνυ-..} .-ὦ.-.--Ἠὐ--1.-ὸυ --
1690, Bacchic rhythms, with the bacchius ὦ -- -- as the
fundamental foot: —
τίς ἀχὼ, | ris ὀδμὰ | rpocérra | μ᾽ ἀφεγγής ,3
Oa od Si a τ
στενάζω, | τί ῥέξω; | γένωμαι | δυσοίστᾶᾷ | πολέταις , ὃ
ως | Va One beet a |
DOCHMIACS.
1691. Dochmiac verses, which are used chiefly in tragedy
to express great excitement, are based upon a foot called
the dochmius, compounded of an iambus and a cretic (ora
bacehius and an jambus) ὦ --- [-ἶὖ — (or --- [ὦ .-). This
peculiar foot appears in nineteen different forms, by re-
solving the long syllables and admitting irrational longs
in place’ of the two shorts. Its most common forms are
vif[—u—and vuvl— u_. As examples may be given
δυσαλγεῖ τύχᾳ." Via
mrepopopoy δέμας." υνυ-.ν.-
μῖσόθεον μὲν οὖν." »υυ-.νυ-- (for »---- v--)
μεγάλα μεγάλα Kai.” vuveuy ve (for vie v—)
μετοικεῖν σκότῳ θανὼν ὁ τλάμων 5 ὦ. --ἰ[υ-.... »-
μεθεῖται στράτος, στρατόπεδον λιπώνδ υ-.--υ.«]υνυ-Ὁ --
1 Ar. Ach, 299-301. * A. Ag. 1165. TE. Βα. 1198.
2A. Pri 118, δ hid. 1147. 8}, Hip. 837.
8 A, Eu. 188. 6 ydid. 1090, 9A. 56. 19.
APPENDIX.
------.2-----...
CATALOGUE OF VERBS.
APPENDIX.
1692. CATALOGUE OF VERBS.
Note.— This catalogue professes to contain all verbs in ordinary
use in classic Greek which have any such peculiarities as to present
difficulties to a student. No verb is introduced which does not occur
in some form before Aristotle ; and no forms are given which are not
found in writers earlier than the Alexandrian period, except some-
tines the present indicative uf a verb which is classic in other tenses,
and oceasionally a form which is given for completeness and marked
as later. ‘Tenses which are not used by Attic writers, in either prose
or poetry, or which occur only in lyrical parts of the drama, are
enclosed in [ }, except occasionally the present indicative of a verb
which is Attic in other tenses.
The verb stem, with any other important forins of the stem, is
given in () directly after the present indicative, unless the verb
belongs to the first class (569). The class of each verb in w is given
by an Arabic numeral in ( ) at the end, unless it is of the first class.
Verbs in μὲ of the Seventh Class (619), enumerated in 794, are inarked
with (I.); those of the Fifth Class in vig: (608), enumerated in 797, 1,
with (II.); and the poetic verbs in nut or Ῥαμαι (609), enumeratcd in
797, 2, which add va to the stein in the present, with (IIT.). A few
epic peculiarities are sometiines disregarded in the classification.
‘The modification of the stem made by adding ¢ in certain tenses
(653) is marked by prefixing (¢-) to the first form in which this
occurs, unless this is the present. Presents in ew thus formed have
a reference to Ga4. A hyphen prefixed to a form (as -ἔδρᾶν) indicates
that it is found only in composition. This is oinitted, however, if the
simple form occurs even in later Greek ; and it is often omitted when
the occurrence of cognate forms, or any other reason, makes it prob-
able that the simple form was in use. It would be extremely difficult
to point out an example of every tense of even the best English verbs
in a writer of established authority within a fixed period.
The imperfect or pluperfect is generally omitted when the present
or perfect is given. Second perfects which are given among the prin-
cipal parts of a verb (362, 1) are uot specially designated (see BAdwrw).
371
372 APPENDIX. [1692
A.
[(da-), injure, infatuate, stem, with aor. daca (daca), aoa; a. p,
ἀάσθην ; pr. mid. ἀᾶται, aor, ἀασάμην, erred. Vb. daros, &v-aros,
Epic. ]
“Ayapat, admire, [epic fut. ἀγάσομαι, rare,] ἠγάσϑην, ἠγασάμην. (I.)
᾿Αγγέλλω (ἀγγελ-), announce, ἀγγελῶ [ἀγγελέω], ἤγγειλα, ἤγγελκα,
ἤγγελμαι, ἠγγέλθην, ful. p. ἀγγελθήσομαι ; a. τη. ἠγγειλάμην. Second
aorists with A are doubtful. (4.)
᾿Αγείρω (dyep-), collect, a. ἤγειρα ; [ep. plpf. p. dynyéparo; a. Ὁ. ἠγέρθην,
aM. (ἠγειρά μην) συν-αγείρατο, 2 a. m. ἀγερόμην with part. ἀγρόμενος.
See ἠγερέθομαι.) (4.)
"Αγνῦμι (fay-), in comp. also ἀγνύω, break, ἄξω, ἔαξα (581, 1) [rarely
epic ἦξα], 2 p. ἔᾶγα [lon. ἔηγα], 2 a. p. ἐάγην [ep. ἐάγην or Lyn].
(1I.)
“Ayo, lead, ἄξω, ἧξα (rare), ἦχα, ἦγμαι, ἤχθην, ἀχθήσομαι; 2 a. ἤγα-
γον, ἠγαγόμην ; fut. m. ἄξομαι (as pass.), [Hom. ἃ. m. ἀξάμην, 2 a.
act. imper. ἄξετε, inf. ἀξέμεναι (777, 8).}
[(ἀδε-), be sated, stem with aor. opt. ἀδήσειεν, pf. part. ἀδηκώς.
Epic. ]
[(ae-), rest, stein with aor. deoa, dea. Epic.]
“AS, sing, ἄσομαι (dow, rare), ἧσα, ἤσθην. Ion. and poet. ἀείδω,
ἀείσω and ἀείσομαι, ἤεισα.
[Αέξω: Hom. for αὔξω,}
[Αημι (de-), blow, ἄητον, ἄεισι, inf. ἀῆναι, ἀήμεναι, part. dels; imp.
anv. Mid. dyracand &nro, part. ἀήμενος. Voetic, chietly epic.] (1.)
AlSdopat, poet. αἴδομαι, respect, aiddcouat, ἥδεσμαι, ἠδέσθην (as mid.),
ἡδεσάμην (chiefly poet.), [Hom. imperat. aldeio}. 689; 640.
Alivia, praise, αἰνέσω [alvjow], ἤἥνεσα [ἤνησα], ἥνεκα, ἤνημαι, ἠνέθην, 639,
[Αἴνυμαι, take, imp. αἰνύμην. Epic.] (11.)
Alpéw (aipe-, ἐλ-), fake, αἱρήσω, ἥρηκα, ponuac [Hdt. ἀραίρηκα, ἀραίρη-
μαι], ἡρέθην, αἰρεθήσομαι; fut. pf. ἡρήσομαι (rare) ; 2 a. εἷλον, ἕλω,
εἰς, ; εἱλόμην, ἕλωμαι, etc. (8.)
Αἴρω (dp-), take up, ἀρῶ, ἦρα (674), ἧρκα, ἧρμαι, ἤρθην, ἀρθήσομαι;
ἠράμην (674). Ton. and poct. ἀείρω (ἀερ-)» ἤειρα, ἡέρθην, [ἥερμαι
(late), Hom. plpf. ἄωρτο for jepro; a. Mm. ἀειράμην.] Fut. ἀροῦμαι
and 2 a. ἠρόμην (with ἄρωμαι (a) etc.) belong to ἄρνυμαι (ἀρ-). (4.)
Αἰσθάνομαι (aicd-), perceive, (€-) αἰσθήσομαι, ἤσθημαι; ἡσθόμην. Pres.
αἴσθομαι (rare). (5.)
᾿Αἴσσω (dix-), rush, ditw, Fita, ἠΐχθην, ἠϊξάμην. Also doow or ἄττω
(also ἄσσω or ἄττων, ἄξω, pa. Both rare in prose. (4.)
Αἰσχύνω (aleyvr-), disgrace, αἰσχυνῶ, ἤσχῦνα, [p. p. part. ep. ἤσχυμ-
pévos,] ἡσχύνθην, felt ashamed, αἱσχννθήσομαι ; fut. m. αἱσ χυνοῦμαι.
(4.)
1692} CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 373
᾿Αἴω, hear, imp. dior, [aor. -ἤϊσα. Tonic and poctie.
['Atw, breathe out, only imp. diov. Epic. See ἄημι.]
[(Ακαχίζω (ax-, sce 587), affict, redupl. pres. with ἀχέω and ἀχεύω,
be grieved (only in pr. part. ἀχέων, ἀχεύων), and ἄχομαι, be grieved ;
fut. ἀκαχήσω, aor. dxdxnoa; p.p. ἀκάχημαι (ἀκηχέδαται), ἀκάχησθαι,
ἀκαχήμενος OF ἀκηχέμενος ; 2 aor. ἤκαχον, ἀκαχόμην. See ἄχνυμαι
and ἄχομαι. Epic.} (4.)
[[Ακαχμένος, sharpened, epic perf. part. with no present in use.]
᾿Ακέομαι, heal, aor. ἠκεσάμην.
᾿Ακηδέω, neglect, (aur. ἀκήδεσα epic}. Poetic.
᾿Ακούω (dxouv- fur daog-), hear, ἀκούσομαι, ἥκουσα [Dor. pf. ἄκουκα], 2
pi. ἀκήκοα (for dx-nxoea, GOV), 2 plpf. ἠκηκόη or ἀκηκόη ; ἠκούσθην,
ἀκουσθήσομαι.
᾿Αλαλάζω (ἀλαλαγ-), raise war-cry, ἀλαλάξομαι, ἠλάλαξα. (4.)
᾿Αλάομαι, wander, [pf. ἀλάλημαι (as pres.), W. inf. ἀλάλησθαι, part.
ἀλαλήμενος), a. ἀλήθην. Chiefly poetic.
᾿Αλδαίνω (dAdar-), nuurish, (ep. 2 avr. ἥλδανον.] Pres. also ἀλδήσκω,
“Poetic. (4.)
᾿Αλείφω (ἀλειφ-), anvint, ἀλείψω, ἤλειψα, ἀλήλιφα, ἀλήλιμμαι, ἠλείφϑην,
ἀλειφϑήσομαι (rare), 2 a. p. ἠλίφην (rare), Mid. f. ἀλείψομαι, a.
ἠλειψάμην. 529. (2.)
᾿Αλέξω (ἀλεξ-, ddex-), ward off, fut. ἀλέξομαι [ep. (ε-) ἀλεξήσω, 110.
ἀλεξήσομαι ; aor. (€-) ἡλέξησα (ἤλεξα, rare), ἠλεξάμην ; [ep. 2 a.
ἄλαλκον for ἀλ-αλεκ-ον.] G57.
[᾿Αλέομαι, avoid, epic; aor. ἡλεάμη».
᾿Αλεύω, avert, ἀλεύσω, prevoa. Mid, ἀλεύομαι, avoid, aor, ἠλευάμην,
with subj. ἐξ-αλεύσωμαι. DPorvtic.
"Addo, grind, prea, ἁλήλεσμαι OF ἀλήλεμαι, 639; 640.
("AdABopar, be healed, (-) ἀλθήσομαι. lonic and poctic.
᾿Αλίσκομαι (dA-, ddo-), be captured, d\bropnat, ἥλωκα OF ἐᾶλωκα, 2 aor.
ἥλων or ἐάλων, ard [epic drdw], ἁλοίην, ἁλῶναι, ἁλούς (799) ; all
passive in meaning. 659. No active ddioxw, but sec ἀν-αλίσκω.
(6.)
[ Adtralvopat (ἀλιτ-, ἀλιταν-), with epic pres. act. ἀλιτραίνω, sin; 2
aor. ἥλιτον, ἀλιτόμην, pf. part. ἀλιτήμενος, Stuning, ΟΡ. 1. J’vetic,
ehiefly epic. (4. 5.)
᾿Αλλάσσω (άλλαγ-), Change, ἀλλάξω, ἤλλαξα, ἤλλαχα, ἤλλαγμαι, ἠλλά-
χϑην and ἠλλάγην, ἀλλαχθήσομαι and ἀλλαγήσομαι. Mid. ful. ἀλλά-
ξομαι, ἃ. ἠλλαξάμην. (4.)
“Αλλομαι (ἀλ-), leap, ἁλοῦμαι, ἡλάμην;; 2%. ἡλόμη» (rare). [Epic 2 ἃ,
ἄλσο, ἄλτο, ἄλμενος, by syneope.} 800, 2, (4.)
[(Αλνυκτάζω and ἀλνκτέω, be excited, inp, ἀλύκταζον Hat. pi. ἀλαλύ-
κτημαι Hom. Ionic.)
374 APPENDIX. [1692
᾿Αλύσκω (ddux-), avoid, ἀλύξω [and ἀλύξομαι, ἥλυξα (rarely -αμην).
Poetic. ᾿Αλύσκω is for ἀλυκ-σκω (617). (6.)
᾿Αλφάνω (ἀλφ-), find, acquire, [epic 2 aor. ἧλφον.)] (5.)
᾿Αμαρτάνω (duapr-), err, (€-) ἁμαρτήσομαι, ἡμάρτηκα, ἡμάρτημαι, ἥμαρ.
τήθην ; 2 aor. ἥμαρτον (ep. ἥμβροτον]. (5.)
᾿Αμβλίσκω (ἀμβλ-), ἀμβλόω in compos., miscarry, [ἀμβλώσω, late,]
ἤμβλωσα, ἤμβλωκα, ἤμβλωμαι, ἡμβλώθην. (6.)
᾿Αμείρω (ἀμερ-) and ἀμέρδω, deprive, ἥμερσα, ἡμέρθην. Poetic. (1. 4.)
᾿Αμπ-έχω and ἀμπ-ίσχω (ἀμφί and ἔχω), wrap about, clothe, ἀμφέξω,
2a. ἤμπι-σχον ; (epic impf. ἄμπεχον.) Mid. ἀμπέχομαι, ἀμπίσχομαι,
ἀμπισχνέομαι ; imp. ἠμπειχόμην; f. ἀμφέξομαι ; 2 a. ἠμπι-σχόμην and
ἠμπ-εσχόμην, δ44. See ἔχω and ἴσχω,
᾿Αμπλακίσκω (ἀμπλακ-), err, miss, ἠμπλάκημαι; 2 a. ἥμπλακον, part,
ἀμπλακών Or ἁἀπλακών, VPoctic. (6.)
[Ἄμπννε, ἀμπνύνθην, ἄμπνυτο, all epic: sce ἀναπνέω.
᾿Αμύνω (άμυν-), ward off; fut. ἀμυνῶ, ἀμυνοῦμαι; aor. qubra, ἠμυνάμην,
4)
᾿Αμύσσω (ἀμυχ-), scratch, [ἀμύξω, ἥμυξα (‘Theoc.), ἠμυξάμην]. Poetic
and lunic. (4.)
᾿Αμφι-γνοέω, duubl, ἠμφιγνόεον and ἠμφεγνδεον, ἠμφεγνόησα ; aor. pass.
part. ἀμφιγνοηϑείς, 544.
Apor-dvvips (sce ἔννῦμι), clothe, fut. [ep. dudidow] Att. ἀμφιῶ ; ἠμφίεσα,
Huplecpac; ἀμφιέσομαι, ἀμφιεσάμην (poet.). 544. IT.)
᾿Αμφισβητέω, dispute, augmented ἡμφισ- and ἠμφεσ- (544) ; otherwise
regular,
᾿Αναίνομαι (dvav-), refuse, imp. ἡναινόμην, aor. ἠἡνηνάμην, ἀνήνασθαι. (4.)
Avarirkw (ἀλ-, ado-, 659), and dvaddw, expend, ἀνᾶλώσω, ἀνάλωσα,
and ἀνήλωσα (κατ-ηνάλωσα), dvddwxa and ἀνήλωκα, ἀνάλωμαι and
ἀνήλωμαι (κατ-ηνάλωμαι), ἀνᾶλώθην and ἀνηλώθην, ἀναλωθήσομαι.
See ἁλίσκομαι. (6.)
᾿Αναπνέω, luke breath; see πνέω (πνυ-). [Epic 2 aor, imperat. ἄμπνυε,
a. p. ἀμπνύνθην, 2 a. 1. ἄμπνῦτο (for dumvdero).]
᾿Ανδάνω (fas-, ἀδ.), please [impf. Hom. ἥνδανον and ἐήνδανον, Ταῦ.
ἤνδανον and ἑήνδανον ; fut. (e-) ddyow, Hdt.; 2 pf. ἕᾶδα, epic];
2 aor. ἄδον [Ion. éadov, epic εὔαδον for é¢fadov.}] Tonic and poctic.
See do-pevos, pleased, as adj. (5.)
᾿Ανέχω, hold up; see ἔχω, and 544.
[Ανήνοθε, defect. 2 pf., springs, sprung; in Jl. 11, 266 as 2 plpf.
(177, 4). Epic]
᾿Αν-οἰγνῦμι and ἀνοίγω (see οἴγνυμι), open, imp. ἀνέῳγον (ἤνοιγον,
rare) [epic ἀνῷῴγον]; ἀνοίξω, ἀνέῳξα (ἤνοιξα, rare) [Hdt. ἄνοιξα],
ἀνέῳχα, ἀνέῳγμαι, ἀνεῴχθην (subj. ἀνοιχθῶ, ete.) ; fut. pf. ἀνεῴξομαι
(2 pl. dvéyya late, very rare in Attic). (IL)
.1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 375
᾿Αν-ορθόω, set upright, augment dvwp- and quup-. 544,
*Aviw, Attic also ἀνύτω, accomplish; fut. ἀνύσω [Hom. dviw], ἀνύσο-
pat; OF. ἥνυσα, ἠνυσάμην; pl. ἥνυκα, ἥνυσμαι. 639, Poetic also ἄνω.
“Avaya, 2 perf. as pres., command [w. 1 pl. ἄνωγμεν, sud. ἀνώγω, opt.
ἀνώγοιμι], imper. ἄνωγε (rare), also ἄνωχθι (with ἀνώχθω, ἄνωχθε),
[inf. ἀνωγέμεν) ; 2 plpf. ἠνώγεα, ἠνώγει (or ἀνώγει), [also ἤνωγον
(or ἄνωγον), sce 777, 4}. [Present forms ἀνώγει and ἀνώγετον
(as if from ἀνώγω) occur ; also fut. ἀνώξω, a. ἤνωξα.) Poetic and
lonic.
['Aw-avpdo, take away, not found in present; imp. ἀπηύρων (as aor.);
kindred forms are epic fut. ἀπουρήσω, and aor. part. ἀπούρας, ἀπου-
pauevos.} Poetic,
[Απαφίσκω (ἀπ-αφ-), deceive, ἡπάφησα (rare), 2 a. ἥπαφον, Mm. opt.
ἀπαφοίμην]. Paetic. (6.)
᾿Απεχθάνομαι (ἐχθ-), be hated, (ε-) ἀπεχθήσομαι, ἀπήχθημαι; 2 a.
ἀπηχθόμην. Late pres. ἀπέχθομαι. (5.)
[Απόερσε, swept off, subj. ἀποέρσῃ, Opt. ἀποέρσειε (only in 8. pers.).
Epic. 3
*Aronrlyvipt and -bo, forms of ἀποκτείγω. See κτείνω.
᾿Απόχρη, τί suffices, impersonal. See χρή.
“Arrow (ag-), touch, fut, ἄψω, ἅψομαι; aur. gpa, ἡψάμην; pf. Fumac;
ἃ. Ὁ. ἤφθην (see ἐάφθη). (3.)
᾿Αράομαι, pray, ἀράσομαι, ἠρᾶσάμην, ἤρᾶμαι. [Ion. ἀρήσομαι, ἡρησά-
μην. Ep. act. inf. ἀρήμεναι, to »γαμ.}
'᾿Αραρίσκω (ap-), fit, ἦρσα, ἤρθην; 2 Ὁ. ἄρᾶρα, {Ion. ἄρηρα, pipf. ἀρήρει(»)
and ἠρήρει(ν) ;} 2 ἃ. ἥραρον ; 2 ἃ. mM. part, ἄρμενος (as adj,), filling.
With form of Attic redupl. in pres. (610). Poetic. (6.)
᾿Αράσσω or ἀράττω (dpay-), strike, ἀράξω, ἤραξα, ἠράχθην. (4.)
᾿Αρέσκω (ἀρε-), please, ἀρέσω, ἤρεσα, ἠρέσθην ; ἀρέσομαι, ἠρεσάμην.
080, (6)
[[Αρημένος, oppressed, perf. pass. aie Epic.}
᾿Αρκέω, assist, ἀρκέσω, ἥρκεσα. 639.
᾿Αρμόττω, poet. ἁρμόζω (dpyod-), fit, dpubow, ἥρμοσα (συνάρμοξα Pind.),
ἥρμοκα (AYiStOL.), ἥρμοσμαι, ἡρμόσθην, fut. p. ἁρμοσθήσομαι; ἃ. mM.
ἡρμοσάμην. (4.)
“ἌΆρνυμαι (ἀρ-), τοίτι, secure, fut. ἀροῦμαι, 2 ἃ. ἠρόμην (ἀρόμην). Chiefly
poetic. See αἴρω. (11.)
᾿Αρόω, plough, ἤροσα, [p. p. Ion. ἀρήρομαι], ἠρόθην. 639.
᾿Αρπάζω (ἄρπαγ- » seize, ἁρπάσω and ἁρπάσομαι [ep. aprdiw], ἥρπασα
[ἡρπαξαΊ, ἥρπακα, ἥρπασμαι (late ἡρπαγμαι), ἡρπάσθην (Hut. ἡρπά-
χθην], ἁρπασθήσομαι, For the Attic forms, see δ87. (4.)
᾿Αρύω and ἀρύτω, draw water, avr. ἥρυσα, ἠρυσάμην, ἠρύθην [ἡρύ-
σθην, 1ολ.}. 639.
816 APPENDIX. (1692
“Apxw, beyin, rule, ἄρξω, ἦρξα, (ἦρχα) ἦργμαι (mid.), ἤρχϑην, ἀρχθή.
σομαι (ΑἸἱδῖοι,), ἄρξομαι, ἠρξάμην.
“Avoow and ἄττω : sce ἀΐσσω,
[Ατιτάλλω (ἀτιταλ-), tend; aor. ἀτίγηλα. Epic and lyric.) (4.)
Ataive (αὐαν-) or αὐαίνω ; fut. adavd; aor. ninva, ηὐάνθην or αὐάνθην,
αὐανθήσομαι; fut. mm. αὐανοῦμαι (as pass.), Augment nv- or av.
(819), Chiefly poetic and Ionic. (4.)
Αὐξάνω or αὔξω (avk-), increuse, (€-) αὐξήσω, αὐξήσομαι, ηὔξησα, ηὔξηκα,
ηὔξημαι, ηὐξήϑην, αὐξηθήσομαι. [Also Ion. pres. ἀέξω, impf. ἄεξον.ἢ
(5)
[Αφάσσω (sce 582 and 587), feel, handle, aor. ἤφασα; used by Hat.
for ἀφάω or ἀφάω. (4.)
"A-type, ἐσέ go, imp. ἀφέην or ἠφίην (544); fut. ἀφήσω, ete. See the
inflection of ἴημι, 8610, (I.)
[Αφύσσω (agvy-), draw, pour, ἀφύξω, Poetic, chiefly epic. See
ἀφύω.} (4.)
(Adve, draw, ἤφυσα, ἠφυσάμην, Poetic, chiefly epic.]
"AxPopar, be displeused, (€-) ἀχθέσομαι, ἠχθέσθην, ἀχθεσθήσομαι.
("Axvupar (dx-), be troubled, impf. ἀχνύμην. VPoetic. (11.) Also
epic pres. @xopar.] See ἀκαχίζω.
["Aw, satiate, dow, dea; 2 avr. subj. ἔωμεν (or ἐῶμεν), pr. inf. ἄμεναι,
to satiate one’s self. Mid. (ἄομαι) darac as fut.; f. ἄσομαι, a. dod.
μην. Fpic.J
B.
Batu (fay-), speak, utter, βάξω, [ep. pf. pass. BéBaxrac]. Poetic. (4.)
Baivw (fa-, Bar-), go, βήσομαι, βέβηκα, βέβαμαι, ἐβάθην (rare); 2a.
ἔβην (799) ; 2 pf., see 804 ; [a.m epic ἐβησάμην (rare) and ἐβησόμην,
771, 8.) In active sense, carse to go, poet. Bhow, ἔβησα. See 010.
The shaple form is used in Attic prose only in the pres. and perf,
active. (5. 4.)
Βάλλω (Bar-, Bra-), throw, f. [Baréw] βαλῶ, rarely (€-) βαλλήσω,
βέβληκα, βέβλημαι. Opt. δια-βεβλῇῆσθε (734), [epic βεβόλημαι), ἐβλή-
θην, βληθήσομαι; 2 ἃ. ἔβαλον, ἐβαλόμην ; fut, m. βαλοῦμαι ; f. p.
βεβλήσομαι. [Epic, 2 a. dual ξυμ-βλήτην; 2 a. τὰ. ἐβλήμην, with
801). βλήεται, opt. βλῇῆο or Breco, dif. βλῆσθαι, pt. βλήμενος ; fut. ξυμ-
βλήσεαι, pf. p. βέβληαι. (4.)
Βάπτω (βαφ-), dip, βάψω, ἔβαψα, βέβαμμαι, ἐβάφην and (poet.) ἐβάφθην;
fut. m. βάψομαι. (3.)
Βάσκω (Ba-), poctic form of βαίνω, go. (6.)
Βαστάζω (see 587), carry, βαστάσω, ἐβάστασα. (Later forms from
stem βασταγ-.) Poetic. (4.)
Βήσσω (Bnx-), Att. Birrw, cunyh, βήξω, ἔβηξα. (4)
[Βίβημι (Ba-), go, pr. part. Bids. Epic.) (1.)
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 377
Βιβρώσκω (Bpo-), eat, p. βέβρωκα, βέβρωμαι, [ἐβρώϑην ; 2 ἃ. ἔβρων ; fut.
pf. βεβρώσομαι) ; 2 p. part. pl. βεβρῶτες (804). [How. opt. βεβρώ-
Bois.} (6.)
Βιόω, lve, βιώσομαι, ἐβίωσα (rare), βεβίωκα, βεβίωμαι; 2 a. ἐβίων (799).
(For ἐβιωσάμην, see βιώσκομαι.)
Βιώσκομαι (βιο-), revive, ἐβιωσάμην, restored to life. (6.)
Βλάπτω (Braf-), injure, βλάψω, ἔβλαψα, βέβλαφα, βέβλαμμαι, ἐβλάφθην;
2 ἃ. p. ἐβλάβην, 2 {. βλαβήσομαι; fut. in, βλάψομαι ; [fut. pf. βεβλά-
ψομαι Ion.]. (3.)
Βλαστάνω (βλαστ-), sprout, (ε-) βλαστήσω, βεβλάστηκα and ἐβλάστηκα
(524) ; 2 ἃ. ἔβλαστον. (5.)
Βλέπω, see, βλέψομαι [ἀἰ. ἀνα-βλέψω), ἔβλεψα.
Βλίττω or βλίσσω {(μελιτ-, βλιτ-, 60). Lake honey, aor. ἔβλισα. (4.)
Βλώσκω (uor-, μλο-, βλο-, 66), go, f. μολοῦμαι, p. μέμβλωκα, 2 a. ἔμολον,
Poetic. (6.)
Bodw, shuut, βοήσομαι, ἐβόησα. [lon. (stem flo-), βώσομαι, ἔβωσα,
ἐβωσάμην, (βέβωμαι) βεβωμένος, éBuc by. |}
Βόσκω, feed, (€-) βοσκήσω.
Βούλομαι, will, wish, (augin. ἐβουλ- or yBoud-) ; (€-) βουλήσομαι, βεβού-
Anuar, ἐβουλήθην [2 p. προ-βέβουλα, preser.] (pic also βόλομαι.
617.
{(Bpax-), stem, with only 2 aor. ἔβραχε and βράχε, resounded. Fpic.]
Βρίζω (see 587), be drowsy, aor. ἔβριξα. Poetic. (4.)
Βρίθω, be heavy, Bptow, ἔβριῖσα, BéSpiva. Rare in Attic prose.
{(Bpox-), stem, swallow, avr. ἔβροξα (Opt. -βρόξειε), 2 aor. p. dva-
Bpoxels ; 2 pf. ἀνα-βέβροχεν, 71.17.68. Epic.]
Bpvydopar (Bpox-, 056), roar, 2 p. BEBptxa ; ἐβρυχησάμην; ply els.
Bivéw or βύω (βυ-), stop up, βύσω, Epica, βέβνσμαι. OUT, Chicfly
poetic. (5.)
I.
Taplow (yau-), marry (said of a man), f. γαμῶ, a. ἔγημα, p. γεγάμηκα ;
Ῥ. p. γεγάμημαι (Of ἃ woman). Mid. marry (of a woman), f. γαμοῦς
μαι, ἃ. ἐγημάμην. 654.
Τάνυμαι, rejoice, [epic fut. γανύσσομαι. Chiefly poetic. (11.)
Γέγωνα (ywr-), 2 perf. as pres., shout, sub. γεγώνω, ροῦν, γέγωνε,
Lep. inf. γεγωνέμεν, part. γεγωνώς ; 2. plpf. ἐγεγώνει, with ἐγέγωνε
and | sing. ἐγεγώνευν for -εον (777, $).) Derived pres. γεγωνέω,
w. fut. yeywrjow, a. ξγεγώνησα. Chictly poetic. Present also yeyo:
vloxw. (6.)
Γείνομαι (yev-), be born; a. ἐγεινάμην, begat. (4.)
Γελάω, laugh, yeddooua, ἐγέλασα, ἐγελάσθην. 639,
[Γέντο, seized, epic 2 wor., 71,18, 476.]
378 APPENDIX. [1692
Τηθέω (γηθ-), rejoice, [yn how, éy#0noa;) 2 p. γὙέγηθα (as pres.). 654,
Γηράσκω and γηράω (ynpa-), yrow old, γηράσω and γηράσομαι, ἐγήρᾶσα,
γεγήρακα (am οἱὰ); 2 a. (799), inf. γηράναι, [Hom. pt. γηρᾶς]. (6.)
Plyvopat and γίνομαι (yev-), becume (651), γενήσομαι, γεγένημαι,
[ἐγενήθην Dor, and lon.j, γενηθήσομαι (rare); 2 ἃ, ἐγενόμην [epic
γέντο for ἐγένετο) ; 2 p. γέγονα, am (for yeydaor, γεγώς, and other
ui-forms, see 804),
Τιγνώσκω (yvo-), nosco, know, Ὑνώσομαι, [Hdt. ἀν-ἔγνωσα, ἔγνωκα,
ἔγνωσμαι, ἐγνώσθην; 2 ἃ. ἔγνων, perceived (199). onic and late
Attic γινώσκω. (6.)
Τλύφω, cut, grave, [ἐν-έγλυψα, Hdt., ἐγλυψάμην, Theoe.,] γέγλυμμαι
and ἔγλυμμαι (524).
Γνάμπτω (γναμπ-), bend, γνάμψω, [ἔγναμψα, ἐγνάμφθην. Poetic,
chiefly epic. (3.)
[Γοάω (yo-, 658), bewail, 2 a. yor, only epic in active. Mid. γοάομαι,
poetic, epic £. γσήσομαι.
Γράφω, write, γράψω, ἔγραψα, γέγραφα, γέγραμμαι, 2 a. p. ἐγράφην
(ἐγράφθην is not classic); 2 f. p. γραφήσομαι; fut. pt. γεγράψομαι,
a. Mm. ἐγραψάμην.
Τρύζω (ypvy-), yrunt, ypitw and γρύξομαι, ἔγρνξα. Chiefly poetic. (4.)
Δ.
[(δα-}. stem, teach, learn, no pres., (€-) δαήσομαι, δεδάηκα, δεδάημαι;
2 a.m, (?) inf. δεδάασθαι; 2 pf. pt. dedaws (804); 2 a. ἔδαον or
δέδαον, taught; 2 ἃ. p. ἐδάην, learned. Hom. δήω, shall find.}
Poetic, chiefly epic.
[Δαιδάλλω (δαιδαλ-), deck out, ornament, epic and Jyric, Pindar has
pf. ps part, δεδαιδαλμένος, a, pt. δαιδαλθείς ; also f. int, δαιδαλωσέμεν,
from stem in o- (see 659).) (4.)
[Δαίϊζω (daiy-), rend, datkw, dita, δεδάϊγμαι, ἐδαΐχϑην. Epic and
lyric.] (4.)
Aaivipe (Sa-), entertain, δαίσω, ἔδαισα, (ἐδαίσθη») δαισθείς. [Epic
daivi, impf. and pr. imperat.] Mid. δαίνυμαι, feast, δαίσομαι, dar
σάμην: [vpic pr. opt. δαινῦτο for δαινυι-το, δαινύατ᾽ for Sarvur-aro
(117, 3): see 734.) (IL)
Δαίομαι (dac-, δασι-, δαι-, 602), divide, [epic f. δάσομαι,} a. ἐδασάμην»
pf. p. δέδασμαι [epic δέδαιμαι). (4.) See also Sardopar.
Aalw (δαρ-, δαρι-, dar, 602), kindle, [epic 2 p. δέδηα, 2 plpf. 3 pers,
δεδήειν ; 2a, (ἐδαόμην) Subj. δάηται. Poetic. (4.)
Δάκνω (δηκ-, 5ax-), bite, δήξομαι, δέδηγμαι, ἐδήχθϑην, δηχθήσομαι; 2 8.
ἔδακον. (5. 2.)
Δάμνημι (609) and δαμνάω (δαμ-, Sua-, Saua-), also pres. δαμάζω
(587), tume, subdue, (fut. δαμάσω, δαμάω, δαμῶ (with Hom. δαμάᾳ,
1002} CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 379
δαμόωσι), ἃ. ἐδάμασα, p. p. δέδμημαι, a. ἢ. ἐδμήθην) and ἐδαμάσθην;
[2 a. p. ἐδάμην (with δάμεν) ; fut. pf. δεδμήσομαι ; fut. in. δαμάσομαι, }
a. ἐδαμασάμην. In Attic prose only δαμάζω, ἐδαμάσθην, ἐδαμασάμην.
663, 2. (5. 4.)
Δαρϑάνω (Sapd-), sicep, 2 a. ἔδαρθϑον, pout. ἔδραθον; (ε-) p. κατα-δεδαρ-
θηκώς, Only in comp. (usually κατα-δαρθάνω, except 2 aor.). (5.)
Δατέομαι, divide, w. irreg. δατέασθαι (3). See δαίομαι,
[Δέαμαι, appear, only in impf. δέατο, Od.G, 242.]
Δέδια, fear: see δέδοικα.
Δέδοικα, perf. as pres. (dpe, Spor, dee, 31), [epic δείδοικα, fear.
[Epic fut. δείσομαι,} a. ἔδεισα; 2 pf. δέδια fepiv δείδια, for full
forms see 804. See 622 (b). [From stem d¢:- Homer forms impf.
lov, Sle, feared, fled.) [Epic present δείδω, fear.] Sec also
δίεμαι. (2.)
Δείκνῦμι (Secx-), show: for synopsis and inflection, see 504, 506, and
509. [lon. (dex-), δέξω͵ ἔδεξα, δέδεγμαι, ἐδέχϑην. ἐδεξάμην.) Epic
pf. m. δείδεγμαι (for δέδεγμαι), greet, probably comes from another
stem δεκ-. (11.)
[Δέμω (δεμ-, Sue-), build, ἔδειμα, δέδμημαι, ἐδειμάμην.] Chiefly Tonic.
Δέρκομαι͵ sce, ἐδέρχϑην; 2 a. ἔδρακον, (ἐδράκην) dpaxeis (649, 2; 646);
2 p. δέδορκα (643), Poetic.
Adpw, flay, Sepa, Sepa, δέδαρμαι; 2 a. ἐδάρην. Tonic and poetic also
δείρω (dep-). (4.)
Δέχομαι, recetuc, δέξομαι, δέδεγμαι (Hain. δέχαται for δεδέχαται], ἐδέ-
xOnv, ἐδεξάμην; [2 a.m. chiefly epic, ἐδέγμην, δέκτο, imper. δέξο
(Τοῦ, 1), inf. δέχϑαι, part. δέγμενος (Sometimes as pres.).]
Alo, bind, δήσω, ἔδησα, δέδεκα (rarely δέδηκαν, δέδεμαι, ἐδέθην, δεθή-
σομαι; fut. pf. δεδήσομαι, ἃ. mn. ἐδησάμην.
Δέω, want, need, (ε-) δεήσω, ἐδέησα [ep. ἔδησα, δεδέηκα, δεδέημαι,
ἐδεήθην. Mid. δέομαι, ask, δεήσομαι. Froin epic stem δει- (¢-) come
{édednoa, Od. 9. 540, and δεύομαι, δενήσομαι.) Timpetsonal δεῖ, debet,
there Is necd, (one) ought, δεήσει, ἐδέησε.
[Δηριάω, act. rare (δηρι-, 656), contend, aor. ἐδήρῖσα (Theoc.), aor. p.
δηρίνθην as middle (Hom.). Mid. δηριάομαι and δηρίομαι, as act.,
δηρίσομαι (‘Theoc.), ἐδηρισάμην Qlom.).} Epic and lyrie.
[Δήω, epic present with future meaning, shall find} See (8a-).
Διαιτάω, arbitrate, w. double augment. in perf. and plpf. and in com-
pounds (043 and 544); διαιτήσω, διήτησα (ἀπ-εδιήτησαν), δεδιήτηκα,
δεδιήτημαι, διητήθην (ἐξ-εδιητήθην, late); διαιτήσομαι, κατ-εδιητησάμην.
Διὰκονέω, minister, ἐδιάκόνουν ; διᾶκονήσω (aor. inf. διᾶκονῆσαι), δεδιᾶ-
κόνημαι, ἐδιὰκονήθην. Later and doubtful (poetic) earlier forms with
augment d:y- or δεδιη-. See 543.
Διδάσκω (διδαχ-), for διδαχ-σκω (G17), teach, διδάξω, ἐδίδαξα [epic
380 APPENDIX. [1692
ἐδιδάσκησα), δεδίδαχα, δεδίδαγμαι, ἐδιδάχθην ; διδάξομαι, ἐδιδαξάμην,
See Stein δα-. (6.)
Δίδημι, bind, chiefly poetic form for δέω. (1.)
Διδράσκω (Spa-), only in comp., run away, -δράσομαι, -δέδρᾶκα ; 2a,
τἔδραᾶν (lon. -ἔδρην], -δρῶ, -δραίην, -δρᾶναι, -dpds (799). (6.)
Δίδωμι (50-), give, δώσω, ἔδωκα, δέδωκα, οἷο. ; See synopsis and inflec.
tion in 504, 506, and 509. [Ep. δόμεναι or δόμεν for δοῦναι, fut,
διδώσω for δώσω.) (1.)
Δέεμαι (d:¢-), be frightened, flee (794, 1), inf. δίεσθαι, to flee or to drive
(chase) ; δίωμαι and διοίμην (cf. δύνωμαι 729, and τιθοίμην 741),
chase, part. diduevos, chasing. Impf, act, ἐν-δίεσαν, set on (of dogs),
1.18, 584. (1)
[Δίζημαι, seek. with ἢ for ¢ in present; διζήσομαι, ἐδιξζησάμην. Tonic
and poeti¢.] (1.)
[(δικ-), stem, with 2 aor. ἔδικον, threw, cast. In Pindar and the
tragedians. ]
Διψάω, thirst, διψήσω, ἐδίψησα. See 496,
Aoxéw (dox-), scem, think, δόξω, ἔδοξα, δέδογμαι, ἐδόχθην (rare). Poetic
Soxjow, ἐδόκησα, δεδόκηκα, δεδόκημαι, ἐδοκήθην. linpersonal, δοκεῖ,
wl seems, cle. 654,
Δουπέω (Sour-), sound heavily, ἐδούπησα [epic δούπησα and (in tmesis)
ἐπι-γδούπησα, 2 pl δέδονπα, δεδουπώς, fallen.] Chiefly poetic. 654.
Δράσσομαι or δράττομαι (dpay-), grasp, 801. ἐδραξάμην, pf. δέδρα-
γμαι. (4.)
Δράω, do, δράσω, ἕδρᾶσα, δέδρᾶκα, δέδρᾶμαι, (rarcly δέδρᾶσμαι), (ἐδρά-
σθην) δρᾶσθείς. 640.
Δύναμαι, be able, augin. ἐδυν- and ἠδυν- (017); 2 p. sing. pres. ( poet.)
δύνᾳ (Lon, δύνῃ], imps. ἐδύνασο or ἐδύνω (632) ; δυνήσομαι, δεδύνημαι,
ἐδυνήθην (ἐδυνάσθην, chictly Ionic), [ορὶς ἐδυνησάμην (1.)
Δύω, enter or cause tu enter, and δύνω (δυ-), enter; δύσω, ἔδυσα,
δέδῦκα, δέδυμαι, ἐδύθην, f. p. δυθήσομαι; 2 8. ἔδυν, inflected SUG: see
504 and 799: f. im. δύσομαι, ἃ. In. ἐδυσάμην [ep, ἐδυσόμην (777, 8)].
(5.)
Ἑ.
[-Ξάφθη (7.13, 843; 14,419), aor. pass. commonly referred Lo ἄπτω;
also to ἔπομαι and to ἐάπτω.
*"Eaw [epic claw], permit, ἐάσω, εἴᾶσα (ep. ἔᾶσα], εἴᾶκα, εἴᾶμαι, εἰάθην;
ἑάσομαι (as pass.). For augment, see 537.
᾿Εγγνάω, pledge, betroth, augm. ἠγγυ- or ἐνεγυ- (ἐγγεγν-), 888 543 ; 544,
᾿Εγείρω (éyep-), raise, rouse, yep, ἤγειρα, ἐγήγερμαι, ἠγέρθην ; 2 Ὁ.
ἐγρήγορα, am awake [Hom. ἐγρηγόρθᾶσι (for -ὀρᾶσι), imper. ἐγρή-
yopbe (for -dpare), inf. ἐγρήγορθαι or -ὀρθαι] ; 2 a. m. ἠγρόμην [ep.
ἐγρόμην]. (4&.)
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 381
"ESw, eat, (poetic, chicfly epic, present): see ἐσθίω,
“Efopat, (ἐδ- for oed-; ef. 584-60), sit, [fut. inf. ἐφ-ἐσσεσθαι (Hom.) 3}
aor. εἰσάμην [epic ἑσσάμην and ἐεσσάμην»). [Active aor. eloa and
ἔσσα (Hom.).] 80, Chiefly poetic. (4.) See ἵζω and καθέζομαι.
᾿Εθέλω and θέλω, wish, imp. ἤθελον ; (€-) ἐθελήσω Or θελήσω, ἠθέλησα,
ἠθέληκα, ᾿Εθέλω is the more common form except in the tragic
trimeter. Impf. always ἤθελον ; aor. (probably) always ἠθέλησα,
but subj. etc. ἐθελήσω and θελήσω, ἐθελῆσαι and θελῆσαι, etc.
"EO(tw (see 587), accustom, ἐθίσω, εἴθισα, εἴθικα, εἴθισμαι, εἰθίσθην.
‘The root is σρεθ- (see 881), (4.)
["E@wy, Hom pres. part.]: see εἴωϑα.
EtSov (/6-, ¢:d-), vid-i, 2 aor., saw, no present (see 539): (Sw, ἴδοιμι,
ἴδε or ἰδέ͵ ἰδεῖν, ἰδών. Mid. (chiefly poet.) εἴδομαι, seem, [ep. εἰσά-
μὴν and deo-;] 2 ἃ. εἰδόμην (in prose rare and only in comp.), sav,
= εἶδον. Οἶδα (2 pf. as pres.), know, plp. ὕδη, knew, f. εἴσομαι;
see 820, (8.)
Ἑϊκάζω (see 587), make like, εἴκαζον or ἤκαζον, εἰκάσω, εἴκασα ΟΥ̓ ἤκασα,
εἴκασμαι OY ἥκασμαι, εἰκάσθην, εἰκασϑήσομαι. (4.)
(Etxw) not used in pres. (είκ-, ix-), resemble, appear, imp, εἶκον, f. εἴξω
(rare), 2 p. ἔοικα (lon. ofka] (with ἔοιγμεν, (Fixtov,] εἴξᾶσι, εἰκέναι,
elxws, chiefly poetic) ; 2 plp. ἐῴκη [with éxrqv]. Impersonal ἔοικε,
it seems, etc. For ἔοικα, see 537, 2. (2.)
[Εἰϊλέω (ἐλ-, εἰλ-}), press, roll (054), aor. ἔλσα, pf. p. ἔελμαι, 2 aor. p.
ἐάλην or ἄλην w. inf. ἀλήμεναι. Pres. pass. εἴλομαι. Epic. Hat.
has (in comp.) -εἴλησα, -εἴλημαι, -εἰλήθην. Pind. has plpf. é6re.)}
The Attic has εἰἱλέομαι, and εἴλλω or εἴλλω. 598. See ἴλλω (4.)
Eipl, be, and El, go. See 806-809.
Elsrov (eir-), said, {epic ἔειπον], 2 aor., no present; εἴπω, εἴποιμι, εἰπέ,
εἰπεῖν, εἰπών; 1 aor. εἶπα (poet. ἔειπα, (opt. εἴπαιμι, imper εἶπον or
εἰπόν, inf. εἶπαι, pt. mas), [Ηἀϊ. ἀπ-ειπάμην]. Other tenses are
supplied by a stem ép-, pe- (for cep-, ¢pe-): [Hom. pres. (rare)
etpw), f. ἐρέω, ἐρῶ; p. εἴρηκα, εἴρημαι (522); a. p. ἐρρήθην, rarely
ἐρρέθην (lon. εἰρέθη») ; fut. pass. ῥηθήσομαι ; fut. pf. εἰρήσομαι. See
ἐνέπω. (8.)
Hipyvope and elpyviw, also εἴργω (elpy-), shud tiny εἴρξω, elpta, εἴργμαι,
εἴρχθην. Also tpyw, epiw, ἔρξα, (Hom. (ἔργμαι) 3 pl. ἔρχαται w.
plpf. épxaro, ἔρχθην]. (11.)
Eipyo, shut vut, εἴρξω, elpta, dpyuar, εἴρχθην; εἴρξομαι. Also [ἔργω,
-Epta, -tpyuac, lonic} ; ἔρξομαι (Soph.). [Epic also éépyw.)
[Εἴρομαι (Ion.), ask, fut. (e) εἰρήσομαι. See ἔρομαι.}
[Etpe (ép-), say, epic in present.] See εἶπον. (4.)
Etpw (é-), sero, join, a. -elpa [Ion. -ἔρσαἼ, p. -elpxa, εἷρμαι [epic
ἕερμαι). Rare exceptin compos. (4.)
382 APPENDIX. (1692
[Btonw (éix-), liken, compare, (617) ; poetic, chiefly epic: pres. also
ἴσκω.} 617. Προσ-ήϊξαι, art like, [and epic ἤϊκτο or ἔϊκτο], some-
times referred to efkw. See exw. (6.)
Etw0a (Tonic ἔωθα] (ἡθ- for o¢nd-, 537, 2, and 689), 2 perf., am accus-
tomed, 2 pipf. εἰώθη. (Hom. has pres. act. part. ἔθων.] (2.)
᾿Εκκλησιάζω, call ax assembly ; augm. ἠκκλη- and ἐξεκλη- (543).
᾿Ελαύνω, for ἐλα-νυτω (G12), poetic ἐλάω (éda-), drine, march, fut.
(ἐλάσω) ἐλῶ (665, 2) [epic ἐλάσσω, ἐλόω ;] ἤλασα, ἐλήλακα, ἐλή-
λαμαι [Jon. and late ἐλήλασμαι, How, plup. ἐληλέδατο], ἡλάθην,
ἠλασάμην. (5.)
᾿Ελέγχω, confute, ἐλέγξω, ἤλεγξα, ἐλήλεγμαι (487, 2), ἡλέγχθην, ἐλεγ-
χθήσομαι.
Ἑλίσσω and εἷἱλίσσω (ἐλικ-), roll, ἐλίξω and εἰλέξω, ka, εἴλιγμαι,
εἰλίχθην. ἡ [Epic aor. mid, ἐλιξάμην.] (4.)
“Edkw (late ξλκύω), pull, ἔλξω (lon. and late Att. édxdow), εἵλκυσα,
εἵλκυκα, εἴλκυσμαι, εἰλκύσθην. 537.
᾿Ελπίζω (ἐλπιδ-), hope, aor. ἤλπισα; aor. p. part. ἐλπισθέν. (4.
[Ἕλπω, cause to hope, 2 Ρ. ἔολπα, hope; 2 plpf. ἐώλπειν (8 pers. sing.).
643. Mid. ἔλπομαι, hope, like Attic ἐλπίζω. Epic.)
Ἔμέω, vomit, fut. ἐμῶ (rare), ἐμοῦμαι ; aor. ἥμεσα, 639.
*Evaipw (évap-), kill, 2a. ἥναρον. [Hom.a.m. ἐνήρατο] Poetic. (4.)
᾿Ἐνέπω (ἐν and stem σεπ-}) or ἐννέπω, say, tell, [ep. f. ἐνι-σπήσω (cer-)
and ἐνίψω ;] 2 ἃ. ἔνι-σπον, w. imper. ἔνισπε [ep. ἐνίσπες}, 2 pl. ἔσπετε
(for ἐν-σπετε), inf, ἐνισπεῖν [ep. -uev}. Poetic. 866 εἶπον.
᾿Ενίπτω (ἐνιπ-), chide, [epic also ἑνίσσω, 2 ἃ. ἐνένϊπον and ἠνίπαπον ᾿
(585). (3.)
Ἕννῦμι (ἐ- for feo-), ves-tio, clothe, pres. act. only in comp.; [f. ἔσσω,
a. toga, ἐσσάμην or ἑεσσ-; pf. ἔσμαι or εἶμαι, εἰμένος in trag. In
comp. -ἔσω, -ἔσα, -ἐσάμην. Chicty epic: ἀμφι-ἐννῦμι is the common
form in prose. (11.)
᾿Ενοχλέω, harass, w. double augment (544); ἠνώχλουν, ἐνοχλήσω,
ἠνώχλησα, ἠνώχλημαι.
"Eouxa, seem, 2 perfect: sec efxw.
'Ἑορτάζω (see 587), lon. ὁρτάζω, kecp festival; impf. ἑώρταξον (588),
(4.)
᾿Επ-αυρέω and ἐπ-αυρίσκω (adp-), both rare, enjoy, [2 a. Dor. and ep.
ἐπαῦρον; f. in. ἐπαυρήσομαι,} ἃ. ἐπηυράμην, 2 a. ἐπηνρόμην. Chiefly
poetic. 654. (6.)
[Ἐπ-ενήνοθε, defect. 2 pf., sit un, Ue on ; alsu as 2 plpf. (777, 4). Epic.J
See ἀνήνοθε.
᾿Επίσταμαι, understand, 2 p. sing. (poet.) ἐπίστᾳ [Jon. ἐπίστεαι, 7 imp.
ἠπιστάμην, 2 Ὁ. sing. ἠπίστασο OF ἠπίστω (632); f. ἐπιστήσομαι, ὃ.
ἠπιστήθην. (Not to be cunfounded with forins of ἐφίστημι.) 4.)
1692] CATALUGUE OF VERBS. 383
[Haw (σεπ-), be after or busy with, imp. εἶπον (poet. érov); ἢ. -ἔψω,
2. ἃ. -ἔσπον (fur é-cer-ov), a. p. περι-ἐφθὴν (Ildt.): active chiefly
Jonic or poetic, and in compus.] Mid. ἕπομαι (poet. ἔσπομαι], fol-
low, f. épouac; 2 a. ἑσπόμην, varely poetic -ἐσπόμην, σπῶμαι, cte.,
w. imp. [σπεῖο (for σπεο).] σποῦ. δύ; 597, 2.
*"Epdw, love, ἡράσθην, ἐρασθήσομαι, [ἡρασάμην (epic)}. Poetic pres.
ἔραμαι, imp. ἡράμην. (I.)
᾿Εργάζομαι, work, du, augm. εἰρ- (37); ἐργάσομαι, εἴργασμαι, εἰργά-
σθην, εἰργασάμην, ἐργασθήσομαι. S87. (4.)
"Epyo and ἔργω : 500 εἴργνῦμι (eipyw) and εἴργω.
ΓἝρρδω and ἕρδω, work, do, probably for ἐρζτω = ῥέζω (by metathesis) :
the stem is cepy- (see 550), whence fpey-, pey-; ful. ἔρξω, a. ἔρξα,
Clon, 2 pf. €opya, 2 plpf. ἐόργεα. Louie and poctic. See pew.
“Ἐρείδω, prop, épelow (later), ἥρεισα, [npexa, ἐρήρεισμαι, with ἐρηρέ-
δαται and -aro, 777, 3,] ἠρείσθην ; ἐρείσυμαι (Aristol.), ἠρεισάμην,
Ἐρείκω (ἐρεικ-, ἐρικ-), tear, burst, qpeta, ἐρήριγμαι, 2 a. ἥρικον. onic
and poetic. (2.)
"Ἐρείπω (épem-, éper-), throw down, ἐρείψω, [ἤρειψα, 2 pf. ἐρήριπα, have
Jallen, p.p. ἐρήριμμαι (plpt, ἐρέριπτο, Hom.), 2 a. ἤριπον, ἠρέπην,
QU. ἀνηρειψάμην Cllom.)], a. p. ἠρείφθην. (2.)
᾿Ερέσσω (eper-), strike, row, [ep. aor. ἥρεσα. 1 δ, (4.)
['EpSalve, contend, for ἐρίζω ; aor. im. inf, ἐρὶδήσασθαι. Epic.)
"Epitw (ἐριδ-), contend, gpa, [ ἠρισάμην epic.) (4.)
"Epopar (rare or 3), [lon. εἴρομαι, ep. ἐρέω or épéopary, for the Attic
épwrdw, ask, fut. (e-) ἐρήσομαι Llon. εἰρήσομαι), 2 ἃ. ἠρόμην. See
εἴρομαι.
Ἕρπω, creep, imp. εἴρπον ; fut. ἔρψω. Poetic. 539,
"Epp, yo to destruction, (€-) épphow, ἤρρησα, εἰσ-ἤρρηκα.
Epvyyave (épuy-), cruct, 2 ἃ. ἤρυγον. (5.) (fon. ἐρεύγομαι, ἐρεύξομαι.
(2.)
"Epix, hold back, [ep. f. ἐρύξω] ἤρνξα, [ep. 2 a. ἡρύκακον.]
['Epvw and elptw, draw, fut. ἐρύω, aor. εἴρυσα and ἔρυσα, pf. Ὁ. εἴρῦμαι
and εἴρυσμαι, Mid. ἐρύομαι (Ὁ) and elptopar, cake under one’s pro-
tection, ἐρύσομαι and εἰρήσομαι, ἐρυσάμην and εἰρυσάμην ; with Hom.
acforms of pres. and impf. εἰρύαται (3 pl.), ἔρῦσο, ἔρῦτο aud efpdro,
εἴρυντο, ἔρυσθαι and εἴρυσθαι. Epic.] 639, See phopar.
"Epxopar (ἐρχ-, denf-, ἐλυθ-, ἐλθ-}), πος come, f. ἐλεύσομαι (Ion. and
putt.), 2 pf. ἐλήλυθα (ep. ἐλήλσυθα and εἰλήλουθα], 2 a. ἦλθον (poet.
ἤλυθον): see 3). In Attic prose, εἶμι [5 used for ἐλεύσομαι (1257). (8.)
"Eo Gia, also poctic ἔσθω and iw (ἐσθ-, ἐδ-, Pay-), edo, cat, fut. ἔδομαι,
p. ἐδήδοκα, ἐδήδεσμαι, [ep. &Hdonac], ἠδέσθην ; 2 ἃ. ἔφαγον ; (epic pres.
inf, ἔδμεναι ; 2 perf. part. ἐδηδώς. (8.)
‘Eoridu, feast, augment εἰστι- (001).
384 APPENDIX. [1602
Ἐύδω, sleep, impf. εὗδον or ηὗδον (519), (e-) εὐδήσω, [-εὐδησα. Com.
monly in καθ-εύδω. 658, 1,
Evepyeréw, do guod, evepyerjow, etc., regular: sometimes augmented
εὐηργ- (545, 1).
Ebpioxw (eip-), find, () εὑρήσω, ηὕρηκα, nupnuat, ηὑρέθην, εὑρεθήσομαι;
3. ἃ. ηὗρον, ηὑρόμην. G39 (0). Often found with auginent ev- (519),
(6)
Ἑνφραίνω (εὐῴφραν-), cheer, f. εὐφρανῶ ; a. nippara, [Ion. also εὔφρηνα 3]
a. Ὁ. ηὐφράνθην, ἴ. p. εὐφρανθήσομαι ; f. 11. εὐφρανοῦμαι. 519. (4.)
᾿Εχθαίρω (éxGap-), hate, ἢ. ἐχθαροῦμαι, a. ἤχθηρα. (4.)
Ἔχω (oex-), Rave, imp. εἶχον (539) ; ἔξω or σχήσω (σχε-), ἔσχηκα,
ἔσχημαι, ἐσχέθην (chicfly lun.) ; 2 a. ἔσχον (for ἐ-σεχ-ον), σχῶ,
σχοίην and -σχοῖμι, σχές, σχεῖν, σχών; Poet. ἔσχεθον Cte. (779),
[llom. pf part. συν-οχοκώτ for dx-ox-ws (643 ; 529), plpf. ἐπ- ὠώχατο,
were shut, It. 12, 340.) Mid. ἔχομαι, cling tu, ἕξομαι and σχήσομαι,
ἐσχόμην.
“Epo, cook, (ε} {. ἔψομαι and ἑἐψήσομαι, ἐψήσω (rare), ἃ. ἥψησα,
[ἥψημαι, ἡψήθην. 658, 1.
Z.
Ζάω, live, w. Cas, ζῇ, ete. (496), impf. ἔζων and ἔζην; ζήσω, ζήσομαι,
(ἔζησα, ἔζηκα, later). lon. tow.
Lebyvope (fevy-, y-, ef. jug-um), yoke, ζεύξω, Eleva, ἔζενγμαι, ἐζεύ-
xOnv; 2. ἃ. ἢ. ἐζύγην. (2. IL.)
Ζέω, boil (poet. ζείω), ζέσω, ἔζεσα, {-ἔζεσμαι 10}.1. 639.
Zeovvipe (fw-), yird, ἔζωσα, ἔζωσμαι and ἔζωμαι, ἐζωσάμην. (I1.)
H.
᾿Ἡβάσκω (78a-), come to manhood, with HBaw, be at manhvod : ἡβήσω,
nBnoa, ἡβηκα. (4.)
᾿Ηγερέθομαι, Ye collected, poetic passive form of ἀγείρω (ayep-): 568
119. Found only in 3 pl. ἠγερέθονται, with the subj., and infin,
and ἠγερέθοντο.
Ἥδομαι, be pleased; aor. p. ἥσθην, f. p. ἡσθήσομαι, (aor, μι. ἤσατο, Od.
9, 353.) The act. ἥδω w. impt. ἡδον, aor joa, occurs very rarely.
᾿Βερέθομαι, Le raised, poctic passive of deipw (dep-): see 779, Found
only in 3 pl. ἠερέθονται (iinpf. ἠερέϑοντο is late). -
Ἥμαι, sit: see 814.
*Hpt, say, chicfly in imperf. qv δ᾽ ἐγώ, said I, and ἢ δ᾽ ὅτ, said he
(1028, 2). [Epic ἦ (alone), he said.] “Hul, 7 say, is colloquial.
*Hptw, bow, sink, aor. ἤμῦσα, (pt. ὑπ-εμντήμνκε (for ἐμ-ημῦκε, 629)
Hom.} PDoetic, chiefly epic.
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 385
Θ.
Θάλλω (θαλ-), bloom, [2 perf. τέθηλα (as present)]}. (4.)
[Odopar, gaze at, admire, Doric for θεάομαι, Jon. θηέομαι; θάσομαι and
θὰσοῦμαι, ἐθάσάμην (Hom. opt. θησαίατ᾽).}
[Θάομαι, milk, inf. θῆσθαι, aor. ἐθησάμην. pic.)
θαπ- Or rad-, stem: sve θηπ-.
Θάπτω (rag- for θαφ-), bury, θάψω, ἔθαψα, τέθαμμαι, (Ton. ἐθάφθην, rare ;}
2. Ἁ. Ὁ. ἐτάφην ; 2 fut. ταφήσομαι; fut. pf. τεθάψομαι. 96, ὅ, (3.)
Θαυμάζω (see 587), wonder, θαυμάιομαι (ϑαυμάσω 9), ἐθαύμασα, τεθαύ-
μακα, ἐθαυμάσθην, θαυμασθήσομαι. (4.)
Θείνω (θεν-), smite, θενῷ, [ἔθεινα Hom.], 2a. ἔθενον. (4.)
Θέλω, wish, (ε-) ϑελήσω : see ἐθέλω.
Θέρομαι, warm one’s self, [fut. θέρσομαι, 2 ἃ. p. (ἐθέρην) subj. θερέω.
Chiefly epic.
Θέω, (Gev-, θεξ-γ θυ-), run, fut. θεύσομαι. 574, (2.)
(θηπ-, θαπ-, Or tag-), astonish, stem with (2 perf. τέθηπα, am aston-
ished, epic plpf. ἐτεθήπεα ; 2 a. ἔταφον, also intransitive]. 31; 95,4.
Θιγγάνω (Gy-), tuuch, θίξομαι, 2 2. ἔθιγον. Chiefly poetic. (5.)
[Θλάω, bruise, ἔθλασα, τέϑλασμαι (‘Theoc.), ἐϑλάσϑην (Hippuc.). Tonic
and poetic. See φλάω.
Θλέβω (OAiB-, OATB-), squeeze, OAtWuw, ἔθλιῖψα, τέθλίμμαι, ἐθλίφθην ; ἐθλί-
Bnv; fut. m. θλέψομαι, Horm.
Θνήσκω, earlier form θνήσκω (Doric and Acolic @vacxw} (θαν-ν Ova-),
die, θανοῦμαι, τέθνηκα; fut. pf. τεθνήζω (706), later τεθνήξομαι; 2 a.
ἔθανον ; 2 perf. seu 804 and 773. In Attie prose always ἀπο-θανοῦμαι
and ἀπ-έθανον, Lut rédvnxa. 616. (6.)
Θράσσω and θράττω (τραχ-. Opax-), @isturl, aor. ἔθραξα, ἐθράχθην (rare) ;
[2 pf. τέτρηχα, be disturbed, Hom.] See ταράσσω. (4.)
Θραύω, bruise, θραύσω, ἔθραυσα, τέθρανσμαι Bud τέθραυμαι, ἐθραύσθην
(641). Chiefly poetic.
Θρύπτω (tpup- for Spug-), crush [ἔθρυψα Hippoc.J, τέθρυμμαι, ἐθρύφθην
fep. 2 a. p. ἐτρύὐφην), θρύψυμαι. 95, 5. (3.)
Θρώσκω and Cpwonw (Gop-, dpo-), leap, fut. θοροῦμαις 2a. ἔθορον. Chiefly
poetic. (6.)
Θύω (θυ-), sacrifice, imp. ἔθυον ; θύσω, ἔθυσα, τέθυκα, τέθυμαι, ἐτύθην;
ϑύσομαι, ἐθυσάμην. 95, 1 and 8,
Θύω or θύνω, rage, rush. Poetic: classic only in present and imperfect.
I.
᾿Ἰάλλω (iaA-), Sead, fut. -iaad, [ep. aor. ἴηλα.} Poetic. (4.)
[Ἰάχω and tayéw, shout, [2 pf. (laxa) ἀμφ-ιαχυῖα]. Poetic, chiefly
epic.]
880 APPENDIX. [1692
‘T8pdw, sweat, ἱδρώσω, pwoa: for irregular contraction ἱδρῶσι elc., see
497.
‘TSpbw, pluce, ἱδρύσω, ἵδρῦσα, tipuxa, ἵδρῦμαι, ἱδρύθην [or ἱδρύνθην (709),
chiefly epic] ; ἱδρύσομαι, ἱδρῦσάμην.
“"Itw (i8-), seat or sit, mid. ἵἴζομαι, sit; used chiefly in καϑείζω, which
see. See also ἦμαι. (4.) Also ἱζάνω. (5.)
“Inps (é-), send. for inflection see 810. (T.)
“Ἱκνέομαι (ix-), poet. tkw, come, ἵξομαι, ἴγμαι; 2 a. ἱκόμην. In prose
usually ἀφ-ικνέομαι. Frou ἕκω, [ep. imp. ixor, aor. ov, 777, 8.1 Also
ἱκάνω, epic and tragic. (5.)
᾿Ιλάσκομαι [epic ἱλάυμαι] (iAa-), propitiate, tAdoopa, ἰλάσθην, ἰλασάμην.
(6.)
['TAnpe (ida-), be propitious, pres. only imper. tan& or ἔλάθι; pf. subj.
and Opt. ἱλήκω, ἰλήκοιμι (Hom.). Mid. Mapai, propitiate, epic.
Poetic, chiefly epic.} (1.)
Ἴλλω and ἴλλομαι, voll, for εἴλλω. See εἰλέω.
(‘Tpdoow (see 582), lash, aor. iaca.} (4.)
"Ipelpw (tuep-), lony fur, [lpewpduny (epic), ἱμέρϑην (Ion.)J}. Poetic and
Jonie. (4.)
ἽὝπταμαι {πτα-), fly, late present: see wéropar. (1.)
[Ἴσᾶμι, Doric for οἶδα, knuw, with ἴσας, fears, ἴσαμεν, toavti.]
[Ἴσκω : see ἐΐσκω.
ἽἼστημι (στα-), set, place: for synopsis and inflection, see 504, 506,
509. (I.)
Ioxvalvw Cisxvar-), make lean or dry, fut. ἰσχνανῶ, aor. Yoxvava
(873) {ἴσχνηνα Ion.), a. p. ἰσχνάνθην ; fut. m. ἰσχνανοῦμαι. (4.)
ἽἼσχω (for ci-cexw, σισχω), have, hold, redupl. for ἔχω (cex-w). 86.
See ἔχω.
K.
KaGalpw (xa@up-), prrify, καθαρῶ, ἐκάθηρα and ἐκάθᾶρα, xexd0apya',
ἐκαθάρθην ; καθαροῦμαι, ἐκαθηράμην. (4.)
Kabé-dfopar (é5-), sit ἀὐιον, imp. ὀκαθεζόμην, f. καθεδοῦμαι. See Mopar.
Kabevde, slecp, imp. ἐκάθευδον and καθηῦδον [epic καθεῦδον], 580 544;
fut. {ε-) καθευδήσω (658, 1). See εὕδω.
Kaitw, set, sit, f. καθιῶ (fOr καθίσω), καθιζήσομαι; a. ἐκάθισα ΟΥ̓ καθῖσα
[Hom. καθεῖσα, Hut. κατεῖσα ἐκαθισάμην. See fw. For inflection
Of κάθημαι, See 815,
Katvupar, perhaps for καδινυμαι (xad-), excel, p. κέκασμαι [Dor. wexad-
μένος}. Poctic. (II.)
Kawvo (καν-). Ktll, f. κανῷ, 2 ἃ. ἔκανον, 2 Ὁ. (xéxova) κατα-κεκονότες
(Xen.). Chiefly poetic. (4.)
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 387
Kaiw (xav-, xag-, caf, xa-, 601), in Attic prose generally «dw (not
contracted), burn; καύσω; ἔκαυσα, poet. part, «das, [epic ena];
κέκαυκα, κέκαυμαι, ἐκαύθην, καυθήσομαι, [2 a. ἐκάην :] fut. mid. καύσομαι
(rare), [ἀν-εκαυσάμην, Hdt.J. (4.)
Ἐαλέω (καλε-, κλε-), call, fut. καλῶ (rare and doubtful in Attic
καλέσω) ; ἐκάλεσα, κέκληκα, κέκλημαι (Opt. KexAno, κεκλήμεθα), ἐκλή-
θην, κληθήσομαι ; fut. IN. καλοῦμαι, ἃ. ἐκαλεσάμην ; fut. pf. κεκλήσομαι,
639 (b) ; 184.
Καλύπτω (καλυβ-), cover, καλύψω, ἐκάλυψα, κεκάλυμμαι, ἐκαλύφθην,
καλυφθήσομαι ; Bor. Mm. ἐκαλυψάμην. In prose chiefly in compounds.
(3.)
Κάμνω (xau-), labor, καμοῦμαι, κέκμηκα [ep. part. κεκμηώς}; 2 a.
ἔκαμον, [ep. ἐκαμύμην.] (5.)
Ἑάμπτω (xayn-), bend, κάμψω, ἔκαμψα, κέκαμμαι (717), ἐκάμφθην. (3.)
Κατηγορέω, accuse, regular except in augment, κατηγόρουν etc. (549).
{(xa-), pant, stem with Hom. perf. part. κεκαφηώς ; cf. τεθνηώς.}
[Κεδάννῦμι, epic for σκεδάννυμι, scatter, ἐκέδασσα, ἐκεδάσθην.) (11.)
Ἐεῖμαι, lie, κείσομαι; inflected in 818.
Keipw (xep-), shear, f. κερῶ, a. ἕκειρα [poct. ἔκερσα], κέκαρμαι, [ (ἐκέρθην)
κερθείς ; ἃ ἃ. p. ἑκάρην ;] ἴ nm. κεροῦμαι, a. mM. ἐκειράμην [w. poet. part,
κερσάμενος.) (4.)
[Κέκαδον, 2 aor. deprived of, caused to leuve, κεκαδόμην, retired, xexa~
δήσω, Shall deprive, reduplicated Hom. forms of χάζω.] See χάζω.
[Κελαδέω, shout, rvar, fut. κελαδήσω, κελαδήσομαι, aor, éxeAddnoa; Hom.
pres. part. κελάδων. Epic and lyric.]}
Kereiw, command, κελεύσω, ἐκέλευσα, κεκέλευκα, κεκέλευσμαι, éxedev~
σθην (641), Mid. (chiefly in compounds) κελεύσομαι, ἐκελευσάμην.
Kado (xea-), land, κέλσω, ἔκελσα. 668; 674 (Ὁ). Poetic: the prose
form is ὀκέλλω. (4.)
Keopar, order, [epic (€-) κελήσομαι, ἐκελησάμην; 2 a. in. ἐκεκλόμην
(534 ; 677).} Poetic, chiefly epic.
Kevréo (xevt-, xevre-), prick, κεντήσω, ἐκέντησα, [κεκέντημαι Ion,
ἐκεντήθην later, συγκεντηθήσυμαι 11ἀ1.}, [Hom. aor. inf. κένσαιν
from stem xevr-, 654.) Chiefly Tonic and poetic.
Κεράννυμι (xepa-, xpa-), mic, ἐκέρασα [Jon. txpnoa], κέκρᾶμαι [Ton,
-nuac], ἐκράθην [Tou.-98nv] and ἐκεράσθην ; f. pass. xpa@noopar; a. ἸΏ.
ἐκερασάμην. (IT.)
Ἑερδαίνω (xepd-, κερδαν-), gain (595; 610), f. κερδανῶ, a. ἐκέρδᾶνα (678),
(Jon. ἐκέρδηνα]. From stem xepd- (€-) [fut. κερδήσομαι and aor,
ἐκέρδησα (Hdt.)); pf. προσ-κεκερδήκᾶσι (Dem.). (5. 4.)
ἘΚεύθω (xevd-, «v0-), hide, κεύσως, Γἔκευσα 1 2 p. κέκευθα (9S pres.);
fep. 2 a, κύθυν, subj. κεκύθω. Epic and tragic. (2.)
388 APPENDIX, [1692
Ἑήδω (xnd-, xad-), vex, (e-) [κηδήσω, -ἐκήδησα ; 2 p.xéxnda}: active only
epic. Mid. κήδομαι, survow, ἐκηδεσάμην, [epic fut. pf. κεκαδήσομαι.
(2.)
Knyptorow (xnpux-), proclaim, xnpitw, ἐκήρυξα, κεκήρυχα, κεκήρῦγμαι,
ἐκηρύχθην, κηρὺ χθήσομαι; κηρύζομαι, ἐκηρυξάμην. (4.)
Κιγχάνω, epic κιχάνω (κιχ-), find, (ε-) κιχήσομαι, [epic ἐκιχησάμην;
2 ἃ. ἔκιχον. [Epic forms as if from pres. κίχημι, 2 aor. ἐκίχην:
(δ) κίχεις, κίχημεν, κιχήτην, κιχείω, κιχείη, κιχῆναι and κιχήμεναι,
κιχείς, κιχήμενο:.} Poetic. (5.)
[Κίδνημι (κιδινα.), spread, Ion, and poctic for σκεδάννυμι.] See
σκίδνημι. (IIT.)
[Κίνυμαι, move, pres. and imp.; as mid. of κινέω. Epic.) (IL)
Κίρνημι (III.) and κιρνάω : forms (in pres. and impf.) for kepavvipe.
Κίχρημι (xpa-), lend, [χρήσω Hdt.), ἔχρησα, κέχρημαι; ἐχρησάμην. (1.)
Ἐλάζω (κλαγγ-, κλαγ-), clang, κλάγξω, ἔκλαγξα; 2 Ὁ. κέκλαγγα [epic
κέκληγα, Part. κεκλήγοντες] 2 ἃ, ἔκλαγον; fut. pl. κεκλάγξομαι,
Chietly poetic. (4.)
Kdalw (rave, κλαξ-» κλαρξι-, xAat-, G01), in Attic prose generally κλάω
(not contracted), weep), κλαύσομαι (rarely κλαυσοῦμαι, sometimes
κλαιήσω OF κλᾶήσω), ἔκλαυσα and ἐκλαυσάμην, κέκλαυμαι; fut. pf.
Cimpers.) κεκλαύσεται. (4.)
KaAaw, break, ἔκλασα, κέκλασμαι, ἐκλάσθην ; [2 ἃ. pt. ads.)
Ἀλέπτω (κλεπ-), steal, κλέψω (rarely κλέψομαι), ἔκλεψα, κέκλοφα (643;
002), κέκλεμμαι, (ἐκλέφθην) κλεφϑείς ; 2 ἃ. ἢ. ἐκλάπην. (3.)
Kage, later Attic κλείω, shut, κλύσω, ἔκλῃσα, κέκλῃκα, κέκλῃμαι, ἐκλῇ-
σθην ; κλῃσθήσομαι, κεκληίσομαι, ἐκλῃσάμην (also later κλείσω, ἔκλεισα,
etc.). [10η. κληΐω, ἐκλήϊσα, κεκλήϊμαι, ἐκληΐσθην.}
Κλίνω (xaw-), Lend, incline, κλινῶ, ἔκλῖνα, κέκλιμαι, ἐκλίθην [epic
ἐκλίνθην, 100], κλιθήσομαι; 2 ἃ. p. ἐκλίνην, 2 f. κλινήσομαι; fut. χη,
κλινοῦμαι, ἃ. ἐκλινάμην. 647, (4.)
Κλύω, hear, inp. ἔκλυον (as aor.) ; 2. ἃ. imper. κλῦθη, κλῦτε [6}. κέκλυθι;
κέκλυτε). (Part, κλύμενος, renowned.) Poetic.
Kvatw, scrape (in compos.), -xvaisw, -ἔκναισα, -κέκναικα, -κέκναισμαι,
-ἐκναίσθην, -κναιπθήσομαι. Also κνάω, With ae, ar contracted to ἡ»
and ae, an tO n (496).
Ἑομίζω (xomd-), care for, carry, κομιῶ, ἐκόμισα, κεκόμικα, κεκόμισμαιν
ἐκομίσθην ; κομισϑήσομαι; ἵ. ἸΏ. κομιοῦμαι (865, 3), ἃ. ἐκομισάμην. (4.)
Κόπτω (κοπ-), cut, κόψω, ἔκοψα, κέκοψα, G93 [κεκοπώς Homn.], κέκομμαι;
2 aor, Ὁ. ἐκόπην, 2 fut. p. κοπήσομαι; fut. pf κεκόψομαι ; aor. Mm.
ἐκσψάμην. (3.)
Ἑορέννυμι (xope-), satiate, [f. κορέσω (Hdt.), xopéw (Hom.), ἃ. ἐκόρεσα
(poct.)], κεκόρεσμαι {Το}. -nuac], ἐκορέσθην ; Lepic 2 p. part. Kexopnws,
8. M. ἐκορεσάμην.) (11.)
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 389
Kopterow (κορυθ.), arm, (Hom. ἃ, part. κορυσσάμενος, pf. pt. κεκορυθ-
μένος. Poetic, chiefly epic. (4.)
[Κοτέω, be angry, aor. ἐκότεσα, ἐκοτεσάμην, 2 pf. part. κεκοτηώς, angry,
epic.]
Κράζω (xpay-), cry out, fut. pf. κεκράξομαι (rare); 2 pf. xéxpaiya
Cimper. κέκραχϑι and xexpdyerc, Ar.j), 2 plpf. ἐκεκράγετε (Dem.) ;
2 ἃ. payor. (4.)
Kpalvw (xpar-), accumplish, xpava, Expava (Ion. ἔκρηνα], ἐκράνθην,
κρανθήσομαι ; 1). p. 3 Sing. κέκρανται (ef. πέφανται), [f. m. inf, κρανέε-
σθαι, Hom.}. lonie and poetic. [Epic κραιαίνω, aor. ἐκρήηνα, pf.
and plp. xexpdavra: and wexpdavto ; éxpadvOny (‘Theoc.),} (4.)
Κρέμαμαι, hang, (intrans.), κρεμήσομαι. See κρήμνημι and κρεμάννῦμι,
(4.
Kpepdveupe (κρεμα-), suspend, κρεμῶ (for κρεμάσω), ἐκρέμασα, ἐκρεμά-
σθην ; [ἐκρεμασάμην.] (11.)
Κρήμνημι, suspend, (xpnu-va for κρεμα-να, perhaps through κρημνός),
suspend; very rare in act., pr. part. κρημνάντων (Pind.). Mid. κρή-
μβναμαι = κρέμαβαι. Poetic: used only in pres. and impf. (III.)
Koltw («py-), creak, squeak, [2 a. (ἔκρικον) 8 sing. xpixe;] 2 p.
(adxpiya) xexpiydtes, squeaking (Ar). (4.)
Kptvw (xpw-), judge, ἴ. κρινῶ, txpiva, κέκρικα, κέκριμαι, ἐκρίθην [ep.
ἐκρίνθην], κριθήσομαι ; fut, in. κρινοῦμαι, a.m. [epic ἐκρίνάμην. 647.
(4)
Kpotw, beat, κρούσω, ἔκρουπα, κέκρονκα, κέκρουμαι and κέκρονσμαι,
ἐκρούσθην ; -κρούσομαι, ἐκρουσάμην.
Kptrrw (κρυφ-), conceal, κρύψω, ἔκρυψα, κέκρυμμαι, ἐκρύφθην ; 2. ἃ. p.
ἐκρύφην (rare), 2 f. κρυφήσομαι Or κρυβήσομαι. (8.)
Κτάομαι, acyuire, κτήσομαι, ἐκτησάμην, κέκτημαι (rarely ἔκτημαι), pos-
sess (Subj. κεκτῶμαι, Opt. κεκτηήμην ΟΥ̓ κεκτῴμην, 1.4), ἐκτήθην (as
Pass.) ; κεκτήσουαι (rarely ἐκτήσομαι), shall possess.
Ἐτείνω (xrev-, xta-), Kill, f. κτενῶ [Ton. xrevéw, ep. also κτανέω], a.
ἔκτεινα, 2 pf. ἀπ- ἐκτοννν (ep. a. Ὁ, ἐκτάθην 5] 2 a. ἔκτανον (for poctic
ἕκτὰν and ἐκτάμην, see 799); (ep. fut. m. «ravdoua} In Attic
prose ἀπο-κτείνωῳ is generally used. 645; 647. (4.)
Kritw (see 587), found, κτίσω, ἔκτισα, ἔκτισμαι, ἐκτίσθην ; (aor. τῇ.
ἐκτισάμην (rare)]. (4.)
Ἐτίννῦμι and κτιννύω, iu compos., only pres. and impf. See κτείνω.
(II.)
Ἐτυπέω (κτυπ-), sonnd, cause to sound, ἐκτύπησα, [2 a. ἕκτνπον.}
Chiefly poetic. 654.
KvAtw or κυλίνδω and κυλινδέω, roll, ἐκύλίσα, κεκύλίσμαι, ἐκυλίσθην,
κυλΙσθήσομαις
390 APPENDIX. (1692
Κυνέω (τυ), kiss, ἔκυσα. Poetic. Προσ-κυνέω, do homage, £. προσκυ-
γήσω, a. προσεκύνησα (poet. προσέκυσα), is Common in prose and
poetry. (5.)
Κύπτω (xug-), stoop, κόψω and κόψομαι, aor, ξκῦψα, 2 Ρ.κέκῦφα. (3.)
Κύρω (κυρ-), meet, chance, κύρσω, ἔκυρσα (008 074 Ὁ). (4.) Κνρέω
is regular.
A.
Aayxdvw (Aax-), obtain by lut, f. m. λήξομαι [Ion. λάξομα!, 2 pf,
εἴληχα, [lon. and poet, λέλυγχα,) }. 8). (εἴληγμαι) εἰληγμένος, a. p.
ἐλήχθην; ὁ ἃ, ἔλαχον [ep. λελάχω, 584). (5.)
«Λαμβάνω (λαβ:), take, λήψομαι, εἴληφα, εἴλημμαι, (poet. λέλημμαιδ, ἐλή-
φθην. ληφθήσυμαι; 2 ἃ. ἔλαβον, ἐλαβόμην Lep. inf. λελαβέσθαι (534),)
(Tou. λάμψομαι, λελάβηκα, λέλαμμαι, ἐλάμφθην ; Dor. fut. λάψοῦ-
μαι. (5.)
“Λάμπω, shine, λάμψω, ἔλαμψα, 9 pf. λέλαμπα; (fut. m. «λάμψομαι Hat}.
«Λανθάνω (λαθ-), lie hid, escape the notice of (some one), λήσω, [ἔλησα],
2 Ὁ. λέληθα (Dor. λέλᾶθα,7 2 ἃ. ἔλαθον [ep. A¢Aadov.] Mid. forget,
λήσομαι, λέλησμαι [Hont. -ασμαι], fut. pf. λελήσϑμαι, 2 ἃ. ἐλαθόμην
(ep. λελαθόμην. (5.) Poctic λήθω. (2.)
Admre (λαβ- ΟΥ̓ Aag-), lap, lick, χάψω, ἔλαψα, 2 pf. λέλαφα (698) ; f. m,
λάψομαι, ἐλαψάμην. (3.)
Adonw for λακ-σκω (Aax-), speak, (€-) λακήσομαι, ἐλάκησα, 2 ἢ. λέλᾶκα
[ep. λέληκα Μ fem. part. λελακυῖα :] 2 ἃ. ἔλακον [λελακόμην]. Poetic.
611. (6.)
[Adw, rd, wish, λῇς, av, etc.; infin. λῆν. 4θ6, Doric.]
«Λέγω, say, λέξω, ἔλεξα, λέλεγμαι (δι-εἰλεγμαι), ἐλέχθην ; fut. λεχθή-
σομαι, λέζομαι, λελέξομαι, all passive. For pf. act. εἴρηκα is used
(see'elrov),
«Λέγω, gather, arrange, count (Attic only in comp.), λέξω, ἔλεξα,
eYAoxa, εἴλεγμαι OY λέλεγμαι, ἐλέχθην (rare); ἃ. τὰ, ἐλεξάμην, 2a. Ῥ.
ἐλέγην, f. χεγήσομαι. [Ep. 2 a.m, (ἐλέγμην) λέκτο, counted.] 806
ste λεχ-.
Aclra (Aci, λοιπ-, λιπ-), leave, λείψω, λέλειμμαι, ἐλείφθην ; 2 Ρ.
λέλυιπω ; 2a. ἔλιπον, ἐλιπόμην. See synopsis in 476, and infection
of 2 aor, 2 perf., and 2 plpf. in 481, (2.)
[Δελίημαι, part. λελιημένος, eager (Hom.).]
Ago, stone, generally κατα-λεύω; -λεύσω, -ἔλευσα, ἐλεύσθην (641),
«λευσθήσομαι.
[(Aex-) stem (cf. λέχ-ος), whence 2 a.m. (ἐλέγμην) ἔλεκτο, laid him-
self to rest, with imper. λέξο (also λέξεο), inf. κατα-λέχθαι, Pt. κατα-
Acypeves (600, 2). Also ἔλεξα, laid to rest, with mid. λέξομαι, will
go to rest, and ἐλεξάμην, went to rest, same forms with tenses of
λέγω, say, aud λέγω, gather. Only epic.)
16021 CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 391
Λήθω, poetic: see Ἀανθάνω,
Anite (Anid-), plunder, act. rare, only impf. ἐλήϊζον, Mid. ληΐζομαι
(as act.), [fut. ληΐσομαι, aor. ἐληϊσάμην, lou.]. Eurip. bas éaned-
μην, and pf. p. λέλῃσμαι, (4.
Alocopat or (rare) λίτομαι (ait-), supplicate [epic ἐλισάμην, 2 a err
τόμην.] (4.0
[Aotw, epic for λούω ; λοέσσομαι, ἑλόεσσα, ἐλοεσσάμην.ἢ
Aobw or λόω, wash, regular. In Attic writers and Hdt. the pres.
and imperf. generally have contracted forms of Adw, aS ἔλου, ἐλοῦ-
μεν, λοῦται, λοῦσθαι, λούμενος (407).
Aww, loose, sec synopsis and full inflection in 474 and 480. Hom. also
λύω (Ὁ) (471). [Epic 2 a.m. ἐλύμην (as pass.), λύτο aud λῦτο, λύντο;
pf. opt. λελῦτο Or λελῦντο (784).]
M.
Μαίνω (μαν-), madden, a. ἔμηνα, 2 Pf. udunva, am mad, 2 a. Ὁ. eudyny.
Mid. μαίνομαι, be mud ἱμανοῦμαι, ἐμηνάμην, μεμάνημαι.) (4.)
Μαίομαι (μασ-, paci-, μαι-, 602), desire, seek, [μάσομαι, ἐμασάμην; 2 pf.
pepova (uer-), desire cagerly, iv sing., with pi-forms μέματον, μέμα-
μέν; μέματε, μεμάᾶσι, μεμάτω, μεμαώς, PIPf. μέμασαν. Also (udopar)
Doric covtract forms para, μῶνται, μῶσο, μῶσθαι, μώμενος.) Poetic,
chiefly epic. (4.)
Mavédve (μαθ-), learn, («-) μαθήσομαι, μεμάθηκα ; 2 ἃ. ἔμαθον. (5.)
ἹΜάρναμαι (uap-va-), sight (subj. μάρνωμαι, imp. μάρναο); ἃ. ἐμαρνάσθην.
Poetic. (ΤῸ
Medprrw (μαρπ-Ὶ, seize, μάρψω, ἔμαρψα [epic 2 pf. μέμαρπα, 2 aor. μέμαρ-
πον (533), with opt. μεμάποιεν, μαπεῖν.] Poetic. (3.)
Moocw (uay-), knead, μάξω, etc., regular; 2a.p. ἐμάγην. (4.
Μάχομαι (lou. μαχέομαι, fight, 1. μαχοῦμαι (Hdt. μαχέσομαι, Hom. μα-
Χέομαι OY μαχήσομαι], P. μεμάχημαι, ἃ. ἐμαχεσάμην [0}}. also ἐμαχη-
σάμην : CP. pres. part. μαχειόμενος OF μαχεούμενος].
{Mopar chink of, plan, (€) μεδήσομαι (rare). Epic.)
Μεθ-ἔημι, send auiy; sve ἔημι (510). [Hdt. pf. pt. μεμετιμένος.Ἶ
Μεθύσκω (μεθυ-), make drunk, ἐμέϑυσα. Pass. μεθύσκομαι, be made
drunk, a. p. ἐμεθύσθην, became drunk, See μεθύω. (6.)
Μεθύω, be drunk, only pres. and impf.
[Μείρομαι (uep-), obtain, epic, 2 pf. 3 sing, ἔμμορε 5] himpers. εἵμαρται,
it is fated, εἱμαρμένη (as subst.), Fate. (4.)
Μάλλω, intend, augm. ἐμ- or hue (517) 3 (e) μελλήσω, ἐμέλλησα,
MQwe, concern, care for, (€) μελήσω (Cp. μελήσομαι, 2 Ὁ. μέμηλα];
μεμέλημαι [6ρ. μέμβλεται, μέμβλετο, for μέμλεται, μεμλετο (66, a));
(ἐμελήθην) μεληθείς. Poetic. Mé&a, {{ concerns, impers.; μελήσει,
392 APPENDIX. {1692
ἐμέλησε, μεμέληκε; — used in Attic prose, with ἐπιμέλομαι and érme.
λέομαι.
Mépova (μεν-), desire, 2 perf. with no present. See μαίομαι.
Méva, remain, f. μενῶ [lon. μενέω], ἔμεινα (€-) μεμένηκα.
Μερμηρίζω (see 587 and 590), ponder, [mepunpltw, ἐμερμήριξα), ἀπ-
ἐμερμήρισα (Ar). Poetic. (4.)
Μήδομαι, devise, μήσομαι, ἐμησάμην, Poetic.
Μηκάομαι (μηκ-, μακ-, 656), blcat, [Hom. 2 a part. μακών ; 2 p. part.
μεμηκώς, μεμακυῖα ; 2 plp. ἐμέμηκον (777, 4).] Chiefly epic. (2.)
[Μητιάω (unre, 656), plan. Mid. μητιάομαι, pyriopar (Pind.), μητέσο-
μαι, ἐμητίσάμην. Epic and lyric.)
Μιαίνω (μιαν-), Stuin, pave, ἐμίᾶνα [lon. ἐμίηνα], μεμίασμαι, ἐμιάνθην,
μιανθήσομαν. (4.)
Mtyvope (μιγ-)ν lonic μίσγω, mix, μέξω, ἔμϊξα, μέμιγμαι, ἐμΐχθην, μιχθή-
συμαι; 2. ἃ. Ὁ. ἐμίγην, [ep. fut. μιγήσομαι; 2. 8. τὴ, ἔμικτο and μῖκτο;
fut. pf. μεμίξομαι. (11.)
Μιμνήσκω and (older) μιμνήσκω (μνα-), remind; mid. remember;
μνήσω, ἔμνησα, μέμνημαι, remember, ἐμνήσθην (aS Mid.); μνησθήσομαι,
μνήσομαι, μεμνήσομαι; ἐμνησάμην (poct.). Μέμνημαι (memini) has
Snub}. μεμνῶμαι, (722), Opt. μεμνῴμην Οὐ μεμνήμην (734), imp. μέμνησο
{Hdt. uéuveo}, inf. μεμνῆσθαι, pt. μεμνημένος. 6816. (6.)
{From epic μνάομαι come ἐμνώυντο, μνωόμενος, (?) etc. (784, 2).]
Mipvw for μιτμενω (652, 1), remain, poetic form of μένω.
Micyw for piy-oxw (617), mix, pres. and impf. 866 ptyvipr. (6.)
Mite, suck, (Ion. μῦζέω, aor. -ἐμόζησα (Hom.)).
Mofw (uvy-), grumble, mutter, aor. ἔμνξα. Poetic. (4.)
Mixdopot (μῦκ-, μῦκ-, 656), bellow, Lep. 2 pf. μέμῦκα ; 2 a. μύκον ;}
ἐμυχησάμην. Chiefly poetic. (2.)
Μύσσω or μύττω (μυκ-), wipe, ἀπο-μυξάμενος (Ar.). Generally ἀπο-
μύσσω.
Mow, shut (the lips or eyes), aor. ἔμυσα, pf. μέμῦκα.
N.
Natw (vag-, vafi-, var-, 602), swim, be full, impf. ναῖον, Od. 9, 222.
Ναίω (vao-, va-, 602), dwell, [ἔνασσα, caused to dwell, ἐνασσάμην, came
to dwell,] ἐνάσθην, was settled, dwelt. Voctic. (4.)
Νάσσω (vad-, vay-), stuffy [vata] νένασμαι Or νέναγμαι. 582; 590.
(4.)
[Νεικέω and νεικείω, chide, νεικέσω, ἐνείκεσα. Tonic, chiefly epic.]
Nino, distribute, f. vend, ἔνειμα, (€) νενέμηκα, νενέμημαι, ἐνεμήθην;
νεμοῦμαι, ἐνειμάμην.
Néopar, go, come, also in future sense. Chiefly poetic. See verona
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 393
1. Néw (νεὺ-, veg-, vu-), swim, ἔνευσα, νένευκα ; ἴ, mM. (νευσοῦμαι, 666)
γευσούμενος. 574, (2.)
2. Néw, heap up, ἔνησα, νένημαι or νένησμαι. [Epic and Jon. νηέω,
vinoa, ἐνηησάμην.Ἷ
3. Néw and νήθω, spin, vow, ἔνησα, ἐνήθην ; [ep. a. Τὰ. γήσαντο.ἢ
Nite, later virrw, Hom. νίπτομαι (i8-), wash, νίψω, ἔνιψα, νένιμμαι,
[-ἐνίφθην 5] νίψομαι, ἐνιψάμην, S91. (3. 4.)
Νίσσομαι or νέσομαι, go, fut. νέσομαι. Νέσομαι, probably the correct
form of the present, is, acc, to Meyer (§ 500), for νιτνστιτομαι, from
a stem yea- with reduplication. (Sce pres. νίσεται, Pind. Οἱ. Ὁ, 34.)
Poetic. (4.)
Nofw, think, perceive, νοήσω, etc., regular in Attic, [lon, ἔνωσα, νένωκα,
vévwpar, ἐνωσάμην.
Νομίζω (see 587), believe, fut. νομιῶ [νομίσω late], aor. ἐνόμισα, pf.
νενόμικα, νενόμισμαι, 2Or. p. ἐνομίσθη», fut. p. νομισθήσομαι, [f. m.
νομιοῦμαι (Hippoc.).] (4.)
‘a.
Fide, scrape, [aor. ἔξεσα and ξέσσα, chiefly epic], ἔξεσμαι. 639, 640.
Ἐξηραίνῳ (inpar-), dry, ξηρανῶ, eénpdva (Ion. -nva], ἐξήμασμαι and ἐξή-
βαμμαι, ἐξηράνθην. 700. (4.)
Elvw, polish, ἔξῦσα, [ἔξυσμαι,] ἐξύσθην ; aor. m. ἐξυσάμην. 640,
0.
"Οδοποιέω, make a way, regular; but pf. part. ὡδοπεποιημένος Occurs.
So sometimes with ὁδοιπυρέω, travel.
(d8v-), be angry, stem with only [Hom ὠδυσάμην, ὁδώδυσμαι].
“Ow (d8-), smell, (ε-) ὀζήσω, ὥζησα (Ion. ὀζέσω, ὥζεσα, late 2 pf. ὄδωδα,
Hom. plp. ὁδώδε.(»)}}. 658, 3. (4.)
Otyw, open, poetic off and gga [epic also Gita], a. p. part. οἰχθείς.
Otyvupt, simple form late in active, (imp. p. ὠϊγνύμην How.], com-
mon in composition: see ἀν-οἰγνῦμι. (11.)
Οἰδέω, swell, ᾧδησα, Ginna. Also οἰδάνω. (5.)
Olxrtpw (oixrip-), Commouly written οἰκτείρω, pity (597), aor. ὥκτιρα
(ῴκτειρα). (4.)
Οἰνοχοέω, pour wine, οἰνοχοήσω, [οἰνοχοῆσαι (epic and lyric)}]. [Impf.
ep. 3 pers. oivoyder, gvoxder, ἐφνοχόει.Ἶ
Otopar, think (626), in prose gencrally οἶμαι and ἤμην in 1 per. sing. ;
(€-) οἰήσομαι, φήθη». [Ep. act. οἴω (only 1 sing.), often ὀΐω ; δέομαι,
ὀϊσάμην, ὠΐσθην.]
Οἴχομαι, be gone, (€-) οἰχήσομαι, ofxwxa or ἤχωκα (659); (Ton. οἴχημαι
or ἤχημαι, doubtful in Attic}.
"Οκέλλω (όκελ-), run ashore, a0r. ὥκειλα, Prose form οὗ κέλλω. (4.)
894 APPENDIX, [1692
᾿Ολισθάνω, rarely ὀλισθαίνω (dArc6-), slip, (Ion. ὠλίσθησα, ὠλίσθηκαὴ;
2 ἃ. ὥλισθον (poetic). (5.)
"Ολλύμι (probably for oa-ve-pi, 612), rarely ὀλλύω (ὁλ-), destroy, lose,
f. dA@ [ὀλέσω, ὀλέω], ὥλεσα, -ὁλώλεκα; 2 P, ὄλωλα, perish, 2 ylpf,
-ὠλώλη (533). Mid. ὄλλυμαι, perish, ὁλοῦμαι, 2 ἃ. ὠλόμην LW. ep,
part. οὐλόμενος}, In prose aar-6dAvps. (11.)
᾿Ολοφύρομαι (sAopup-), Lewatl, f. ὀλοφυροῦμαι, ὠλοφύράμην, part. dro-
φυρθείς (‘Iuc.). (4.)
‘Opvope and ὀμνύω (ὁμ-, ὃμο-, 659), sweur, f. ἡμοῦμαι, ὥμουσα, ὁμώμοκα,
ὁμώμοσμαι (WIL ὑμώμυται), ὠμόϑην and ὠμόσθην ; ὁμοσθήσομαι, x. ἢ",
ὠμοσάμην. (11.)
"Opopyvope (ὑμοργ-), wipe, ὑμόρξομαι, ὥμορξα, ὠμορξάμην ; ax-onapy Gels,
Chiefly poetics only epic in pres, and Ππ)ς.. (11.)
᾽Ονίνημι (ὃνα-, 796), Lenefit, δνήσω, ὥνησα, ὠνήθην ; ὀνήσομαι; ἃ ἃ. 1).
ὠνήμην (late ὠνάμην), ὀναίμην, ὕνασθαι (798; 803, 3), [Hlom. imper,
Synge, pt. ὀνήμενος}. (1.)
[Ὄνομαι, insult, inflected like δίδομαι, with opt. ὄνοιτο (Hom.), f.
ὀνόσσομαι, ὃν. ὠνοσάμην (@vato, I1.17,25), ἃ. p. κατ-ονυσθῆς (Mdt.).
Jonic and poctic.] (1)
᾿Οξύνω (dtur-), sharpen, -ὀξυνῶ, ὥξυνα, -ὥξυμμαι, ὠξύνθην, [- ὀξυνθήσομαι,
HWippoc.] 700. In Attic prose only in compos. (4.)
᾿Οπνίω (dru-, dru-, 002), take tu wife, fut. ὀπόσω (Ar). (4)
‘Opa (ὑρα-, om-}, see, imperf. ἑώρων [Jon. ὥρων], ὄψομαι, ἐόρᾶκα or
ἑώρᾶκα, ὦμμαι OF ἑώρᾶμαι, ὥφθην, ὀφθήσομαι; 2 p. ὕπωπα Clon. and
poet.), For 2 a. εἶδον ete., sec εἶδον. [Hom. pres, mid. 2 sing.
dpnar, 784, 3.] (8)
"Opyaive (vpyar-), be angry, aor, ὥργᾶνα, enraged. Only in Tragedy.
(4)
Opéyw, reach, ὀρέξω, peta, [Ion. pf. n. ὥρεγμαι, Wom. 3 plur. dpupe-
xarat, plp. ὀρωρέχατο, ὠρέχθην ; ὀρέξομαι, ὠρεξάμην. [pic ὀρέγνῦμι,
pr. part. dpeyris. (11.}}
"Opvope (dp-), raise, ruuse, ὕρσω, ὥρσα, 2 Ὁ)». Cpwpa (as mid.) ; [ep. 2 a
&popor.] Mid. rise, rush, [f. ὀροῦμαι, P. ὀρώρεμαι, 2 ἃ. ὠρόμην [with
ὦρτο, imper. Cpaa, ὕρσεο, Sprev, inf, ὄρθαι, purt, dpyevos]. Voetic. (IT)
᾿Ορύσσω or ὀρύττω (dpvy-), diy, ὀρύξω, &puta, dpspuxa (rare), ὁρώ-
ρυγμαι (rarely ὥρυγμαι), ὠρύχθην; f. p. κατεὐρυχθήσομαι, 2 ἴ, xat-
ὀρυχήσομαι ; [ὠρυξάμην, caused to diy, Udt.] (4.)
"Oodpalvopar (comp-, ὀσφραν-, (10), smell, (e-) ὀσφρήσομαι, ὠσφράνθην
(rare), 2 a.m. ὠσφρόμην, [Ἐπ || ὥσφρα»το.) (5. 4.)
Οὐρέω, impf. ἀούρεον, f. οὐρήσομαι, a. ἐούρησα, pf. ἐούρηκα. [Tonic has
ovp- for Attic eoup-.]
[Ovrate (587), wound, οὐτάσω, obraga, οὕτασμαι. Chiefly epic.) (4.)
‘
1692} CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 395
[Οὐτάω, wound, οὔτησα, οὐτήθην ; 2 ἃ. 3 sing. obra, inf. οὐτάμεναι and
οὐτάμεν ; 2 ἃ. mid. οὐτάμενος as pass. TEpic.]
'Οφείλω (oped-, 508), [epic reg. ὀφέλλω], Owe, (ε-) ὀφειλήσω, ὠφείλησα,
(ὠφείληκα 3) ἃ. p. pt. ὀφειληθείς (658, 3); 28. ὥφελον, used in wishes
(1512), O that. (4)
᾿Οφέλλω (opedr-), increase, (aor, opt. ὀφέλλειε Hom.] Poetic, espe-
cially epic. (4.)
᾿Οφλισκάνω (opa-, ὀφλισκ-), be guilty, incur (a penalty), (ε-) ὀφλήσω,
ὥφλησα (3), ὥφληκα, ὥφλημαι; 2 a. ὥφλον (SprAew and ὄφλων are
said by grammarians to be Attic forms of inf. and part.). (6. 5.)
Il,
Tlallo {παιδ-, rary-), sport, παιξοῦμαι (606), ἔπαισα, πέπαικα, πέπαισμαι.
890. (4.
Παίω͵ strike, ralow, poetic (€-) παιήσω, ἔπαισα, πέπαικα, ἐπαίσθην (040).
Παλαίω, wrestle, [παλαίσω,} ἐπάλαισα; ἐπαλαίαθην (040),
Πάλλω (παλ-), brandish, ἔπηλα, πέπαλμαι; [Hom. 2 a. ἀμ-πεπαλών, as
if from πέπαλον ; 3 ἃ. mM, ἔπαλτο and πάλτο.] (4.)
Tlapavoplw, transgress law, augm. παρενόμουν and παρηνόμουν, παρα-
νενόμηκα (543).
Tlapowéw, insulé (as a drunken man), imp. ἐπαρῴνουν ; ἐπαρῴνησα,
πεπαρύνηκα, παρῳνήθην (544). ᾿
Tldoopat, fut. shall acquire (no pres.), pf. πέπᾶμαι, ἐπᾶσάμην. Poetic.
Not to be confounded with πάσομαι, ἐπασάμην, etc. (with a) of
πατέομαι.
Tlacow or πάττω (582; 081). sprinkle, πάσω, ἔπασα, ἐπάσθην. Chiefly
poetic. (4.)
Πάσχω (παθ-, πενθ-). for rad-oxw (617), suffer, πείσομαι (for πενθ-σομαι;
79), 2 pf. πέπονθα (Hom. πέποσϑε for πεπόνθατε, And werabvia); 2 ἃ,
ἔπαθον. (8.)
Tlaréopat (mar-), eat, f. πάσονται (?), ἐπασάμην ; fep. plp. πεπάσμην.ἢ
655. Ionic and poetic. See πᾶσομαι.
Tlave, stop, cause to cease, παύσω, ἔπαυσα, πέπαυκα, πέπαυμαι, ἐπαύθην
[ἐπαύσθην Hat.], παυθήσομαι, πεπαύσομαι. Mid. παύομαι, cease,
παύσομαι, ἐπανσάμην.
Πείθω {πειθ-, πιθ-), persuade, πείσω, ἔπεισα, πέπεικα, πέπεισμαι, ἐπεί-
σθην (71), πεισθήσομαι; fut. m. πείσομαι; 2 p. πέποιθα, trust, W.
imper. πέπεισθι (perhaps for πέπισθι), A. Bu. 599, [Hom. plp. ἐπέ:
πιθμὲν for ἐπεποίθεμεν ;] poet. 2 8. ἔπιϑον and ἐπιθόμην. [Epic (e-)
πιθήσω, πεπιθήσω, πιθήσα:.) (2.)
[Πείκω, epic pres. = πεχκτέω, comb.)
Tlevéw, hunger, regular, except in ἡ for a in contract forms, inf
πεινῆν [epic πεινήμεναι), etc. See 496.
996 APPENDIX. {1692
Tlelpw (xep-), pierce, epic in pres.; ἔπειρα, πέπαρμαι, [ἐπάρην Hdt.}
Ionic and poctic, (4.)
Πεκτέω (xex-, wexr-, 655), [Dor. f. mega, ἃ. ἔπεξα (Theoc.), ep. ἐπέξι-
μην]; a. Ὁ. ἐπέχθην. See epic πείκω. Poetic.
TleAdtw (cf. πέλας, near; see 587), [poct. πελάω (weda-, πλα-).} bring
near, approach, f. πελάσω, Att. πελὼ (GUS, 2), ἐπέλασα, [πέπλημαι,}
ἐπελάσθην and ἐπλἄάθην; [ἐπελασάμην ; 2. a.m. ἐπλήμην, approached.)
[Also poetic presents πελάθω, πλάἄθω, πίλναμαι.} (4.)
Tw and πέλομαι, be, irap. ἔπελον, émedduny [Syncop. frre, ἔπλεο
(émAev), ἔπλετο, for ἕπελς ete. ; 50 ἐπι-πλόμενος and περι-πλόμενος].
Poetic.
Πέμπω, Send, πέμψω, ἔπεμψα, πέπομφα (848 ; 693), πέπεμμαι (77; 490,1),
ἐπέμφθην, πεμφθήσομαι; πέμψομαι, ἐπεμψάμην.
Πεπαίνω {πεπὰν-), make soft, ἐπέπᾶνα (6138), ἐπεπάνθην, πεπανθήσομαι. (4.)
[Πεπαρεῖν, show, 2 aor. inf. in Pind. Py. 2, δ1.}
Πέπρωται, tt ts fated: see stem (πορ-, προ-).
Πέρϑομαι, Lat. pedo, 2 fut. (pass.?) παρδήσομαι, 2 p. πέπορδα, 2 a. ἔπαρδον.
See 643 and 646,
Πέρθω, destroy, sack, πέρσω [πέρσομαι (aS pass.) Hom.]}, ἔπερσα, [ep. 2
a. ἔπραθον (646), M. ἐπραθόμην (aS pass.) with inf. πέρθαι for περθ-θαι.
Poetic.
Πέρνημι (wep-va-), sell, mid. πέρναμαι : poetic for πιπράσκω. 609. (IIT.)
Πέσσω or πέττω, later πέπτω (nex-), COOK, πέψω, Urepa, πέπεμμαι (75;
400, 1), ἐπέφθην. See 583. (4.)
Tlerdvvupe (mera-), expand, (πετάσω) πετῶ, ἐπέτασα, πέπταμαι, [πεπέ-
τασμαι late], ἐπετάσθην. See πίτνημι. (11.) Φ
Πέτομαι {πετ-, πτ-), fly (€-), πτήσομαι (poet. πετήσομαι) ; 2 ἃ. Τὰ, ἐπτό-
μην. TO ἵπταμαι (rare) belong [2 a. ἔπτην (poet.)] and ἐπτάμην
(799). The forms πεπότημαι and ἐποτήθην [Dor. -ἅμαι, -ἃ θην} belong
10 πυτάομαι.
Πεύθομαι (rv8-) : see πυνθάνομαι. (2.)
Πήγνῦμι (πηγ-, ray-), fasten, πήξω, ἔπηξα, ἐπήχθην (rare and poet.) ;
2a. p. ἐπάγην, 2 £. p. παγήσομαι; 2 p, πέπηγα, be fined; (ep. 2 ἃ. m.
κατιἐπηκτο! πηγνῦτο (Plat.) pr. opt. for πηγνυτι-το (734) 5 [πήξο-
μαι, ἐπηξάμην.)] (2. 11.)
Πιαίνω {πιαν-), fatten, πιανῶ, ἐπίᾶνα, πεπίασμαι, [ ἐπιάνθην]. Chiefly
poetic and Ionic. (4.)
[Πίλναμαι {πιλ-να-}, approach, only in pres. and impf. 609. Epic.]
See πελάζω. (IIT.)
Πίμπλημι (rAa-), fill, πλήσω, ἔπλησα, πέπληκα, πέπλησμαι, ἐπλήσθην,
πλησθήσομαι ; ἃ. M. ἐπλησάμην (trans.); 2 a. m. ἐπλήμην (798),
chiefly epic, with ἐν-ἔπλητο, opt. ἐμ-πλήμην, due πλῆτο, imp, ἔμ-πλησο;
pt. ἐμ-πλήμενος, in Aristoph. 795. (1.)
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 397
Πίμπρημι (mpa-), burn, πρήσω, ἕπρησα, πέπρημαι and [πέπρησμαι Hat],
ἐπρήσθην ; Clon. ἴ, πρήσυμαι, fut. pf. πεπρήσομαι.)] 795. Cf. πρήθϑω,
blow. (1.)
Πινύσκω {(πινν-), make wise, [Hom. aor, ἐπίνυσσα]. Poetic. See
πνέω. (6.)
Πίνω {πι-, xo-), drink, fut. πίομαι (moda rare); wérwxa, πέπομαι,
ἐπόθην, πυθήσομαι; 2a. ἔπιον. (5. 8.)
[Πιπίσκω (m-), yive to drink, πέσω, ἔπισα.] Tonic and poetic. See
πίνω. (6.)
Πιπράσκω (mepa-, mpa-), sel, [ep. περάσω, ἐπέρασα,} πέπρᾶκα, πέπραμαι
(Hom. πεπερημένος], ἐπρἄᾶθην (Ion. -nuat, -ηϑην] ; fut. pf. πεπράσομαι.
The Attic uses ἀποδώσομαι and ἀπεδόμην in fut. and aor. (6.)
Πέπτω (πετ-, wr-0-, 659) for πι-πέττω, Jall, f. πεσοῦμαι [Ion. πεσέομαι] ;
Ῥ. πέπτωκα, 2 p. part. wenrws [ep. πεπτηώς, OF -eas}; 2 a, ἔπεσον
[Dor. ¢xerov, reg.].
[Πίτνημι {πιτ-να:), spread, pres. and impf. act. and mid. 609. Epic
and lyric. See πετάννυμι. (111.}
Πίτνω, poetic for πέπτω.
[Πλάζω (wrayy-), cause to wander, ἔπλαγξα. Pass. and mid. πλάζομαι,
wander, πλάγξομαι, will wander, ἐπλάγχθην, wandered.} Tonic and
poetic. (4.) :
TIkdoow (sec 582; 587), form, [πλάσω Ion.], ἔπλασα, πέπλασμαι,
ἐπλάσθην; ἐπλασάμην. (4.)
Πλέκω, platt, knit, [πλέξω,] ἔπλεξα, [πέπλεχα or πέπλοχα lon.], πέπλεγ-
pat, ἐπλέχθην, πλεχθήσομαι; 2 ἃ. p. ἐπλάκην ; ἃ. τη. ἐπλεξάμην.
Πλέω (wre, πλερ-ν πλυ-), sail, πλεύσομαι OF πλευσοῦμαι, ἔπλευσα,
πέπλευκα, πέπλευσμαι, ἐπλεύσϑην (later), 674,641. [Jon. and poet
πλώω, πλώσομαι, ἔπλωσα, πέπλωκα, EP. 2 aor. ἔπλων.] (2.)
Πλήσσω or πλήττω (πληγ-, πλαγ-, 31), strike, πλήξω, ἔπληξα, πέπληγ-
μαι, ἐπλήχθην (rare); 2 p. πέπληγα; 2 ἃ. p. ἐπλήγην, in comp.
-ἐπλάγην (713); 2. f. pass. πληγήσομαι and -πλαγήσομαι; fut. pt.
πεπλήξομαι;; [ep. 2 a, πέπληγον (or ἐπέπλ-), πεπληγόμην ; Lon, a.m.
ἐπληξάμην.] (2. 4.)
Πμλύνω ({πλυν-), wash, πλυνῶ, ἔπλῦνα, πέπλυμαι, ἐπλύθην ; [fut. m. (as
pass.) ἐκ-πλυνοῦμαι, ἃ. ἐπλυνάμην.] 647. (4.)
TlAdw, Ionic and poetic: see πλέω.
Tivio (aver, mveg-, mvu-), breathe, blow, πνεύσομαι and πνευσοῦμαι,
ἔπνευσα, πέπνευκα, [epic πέπνῦμαι, be wise, pt. πεπνυμένος, wise,
pipf. wémvico; late ἐπνεύσθην, Hom. ἀμ-πνύνθην For epic ἄμ-πννε
etc., see ἀνα-πνέω and ἄμ-πνυε. See πιγύσκω. (2.)
Tvtyo (xviy-, mviy-), choke, πνίξω [later πνέξομαι, Dor. πνιξοῦμαι]»,
ἔπνιξα, πέπνϊγμαι, ἐπνίγην, πνιγήσομαι.
ἸΠοθέω, desire, ποθήσω, ποθήσομαι, ἐπόθησα; and ποθέσομαι, ἐπόθεσα.
689 (δ).
8398 APPENDIX. [1682
TIovéw, labor, πονήσω etc., regular. [Ionic πονέσω and ἐπόνεσα
(Hippoc.).] 689 (6).
(πορ-, mpo-), give, allot, stem whence 2 a. ἔπορον (poct.), p. Ρ. πέπρω-
μαι, Chiefly impers., πέπρωται, tt is fated (with πεπρωμένη, Fate),
See πεπαρεῖν. Compare μείρομαι. Poetic except in perf. part.
Tipdoow or πράττω (rpay-), do, πράξω, ἔπρᾶξα, πέπρᾶχα, πέπρᾶγμαι,
ἐπράχθην, πρᾶχθήσομαι; fut. pf. πεπράξομαι ; 2 Ὁ. πέπρᾶγα, have
Jared (well or ill) ; mid. ἔ, πρἄξομαι, ἃ. ἐπράξάμην. [Ἰομὶς πρήσσω
(mpny-), πρήξω, ἔπρηξα, πέπρηχα, πέπρηγμαι, ἐπρήχθην ; πέπρηγα;
πρήξομαι, ἐπρηξάμην (4.)
(πρια-). buy, stem, with only 2 aor. ἐπριάμην, inflected throughout in
506 ; sce synopsis in 504,
TIptw, saw, ἔπρῖσα, πέπρίσμαι, ἐπρίσθην. 640,
Τροΐσσομαι (mporx-), beg, onee in Archil. (compare προῖκα, gratis) ;
fut. only in κατα-προίξομαι (Ar.) (lon. κατα-προΐξομαι]. (4.)
Ἡτάρνυμαι (wrap-), snecze; [f. πταρῶ ;] 2 aor. ἔπταρον, [érrapduny],
(ἐπτάρην) mrapels. (TI.)
Πτήσσω {(πτηκ-, wrax-), cower, ἔπτηξα, ἔπτηχα. From stem mrax-,
poet. 2 a (ἔπτακον) καταπτακών. [From stem mra-, ep. 2 a,
καταπτήτην, dual; 2 pf. pt. πεπτηώς. Poetic also πτώσσω. (4. 2.)
Πτίσσω, pound, [ἔπτισα], ἔπτισμαι, late ἐπτίσθην. (4.)
Πτύσσω (πτυγ-), fold, πτύξω, ἔπτυξα, ἔπτυγμαι, ἐπτύχθην ; πτύξομαι,
ἐπτυξάμην. (4.)
Πτύω, spit, [πτύσω, πτύσομαι, ἐπτύσθην, Wippoc.], ἃ. &rruca.
Πυνϑάνομαι (πυθ-), hear, enquire, fut. πεύσομαι (Dor. πευσοῦμαι}, pf.
πέπυσμαι; 2 wu. ἐπυθόμην [w. Hom. opt. πεπύθοιτο]. (5.) Poetic
also πεύϑομαι (mevd-, πυϑ-). (2.)
Ῥ,
“Ῥαίνω (pa-, pav-), sprinkle, ῥανῶ, ἔρρᾶνα, (ἐρράνθην) ῥανθείς. [From
stem pa- (ef. βαίνω), ep. aor. ἔρασσα, pf. p. (ἔρρασμαι) ἔρρανται
Aesehyl., ep. ἐρράδαται, plpf. ἐρράδατο, 777, 3.1 Sve 610. Tonic
and poetie. (5. 4.)
[‘Palw, strike, palow, ἔρραισα, ἐρραίσθην ; [fut. im. (as pass.) ῥαίσομαι.}
Povtic, chiefly epic.
'Ῥάπτω (pag-), stitch, payw, ἔρραψα, ἔρραμμαι ; 2 a p. ἐρράφην ; ἃ. ΠῚ.
ἐρραψάμην. (3.)
Ῥάσσω (pay-), = ἀράσσω, throw down, ῥάξω, ἔρραξα, ἐρράχθην. See
ἀράσσω. (4.)
“Ῥέζω (cpey- for pepy-, 049), do, ῥέξω, ἔρεξα ; [1οτι. ἃ. p. ῥεχθείη, ῥεχθείς.]
See ἕρδω. (4.)
"Pho (fev-, pec-, pu-), fluw, ῥεύσομαι, ἔρρευσα (rare in Attic), (ε-) ἐρρύηκα ;
2 ἃ. p. éppinv, ῥνήσομαι. 674. (2.)
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS, 399
(pe-), Stem of εἴρηκα; εἴρημαι, ἐρρήθην (ἐρρέθην), ῥηθήσομαι, εἰρήσομαι.
See εἶπον,
᾿Ῥήγνύμι (ρρηγ-, ῥαγ-), break; ῥήξω, ἔρρηξα, [ἔρρηγμαι rare, ἐρρήχθην
rare ;] Σ ἃ. p. ἐρράγην; ῥαγήσομαι; 2 p. ἔρρωγα, be broken (089) ;
[ῥήξομαι.] ἐρρηξάμην. (2. IL.)
Ῥιγέω (piy-), shudder, [ep. 1. piyjow,] a. ἐρρίγησα, [2 p. ἔρρῖγα (as
pres.)] Poetic, chietly epic. 655.
‘Piyou, shiver, ῥιγώσω, épptywoa ; pres. subj. pry for pryot, opt. ῥ᾽ γῴην,
inf. ῥιγῶν and ῥιγοῦν : see 497.
Ῥίπτω (fid-, pid-), thruw, ῥίψω, ἔρρῖψα (poet. epipa), ἔρρίφα, Eppiupar,
ἐρρίφθην, ῥίφθήσομαι ; Zu. p. ἐρρίφην. Pres. also piwtéw (000). (3.)
ῬῬύομαι [epic also piopat), defend, piooua, ἐρρυσάμην. [pic we-forms:
inf. ῥῦσθαι for ῥύεσθαι; iupt. 3 pers. ἔρρυτο and pl. ῥύατο.] Chietly
poetic. See ἐρύω.
'Ῥυπάω, be foul, [epic ῥνυπόω ; Ion. pf. pt. ῥερυπωμένος.
‘Pdvvope (pw), strenythen, ἔρρωσα, ἕρρωμαι (imper. ἔρρωσο, furerell),
ἐρρώσθην. (II.)
2.
Σαίνω (car-), fawn on, aor. ἔσηνα [Dor fodva]. Poetic. 595. (4.)
Σαίρω (cap-), sweep, anv. (ἔσηρα) pt. σήρᾶς ; 2 p. σέσηρα, grin, esp. in
part. σεσηρώς [Dur. cesapws.] (4.)
Σαλπίζω (σαλπιγγ-), suund a trumpet, aor, éoddmcyka. (4.)
[Σαόω, sane, pres. rare and poct., σαώσω, σαώσομαι, ἐσάωσα, ἐσαώθην;
2 avr. 3 sing. σάω (far dodw), imperat. σάω, as if from Aeol. σάωμι.
For epic σάῳς, ody, sce σώζω. Epic. ]
Σάττω (cay-), pack, load, (lo. σάσσω, aor. ἔσαξα, Ὁ. p. σέσαγμαι. (4.)
Σβέννυμι (oBe-), catinguish, σβέσω, ἔσβεσα, ἔσβηκα, [ἔσβεσμαι. ἐσβέ-
σθην; 2 ἃ. ἔσβην (803, 1), went out, w. inf. σβῆναι, [pt. ἀπο-σβείς
Tippee.) 5 ἤν in. σβήσομαι. (II)
Σέβω, revere, avr, p. ἐσέφθην, w. prt. σεφθείς, awe-struck.
Zeiw, shake, σείσω, ἔσεισα, σέσεικα, σέσεισμαι, ἐσείσθην (GAN); ἃ. m.
ἐσεισάμην.
[Σεύω (σευ-, συ-), more, urge, a. ἔσσενα, ἐσσευάμην., ἔσσυμαι, ἐσσύθην
(Soph.) or ἐσύθην; 2 a.m. ἐσσύμην (with ἔσυτο, σύτο, σύμενος).ἢ
The Attic poets have [σεῦται7, σοῦνται, σοῦσθε (ind. and imper.),
σοῦ, σούσθω. S74. Woetic. (2.)
Σημαίνω (onuar-), show, σημανῶ, ἐσήμηνα (Sometimes ἐσήμᾶναν), σεσή-
μασμαι, ἐσημάνθην, σημανθήσομαι ; wid. σημανοῦμαι, ἐσημηνάμην. (4.)
Σήπω (σηπ-, σαπ-), rot, σήψω, 2 p. σέσηπα (aS pres.) ; σέσημμαι
(Aristot.), 2a. p. ἐσάπην, f. σαπήσομαι. (2.)
Σίνομαι (σιν-), injure, (aor. ἐσϊνάμην Ion.]. 597, (4.)
Σκάπτω (σκαφ-), diy, σκάψω, ἔσκαψα, ἔσκαφα, ἔσκαμμαι, ἐσκάφην. (3.)
400 APPENDIX. [1602
Σκεδάννῦμι (oxeda-), scatter, f. σκεδῶ [oxeddow,] ἐσκέδασα, ἐσκέδασμαι
w, part. ἐσκεδασμένος, ἐσκεδάσθην; ἐσκεδασάμην. (IT.)
Σκέλλω (oxed-, oxdre-), dry up, (Hom. a. ἔσκηλα, lon. pf. ἔσκληκα] ; 2
ἃ. (ἔσκλην) ἀπο-σκλῆναι (700), Ar. (4.)
Σκέπτομαι (oxer-), vicw, σκέψομαι, ἐσκεψάμην, ἔσκεμμαι, fut. pf. ἐσκέ-
ψομαι, [ἐσκέφθην, Ion.]. For pres. and impf. the better Attic
writers 50 σκοπῶ, σκοποῦμαι, ete. (see σκοπέω). (3.)
Σκήπτω (σκηπ-), prop, σκήψω, ἔσκηψα, ἔσκημμαι, ἐσκήφθην ; σκήψομαι,
ἐσκηψάμην. (3.)
Σκίδνημι (σκιδ-ν.-), mid. σκίδναμαι, scaticr, also κίδνημι : Chiefly poetic
for σκεδάννυμι. (111.}
Σκοπέω, vicw, in better Attic writers only pres. and iinpf. act. and mid.
For the othur tenses σκέψομαι, ἐσκεψάμην, and ἔσκεμμαι Of σκέπτομαι
are used. See σκέπτομαι,
Σκώπτω (oxwr-), jeer, σκώψομαι, ἔσκωψα, ἐσκώφθην. (3.)
Σμάω, smear, with » for ἃ in contracted forms (496), oun for σμᾷ,
etc.; [a.n. ἐσμησάμην 141,)]. [lon. σμέω and σμήχω], aor. p. dia-
σμηχθείς (Aristoph.),
Σπάω, draw, σπάσω (a), ἔσπασα, ἔσπακα, ἔσπασμαι, ἑσπάσθην, σπασθήσο-
μαι; σπάσομαι, ἐσπασάμην. 639; 640.
Σπείρω (σπερ-), 8ο15, σπερῶ, ἔσπειρα, ἔσπαρμαι ; 2a Ὁ. ἐσπάρην. (4.)
Σπένδω, pour libation, σπείσω (for omevd-ow, 79), ἔσπεισα, ἔσπεισμαι,
(see 490, 3) 5 σπείσομαι, ἐσπεισάμην.
Στάζω (oray-), drop, [σ τάξω, ἔσταξα, [ἔσταγμαι, ἐστάχθην.) (4.)
Στείβω (στειβ-, στιβ-), bread, ἔστειψα, (€-) ἐστίβημαι (642, 2; 658, 2).
Poetic, (2.) :
Στείχω (στειχ-, orex-), 90, [ἔστειξα, 2 ἃ, ἔστιχον.) Poetic and
Jonic. (2.
ZrAAw (στελ-), Send, στελῶ [στελέω), ἔστειλα, ἔσταλκα, ἔσταλμαι;
2a. p. ἐστάλην ; σταλήσομαι; ἃ. mM. ἐστειλάμην. 645. (4.)
Στενάζω (στεναγ-), gruan, στενάξω, ἐστέναξα. (4.)
Lrépyw, love, στέρξω, ἔστερξα ; 2 pf. ἔστοργα (643).
Στερέω, deprive, στερήσω, ἐστέρησα [epic ἐστέρεσα), ἐστέρηκα, ἐστέμημαι,
ἐστερήθην, στερηθήσημαι; 2 aor, p. (ἐστέμην) part. orepeis, 2 fut.
(pass. or mid!) στερί σομλ. Also pres. στερίσκω. (6.) Pres. στέ
popat, be tr want.
| (Zretpar), pledge one's self; 3 pers. pres. στεῦται, impft. στεῦτο,
Poetic, chiefly epic.] (1.)
Στίζω (ary-), prick, oritw, [ἔστιξα Hdt.J, ἔστιγμαι. (4.)
Lrépvipe (στορ-), (€-) στορῶ (στορέσω), ἐστόρεσα, [ἐστορέσθην], ἐστορε-
σάμην, (IL)
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 401
Στρέφω, turn, στρέψω, Yorpepa, ἔστραμμαι, ἐστρέφθην (rare in prose)
[Ion. ἐστράφθην) ; 2 pf. ἔστροφα (late); 2 ἃ. p. ἐστράφην, f. στραφή-
σομαι ; τηἰ4, στρέψομαι, durpepdun. 646.
Στρώννύμι (στρω-), same a8 στόρνὑμι; στρώσω, ἔστρωσα, ἔστρωμαι;
ἐστρώθην. (11.)
Στυγέω (στυγ-, 654), dread, hate, fut. στυγήσομαι (as pass.), a. ἐστύ-
γῆσα (ep. ἔστυξα, made terrible, lon. pf. ἐστύγηκαἿ, ἃ. Ὁ. ἐστυγήθην ;
[6Ρ. 2. ἃ. ἔστυγον. onic and poetic,
[Στυφελίζω (orvperry-), dash, aor. ἐστυφέλιξα. Tonic, chiefly epic.] (4.)
Σύρω (ovp-), draw, aor. tipa, ἐσυράμην. (4.)
Σφάζω (opay-), slay, Att. prose gen. eparre; σφάξω, ἔσφαξα, ἔσφαγ-
μαι, [ἐσφάχϑην (rare)}]; 2 aor. p. ἐσφάγην, fut. σφαγήσομαι ; aor. mid.
ἐσφαξάμην. (4.)
Σφάλλω (ogar-), trip, deceive, separa, ἔσφηλα, ἔσφαλμαι; 2 a. Ὁ. ἐσφά-
Anv, f. p. opadrnoouar; fut. in. σφαλοῦμαι (rare). (4.)
Σφάττω: see σφάζω.
Σχάζω (see 587), σχάσω, ἔσχασα, ἐσχασάμην ; [Ton. ἐσχάσθην.ἱ From
pres. σχάω, imp. ἔσχων (Α1.). (4.)
Σῳζω, later σώζω, epic usually σώω (σω-, σῳδ-), save, fep. pr. subj.
σόῃς (adws, adps), odn (σάῳ, odw), σόωσιἿ ; σώσω, ἔσωπα, σέσωκα,
σέσωμαι OY σέσωσμαι, ἐσώθην, σωθήσομαι; σώσυμαι, ἐσωσάμην. See
σαόω. (4.)
Tv.
(ra-), Cake, stem with Hom. imperat. τῇ.
((ray-), seize, stem with Hom. 2 a. pt. reraydv.] Cf. Lat. tango.
[Taviw, stretch, raviow (0), ἐτάνυσα, τετάνυσμαι, ἐτανύσθην ; aor. τῇ,
ἐτανυσσάμην. Pres. pass. («-form) τάνυται. Epic form of τείνω.
Tapdoow (rapax-), disturb, ταράξω, erdpaga, τετάραγμαι, ἐταράχθην;
f. im. ταράξομαι ; [ep. 2 p. (τέτρηχα) τετρηχώς, disturbed; pip. ree
τρήχει.] (4)
Ἰάσσω (ray-), arranye, τάξω, ἔταξα, réraxa, τέταγμαι, ἐτάχθην, ταχθή-
σομαι; τάξομαι, ἐταξάμην ; 2 ἃ. p. ἐτάγην ; fut. pf. τετάξομαι. (4.)
(ταφ-}. Stein with 2 aor. ἔταφον : see (θηπο).
Telvw (rev-), stretch, τενῶ, ἔτεινα, réraxa, τέταμαι, ἐτάθην, ταθήσομαι;
τενοῦμαι, ἐτεινάμην. G40; 047. See τανύω and τιταίνω. (4.)
Ἰεκμαίρομαι {τεκμαρ-), judge, infer, f. τεκμαροῦμαι, ἃ. ἐτεκμηράμην.
Act. τεκμαίρω, rare and poetic, ἃ. ἐτέκμηρα. (4.)
Τελέω, finish, (τελέσω) τελῶ, ἐτέλεσα, τετέλεκα, τετέλεσμαι, ἐτελέσθην ;
fut. τῇ. {τελέομαι) τελοῦμαι, 8. Π). ἐτελεσάμην. G39; 640,
Tédo {τελ-), cause to rise, rise, aor, ἔτειλα; (plpf. p. ἐτέταλτο.] Tn
compos. ἐν-τέταλμαι, ἐν-ετειλάμην. 645. (4.)
((rep-), find, stem with Hom. redupl. 2 a. τέτμον or ἔτετμον (534).)
402 APPENDIX. [1692
Τέμνω (reu-, tee) (Ion. and Dor. rdpvw, Hom. once τέμω], cut, f.
τεμῶ, τέτμηκα, τέτμημαι, ἐτμήθην, τμηθήσομαι; 2 ἃ. ἔτεμον, ἐτεμόμη»
{poet. and lon. ἔταμον, ἐταμόμην] ; fut. m. τεμοῦμαι ; fut. pf. τετμή-
σομαι. 806 τμήγω, (5.)
Téprw, amuse, τέρψω, ἔτερψα, ἐτέρφθην [ep. ἐτάρφθην, 2 ἃ, p. ἑτάρπην
(with subj. τραπείω), 2 a, m. (r)erapréunv], (584) ; fut. τὴ. τέρ-
ψομαι (poet.), [a. ἐτερψάμην epic.] 646.
[Τέρσομαι, become dry. 2a. Ὁ. ἐτέρσην. Chiefly epic. Fut. act. τέρσω
in ‘Theoc.]}
Terayav, having seized. see stem (ray-).
[Τετίημαι, Hom. perf. am troubled, in dual τετίησθον and part. rer
ἡμένος ; also τετιηώς, troubled. ]
[Τέτμον or Eretpov (Hoin.), found, for re-reu-ov (534).] Sce (rep-).
Terpalve (retpay-, rpa-), bore, late pres. τιτραίνω and titpdw; [Ion
fut. τετρανέω, 8.07. ἐτέτρηνα), ἐτετρηνάμην (673). From stem (rpa-),
aor, ἔτρησα, pf. p. τέτρημαι. 610. (5. 4.)
Τεύχω (revy-, rux-), prepare, make, τεύξω, ἔτευξα, [ep. τετευχώς as
pass.,] τέτυγμαι [ep. τετεύχαται, éreredyaro], [ἐτύχθην Hom, ἐτεύ-
xOnv Hippoe., f. pf. τετεύξομαι Hom.]; f. im. τεύξομαι, [ep. ἃ. ere
ξάμην, 2 a. (rux-) reruxerv, reruxdunv.] Poetic. (2.)
Τήκω (τηκ-), melt, [Dor rdxw], τήξω, ἔτηξα, ἐτήχθην (rare); 2 ἃ. ἢ.
éraxyny; 2 Ὁ. τέτηκα, am melted. (2.)
τίθημι (G¢-), put; see synopsis and inflection in 504, 506, and 500, (1.
Τίκτω (rex-), for rierex-w (652, 1a), beget, bring forth, τέξομαι, port.
also τέξω, [rarely rexotuar}, ἐτέχθην (rare); 2 p. τέτοκα; 2 ἃ. fre
kov, ἐτεκόμην.
τίλλω (riA-), pluck, τιλῶ, ἔτιλα, τέτιλμαι, ἐτίλθην. Chiefly poetic. (4.)
Tive (te), Ion, ttyw, Pay, τίσω, frida, TéTika, τέτισμαι, ἀτίσθην.
Mid. τίνομαι [6}. τένυμαι], τίσομαι, ἐτϊσάμην. ‘The fut. and aor, are
more correctly written reflow, ἔτεισα, etc., but these forms seldom
appear in our editions. Sce τίω. (5.)
[Tiraive (rirav-), stretch, aor. (ἐτίτηνα) τιτήνας. Epic for relyw.) (4.)
[Tirpdw, bore, late present.] See τετραίνω.
Τιτρώσκω (tp0-), wound, rpdow, ἔτρωσα, τέτρωμαι, ἐτρώθην, τρωθήσομαι;
(fut. ἸΏ, τρώσομαι Tlom.] [Rarely epic τρώω. (6.)
Τίω, honor, [Hom. fut. stow, aor. Erica, p. p. τέτῖμαι.} After Homer
chiefly in pres. and impf, Attic ricw, erica, etv., belong to tive
(except xpo-rtods, S. An. 22). See rlvw.
(τλα-, sync. for tada-), endure, τλήσομαι, τέτληκα, 2 aor. ἔτλην (8686
799). [Epic u:-forms of 2 pf. τέτλαμεν, τετλαίην, τέτλαθι, τετλά-
pevar and τετλάμεν, τετληώς (804), From (rada-), Hom. aor.
ἐτάλασσα. Poetic.
16092) CATALOGUE OF VERBS, 403
(Tunye (tuny-, τμαγ-), cut, poet. for τέμνω; τμήξω (rare), ἔτμηξα,
2a. ἔτμαγον, drpdyny (τμάγεν for ἐτμάγησαν). (2.)
Topéw (rop-), pierce, [pres, only in ep. ἀντι-τορεῦντα }; (ep. fut. τορήσω],
reropnow (Ar), (ep. a. ἐτύρησα, 2 a. Eropov.} G55,
Tpéra [lon. τράπω], turn, τρέψω, ἔτρεψα, τέτροφα soinetinnes τέτραφα,
τέτραμμαι, ἐτρέφθην [Ion. ἐτράφθην; f. m. τρέψομαι, ἃ. ᾿ι. ἐτρεψάμην ;
2a. [ἔτραπον epic and lyric], ἐτράπην, ἐτραπόμην. ‘This verb has all
the six aorists (714). 643; 646.
Τρέφω (τρεφ- for θρεφ-, 15, 5), nourish, θρέψω, ἔθρεψα, τέτρηφα, τέθραμ-
μας W. inf, τεθράφθαι, ἐθρέφθην w. inf. θρεφθῆναι (vare) ; 3. ἃ. p. ἐτρά-
φην; (ep. 2 a. ἔτραφον as pass.]; ἔν m. ϑρέψομαι, ἃ. mM. ἐθρεψάμην.
643; 040.
Τρέχω (τρεχ- for θρεχ-, 15, 5; Span-), run, f. δραμοῦμαι (-θρέξομαι only
in comcdy), ἔθρεξα (rare), δεδράμηκα, (€-) δεδράμημαι; [2 p. δέδρομα
(poet.)], 2 ἃ. ἔδραμον. (8.)
Τρέω (tremble), aor. ἔτμεσα. Chiefly poetic,
TptBw (τριβ-, rpiB-), ruh, τρίψω, etpipa, τέτριφα, τέτρίμμαι (487; 489), ᾿
ἐτρίφθην ; 2 a. p. ἐτρίβην, 2 fut. p. τριβήσομαι; fut. ph. τετρίψομαι;
ἔν un. τρίψομαι, a Ul. erpipaunr.
Tpite (rpiy-), squeak, 2 p. tézpiya 4S present [w. ep. part. rerpiyaras].
Tonic and poetic. (4.)
Τρύχω, exhaust, fut. [ep. τρόξω] τρυχώσω (τρῦχο-, 009), a. ἐτρύχωσα,
p. part. τετρῦχωμένος, [a. p. ἐτρυχώθην Ion.].
Tpadyw, (rpay-, 573), gnaw, τρώξομαι [ἔτρωξα,} τέτρωγμαι; 2 a. &rpa-
you. (2.)
Τυγχάνω (revx-, tux-), Ait, happen, τεύξομαι, (ε-) Lep. ἐτύχησα,} pf.
τετύχηκα, 2 pf. τέτευχα ; 2 ἃ. ἔτυχον. (5. 2.)
Τύπτω (τυπ-), strike, (ε-) τυπτήσω, ἐτύπτησα (Aristot.), 2 a. p. ἐτύπην,
fut. p. τυπτήσομαι OY τυπήσομαι. [Ionic and lyric ἃ. ἔτυψα, p.p.
τέτυμμαι, 2a, ἔτυπον 3 ἀπο-τύψωνται (Hadt.).] 658, 3. (3.)
Τύφω (τῦφ- or τῦφ-, for θυφ-), raise smoke, smoke, τέθύμμαιν 2 a. p.
ἐτύφην, 2£. Ρ. τυφήσομαι (Meu.). 99, 5.
Y.
Ὑπισχνέομαι, Ion. and poet. ὑπίσχομαι (strengthened from ὑπέχομαιδν
promise, ὑποσχήσομαι, ὑπέσχημαι; 2 a.m. ὑπεσχόμην. See ἴσχω and
ἔχω. (5.)
‘Yhalvw (dpar-), weave, ὑφανῶ, ὕφηνα, ὕφασμαι (648), ὑφάνθην ; aor. Τῇ.
ὑφηνάμην. (4.)
"Yo, rain, ὕσω, toa, ὗσμαι, ὄσθην. [1|ἀϊὺ, ὕσομαι aS pass.)
Φ,
Φαείνω (φαεν-), appear, shine, aor. pass. ἐφαάνθην (αα- for ae-), ap-
peared. See φαίνω. (4.)
404 APPENDIX, [1692
Φαίνω (φα»-), show, f. φανῶ [φανέω), a. ἔφηνα, πέφαγκα, πέφασμαι (648),
ἐφάνθην (rare in prose); 2 ἃ. p. ἐφάνην, 2 ἴ. φανήσομαι; 2 p. πέφηνα;
f. WM. φανοῦμαι, ἃ. ἢ). ἐφηνάμην (rare and poet.), showed, bub ἀπ-
ἐφηνάμην, declared; (ep. iter. 2 aor. φάνεσκε, appeared.} For full
synopsis, see 478; for inflection of certain tenses, sec 482. From
stem ga- (οἷ. βαίνω, 610), [Hom. impf. ode, appeared, f. pf. πεφή-
σεται, will appear.] For ἐφαάνθην, see φαείνω. (4.)
Φάσκω (pa-), Say, Only pres. and impf. See φημί, (6.)
Φείδομαι (perd-, Gi5-), Spare, φείσομαι, ἐφεισάμην, [Hom. 2 a. m. πεφι-
δόμην, £. πεφιδήσομαι.) (2.)
(dev-, a-), kill, stems whence [Hom. πέφαμαι, πεφήσομαι; 2 a.
redupl. πέφνον or ἔπεφνον (for we-pev-ov) W. Part. κατα-πέφνων
(or -év).]
Φέρω (pep-, of-, dvex-, ἐνεγκ- for év-evex-), Lear, f. οἴσω, a. ἤνεγκα, 2 Ὁ.
ἐνήνοχα, ἐνήνεγμαι, ἃ. ἢ». AvexOnv; f. p. ἐνεχθήσυμαι aud οἰσθήσομαι;
2 ἃ. ἥνεγκον ; f. mn. οἴσομαι (501 00} 08. aS Pass.) ; ἃ. M. ἠνεγκάμην,
2 ἃ. τῇ. imper. ἐνεγκοῦ (580.). 671, [1lon. Hveva and -αμὴν, ἥνεικον,
ἐνήνειγμαι, ἠνείχθην ; Hat, aor. inf. ἀντοῖσαι (ΟἹ ἀντ-ῷσαι); Thom. aor.
iinper. οἷσε for οἷσον (777, 8), pres. imper. φέρτε for φέρετε. (8.)
Φεύγω (φευγ-, Guy-), flee, φεύξομαι and φενξοῦμαι (606), 2 p. πέφευγα
(642), 2 ἃ. ἔφυγον ; [Hom. p. part. πεφυγμένος aud πεφυζότες.) (2.)
Pypl (pa-), say, φήσω, ἔφησα; Ὁ. p. imper. πεφάσθω (πεφασμένος be-
longs to dainw). Mid. [Dor. fut. φάσομαι]. For the full inflection,
see $12 and 813. (1.)
Pbdvw (φθα-), anticipate, φθήσομαι (OF φθάσω), ἔφθασα; 2 ἃ. act.
ἔφθην (like ἔστην), [ep. 2a. in. φθάμενος. (5.)
Pocipw (φθερ-), corrupt, f. φθερῶ [Ton. Φθερέω, ep. φθέρσω], a. ἔφθειρα,
P. ἔφθαρκα, ἔφϑαρμαι; 2 a. p. ἐφϑάρην, 2 f. p. φθαρήσομαι; 2 Pp. δι-
ἔφθορα ; f. WW. φθεροῦμαι. 643; 645. (4.)
Polvo [epic also φθίω], waste, decay, φθίσω, ἔφθισα, ἔφθιμαι, [ep. a P.
ἐφθίθην ; ful. τὰ. φθίσομαι ;) 2a. Mm. épbinny, perished, [sub). φθίωμαι,
opt. φθίμην for φθι--μὴν (734) imper. 3 sing. φθίσθω, inf. φθίσϑαι},
part. φθίμενος. [Epic φθίνω, φθίσω, ἔφθισα.] Chiefly poetic. Pres-
ent generally intransitive ; future and aorist active transitive. (5.)
Pirlo (gir-), love, φιλήσω, ete., reguiar. [Ep. a. ἃ). ἐφίλάμην, inf.
pres. φιλήμεναι (784, 5). 655.3
Pra, bruise, [fut. φλάσω (Dor. φλασσῶ), aor. ἔφλασα, ἔφλασμαι, ἐφλά-
σθην.Ἴ 808 θλάω.
Ppayvope (φραγ-), fence, mid. φράγνυμαι ; only in pres. and impf.
See φράσσω. (II)
Ppdlw (ppad-), tell, φράσω, ἔφρασα, πέφρακα, πέφρασμαι ep. part. πεφραδ-
μένος. ἐφράσθην (as mid.); [φράσομαι epic), ἐφρασάμην (chiefly
epic). (Ep. 2 ἃ. πέφραδον or ἐπέφραδον.) (4.)
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 405
Φράσσω (gpay-), fence, ἔφραξα, πέφραγμαι, ἐφράχθην ; ἐφραξάμην. See
φράγνῦμι. (4.)
Φρίσσω or φρέττω.(φρικ-), shudder, Eppita, πέφρικα. (4.)
Φρύγω (ppvy-), roast, φρύξω, ἔφρῦξα, πέφρυ μαι, [ ἐφρύγη»].
ᾧζυλάσσω (φυλακ-), guard, φυλάξω, ἐφύλαξα, πεφύλαχιι, πεφύλαγμαι,
ἐφυλάχϑθην ; φυλάξομαι, ἐφυλαξάμην. (4.)
Φύρω, mix, [ἔφυρσα,} πέφυρμαι, [ἐφύρθην} ; [f. pf. πεφύρσομαι Pind. }.
Φυράω, mix, is regular, φυράσω, ete. :
Pvw (gu-), with » in Homer and rarely in Attic, produce, φύσω, ἔφῦσα,
πέφῦκα, be (by nature), [with 2 pf. ue-forms, ep. πεφύᾶσι, ἐμ-πεφύνη,
πεφυώς ; plpf. ἐπέφυκον (777, 4)}; 2 a. ἔφῦν, be, be born (799) ;
2a. p. ἐφύην (subj. φυῶ) ; fut. τη. φύσομαι.
Χ.
Xatw (xad-), force back, yield, (pres. only in ἀνα- χάζω), [f. χάσομαι,
ἃ. -ἔχασσα (Pind.), a.m. ἐχασάμην ; from stem «ad- (different from
stem of κήδω), 2 a.m. κεκαδόμην ; ἴ. pf. κεκαδήσω, will deprive (703),
2 a. κέκαδον, deprived.] Loetic, chiefly epic; except dvaxa ores
and διαχάσασθαι in Xenophon. (4.)
Kalpw (xap-), rejoice, (€-) χαιρήσω (658, 3), κεχάρηκα, κεχάρημαι and
κέχαρμαι, ἃ ἃ. Ὁ. ἐχάρην, [epic a. m. χήρατο, ἃ ἃ. ni. κεχαρόμην; 2 p.
pt. κεχαρηώς; fut. pf. κεχαρήσω, κεχαρήσυμαι (700).} (4.)
“Χαλάω, loosen, [χαλάσω [0}}..] ἐχάλασα [-αξα Vind.], ἐχαλάσθην. 639;
640.
[Χανδάνω (χαδ-, χενδ-), hold, 2 ἃ. Cxadev; fut. χείσομαι (79), 2 pf.
κέχανδα (646).] Poetic (chiefly epic) and lonic. (5.)
Χάσκω, later xalvw (xa-, xar-), ype, f. χανοὔμτι, 2 p. κέχηνα aS Pres.
(644), 23 ἔχανον. Jonic and poetic. (6. 4.)
Χίζω Cxed-), fut. χεσοῦμαι (rarely χέσυμαι), ἔχεσα, 2 p. κέχοδα (643),
2a. ἔχεσον (rare); ἃ. τὴ. only in χέσαιτο, Ar. δ. 1057; p. p. part.
κεχεσμένος. (4.)
Rilo (χεὺ-, χερ-ν xv-), epic xeiw (785, 3), pour, f. χέω [ep. xevw], a.
ἔχεα [ep. ἔχενα), κέχνκα, κέχυμαι, ἐχύθην, χυθήσυμαι; ἃ. τὴ. ἐχεάμην
[ορ. ἐχευάμην, [2 ἃ. ἢ. ἐχύμην (800, 1).1 574. (2.)
[(χλαδ.), stein of 2 pf. part. κεχλᾶδώς, stvelling (Vind.), w. acc. pl.
κεχλάδοντας, and inf, κεχλάδειν. ἢ
Χόω, heap up, χώσω, ἔχωσα, κέχωκα, κέχωσμαι (041), ἐχώσθην,
χωσθήσομαι.
Σραισμέω (χραισμ-), avert, help, late in present; [Hom. χραισμήσως
éxpaiounoa; 2a. ἔχραισμον]. 654.
Xpaopar, use, χρήσομαι, ἐχρησάμην, κέχρημαι, ἐχρήσθην ; (fut. pf. κεχρή-
σομαι Theoc.). For χρῆται, χρῆσθαι [Hdt. χρᾶται, χρᾶσθαι], etc.,
see 496,
400 APPENDIX, {1692
Xpdw, give oracles, (Attic xphs, χρὴ, etc., 496); xphow, Expnoa, κέχρηκα,᾿
[κέχρησμαι Hdt.}, ἐχρήσϑην. Mid. consult an oracle, [χρήσομοι,
ἐχρησάμην.) For χρῇς and χρῇ = xen (es and χρηζει, sec χρήζω.
Χρή (impers.), probably orig. a noun meauing necd (cf. χρεία), with
ἐστί understood, there ts necd, (une) ought, must, subj. xpi, opt.
χρείη, inf. χρῆναι, (poet. χρῆν) ; imperf. χρῆν (prob. = χρὴ ἣν) or
ἐχρῆν. ᾿Απόχρη, i suffices, inf. ἀποχρῆν, imperf. ἀπέχρη, [Ion.
ἀποχρᾷ, ἀποχρᾶν, ἀπέχρα ;) ἀποχρήσει, ἀπέχρησε.
Χρηήζω (587), Ion. χρηΐζω, want, ask, χρήσω [Ion. χρηΐσωἼ, ἔχρῃηοα,
(lon. ἐχρήϊσα)]. Χρῆν and χρῇ (as if from ypdw), occasionally have
the meaning of xpiecs, χρίει. (4.)
Xptw, anoint, sting, xptow, txpioa, κέχρίμαι ΟΥ̓ Kéxpiopar, ἐχρίσθϑην;
[xptcona Hom.], éxpioduny.
Xpdfw, poet. also χροΐζω (587), color, stain, κέχρωσμαι, ἐχρώσθην. (4.)
wv.
Ψάω, rub, with ἡ fora in contracted forms (496), Ya, ψῆν, Fyn, ete. ;
generally in composition.
Ψεύδω, deceive, ψεύσω, ἔψενσα, ἔψευσμαι, ἐψεύοθην, ψευσθήσομαι ; ψεύσο-
μαι, ἐψευσάμην. 71; 14.
Ψύχω (ψυχ-), cool, ψύξω, Ebola, ἔψῦγμαι, ἐψύχθην [ψὺ χθήσομαι Ἰοη.1;
2 ἃ. Ῥ. ἐψύχην or (generally later) ἐψύγην (stem ψυγ-).
Nn.
᾿Ωθέω (H8-), push, impf. gen. ἐώθουν (537, 1) 3 dow (poet. ὠθήσω], ἔωσα
(lon. dca), ἔωσμαι [lon. Sepa), ἐώσϑην ; ὠσϑήσομαι ; f. τὰ. ὥσομαι,
a. τὰ, ἐωσάμην [lon. ὠσάμην͵]. 654.
᾿Ωνέομαι, buy, imp. ἐωνούμην (537, 1) or ὠνούμην; ὠνήσομαι, ἐώνημαι,
ἐωνήθην. Classic writers use ἐπριάμην (504-506) for later ὠνησάμην.
INDEXES.
N. B.—In these Indexes the references are made to the
Sections of the Grammar, except occasionally to pages 3-6 of
the Introduction. The verbs which are found in the Catalogue,
and the Irregular Nouns of § 291, are generally not included in
the Greek Index, except when some special form is mentioned
in the text of the Grammar.
GREEK
INDEX.
-----....ὃὥ-------
ΑἹ; open vowel 5, 6; pronuncia-
tion of 28); in contraction 08;
becomes 7 in temp. augment 515;
& changed to η at end of vowel
verb stems 635; added to verb
stems (like ε) 656; changed to
y in 2d perf. 644; ε changed to
ἃ in liquid stems 645, 646; Acol,
and Dor. a for η 147; as suftix
832, 8491.
a- Or av- privative 8751; copula-
tive 877.
q, improper diphth. 7, 10; by con-
traction 389.
ἀγαθός compared 361.
ἄγαμαι 794); w. gen. 1102.
ἀγανακτέω w. dat. 1159, 1160; w.
εἰ 1423; w. partic. 1580.
ἀγαπάω w. dat. 1159, 1160; νυ. εἰ
1423; w. partic. 1580,
ἀγγέλλω, pf. and plpf. mid. 490° ;
w. partic. 1588.
ἄγε and ἄγετε w. subj. and iiuperat.
1345.
ἄγευστος cle. W. gen. 1141 (1102).
ἄγηρως, declension of 306.
ἀγνώς, adj. of one ending 343.
ἄγχι w. gen. 1149.
ἄγω, auzm. of tyayer 595; ἄγω»,
with 155.
ἀγωνίζεσθαι ἀγῶνα 1051.
-άδην, adv. ending 8003,
ἀδικέω, ful. mid. as pass. 1248.
ἀδύνατά ἐστιν etc, 8993,
ἀδωρότατος χρημάτων 114].
ἀέκων : 566 ἄκων.
Gerés, epicene noun 158,
!-afw, verbs in 8615, 862; fut. of
6652,
ἀηδών, dec. of 248.
|’ ASyvate, -nOev, -ησι 292, 293, 296,
ἀθλέω, ἤθλησα SLU.
ἀθρόος, decl. of 2087.
ἔΑλθως, accus. of 190.
at, diphthong 7; auginented 518;
sometimes elided in poetry ὃ];
short in accentuation (but not in
opt.) 113,
al, Homerie for εἰ 1381.
Αἴας, voc. af 221),
Ϊ αἰδώς, dech of 258, 259.
alOe or at γάρ, Homeric for εἴθε
ete. 1407,
-aivo, denom, verbs in 86)7, 862.
-atos (a-iox), adj. in Sot), 829,
Ἰ αἴρω 404; aor. G74; pf. and plpf.
mid. 490°,
ταις, -aiga, τ-οισὰ, in aor, partic.
(Aeol.) 785.
ταῖς, -αιστ(ν), in dat. plur. 167, 188",
sats in ace. plur. (Aeol.) 185%.
αἰσϑάνομαι woven. ΤῸ; w. partic,
1582, 1088.
αἰσχρός compared 357, 362.
αἰσχύνομαι w. partic. 1580; w.
infin. 158].
“GLTEPOS, -AiTATOS, COMp. and sup.
in 802.
αἰτέω w. two accus. 1009.
αἴτιος Ww. ven. 1140.
dw, ἄιον 516.
ἀκούω, 2 perf. 520, 690; w. acc.
and gen. 1108; ΗΟ, 533; εὖ or
κακῶς ἀκούω 1241.
409
410 GREEK
ἀκροάομαι 638 ; w. gen. 1102.
ἄκρος ν᾿. article 978.
ἄκων (ἀέκων) 333; without ὥν 1571.
ἀλείφω 572, 6422,
ἀλέξω 658!; redupl. 2 aor. ἄλαλκον
635, 677.
ἀληθής declined 313; ἄληθες, in-
deed ! 314.
“ἁλίσκομαι 659; 2 aor. 779.
ἀλιτήριος w. gen. 11442,
ἀλλά in apodosis 1422.
ἀλλάσσω, pf. and plpf. mid. in-
flected 487°, 4893,
ἀλλήλων declined 404.
ἄλλοθι 2921.
ἄλλομαι, 2 aor. mid. 8003,
ἄλλος, deci. of 419; ν΄, art. 966.
ἄλλοσε 294.
ἄλλο τι ἤ; Or ἄλλο τι; 1604.
ἄλογος declined 306.
ἀλύσκω, formation of 617.
GAs declined 225.
ἀλώπηξ, epicene noun 158; νος.210],
ἅμα w. dat. 1176; w. partic. 1572;
ἅμα ἕῳ 958,
ἁμάρτοιν, opt. 736.
ἄμβροτος (nop) GU.
ἀμείβω w. gen. 1155,
ἁμές, dpé, ctc., Dor. for ἡμεῖς, etc,
498.
ἀμήτωρ 910.
ἁμός and ἀμός for ἡμέτερος (or
ἐμός) 407.
ἀμπέχω and ἀμπίσχω 983.
ἀμπισχνέομαι 607.
ἀμύνω 596; w. acc. and dat.
(Hom.) 1168; ἀμυνάθω 779.
ἀμφί w. gen., dat., and accus. 1202.
ἀμφιέννυμι, augment of 544; w.
two acc. 1069.
ἀμφισβητέω, augment of 544; w.
gen. and dat. 1128, 1175.
ἀμφοτέρωθεν w. gen. 1148.
ἄμφω and ἀμφότερος 379; w. art.
976.
INDEX.
ἄν (epic κέ), adv. 1299-1316: see
Contents. Two uses 1299; with
secondary tenses of indic. 1304,
1335, 1836, 1387, 1897, 1433; w.
optative 1800, 1327, 1408, 1409,
1436, never w. fut. opt. 1507;
w. fut. indic. (Hom.$1303; w
subj. used as fut, (Hom.) 13052,
1356; w. infin. and partic. 1308,
1494. In conditions w. subj.
12992, 1305, 1382, 1387, 1393),
1403; dropped when subj. be-
comes opt. 14977. In final clauses
W. ws, ὅπως, aud S¢pa 1367,
Omitted w. subj. in protasis (in
poetry) 1306, 1406, 1437, w.
potential opt. or in apod. 1552,
1333; ot used Ww. ἔδει, χρῆν, cle.
1400; repeated in long apod.
1312; ellipsis of verb 1315; used
only w. first of several codrd.
vbs. 1314; never begins sentence
1315. See ἐάν, ἤν, ἄν (ἀ), and τάχα.
ἂν (a) for ἐάν (εἰ ἄν) 12997, 1882.
ἂν for ἀνά (Hlom.) 55.
av- privative: see a- privative,
ἂν (ἃ ἄν), by crasis 44, 14282,
-ἂν for -ἄων in gen. plur. 188°.
ἀνά w. dat. and ace. 1208.
ἄνα, up/ 1162, 1224.
ἄνα, poet. voc. of ἄναξ 291.
ἀνάγκη W. infin, 1521; w. ἐστί om,
8911,
ἀναλίσκω and ἀναλόω, augment of
516, 526 (end).
ἄναλκις, adj. of one ending 843.
ἀναμίμνήσκω Ww. two accus. 10GU.
ἀνάξιος w. gen. 1135.
ἀνάσσω ν΄. gen. 1109;
(Hom.) 1164.
ἀνδάνω, auginent of (Hom.) 538.
ἀνέδην 860°.
ἄνευ W. gen. 1220.
avéxw, augment of 544; w. partic.
w. dat.
1580.
GREEK
ἀνήρ declined 278 (see 67) ;
dat. pl. 270. ἀνὴρ 44.
ἄνθρωπος declined 192.
ἀνοίγω, augment of 538; 2 pf.
ἀνέῳγα and ἀνέῳχα 693.
ἀνομοίως w. dat, 1175.
-avos, nouns in 840.
ἀντί w. gen. 1204; ἀνθ᾽ ὧν, where-
Sore 1204.
ἀντιποιέομαι Ww. gen. 1128.
ἀνύσας, 801. part., hastily 1564.
ἄνω, ἀνώτερος, ἀνώτατος 33.
ἄξιος declined 300, ἄξως and ἀξιόω
w. gen. 1135.
Grats, adj. of one ending 343; w.
gen. 1141.
ἀπάτωρ, deci. of 316.
ἄπειρος w. gen. 114].
amoréw w. dat. 1160.
ἁπλόος, ἁπλοῦς declined 310; irreg.
contr. 39),
ἀπό Ww. gen.
1225)
ἀποδέχομαι ν΄. gen. 1103.
ἀποδίδωμι and ἀποδίδομαι 1246.
ἀπολαύω w. gen. 10974,
ἀπολείπομαι Μ. gen. 1117,
ἄπολις, deci. of 316.
ἀπόλλνμι, augm. of plpf. 533.
᾿Απόλλων, accus. of 217; voc. of
1224, 2212,
ἀπολογέομαι, angnent 543,
ἀποστερέω ν΄. two accus. 1069; w.
ace. and gen. 1118.
ἀποσφάλλομαι w, gen. 1099.
ἀποφεύγω w. gen. 1121.
ἅπτω and ἅπτομαι 1246.
ἄρ (Hoin, for ἄρα) 53.
dpa, apa ov, and dpa pi, interrog.
1603.
ἀραρίσκω, 613; Att. redupl. 531,
615, 652.
ἀργύρεος, ἀργυροῦς, declined 310;
irreg. contr. 89’; accent 811.
ἀρείων, compar, of ἀγαθός 361.
Hom.
1205; for ἐν w. dat.
INDEX. 411
ἀρηρός, dpdpvia 774.
ἀρι-, intensive prefix 876.
-apiov, dimin. in 844.
ἄρσην or ἄρρην 327.
ἀρχήν, at first, adv. acc. 1060,
Gpyw, ἄρχομαι, w. partic. 1580;
w. infin. 1581; ἀρχόμενος, at
Jirst 1564.
ἀρωγός 31.
«ἃς, -ds, case-cndings of acc. pl. 167.
-aot and you, locat. and dat. 206.
ἀσπίς w. μυρία 383!.
ἄσσα or ἄττα 416%
ἅσσα or ἅττα 425, 426.
ἀστήρ, declension of 275.
ἀστράπτει without subject 8975,
ἄστυ, declined 250, 253; gen. pl.
of 253.
-arat, -aro (for -νται, -vro) in 3
pers. plur. 7773, 701, (Hdt.) 7878
Gre w. partic. 1575.
ἄτερ w. gen. 1220.
ἅτερος 40,
ἄτιμος and ἀτιμάζω w. gen, 1135.
-aro (for -yro) : see -αται,
ἀτραπός, fem. 194.
ἄντα and ἅττα:
ἄσσα.
av, diphthong 7.
atalvw, augment of 519.
αὐτάρ in apodosis 1422.
αὐτάρκης, αὔταρκες, accent 122¢,
314.
αὐτέων for αὐτῶν (Hdt.) 397.
αὐτός personal pron. in obl. cases
389, 9898; intensive adj. pron
391, 9891; positiun w. art. 980;
w. subst. pron, omitted 990; for
reflexive 992; w. ordinals (δέκα-
ros αὐτός) 991; joined w. reflex-
ive 997; compared (adréraros)
364. ὁ αὐτός, the same, 399,
9892, 980 ; in crasis 400, 44.
αὑτοῦ, etc., for δαυτοῦ 401.
ἀφαιρέω w. acc. and gen. 1118.
806 ἄσσα and
412 GREEK
ἀφίημι, augment of 544 ; opt. forms
8102,
ἀφύη, gen. pl. ἀφύων 126.
ἄχθομαι w. dat. 1160; w. partic.
1580 ; ἀχϑθομένῳ τινὶ εἶναι 1584.
ἄχρι, ἃ5 prepos. w. gen. 1220; as
con)j. 1463.
-do, denom, verbs in 861); desid-
eratives in 868; contract forms
inflected 402; dialectic forms
184.
-dov, gen. pl. (Hom.) 1880,
B, middie mute 21, labial 16, 22,
and sonant 24; euph. changes:
see Labials; inserted between p»
and or p 66; changed to ¢ in
2 perf, act. 692.
-Ba, imperat. (in comp.) 7658,
βαίνω, formation of, 004, 610; 2
aor. of w-form 799; 2 pf. of μι-
formn 804 ; βαίνειν πόδα 1052.
βάκχος (xx) 681.
βάλλω 593; perf. opt. 734.
βασίλεια 178“, 841; βασιλείὰ 886.
βασιλεύς, declined 263, 264 ; com-
pared 364; used without article,
957.
βασιλεύω, denom. 8614; w. gen.
1109; w. dat. (Hom.) 1164;
aor. of 1260.
βεβαιοτέρως 3702.
βέλτερος, BéAraros, and βελτίων,
βέλτιστος 361),
βιβάζω, future of 6657.
βιβάς 7942.
βίβλος, fem. 194.
βίηφι 297,
βιόω, 2d aor. of utl-form, 799,
BA-, how reduplicated 5242.
βλάπτω, aor. pass, 714,
βλίττω (uerir-), by syncope 66.
βοή 176.
βορέας, βορρᾶς declined 186.
βούλομαι, augment of 517; βούλει
INDEX.
in indic. (never Bovdy) 625; βον-
λοίμην ἄν and ἐβουλόμην ἄν 1327,
1339: see ἐβουλόμην; βούλει or
βούλεσθε w. interrog. subj. 1358;
βουλομένῳ τινί ἐστιν, etc. 1584,
βοῦς, declined 268; formation of
269; Hom. forms of 271; com.
pounds of 872; stem in compos,
872.
Bpéras, declension of 236.
βροτός (uop-) by syncope 66%,
βυνέω (Bu-ve-) 607.
T, middle mute 21, palatal 16, 22,
and sonant 24; nasal (w. sound
of v) before «, y, x, or £17;
euph. changes: see Valatals.
γαμῶ and γαμοῦμαι 1246.
γαστήρ, declension of 2742,
yyp changed to yu 77,
γέγονα as pres. 1268,
γελασείω, desiderative verb 868.
γεννάδας, adj. of one ending 346.
yévos, declined 228,
γέντο, grasped 800?:
γίγνομαι,
γέρας declined 228.
γεύω w. acc. and gen, 1108; γεύ-
ομαι W. gen. 1102.
γῆ, declension of 185; omitted
after article 953.
γηράσκω 613; 2 aor. of w-form
199,
γίγας declined 225.
γίγνομαι 536, 652!; 2 perf. of pt
form 804; copul. vb. 908; w.
gen. 11802; w. poss. dat. 1178,
γιγνώσκω 614; redupl. in pres.
636, 6521; w for o 616; 2 aor
of w-form 799; inflect. of ἔγνων
803?,
yA-, how reduplicated 6247,
γλυκύς declined 320.
yv-, how reduplicated 6247.
γνάθος, fem. 194.
see also
GREEK INDEX.
γνωρίζω, augment of 5242,
413
δεσμός (-σ-) 8802; heterog, 288,
γραῦς, deciined 268; formation of | δεσπότης, voc. of 182.
269 ; Hom. forms of 271,
γράφω and γράφομαι 1246; ἐγρά-
ony 1247; Ὑγράφομαι w. cogn.
accus. 1051, 1128.
γρηῦς, γρηῦς, Hom. for γραῦς 27).
γυμνός w. gen. 1140,
A, middle mute 21, lingual 16, 22,
and sonant. 24; euph. changes:
see Linguals ; inserted in ἀνδρός
(ἀνήρ) 67; before -ara: and -aro
(in Hom.) 7773.
$a-, intens. prefix 876.
Sap, voc. daep 1224,
δαίομαι (dac-), divide 602.
Satvups, pres. opt. mid. 734,
δαίω (dar-), dDurn 602,
δάμαρ, nom. of 210.
δαμνάω (dau-) and δάμνημι 609.
δανείζω and δανείζομαι 1245.
Sds, accent of gen. du. and pl. 128.
δέ, in ὁ μέν... ὁ δέ 981-983; in
apodosis 1422.
“δε, local ending 203; enclit. 141),
δεδιέναι 767, 804,
δέδοικα 685.
Sei, impers.: see δέω, want.
δείδεγμαι, δείδοικα, and δείδια,
redupl. of (Hom.) 522°; δέδια
804.
δείκνυμι, synopsis 504, 505, 509;
inflection of «forms 506. Syut.
w. partic. 1588; partic. δεικνύς
declined 3365.
δεῖνα, pron., declined 420; always:
w. art, 947.
δεινόν ἐστιν εἰ 1424.
δελφίς (δελφιν-) 2102, 2822.
δέομαι w. gen. or ν΄, gen. and acc. !
1114.
δέρη (δερρη) 176.
δέρκομαι 646, 6402; "Αρη δεδορκέναι
1005“,
δέχαται (Hom.) as perf. δδ0.
δέχομαι, 2 aor. mid. of 8002. w,
acc. and dat. (Hom.) 1169,
δέω, bind, contraction of 4952,
j δίω, want, contraction of 4952.
in Hdt. 786), Impers. δεῖ 898;
w. gen. and dat. (rarely ace.)
1115, 1161; πολλοῦ δεῖ, ὀλίγου
det 1116; ὀλίγου for ὀλίγου δεῖν,
almost 1116; δέον (ace. abs.)
1569 ; ἐνός ete. w. δέοντες 3828.
ἔδει in apod. without ἄν 1400.
See δέομαι.
δηλοῖ without subject 8973,
δῆλός εἶμι w. partic. 1589.
Sy Aso, inflect. of contract forms 492;
synopsis of 404; infin. 395, 761;
pres. partic. δηλῶν declined 340.
1 Δημήτηρ, declined 2772, 278; ac.
cent of voc, 1224,
Δημοσθένης, acc. of 230; voc. of
1222,
-8yv or -άδην, adverbs in 860.
-δης, patronym., in 846,
διά ν΄. gen. and acc. 1208,
διαιτάω, augin. 543,
Staxovéw, augm. 543.
διαλέγομαι, pf. 622¢; τῷ, dat. 1175.
Stareddw w. partic. 1587,
διάφορος w. gen. 1117.
διδάσκω, formation of 617; w.two
accus. 1069; causative in mid.
1248.
διδράσκω 613; 2 aor. of μιξογτη,
ἐδρᾶν 709, 801.
δίδωμι, synopsis 804, 509; inf. of
weforms 506; redupl. in pres,
651, 7942; Imperf. 630; cona-
tive use of 1255; aor. in κα
670, 8027; δοῦναι 767; imper.
δίδωθι, δίδοι 790,
δίκαιος, person. constr. w. infin.
1527.
41} GREEK
δίκην, adverbial accus. 1060.
διορύσσω, aug. of plpf. 533.
διότι, because, Μ΄. inf. (Hdt.) 1524.
διπλάσιος etc. (as compar.) w.
gen. 1154.
δίχα w. gen. 1149,
διψάω, contraction of 496.
διωκάθω 779,
διώκω w. gen. and acc. 1121; w.;
γραφήν 1051.
δμώς, accent of gen. dual and plur.
128,
Sod, δοιοί (Hom.) 377.
δοκέω (δοκ-) 854; impers. δοκεῖ
898 (15227) ; ἔδοξε or δέδοκται in
decrees etc. 1540; (ws) ἐμοὶ δοκεῖν
1534,
Soxds, fem. 194.
-δόν (-δά) or -ηδόν, adverbs in 860. j
δουλεύω and δουλόω 807. |
δρασείω, desiderative verb 868. |
δράω. δράσω 635, 641.
δρόσος, fem. 194.
δύναμαι, 7941; augm. of 517; ac-
cent. of subj. and opt. 729, 742;
δύνᾳ and ἐδύνω 632.
δύο declined 373; indeclinable
376; w. plur. noun 922,
δυσ-,) inseparable prefix 8752;
augm, of vbs. comp. with 545.
δυσαρεστέω, augment of 545).
δύω 570, 799: see uy.
δῶρον declined 192.
E, open short vowel 5, 6; name
of 4; pronunciation of 28°; in
contraction 38; as syll. augm.
S11, 613; before a vowel 5387;
becomes ἡ in temp. augm. 515;
length. to η at end of vowel verb
stems 635; length. to εἰς when
INDEX.
7882; changed to 4 in liq. stems
645; ch. to o in 2 pf. 643, also in
nouns 831; ε added to stem, in
pres. 654, in other tenses 657,
658; dropped by syncope 65, 273;
dropped in eeo (Hdt.) and cea
and «eo (Hom.) 785?; thematic
vowel 561), in Hom. subj. 780),
6 pron. 389; use in Attic 987, 988.
~eat for esac in verbal endings,
contr. to ἢ or εἰ 393, 5636, 624,
7172: see -€0.
ἐάν for ef ἄν 12997, 1882.
ἑαυτοῦ declined 401 ; synt. 993.
ἐβουλόμην without ἄν (potential)
1402); ἐβουλόμην ἄν 1339,
ἐγγύς, adv. w. gen. 1149; w. dat.
1176.
ἐγείρω 507 ; pf. and plpf. mid, 490°;
aor,m. 677. Att. redupl. 582,
ἔγχελυς, 460]. of 261,
ἐγώ declined 389, Hom. and Hdt.
393; generally omitted 896.
ἔδει etc. without ay in apod, 1400,
uv (of δύω) 505, 799; synopsis
504; inflected 506; Hom. opt.
134.
-εε in dual of nouns in ἐς, us 252.
dé for é, Hom. pron. 3931,
@ev for οὗ 393!.
ἐθίζω, pf. and plipf. mid. 4908.
a, diphthong 7; genuine and spu-
rious εἰ 8; pronunc. of 254 (see
Preface); augment of 519; as
augin. or redupl. (for εε) 537,
-e for -coar, -εαι In 2d pers, sing.,
true Attic form 624.
el, 11381, 1423; zohether 1605, 1606,
1491; in wishes, O if 1508.
-la, nouns in, denoting action 836,
Nouns in ed 841.
cons. are dropped bef. ¢ 30, 78°, | -eas, -ee, -εἰαν in aor. opt. act. 7814
79, in aor. of lig. stems 672, in | εἶδον ν΄. partic. 1585,
2 a. p. subj. (Hom.) 7808, in 2 a. | εἰκάθω, εἰκάθοιμι, etc. 779.
act. subj. of ueforms (lom.) ; εἰκών, decl. of 248.
GREEK
εἴλομαι (Hom.) 598.
epaprasr, augm. of 522.
εἰμί 629 ; inflection of 806; dialec-
tic forins of 807; as copula 891;
w. pred. nom, 907; w. poss. or
part. gen. 1004; w. poss. dat.
1173 ; ἔστιν οἵ, ἔστιν οὗ, ore F
or ὅπως 1029, w. opt. without
ἄν 13335 ἑκὼν εἶναι, τὸ νῦν εἶναι,
κατὰ τοῦτο εἶναι, 1535; accent
(enclitic) 1413, 1445; accent of
Sv, ὄντος 120.
εἶμι, inflection of 808; dial. forins
of 809; pres. as fut, 1257.
«lo for οὗ 393,
-etov, nouns of place in 843).
alos, Hom. for ἕως 1403.
εἶπα, first aorist 671.
εἶπον w. ὅτι or ὡς 1523;
εἰπεῖν 1084.
εἴργω, etc. w. gen. 1117; w. infin.
or infin. w. τοῦ and μή (δ forms) !
1549, 1501,
εἴρηκα, augment of 522.
τεις, -eooa, -ev, adj. in 854; ἀ00].
529, 331; compar. 355.
-ets in ace. pl. of 3d deci. (for eas)
2087 ; late in nouns in evs 206.
els w. accus. 1207; for ἐν w. dat.
1225). i
dis, pla, ἕν declined 375; com-1
pounds of 378.
εἴσω, adv. w. gen. 1148.
εἴτε. . . εἴτε 1606,
-e(w, Hom. pres. in, for éw 7858,
εἴωθα, 2 pf. 5372, 689.
elas, Hom. for ἕως 1463.
ἐκ : see ἐξ.
ἐκεῖθεν for ἐκεῖ 1220,
ἕκαστος, ἑκάτερος, etc. w. article
976.
ἐκεῖνος 409, 411, 1004 , ἐκεινοσέ 412.
ἐκεῖ and ἐκεῖθεν 430,
ἐκεῖσε 294, 436.
ἔκπλεως, Deut. pl ἔκπλεω 308,
{
ws (ἔπος)
INDEX.
ἐκτός, adv. τ΄. gen. 1148,
ἑκὼν εἶναι 1535.
ἑκών declined 333.
ἐλάσσων 3615,
ἐλαύνω, form of pres. 612; fut.
665? (see ἐλόω); Att. redup!. 529 ;
sense 1232.
ἐλαφη-βόλος 872.
ἐλάχεια (Hlom.), ἐλάχιστος 3615,
ἐλέγχω, pf. and plpf. inflected 487%,
4803, 4902, 538.
ἔλλαχον, etc. (om.) for ἔλαχον
514.
'Ἑλληνιστί 860°.
ἐλόω, Hom. fut. of ἐλαύνω 7842,
ἐλπίζω etc., ν΄. fut. infin. or pres.
and aor. 1286.
ἐλπίς declined 225, 209'; accus.
sing, 214°,
ἐμαυτοῦ declined 401; syntax of
993.
ἐμέϑεν, ἐμεῖο, ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ 991,
ἐμεωντοῦ (Hdt.) 403, 993.
ἐμίν (Dor. for ἐμοί) 398.
ἔμμεν or ἔμμεναι, ἔμεν or ἔμεναι,
οι. infin. for εἶναι 807%,
᾿ἐμός 400, 998.
ἐμπίπλημι and ἐμπίπρημι 795.
ἔμπροσθεν w. gen. 1148.
-ev for -σαν (aor. p.) 7779.
ἐν w, dat. 1208; as adv, 1222); w,
dat, for εἰς w. acc. 12257; in
expr. of time 1193; euphon. ch.
before liquid 78%, but not Lefore
p ora 81.
ἐναντίος α΄. gen. 1146; w. dat. 1174.
ἐνδεής ν΄. gen. 1140.
ἕνεκα w. gen. 1220.
ἐνένῖπον aud ἠνέπατον 535,
ἔνεστι, iinpers. 898,
ἔνθα, ἔνθεν 436, 438.
ἐνθάδε 436.
ἐνθαῦτα, ἐνθεῦτεν (Ion.} 4393,
ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνϑεν 1226.
ἔνι for ἔνεστι 1224,
416 GREEK
ἕνιοι and ἐνιότε 1029,
ἔνοχος w. 661. 1140.
ἐνταῦθα 436.
ἐντεῦθεν 486,
ἐντός w. gen. 114θ,
ἐξ or ἐκ, form 63; x in ἐκ un-
changed in compos. 72; ¢ in ἐκ
long before liquid 102 ; proclitic
137; accented 138%; w. gen.
1209 ; for ἐν w. dat. 12251,
ἐξαίφνης w. partic. 1572.
ἔξεστι, impers. 898 ; w. dat. 1161;
ἐξῆν in apod. without ἄν 1400.
ἐξόν, acc. abs. 1569,
ἕξω w. gen. 1148.
-0 for -e¢o 5656, 7772,
to for οὗ 393).
dot for of 393).
ἔοικα (elx-) 5872, 573; plipf. 528;
pe-forms 804; w. dat. 1175.
-€0$, adj. of material in 852.
és for ὅς (poss.) 407,
ἐπάν and ἐπεάν (ἐπεὶ ἄν) 14282,
ἐπεί aud ἐπειδή 1428, 1505; w.
infin. in or. ob). 1624.
ἐπειδάν and ἐπήν 12992, 14282.
ἐπήβολος w. geu. 1140.
ἐπὶ w. gen. dat. and accus. 1210;
as adverb 1222).
᾿ Sm for ἔπεστι 11682, 1224,
ἐπιθυμέω w. gen. 1102.
ἐπικάρσιος ν΄. gen. 1146.
ἐπιλανϑάνομαι w. gen. 1102.
ἐπιμελῆς w. gen. 1140.
ἐπίσταμαι 7947; ἐπίστᾳ and ἠπί-
στω 632; accent of subj. and!
opt. 729, 742; w. accus. 1104; |
w. partic, 1158. }
ἐπιστήμων ν΄, gen. 1142; Ww. accus.
1050.
ἐπιτιμάω w. ace. and dat. 1163.
ἐπριάμην (πρια-) 505; synopsis
504; inflected 506; accent of
subj. and opt. 729, 742.
ἐρέσσω, stem ἐρετ- 582.
INDEX.
ἐρι-, intens. prefix 876.
ἐριδαίνω 606.
ἐρίζω w. dat. 1175, 1177.
ἔρις, accus. of 2148,
ἔρρωγα, 2 pf. of ῥήγνυμι 689,
‘Epplas, ‘Epps, declined 184.
ἕρση 176.
ἐρυθριάω 8682,
ἐρύκω, ἡρύκακον 535,
ἐρωτάω w. two accus. 1069,
ἐσ-, stems of 3 dec}. in 227.
ts w. accus. 1207: see els.
tor Olw 621; future 667.
-eot in dat. plur. (Hom.) 2862.
ἐσσείοντο (Hom.) 514.
-εσσι in dat. plur. (Hom.) 2862,
ἐσσί (Hom.) 556!, 807).
ἕσσων 3612.
ἔστε, unttl 1463,
-ἔστερος, -ἔστατος 353, 354.
ἐστί w. ending τι 5562; accented
ἔστι 1445; takes ν movable 57.
ἔστιν of (οὗ, 3, drs) 905, 1029;
ἔστιν ὅστις etc. with opt. with-
out ἄν 1333.
ἑστώς (for dorads), ἑστῶσα, ἑστός
(lon. éoreds) 849, 508, 773, 804.
ἔσχατος w. article 978.
ἔσω W. gen. 1148: see εἴσω.
ἐτέθην for ἐθέϑην 958,
érepos 429; w. gen. 1154: see ἅτε-
pos.
ἐτησίαι, ἐτησίων 126.
ἐτύθην for ἐθύϑην 958,
ev, diphthong 7.
ἐν contr, to ε (through ¢¢) 9078,
εὖ, augm. of verbs compounded w.
5451; w. ποιέω, πάσχω, ἀκούω,
ete, 1074, 1241; w. πράσσω
1075; w. ἔχω and gen, 1092.
εὖ, pron. for of 393).
εὐδαίμων declined 313;
122°,
εὔελπις 316; accus. 2143,
εὐεργετέω, augni. 545),
accent
GREEK
εὐθύ w. gen. 1148,
εὐθύς w. partic. 1572,
εὐκλέης, contr. of $15.
tivoos, ebvovs, Compared 353.
εὑρίσκω Ww. partic, 1582, 1588.
εὖρος, accus. of specif. 1058.
εὐρύς, wide, Hom. acc. of 322,
seus, NOUNS in 263, 833), 841, 848;
Hom. forms of 264; original
forms of 265; contracted forms
of 267.
εὐφυής, contr. of 315,
εὔχαρις, deci. of 316.
-εύω, denom., vbs. in 8014, 863.
ἐφοράω ν΄. partic, 1580,
ἐφ᾽ Sor ἐφ᾽ dre w. infin. and fut.
ind. 1460.
ἐχρῆν or χρῆν in apod. without ἄν
1400.
ἔχω, for cex-w, 95+; w. partic. for
perf. 1262; ἔχομαι 1246, w. gen.
1099; w. adv. and part. gen.
1092; ἔχων, with, 1565.
ἐχθρός compared 357.
“ὦ, denom. verbs in 8612, 866,
867; iufiection of contract forms
492.
«ἕω for -ἄω in vbs. (Hdt.) 7844,
«ἕω in fut. of liquid stems 663.
-ew and -qwv, Ion. gen. of 1st decl.
. 1888. ὁ,
twin, pipf. 528.
τέως, Att. 2d decl. in 196.
ἕως, dawn, accus, of 199 (see 240).
ἕως, conj. 1463; while 1425-1429 ;
until 1463-1467, expr. purpose
1467, in indir. dise. 15023,
ἑωντοῦ, for ἑαυτοῦ (Hdt.) 403.
Z, double cons. 18; origin of 18,
283; probable pronunciation of
283; makes position 90); « for
redupl. before 623.
{a-, intens. prefix 876.
{aw, contr. form of 496.
INDEX. 417
“fe, adv. in 293,
«ζω, verbs in 584; fut. of vbs. in
afw and ζω 666.
H, open long vowe) 5, 6; orig.
aspirate 18; in Ion. for Dor. ἃ
147; aand ¢ length. to η 29, 515,
635; as thematic vowel in subj.
5614; fem. nouns and adj. in
832, 849.
Ὁ» improper diphthong 7.
-q for coas or noa in 2 pers. sing.
393, 565%, 624. See -a.
4, whether (Hom.), or, interrog.
1605, 1606 ; than 1155, om. 1156.
4, interrogative 1603, 1606.
ἡγέομαι w. gen. 1109; w.
(JJom.) 1164.
ἥδομαι w. cogn. accus. 100].
ἡδομένῳ σοί ἐστιν, etc. 1554.
ἡδύς compared 357 ; ἡδίων declined
358.
ἠέ, ἦεν interrog. (Hom.) 1606.
ἠείδης etc. (οἶδα) 8217,
τήειςς, adj. in, contracted in Hom.
832.
ἥκιστα (super).) 3612,
ἥκω as perf. 1256.
ἡλίκος 429.
ἦμαι 629; inflection of 814; dial.
forms of 817.
pas or ἡμας 396.
-npevos for -exevos in part. (Hom.)
792.
ἡμέτερος 406, 998 ; w. αὐτῶν 1009,
ἥμι-, insepar. particle 8754, 86.
ἡμίν, pew 396,
ἦν for ἐάν (εἰ ἄν) 13882.
ἡνίκα, rel. adv. 436,
ἡνίπαπον 098,
ἧπαρ declined 225; form of nom.
212.
ἤπειρος, fem, 1947.
Ἥρακλέης 231.
ἥρως declined 243, 244,
dat.
418
«ἧς, adj. in 8493, 881 ; inflection of
312.
«ἧς (for jes), in nom. pl. of nouns
in -eds (older Attic) 266.
σι or gs, in dat. pl. 1 deci. (Ion.)
1883,
ἥσσων (comp.) 361%
ἣν, diphthong 7; augm. of ev 519. |
ἠχώ dec). 248.
nos (Ion.) decl. 240.
Θ, rough mute 21; lingual 16, 22 ; |
aud surd 24; cuph. changes, see
Linguals.
-8a, ending (see -σϑα) 556).
θάλασσα dec). 172.
θαμίζω w. partic. 1587.
θάπτω (ταφ-), aspirates in 955,
θάρσος and ϑράσος 64).
θάσσων 357 ; aspirate in 95°
θᾶτερον etc. 46.
θαῦμα ν΄. infin. 1530.
θαυμάζω w. gen. 1102, 1126; θαυ-
μάξω εἰ 1423; θαυμάζω ὅτι 1424.
θέλεις or θέλετε w, interrog, subj.
1358.
-Bev, local ending 2922, 205,
θεός, vocative 195,
θέω (8v-), 2d class 574.
θέρομαι, fut. of 668.
OnPate 293.
θῆλυς 323.
θήρ declined 225.
Ons declined 225.
-By-rt for -6-@ in Ist aor. pass.
imper. 963, 7577,
«θι, Jocal ending 2921, 205, 860.
θνήσκω (Gav-) G13; metath. (θαν-.
Ova-) BAD; ἡ for ἃ O16; fut. pf.
act. τεθνήξω 705; perf. as pres.
1263; 2 perf. of a-form 804;
part, τεθνεώς 773; Hom. τεθνηώς
T7383.
6%-, poetic stems in 779.
θοἰμάτιον (by crasis) 44. |
GREEK INDEX.
θρίξ, τριχός, aspirates in 955; de-
clension of 228.
θρύπτω (rpug-) 955,
θυγάτηρ declined 274; Hom. forms
276.
θύραζε 293.
θύρασι 296.
I, close vowel 5, 6; rarely contr.
w. foll. vowel 401; length. to é
29, 80; interchanged w. εἰ and
οἱ 81; i added to demonstr.
412; mood suffix in opt. 562,
730; in redupl. of pres. stens
651, 652, 7942; representing j
84, enphon. changes caused by
842-6, 509-002 ; subscript 10.
-t, local ending 296.
-ta, fem. nouns in 842.
ta for μία (Hom.) 377.
ἰάομαι 635.
-tdw, desideratives in 868.
ἰδεῖν, accent of 759, 762.
-(8ys and -raSys (fem. -ids), patro-
nym. in 8467, 8463,
κἰδιον, diminutive in 844.
ἴδιος Ww. pass. gen. 1143.
ἵδρις declined (ane ending) 344.
ἱδρόω, contraction of 497.
ἱδρύνθην (idpdw), Wom. aor. p.
ve- Or aq- aS mood suffix in opt.
ὧν.
ἱερός w. poss. gen. 1149,
-(fw, denomiinat. vbs. in 861°,
864.
typi, inflection of 810; dial. forms
of 811; aor in κα 6705 opt.
πρόοιτο vic. 74), 8107; εἶναι 767.
ἴθι, come! w. subj. and imperat
1345.
ixvéopar O07.
-tkos, adjectives in 851.
ἵλεως. adj. declined 306, 197.
᾿Ιλίοθι πρό 295.
τιν in acc. Sing. 2143.
TO9,
562,
862,
GREEK
tv, Doric for οἵ 398.
ἵνα, final con}. 1362, 13865, 1368,
1371.
twos, ad}. of material in 852; adj.
of time in ids 808,
0%, pres. stem in 579,
τιον, diminutives in 844.
-bos, adj. in 850.
ἵππος, fem., cavalry, w. sing. num-
erals 983},
darrord, von. (Hom.) 1883,
τις, feminines in 8482,
Ἴσϑμοϊ 296.
«σι, dat. case ending 167.
-iok%-, pres. steins in 613.
-ίσκος, -ἰσκη, dimin. in 844.
ἴσος w. dat. 1175.
ἴστημι, synopsis 504, 505, 509;
inflect. of ueforms S06; redupl.
of pres. 651, 682, 794°; fut.
perf. act. 70%; partic. isrds de-
clined 335.
ἰχθύς declined 257-200; ace. pl. }
of 250.
Id, accus. ᾿Ιοῦν (Hut.) 247.
-wwy, patronyim, in 847.
τῶν, τἰστος, comp. and super). in 1
357.
to for ἑνί 377,
K, smooth mute 21, palatal 16, 22,
surd 24; euphon.ch.,see Valatals;
ch. to x in 2 perf. stem 692.
κι οὐκ 26.
«κα in aor. of three vbs. 670.
καάββαλε (κατέβαλε) 53.
«dy for κατά 53,
καθαρος w. ven. 1140.
xaGdfopar, augment S44; fut. 666),
καθεύδω, augment 844.
κάθημαι, inflection of 815, 816.
καθίζω, augment 544.
καθίστημι as copul. vb. 908.
«al, in crasis 432, 44; connecting
two subjects 90]; w. part. (see)
INDEX. 419
καίπερ) 1573; καὶ ὅς, καὶ οἵ, os
καὶ ὅς 10232; καὶ ws 1883; καὶ
ταῦτα 1573; καὶ τόν w. infin,
984; τὰ καὶ τά, τὸ καὶ τό 984.
καίπερ w. partic. 1573.
καίω (Att, dw) 60).
«ax (Hom.) for κατά 53,
κακός compared 361.
κάκτανε (xatéxrave) 53.
κακῶς ποιεῖν (λέγειν) 1074,
καλέω, fut. in (-ἐω) ὦ 665; perf.
opt. in nun» 734; perf. as pres,
1263,
καλὸς compared 361.
καλύβη and καλύπτω 577.
κάμπτω, perf. mid. 77, 490],
kav (καὶ ἐν), κἄν (καὶ dv) 44.
Kaveov, κανοῦν 202.
kam (llom.) for κατά 53.
j κάρτιστος, superl. 363).
-κᾶσι (poet. also -x@or) in 3 pers.
pl. perf. 662.
κάτ (Hom.) for κατά 53.
kara, preposition with gen. and
accus. }211; in compos, 1323;
κατὰ γῆν 908.
κατά. βᾷ for κατά-βηθι 1553.
κάτα (καὶ εἶτα) 44.
| καταβοάω w. gen. 1123.
καταγιγνώσκω Ww. gen. 1123.
κατάγννυμι Ww. gen. 1098.
καταψεύδομας w. gen. 1123.
καταψηφίζομαι w. gen. 1125.
κατηγορέω, augment of 3435 w.
gen. and ace, 1123.
κατθανεῖν (καταθανεῖν) 53,
κατόπιν w. gen. 1140.
κάτω, κατώτερος, κατώτατος 903.
κέ or κέν (= ἄν) 59, 1299,
κεῖθεν, κεῖθι 439),
κεῖμαι, inflection of 818, 619.
κεῖνος 411.
κεῖσε 439),
κεκαδήσω, fut. pf. act. of χάξω 705.
xexpayere, perf, imper. 748.
420 GREEK
κέκτημαι and ἔκτημαι 525,
κέλενθος, fem. 194).
κελεύω w. acc. and inf. 1164. j
κέλλω, fut. 668; aor. 6742.
κέλομαι, redupl. 2 aor, 534, 677.
κέρας declined 237),
xepSaivw 610; aor. 673.
κεχαρήσω, fut. pf. act. of χαίρω
705.
Kéws, accus. of 199, '
κἥρυξ 210],
κηρύσσει without subject 897),
κιβωτός, fem. 194,
κίχρημι 7942.
κλαίω (Attic κλάων 601; fut. 806 ;}
κλαίων» 1564.
κλαυσιάω, desiderative verb 868.
-wAéns, proper nouns in, dec]. 231, |
κλείς (Ion. Anis), accus. of 215.
κλέπτης compared 364.
κλίνω, drops ν 647; pf. mid, 488,
490°; aor. p. 709.
κλισίηφι 297.
Kvaw, contraction of 496, 1
κομίζω, future 6648,
κόρη (xop¢n) 176.
κόρση. κόρρη 178.
κρατέω Ww, gen. 1109.
κρέας, Nomin. 21].
κρείσσων, κράτιστος 361),
κρέμαμαι 794!; accent of subj.
and opt, 729, 742.
κρίνω. drops v 647,
Κρονίων 847.
κρύβδην 8602,
κρύπτω w. two accus. 1069.
κρύφα w. pen. 1150.
kraopar. angm. of perf. 425; perf.
subj. and opt. 722, 734.
κτείνω 596, 644, 647, 799; 2 aor.
of ze-form, 799, 801.
κτείς. xrev-os. Nom. 2102,
κυδρός Compared 357,
κύκλῳ, all round 1198.
κυνέω (xu-) 607.
iM,
INDEX.
κύρω, fut, 668; aor. 674%,
κύων, κύντερος, κύντατος 364.
κωλύω, accent of certain forms
485 ; κωλύες as impers. 8974.
Kos, accusative of 199.
A, liquid and semivowel 20; so-
nant 24; Ad after syllabic augm.
(Hom.) 514.
λαβών, with 1565.
-λαγχάνω and λαμβάνω, redupl. of
522; formation 605, 611.
λαγώς, accusative of 189,
λάϑρᾳ w. gen. 1150.
λαθών, secretly 1564.
λαμπάς declined 225.
λανϑάνω (Aa6-) GUS, 611; w. par-
tic. 1588,
λάσκω (Aax-), formation of 617.
λέγω, collect, redupl. of 522.
λέγω, say, constr. of 1523; λέγουσι
8977; λέγεται or λέγουσι Omitted
1625.
λείπω, Synopsis of 476; meaning
of certain tenses 477; second
aor., perf. and plpf. infleeted
481 ; form of λέλοπα ὃ]. 642).
Ao, imper. 756!.
λέων declined 226.
λιϑοβόλος and λιθόβολος 885.
λίσσομαι W. ὡς or Srws 1877.
λοιδορέω w. acc. and λοιδορέομαι
w. dat. 1163.
Aovw, contraction of 497.
λύω, synopsis 469, 474; conjus.
180; Hom. perf. opt. 7384; λύων
and λελυκώς declined 336; quan-
tity οὖν 471.
ἐλῴων, λῷστος 3611.
liquid and semivowel 20;
nasal 20, and sonant 24; μβὰ
and μβρ for μὰ and yp 66.
-pa, neut. nouns in 837.
μά, in oaths, w. acc. 1066-1068.
GREEK
palopar (uac-) 602.
μακρός, decl. of 300; μακρῷ w.
comp. 1184.
μάλα comp. (μᾶλλον, μάλιστα) 371.
-pav, Dor. ending for -μην 777),
μανθάνω 605; w. gen. of source
1130°; w. infin. 15927; τί μαθών
1566.
Μαραθῶνι, dat. of place 1197.
μαρτύρομαι 59.
μάχομαι, fut. -ἐσομαι, -οὔμαι 665! ; |
w. dat. 1177.
ἹΜέγαραδε 293.
μέγας declined 346 ; compared 8014,
μέζων for μείξων 9614, 843,
τμέθον in first person dual 5562.
μείζων 3614.
μείρομαι, redup). of perf. 522.
μείων, μεῖστος 361°.
μέλας declined 325; fem. of 326;
nour. 210%,
μέλει w. dat. and gen. 1105, 1161.
μέλλω, augment of 517; w. infin.,
as periph. fut. 1254. ν
μέμνημαι, perf. subj. aud opt. 722,
734; as pres. 1268; w. gen.
1102; w. partic. 1588.
μέμφομαι w. dat. 1160; w. ace,
1168.
-pes, τμέσθα for -per, -μεθα 556%, |
1117).
μέν, in ὁ μέν... ὁ δέ 98].
-pevat, -pev, in infin. (Hom. ) 782],
784°, 7854, 791,
Μενέλεως and Μενέλαος 33, 200;
accent 1)4.
pevrav (by crasis) 44.
μεσημβρία 66.
μέσος. compar. 352; w. art. 978.
μεστός W. gen. 1140,
μετά w. gen., dat. and accus.)
1212; as adv. 1222);
(Hom.) for μέτεστι 1224,
μεταμέλει w. gen. and dat. 11035,
péra |
1161.
INDEX. 421
μεταξύ τὸ, gen. 1220; w. partic.
1872.
μεταποιέομαι w. gen. 1099.
μέτεστι w. gen. and dat. 1097%,
1161.
μετέχω w. gen. 10977, 1098.
μέτοχος w. gen. 1140,
ped 393! ; enclitic 141).
μέχρι, as prep. w. gen. 1220; as
con}. 1463-1467; with subj. with-
out ἄν 1466.
μή, adv., not, 1607-1619 ; see Con-
tents, Ὁ. XxiV.; W. ἵνα, ὅπως,
etc., in final clauses 1364; after
vos. of fearing, w. subj. and opt.
1378, w. indic. 13880; in prota-
sis 1343; in rel. cond. sent.
1428; in wishes 1507, 1611,
1610; w. imperat. and subj, in
prohibitions 1346, 1347; w. sub}.
expressing fear 1348, 1349; w.
subj. (also μὴ of) in cautions
assertions 1360, w. indic. 1351 ;
w. dubitative subj. 1358; w.
infin. 1611; w. infin. and wore
1451; w. infin, after negative
verb 1615. See ob μή and μὴ οὐ.
μὴ ὅτι, μὴ ὅπως 1504.
-py, fem. nouns in 835.
μηδέ, μήτε 1607; μηδὲ εἷς 378.
μηδείς 378, 1607; μηδένες etc. 378,
μηδέτερος 435.
pyxdopar 656.
μηκέτι 62.
μήτηρ declined 274.
pris (poet.) 435; accent 146.
μὴ οὐ 1616, 1617; one syllable in
poetry 472; wy... οὐ in final
cl. 1864; w. subj. or indic. in
cautious negations 1350, 1381.
μήτε 1607.
μήτρως 244.
“pt in Ist pers. sing. 552, 556),
781, 793-797; Aeol. vbs. in, for
~aw, -εω, -ow 7872,
422 GREEK
μικρός compared 3615,
μιμνήσκω, augment of perf. 525 ;
ἢ for α 616, 614. See μέμνημαι.
py and νίν 398, 395.
Μίνως, accus, of 199.
μίσγω for μιγτσκω 617,
μισέω w. accus. 1163.
μισθόω, middle of 1245.
μμμ changed to uu 77.
μνάα, μνᾶ, declined 184.
pod- in pf. of βλώσκω 662, 614.
pop- in βροτός 66°.
pos, nouns in 834; adj. in 855.
μοῦνος (μόνος) 148.
Μοῦσα decliued 171.
pria 175°
μυριᾶς 373.
μύριοι and μυρίοι 3832,
μυρίος, μυρία 83".
pis, μυός, declined 260,
μῶν (μὴ οὖν), inverrog. 1608.
-μῶων, adjectives in 840".
N, liquid and semivowel 20; nasal:
20; sonant 24; can end word 25,
movable 56-61; euph. changes
before jabia) and palatal 78},
before liquid 782, before σ 783;
yt, »d, v8, dropped befure σ 79; in
ἐν and σύν 81; dropped in some.
vbs. in vw 647; changed to σ
before μαι 88, 4897, 646, 700;
dropped before o in dat. plur.
80; inserted in aor. pass. 709;
in 5th class of verbs 603-612.
va- added to verb stem 609, 797?.
«ναι, infin. in 654, 764, 766, 767. |
Sec -pevar.
ναίχι. accent 1415, 146.
ναίω (var) 602.
vaos, νηός, and νεώς 200, 100).
vais declined 268; Dor. & Ion.
decl. of 270; formation of 269: |
compounds of (ναυμαχία, vavel-
INDEX.
Topos, νεώσοικος, etc.) 872 ; ναῦφι
297,
v8 dropped before ¢ 79.
ve added to verb stein 607.
νεικείω (Hom.) 785%,
véw (vu-), 2d class 574; fut. 666.
νεώς declined 196.
vy, inn oaths, w. accus. 1066, 1067
vy-, insep. neg. prefix 875%.
νῇσος declined 192.
νηῦς (for ναῦς) 270.
νθ dropped before σ 79.
νίζω (νίβ-) 591.
γικάω Ww. cogn. accus, 1052; pass,
w, gen, 1120,
νίν and ply 305.
vida (accus.) 289.
νομίζω w. (τῆι. 1523; w. dat. like
χράομαι 1183.
γόος, νοῦς declined 2013.
«νος, adject. in 855.
νόσος, fem. 1941.
νουμηνίᾳ 1191.
-vg in accus. plur. 167, 169,
208%.
-vet and -vre in od pers. plur. ὃ
656°, 783, 777).
ντ- dropped before σ 79,
-vro in 3d pers. plur. 552.
-vrwy in 3d pers. pl. imper.
746.
νυ- added to vowel steins 608, 797).
γυκτός 958 3 νυκτέ and ἐν γυκτί 1190.
«νῦμι, verbs in Ο08, 6023, 197,
γύν or νύ (epic) 59; enclit, 141%
νῶϊ, νῶϊν 393!,
νωΐτερος 401.
ἘΞ, double consonant 18; surd 24;
compos. of 18; how written in
early Attic 27, 283; can end word
26; redupl. before 523.
ξεῖνος, Ion. for ξένος 148.
[ξύν for σύν, ν΄, dative 1217.
GREEK INDEX.
O, open short vowel 5, 6; name!
of 4; in contraction 38; length.
to ὦ 29; tu ov 80; interchanged
w. ἃ and ¢ 82; fore in 2 pf. 645, +
alsu in nouns 831; as thematic
vowel 8611, in Ham. subj. 780];
as suffix 832, 849; at end of first;
part of compounds 871.
τὸ for -co in 2d pers. sing. 5656.
ὁ, 4, τό, article, decl. of 380; syn-j
tax of 935-984: in Hom, 935-
938; in Πάν. 939; in lyr. and:
trag. poets 940, in Attic 941-
984; ὁ per... ὁ δέ 981-983; !
proclitic forms 187; when ac-
cented 139. See Article.
3, rel. (neut. of ὅς), for ὅτε (Hom.) ;
14782,
ὀγδόατος 374.
ὀγδώκοντα (jon.) 374.
ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε, demonstr. pronoun
430 (see οὗτος); decl. 409; syn-
tax 1004, 1005, 1008; w. article:
910], 974; ὁδί 412.
ὁδός declined 192; ὁδὸν ἱέναι 1057.
ὁδούς, ὀδών, ὀδόντος, nom. 2103,
o¢ and oo contracted to ov 382; 8.
oe. contr. to ov 39°; to o (in vbs.
in ow) Ji.
τ-όεις, adj. in, contracted 332.
ὀΐζω w. two gen. 1107.
oy contr. to ὦ 38; to » 3G), 810,
31).
oy and oa contr. to ot (in vbs. in|
bw) 393.
ὅθεν 436 ;
ὅθι 4395,
ὀθούνεκα 14783,
οι, diphthong 7; pronunciation of |
283, interchanged w. εἰ and ἵ
81; augmented to ῳ 518; rarely
elided 51; short in accent 113; ;
of in voc. sing. 246.
of, pron. 389 ; use in Attic 987, 988.
ol, adv. 436,
by assinilation 1034.
423
ola w. partic. 1575.
οἶδα, inflection of 820; dial. forms
of 821; w. partic. 1588 ; w. infin.
1592? ; οἶσθ᾽ ὃ δρᾶσον 1343.
Οἰδίπους, gen. and acc. of 287).
-ony, etc. in opt. act. of contract
vbs. 787; in 2 perf. opt. 735;
σχοίην 7235,
-ouv (ep.) for -ow in dual 280],
οἴκαδε, οἴκοθεν, οἴκοι, olxdyvSe 292-
290; οἴκοι 1198.
οἰκεῖος, forin. 850; w. gen. 1144;
w. dat. 1175.
οἰκία declined 171.
οἰκτέρω aud οἰκτείρω 597.
τοῖο in gen. sing. of 2d decl. 204),
οἴμοι elided 51; accent of 146.
οἶνος aud vinwm 91.
οἰνοχοέω, augment of 538.
οἴομαι or οἶμαι, only οἴει in 2 pers.
sing. 625; w. infin. 1523.
οἷον or ola w. partic. 1575.
τοῖν, rare for -oiwe in opt. act. 736.
οἷος 429; οἵῳ σοι, etc. 10363; olds
re, able, in Att. 1024% 806 ota
and olov.
τοισα tor -ovea in partic. (Aeol.)
783.
τοισι in dat. pl. of 2 decl. 204%,
οἴχομαι. perf. of 650; in pres. as
pf. 1256; w. partic. 1587.
ὀλίγος COMpared 901; ὀλίγου (δεῖν)
1116, 15384.
ὄλλυμι (4A-), form of pres. 612;
fut. Οὐδ; perf. and plpf. 529, 533.
ὅλος w. article 970.
᾿Ολύμπια (τάν) 389; w. νικᾶν 105%.
ὁμιλέω w. dat. 1175.
ὄμνυμι (ὀμ-, duo-) G59; plpf. 553 ;
ὄμνυθι 790 (752); w. accus. 1049.
ὅμοιος and ὁμοιόω w. dat. 1175.
ὁμολογέω w. dative 1175.
ὁμοῦ w. dative 1176.
ὁμώνυμος w. gen. 1144]; w. dat.
1175.
424 GREEK INDEX.
ova-, stems in 840. w. suppl. partic. 1882; τῇ, part.
ὄναρ 289, in indir. disc. 1688 (1683).
ὀνειδίζω w. dat. or acc. 1163. ὀρέγομαι τὸ. gen. 1099,
-ovy, Douns in 840. | ξρνις declined 225; acc. sing. of
ὀνίνημι (ὀνα-) yee 198 ; accent a 2143, 216. See 291%. :
2 aor. opt. 742; inflect. of ὠνή- ᾿ ὄρνυμι, fut. 668; aor. 674°.
μὴν 808%, [-ος, τον, nouns in 832, 189; adj.
ὄνομα, by name 1058 ; ὀνόματι 1182.; in δ40], 855, 298; neuters in -os
ὀνομάζω “ two τ ἯΙ in pass. | (stems in εσ-) 8ῦτ, ἽΝ τ
w. pred. nom. 907, 1078. os, rel. pron. 421, 430; fem. dua’
ὀνομαστί 8403. | rare 422; Hom. forms of 424;
ovr-, partic. stems in 5645, 565%, | as demonstr. 1023.
770. és, Ats, poss. pron. (poet.) 406,
ὀξύνω, perf. and plpf. eg 700. | 408.
oo contracted to ov 38), ὅσος, ὁπόσος 429.
τοος, nouns in 201; ee in 310; [πο τζον, ὁ ὀστοῦν, declined 201.
compared 368 ; compounds in, [ὅστις declined 425-427; Hom. form
accent of 2083, ; 428; as indir. interrog. 1013,
Sov for οὗ 424. 1600; sing. w. plur. antec.
ὅπῃ, ὁπηνίκα, ὁπόθεν, ὅποι 436. 1021-.
ὄπισθεν w. gen. 1149. ὀσφραίνομαι, formation 610; w.
ὁπόθεν 436 ; rel. of purpose 1442. | gen. 1102.
ὅποι, οἵ place where 1226, | Ore, vel. 438; causal 1505; ὅταν w.
ὁποῖος, ὁπόσος 429. Ι subj. 14282,
ὁπότε, relat. 430, 1425; causa) 1505; | ὃ on oe Strev, ὅτεῳ, ὅτεων, ὁτέοισι
ὁπόταν ν΄. subj. 1428, 12092. Ι,
ὁπότερος 429, 4322, τι. ae in indir. quot. 1476,
ὅπον 436. |” 1487; in direct quot. 1477; cau-
ὀπνίω (drv-), ὀπύσω 602. | gal (because) 1605; novelided 50.
ὅπως, rel. adv. 486; as indir. in-; 6 τὶ (ueut. of Boris) 425, 426.
terrog. τὸ, subj. or opt. 1600, ' ὅτις, Oriva, Srivos, ὅττεο, ὅττι 428,
1490; as final particle 1362, lou, diphthong 7; genuine and spn-
1366, 1368; sometimes w. ἄν or rious ov 8; pronune. of 27, 28°;
κέ 1867; w. past. t. of indic.! length. from ὁ 30; for o in Ion.
13871; rarely w. fut. ind, 1366 ; | 148; not augmented 519.
in obj. cl ow. fut. ind. 1372 ;)-ov in gen. sing. 170, 191; for τεσο
sumetimes w. ἄν 1376; in obj., in 2 pers. mid. 565%, 679.
cl. in Hom. 1377; ὅπως μή after, οὐ, οὐκ, οὐχ 62; proclitic 137; ac-
vbs. of fearing 1379; ὅπως and! cented 138}; uses of 1608-1618;
ὅπως μὴ w. fut. In commands] οὐκ icf ὅπως etc. w. opt. (with-
and pruhib. 1352; ὅπως for as! out ἄν) 13338; οὐχ ὅπως and οὐχ
in indir. quot, 1478. M4 dws! ὅτι 1604. See οὐ μή and μὴ οὐ.
and οὐχ ὅπως 1504. Ϊ οὗ, of, % etc. 389, 392; syntax of
dpdw 621; augm. and redupl. of | 987, 988.
588; w. ὅπως 1872; w. μή 1378; | οὗ, rel. adverb 436.
GREEK
οὖδας 236,
οὐδέ 1607; οὐδ᾽ εἷς and οὐδείς 378 ;
οὐδ᾽ ὡς 1883; οὐδὲ πολλοῦ δεῖ
11164,
οὐδείς 378, 1607; οὐδένες, etc. 378;
οὐδεὶς ὅστις οὐ 1035,
οὐδέτερος 435,
οὐκ: 566 οὐ.
οὐκέτι 62.
οὐκ (ὁ ἐκ) 44.
οὐκοῦν (interrog.) 1603.
ov μή ν΄. fut. ind. or subj. as strong
fut. 1360 ; in prohib. 1361.
«οὖν in acc. sing. (Hdt.) 247.
οὕνεκα for ἕνεκα 12208.
οὗὑπί (ὁ ἐπί) 44.
οὐρανόθεν, οὐρανσθι 292.
τοὺς in acc. pl. 190, 167.
τοὺς (for -εος, -00s), adj. in 852, 829,
310; partic. iu ods 5645. \
ots, ear, accent of gen. dual and
pl. 128,
τουσι for -ονσι 5565, 788,
οὔτε 1607.
οὔτις (poetic) 435; accent 146.
οὗτος declined 409, 413; use of:
480, 1004; disting. from ἐκεῖνος
and ὅδε 1005; ταὐτὰ and ταύταιν:
(dual) rare 410; w. article 946}. 3;
position w. art. 974; in exclam.
1006; ref. to preceding rel.
1080; τοῦτο μέν... τοῦτο 341010; |
ταῦτα and τοῦτο as adv. accus.
1060; οὑτοσί 412.
οὕτως and οὕτω 63, 436.
οὐχ: sce οὐ.
ὀφείλω (όφελ-), OWE, 598; ὥφελον
in wishes 14022, 1512. ;
ὀφέλλω, increase, 598.
opAdAw, owe (Hom. = ὀφείλω) 598,
598; impf. dpeddrpgov in wishes
1012.
ὄφελος 280.
ὀφθαλμιάω 8083.
ὀφλισκάνω W. gen. 1122.
INDEX. 425
ὄφρα, as final part. 1362, 1365,
1366, 1368; sometimes w. κέ or
ἄν 1367, 12997; weil 1463.
Se w. ἐστί or ἣν 8978,
‘ ὄψομαι (opdw), ὄψει 625.
-ow, denom, verbs in 8615; inf. of
contr. forms 492.
-ow, etc., supposed Hom. form of
vbs. in aw 7842; Hom. fut. in
bw (for dow, dw, ὦ) 7847.
II, smooth mute 21; labial 16;
surd 24; euphon. changes, see
Labials; w. o forms Ψ 74; ch.
to ¢ in 2 perf. 692.
παίζω, double stem 590.
παῖς, nom. of 209! ; voc. sing. 221!;
accent of gen., du., and pl. 128.
πάλαι w. pres., incl. perf. 1255.
πάλιν, before o in compos. 82.
πάλλω, πέπαλον 534.
: πᾶν before o in compos. 82.
| πάντοθεν 3025,
πάρ (Honi.) for παρά 53.
παρά Ww, gel., dat., and acc, 1213;
as adv. 12217; in compos., w.
acc, 1227; w. dat. 1179.
πάρα for πάρεστι 1167, 1224.
παρανομέω, auginent of 543.
παρασκενάζω, impers. παρεσκεύ-
ασται, παρεσκεύαστο S974, 12403;
παρεσκενάδαται 7175,
παρα-στὰ 7505,
πάρειμι w. dat. 1179.
πάρος w. intin. 1474.
πᾶς declined 329; w. article 979;
ace. of gen. and dat. pl. 123,
331),
πάσχω 617, 621; τί πάθω; 15307;
τί παθών; 1566.
πατήρ declinea 274.
παύω and παύομαι w. partic. 1580.
j πείϑω 572; pf. and plpf. mid. in-
flected 4871, 4891; πέπιθον 534;
πέποιθα 31, 642}.
426
πείθομαι, obey, w. dat. 1160.
πειθώ declined 243; only sing. 289.
πεινάω, contraction of 496,
Tlapatets dec]. 267.
πειράομαν and πειράω w. gen. 1099;
Ww. ὅπως aud obj. cl. (Hom.) 1377.
πείρω, pf. and plpf. mid. 4908.
πέλας Ww. gen. 1149.
πέμπω, pf. pass. 77, 490];
πομπὴν 1051.
πένης compar. 361.
πέπαυσο, pt. imper. 750.
πέπτω 583: sce πέσσω.
πέρ, enclit. 141%; w. partie. 1573.
πέραν W. gen. 1148,
πέρας declined 225, 2372.
πέρθω, ἔπραϑον 646, 649.
περί W. gen., dat., and acc. 1214
as ady. 12221; in compos. w.
dat. 1179; w. numerals as sub-
ject 906 ; not elided in Attic 50;
πέρι 116),
περιγίγνομαι Ww. gen. 1120.
Περικλέης, Περικλῆς. declined 231.
περιοράω W. partic. 1585.
περιπίπτω w. dat. 1179.
πέσσω (mer-) O83; pf. pass.
490). ‘
πέμπειν
οἵ
πέτομαι, 2 aor. nid. 677; 2 ἃ. act.
of we-form 799,
πὴ 436,
ay, indef. 436; enclitic 1412.
Πηλείδης (Hom. -εἰδης) 8463.
πηλίκος 429.
πηνίκα 490,
πῆχυς declined 250, 250,
πίμπλημι {πλα-), redupl. 7942; w
inserted μ 795; inflection
ἐπλήμην 8033.
πίμπρημι (rpa-), redupl. 7042; w.
inserted μ 795.
πίνω 621; fut. 667; πῖθι 799, 755);
τὸς gen. 1097).
πίπτω 652);
4901,
of |
fut. 666; perf. mid.,
GREEK INDEX.
πιστεύω w. dative 1160.
πίσυρες (Hom.) for τέσσαρες 377.
πλακόεις, πλακοῦς, contraction of
332.
| Πλαταιᾶσι 296.
πλεῖν (for πλέον) 1156,
πλείων Or πλέων, πλεῖστος 9618,
πλέκω, pf. and plpf. mid. inflected
4871, 4891,
πλέον without 7 1156.
πλέω (πλυ-), 2d class 574; con-
traction of 495; fut. 660 ; πλεῖν
θάλασσαν 1057.
πλέως, declension of 309.
πλὴν W. gen. 1220.
πλησιάζω w. dat. 1178.
πλησίον w. gen. 1149.
;| πλήσσω, ἐπλάγην (iu comp.) 713.
πλύνω 047,
| πνέω (πνυ-). 2d class 574 ; fut. 000,
[πόθεν 436.
| ποθέν 486; enclitic 1412,
[πόϑι and ποϑέ $393, 1412.
| ποῖ 436.
| wot, indef. 436; cnclitie 141%
| ποιέω w. two accus, 1073; w. partic.
1565® ; εὖ and κακῶς ποιῶ 1074.
| ποῖος, ποιὸς 120.
ιπολεμέω, πολεμίζω w. Gat. 1177;
disting. from πολεμόω 807.
| πόλις declined 250; Ion. forms 256
| πολλός, Ion. = πολύς 347.
; πολύς declincd 846; lon. forrs 347 ;
compared 361; οἱ πολλοί and τὸ
πολύ 967; πολύ and πολλά as
adv. 867 ; πολλῷ w. comp. 1184;
πολλοῦ Set and οὐδὲ πολλοῦ dec
1116¢; ἐπὲ πολύ 12105,
| | πομπὴν πέμπειν 1001.
| πόρρω or πρόσω w. yen. 1149.
[Ποσειδάων, Ποσειδῶν, accus. 217:
vac. 1224, 2212,
Ι πόσος, ποσός 420).
ποταμός after proper noun 970.
[ἰπόξε 436.
GREEK
ποτέ, indef. 456 ; enclitic 1412.
πότερος, πότερος (O! -ρός) 429.
πότερον OF πότερα, interrog. 1606.
ποῦ 435; w. part. gen. 1092,
πού, indef, 436 ; enclitic 1412.
πούς, nom. sing. 210! ; compounds
of 349.
πράγματα, omitted after article
953.
πρᾷος declined 346; two stems of
3485 rpdvs and πρηὺς 348.
πράσσω (mpay-), 2d perf. 692, 693;
seldoiu w. two accus, 1075; w. |
ὅπως and obj. cl. 1872; εὖ and}
κακῶς πράσσω 1075.
πρέπει, impers. 898.
πρεσβευτής, πρεσβύτης,
291.
πρεσβεύω, denom. verb 8614; πρε-
o Bevery εἰρήνην 1055),
πρηΐς (epic) 348,
πρίν Ww. infin. and indic. 1469; w.
infin, 1470, 1471); w. indic., :
subj., and opt. 14712; w. subj.
without ἄν 1473 ; πρὶν ἡ 1474,
πρίωμαι and πριαίμην, accent of
τοῦ, 742.
πρὸ W. gen. 1215; not elided 80; :
compared 863; contracted w. j
augment 541, or w. foll. € or ὁ
8742; φροῦδος and φρουρός 93.
πρὸ τοῦ oF προτοῦ 084.
προῖκα, gratis, as adv. 1060.
πρόκειμαι W. gen, 1132.
πρόοιτο, etc. 741, 8102, Sce type.
πρὸς Ww. fell., dat., and acc. 1216;
as adv., besides 1222). }
προσδεχομένῳ pol ἐστιν 1584.
προσήκει, inipers, 898 ; w. en. and
dat. 10972, 1161; προσῆκον, acc.
abs. 1562.
πρόσθεν w. gen. 1148.
προσταχθέν (acc. abs.) 1569,
πρέσβυς |
πρόσω W. ven. 1149; ἱέναι τοῦ πρόσω
1188.
INDEX. 4
προσῳδία 107).
πρότερος 363; πρότερον 7 (like πρὶν
ἢ) 1474.
προτοῦ 984.
προὔργον and προὔχω 8747.
πρώτιστος 363.
πρῶτος 363; τὸ πρῶτον OY πρῶτον,
αἱ first 1060.
Πυθοῖ 296.
πυνθάνομαι ἵν. acc. and gen. 1103;
w. partic. 1088,
πῦρ, gen. wip-os 211; plur. 291.
πώ, indef. 436; enclitic 1412
πῶς 436.
πώς, indef. 436 ; enclitic 1412,
P, liquid and semivowel 20; sonant
24; 6 at beginning of word 15;
can end a word 25; pp after
syll. augm. and in comp. after
vowel 69, 513; μβρ for pp 66.
pa, enclitic 141".
ῥᾷδιος compared 3619.
ῥαίνω 610.
‘Papvots 332.
ῥᾷων, ῥᾷστος 3019.
ῥέω (pu-) 514.
ῥήγνυμι (ῥαγ-), 2 pf. ἔρρωγα 689,
ῥηίδιος, ῥηίτερος, etc. 8619.
ῥιγόω, infin. and opt. of 497, 738,
pls, nose, declined 225.
' .poos, adject. in, decl. of 2982,
-pos, adject. in 855.
Z, two forms 2; spirant or sibi-
laut 20, semivowel 20, aud surd
24, can end word 25 ; after mutes
found only in — and y 74; ν be-
fore σ 788, 80; linguals changed
wo o before a lingual 71; orig. 8
changed to aspirate 86; dropped
before a vowel, in stems in er
and ag 88!, 226, 227, in σαι and
fo 887, 505°, 7772, 7852; dropped
in liquid aor. 89, 672; added to
428 GREEK
some vowel stems 640, 8307;
doubled, after 5}}}. augm. (Hom.) !
514, in fut. and aor. (Hom.) 7777; |
movable in οὕτως and ἐξ 63;!
dropped in ἔχω and ἴσχω (for
σεχω and σισεχω) 539 (see Cat.
of Verbs). ;
~s as ending of nom. sing. 167, 209. |
-oa-, tevse suffix of 1 aor. 5613,
-σα in fem. of adj. and partic. 78°,
842, \
-σαι and -oo in 2d pers. sing. 552,
drop σ in vbs. in w 5658, uot in }
most pc-forms 564°; «σαι elided |
51.
σάλπιγξ declined 225.
-σαν, 3d pers, plur. 552, 5643, 565%,
Σαπφώ declined 245.
σαυτοῦ 401, 993.
σβέννυμι, 2d aor, ἔσβην 803!,
σέ 384, 8981,
-σε, local ending 294,
σεαντοῦ 401, 993.
σείει Without subject 8975,
σεῖο, σέϑεν 393),
-σείω, desideratives in 868,
σεμνός compared 350.
σέο, σεῦ 3991,
σεύω (ov-), 24 class 574; 2. aor. m.
800.
-7éw, σῶ, Doric future in 7776,
σεωντοῦ (Hats) 403.
-78a, chiefly Hom. ending 550);
in 2 pers. sing, subj. act. 780;
in indic. of vbs. in yc 7874,
εσϑαι (-601) 554; elided 51. I
“σϑᾶν, Dor. ending for -σθην 777).
σθον and -σϑην in 2 and 3 p. dual
552; «“σθον for -σθην in 3 pers.
5583,
“σι in 2 Ὁ. sing. (in ἐσσέ) 5561; in
3 pers, 552, 564!.
-ov in dat. pl. 167, 224, 2862; -ἰσι
167, 169, 190. :
-ot as locative ending 296.
(
INDEX.
«σι (for -vri, -vor) in 3 p. pl. 6568,
788,
-στᾶ, fein, nouns in 834,
-oipos, adject. in 858,
“σις, fern, nouns in 834.
σῖτος aud σῖτα 288.
σκεδάνννμι, flit. of (-dow, «ὦ) 665°,
σκέλλω, ἀπο-σκλῆναι 803".
-σκον, -σκομην, Ion. iterative end-
ings 778; w. ἄν 1298.
σκοπέω w. ὅπως and fut. ind. 13622,
1372,
σκότος, declension of 287!.
σμάω, contraction of 496.
-vo in 2 pers. sing. 552, 565°, 564° ;
bee -σαι.
-c%-, tense suffix in future aud
fut. pf. 661).
σόος: SEE σῶς.
σορός, fein, 194],
σός, poss. pron, 406, 998.
σοφός declived 299.
σπένξδω, σπείσω 79; eupli. changes
in pf, and plpf, mid. 490°,
σπεύδω and σπουδή 31,
σποδός, fem. 194).
σπουδή and σπεύδω 31,
oo = 77 68%, 580-582.
-στὰ (in comp.) for στῆθι 755%,
στείβω 572; pi. mid. 642%,
στέλλω 593; pf. and plpf. mid. in-
flected 487),
στίχος: κατὰ στίχον 1649.
στοχάζομαι w. gen. 1090,
στρατηγέω w. gen. 1109,
στρέφω 646, 708, 714.
ἐσύ declined 389; Hom. and Hat.
393!; gen. omitted 896.
συγγενής w.gen. 1344; w. dat. 1175,
συγγιγνώσκω Μ΄, partic. (nom. or
dat.) 1590; w. gen. 1126.
συμβαίνει, impers. 898.
σύν or ξύν, w, dat, 1217; in compos.
1179; becomes cue- or ov- in
compos. 81].
GREEK
συνελόντι (Or ὡς συνελόντι) εἰπεῖν |
11722,
-σύνη, nouns in 842.
συνίημι w. acc, 1104; w. gen, 1102.
σύνοιδα w. partic. (nom. or dat.)
1590.
συντρίβω w. gen. 1098.
σφέ 8931), 394; enclit. 141},
σφέα 3932; σφέας, σφέων 3θ8); en-
clit. 141),
σφέτερος 406.
σφίν or σφί 398, 394; σφίν (not
opt) in ‘Trag. 392.
σφίσι, not enclitic in Attic prose
1444.
σφός for σφέτερος 407.
σφώ, σφώϊ, εἰς., σφωέ, σῷῴφωϊΐν 3981,
odutrepes 407.
σφῶν αὐτῶν etc. 401.
σχές and σχοίην (of ἔχω) 755%,
799, 735.
Σωκράτης, decl. of 228; acc. 2380;
voc, 122¢, 228,
σῶμα declined 225; nom. formed
209%; dat. pl. 224.
σῶς (Hom. dos) 309,
σωτήρ, νος. σῶτερ 1222, 2217,
σώφρων compared 354.
T, smooth mute 21; lingual 16, 22;
surd 24; euphon. chauges: see
Linguals; »7 dropped before a |
79.
«τὰ (Hom.) for -rys in nom. of!
| -τέος. verbal adj. in 776; passive
first dec]. 188°.
τὰ and ταῖν (dual of 6), rare 388.
-rat in 3 pers. sing. 552; elided 51.
τάλας, adj., decl. of 324; nom. οἱ
; τέρας declined 2873,
2102,
τἄλλα (τὰ ἄλλαν) 432, 119.
-τὰν, Doric ending for -τὴν 771].
τἂν (τοι dy) 44.
τἄνδρί 44.
τἄρα 44.
ταράσσω, pf. mid. 4903,
INDEX. 429
«τατος, superl. in 350.
ravrd, ταὐτό, ταὐτόν, ταὐτοῦ 400.
ταύτῃ, adv. 436, 1198.
ταφ- for θαφ- (θάπτω) 90,
τάχα w. ἄν (τάχ᾽ ἄν) 1816.
ταχύς compared 357, 955; τὴν
ταχίστην 1060.
[ τάων (= τῶ») 388.
τέ (enclitic), Doric for σέ 388.
τέ, and, enclitic 1414; w. relatives
1024; w. οἷος 1024.
τεθάφθαι 955,
τεθνεώς 778.
τεθνήξω, fut. pf. act. of θνήσκω 705.
τεθράφθαι 955.
retv (lon. = σοί) 393.
τειχομαχία 872.
τείνω, drops ν 647, 711.
-resipa, fem. nouns in 8332,
τεκών aS noun 1561.
τελευτῶν, finally, 1564.
τελέω, future in ὦ, οὔμαι 665! ; pf.
and plpf. mid. inflected 487%,
4892,
τέλος, finally, adv. acc. 1060.
Ἰπτέμνω 603; 2 aor. 646, 676.
τέο, τεῦ, τέος, τεῦς, τεοῦ (= σοῦ)
398,
τέο, τεῦ (= τοῦ for τίνος Or τινός),
τέῳ, τέων, τέοισι 4183,
-réov, verbal δα]. in 776; impers.,
w. subj. in dat. or acc, 1697;
sometimes plural 1597; Latin
equivalent of 1599.
1595; Lat. equiv. 1599,
τεὸς, Doric and <Aeolic (= σός)
407.
τέρην, deci, of 325; fem. of 326.
-repos, comparative in 350.
[τέρπω, 2 aor. w. stem rapr- 646;
redupl, 534.
τέσσαρες (or rerr-), Ion. réocepes,
etc., declined 375.
480 GREEK
τετραίνω 610; aor. 673,
τέτρασι (dat.) 377.
τεύχω 572, 6427,
Τέως, accus. of 199.
τῇ, τῇδε 436, 1198,
τηλίκος, τηλικοῦτος, etc. 429.
-τὴν in 3 pers. dual 552; for -rov
in 2 pers. 556%. See -r8ov and
-σθην.
τηνίκα,͵ τηνικάδε, τηνικαῦτα 436,
-Thp, masc. nouns in 833!; syncop.
278.
«τήριον, nouns of place in 843);
adj. in 855.
-τῆς, Masc. nouns in 833!, 841;
fem. (denom.) in 842.
τῇσι and τῇς (= rails) 388,
76 for 66 68),
-τι, adverbs in 860,
-τι, ending of 3 pers. sing. (Doric)
552, 5561, 777); in ἐστί 556),
τίθημι, Synopsis 504, 509; inflec
tion of wi-forms 506; redupl. in
pres. 651, 7942; imperf. 630;
aor. in κα and κάμην 670, 8022;
opt. mid. in -olunvy and accent
741; θεῖναι 767, 8021; partic. τιθείς
declined 335.
-τικος, adj. in 8013,
τίκτω (Tex-) 652).
τιμάω, denom. verb 861!; stem
and root of 1538; inflect. of contr.
forms 492; synopsis of 494;
infin, 39%, 761; partic. τιμάων,
τιμῶν declined 340; w. gen. of
value 1133; τιμᾶν τινέ τινος and
τιμᾶσθαί τινος 1133,
«ιμή declined 17].
τιμήεις, τιμῆς, Contraction of 332.
τιμωρέω and τιμωρέομαι 1246; w.
acc. and dat. 1163,
τίν, Doric (= σοί) 398.
τίς, interrog. 430; declined 415,
416; accent 129, 418!; Ion.
forms 418?; subst. or adj. 1011;
INDEX.
in direct and ind. questions
1012, 1600.
τὶς, indef. 430; declined 415, 416;
accent 141°, 418!; Ion. forms
4183. subst. or adj. 1015!; like
πᾶς τις 1017.
-τις, fem. nouns in 834, 841, 8482,
ir(w, stein and root of 153.
| +%-, verb suffix 576.
τόθεν 436.
rol, enclitic 1414,
rol, ral, art. = οἱ, αἱ 388,
, τοί, Ion. and Dor. (=¢0) 393, 398.
: τοῖος, τοιόσδε, τοιοῦτος 429.
τοΐσδεσσι or τοΐσδεσι (= τοῖσδε)
388,
τοιοῦτος, τοσοῦτος, etc., w. article
947; position 976.
[τόλμα 174.
. Tov Kal τόν etc, 984.
|-rov, in 2 and 8 p. dual 552; for
«τὴν in 8 pers. (Hom.) 5568, See
“THY.
τος, verb. adj. in 776,
τόσος, τοσόσϑε, τοσοῦτος 420; το-
σούτῳ w. compar. 1184,
τότε 436; w. art. 952.
τοῦ for τίνος, rou for τινός 410,
τοὐναντίον (by crasis) 44.
τοὔνομα 44.
! -τρᾶ, fem. nouns in 889.
τοντέων (Hdt.), fem. 418,
τοντογί, τοντοδί 412.
τρεῖς, τρία, declined 375.
,τρέπω, ¢ ch. to a 646; aor. pass.
708; six aorists of 714.
τρέφοιν, opt. 736.
τρέφω, τρέχω, aspirates in 985,
Ἴ08.
τριᾶ, fem. nouns in 8932,
τρίβω, perf. and plpf. mid. in-
flected 4871, 4891,
τριήκοντα (Ion.) 874.
τριήρης, declined 234, 235; accent
235, 122¢,
GREEK
τριπλάσιος W. gen, 1154,
-rpis, fem. nouns in 8382,
τρίτατος 374.
τρίτον ἔτος τουτί, etc. 1064.
τριχ-ός, Gen. οἱ θρίξ 225, 955,
-τρον, neut. nouns in 888,
τρόπον, adv, accus. 1060.
τρύχω, τρνυχώσω 659.
τρώγω (rpay-) 573.
Tpws, accent 128.
rr, later Attic for co 68%,
tt, Dor. for ov and σέ 398.
τυγχάνω (rux-) 605, 611; w. gen.
1099; Ww. partic. 1586; τυχόν
(ace. abs.) 1569,
τύνη, Ton. (= σύ) 393).
τύπτω W. cogn. accus. 1051.
τυραννέω w. gen. 1109,
τῷ for τίνι, and τῳ for τινὶ 416,
τῷ, therefore (Hot.) 984.
-Twp, wasc. nouns in 833),
Tas for οὕτως 436, 438.
Y, close vowel 5, 6; name of 4;
initial v always ὑ in Att. 145;
rarely contr, w. foll. vow. 40); ;
length. to v 29, 30; interch. We)
ev (sometimes ov) 31. 4
ὑγιής, contraction of 315.
-v8ptoy, diminutives in 844.
ὕδωρ, declension of 291.
ὕει, impers, 8976 ; ὕοντος (gen. abs.)
1568 (end).
vs, diphthong 7.
-via in pf. part. fem. 3372,
vids, decl. 291 ; om. after art. 953.
μας. ὕμιν, ὑμάς, ὑμίν 396.
bpd, ὑμές 398.
ὕμμες, ὕμμι, ὕμμε, etc. (Aeol.) 393.
ὑμός for ὑμέτερος 407,
-vvw, denom. verbs in 8618, 862,
596.
ὑπέρ w. gen. and acc. 1218; in
conlpos, w. gen, 1192.
ὑπερέχω w. gen. 1120,
INDEX. 431
ὑπήκοος τ΄, gen. 1140,
ὑπό w. gen., dat., and acc, 1219;
in comp. w. dat. 1179.
ὑπόκειμαι w. dative 1179.
ὑποπτεύω, augment of 643.
ὕποχος w. dative 1174.
-us, adjectives in 8492.
ὑστεραίᾳ (86. ἡμέρᾳ) 1192.
ὑστερίζω w. gen. 1120,
ὕστερον ἤ (once) w. infin. 1474.
ὕστερος W. gen. 1154; ὑστέρῳ χρόνῳ
1194.
ὑφαίνω, pf. and plpf. mid. 648, 700.
ὦ, rough mute 21, labial 16, 22,
surd 24; not doubled 68!; eu-
phonic changes: see Labials.
φαίνω, synopsis of 478; meaning
of certain tenses 479; fut. and:
1 aor. act. aud mid. and 2 aor.
and 2 fut. pass. inflected 482;
perf. mid. 18. 4872, 4802; for-
mation of pres. 694; of fut. act.
663; of aor. act. 672; of pf. act.
and mid. 648, 700, 83 ; of 2 perf.
644; copul. vb. 907, 908; w.
partic. 1588,
φανερός εἰμι w. partic. 1589.
φάος (φῶτ) 211.
φείδομαι, πεφιδέσθαι 534; w. gen.
1102.
φέρε, come, w.
1345.
φέρτερος, φέρτατος, φέριστος 361).
Φέρω 621; aor. in -a 671; φέρων,
φερόμενος 1564, 1565. See φέρε.
φεύγω 572; fut. 666; 2 perf. 31,
687.
φημί, inflected 812; dial. forms
813; w. infin. of indir. disc.
1523 ; οὔ φημι 13832.
φθάνω 603; ἔφθην 799; w. partic.
1586.
φθείρω 596; fut. 663, 668; aor. 672,
φθονέω w. gen, and dat. 1126, 1160.
imper, and subj.
452 GREEK
φθίνω 603; 2 aor. ἐφθίμην 800!;
φθίμην (opt.) 789,
τῷι or τφιν, epic ending 297.
φιλαίτερος, φιλαίτατος 36}10,
φιλέω, φιλῶ, inflect. of contr.
forms 492; synopsis of 494;
part. φιλέων, φιλῶν, declined
340.
φίλος compared 361),
φλέψ declined 328,
φλεγέθω 779.
φοβέω and φόβος (ἐστί) w. μή
1378-1380.
Φοῖνιξ 210.
dovdw, desiderative verb 868,
dople, inf. φορήμεναι and φορῆναι
7858.
pdf 585; pf. and pipf. mid. 4908;
πέφραδον 534.
φρήν, accent of compounds of (in
-φρων) 122%,
φροντίζω w. ὅπως and obj. cl. 1372 ;
w. μή and subj. or opt. 1378.
φροντιστής w. obj. accus. 1050,
φροῦδος and φρουρός 8742, 93.
ᾧυγάς, adj. of one ending 343.
φύλαξ declined 225.
᾿
φυλάσσω or φυλάττω 580; act. and |
mid. 1246.
iw, 2 aor. ἔφυν 799, 504-506.
φῶς (φόως), nom. of 211; accent
of gen, du. and pl. 128.
X, rough mute 21, palatal 16, 22,
surd 24; not doubled 681; eu-
phonic changes: see Palatals.
χαὶ (καὲ al) and χοὶ (καὶ oi) 44.
χαίρω, fut. perf. (Hom.) 705; w.
partic. 1580 ; χαέρων 1564.
Χαλεπαίνω w. dative 1159, 1160.
χαρίεις declined 829, 331; com-
pared 355; dat. pl. 74.
χαρίζομαι w. dative 1160.
χάρις, nom. sing. 2091; acc. sing.
2148; χάριν (adv.) 1000,
INDEX,
χειμῶνος, gen. of time 1136.
χείρ declined 291,
χείρων (xepelwr), χείριστος 3612,
χελιδών, declension of 248.
χέω (xu-), pres. 574; fut. 667;
; aor. 671; 2a. m, 800],
χοὶ (καὶ oi) 44.
χοῦς, declension of 272.
χράομαι w. dat, 1183; w. dat. and
cogn. acc. 1183; χρώμενος, with
1565.
χράω, contraction of 496; length.
a to ἡ 688.
χρή 898; w. infin, as subject 898.
χρῆν or ἐχρῆν, potential without
ἄν 1400.
χρήσιμος Μ΄. dative 1174.
χρήστης, accent of gen. pl. 126.
χρύσεος, χρυσοῦς declined 310;
irreg. contr. 39! ; accent 311.
χώρα declined 171; gen. sing. 178.
χωρίς w. gen. 1148.
YW, double consonant 18, surd 24;
can end word 26; redupl. before
523.
ψάμμος, fem. 194),
pau, contraction of 496.
'whé for σφέ 398,
1 ψεύδομαι w, gen. 1117,
i ψήφισμα νικᾶν 1052.
ἐψῆφος, fem. 194.
'Q, open long vowe} 5,6; name of
4; length. from o 29; interch.
' πῇ ἢ and ἃ 31; fore in stem of
Au. 2 decl, 19653 nouns in ὦ of
| 8 decl. 242; voc. sing. of in of
246,
1 τῷ Or τῶν in acc. sing. 199,
τῷ, verbs in 407,
1g, improper diphthong 7, 10; by
aug. for οἱ 518; in dat. sing.
: 190, 167; in nom. sing. 246.
ὦ, interjection w. voc. 1044.
GREEK
ὧδε 436, 1005.
-“Jq-, thematic vowel of subj. 5612.
-wpt, verbs in 502),
των, masc, denom. in 8437; primi-
tives in $40; nouns of place in
843 ; adj. in, compared 354.
τῶν in gen. plur. 167; -d» for τέων
in 1 decl, 169, 124.
wv, partic. of εἰμί 806 ;
129,
ὠνητός w. gen. of price 1188.
dpa (ἐστί) w. infin. 1521; ὥρᾳ w.
gen., as dat. of time 1194.
«ὡς, nouns in (Att. 2 decl.) 196;
nouns of 3 decl, in 238-241, 243 ;
in gen. sing. 249, 265, 269; in
acc, pl. (Dor.) 2044 ; adj. in 305 ;
pf. part. in 335; adverbs in 365.
és, proclitic 187; accented (ws)
138; rel. adv. 436; w. partic.
1574, 1593; in wishes w. opt.
INDEX. 433
1509; in indir. quot. 1476;
causal 1505; as final particle
1862, 13865, 1868, sometimes w.
ἄν or κέ 1367; rarely w. fut.
indic. 1866; w. past tenses of
indic. 1871; like wore w. infin.
1456; ν΄. absol. infin, 1634.
ὡς, as prepos. (to) w. accus, 1220,
accent of | ὥς, thus 436; accent 1885,
-wor for τωνσι 5612, 788,
ὥσπερ w. partic. in comparisons
1576; w. acc. absol. of personal
vbs. 1570; ὥσπερ av εἰ 1313;
accent 146,
ὥστε w. infin. and indic. 1449,
1450 ; two constr. disting, 1450,
1451; negative 1451; w. other
constructions 1454; accent 146.
ov, Ionic diphthong 7.
ωὐτός, wités. τωὐτό, Ionic 397.
ὠχριάω 8682,
ENGLISH INDEX.
N.B.~—See note on p. 408.
a Ve
Ability or fitness, verbal
denoting 851.
Ablative, functions of in Greek
1942.
Absolute case: gen. 1152, 1568;
accus. 1569,
Abstract nouns, in compos. 879,
880; w. art, 944; veut. adj. or
partic. w. art. for 933, 934.
Abuse, vbs. expr., w. dat. 1160.
Acatalectic verses 1639,
Accent, gen. principles of 106-
115; nature of 107; kinds of
106; recessive 110*; of nouns
and adj. 121-129; of gen. and
dat. sing., of oxytones 123; of
Att. 2 decl. 125; of gen. and
dat. of monosyll. of 3 decl. 127;
of gen. pl. (in ὧν) of 1 decl.
124; of verbs 180-185; of par-
tic. 184;, οὗ opt. in ac and οι;
113; of contracted syll. (incl. |
crasis and elisiou) 117-120; en-
clitics 142; proclitics 186, 1434.
Accent and ictus in verse 1625.
Accoinpaniment, dat. of 1189; °
w. dat. of αὐτός 1191. ;
Accusative case 160-163; sing. of |
3d devil. 214~218; contracted ace.
and nom. pl. alike in 3d decl.
2083; subj. of infin, 895; after)
prepos. 1201 ff., in compos, 1227; |
acc. absol. 1569; rarely w. par-
tic. of personal verbs 1570; in
appos. w. sentence 918; infin.
as accus. 1518; accus. of object
retained w. passive 12389. Other
434
adj, j
syntax of accus. 1047~1082: see
Contents, p. xv.
Accusing, vbs. of, w. gen. 1121;
comp. of κατά w, acc. and gen.
1123,
! Achaeans, p. 3.
Acknowledge, vbs. signif. to, w.
partic. 1588.
Action, suffixes denoting 834, 835.
Active voice 441, 1230; personal
endings of 552-554; form of,
incl, most intrans. vbs. 1231;
object of, as subj. of pass. 1234.
Acute accent 106; of oxytone
changed to grave 115.
Addressing, voc, iu 1044; nom.
in 1045.
Adjectives, formation of 849~858 ;
inflection 298-849 ; see Contents,
Ὁ. xi; comparison of 800-364;
agreement w. nouns 918; at-
tributive and pred. 919; pred,
adj. w. copulative verb 907; re-
ferring to omitted subj. of infin.
927, 928; used as noun 932,
933 ; verbal, w. gen. 1139-1146,
w. accus. 1030; verbal in tos
776, in τέος and réov 776, 1504~
1599; used for adverb 926,
Admire, vbs. signif. to, w. gen.
1102; w. causal gen. 1126.
Adonic verse 1682],
Advantage or disadv., dat. of 1165.
Adverbial accus. 1060.
Adverbs, how formed from adj.
365-367, 859; from stems of
nouus or verbs 860; from par-
ENGLISH INDEX.
435
tic. 366; comparison of 369-| Anastrophe 116.
371; relative 436; local, from] Anceps, syllaba 1636, 16387,
nouns or pron, 292-297; nume-| Anger, vbs. expressing, w. causal
ral 3872; qualify verbs, etc.
gen. 1126; w. dat. 1160.
1228; w. gen. 1147-1151; w.| Antecedent, agreement of rel. w.
dat. 1174, 1175; assim. of rel.
adv, to antec. 1084; w. article ,
for adj. 952.
Advising, vbs, of, w. dat. 1160.
1019; omitted 1026; assim, of
rel, to 1031; of antec. to rel.
1085 ; attraction 1037, w. assiin.
1088; def. and indef. antec. 1426.
Aeolic race, p. 3; dialect, Ὁ. 4, has | Antepenult 96.
ἃ for Attic 7 147; Aeolic forms | Antibacchius 16278,
of aor. opt. in Attic 732, 781; | Antistrophe 1649.
forms of intin. and partic.
782, 783; forms in pe 7872,
Aeolian Greeks, p. 3.
Age, pronom. adj. denoting 429,
Aeschylus, language of, p. 4.
Agent, nouns denoting 835; expr.
after pass. by gen. w. prep.
1234; in poetry without prepos.
1181; by dat. (esp. after pf.
pass.) 1186; w. verbals in réos by j
dat. 1188, 1596; w. verbal in τέον
by dat. or accus. 1188, 1597.
Agreeinent, of verb. w. subj. nom.
899; of pred. w. subj. 907; of
adj. etc. w. noun 918; of adj. w.
nouns of diff. gender or number
924, 924.
Aiu) at, vbs. signif. to, w.
1099,
Alcaics and Alcaic stanza 16825,
Alexandrian period, p. 5.
Alexandrine verse (Engl.) 1662.
gen.
Alpha (sce a) privative 875! ; cop- |
ulative $77.
Alphabet 1; obsolete letters of ὃ;
used as numerals 3, 372, 384.
Anaclasis in Ionic verse 1688",
Anacrusis 1638,
Anapaest 16272; cyclic 1634; in
trochaic verse (apparent) 1650 ;
in fambic verse 1657.
Anapaestic rhythms 1675, 1676;
systems 1677,
781, | Aorist 447; secondary tense 448;
pers. endings 552-554 ; augment
of 513, 515; iter. endings -cxoy
and -oxouny (Ion.) 778. First
aor. act. and mid., tense system
of 456 ; formation of tense stem
669 ; of liquid vbs. 672; in -κα
(or -καμὴν) in three vbs. 670;
Hom. ¢ and o (for η and w) in
subj. 780!; accent of infin. 131",
Second aor. act. and mid., tense
system of 456; formation of
tense system 675, 678; redup!.
(Hoin.) 534; Att. redupl. 504 ;
Homeric mixed aor. w. σ 777®;
pe-forms 678, 679, 798, 709;
Ton. subj. of 788; accent of im-
perat., infin., and part.131. Aor.
pass. (first and second) w. active
endings 5647 ; tense systems of
450; formation of tense stems
707, 712; accent of infin. and
part. 131,
Syntax of aorist. Ind. 12505;
disting. from impf. 1259; of
vbs. denoting a state 1260; as
vivid future 1264; gnomic 1292 ;
iterative 1296. In dependent
words 1271; how disting. from
pres. (not in indir. disc.) 1272;
opt. and infin, in indir. disc.
1280; infin. w. vbs. of hoping,
etc. 1286; in partic. 1288; not
ν
436
past in certain cases 1290. See
Indicative, Subjunctive, etc., for
special constructions.
Aphaeresis δῦ.
Apocope 83.
Apodosis 1381; negative of (ov)
13831; w. past tenses of indic.
w. ἄν 1397; various forms in
cond, sent. 1387; w.
omitted 1329, 13840; repres. by
infin. or partic. 1418, 1419; im-
plied in context 1420; sup-
protasis
ENGLISH INDEX.
cle w. proper names 943; w. de-
monstratives 945), 947, omitted
in trag. 945%; w. possess. O46 ;
w. munerals 948; in posscss,
sense 949; w. adv. etc. used like
adj. 952; w. γῆ, πράγματα, vids,
etc. understood 953; w. infin.
955!, 15162; w. a clause 9352,
1556,
Ashamed, vbs, signif. to be, w.
partic. 1586.
Asking, vbs. of, w. two accus. 1069.
pressed for effect 1416; introd.} Aspirate. w. vowels 11; w. mutes
by δέ 1422. +
Apostrophe (in elision) 48.
Appear, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
1588.
Appoint, vbs. signif. to, w. two
ace. 1077; w. acc. and part. gen. |
|
1095, 10947.
Apposition 911; gen. in appos. w.
possessive 1001, 913; nom. or
21, 92-95 ; avoided in successive
syll, 95; transferred in τρέφω,
θρέψω, etc. 955,
Assimilation of rel. to case of
antec. 1031; w. antec. omitted
1032; in rel, adv. 1084; antec.
rarely assim, to rel. 1035. As-
sim. of cond, rel. cl. to mood of
antec. clause 1439, 1440.
ace. in app. w. sentence 915; Assist, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 1160.
infin. in appos. 1517; partitive | Attain, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1099,
appos. 914.
Approach, vbs. implying, w. dat.
1175.
Argives, p. 8,
Aristophanes, language of, p. 4.
Aristotle, language of, p. 4.
Arsis and thesis 1621; in Latin
(not Greek) sense 1621 (foot
note).
Article, definite, declined 886; τώ
and τοῖν as fem. 388; τοί and
ταί (epic and Doric) 388; pro-
clitic in some forms 137; in
crasis 437; ὁ αὐτός 399, 9892,
Article as pronoun in Hom, 938,
w. adj. or part. 936; in Herod.
989; in lyric and tragic poets
940; Attic prose use 941 ; posi-
tion w, attrib. adj. 959, w. pred.
adj. 071, τὰ. demonstr. 974; as
pronoun in Attic 981-984. Arti--
Attic dialect, p. 4; why basis of
Greek Grammar, p.4. Old Attic
alphabet 27.
Attic 2 decl. 196-200, reduplica-
tion 529, future 665.
Attraction in rel. sent. 1037, joined
w. assim. 1038.
Attributive adjective (opp. to pred-
icate) $19; position of article w.
959, Attributive or possessive
compounds 888.
Augment 466, 510-519, 527, 537-
549: sce Contents, p. xii.
Bacchius 16278; Bacchic rbythins
1690.
Barytones 1105,
Be or become, vbs. signif. to, w.
partit. gen. 10947.
Begin, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1009;
ιν. partic. 1580.
ENGLISH INDEX.
Belonging to, adj. signif, 850.
Beuefit, vos. signif. to, w. dat.
1160.
Blame, ybs. expressing, w.
1160.
Boeotia, Aeolians in, p. 3.
Brachycatalectic verses 1641,
Breathings 11-15; form of 13;
place of 12,
Bucolic diaeresis in Heroic hexam.
1669,
dat.
Caesura 1642.
Call: see Name.
Cardinal numbers 372~374 ; dec].
of 375-38).
Care for, vbs. signif. to, w. gen.
1102.
Cases 160; meaning of 162; ob-
lique 163. Case endings of
nouns 167, Syntax 1042-1198:
see Nominative, Genitive, Da-
tive, etc. and Contents, pp.
xv-xvii.
Catalexis and catalectic verses
1639,
Causal sentences, w. indic. 1505;
w. opt. (ind. disc.) 1506; w.
relat. 1461, 1462.
Cause, expr. by gen, 1126; by dat.
1181; by partic, 15632,
Caution or danger, vbs. of, w. μή
and subj. or opt. 1878,
Cease or cause to cease, vbs. signif,
to, w. partic. 1580.
Choosing, vbs. of, w. two acc.
1077, νυ. acc. and gen, 1096,
10947,
Choriambus, 16274; choriambic
rhythms 1687.
Circumflex accent 106; origin of
1072; on contr, syll. 117.
Circumstantial participle 1563.
Claim, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1099,
10972.
437
' Classes of verbs, eight 568: I. 589,
11. 572, 574, 111. 576, IV. 579-
602, V. 608-612, VI, 618, VII.
019, VIII. 621.
Close vowels 6; stems ending in 206,
Clothing, vbs. of, w. two accus,
1069.
Cognate mutes 23; cognate accus,
1051,
Collective noun, w. plur. verb 900,
w. pl, partic, 920; foll. by pl.
relat, 10214
Collision of vowels, how avoided 34,
Commands or exhortations 1342-
1845, 1852, 1263, 1510; verbs of
coinmanding w. gen. 1109, w.
dat. (Hom.) 1164.
Common Dialect of Greek, p. 5.
Comparative degree 350-371 ; w.
gen. 1153; w. dat. (difference)
1184,
Comparison of adjectives 350-360 ;
irreg. 861, 362; of adverbs 365-
371; of some nouns and pro-
nouns 364.
Comparison, verbs denot., w. gen.
1120.
Compensative lengthening 30, 78%,
79.
Compound words 822. 869-889 ;
first part of 871-877; second
part of 878-882; meaning of
(three classes) 883-888, Com-
pound verbs 882, 889; augment
and redupl. of 540-542; accent
of 182, 133; w. gen., dat., or acc.
1132, 1179, 1227. Compound
negatives 1607; repetition of
1619. Indirect compounds 882? ;
how augmented and redupl. 543-
846.
Concealing, vbs, of, w. two accus,
21069; τ infin. and μή 1615,
1649-1551.
1 Concessions, opt. in 1510.
438 ENGLISH INDEX.
Conclusion: see Apodosis and Con- ‘ Coronis 42, 45.
dition. Correlative pronominal adjectives
Condemning, vbs. of, w. gen.and| 429; adverbs 436.
ace.1121; w.acc.and two gen.1124. | Crasis 42-46 ; examples 44 ; quan-
Condition and conclusion 1881;]. tity of syll. 104'; accent 119.
conditional] sentences 1881~1424; | Cretic 16275; cretic rhythms 1689,
see Contents, p. xx; classifica- | Cyclic anapaests and dactyls 1634,
tion of cond. sent. 13885-1389 ;
general] and particular cond. dis-
ting. 1884; comparison of Latin !
gen. cond, 1388; cond. expr. by |
partic. 1413; see Protasis. Rela-
tive cond, sent. 1428-1441: see
Relative. ‘
Conjugation 151, 464, 467; οἵ]
verbs in w 469-499 ; of verbs in
μι 800-509.
Consonants, divisions of 16-22;
double 18; doubling of 68, 69 ;| Danger, vbs. expr., W. μή and subj,
euphonic changes in 70-95;: | or opt. 1878.
movable 56-63. Consonant verb ! Dative case 160, 1157; endings of
stems 460. Consonant declen-| 167, 169, 190; dat. plur. of 8
sion (Third) 206, deel. 224; syntax of 1158-1198:
Constructio pregnans 1225. see Contents, pp. xvi, xvii.
Continue, verbs signif. to, Ww. par-/ Prepositions w. dat. 120)-3219.
tic. 1580. ! Declension 151; of nouns: first
Contraction $5; rules of 36-41;! 168-188, second 189-204, third
quantity of contr. syll. 104!;! 205-286; of irreg. nouns 287--
accent of‘ contr. syll. 117, 118;| 291; of adjectives: first and
contr. of nouns: Ist decl. 163,| second 298-311, third 312-317,
2d decl. 201, 3d decl. 226-267;) first and third 318-8383 ; of par-
Dacty] 16272; cyclic 1654; in an-
apaestic verse 1675; in iambic
verse (apparent) 1657; in tro-
chaic verse (cyclic) 1650; in
Jogaoedic verse (cyclic) 1679;
in dactylo-epitritic verse 1684.
Dactylic rhythms 1669-1674.
Dactyloepitritic rhytInus 1684 ; in
Pindar 1686.
Danaans, p. 3.
of adject. 310-323; of partic.
840-842 ; of verbs in aw, ew, and
ow 492; in gen. pl. of Ist decl.
170; in aug. and redupl. (ee
to «) 537, 588, 539; in forma-
tion of words 829, 8742, See
Crasis and Sy nizesis.
tic. 334-342 ; of adj. w. one end-
ing 343-345 ; of irrey. adj. 546-
349; of the article 586-388 ; of
pronouns 389-428; of numerals
375. See Contents, pp. x, xi.
Defend, vbs. signif. wo, w. dat.
1100; ἀμύνειν τινί 1168.
Convicting, vbs. of, w. gen. and} Degree of difference, dat. of 1184.
acc, 1121. Demanding, vbs. of, w. two ace.
Co-ordinate and cognate mutes 23., 1069.
Copula 8911. Demes, names of Attic, in dat.
Copulative verbs 908; case of pred. 1197.
Demonstrative pronouns 409 ; syn-
adj. or noun with infin. of 927,
tax of 1004-1010; w. article
928 ; copulative compounds 887. ,
ENGLISH INDEX. 439
945! ; position of 974; distinc-| Diphthongs 7; improper 7, 10, 12;
tions of οὗτος, ὅδε, ἐκεῖνος 1005;| spurious 8, 27, 287; in contrac-
article as demonstr. (Hom.) 935,} tion 87, 58; in crasis 43 ; elision
(Att.) 981-984 ; rel. as demons.; of (poet.) 51; augment of 518,
1023. 519,
Demosthenes, language of, p.4. | Dipody 1646; iambic 1660],
Denominatives 824 ; denom. nouns! Direct object 892; of act. verb
841-848 ; adjectives 851; verbs; 1047. Direct discourse, ques-
861-867. tion, and quotations 1475.
Denying, vbs. of, w. infin, and μή | Disadvantage, dat. of 1165, 1170.
1615, 1551. Disobey, vbs. signif. to, w. dat.
Dependent moods 446; tenses of} 1160.
1271-1287. Displease, vbs. signif. to, w. dat.
Deponent verbs 443; principal; 1160.
parts of 463; passive and mid-j; Displeased, vbs. signif. to be, w.
die deponents 444, partic. 1580.
Deprive, vbs. signif. to, w. acc.| Disputing, vbs. of, w. causal gen.
and gen. 1118; w. two acc. 1069.} 1128,
Desiderative verbs 888. Distich 1649; elegiac 1670.
Desire, vbs. expr., w. gen. 1102. ! Distinction, gen. of 1117.
Despise, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. | Distrusting, vbs. of, w. dat. 1160;
1102, w. infin, and μή 1615.
Determinative compounds 886. ' Dividing, verbs of, w. two ace.
Diaeresis, mark of (")9; inverse] 1076.
1643 ; Bucolic 1669. Dochmius and dochmiacs 1691.
Dialects, p. 4; dialectic changes] Doing, verbs of, w. two acc. 1073,
in letters 147-149; dial. forms ; Dorian Greeks, p. 3.
of nouns 188, 204, 286; of adj.| Doric dialect, p.4; hasa for Attic
322, 332, 347; of numerals 3874; ἡ 147; Doric future (also in
of the article 388; of pronouns} Attic) 666.
393-398, 408, 407, 413, 4162, | Double consonants 18; make po-
418%, 424, 428; of verbs in w — sition 991.
777-783; of contract vbs. 784-- Double negatives 1360, 1361, 1616,
786 ; of vbs. in μι 787-792, 1617. See ot μή and μὴ οὐ.
Digamma or Vau 3; as numeral) Doubtful vowels 5,
372, 384; omission of, seen in| Dual 155; masc. forms used for
inflections 90, 91, 256, 265, 269, fem. 303, 348, 410, 422 ; of verbs,
539, 574, 601, 602; retained in lst. pers. very rare, 6562; -rov
Aeol. and Doric 91; seeuinimetre{ and -σθον for -τὴν and -σθην 556%.
16732.
Dimeter 1646; anapaestic 1676; | Effect, accus. of 1955.
dactylic 16741; iambic 16658;| Elegiac pentameter and distich
trochaic 1653, 1654. 1670.
Diminutives, suffixes of 844; all| Elision 48-54; of diphthongs 51;
neut. 15%. | in compound words δά; περί,
440 ENGLISH
πρό, ὅτι, and dat. in «, etc., not!
elided 50; accent of elided word
120,
Ellipsis of verb w. ἄν 1818; of
protasis 1414 ; of apodosis 14142, |
1416, 1420.
Emotions, vbs. expr., w. gen. 1126.!
Enclitics 140, 141; w. accent if,
emphatic 144; at end of com-:
pounds 146; successive enclit- |
ics 145.
Endings: case-endings of nouns!
167; local 292-297; verbal 551-}
556 ; personal 552, 5538, remarks
on 556.
Endure, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
1380.
Exhort, vbs. signif.to, w. dat. 1160,
Enjoy, vbs. signif. to, w. gen.
10972,
Envy, vbs. expr., w. causal gen,
1126; w, dat. 1160.
Epic dialect, p. 4.
Epicene nouns 158,
Ethical dative 117].
Euphony of vowels 34-03 ; of con-
sonants 70-95.
Eupolidean verse 1682", 1644.
Euripides, language of, p. 4.
Exchange of quantity 33, 200, 265.
Exclamations, nom. iu 1045; voc.
in 1044; gen. in 1129; relatives |
in 1089.
Exhorting, vbs. of, w. dat. 1160.
Exhortatious : see Commands.
Expecting etc., vbs. of, w. fut.,
pres., or aor. infin, 1286.
Extent, accus. of 1062; gen. de-|
noting 10948.
Falling and rising rhythms 1648.
Fearing, verbs of, w. μή and subj.
or opt. 1378; sometimes w. fut.
ind. 1379; w. pres. or past tense
of indic. 1380.
INDEX.
Feet (iu verse) 1620, 1627; ictus,
arsis, aud thesis of 1621.
Feminine nouns 156-159; form in
participles 842, 337; in 2 pf.
partic. (Hom.) 778, 774; femi-
nine caesura 1669.
Festivals, names of, in dat. of
time 1192.
Fill, vbs. signif. to, w. acc. and
gen. 1113.
Final clauses 1362}; w. subj. and
opt. 1865; w. subj. after past
tenses 13860; rarely w. fut. ind.
1866; w. & or xe 1367; w. past
tenses of indic. 13871; neg. μή
1364; final disting. froin object
clauses 1363.
| Find, vbs. signif. to, w. partic
1582.
‘Finite moods 446,
First aorist tense system 456;
form. of tense stem 669, 672.
First passive tense system 456; for-
mation of tense stems 707, 710.
First. perfect tense system 456;
formation of tense stem 698.
Fitaess, etc, verbal adj. denot.,
formation of 851.
Forbidding, vbs. of, w. μή and
infin, 1615, 1549, 1551.
Forgetting, vbs. of, w. gen. 1102;
w. partic. 1588.
Formation of words 822-889: see
Contents, p. ΧΙ, xiv.
‘Friendliness, vbs. expr., w. dat.
1160.
Fulness and want, vbs. expr., w.
gen, 1112, adject. expr. 1140.
See Fill.
i Fulvess, format. of adj. expr. 854.
Future 447, 448; tense system 456,
662-068 ; of liquid verbs 663;
Attic fut. in ὦ and -«οὔμαι 665;
Doric fut. 666, also Attic 666;
passive 710, 715; fut. mid. as
ENGLISH INDEX.
pass, 1248. Fut. indic. express-
ing permission or command
1265; rarely in final clauses
1366; regularly in object clauses
with ὅπως 1372; rarely with μή
after verbs of fearing 1379; in
protasis 1391, 1405; not in rel.
coud. 1435; in rel. clauses ex-
pressing purpose 1442; with ἐφ᾽
@ or ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε 1460; with od μή
1360, 1361; with ἄν (Hom.,
rarely Att.) 1803; periphrastic
fut. with μέλλω 1254; optative !
1287, never w. ἄν 1307; intin.
1276-1278, 1280, 1282, 1286;
partic. 1288.
Future perfect 447, 448; in perf.
mid. tense system 456; tense
stem formed 703; active form
in a few vbs. 705; gen. peri-
phrastic 706; meaning of 704,
1250; as emph. fut. 1266 ; infin.
1283 ; partic, 1284.
Gender 156; natural and gram-
matical 157; graminat. design.
by article 157; common and
epivene 158; general rules 159;
gen. of 1st decl. 168, of 2d decl.
189, 194, of 3d decl. 280-285.
General, disting. from particular
suppositions 1384; forms of
1386, 1887; w. subj. and opt.
1393, 1431; w. indic, 1395, 1432;
in Latin 1588.
Genitive case 160, 162-167 ; of Ist
decl. 169, 170; of 2d decl. 190,
191; of 3d decl. 207. Syntax
10838, 1084-1156: see Contents,
p. xv, xvi ; gen. absol. 1152,
1568 ; gen. of infin, w. rod 1546- |
1549.
Gentile nouns, suffixes of 848.
Glyconic verses 1082“.
Gnomic tenses 1291-1295 ; present
441
1291; aorist 1292, 1293; as pri-
mary tense 1268, 1304; τ. πολ-
λάκις, ἤδη, οὕπω, etc. 1293; per-
fect 1295.
Grave accent 107, 108, for acute
in oxywoues 115.
Greece, maodern language of, Ὁ. 5.
Greek language, history of and re-
lations to other languages, pp.
5, 6.
Greeks, why 80 called, p. 3.
Hear, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1102 ;
w. acc. and gen. 1103; w. partic.
1588,
Hellenes and their divisions, p. 3,
of Homer, p. 3.
Helleuistic Greek of New Testa-
ment and Septuagint, p. 5.
Herodotus, dialect of, p. 4.
Heroic hexameter 1660.
Heterogeneous nouns 288.
Hiatus, how avoided 34; allowed
at end of verse 16388,
Hindrance, vbs. of, w. μή and
infin. etc. 1649-1552.
Hippocrates, dialect of, p. 4.
Historic present 1252, 1268.
Historical (or secondary) tenses:
see Secondary.
Hit, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1099.
Homer, dialect of, p. 4; verse of
1669; books of, numbered by
letters 385; Hellenes of, p. 3.
Hoping, etc., vbs. of, w. fut., pres.
or aor. infin. 1286.
Hostility, vbs. expr., w. dat. 1160.
Hypercatalectic verse 1641.
Tambus 16271. Taimbic rhythms
1657-1667 ; tragic and comic
iambic trimeter 1658-1662 ; iam-
bic systems 1666.
Imperative 445; pers. endings of
553 ; common form of 746-751 ;
442
ui-form of 752-756; aor. pass.
757; perf. rare 748, 758, 1274.
In commands etc. 1824, 1842;
in prohib. w. μή (pres.) 1346;
w. ἄγε, φέρε, ἴθι, 1845; after
οἶσθ᾽ 8 1343.
Imperfect tense 447; secondary
448; in present tense system
456; augment of 518, 515; per-
sonal endings 552; inflection of:
common form 626, pi-form 627;
iterat. endings oxoy and σκομὴν
(Ion.) 778. ‘Syntax 12502 ; how
disting. froin aor. 1259; denot-
ing repeated or customary past
action 12532, attempted action
1255; how expr. in infin. and
partic, 1285, 1289, in opt. 1488;
w. ἄν, iterative 13042, 1296, in
unreal conditions 1387, 1397, in|
Hom. 1398; w. ἄν as potential |
1804!, 1335, 1840;
sentences 1433 ; τ wishes 1511;
in final clauses 1371.
Impersonal verbs 898, 12402; par-
tic. of, in accus. abs. 1509 ; im-:
pers. verbal in -τέον 1597.
Imploring, vbs. of, w. gen. 11015.
Inproper diphthongs 7.
Inceptive class of verbs (VJ.) 613.
in rel. cond.
ENGLISH INDEX.
ὅπως and ὅπως μή 1352; w. οὐ μή
(fut.) 1860, 1361; in final clauses:
rarely fut. 1366, second. tenses
1871; in obj. cl. w. ὅπως (fut.)
1372; w. μή after vbs, of fear.
ing, rarely fut. 1879, pres. and
past 1380; in protasis: pres. and
past tenses 1390, in gen. sup-
pos. for subj. 1395, future 1405,
1391, second, teuses in supp.
contr. to fact 1397; in cond. rel.
and temp. clauses 1450, 1433,
by assimilation 1440; second.
tenses w. ἄν 1304, 1339, 1397 ;
in wishes (second. tenses) 1511;
in causal sent. 1505; in rel. sent.
of purpose (fut.) 1442; fut. w.
ἐφ᾽ ᾧ or ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε 1460; ν΄. ἕως
ete. 1464, 1465; w. πρίν 1470,
14712; in indirect quotations
and questions 1487. See Pres-
ent, Future, Aorist, etc.
Indirect compounds (verbs) $822,
. 643, Indirect object of verb 892,
Indirect Discourse
see Contents, pp.
Indir. quotations and
Indir. re-
1157, 1158.
1475-1503 :
xxi, xxdi.
questions 1476-1479.
flexives 987, 988.
Inferiority, vbs. expr., w. gen. 1120.
Inclination, formation of adj. de-: Infinitive 445; endings 454; for-
noting 849+.
Indecliuable nouns 290.
Indefinite pronouns 415, 416, 425 ; |
pronominal adj. 429, 4380; ad-
verbs 456 ; Syntax of 1016-1018.
Indicative 445; personal endings
552; thematic vowel 561; for- .
mation of 564, 565 (see under
special ‘l’enses); tenses of 448, |
449, 1250-1266, primary andj
secondary (or historical) 1267- j
Genera] use of 1818; po- j
1269.
tential w. ἄν 1336-1340; indep.
w. μή or μὴ ov 135],
fut. w. }
mation of 759-769; dial. forms
of 782, 7845, 7854, 791. Syntax
1516-1556: see Contents, pp.
xxii, xxili, Tenses of, not. in
indir. disc. 4271, 1272, 1273,
1275; in indir. disc. 1280-1286,
1494; distinction of the two uses
1495; impf. and plpf. suppl. by
pres. and pf. 1494, 12851; w. ἄν
1308, 1494; w. μέλλω 1254; w.
Sedov in wishes (poet.) 1512,
1513; negative of 1611, 1496;
μὴ of with 1616, 1550, 1052.
Re]. w. infin. 1524.
ENGLISH INDEX.
Inflection 151; of verbs, two forms
563; simple form 564, common
form 568.
Instrument, dat. of 1181; suffixes
denoting 838.
Intensive pronoun 391, 9891]; w.
dat. of accompaniment 1191.
Intention, partic. expr. 1663+.
Interchange of vowels 31, 32; of
quantity 33, 200, 265.
Interrogative pronoun 415, 416,
pron. adj. 429, 430, pron. adv.
436 ; syntax of 1011-10}4. In-
terr. sentences 1600-1606 ; sub-
junctive in 1888, 1359, 1490.
Intrausitive verbs 893, 1231; cog- '
nate object of 1051; verbs both
trans. and intrans. 1232.
Inverted assimilation of relatives
1080.
Ἰοηὶς Greeks, p. 3.
Ionic race and dialect, pp. 3, 4.
Ionic alphabet 27, lonic ἡ for
Attic ἃ 147; εἰ and ov for ε and
o, ni for εἰ 148; omits contrac-
tion and ν movable 149. Tonic
feet 16274; rliythms 1688.
Tota class of verbs (1V.) 579.
lota subscript 10.
Irregular nouns 287-291; adjec-
tives 346-349 ; comparison 361-
364; verbs 621, 634.
Italy, Dorians of, p. 3.
443
euph. ch. of » before 78; labial
verb stems 460, in perf. mid,
4901), 4
Lead, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1109;
w. dat. (Hom.) 1164.
Learn, vbs. signif. to, w. acc, and
gen. 1103; w. partic. 1588.
Lengthening of vowels 29; com-
pensative 30.
Letters 1; names of 1,4; used for
nuwmbers 384, 385.
Likeness, dat. of 1175; abridged
expr. w. adj. of 1178.
'Linguals 16; lingual mutes 22;
euphon. changes of 71-74; » w.
ling. dropped bef. σ 79; ling.
verb stems 460, 4908.
Liquids 20; » before 782, w. ¢ (j)
in stems 8446; vowel bef. mute
and liquid 100-102. Liquid verb
stems 460, 592; in perf. mid.
49044 ; fut. of 663; aorist of
672; change of ε to a in mono-
syll. 648.
Local endings 292-297.
Locative case 296, 1042, 1157.
Logaoedic rhythms 1679-1683.
Long vowels 5, 98-103; how aug-
mented 516. |
Make, vbs. signif. to, w. two acc.
1077; w. ace. and gen. 1095, in
_ Pass. w. gen. 10947, 1096.
Iterative imperf. and aorist w.j Manner, dative of 1181, w. com-
ἄν 1296. Iterative forms in oxov,
σκόμην (Ion.) 1298, 778, w. ἄν
1298.
Ithyphallic verse 1653).
Know, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
1588.
Koppa 3; as numeral 372, 384.
Labials 16; labial mutes 21, 22;
euphonic changes of 71-76;
par. 1184; partic. of 15638,
Masculine nouns 159. See Gender.
Material, adj. denoting 852; gen.
of 10854.
Means, dative of 1181; partic. of
15633; suffixes denoting 838,
839.
Measure, gen. of 10855,
Metathesis 64, 66, 636, 649.
Metre 1622; related to rhythm
1623.
444
Mi-forms 468, 500, 601; enumera-
tion of 793-804.
Middle mutes 21; not doubled 082,
Middle voice 442', 1242; endings
of 552-556 ; three uses of 1242;
in causative sense 1245; pecul-
lar meaning of fut. in pass.
sense 1248. ᾿
Miss, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1099,
Mixed class of verbs (VILL.) 621;
mixed forms of conditional sen-
tence 1421; mixed aor. 7778,
Modern Greek, p. 5.
Molossus 16274,
Monometer 1646.
Moods 445; finite 446 ; dependent
446; general uses of 1317-1324 ; |
constructions of (I.-X.) 1326,
1827-1515. See Contents, pp. |
Xvili.-xxil.
Movable consonants 66-63,
Mutes 19, 21, 22; smooth, middle,
and rough 21; co-ordinate and |
coguate 21-28 ; euphonic changes !
of 71-77; mutes before other
mutes 71-73; bef. σ 74; bef. μ
76-77; vowel bef. mute andj
liquid 100-102; mute verb stems !
460, 461, perf. mid. of 4902-3.
1
f
|
Name or call, vbs. signif. to, w. !
two accus. 1077, w. εἶναι 1079;
w. acc. and gen. 1095; in pass.
w. gen. 10947, 1096.
Nasals 17, 20.
Nature, vowel long or short by ;
98, 100-102. |
Negatives 1607-1610: see Ov and |
M4.
Neglect, vbs. signif., w. gen. 1102. |
Neuter gender 156: see Gender.
Neuter plur. w. sing verb 8992,
neut. pred. adj. 925; neut. sing.
of adj. w. art. 933, 984; neut. !
adj. as cognate accus. 1064; i
ENGLISH INDEX.
neut. accus. of adj. as adverb
367; neut. partic. of impers.
vbs. in accus. absol. 1569; ver-
bal in τέον 1597.
New Testament, Greek of, p. 5.
Nominative case 160, 162; singu-
Jar of 3d decl. formed 209-213 ;
subj. bom. 894, 899, 1043; pred.
nom. 907, w. infin, 927; nom.
in exclam. like voc. 1045; in
appos. w. sentence 915; infin.
as nom. 1517. ΤΊ, nom. w.
sing. verb, gen. neut. 8992, rarely
masc. or fem. 905. Sing. coll.
noun w. plur. verb 900.
Nouns 164-201; name_ includes
only substantives 166, See Con-
tents, p. x.
Number 155, 452; of adject., pe-
culiarities in agreement 920-025.
Numerals 372-388. ὦ
Obey, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 1160.
Object, defined 892; direct and
indirect 882, 1046; direct obj.
(accus.) 1047, as subj. of pass.
1234; internal obj. (cognate)
1051; indirect obj. (dat.) 1157,
1158-1164; gen. as object of
verb 1083, of noun 1085%, of
adject. 1189-1146; double obj.
acc. 1069-1082. Object of mo-
tion, by accus. w. prepos. 1221,
by accus. alone (poetic) 1005.
| Object clauses w. ὅπως aud ful.
indic. 1872; ν΄. subj. and opt.
1874, 1372, in Hom. 1377.
Object genitive 10858.
Objective compounds 884; trans.
aud intrans., accent of 885.
Oblique cases 163.
Omission of augment and redup!.
647-550 ; of subj. nom. 896, 801;
of subj. of infin. 895::"; of an-
tecedeut of rel. 1026; of μά iv
ENGLISH INDEX.
oaths 1068; of ἄν w. opt. 1332;
of protasis 1414; of apodosis
1416, 1420. See Ellipsis.
Open yowels 6; in contraction 35.
Optative 445; pers. endings 552,
730; mood suftix 562, 730 ; for-
mation of 730-745; Aeolic forms
in Attic avr. act. 732, 7&1}; in
contract vbs. (pres. act.) 737; pe-
culiar w-forms 739-742, 745; of
verbs in vupe 743; Jon. aro for
2707778; llom. or 6a for os 781? ;
poriphrasis in perf. 753; reg. perf.
in few verbs 733, 734; 2 pf. in
ony 735. ‘Lenses: not in indir.
disc., pres. and aor. 1271, 1272;
perf. 1273; never fut. 1287; in|
indir. disc. 1280, pres. as impf.
1488 ; future, only in indir. disc. +
1287, or in obj. cl. w. ὅπως 1372,
and rarely in rel, el. of purpose !
1444; w. effect of primary or!
secoud. tense 12702.
General uses 1322, 1323; po-
tential opt. w. ἄν 1327-1334 ; in
final cl. 1365, in obj. cl. w. ὅπως,
fut. 1872; pres. or avr. 1374, in
How. 1377; w. μή after vbs. of
fearing 1378; in proetasis 1387,
13932, 1408, sometimes w. ef xe
(Hom.) 1411; in apod. w, ἄν or
κέ 1408; in cond. rel. clauses
1431", 1436, by assimil. 1439;
in rel. cl. of purpose (chiefly
Hom.) 1443; w. ἕως, etc., unde, |
1400; w. πρίν 1470, 14712; in
indir, discourse, after past. tenses,
by change from subj. or indic. :
14812, 1487, 14972, 1502.
Oratio obliqua: sec Indireet Dis-
course.
Ordinal numerals, 872.
Overlook, vbs, signif. to, w. partic.
1585.
Oxytones 110),
445
Paeons 16273; in Cretic rhythms
1689.
Palatals 16; as mutes 22; en-
phonic changes of 71-77; ν be-
fave 78; pal. verb stems 460, in
perf. mid, 4903,
Paroemiac verse 16763, 1677.
| Paroxytone 110].
' Participle 445 ; formation of 770-
774; decleusion of 301, 354-342;
w. nom. in ous of vhs. in μὲ 564°,
335, in ων of vbs. in w 5654, 335 ;
Aeol. forms jn acs, acoa, ora 783 ;
of pi-forim 342, 508, 773, 774. 792;
accent of 184, 338. Tenses 12k8;
pres. for impf. 1289; aor. not
past 1290, w. λανθάνω, τυγχάνω,
φθάνω 1580, ν΄. περιορῶ etc. 1585,
expr. that iu wh. an action con-
sists 16638; avr. (or perf.) w.
ἔχω as periphr. perf. 1262; perf.
w.w and εἴην as perf. subj. and
opt, 720, 721, 733; fut. of pur-
pose 18834; conditional 15625,
w. ἄν 1308; in gen, absol. 1568 ;
in acc. absol. 1569; partic. alone
in gen. abs. 1568; omission of
ὧν 1571; plur. w. sing. collective
noun 922; w. neut. art. like
infin. w. 76 934. Partic. ν΄. dua,
μεταξύ, εὐθύς, οἷς. 1072; W. καὶ,
καίπερ, οὐδέ, μηδέ 1573; We ὦ
Ws
1574; w. are and οἷον (ola) 1578;
w. ὥσπερ 1576,
Three uses of participle 1547:
attributive 1559-1562, circum.
stantial 1565-1577, supplemen-
tary 1578-1593. See Conteuts,
| op. xxili,
Particular and general supposi-
tions distinguished 1384.
Partiuve genitive 1085%, 1088,
10947, Partitive apposition $14.
| Passive voice 442°, 1233, personal
endings of 652-5384; aor. pass.
ῃ
Ι
I
i
Ι
1
446
w. inflection of act. 5647.
of 1233-1241; subject of 1234,
12401; retains one object from
active constr. 1239; impersonal
pass. constr. 12402, 1241, 8974;
ENGLISH INDEX.
Use | Periphrastic forms: of perf., indic.
4862, subj. 720, 721, opt. 788,
imper. 751; of fut. W. μέλλω
1254 ; of fut. perf. 706.
Perispomena 1103,
w. infin. as subj. 15222; pass. of | Persevere, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
both act. and mid, 1247.
Patronyimics, suffixes of 846, 847,
Pause in verse 1640; cacsura
16422; diaeresis 1643.
Pentameter, elegiac 1670, 1671.
Penthemim (2} feet) 1670.
Penult. 96.
Perceive, vbs. signif. to, w. gen.
1102; w. partic. 1582, 1588.
Perfect tense 447, primary 448;
personal endings 552; redupli-
cation 520-526; Att. redup). 529;
compound forms in subj. and
opt. 720, 721, 733, in 3d pers.
pl. mid. 4862,
First Perfect tense-system 456,
formation of 682; orig. from
vowel stems only 686; modified
vowel of stem 684.
Second Perf. tense-system 456,
of stem 688; How. sec. perfects
691; aspirated sec. perf. 692, |
not in Hom. 694; 2 perf. of μι-
form 508, 697, 804, partic. in
aws or ews 804, 773.
Perf. mid. tense-system 456, ;
formation of stem 698, modif.
vowel of stem 699; σ added to
stem 640, 7027; arac in 3 pers.
plur, (Ion.) 701, 7773,
Syntax: perf. indic. 12508, as
pres. 1263, as vivid future 1264 ;
subj., opt., and infin. (mot in
ind. disc.) 1273; infiu. expr. de-
cision or permanence 1275; im-
perat. (gen. 3 sing. pass.) 1274;
opt. and infin. in ind. disc. 1280;
partic. 1288,
1580.
Person of verb 453 ; agreement w.
subj. in 899; subj. of first or
second pers. omitted 896, third
person 897; pers. of rel. pron.
1020. Personal endings of verb
552, 553.
Personal] pronoun 389-398 ; stems
of 390; omitted as subject 896,
897; of third pers. in Attic 987,
in Hom. and Hdt. 988; substi-
tuted for rel. 1040.
Pherecratic verses 16822-8,
Pity, vbs.expr., w. causal gen.1126,
Place, suffixes denoting 843; ad-
verbs of 292-297, 436, w. gen.
1148; accus. of (whither) 1065;
gen. of (within whieh) 1137;
dat. of (where) 1198, 1197.
: Plato, language of, Ὁ. 4.
formation of 687, modif. vowel ᾿
Please, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 11860.
Pleased, vbs. signif. to be, w.
partic, 1580.
Pluperfect tense 447, 448; in per-
fect tense-systems 456, 4571;
personal endings 552; redupl.
and augment 627, Att. redupl.
529, 583; compound form w.
σαν in 8 pers, pl. 4802, First
Pluperf. act., formed from I perf.
stem 683! ; second from 2 perf.
stem 696, si-forms 697, 804;
form of plup. act. in Hom. and ᾿
Hat. 6832, 7774, in later Attic
0882, Plup. middle 608, 699, w.
aro in 8 pers. pl. (fon.) 701, 777%
Syntax: meaning of plup.
1250*; as imperf. 1263; in cond.
sent. 1307; w. ἄν 1804); cxpr.
ENGLISH INDEX. 447
in infin. by perf. 1285!, by perf.
w. ἄν 1308.
Plural 155, 452; neut. w. sing,
verb 8097; verb w. sing. collect.
noun 900; w. several subjects
connected by and 901; adj. or
relat. w, Several sing. nouns 924,
1021; plur. antec. of ὅστις 1021¢.
Position, vowels long by 99.
Possession, gen. of 1080), 1004),
1143; dat. of 1173.
Possessive pronouns 406-408, 998 ;
w. article 946!, 960, 1002. Pos-
sessive compounds 888. Our
own, your own, etc. 1003.
Potential opt. w. ἄν 1327-1334,
without ἄν 1332, 1353; pot. in-
dic. w. ἄν 1335-1341.
Predicate 800; pred. noun and
adj. w. verbs 907, 918, referring
to omitted subject of infin. 927-
929; noun without article 056 ;
pred. adject. 919, position of w.
art. 971; pred. accus. w. obj.
ace. 1077, 1078; infin. as pred.
nom. 1517.
Prepositions, w. gen., dat., and
accus. 1201; accent when elided
120; anastrophe 116; tmesis
12222; augment of comp. verbs
540-544 ; prepos. as adv. 1199,
12221; in comp. w. gen., dat.,
or acc. 1227, 1182, 1179; omitted
w. rel. 1025; w. rel. by assinuil.
1032 ; w. infin. and article 1546.
Present. tense 447; primary 448,
personal endings 552; tense-
system 456; steu 456, 567, for-
mation of, cight classes of vbs.
669-622: see Classes. Inflec-
tion of pr. indic., common form
628, mi-torm 627; redupl. 652 ;
contracted 492, in opt. 737 ; im-
perat. 746, of u:-form 752-754 ;
infin, 759, 765-769 ; partic. 770,
775, decl. of 334-341. Syntax
of pres. indic. 1280!; historic
1252, 1268; gnomic 1258), 1291 :
as vivid fut. 1264; of attempt
(conative) 1255; of ἥκω and
οἴχομαι as perf. 1256; of εἶμι as
fut. 1257; w, πάλαι etc, 1258;
never w. ἄν or κέ 1232, In dep.
moods: not in indir. disc. 1271,
how disting. from aor. 1272,
from perf. 1273, 1275; in indir.
disc. (opt. and infin.) 1280, as
impf. infin. and opt. 1285; infin.
w. vbs. of hoping etc. 1286; par-
tic. 1288, as impf. part. 1269.
Sce Indicative, Subjunctive, etc.
Price, genitive of 1133.
Primary or principal tenses 448,
1267 ; how far distinguished in
dependent moods 1270.
Primitive words 823, nouns 832-
840, adjectives 849.
Principal parts of verbs 462, of
deponents 463.
Proclitics 136, 137; with accent
188, 139; before an enclitic 1484,
Prohibitions w. μή 1346; w. οὐ μή
1361. ᾿
Pronising, verbs of, w. fut., pres.,
or aor, infin. 1286.
Pronominal adj. and adv. 429-440.
Pronouns 389-428; synt. 985-1041:
see Contents, pp. xi, Xiv., Xv.
Some enclitic 141!-2, w. accent
retained 1443-4, See Personal,
Relative, etc.
Pronunciation, probable ancient
28. See Preface.
Proparaxytones 110],
Properispomena 1102.
Prosecute, vbs, signif. to, w. gen.
and aecus. 1121.
Protasis 1381; forms of 1387;
expr. in partic., adv., etc. 1413;
omitted 1414, 1328, 1338.
445
Prove, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
1588,
Punctuation marks 100,
Pure verbs 461.
Purpose: expr. by final clause
13621; by rel. cl. w. fut. indic.
1442, in Hom. by subj. 1443,
implied in 6]. w. ἕως, πρίν, 1467,
14712; by infin. 1332; by ἐφ᾽ ᾧ
or ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε w. infin. or fut. indie.
1460; by fut. partic. 1563+;
sometimes by gen. (without évexa)
1127, by gen. of infin. 1548.
Quality, nouns denoting 842.
Quantity of syllables 98~104;
shown by accent 1043; inter-
change of 33; relation of to
rhythm 1622-1625,
Questions, direct and indirect
disting. 1475; direct 1600-1604,
of appeal ν΄. subj. 1358; indireet
1805, w. indic. or opt. 1487, w.
subj. or opt. 1490.
Recessive accent 1104,
Reciprocal pronoun 404 ; reflexive
used for 996.
Reduplication of perf. stem 520,
521, 5238, 526, 537, in compounds
640; rarely omitted 550; of 2
aor. (Hom.) 584; of pres. stem
536, 651, 652, of vbs. in pe 794°;
in plpf. 527; Attic, in pf. 529,
in 2 aur, $35.
Reflexive pronouns 401, 998, 994;
used for reciprocal 998; 3d pers.
for Ist or 2d 9095; indirect re-
flexives 987, 988, 992.
Relation, adject. denoting 850,
851); dat. of 1172.
Relative pronouns 421-427, Ho-
meric forms 428; pronom. adj.
429, 430, adverbs 436; relation
to antecedent 1019; antec. ar.
ENGLISH INDEX.
1026 ; assimilation of ref. to case
of antec. 1031, of antec. to case
of rel. 1035; assim. in rel. adv,
1084; attraction of antec. 1037,
joined w. assim. 1038; rel. not
repeated in new case 1040; rel.
as demoustr. 1023; in exclam.
1039. Relative and temporal
sentences 1425-1474: see Con-
tents, p. xxi.
Release, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1117,
Remeber, vbs. signif. to, w. gen,
1102, w. partic. 1688.
Rewinding, vbs. of, w. two acc,
1068, w. ace. and gen. 1106.
Remove, vbs. signif. to, w. Sen.
1117,
Repent, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
1580.
Represent, vbs. signif. to, w. pars
tic. 1582.
Reproach, vbs. expr., w. dat. 1160,
Resemblance, words implying, w.
dat. 1175.
Respect, dative of 1172.
Restrain, vbs. siguif. to, w. gen.
1117.
Result, nouns denot. 887; expr.
by ὥστε τ΄. infin. and indie.
1449-1451,
Revenge, verbs expr., w. causal
gen, 1126,
Rhythm and metre, how related
1621-1628; rising and falling
rhythms 1648. See Anapaestic,
Dactyie, Jaurbie, etc.
Rhythinieal series 1637.
Rising and falling rhythms 1648. .
Romaic Janguage, p. 5.
Root and stem defined 152, 153.
Rough breathing 11-15.
Rough mutes 21, never doubled
681,
Rule, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1109;
τοὺς dat. (Hon2.) 1164.
ENGLISH INDEX.
449
Sampi, obsolete letter 3; as nume- | Sophocles, lansuage of, p. 4.
ral 372, 384,
Satisfy, vbs. signif. to, w. dat.
1160.
Saying, verbs of, w. two accus.
1073, constr. in indirect dis-
course 1523.
Second aorist, perfect, etc., 449.
Second aorist tense-system 456;
stem 675-681.
Second passive tense-system 400 ;
stems 712-716,
Second perfect tense-system 486 ;
stems 687-697.
Secondary (or historical) tenses
448, 1267; how far distinguished
in depend. moods 1270.
See, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. (ind.
disc.) 1588, (not in ind, disc.)
1582, 1583.
Semivowels 20.
Sentence 890.
Separation, gen, of 1117, 1141.
Septuagint version of Old Testa
ment, p. 5.
Serving, vbs. of, w. dat. 1160.
Sharing, vbs. of, w. gen. 10977.
Short vowels 5, 100, 102, 103 ; syl-
jables, time of 1626.
Show, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
1588.
Sibilant (σ) 20.
Sicily, Dorians in, p. 3.
Similes (Homeric), aor. in 1294.
Simple and Compound Words 822.
Singular number 145, 452; sine.
vb. μ΄. neut. p). subj. 899%, rarely
w. masc. or fem. pl. subj. 905,
1020 ; several sing. uouus w. pl. !
adj. 924.
Smell, vbs. signif. to, w. gen.
1102; ὄξω w. two gen. 1107.
Smooth breathing 11, 12. Smooth
Tuutes 21,
Sonants and surds 24.
e. gen. of 1130.
oe al of, W. ace. 1082.
Spare, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1102,
Specification, accus. of 1088.
Spi 5 20.
crane ne for anapaest 1675 ;
for dacty] 1068; for iambus or
trochee 1650, 1657. Spondaic
hexameter verse 1669.
Spurious dipbtbongs εἰ and ov 8;
how written and sounded 27,
982
leat and root 182, 158. Strong
and weak stems 81, 572-575,
642, Verb stem 458, 459. Agee
ongon. Stems, mute an
ἐπα stems, etc., 460, 401].
Tense stews 456, Present stem:
see Present. ᾿
Strong and weak vowels inter-
᾿ oD
anged 31.
Sane pon of finite verb 894,
omitted 890, 897; of infin. 896),
omitted 8905; ἘΠ ere
i . agreem. of w. finite
ee ‘of passive 1293, 1234.
ive genitive 10852. ;
445; pers. endings
long thematic vowel
8; formation of 719-
729; peculiar p-forms 723-727 ;
of vbs, in γυμι 728; Tonic forms
780, short them. vowcl in Hom.
780), uncontracted forms 780?,
7981, Hom. forms in 2 aor. act.
788" ; periphrasis in perf. le
721, τοῦ. perf. forms rare 720,
799. Tenses: pres. and aor.
1271, 12723 perf. 1273. ;
seneral uses 1920, 152] ; in
exhortations 1844; in prohibi-
tions (80Γ.) 1346 ; w. μή, expr.
fear or anxiety (Hoin.) 3348 5 W.
μή or μὴ οὐ in cautious asser-
Subject
Subjunctive
552, 718;
#/,- 5632, ΤΊ
7
450
tions or negations 1350; rarcly
indep. w. ὅπως μή 1834; in Hom.
like fut. indic. 1855, w. κέ or
ἄν 13856; in questions of appeal
1358, retained in indir, questions
1480; w. οὐ μή, aS emph. fut,
1360, sometimes in prohib. 1361;
in final clauses 1365, also after
past tenses 1969, w. ἄν or κέ
1367 ; in object cl. w. ὅπως 1874,
w. ἄν 1376, in Hom. w. ὅπως or
ὡς 1377; w. μή after vbs. of
fearing 1378; in protasis w. ἐάν
etc. 1382, 1387, 1393}, 1408,
woe (ill poetry) without ἄν or
κέ 1398, 1406; in cond. rel. cl.
143], 1434, by assim, 1439; in
rel. cl. of purpose (Hom.) 1448 ;
w, ws etc. until, 146d, without
ἄν 1466 ; ΜΝ, πρίν 1470, 14712; in
indir, discourse changed to opt.
after past tenscs 14812, 14972,
1502.
Subscript, iota 10.
Substantive 166; see Noun.
Suffixes 826; tense 661; optative
suffix 562, 730,
Superlative degree 330, 357.
Suppositions, general and particu-
lar distivguished 1884.
Surds and sonauts 24.
Surpassing, vbs. of, w. gen. 1120.
Swearing, particles of, w. accus.
1066.
Syllaba anceps at end of verse:
1686, 16382,
Syllabic auguient 5117, 513; of |
plpf. 527; before vowel 837-
539; omitted 547, 549,
Syllables 96 ; division of 97; quan-
tity of 98-104; long and short
in verse 1626.
Syncope 65, 66, 67; syncopated
nouns 273-279, verb stems 650.
Syncope in verse 1632.
ENGLISH INDEX.
: Synecdoche (or specification), ace.
| of 1009.
' Synizesis 47.
; Systems, tense 455, 456. In verse
(anapaestic, trochaic, and iam.
bic) 1654, 1666, 1677.
Taking hold, vbs. signif., w. gen.
1099, w. acc. and gen. 1100.
Taste, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1102,
Tau-class of verbs (J1I.) 576.
Teaching, vbs. of w. two accus.
1069, 1076.
Temporal augment 5112, 515, 533 ;
of diphthongs 518, 519; omis-
sion of 547-549. ‘Yemporal sen-
tences: see Relative.
‘ense stems 455-458 ; simple and
complex 557, 560; simple 558;
complex 559 ; formation of 566-
622, 600-716 ; table of 717.
Tense suffixes 561.
Tense systems 435, 456, 469. See
Preset, Future, οἷο,
Tenses 447; relations of 1249;
primary (or principal) and sec-
ondary (or historical) 448, 1267 ;
of indie. 1250-1266 ; of depend.
moods 1271-1287; of partic.
1268-1290; gnomic 1291-1298 ;
iterative 1296-1208. See Pres-
ent, Imperfect, etc.
Tetrameter 1646; trochaic 1651,
lame (Hipponactean) 1652 ; iam-
bie 1664; dactylic 16745; ana-
paestic 16764,
Thematic vowel (%-) 5611;
(“[q-) in subj. 6013,
Thesis 1621; not Greek θέσις 1621
(foot note).
Threats, vbs. expressing, w. dat.
1160.
Thucydides, language of, p. 4.
Time, adj. denoting 853; accus.
of (extent) 1062; gen. of (with-
long
ENGLISH
in which) 1136; dat. of 1192-
1195 ; expr. by partic. 1563).
Tmesis 12227, 1223.
Tragedy, iambic trimeter of 1658-
1662.
Transitive verbs 893, 1232.
Trial of, vbs. signif. to make, w.
gen. 1099. ἱ
Tribrach 1627]; for trochee or:
fambus 1680, 163), 1650, 1657.
Trimeter 1646; iambic (acat.):
1658-1661, in English 1662, ;
laine (Hipponactean) 1663 ; tro-
chaic 1653; dactylic 16742.
Tripody 1647; trochaic 165312; |
iambic 16652, :
Trochee 10271, Trochaic rhythm
1650-1686 ; systems 1654.
Trust, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 1160.
INDEX. 451
Verbs, conjugation and formation
of 441-821: see Contents, pp.
xi.-xiii. Eight classes of 58:
see Classes. Syntax of 1230.
1899: see Contents, pp. xvii.-
xxly. ᾿
Verbs in μὲ, two classes of 502.
Verses 1620, 1638, 1645-1649; cat-
alectic and acatalectic 1639.
Vocative case 160, 161; sing. of 3
decl. 219-223; in addresses 1044.
Voices 441; uses of the 1230-1248.
See Active, Middle, Passive.
Vowels 5; open and close 6;
changes of 20-33; euphony of
34 ; lengthening of 29, 30; inter-
change in quantity of 33. Vowel
declension (1, 2) 165 (see 206).
Vowel stems of verbs 460.
Unclothe, verbs signif. to, w. two: Want, vbs. signif., w. gen. 1112-
acc. 1069. ; 1116.
Understand, vbs. signif. to, w. ace. ; Weak and strong vowels inter-
1104. i changed 81.
Union ete., words implying, w.| Weary, vbs. ‘signif. to be, with
dat. 1175, | partic. 1580.
! Whole, gen. of (partitive) 10857.
Value, genitive of 1138.
Vau 3: see Digamma.
Verb stem 45%; relation of to
present stem οὔτι SUS. ἶ
Verbals (or Primitives) $25. Ver-!
bal nouns and adj. w. object. |
gen. 10853, 1139, 1140, w. object
accus. 1050. Verbals in -ros and
-reos 445, 770; jin -reos and -τεέον
1594-1599. |
Wishes, expr. by opt. 1907; by
second. tenses of indice. 1511;
by ὥφελον w. infin, 1512; by
infin, 1537; negative μή 1610.
Wonder at, vbs. signif. to, w. gen.
1102, w. causal gen. 1126.
Wondering. vbs. of, ν΄. εἰ 1423;
sometimes w. ὅτι 1424.
Xenophon, language of, p. 4.
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11